Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 284

Operation Guide

1 5

ThankyouforpurchasingtheKorgKRONOS/KRONOSX.Tohelpyougetthemostoutofyournewinstrument, pleasereadthismanualcarefully.

About this manual


The owners manuals and how to use them
References to the KRONOS and KRONOS X
ThesemanualsapplytoboththeKRONOSandthe KRONOSX,collectivelyreferredtoastheKRONOS. Thefrontpanelandrearpanelillustrationsshowthe KRONOSX61keymodel,buttheyapplyidenticallyto theothermodels. ForinformationonthecurrentLCDpage,pressand releasetheHELPbutton. FormoredetailsonusingtheHelpsystem,seeHELP buttononpage 3. *Englishlanguageonly.

Supplementary guides
Voice Name List
TheVoiceNameListlistsallofthesoundsandsetups thatareintheKRONOSwhenitisshippedfromthe factory,includingPrograms,Combinations, Multisamples,DrumSamples,DrumKits,KARMAGEs, WaveSequences,DrumTrackPatterns,TemplateSongs, andEffectPresets.

Three manuals
TheKRONOSincludesthreeownersmanuals: QuickStartGuide OperationGuide ParameterGuide AllofthesemanualsareavailableasPDFsonAccessory Disc2,andareincludedintheonboardHelpsystem.A printedversionoftheQuickStartGuideisalsoincluded.

Updating and restoring the KRONOS


Thisdocumentcontainsinformationonupdatingand restoringtheKRONOSsoftware.Itsprovidedseparately asaconvenience;allofitsinformationmayalsobefound intheParameterGuide.

Quick Start Guide


Pleasereadthisfirst.Itintroducesallofthebasicfeatures oftheKRONOS,andisdesignedtogetyouupand runningquickly.

New features in KRONOS software version 1.5


Thisdocumentprovidesanoverviewofthenewfeatures inKRONOSsoftwareversion1.5.Itsprovided separatelyasaconvenience;allofitsinformationmay alsobefoundintheOperationGuide.

Operation Guide
Putsimply,theOperationGuideisdesignedtoanswer thequestion,HowdoIdothis? Itexplainsthenamesandfunctionsofeachpartofthe KRONOS,basicoperation,anoverviewofeachmode, howtoeditsounds,recordonthesequencer,sample,and soon.Thisguidealsoexplainsthebasicsofeffects, KARMA,DrumTrack,WaveSequences,andDrumKits. Finally,italsocontainsatroubleshootingguideand supplementalinformationsuchasspecifications.

Conventions in this manual


Abbreviations for the manuals: OG, PG, VNL
Inthedocumentation,referencestothemanualsare abbreviatedasfollows. QS:QuickStartGuide OG:OperationGuide PG:ParameterGuide VNL:TheVoiceNameList

Parameter Guide
TheParameterGuideisdesignedtoanswerthequestion, Whatdoesthisdo? Organizedbymodeandpage,theParameterGuide includesinformationoneachandeveryparameterinthe KRONOS.

Symbols

, Note, Tips

PDF versions
TheKRONOSPDFmanualsaredesignedforeasy navigationandsearching.TheyincludeextensivePDF contentsinformation,whichgenerallyappearsonthe sideofthewindowinyourPDFreaderandletsyoujump quicklytoaspecificsection.Allcrossreferencesare hyperlinks,sothatclickingonthemautomaticallytakes youtothesourceofthereference.

Thesesymbolsrespectivelyindicateacaution,aMIDI relatedexplanation,asupplementarynote,oratip.

Example screen displays


Theparametervaluesshownintheexamplescreensof thismanualareonlyforexplanatorypurposes,andmay notnecessarymatchthevaluesthatappearintheLCD screenofyourinstrument.

MIDI-related explanations
CC#isanabbreviationforControlChangeNumber. InexplanationsofMIDImessages,numbersinsquare brackets[]alwaysindicatehexadecimalnumbers.

On-board Help system*


TheHELPbuttongivesyoubuiltin,contextsensitive accesstotheusermanuals,rightfromthefrontpanel. Forinformationonanyfrontpanelbutton,knob,slider, orrealtimecontroller,justholddownHELPandthen pressthebuttonormovethecontrollerinquestion.

iii

Contents
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
MIDISettings...............................64 AlteringProgramstofitwithin a Combination ..65 Effects .....................................66 AutomaticallyimportingaCombination into Sequencer mode .........................67 Savingyouredits ............................67

Introduction to KRONOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Front and rear panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Frontpanel ................................. 1 Rearpanel .................................. 8 TouchViewuserinterface .................... 10

Creating songs (Sequencer mode) . . . .69


Sequencer overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
AbouttheKRONOSsequencer ...............69 Sequencermodestructure ....................69

Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
AbouttheKRONOSmodes.................. 13 AbouttheKRONOSPCMmemory ........... 16 Aboutpolyphony ........................... 16 Basicoperations ............................ 17

Playing Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Playback ...................................72 ThecontrolsurfaceinSequencermode .........74

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Turningthepoweron/off.................... 20 Connections................................ 20

MIDI recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Preparationsforrecording ....................76 RecordingMIDIinrealtime ..................78 MIDIsteprecording .........................81 RecordingthesoundofaCombinationor Program 82 RecordingmultipleMIDItracksfrom an external sequencer ........................84 RecordingSystemExclusiveevents ............85 Recordingpatterns ..........................86 Otherwaystorecord.........................88

Update information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Newfeaturesinsoftwareversion2.0 .......... 25 Newfeaturesinsoftwareversion1.5 .......... 25

Playing and editing Programs . . . . . . . .27


Playing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SelectingPrograms.......................... 27 UsingControllers ........................... 31 UsingtheChordPads ....................... 35 UsingChordmode.......................... 36

Audio recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Audiorecordingoverview ....................89 Audioinputsettingsandrecordingsourceselection 90 Recordingprocedure.........................93 Othervariationsofaudiotrackrecording .......99 PlacingaWAVEfileinanaudiotrack .........101

Easy Program Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39


Quickeditsusingtheknobs,sliders, and switches. 39

Detailed Program Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43


EditingHD1Programs...................... 43 UsingLFOsandEnvelopes(EGs) ............. 45 UsingAlternateModulation(AMS) and the AMS Mixers ........................ 47 ControllingPitch ........................... 48 UsingFilters ............................... 49 UsingtheAmpsection ...................... 51 UsingEXi.................................. 53 UsingVectorSynthesis ...................... 55 Effects..................................... 56 AutomaticallyimportingaProgram into Sequencer mode ........................ 56

Song editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103


Songs.....................................103 MIDITracks ...............................103 CommontoMIDItracksandaudiotracks .....104 AudioTracks ..............................105

Using RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/Record) . . 106


CreatingRPPRdata.........................106 RPPRplayback .............................107 RecordinganRPPRperformance .............107

Sampling in Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Saving your Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Other notes about Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . 111
KRONOSsequencerfileformats..............111 TheComparefunction ......................111 MemoryProtect ............................112 AboutMIDI ...............................112

Playing and editing Combinations . . . .57


Playing Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SelectingCombinations...................... 57

Easy Combination editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60


ChangingtheProgramswithinaCombi ....... 60 Adjustingthemix........................... 60 EasyKARMAediting ....................... 61

Set Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113


Set List Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Selecting and playing sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
SelectingSetLists...........................114 SelectingSlots..............................115

Detailed Combination editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62


Combinationoverview ...................... 62 Layers,Splits,andVelocitySwitches .......... 63

iv

Editing Set Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116


Selectingandrearrangingsounds ........... 116 DetailedSetListediting .................... 117 SetListsandtheControlSurface............. 118

Connecting to computers via USB Ethernet and FTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Using Wave Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
WaveSequenceOverview................... 168 ProgrammingBasics ........................ 168 Adjustingthesoundofanindividualstep .....169 UsingrhythmicWaveSequences ............. 171 Creatingsmooth,evolvingtimbres ........... 173 ModulatingWaveSequences ................174 SavingWaveSequences .....................175

Smooth Sound Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120


Overview................................. 120 UsingSmoothSoundTransitions ............ 120

Sampling (Open Sampling System) . . 123


Sampling overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
AboutsamplingontheKRONOS ............ 123

Using Drum Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176


DrumKitOverview ........................176 Beforeyoustartediting ................... 176 EditingDrumKits .......................... 177 SavingDrumKits ..........................179

Preparations for sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126


AudioSettings ............................ 126

Sampling and editing in Sampling mode . . . . 132


Creatingmultisampleindexesand sampling P0: Recording ............................. 133 Basicexamplesofsampling................. 135 Editingloops.............................. 139 UsingTimeSlice........................... 141 Samplewaveformediting................... 144 Multisampleediting ....................... 145 SamplingfromanAudioCD ................ 145 Saving,convertingtoPrograms,andComparing.. 146

Loading & saving data, and creating CDs. 181


Saving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Overview ................................. 181 Writingtointernalmemory .................. 182 Savingtodisks,CDs,andUSBmedia ......... 186

Loading data from disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190


LoadingSongs,sounds,samples, and KARMA GEs together...................190 Loadingindividualbanksfroma.PCGfile..... 193 Loadingdatabyindividualitemorbank ......193

Sampling in Program and Combination modes. . . 148


Overview................................. 148 ResamplingaKARMAphraseinProgrammode.. 148 AutoSamplingSetup ...................... 149 MixingaKARMAdrumphrasewith a live guitar input, and samplingtheresult.... 149 Samplingaguitarfromtheaudioinputs, while listeningtoaKARMAdrumphrase .... 150

Creating and playing audio CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195


CreatingaudioCDs......................... 195 PlayingaudioCDs.......................... 197

Other disk operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198


Settingthedateandtime .................... 198

Sampling in Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151


InTrackSampling ......................... 151 ResamplingasongtocreateaWavefile ...... 152

Using Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199


Effects overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Effectsbasics...............................199 EffectI/O .................................. 200 Effectsineachmode........................200

User Sample Banks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits . . . 157


Global mode overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
BasicSetup ............................... 158 Globalaudiosettings....................... 160 MIDIsettings ............................. 160 Pedalandothercontrollersettings........... 161 Creatinguserscales ........................ 162 SettingCategoryNamesforPrograms, Combinations,andKARMA ................ 163

Effects selection and routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202


UsingeffectsinPrograms ................... 202 UsingeffectsinCombinationsandSongs ...... 204 UsingeffectsinSamplingmode ..............206 Usingeffectswiththeaudioinputs ........... 207

Detailed effects editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209


Dynamicmodulation(Dmod) ................ 209 MIDI/TempoSync .......................... 209 CommonFXLFO........................... 210 EffectPresets .............................. 211

Automatically loading sample data . . . . . . . . . 164


UsingtheKSCAutoLoadlisttoselect which samples to load...................... 164 Creatingandsaving.KSCfiles............... 165

Using KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213


Overview - What is KARMA?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
ThestructureofKARMA ....................213

Performing with KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217


PerformingwithKARMAinProgrammode ... 217

PerformingwithKARMAinCombinationmode.. 220

Editing KARMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223


EditingKARMAinProgrammode ........... 223 EditingKARMAinCombinationmode ....... 227

Using KARMA in Sequencer mode . . . . . . . . . . . 232


AutoSongSetup........................... 232 RecordingusingKARMA(singletrackrecording) 233 Multitrackrecordingusing settings copied from a Combination .......... 234

Synchronizing KARMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235


Synchronizationbasics ..................... 235 TheQuantizeTriggerparameter ........... 235 Slaveoperation ............................ 236 Masteroperation .......................... 236

F(FileFront) ..............................259 I(IllegalIndex) ............................260 H.........................................261 K .........................................261 M(MasterMultisample) ....................261 N(NodataNotenoughsongmemory) .......262 O(ObeycopyrightrulesOscillator)...........264 P(PatternProgram) ........................264 R(RearsampleRoot).......................265 S(SampleSource) ..........................265 T(TheclockTrack) .........................266 U(UnabletocreatedirectoryUSBHub).......266 W(Wave) .................................267 Y(You)....................................267 TypesofmediasupportedbytheKRONOS ....268 OperationsthattheKRONOS can perform on media .......................268 Restoringthefactorysettings.................269

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Using the Drum Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
WhatistheDrumTrack? ................... 237

Performing with the Drum Track . . . . . . . . . . . . 238


UsingtheDrumTrackinProgrammode...... 238 UsingtheDrumTrackinCombinationmode .. 240

Drum Track settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241


DrumTracksettingsinProgrammode ....... 241 DrumTracksettingsinCombinationmode.... 242 DrumTracksettingsinSequencermode...... 242 UsingKARMAandtheDrumTracktogether.. 243 SynchronizingtheDrumTrack .............. 244

Creating Drum Track patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245


Preparingauserpattern.................... 245 ConvertingaSequencerpattern to a Drum Track pattern .................... 245

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Powersupply ............................. 247 LCDscreen ............................... 247 Audioinputandoutput .................... 248 ProgramsandCombinations ................ 249 Songs .................................... 250 SetLists .................................. 251 Sampling ................................. 251 KARMA .................................. 252 DrumTrack ............................... 253 Vector .................................... 253 DrumKits ................................ 253 WaveSequences ........................... 253 Effects.................................... 254 MIDI ..................................... 254 Disks,CDs,andUSBMedia ................. 254 Otherproblems............................ 255

Error and confirmation messages . . . . . . . . . . . 256


A(ADCAreYouSure) ..................... 256 B(Buffer)................................. 256 C(CantcalibrateCompleted)............... 256 D(DestinationDisk) ....................... 257 E(ErrorExceeded) ........................ 258

vi

vii

Introduction to KRONOS
Front and rear panels Front panel
4. Disk Access Indicator 1. Volume 2. Control Surface 3. Data Entry 5. Mode 6. Utility 7. Bank Select

8. KARMA 9. Vector Joystick 10. Drum Track 11. SW 1&2 12. Joystick 13. Ribbon 19. TouchView Display

14. Headphone Jack

15. Exit

16. Sequencer

18. Sampling

17. Tempo

1. MAIN VOLUME knob


ThisadjuststhevolumeofthemainL/Raudiooutputs, aswellasthevolumeoftheheadphonejack. Itdoesnotaffectanyoftheotheraudiooutputs, includingS/P DIF,individualoutputs14,ortheUSB output.

CONTROL ASSIGN buttons


Asexplainedbelow,youcanusethefrontpanel CONTROLASSIGNbuttonstoswitchbetweenthe variouscontrolsurfacefunctions.Youcanalsoview andeditthecontrolsurfacesettingsontheLCDscreen (P0ControlSurfacepageineachmode).

TIMBRE/TRACK
TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouusethecontrolsurfaceto adjustthevolume,pan,EQ,andsendlevelsforOSC 1/2,EXi1/2,ortheDrumTrackinProgrammode,the currentMultisampleinSamplemode,andeachofthe 16TimbresorTracksinCombiandSequencemodes. TheLEDstotherightoftheswitchshowwhether yourecurrentlyeditingTimbres(orTracks)18or916; presstheTIMBRE/TRACKbuttontotogglebetween thetwo.

2. Control Surface
TheControlSurfaceisthesetof9sliders,8knobs,and 16switchestotheleftoftheLCDscreen.Itlookslikea mixer,butcandoavarietyofthingssuchasediting sounds,controllingKARMA,andsendingMIDI messagestoexternaldevices.Youcanfreelychange backandforthbetweenthedifferentfunctionswithout losinganyofyouredits.

Introduction to KRONOS

IfyouswitchtooneoftheotherControlAssignmodes, andthengobacktoTIMBRE/TRACK,itwill automaticallyreturntothepreviouslyselectedgroup (18or916).

Toresetasinglecontrol,holddownRESET CONTROLSandthenmoveaControlSurfaceslideror knob,pressoneofthecontrolsurfacebuttons,ormove theVectorJoystick. Toresetallofthesliders,knobs,andswitchesofthe currentCONTROLASSIGNmodeatonce,holddown RESETCONTROLSandthenpressthecurrentlylit CONTROLASSIGNbuttonagain. Youcanalsoresetalloftheslidersandswitchesinthe KARMAModulebyholdingRESETCONTROLSand thenpressingtheKARMAMODULECONTROL button.Similarly,toresetasingleKARMAScene,hold RESETCONTROLSandpressanyoftheSCENE buttons. Finally,youcanalsousethistoclearallsolos,by holdingRESETCONTROLSandthenpressingthe SOLObutton. Formoreinformation,seeRESETCONTROLSon page 22oftheParameterGuide.

AUDIO
AUDIOletsyouusethecontrolsurfacetoadjustthe volume,play/mutestatus,solo,pan,andsendlevelsof theanalog,S/P DIF,andUSBaudioinputs.In Sequencermode,youcanalsochoosetocontrolaudio tracks18(HDR18)or916(HDR916). AswithTIMBRE/TRACK,ifyouswitchtooneofthe otherControlAssignmodes,andthengobackto AUDIO,itwillautomaticallyreturntothepreviously selectedgroup(Inputs,HDR18orHDR916).

EXT
EXT(External)letsyouusethecontrolsurfaceto transmitMIDImessagestoexternalMIDIdevices.

RT KNOBS/KARMA
RTKNOBS/KARMAletsyoumodulatesoundsand effectswiththeknobs,andcontrolKARMAwiththe slidersandswitches.

SOLO button
ThisappliesonlywhenCONTROLASSIGNissetto TIMBRE/TRACKorAUDIO.IttogglestheSELECT buttonsbetweenselectingthecurrentOscillator, Timbre,Track,orAudioInput(whenSOLOisoff)or soloingthechannel(whenSOLOison). FormoreinformationonSOLOinthevariousmodes, see: Programs:SOLOswitchandSELECTswitches13 onpage 24oftheParameterGuide Combinations:SoloswitchandSelectswitches18 onpage 430oftheParameterGuide Sequencer:SoloswitchandSelectswitches1/98/16 onpage 536oftheParameterGuide

TONE ADJ/EQ
TONEADJ(ToneAdjust)givesyouhandsonaccessto soundediting,usingthesliders,knobs,andswitches. InCombiandSequencemodes,italsoletsyouedit ProgramswithinthecontextoftheCombiorSong, withoutmakinganychangestotheoriginalProgram data. EQisavailableonlyinSetLists.Thisisanineband graphicEQappliedtothesoundafterTFX2,which tailorsthesoundfromthemainstereooutputs (includingtheanalogL/Routputs,S/PDIF,andUSB). YoucanusethisEQtocompensatefortheacoustic environmentofaspecificcluborotherperformance venue.Theslidersaremappedtotheninebandsofthe EQ,forquickandintuitiveadjustments.

3. Data entry
WhenyouveselectedaparameterontheTouchView display,youcanedititusinganyofthefourfront paneldataentrycontrols: TheVALUEslider TheInc andDec buttons TheVALUEdial Thenumerickeypad

More information on the Control Surface


FormoreinformationonhowtheControlSurface worksinthedifferentmodes,see: Programmode:09:ControlSurfaceonpage 21 oftheParameterGuide Combimode:09:ControlSurfaceonpage 428of theParameterGuide Sequencemode:09:ControlSurfaceonpage 534 oftheParameterGuide

MIXER KNOBS button


ThisappliesonlywhenCONTROLASSIGNissetto TIMBRE/TRACKorAUDIO.Ittogglestheknobs betweencontrollingthepanofallchannelsor controllingthepan,EQ,andsendsofthecurrently selectedchannel.

RESET CONTROLS button


ThisfeatureletsyouresettheVectorJoysticktothe centerposition,orresetanyoftheControlSurface sliders,knobs,orswitchestotheirsavedvalue.

Front and rear panels Front panel

VALUE slider
Usethistoedittheselectedparameters value.Thiscontrolisconvenientformaking largechangestothevalue,suchasmoving quicklytotheminimumormaximum setting. YoucanalsousetheVALUEsliderasa modulationsource,butonlywhenthe followingaretrue: YoureontheProgrammodeP0Main page,andthebigProgramnameis selected,or YoureontheCombinationmodeP0 ProgSelect/Mixerpage,andthebig Combinationnameisselected. YoureontheSetListP0Playpage. Inthesecasesonly,theVALUEslidersendsMIDI CC#18,andcanbeusedasamodulationsource.

4. DISK access indicator


ThisLEDlightsupwhendataisbeingsavedtoorread fromtheinternaldisk. NeverturnoffthepowerwhilethisLEDislit. Doingsocancauseallorpartofthedataonthedisk tobelost,ormaycausemalfunctionssuchasdisk damage.

5. MODE buttons
KRONOShassevendifferentoperationalmodes,each oneoptimizedforaspecificsetoffunctions.These buttonsselectthecurrentmode. EachbuttonhasanLED,whichlightsuptoshowthe modeyouveselected.

Inc

and Dec

buttons SET LIST button


ThisselectsSetListmode.SetListsmakeitsimpleto playandorganizeanyofthesoundsloadedintothe KRONOS,withoutregardforwhatbanktheyrestored inorwhethertheyrePrograms,Combinations,oreven Songs.

Theseareusedtoincreaseordecreasetheparameter valuebyindividualsteps.Theyreconvenientfor makingfineparameteradjustments.

VALUE dial
Usethisdialtoedittheselectedparametersvalue. Thiscontrolisconvenientwhenyouwanttoscroll throughaverylonglistofselections.

COMBI button
ThisselectsCombinationmode,forplayingand editingcomplexsplitsandlayersofPrograms.

PROG button
ThisselectsProgrammode,forplayingandediting basicsounds.

SEQ button 0-9, , ., and ENTER buttons


Thesebuttonsareconvenientwhenyouknowthe exactvaluethatyouwanttoenter.Usethe09,,and decimal(.)buttonstoenterthevalue,andthenpress theENTERbuttontoconfirmtheentry. Thebuttoninvertsthesign(+/)oftheparameter value;thedecimal(.)buttoninsertsadecimal,for enteringfractionalvalues. ThisselectsSequencermode,forrecording,playing, andeditingaudioandMIDItracks.

SAMPLING button
ThisselectsSamplingmode,forrecordingandediting audiosamplesandmultisamples.

GLOBAL button
ThisselectsGlobalmode,formakingoverallsettings, editingWaveSequencesandDrumKits,andmore.

Special functions of the ENTER button


ENTERhasafewspecialfunctionswhenitispressed incombinationwithotherbuttons. Wheneveranonscreenparameterletsyouentera musicalnote(suchasG4orC#2),oravelocitylevel, youcanenterthenoteorvelocitydirectlybyholding downENTERwhileplayinganoteonthekeyboard. ByholdingdowntheENTERbuttonwhileyoupressa numericbutton(09),youcanselectuptotenmenu commandsfromthecurrentpage. InProgramandCombinationmodes,youcanhold downtheENTERbuttonandpresstheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEbuttontousetheAutoSongSetup function.ThisimportsthecurrentProgramorCombi intoSequencemodeforquickandeasyrecording.

DISK button
ThisselectsDiskmode,forsavingandloadingdatato andfromtheinternaldiskorexternalUSB2.0storage devices.YoucanalsocreateaudioCDsusingaUSB CDRdrive(notincluded).

6. UTILITY buttons
HELP button
TheHELPbuttongivesyoubuiltin, contextsensitiveaccesstotheuser manuals,rightfromthefrontpanel.

Introduction to KRONOS

Forinformationonanyfrontpanelbutton,knob, slider,orrealtimecontroller,justholddownHELP andthenpressthebuttonormovethecontrollerin question. ForinformationonthecurrentLCDpage,pressand releasetheHELPbutton. Whilethehelppageisonthescreen,youcantouchany oftheonscreenlinks(highlightedinbluetext)for moreinformation.Youcanscrollthroughthetextby usingtheonscreenscrollbars,pressingtheIncand Decbuttons,orspinningtheValuedial. ThetopoftheHelppagehasbreadcrumblinks, whichshowthehierarchyofpagesabovethecurrent one.Touchanyoftheselinkstojumptothe correspondingpage. Thebackwardsandforwardsbuttonsfunctionlikethe similarbuttonsonastandardwebbrowser.Ifyouuse linkstojumpbetweenpages,youcanthenusethe backwardsandforwardsbuttonstomovethroughthe pagesyouvealreadyviewed. TheContentspageletsyouaccessanypartoftheHelp system,includingalmostallofthetextandgraphicsin boththeParameterandOperationGuides.TheIndex containsashorterlistoflinkstoimportantarticles. Toclosethehelpdisplay,justpresstheHELPbutton again,presstheEXITbutton,orpresstheonscreen Donebutton.

General MIDI banks


SelectingGeneralMIDIProgrambanksisalittle differentfromselectingotherbanks.Eachtimeyou presstheINTGbutton,thebankwillsteptothenext GM(2)bankorGMdrumbankinthefollowingorder: G,g(1),g(2)g(8),g(9),g(d),G,g(1),etc.

Whats in each bank?


FordetailsonthecontentsoftheProgrambanks,see Programbankcontentsonpage 27.Fordetailsonthe Combibanks,seeCombinationbankcontentson page 57.

8. KARMA buttons
KARMAstandsforKay AlgorithmicRealtimeMusic Architecture.Itsanimmensely powerfulrecordingandlive performancetool,whichcan provideawiderangeofmusical effectsincluding: Arpeggiation Drumandinstrumentgrooves ComplexCCgestures(asifit wasautomaticallymoving knobsorjoysticksforyou) Musicalphrasegeneration Gatedandchoppeddanceproductioneffects Anycombinationoftheabove andmuchmore.

COMPARE button
UsethisbuttontocomparethesoundoftheProgram orCombinationthatyouarecurrentlyeditingwiththe saved,uneditedversionofthesound.Youcanalsouse thisbuttontomakebeforeandaftercomparisons whenrecordingoreditinginSequencermode.

ON/OFF button
ThisswitchesKARMAonandoff.Aswiththeother KARMAbuttons,thebuttonsLEDwilllightupto showyouthatitisturnedon.

7. BANK SELECT buttons


Usethesebuttonstochangebankswhenselecting ProgramsorCombinations.TheLEDsinthebuttons lightuptoshowthecurrentbank.

LATCH button
WhenLATCHisturnedon,KARMAwillcontinueto playevenafteryouvestoppedholdingnotesonthe keyboardorMIDIIn. Thisisconvenientwhenyouwanttoplayontopofa KARMAgeneratedgroove,forinstance.

MODULE CONTROL button


InProgrammode,thesebuttonsselecttheProgram bank.TheyareactiveonlyonthePlaypages. InCombinationmode,thesebuttonshavetwo functions: WhenyoureselectingCombinations,theychoose theCombinationbank. WhenyoureassigningaProgramtoatimbre withintheCombi,theyselecttheProgrambank. InSequencermode,whenatracksProgramnameis selected,thesebuttonschangetheProgrambank. InCombiandSequencermodes,KARMAhasfour independentModules,eachofwhichcanbegenerating adifferentmusicaleffect.Whenusedtocontrol KARMA,theControlSurfaceslidersandswitchesare fivelayersdeep:oneforeachModule(AD),andthen aMasterLayerwhichcontrolsselectedparameters fromalloftheModulesatonce. TheMODULECONTROLbuttonselectswhetherthe KARMASLIDERS,SWITCHES,andSCENESwill controleitherasingleModuleindependently,orthe MasterLayer.InProgrammode,onlyasingleModule isavailable,andtheMasterLayerisusedtocontrolit; youcannotselectothersettings).

Front and rear panels Front panel

9. Vector Joystick
TheVectorJoystickisapowerfulrealtimecontroller. DependingontheparticularProgram,Combi,orSong, itmaymodulateProgramoreffectsparameters,or adjustthevolumesofdifferentcomponentsofthe sound. FormoreinformationonhowVectorSynthesisworks, seeUsingVectorSynthesisonpage 55.

Forwards (away from yourself ) Backwards (towards yourself )

JS+Y JSY

Vibrato Filter LFO (wah)

13. Ribbon controller


TheRibboncontrollerletsyoumodulateProgramor effectsparametersbyslidingyourfingerleftandright alongitstouchsensitivestrip. Aswiththeothercontrollers,itsspecificfunctionwill changedependingonthecurrentProgram,Combi,or Song.

10. Drum Track


TheDrumTrackisabuiltindrummachine,fueledby theKRONOSshighqualitydrumsounds.Thisbutton turnstheDrumTrackonandoff. Dependingonvarioussettings,theDrumTrackmay begintoplayimmediately,ormaywaituntilyoustart toplayonthekeyboard.IfthebuttonsLEDisblinking onandoff,itswaitingforyoutoplay.

14. Headphone jack


Thisstereo1/4headphonejackcarriesthesamesignal astheMainL/Routputs. TheheadphonevolumeiscontrolledbytheMAIN VOLUMEknob.

LINKED LED
IfthefrontpanelLINKEDLEDandKARMAON/OFF switchesarelit,KARMAwillstartandstoptogether withtheDrumTrack.Formoreinformation,see UsingKARMAandtheDrumTracktogetheron page 243.

15. EXIT button


Thisbuttonmakesiteasytoreturntothemainpageof thecurrentmode: Pressitoncetogotothepreviouslyselectedtabon themainP0page. PressitagaintogotothefirsttabonthemainP0 page(suchasthemainProgramPlaypage).Ifyou hadpreviouslyselectedaparameteronthispage, thatparameterwillbeselected. Pressitathirdtimetoselectthemainparameteron theP0page,suchastheProgramnameinProgram mode. WhereveryouareinProgram,Combi,orSequencer modes,pressingEXITthreetimes(orfewer)willtake youbacktoProgram/Combination/SongSelect,where youcanimmediatelyusethenumerickeysor / switchestoselectaProgram,Combination,orSong. Whenadialogboxisopen,thisbuttoncancelsthe settingsmadeinthedialogboxandclosesthedialog box,justlikepressingtheCancelbutton.Ifapopup menuorpagemenuisopen,pressingEXITclosesthe menu.

11. SW1 and SW2


Theseon/offswitchescanperformanumberof differentfunctions,suchasmodulatingsoundsor lockingthemodulationvaluesofthejoystick,ribbon, oraftertouch. Also,eachonemayworkeitherasatoggle,orasa momentaryswitch.Intogglemode,eachpress alternatesbetweenonandoff;inmomentarymode,the switchonlychangesforaslongasyouholditdown. EachswitchhasanLED,whichlightsupwhenthe switchison. EachProgram,Combination,andSongstoresitsown settingsforwhattheswitcheswilldo,andwhether eachswitchdefaultstobeingonoroff.

12. Joystick
Thejoystickmovesinfourdirections:left,right, forwards(awayfromyourself),andbackwards (towardsyourself).Eachofthefourdirectionscanbe usedtocontroldifferentprogramoreffects parameters. Thespecificassignmentscanchangedependingonthe currentProgram,Combi,orSong.Generally,though, theywilldosomethinglikethefunctionsshown below: StandardJoystickfunctions Move the joystick
Left Right

16. SEQUENCER buttons


Mostofthebuttonsinthissectionapplyonlyto Sequencermodeand,inDiskandSamplingmodes,to audioCDplaybackfromaconnectedUSBCDdrive. REC/WRITEistheexception;ithasspecialfunctionsin Program,Combination,andGlobalmodes,as describedbelow.

Controller Normally controls Name


JSX JS+X Pitch bend down Pitch bend up

Introduction to KRONOS

PAUSE button
InSequencermode,thisbuttonpausestheplaybackof thesong.Whenpaused,thebuttonsLEDwilllightup. PressPAUSEonceagaintoresumeplayback,andthe LEDwillturnoff. InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonpausesaudio CDplayback.

17. TEMPO controls


TEMPO knob
Thisknobadjuststhetempoforthe KRONOSasawhole,includingSongs, KARMA,theDrumTrack,Tempo syncedLFOsandBPMdelays,andEXi StepSequencers. TheLEDwillblinkatquarternote intervalsofthecurrenttempo. Note:IftheGLOBALMIDIpageMIDICLOCK parameterissettoExternalMIDIorUSB,orifitisset toAutoandaclockiscurrentlybeingreceived,then neithertheTEMPOKnobnortheTAPTEMPObutton willhaveanyeffect.

<<REW button
InSequencermode,whentheSongisplayingor paused,thisbuttonwillrewindthesong.Whenyou pressandholdthisbutton,itsLEDwilllightup,and theplaybackwillrewind.(Rewindisdisabledduring recording,andwhiletheSongisstopped.) InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonrewindsthe audioCD.

FF>> button
InSequencermode,whentheSongisplayingor paused,thisbuttonwillfastforwardthesong.When youpressandholdthisbutton,thebuttonwilllight, andtheplaybackwillfastforward.(Fastforwardis disabledduringrecording,andwhiletheSongis stopped.) InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonfastforwards theaudioCD.

TAP TEMPO button


Thisbuttonletsyouentertempossimplybytapping yourfingeronthebutton.Youcanusethis interchangeablywiththeTEMPOknob,above.Two tapsareenoughtochangethetempo;forgreater accuracy,youcancontinuetapping,andthetempowill beaveragedoverthemostrecent16taps. Forexample,youcanuseTAPTEMPOtocontrolthe KARMAtempo: 1. InProgrammodeorCombinationmode,start KARMArunning. TurnontheKARMAON/OFFswitch,andplayakey orapad.IfyouturnontheLATCHswitch,KARMA willcontinueplayingevenafteryouliftupyourhands. 2. LightlypresstheTAPTEMPOswitchseveral timesatthedesiredtempo. Noticethattheq=intheupperrightoftheLCD screenwillchangetoshowthenewtempo. IfyoupresstheTAPTEMPOswitchatshorter intervals,theplaybacktempowillbecome correspondinglyfaster. Note:Youcanalsotaptemposusingafootswitch.For moreinformation,seeFootSwitchAssignmentson page 1106oftheParameterGuide.

LOCATE button
InSequencermode,thisbuttonwilladvanceorrewind thesongtothespecifiedlocatepoint.Thisletsyou jumpimmediatelytoanypointinthecurrentSong. Thedefaultlocatepointisthefirstbeatofmeasure1. Tosetthelocatepointtothecurrentposition,hold downENTERandthenpressLOCATE.Youcanalso settheLocatepointdirectlyviatheonscreenmenu.

REC/WRITE button
InSequencermode,pressingthisbuttonwillenter recordreadymode.Onceyoureinrecordreadymode (shownbythebuttonslitLED),youcanbegin recordingbypressingtheSEQUENCER START/STOP button.Formoreinformation,seeRecordingMIDIin realtimeonpage 78. InProgram,Combination,SetList,andGlobalmodes, pressingREC/WRITEwillopentheSavedialogbox. Formoredetails,seeWritingtointernalmemoryon page 182,andUsingtheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE buttononpage 182. InProgramandCombinationmodes,youcanhold downtheENTERbuttonandpresstheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEbuttontousetheAutoSongSetup function.ThisimportsthecurrentProgramorCombi intoSequencemodeforquickandeasyrecording.For moreinformation,seeAutoSongSetuponpage 2of theParameterGuide.

18. SAMPLING buttons


REC button
InSampling,Program,Combination,and Sequencermodes,pressingthisbutton enterstheinitialsamplingreadymode. ThebuttonsLEDwilllightup. Tocontinue,presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP button,asdescribedbelow.

START/STOP button
InSampling,Program,Combination,andSequencer modes,pressingthiswhentheSAMPLINGREC buttonislitwilldooneofthreethings,dependingon thesettingoftheTriggerparameter(ontheSampling modeRecordingAudioInputpage): IfTriggerissettoSamplingSTARTSW,sampling willbeginimmediately.

START/STOP button
Thisstartsorstopsrecordingandplaybackin Sequencermode. InDiskandSamplingmodes,thisbuttonstartsand stopsplaybackontheaudioCD.

Front and rear panels Front panel

IfTriggerissettoNoteOn,samplingwillbeginas soonasyouplayanoteonthekeyboard. IfTriggerissettoThreshold,samplingwillbegin assoonastheselectedaudiosourcereachesa presetvolumelevel. OntheSamplingmodesP1:SampleEditpage, pressingthisbuttonwillplaytheselectedsample. ThisbuttonisalsousedtoplaybackWAVfilesfrom thedisk.YoucanplaybackWAVfilesinthedirectory windowofvariousDiskmodepages,intheDiskmode MakeAudioCDpage,intheSequencermodeaudio trackeditingdialogboxes,andintheSelect Directory/FileforSampletoDiskmenucommandin Program,Combination,Sequencer,andSampling modes.

Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhile youreplaying,youcanusethisfunctiontostart recordingimmediately.Todoso: 1. HolddowntheENTERkeyandpressthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEkey. TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillopenandaskAre yousure? 2. PressOK. YouwillautomaticallyenterSequencermode,andwill beintherecordreadystate. 3. PresstheSTART/STOPkeytostartthesequencer andbeginrecording.

ENTER + keyboard: Enter note or velocity value


Generally,ifaparameterspecifiesanotenumberor velocity,youcanenterthevaluebyplayingonthe keyboard.Todoso: 1. SelectoneoftheKeyparameters. 2. HolddowntheENTERbutton. 3. WhileholdingENTER,playanoteonthe keyboard. YoucanusethisshortcutthroughouttheKRONOS, suchasforsettingkeyboardandvelocityzones,or selectingthenotetoeditinDrumKits,Multisamples, orRPPRsetups.

19. TouchView display


TheKRONOSfeaturesourexclusiveTouchView graphicinterface,basedonatouchpanelLCDscreen. BytouchingitemsontheLCDscreen,youcanselect pages,tabs,andparameters,andsetparametervalues viaonscreenmenusandbuttons.

Shortcuts
Thefrontpanelcontrolsofferanumberofshortcuts forcommonlyusedfeatures,asdetailedbelow.

ENTER + LOCATE: Set locate point


ThisshortcutsetstheSequencerslocatepointtothe currentmeasure,beat,andtick,similartousingtheSet Locationmenucommand(seeSetLocation(for LocateKey)onpage 626oftheParameterGuide). 1. HolddowntheENTERbutton. 2. WhileholdingENTER,presstheLOCATEkey. Afterthis,pressingLOCATEreturnstheSongtothe newlysetmeasure,beat,andtick.

ENTER + numeric keys 09: Menu commands


Eachpagehasasetofmenucommands,which provideaccesstodifferentutilities,commands,and options,dependingonthepageyourecurrentlyon. Youcanusethemenucommandsentirelyfromthe touchscreen,bypressingthemenubuttoninthe upperrighthandcornerofthescreenandthen selectinganoptionfromthemenuthatappears. Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownunique menucommands,themenusarestandardizedasmuch aspossible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthe firstmenuiteminProgram,Combination,andGlobal modes. Youcantakeadvantageofthisstandardizationby usingashortcuttoaccessanyofthefirsttenmenu items: 1. HolddowntheENTERbutton. 2. Pressanumber(09)onthenumerickeypadto selectthedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0. Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1for thesecond,andsoon. Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff (suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthe commandcallsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappear ontheLCD,andyoucanproceedjustasifyoud selectedthecommandfromthetouchscreen.

CONTROL ASSIGN RT KNOBS/KARMA switch (LED ON) + KARMA MODULE CONTROL switch
InCombinationandSequencermodes,thissetsthe ModuleControltoMaster.Thisisthesameassetting ModuleControltoMinP0:ControlSurface RT/KARMA.

CONTROL ASSIGN TONE ADJ/EQ switch (LED ON) + SWITCH 116 switches
InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusea shortcuttochangethecurrentTimbredirectlyfromthe ControlSurface,withoutleavingToneAdjustmode: 1. PressandholdtheTONEADJ/EQbutton. 2. WhileholdingTONEADJ/EQ,pressa PLAY/MUTEorSELECTbuttontoselectaTimbre. ThePLAY/MUTEbuttonsselectTimbres18,andthe SELECTbuttonsselectTimbres916. ThisisthesameastheselectedTimbre/Trackin TIMBRE/TRACKmode;changingonewillalsochange theother. 3. ReleasetheTONEADJ/EQbutton. TheControlSurfaceandscreenwillchangetoshow theToneAdjustparametersforthenewlyselected Timbre.

ENTER + REC/WRITE: Auto Song Setup


TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrent ProgramorCombinationintoaSong,andthenputs theKRONOSinrecordreadymode.

Introduction to KRONOS

EXIT switch: Return to main page


Thisbuttonmakesiteasytoreturntothemainpageof thecurrentmode: Pressitoncetogotothepreviouslyselectedtabon themainP0page. PressitagaintogotothefirsttabonthemainP0 page. Pressitathirdtimetoselectthemainparameteron theP0page,suchastheProgramnameinProgram mode.

WhereveryouareinProgram,Combi,orSequencer modes,pressingEXITthreetimes(orfewer)willtake youbacktoProgram/Combination/SongSelect,where youcanimmediatelyusethenumerickeysor / switchestoselectaProgram,Combination,orSong.

EXIT switch: Cancel in dialog boxes


Whenadialogboxisdisplayed,thishasthesame functionastheCancel,Done,orExitbutton.

Rear panel
2. Power Switch 3. USB 4. Analog Audio Inputs 5. Analog Audio Outputs

1. AC Power connector

7. S/PDIF 6. MIDI In & Out 8. Pedals

1. AC Power connector
Connecttheincludedpowercablehere. Werecommendthatyoufirstconnectthepowercable totheKRONOS,andthenconnecttheotherendofthe cabletoanACoutlet(see1.Connectingthepower cableonpage 20).

4. Analog AUDIO INPUTS


Youcanusetheaudioinputsforrecording,sampling, andrealtimemixingthroughthebuiltineffects.

Mic/Line Inputs 1 and 2

2. POWER switch
Thisswitchturnsthepoweronandoff.Beforeturning KRONOSoff,makesurethatyouvesavedanyeditsto yourPrograms,Combis,Songs,orotheruserdata. Afterturningthepoweroff,pleasewaitforatleast tensecondsbeforeyouturnthepoweronagain. Inputs1and2provide1/4TRSbalancedconnectors. Youcanusetheseforeithermicrophonelevelorline levelsignals.Thetwoinputshaveidenticalsetsof controls,asdescribedbelow.

MIC/LINE switches

3. USB ports

Thesesettheinputsnominalsignallevel.Setthese switchesaccordingtothetypeofdevicethatyoure connecting,andthenusetheLEVELknobs(described below)tooptimizethegain. UsetheLINEsetting(buttonpressedin)when connectingtomixers,computeraudiosystems,signal processors,orothersynthesizers.Thenominallevelis +4dBu,with12dBofheadroom. UsetheMICsetting(buttonpoppedout)onlywhen connectingamicrophone.

USB A ports
Therearetwoexternal,highspeedUSB2.0ports.You canusethesetoconnectstoragemediasuchashard disks,flashmedia,etc,aswellasclasscompliantUSB MIDIcontrollers.Formoreinformation,see5. ConnectingUSBdevicesonpage 23.

LEVEL knobs
Theseknobsletyoumakemorepreciseadjustmentsto theinputlevel,aftersettingthebasiclevelswiththe MIC/LINEswitches. TheMINsettingisunitygain;theMAXsetting providesabout40dBofgainaboveunity.

USB B port
ThishighspeedUSB2.0portletsyouconnecttoaMac orWindowsPC,forsendingandreceivingMIDIand audio,andforconnectingtothecomputereditor program.Formoreinformation,see7.Connectionto acomputerviaUSBonpage 24.

Front and rear panels Rear panel

5. Analog AUDIO OUTPUTS


AlloftheanalogaudiooutputsusebalancedTRS1/4 phonejacks,referencedtoa+4dBusignallevel.

YoucanusethistochainmultipleMIDIdevices together.

MIDI OUT connector


ThisconnectortransmitsMIDIdata.Usethistocontrol externalMIDIdevices,ortorecordintoanexternal sequencer.

MIDI IN connector
Connecttheseoutputstotheinputjacksofyouramp ormixer.InadditiontotheL/MONOandRmain stereoaudiooutputs,theKRONOSprovidesfour individualaudiooutputs. Thesoundfromeachoscillator,drum,timbre/track,or inserteffectcanbefreelyroutedtoanyoutput. Additionally,youcanroutethemetronomesoundto anindividualoutput,toseparateitfromthestereo mix.Formoreinformation,seeEffectsselectionand routingonpage 202. ThisconnectorreceivesMIDIdata.Usethistoplaythe KRONOSfromanotherMIDIdevice,orfroman externalsequencer.

7. S/P DIF IN & OUT

(MAIN) L/MONO, R
Thesearethemainstereooutputs;theirvolumeis controlledbytheMAINVOLUMEknob.Allofthe factoryProgramsandCombisareprogrammedtoplay throughtheseoutputs. Wheneditingsounds,orwhensettingupaSongin Sequencermode,youcanaccessthemainoutputsby settingBusSelecttoL/R. IfnocableisconnectedtotheRoutput,L/MONOwill carryamonosummationofthestereosignal.So,ifyou areconnectingtoadevicewhichdoesnothavestereo inputs(suchasasimplekeyboardamp),usethe L/MONOoutput.

Thesejacksprovide24bit,48kHzopticalS/P DIFinput andoutput,forconnectingtocomputeraudiosystems, digitalmixers,etc. OpticalS/P DIFissometimescalledTOSLINK,and formallynamed(holdyourbreath!)IEC60958,EIAJ CP1201.Makesuretouseopticalcablesdesignedfor digitalaudio. Wheneveryouusedigitalaudioconnections,make surethatallconnectedsystemsaresetsothatthereis oneandonlyonewordclockmaster.Youcansetthe wordclockfortheKRONOSusingtheGlobalpage SystemClockparameter.Formoreinformation,see SystemClockonpage 756oftheParameterGuide.

OUT(MAIN) jack
ThisopticalS/P DIFoutputcarriesadigitalversionof themainL/Routputs. NotethattheMAINVOLUMEknobdoesnotadjust theS/P DIFoutputlevel.

(INDIVIDUAL) 14
These4additionalaudiooutputsletyouisolate sounds,audioinputs,oraudiotracksforrecordingor complexlivesoundsetups. Thesecanbeusedasstereoormonooutputs,inany combination.YoucanalsousetheGlobalAudiopage LRBusIndiv.Assignparametertomapthemain stereooutputstoanyoftheseoutputpairs,ifyoulike. Notethattheindividualoutputsarenotaffectedbythe MAINVOLUMEknob.

IN jack
YoucanusethisopticalS/P DIFinputforrecording, sampling,andrealtimemixingthroughthebuiltin effects. ItcanbeusedsimultaneouslywiththeanalogandUSB audioinputs,ifyoulike.

6. MIDI

8. Pedals

MIDIletsyouconnectKRONOStocomputersorother MIDIdevices,forsendingandreceivingnotes, controllergestures,soundsettings,andsoon.For moreinformationonMIDIconnections,pleasesee MIDIapplicationsonpage 1127oftheParameter Guide.

DAMPER jack
Forthedamperalsoknownasthesustainpedalyou canconnecteitherastandardfootswitch,orKorgs specialhalfdamperpedal,theoptionalDS1H. TheDS1Hisacontinuouspedaldesignedspecifically forpianostyledampercontrol,withthelookandfeel ofanacousticpianossustainpedal.Itallowsmore subtlecontrolofthedamperthanasimpleswitch;the furtherdownyoupressthepedal,themorethatthe

MIDI THRU connector


MIDIdatareceivedattheMIDIINconnectorisre transmittedwithoutchangefromtheMIDITHRU connector.

Introduction to KRONOS

soundsustains.Formoreinformation,seeHalf DamperPedalandReleaseTimeonpage 40ofthe ParameterGuide. Youcanalsoconnectasimplefootswitch,whichwill workasastandardon/offdamperpedal. Inordertoensurethatthepedalfunctionscorrectly, pleaseadjusttheswitchpolarity(seeDamper Polarityonpage 781oftheParameterGuide)andthe halfdampersensitivity(seeHalfDamper Calibrationonpage 807oftheParameterGuide).

TheswitchsfunctionissetinGlobalmode(onthe ControllerstaboftheControllers/Scalespage),sothat italwaysworksthesameregardlessofthecurrent Program,Combi,orSong.Formoreinformation, pleaseseeSettinguptheAssignableSwitchand Pedalonpage 161.

ASSIGNABLE PEDAL jack


Thisletsyouconnectacontinuouscontrollerpedal, suchastheKorgEXP2footcontrollerorKorgXVP10 EXP/VOLpedal,touseasanassignablemodulation source. LiketheASSIGNABLESWITCH,thepedalsfunction issetinGlobalmode.Formoreinformation,pleasesee SettinguptheAssignableSwitchandPedalon page 161.

ASSIGNABLE SWITCH jack


Thisletsyouconnectasimpleon/offfootswitch,such astheoptionalKorgPS1.Thefootswitchcanperform awidevarietyoffunctions,suchasmodulatingsounds andeffects,taptempo,sequencerstart/stop,etc.

TouchView user interface


Mode name Page group number and name a: Current page b: Category popup button c: Popup button d: Edit cell i: Check box Page name j: Page menu button

e: Knob

f: Slider

g: Page tab h: Page group Tab

TheKRONOSusesKorgsTouchViewgraphicaluser interface.BytouchingobjectsdisplayedintheLCD screen,youcanselectpages,setparametervalues, entertext,connectvirtualpatchcables,andmore.

Whenyoupressthisbutton,atabbedpopupmenuwill appear,allowingyoutoselectPrograms, Combinations,orGEsorganizedbycategory. Formoreinformation,seeTabbedpopupmenus, below.

a: Current page
Fromtheleft,thetopofthedisplayshowsthecurrent mode,thenumberandnameofthepagegroup,and finallythenameoftheindividualpage.

c: Popup button & menu


Whenthisbuttonispressed,apopupmenuwill appear,showingthealistofoptions.Insomecases, thesewillbeparametervalues.Inothers,theymaybe listsofitems,suchasMultisamplesorFXPresets. Toenteraparametervalue,touchthedesiredvalue.

b: Category button

10

Front and rear panels TouchView user interface

Pin
ManypopupmenushaveaPininthe upperleft.Thiscontrolswhathappens afteryouselectavalue.Touchthepin graphictoswitchbetweenopen (unlocked)andclosed(locked).

Pin

e & f: On-screen sliders and knobs


Tomodifythevalueofanonscreensliderorknob,first touchtheobject,andthenusetheVALUEcontrollers tomodifythevalue.

Whenlocked(pinclosed),thepopupmenuwillremain displayedevenafteryouselectaparametervalue.To closethepopup,eitherunlockthepin,orpressEXIT. Whenunlocked(pinopen),thepopupmenuwillclose immediatelywhenyoupressaparametervalue,or whenyoutouchthescreenoutsidethemenu.

g & h: Page group tabs and Page tabs


Pressthelowerrowoftabstoselectthepagegroup, andthenpresstheupperrowoftabstoselectthepage. Thetopofthescreenshowsthenameofthecurrent pageandgroup,asdescribedundera:Currentpage onpage 10.

Tabbed popup menus


Somepopupshavealargenumberofitemsdivided intogroups.Thegroupsarerepresentedbytabsonthe lefthandsideofthescreen.Theseinclude: Bank/ProgramSelectandBank/CombinationSelect: SelectProgramsorCombinationsbybank MultisampleSelect:SelectaMultisamplefora Programoscillatorbycategory WaveSequenceSelectandDrumKitSelect:Selecta WaveSequencesorDrumKitforaProgram oscillatorsbybank EffectSelect:Selectaneffectbycategory SelectauserSampleforauserMultisample SelectaKARMAGE Tocloseatabbedpopupmenu,presstheOKbuttonor Cancelbutton.

i: Page menu button


Whenthisbuttonispressed,alistofmenucommands willappear.Theavailablecommandswillvary dependingonthecurrentpage.Toselectacommand, justtouchit. ThepagemenuwillclosewhenyoupresstheLCD screenatalocationotherthanthepagemenu,orwhen youpresstheEXITswitch. Eventhougheachpagemayhaveitsownunique menucommands,themenusarestandardizedasmuch aspossible.Forinstance,WRITEisalmostalwaysthe firstmenuiteminProgram,Combination,SetList,and Globalmodes.

Menu shortcut: ENTER + numeric keypad


Youcanuseashortcuttoaccessanyofthefirstten menuitems: 1. HolddowntheENTERkey. 2. Pressanumber(09)onthenumerickeypadto selectthedesiredmenucommand,startingwith0. Forinstance,press0forthefirstmenucommand,1for thesecond,andsoon. Ifthemenucommandjusttogglesanoptiononandoff (suchasExclusiveSolo),thenyouredone.Ifthe commandcallsupadialogbox,thedialogwillappear ontheLCD,andyoucanproceedjustasifyoud selectedthecommandfromthetouchscreen.

Scroll bar
Whenalististoolongforallitemstofitonthescreen atonce,thepopupincludesscrollbars.Youcantouch intheemptyareasofthescrollbartomovebackand forthinthelist,ortouchanddragthescrollhandle.
Press here to scroll to left or right.

Press here and slide to left or right to scroll to the desired location.

Press here to scroll to the corresponding location.

Dialog box

d: Edit cell
WhenyoutouchaparameterintheLCDscreen,the parameterorparametervaluewillusuallybe highlighted(displayedininversevideo).Thisiscalled theeditcell,andthehighlighteditemisnowselected forediting. Theparametervalueoftheeditcellcanbemodified usingtheVALUEcontrollers.Insomecases,youmay alsouseapopupmenu,asdescribedbelow. Forparametersthatacceptanotenumberoravelocity value,youcanalsoholddowntheENTERswitchand playanoteonthekeyboardtoenterthenotenumber orvelocityvalue.

Manymenucommandsusedialogboxestomake additionalsettings.Thedialogboxthatappearswill dependonthecurrentlyselectedmenucommand. Toconfirmsettingsinadialogbox,presstheOK button.Toexitwithoutmakingchanges,pressthe Cancelbutton.AfterpressingeitherOKorCancel,the dialogboxwillclose.

11

Introduction to KRONOS

Text edit button

Note:youcanalsoselecttheoutputjack.However,if theoutputisconnectedtomorethanoneinput,allof theconnectionsfromthatoutputwillbeaffected. 2. PresstheDisconnectbutton. Theselectedconnectionwillbedeleted.

Program Play page Overview/Jump graphics


ThemainP0PlaypageinProgramModefeaturesan interactiveoverviewofthemostimportantparameters, suchasoscillators,filters,envelopes,LFOs,andsoon. Justtouchanyoftheseoverviewareas,andyoulljump tothecorrespondingeditpage.
Cancel button OK button

Toggle buttons
Thistypeofbuttonwillchangeitsfunctionorswitch on/offeachtimeitispressed. Play/Rec/MutebuttonsinSequencermode: SoloOn/OffbuttonsinSequencermode: EffectsOn/Offbuttons:

Text edit button


Pressingthisbuttonbringsupanonscreenkeyboard, forchangingthenameofPrograms,Combis,Songs, WaveSequences,DrumKits,etc.Formore information,seeEditingnamesonpage 184.

Other objects
j: Radio button
Pressaradiobuttontoselectonevaluefromtwoor morechoices.

k: Check box
Eachtimeyoupressacheckbox,italternatesbetween thechecked(red)anduncheckedstates. Theparameterwillbeactiveifitischecked,and inactiveifitisunchecked.
j: Radio button

k: Check box

Patch panel
TheMS20EXandMOD7useonscreenpatchpanels torouteaudioandcontrolsignals.Tomakea connectionbetweentwopatchpoints: 1. Touchoneofthetwojacks(eitherinputoroutput). Ayellowsquarewillappeararoundtheselectedjack. 2. Touchthesamejackagain. Theyellowsquarewillbegintoblink,showingthat youreabouttomakeaconnection.Tocancelthisand returntothenormalselectedstate,justtouchthesame jackathirdtime. 3. Touchtheotherjack. Thetwojackswillnowbeconnected. Todeleteaconnectionbetweentwopatchpoints: 1. Touchtheinputjack.

12

Basic information About the KRONOS modes

Basic information About the KRONOS modes


TheKRONOShasalargenumberoffeaturesthatlet youplayandeditprogramsandcombinations,record andplaysequencedata,recordandplaybacksamples, andmanagedataondisk.Thelargestunitusedto organizethesefeaturesiscalledamode. TheKRONOShassevenmodes.

Combination mode
Combinationsaresetsofupto16Programsthatcanbe playedsimultaneously,lettingyoucreatesoundsmore complexthanasingleProgram.InCombinationmode, youcan: SelectandplayCombinations UseKRONOSasa16trackmultitimbraltone generator EditCombinations AssignProgramstoeachofthe16Timbres,each withseparatevolume,pan,EQ,andkeyboardand velocityzones;makesettingsforeffects,vector synthesis,DrumTrack,andKARMA. ControlandplayuptofourKARMAmodules Sampleorresample Forexampleyoucansampleanexternalaudio sourcewhilelisteningtotheperformanceofthe KARMA,orresampleaperformanceyouplayusing acombination.

Set List mode


SetListsmakeitsimpletoplayandorganizeanyofthe soundsloadedintotheKRONOS,withoutregardfor whatbanktheyrestoredinorwhethertheyre Programs,Combinations,orevenSongs. Largeonscreenbuttonsmakesoundselectionfastand foolproof,andtheProgramUporDownfootswitch assignmentscanbeusedforhandsfreesound changes.Cut,copy,paste,andinserttoolsmakere orderingasnap. SmoothSoundTransitions(SST)lettheprevioussound anditseffectsringoutnaturally,makingiteasyto changesoundsduringaliveperformance.SSTisactive inalloftheKRONOSmodes,butSetListsgiveyou greatercontroloverthetransitions.Youcanfinetune theringouttimeforeachsound,sothat(forinstance) onesoundfadesoutveryquickly,whileanother soundsdelayscontinuetorepeatfortenortwenty seconds. SetListsaregreatforliveperformance,buttheyrealso handyfororganizingsoundsingeneral.Forexample, youcouldcreateaSetListwithallofyourfavorite Stringsounds,includingbothProgramsand Combinations.

Sequencer mode
Sequencermodeletsyourecord,playback,andedit MIDItracksandaudiotracks.Youcan: SelectandplaySongs EditSongs AssignProgramstoeachofthe16MIDITracks, withseparatevolume,pan,EQ,andkeyboardand velocityzones;makesettingsforeffects,vector synthesis,DrumTrack,andKARMA RecorduptosixteenMIDItrackssimultaneously Recorduptofourofthesixteenaudiotracks simultaneously,mixusingautomation,andimport WAVEfiles. ControlandplayuptofourKARMAmodules Sampleorresample Youcansampleanexternalaudioinputsource whileplayingasong,anduseInTrackSamplingto automaticallycreateanoteeventthattriggersthe sampleatthesametimeasitwasrecorded. Youcanalsoresampleanentiresong,andthenuse DiskmodetocreateanaudioCD. UseKRONOSasa16trackmultitimbraltone generator Recordpatternsandassignthemtoindividual keys,usingRPPR(RealtimePattern Play/Recording) CreateyourownDrumTrackPatterns

Program mode
ProgramsarethebasicsoundsofKRONOS.In Programmode,youcan: SelectandplayPrograms EditPrograms Makedetailedsettingsforoscillators,filters,amps, EGs,LFOs,effects,KARMA,vectorsynthesis,etc. Thespecificparameterswillvarydependingonthe synthesistype:HD1,AL1,CX3,STR1,MS20EX, PolysixEX,MOD7,EP1,orSGX1. Createdrumprogramsusingdrumkits(ascreated inGlobalmode) PlayandcontroloneKARMAmodule Sampleandresample Forexample,youcansampleanexternalaudio sourcewhilelisteningtoaperformancegenerated byKARMA,oryoucanplayaProgramand resampleyourperformance.

13

Introduction to KRONOS

Sampling mode
Samplingmodeletsyourecordandedityourown SamplesandMultisamples.Forexample,youcan: Recordsamplesfromexternalaudiosources, includingsamplingthrougheffects Edittherecordedsamples,orsamplesloadedfrom disk;setlooppoints,truncate,timeslice,etc. CreateandeditMultisamples,whichconsistofone ormoreSamplesspreadoutacrossthekeyboard QuicklyconvertMultisamplesintoPrograms WithaUSBCDRdrive(notincluded),sample directlyfromaudioCDs Createmassivesoundsusingthegenerousinternal RAM(uptoabout2GBfortheKRONOSX,orfor theKRONOSwithmemoryexpansion)ifyou like,asingleMultisamplecanusemorethan6 hoursofsamplingtime Loadanumberofthese6hourMultisamplesat once,viaUserSampleBanksandVirtualMemory

Global mode
Globalmodeletsyoumakeoverallsettingsforthe entireKRONOS,andeditwavesequencesanddrum kits.Forinstance,youcan: MakesettingsthataffecttheentireKRONOS,such asmastertuneandglobalMIDIchannel Setupsampleautoloadingatstartup Managecurrentlyloadedsamples Createuserscales CreateuserDrumKitsandWaveSequencesusing samplesfromROM,EXs,UserSampleBanksor SamplingMode RenameProgram,Combination,andKARMAGE categories Setthefunctionoftheassignablepedalsand assignableswitches TransmitMIDISystemExclusivedatadumps

Disk mode
Diskmodeletsyousave,load,andmanagedatausing theinternaldiskandexternalUSB2.0storagedevices. Youcan: SaveandloadPrograms,Combinations,Songs, Samples,andGlobalsetupdata Formatdisksandstoragemedia,copyandrename files,etc. LoadAKAI,SoundFont2.0,AIFF,andWAVE samples,andexportRAMsamplesinAIFFor WAVEformats ExportandimportsequencestoandfromSMF (StandardMIDIFiles) UsetheDataFilerfunctiontosaveorloadMIDI SystemExclusivedata WithaUSBCDRdrive(notincluded),createand playbackaudioCDs

14

Basic information About the KRONOS modes

SET LIST Set List 000 ... 127 Multisample Slot 000 Slot 001

Slot 127

PROGRAM (EXi) EXi 1 AL-1 CX-3 EXi 2 AL-1 CX-3 AUDIO INPUT AUDIO INPUT 2 1 USB AUDIO IN USB AUDIO IN 1 2 S/P DIF IN S/P DIF IN L R PROGRAM (HD-1) Multisample Multisample Insert / Master / Final Effect Resampling IFX 1 MFX 1 MFX 2 TFX 1 IFX 12 TFX 2 Sample Sample MS3 (MS/WS) MS4 (MS/WS)
PITCH1

Insert / Master / Total Effect IFX 1 STR-1 MS-20EX PolysixEX MOD-7 EP-1 SGX-1 IFX 12 MFX 1 MFX 2 TFX 1 TFX 2

SAMPLING MODE

STR-1 MS-20EX

PolysixEX MOD-7

EP-1 SGX-1

KARMA Module A

Drum Track Drums Program

Sample Multisample

OSC 1 MS1 (MS/WS) Drum Kit MS2 (MS/WS)

Insert / Master / Total Effect MS5 (MS/WS) MS6 (MS/WS) MS7 (MS/WS) MS8 (MS/WS)
FILTER1 AMP1/ DRIVER1

IFX 1

MFX 1 MFX 2 TFX 1

IFX 12

TFX 2

KARMA Module A

Drum Track Drums Program

Sample Sample Sample Sample

OSC 2 MS1 (MS/WS) Drum Kit MS2 (MS/WS) MS3 (MS/WS) MS4 (MS/WS)
PITCH2

MS5 (MS/WS) MS6 (MS/WS) MS7 (MS/WS) MS8 (MS/WS)


FILTER2 AMP2/ DRIVER2

COMBINATION Insert / Master / Total Effect GLOBAL MODE DRUM KIT DS1 (DS/Sample) DS2 (DS/Sample) DS3 (DS/Sample) DS4 (DS/Sample) USB CD-R/RW DRIVE Ripping Key Assign DS5 (DS/Sample) Drum Kit DS6 (DS/Sample) DS7 (DS/Sample) DS8 (DS/Sample)
TIMBRE7 TIMBRE8 TIMBRE1 TIMBRE2 TIMBRE3 TIMBRE4 TIMBRE5 TIMBRE6

PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM

TIMBRE9 TIMBRE10 TIMBRE11 TIMBRE12 TIMBRE13 TIMBRE14 TIMBRE15 TIMBRE16

PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM

IFX 1

MFX 1 MFX 2 TFX 1

IFX 12

TFX 2

KARMA Module A KARMA Module B KARMA Module C KARMA Module D

WAVE SEQUENCE
Drum Track

CD-ROM

Write Audio CD

MS

MS

MS

MS Wave Seq. SEQUENCER


MIDI TRACK 1...16 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 TRACK 5 TRACK 6 TRACK 7

Insert / Master / Total Effect


TRACK 9 TRACK 10 TRACK 11 TRACK 12 TRACK 13 TRACK 14 TRACK 15 TRACK 16

PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM

PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM PROGRAM

IFX 1

MFX 1 MFX 2 TFX 1

IFX 12

TFX 2

KARMA Module A KARMA Module B KARMA Module C KARMA Module D

DISK MODE PCG KSC PCG / SNG

TRACK 8

AUDIO TRACK 1...16 TRACK 1 TRACK 2

Drum Track

REGION REGION REGION REGION REGION REGION REGION REGION

TRACK 9 TRACK 10 TRACK 11 TRACK 12 TRACK 13 TRACK 14 TRACK 15 TRACK 16

REGION REGION REGION REGION REGION REGION REGION REGION

HARD DISK Hard Disk Recording WAVE FILES

TRACK 3 TRACK 4 TRACK 5 TRACK 6 TRACK 7

Resampling

TRACK 8

DRUM TRACK PATTERN

Preset Drum Track Pattern User Drum Track Pattern

15

Introduction to KRONOS

About the KRONOS PCM memory


PCMisanotherwayofsayingsamples.The KRONOShasseveraltypesofPCMbanks,as describedbelow:ROM,EXs,UserSampleBanks,and SamplingModedata Formoreinformationonthecontentsoftheincluded ROMandEXssampledata,seetheVoiceNameList (VNL).

Lossless compression
WhenEXsdataisloadedintoRAM,theKRONOSuses alosslesscompressiontechnique.Thisyieldsamodest reductioninsize;forinstance,EXs1uses284MBof RAMfor313MBofdata. Youllnoticethatthisismuchmilderthanthedramatic sizereductionsofmp3,orthePCMcompression sometimesfoundinothersynthesizers.Thereisa strongadvantageovertheseothermethods,however: theKRONOScompressioniscompletelylossless,and causesabsolutelynodegradationinaudioquality.

ROM
TheKRONOSROMcontainsthebasicmultisamples andsamples,andisalwaysloadedandavailable.

EXs
EXsstandsforEXpansionSamples.Thesecanbe loadedornot,asyouwish.TheKRONOScomeswitha numberofEXslibraries,includingmultiplegigabytes ofsamples.

Loading samples at startup


TheKRONOScanloadyourfavoritesamples automaticallyatstartup.Formoreinformation,see Automaticallyloadingsampledataonpage 164.

User Sample Banks


UserSampleBanksmaybesoundsthatyoucreate yourself,orloadfromimportedAkaiorSoundFont2.0 libraries,orWAVorAIFFfiles.

User sampling RAM capacity


TheKRONOScomeswith2GBofRAMpreinstalled; theKRONOSXcomeswith3GBofRAM. Approximately1GBofthisRAMisusedbythe operatingsystemandROMsampledata.The remainderissharedbetweenthesamplesinEXs,User SampleBanks,andSamplingMode. ThismeansthatthesizeofthecurrentlyloadedEXs andUserSampleBankstradesoffagainstthememory availableforSamplingMode.Themorespaceusedby EXsandUserSampleBanks,thelessisavailablefor SamplingMode. UsingVirtualMemoryforEXsandUserSampleBanks generallyletsyouloadmoresamplesatonce,butmay stilluseasubstantialamountofRAM. Note:TochecktheamountofsampleRAMavailable, see01f:FreeSampleMemory/Locationson page 684oftheParameterGuide. Formoreinformation,seeFreeRAMand approximatesamplingtimesonpage 123.

Sampling Mode data


SamplingModeisusedtocreateandeditsamples. WhenyousaveSamplingModedata,itbecomes availableasaUserSampleBank.

Using samples in your own sounds


Youcanuseanyofthesebanktypes,togetheror separately,whenmakingyourownsounds.Simplyset theBankasdesiredintheProgramorWaveSequence StepsMultisampleSelectfields,ortheDrumKit DrumSampleSelectfields.Formoreinformation,see: Program:Bank(Multisample),onpage 58ofthe ParameterGuide WaveSequence:Bank(Multisample),onpage 793 oftheParameterGuide DrumKit:Bank,onpage 798oftheParameter Guide

About polyphony
Mosthardwaresynthesizersofferasingle,fixed methodofsynthesis,apredeterminednumberof voices,andafixedamountofeffectsprocessingpower foraspecificnumberofeffects.KRONOSisdifferent;it hasnofixedsynthesismethod,itspolyphonyvaries dependingonwhichsynthenginesarebeingused, somesynthenginesprovideadditionaleffects (augmentingthe16normaleffectsslots),andthereare sometimestradeoffsofprocessingpowerbetween voicesandeffects. Thisflexibilitymeansthatthesystemcandeliver powerwhereyouneeditthemost.Asyouplay differentsoundsfromdifferentsynthengines,the KRONOSautomaticallydividesitsprocessingpower appropriately. Unlikemostcomputerbasedsystems,KRONOSalso monitorstheoverallprocessingpower,reducingthe overallnumberofvoicesifnecessary,tomakesurethat thereareneverproblemswiththeaudio. Normally,youshouldntneedtothinkaboutthisatall; itwilljusthappenautomatically.Sometimes,however, itcanbeconvenienttoknowhowthesystemis allocatingitsresources.ThePerformanceMeterspage showsthisinformation;youcanfinditonthePerf MeterstabofP0inProgram,Combination,and Sequencermodes.Formoreinformation,see02: PerformanceMetersonpage 7oftheParameter Guide.

16

Basic information Basic operations

Basic operations
AfteryouveturnedontheKRONOS,hereshowto performbasicoperationssuchasselectingmodesand pages.

1. Selecting modes
InordertouseaparticularfunctionontheKRONOS, youmustfirstselecttheappropriatemode. Pressoneofthefrontpanelmodebuttonstoenterthe correspondingmode.TheseincludeSETLIST, COMBI(Combinationmode),PROG(Programmode), SEQ(Sequencermode),SAMPLING,GLOBAL,and DISK.

Basic Vector tab

3. Pressatabintheupperline(pagetabs)toselecta page.

2. Selecting pages
Eachmodehasalargenumberofparameters,which aregroupedintopages.Thesearefurthersubdivided bytabsintouptoninetabpages. 1. Selectthedesiredmode,asdescribedabove. WelluseProgrammodeasanexampleforour explanation,sopressthePROGswitch.

Asanexamplehere,presstheVectorControltab.The currentpageindicationintheupperleftoftheLCD screenwillstaythesame,buttheupperright indicationwillchangetoVectorControl.Youve selectedtheVectorControlpage. Note:Insomecases,theremaynotbeanytabsinthe upperline.

Page tab Page group Tab

Vector Control tab

2. Pressatabinthelowerline(pagegrouptabs). Asanexamplehere,presstheBasic/Vectortab.The currentpageindicationintheupperleftoftheLCD screenwillindicatePROGRAMP1:Basic/Vector, andthepagegroupwillchange. WhenyoupresstheEXITswitch,youwillreturntoP0 fromanypage.

3. Editing parameters
Theparametervalueintheeditcellcanbesetbyusing thefrontpanelVALUEcontrollers(VALUEslider, / switches,VALUEdial,numerickeys09, switch,ENTERswitch,and(.)switch).Asnecessary, youcanalsousetheBANKswitchesandthe COMPAREswitch. Forsomeparameters,youcanusetheBANKSELECT switchestoselectthebankofaprogrametc.,orpressa popupbuttontoaccessapopupmenuwhereyoucan specifythevalueoftheparameter.Insomecases,you canholddowntheENTERswitchandplayanoteon thekeyboardtospecifyanoteoravelocityvalue.

17

Introduction to KRONOS

VALUE entry
VALUE slider
Usethiswhenyouwishtomakemajor changesinthevalue. InProgrammodeandCombinationmode, thisslidercanalsobeusedasacontrol sourceforalternatemodulationordynamic modulation.(ThisisactiveinProgramor CombinationP0:PlaywhentheProgram SelectorCombinationSelect(thelarge charactersintheupperpartoftheLCD)is selected). /

Wheneditingaprogramorcombination,pressthis switch.TheLEDwilllight,andthelastwrittensettings forthatprogramnumberorcombinationnumberwill berecalled.WhenyoupresstheCOMPAREswitch onceagain,theLEDwillgodarkandyouwillreturnto thesettingsthatyouwereediting. Ifyoueditthesettingsthatarerecalledbypressingthe COMPAREswitch(i.e.,thesettingsthatarewritten intomemory),theLEDwillgodark,anditwillnotbe possibletoreturntothepreviouseditsbypressingthe COMPAREswitchagain. InSequencermode,youcanusetheCOMPAREswitch tomakebeforeandaftercomparisonsimmediately afterusingrealtimerecordingorsteprecordingto recordasong,orafterperformingatrackedit operation. Forexample,thiscanbeusedeffectivelywhen realtimerecordingatrackforasong. 1. RealtimerecordaMIDItrack.(Take1) 2. Onceagain,realtimerecordonthesametrack. (Take2) 3. PresstheCOMPAREswitch.TheLEDwilllight, andtake1willberecalled. 4. PresstheCOMPAREswitchonceagain.TheLED willgodark,andtake2willberecalled. 5. Ifatstep3youonceagainrealtimerecordonthe sametrack(take3),theobjectoftheCompare functionwillnowbetake1.

buttons

Usethesewhenyouwishtomakesmall changesinthevalue.

VALUE dial
Usethiswhenyouwishtomakelarge changesinavalue.

Numeric keys 09, ENTER, , (.)


Usethesewhenyouknowtheparametervaluethat youwishtoinput. Afterusingthenumerickeys09toinputanumber, presstheENTERswitchtofinalizetheparameter value. Usetheswitchtoenternegativenumbers. Usethe(.)switchtoenteradecimalpoint.

Ifatstep4youonceagainrealtimerecordonthesame track(take3),theobjectoftheComparefunctionwill betake2. Inthisway,theComparefunctionletsyourecallthe previousrecordingorthepreviousstateofevent editing. TheComparefunctiondoesnotworkinGlobalmode, withtheexceptionofSampling,Disk,WaveSequence, andDrumKitediting.

BANK IAG, UAG buttons

Popup buttons and popup menus


Youcanpressapopupbuttontoaccessapopupmenu, andthensetparametervalues.

Keyboard input
Whenenteringanotenumberoraspecificvelocityas thevalueofaparameter,youcanusethekeyboardto inputthesetting.HolddowntheENTERswitchand playthenotethatyouwishtoenterasavalue.The notenumberorvelocityvaluewillbeinput. WhentheGlobalP5:DrumKitpageisdisplayed,you canholddowntheENTERswitchandplayanoteto recallthesettingsthathavebeenassignedtothatnote. (Iftheparameteryouveselectedexpectsyoutoentera velocityvalue,thevelocityyouplayedwillbeentered.) InSamplingmode,youcanholddowntheENTER switchandplayanotetorecalltheindexthatis assignedtothatnote. Usethiswhenyouwishtocomparetheeditsyouhave madetoaprogramorcombinationssoundwiththe uneditedoriginal(i.e.,thesoundthatiswritteninto memory).

TheBANKIAG,UAGbuttonsareusedin Programmodetoselecttheprogrambankandin Combinationmodetoselectthecombinationbank.In combination,andSequencermodes,theseswitchesare usedtoselectthebankoftheprogramusedbyeach timbre/track.

COMPARE switch

18

Basic information Basic operations

4. Selecting and executing menu commands


Themenuprovidescommandsthatarespecifictoeach page,suchWrite(save)orCopy.Theavailable functionswilldependonthecurrentpage. Forexample,theutilityfunctionsinProgrammodelet youwrite(save)thesettings,performconvenient editingoperationssuchascopyingsettingsbetween oscillatorsoreffects,SyncEGssothatyoucanedit twoofthematonce,andsoon. 1. Intheupperrightofthedisplay,pressthemenu button. Alistofmenucommandswillappear. 2. Selectamenucommandbypressingitwithyour finger. Adialogboxfortheselectedmenucommandwill appear.Checktypecommandswillnotdisplaya dialogbox;theirstatuswillbeswitches,andthelist willclose.ByholdingdowntheENTERswitchand pressinganumerickey09youcanaccessthedialog boxforthefirsttenutilityfunctionswithoutgoing throughthemenu. Toclosethelistwithoutselectingacommand,press thedisplaysomewhereotherthanthelist,orpress theEXITswitch. 3. Foraparameterinadialogbox,selectitby pressingitwithyourfinger,andusetheVALUE controllers(e.g.,VALUEdialorInc/Decbuttons)to enteritsvalue. Whenselectingaprogramorcombinationnumberina dialogbox,youcanalsousetheBANKSELECTswitch toenterthebankasanalternativetousingtheVALUE controllers. 4. Toexecute,presstheOKbuttonortheENTER switch.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe CancelbuttonortheEXITbutton. Thedialogboxwillclose.

UserDrumTrackpatterns:seeConvertinga Sequencerpatternto a Drum Track patternon page 245 Preset/userDrumTrackpatternsaresavedininternal memoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff.Patterns youcreateinSequencermodecanbeconvertedinto userDrumTrackpatternsandsavedininternal memory. Usertemplatesongs:seeSavingyourown TemplateSongsonpage 78 Preset/usertemplatesongsaresavedininternal memoryevenwhenthepoweristurnedoff.Track settingsandeffectsettingsofasongyoucreatecanbe savedininternalmemorybythemenucommandSave TemplateSong. Formoreinformation,seeWritingtointernal memoryonpage 182andSavingtodisks,CDs,and USBmediaonpage 186.

5. Writing and saving


Afteryouedit,youshouldwriteorsaveyourchanges asnecessary.Forexampleifyouveeditedaprogram, yourchangedwillbelostifyouselectanotherprogram orturnoffthepower.Thesameappliestoa combination.SettingsyoueditinGlobalmodewillbe rememberedaslongasthepowerison,butyour changeswillbelostwhenyouturnoffthepower. FordetailsontheWriteoperations,seethefollowing pages. Programs:seeSavingyoureditsonpage 42 Combinations:seeSavingyoureditsonpage 67 Effectpresets:seeSavingEffectPresetson page 211 Globalsettings:seeWritingGlobalsettingson page 185 WaveSequences:seeSavingWaveSequenceson page 175 Drumkits:seeSavingDrumKitsonpage 179

19

Introduction to KRONOS

Setup Turning the power on/off


1. Connecting the power cable
1. SettheKRONOSsrearpanelPOWERswitchto theoffposition. 2. Connecttheincludedpowercabletothe KRONOSrearpanelACpowerinlet. 3. Connecttheotherendofthepowercabletothe ACpoweroutlet. Ifyourpowercableusesaseparategroundwire, youmustconnectthisgroundwirebeforeinserting theplugintotheACoutlet.Whendisconnecting, youmustfirstdisconnecttheplugbeforeyou disconnectthegroundwire.Ifyouareunsureof howtomakeconnections,pleasecontactyourKorg Distributor. MakesurethatyourACoutletisthecorrectvoltage foryourinstrument. Formoreinformation,seeRecallingthelastselected modeandpageatpowerononpage 159.

3. Turning the power off


Whenyouturnoffthepower,theprogramsand combinationsetc.willreverttotheiruneditedstate. Ifyouwanttokeepyouredits,youllneedtoWrite them.Formoreinformation,seeSavingdataon page 181. Similarly,Songsandusermultisamplesand sampleswilldisappearwhenyouturnoffthe power.Ifyouwanttousethesesongs,user multisamples,andsamplesthenexttimeyouturn onthepower,youllneedtoloadthemagain. 1. SetthefrontpanelMAINVOLUMEknobandthe volumeofyourpoweredmonitororstereoampto zero. 2. Turnoffthepowerofyourpoweredmonitoror stereoamp. 3. PresstheKRONOSsPOWERswitchtoturnoff thepower. Neverturnoffthepowerwhiledataisbeingwritten intointernalmemory.Thedisplaywillshowthe messageNowwritingintointernalmemorywhen thisisinprogress. Neverturnoffthepowerwhilemediasuchasthe internaldriveisbeingaccessed,suchaswhile recordingorplayingaudiotracks,orsamplingto diskforanextendedtime.Turningoffthepower whilediskaccessisoccurringmayrenderthemedia unusable.TheDISKLEDshowswhentheinternal driveisbeingaccessed.

2. Turning the power on


1. PresstherearpanelPOWERswitchtoturnonthe power. 2. Turnonyourpoweredmonitorsorstereoamp. 3. TurntheKRONOSsMAINVOLUMEknob clockwisetoanappropriatelevel,andadjustthe volumeofyourpoweredmonitorsorstereoamp. Afteryouveturnedoffthepower,youmustwait approximatelytensecondsbeforeturningthe poweronagain. Tip:YoucansetthePowerOnMode(GlobalP0: SystemPreferencepage)sothatthemodeandpage thathadbeenselectedwhenyouturnedthepoweroff willappearwhenthepoweristurnedon.

Connections
Connectionsmustbemadewiththepowerturned off.Pleasebeawarethatcarelessoperationmay damageyourspeakersystemorcausemalfunctions. 1. ConnecttheAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONO andRoutputstotheinputsofyourampormixer. IfyoureusingKRONOSinstereo,useboththe (MAIN)L/MONOandRjacks.Ifyoureusing KRONOSinmono,useonlythe(MAIN)L/MONO jack. 2. UsetheMAINVOLUMEknobtoadjustthe volume. TheMAINVOLUMEknobaffectsonlythemainstereo outputsandtheheadphones;itdoesnotaffectthe individualoutputs,theS/P DIFoutput,ortheUSB output.

1. Analog audio output connections


HereshowtoconnecttheKRONOStoyouranalog ampormixer. Ifyoureusingahomestereosystem,beawarethat playingathighvolumemaydamageyourspeakers. Becarefulnottoraisethevolumeexcessively.

AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO and R


Thesearethemainoutputs,accessedbysettingBus SelecttoL/R.Allofthefactorysoundsusethese outputs,andtheMasterandTotalEffectsarealways routedhereaswell. AlloftheKRONOSanalogoutputsuse1/4balanced TRSjacks.Forbestresults,usebalancedconnectionsto youraudiosystem.

AUDIO OUTPUT (INDIVIDUAL) 14


Theseare4additionalanalogoutputs,whichcanbe usedasindividualmonooutputs,stereopairs,orany combinationofthetwo.Almostanysignalsourcecan beroutedtotheseoutputs,including: EachnoteinaDrumKit

20

Setup Connections

InsertEffectoutputs IndividualProgramsinaCombinationorSong(or thesumoftheProgramsoscillatorsinProgram mode) Audiotracks Audioinputs Youcanusethesetoisolateorgrouptogethersounds forrecording,orforcomplexliveperformancesetups. 1. Connectthe(INDIVIDUAL)14outputstothe yourampormixerinputs. 2. UsetheBusSelectparameterstosendthedesired sounds,audiotracks,inputs,oreffectstothe individualoutputs,aseithermono(14)orstereo (1/2and3/4)signals. Ifthesignalisgoingthroughoneormoreinserteffects, theoutputissetatthelastIFXinthechain,viatheBus SelectparameterontheP85InsertFXpage. IfaProgram,Timbre,orTrackisnotgoingthroughany inserteffects,theoutputissetusingtheBusSelect parametersontheP81or82Routingpage.

Toassignaudioinputsdirectlytooutputs,useBus SelectparametersintheP0AudioInput(Sampling) page. InGlobalmode,theAudiopageL/RBusIndiv.Assign settingletsyoumirrortheMAINstereoL/Routputon anypairofindividualoutputs.Youcanusethisto createaprivatemonitoringsetupinliveandstudio environments.Formoreinformation,seeL/RBus Indiv.Assignonpage 761oftheParameterGuide. Note:TheMAINVOLUMEknobdoesntaffectthe volumeoftheindividualoutputs.

Headphones
1. Ifyoureusingheadphones,connectthemtothe KRONOSheadphonejack. 2. UsetheVOLUMEslidetoadjustthevolumeofthe headphones.TheKRONOSheadphonejack outputsthesamesignalasthe(MAIN)L/MONO andRjacks. Tip:Tomonitorthesignalsfromtheindividual outputs,useanexternalmixer.
2. Analog audio output connections
INPUT Monitor OUTPUT
U 10 +10dB 60 -40dB

MIC1

MIC2

MIC3

MIC4

MIC5

MIC6

STEREO AUX RETURNS

AUX SEND

1 L

TAPE INPUT

TAPE OUTPUT

MAIN OUTS

2 R

LEFT(1/MONO)
BAL OR UNBAL BAL OR UNBAL BAL OR UNBAL BAL OR UNBAL BAL OR UNBAL BAL OR UNBAL

RIGHT MONO

ALL BAL/UNBAL

BAL/UNBAL

MONO

MONO

MONO

L
LINE IN 1
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT

L
BAL OR UNBAL

L
BAL OR UNBAL

L
BAL OR UNBAL

LINE IN 2
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT

LINE IN 3
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT

LINE IN 4
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT

LINE IN 5
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT

LINE IN 6
LOW CUT 75Hz 18dB/OCT

BAL OR UNBAL

-10 dBV C GAIN MI


U

-10 dBV C GAIN MI


U 10 +10dB 60 -40dB

-10 dBV C GAIN MI


U 10 60 -40dB

-10 dBV C GAIN MI


U 10 60 -40dB

-10 dBV C GAIN MI


U 10 60 -40dB

-10 dBV C GAIN MI

R
LEVEL +4 -10

R
LEVEL +4 -10

R
LEVEL +4 -10

R
LEVEL +4 -10

+10dB

+10dB

+10dB

+10dB

10

60 -40dB

PHONES

TRIM

TRIM

TRIM

TRIM

TRIM

TRIM

LINE IN 7-8

LINE IN 9-10

LINE IN 11-12

LINE IN 13-14

AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15

AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15

AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15

AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15

AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15

AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15

AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15

AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15

AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15

AUX 1
MON/ EFX
+15

1
+10 +20

U
EFX
+15

U
EFX
+15 +15

U
EFX
+15 +15

U
EFX
+15 +15

U
EFX
+15 +15

AUX1MASTER
EFX
+15

NORMALLED

EFX

EFX

EFX

EFX

PRE POST AUX 1 SELECT EFXTO MONITOR


+20

2 AUX RETURNS

Mixer

7. Connections to computers
Computer

Powered monitors, etc.

EQ
HI 12kHz

EQ
HI 12kHz

EQ
HI 12kHz

EQ
HI 12kHz

EQ
HI 12kHz

EQ
HI 12kHz

EQ
HI 12kHz

EQ
HI 12kHz

EQ
HI 12kHz

EQ
HI 12kHz

SOURCE
MAIN MIX

LEFT
+28 +10 +7

RIGHT
CLIP

-15

+15

-15

+15

-15

+15

-15

+15

-15

+15

-15

+15

-15

+15

-15

+15

-15

+15

-15

+15

U MID 2.5kHz
-12 +12 -12

U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12

U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12

U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12

U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12

U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12

U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12

U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12

U MID 2.5kHz
+12 -12

U MID 2.5kHz
+12

ALT 3-4

+4 +2

U LOW 80Hz
-15 +15 -15

U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15

U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15

U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15

U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15

U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15

U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15

U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15

U LOW 80Hz
+15 -15

U LOW 80Hz
+15

TAPE

0 -2 -4 -7

PAN

PAN

PAN

PAN

PAN

PAN

PAN

PAN

PAN

PAN

ASSIGN TO MAIN MIX


NORMAL(AFL) LEVEL SET(PFL)

-10 -20 -30 0dB=0dBu

SOLO
MODE

1
MUTE
A LT 3 4

2
MUTE
A LT 3 4

3
MUTE
A LT 3 4

4
MUTE
A LT 3 4

5
MUTE
A LT 3 4

6
MUTE
A LT 3 4

78
MUTE
A LT 3 4

910
MUTE
A LT 3 4

1112
MUTE
A LT 3 4

1314
MUTE
A LT 3 4

PHANTOM CONTROL ROOM

POWER

RUDESOLOLIGHT

/ PHONES
dB

MAIN MIX
10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60

dB

dB

dB

dB

dB

dB

dB

dB

dB

dB

dB

10 5 U 5 10 20

SOLO

10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60

SOLO

10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60

SOLO

10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60

SOLO

10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60

SOLO

10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60

SOLO

10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60

SOLO

10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60

SOLO

10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60

SOLO

10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60

SOLO

10 5 U 5 10 20 30 40 50 60

3. Analog audio input connections


Guitar

30 40 50 60

Mic

6. USB device connections


CD-R/RW, hard disk, removable disks etc.
USB

Effect unit

USB MIDI Controller

USB cable

AUDIO INPUT USB A USB B

AUDIO OUTPUT

PHONES

AC power supply Power cable (Included) Power switch

5. Pedal connections etc.


ASSIGNABLE PEDAL ASSIGNABLE SWITCH

to an AC outlet Synthesizer
DAMPER

1. Connecting the power cable

7. Connections to MIDI equipment


S/P DIF OUT IN DIGITAL OUT

4. Digital audio input/output connections


Digital Recorder, etc.

21

Introduction to KRONOS

2. Analog audio input connections


Youcanbringexternalanalogaudiosourcesintothe KRONOSforsampling,recording,orprocessing throughtheinternaleffects.

1. Useanopticalcabletoconnecttheopticaldigital outputofyourdigitalaudiodevicetotheS/P DIF INjackoftheKRONOS. 2. SetSystemClock(ontheGlobalP0:BasicSetup page)toS/P DIF. 3. Afterturningonthepower,usetheAudioInput pagetosetupthevolume,pan,busrouting,and sendlevelsfortheinputs,asdesired. Formoreinformation,see08:Audio Input/Samplingonpage 14oftheParameterGuide. YoucanusetheS/P DIFinputssimultaneouslywith theanalogandUSBinputs.

AUDIO INPUT 1, 2
Thesetwoinputsuse1/4TRSbalancedjacks,and includepreampswithadjustablegain.Tosetupthe audioinputs: 1. Connectyourmicsortheoutputjacksofyour externalaudiosourcestotheINPUT1and2jacks. 2. SettheMIC/LINEswitchasappropriateforthe deviceyouveconnected,andusetheLEVELknob toadjustthegain. ChoosetheLINEsetting(switchpressedinward)if youveconnectedamixer,computer,audiosystem, signalprocessor,oranothersynthesizer.Forbest results,usebalancedlineconnections. Note:Guitarswithactivepickupscanbeconnected directly.Guitarswithpassivepickups(i.e.,guitarsthat donothaveaninternalpreamp)canbeused,butthe impedancemismatchwillcausebothachangeintone andareductioninvolume.Forbestresults,routesuch guitarsthroughapreamporeffectsunitbefore connectingthem. ChoosetheMICsetting(switchintheoutward position)onlywhenconnectingamic.Notethatsome microphones,suchascondensers,mayrequireexternal phantompower,whichisnotsuppliedbythe KRONOS. 3. Adjusttheoutputlevelonanyconnectedexternal equipment. 4. Afterturningonthepower,usetheAudioInput pagetosetupthevolume,pan,busrouting,and sendlevelsfortheinputs,asdesired. Formoreinformation,see08:Audio Input/Samplingonpage 14oftheParameterGuide.

4. Connecting Foot Pedals and Switches


Connecting a damper pedal
Thedamperpedalisalsosometimescalledthesustain pedal.Itactslikethesimilarlynamedpedalonan acousticpiano;whenyouholddownthepedal,notes willcontinuetosustainevenwhenyouliftyourhands offofthekeyboard. 1. ConnectanoptionalDS1Hdamperpedaltothe DAMPERjack.IfyouveconnectedaDS1H, youllbeabletoobtainhalfdampereffects. Afterturningthepoweron: 2. GototheGlobalP2:Controllers/Scalespage,and usetheDamperPolarityparametertosetthe damperpolarity. 3. GototheGlobalP0page,andusetheHalf DamperCalibrationmenucommandtoadjustthe sensitivityifdesired. Formoreinformation,seeDamperPedal(Sustain) onpage 34,andDamperPolarityonpage 781ofthe ParameterGuide.

Connecting a foot switch


Youcanuseaconnectedfootswitchtoperform functionssuchascontrollingsostenuto,softpedal on/off,KARMAon/off,selectingPrograms, Combinations,orSetListSlots,starting/stoppingthe sequencer,andcontrollingtaptempo. 1. ConnectafootswitchsuchastheoptionalPS1to theASSIGNABLESWITCHjack. 2. Afterturningthepoweron,useGlobalP2:Foot SwitchAssignandFootSwitchPolarityto assignthefunctioncontrolledbythefootswitch andtospecifythepolarity. Formoreinformation,see21a:FootSwitch& Pedal/Damperonpage 781oftheParameterGuide.

3. Digital audio input/output connections Digital audio output


TheKRONOSmainstereooutputcanbedigitally transmittedtoanaudiosystem,digitalmixer,orother devicethatcanacceptasamplingrateof48kHz. UseanopticalcabletoconnecttheS/P DIFOUT (MAIN)jacktotheopticaldigitalinputjackofyour device. ThiswillcarrythesameaudiosignalastheAUDIO OUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONOandRjacks. Note:TheMAINVOLUMEknobdoesntaffectthe volumeofthedigitaloutput.

Connecting a foot pedal


Youcanuseaconnectedfootpedaltocontrolvolume, modulation,orotherfunctions. 1. ConnectanoptionalXVP10orEXP2etc.tothe ASSIGNABLEPEDALjacks. 2. Afterturningthepoweron,useGlobalP2:Foot PedalAssigntoassignthefunctioncontrolledby thefootpedal. Formoreinformation,seeFootPedalAssignon page 781oftheParameterGuide.

Digital audio input


Youcanrecordorsamplethedigitaloutputofa S/P DIFdevicerunningat48kHz,suchasacomputer audiosystemordigitalmixer.Youcanalsoroutethe inputdirectlytotheKRONOSoutputs,orthroughthe internaleffects.

22

Setup Connections

5. Connecting USB devices


TheKRONOSsupportshighspeedUSB2.0for connectingtostoragedevices,suchasharddrives, flashmedia,andCDR/RWdrives,aswellasclass compliantUSBMIDIcontrollers.

YoucanalsoplaythechordpadsusingKorgUSB MIDIcontrollersequippedwithdrumpads,including: nanoPADandnanoPAD2 microKONTROL padKONTROL KONTROL49 Whenthesecontrollersareconnected,theKRONOS willautomaticallydeterminetheMIDIassignmentsof thecontrollerspads18,andmapthemdirectlytothe KRONOSpads. Formoreinformation,seeUSBMIDIcontrollerson page 1128oftheParameterGuide.

USB storage devices


Youcansaveandloadsamples,sounds,sequences, andotherdatatoandfromUSB2.0storagedevicesfor backup,transferringtocomputers,etc. NotethatHDRtracksmustbeplayedfromand recordedontotheinternaldisk.Youcanbackthemup toUSBdevices,however. Themaximumsupportedcapacitydependsuponthe formatoftheUSBdevice.WithFAT16format,the maximumcapacityis4GB;withFAT32,themaximum is2Terabytes(2,000GB). 1. UseaUSBcabletoconnectyourUSBstorage devicetooneoftheKRONOSsUSBAports. StandardUSBcableshaveadifferentconnectorateach end.Plugtheflat,rectangularconnectorintothe KRONOS,andplugthesquareishconnectorintothe externalUSBstoragedevice. Note:Ifthedeviceyouareusingdoesnotsupporthot plugging,makeconnectionswiththedevicepowered off,andthenturnonthepowerofyourdevice. 2. Waitafewsecondsforthedevicetoberecognized. 3. UsetheDiskmodeDriveSelectscreentocheck theconnection. Formoreinformation,seeLoading&savingdata,and creatingCDsonpage 181.

Hot-plugging
TheKRONOSsupportsUSBhotplugging.Thismeans thatyoucanconnectordisconnecttheUSBcablewhile thepowerison. Note:Inordertousehotplugging,theUSBdeviceyou areconnectingmustalsosupporthotplugging.

8 USB devices maximum


KRONOShastwoseparateUSB2.0ports,andcan supportupto8USBdevicessimultaneously.Notethat itdoesntmatterhowthedevicesareconnected;evenif youusehubsordifferentports,themaximumis always8devices.

USB Power
SomeUSBdevicesgettheirpowerfromtheUSB connection.Thesearecalledbuspowereddevices, andtheyaresupportedbytheKRONOS. OtherUSBdevicesmayrequireaseparatepower source,inadditiontotheUSBconnection;inthiscase, youllneedtouseanappropriatepoweradaptorfor thedevice. Thereisalimitationtothetotalcurrentsuppliedtoall connectedUSBdevices,asdefinedbytheUSB specification.Ifthetotalcurrentconsumptionofthe connecteddevicesexceedsthislimit,theKRONOS maynotcorrectlyrecognizetheconnectedUSB devices.Ifthishappens,anerrormessageofUSBHub PowerExceeded!willappear. Toavoidthisproblem,ifyouconnectmorethanone USBdevice,pleaseuseaselfpoweredUSBhubinself poweredmode.Fordetailsonconnectionsandsettings foryourhub,pleaserefertoitsdocumentation. Fordetailsontheelectricalcurrentusedbyaspecific USBdevice,refertoitsownersmanual.

Type B

CD-R/RW, hard disk, removable disk, etc.

Type A USB hub Type B

USB MIDI Controller


USB cable

Type A

USB MIDI controllers


YoucanconnectclasscompliantUSBMIDIcontrollers directlytotheKRONOS,andusethemjustasyou wouldcontrollersconnectedtothe5pinMIDIjacks. Todoso: 1. UseaUSBcabletoconnectyourUSBMIDI controllertooneoftheKRONOSsUSBAports. IfthecontrollerissettoadifferentMIDIchannelthan theKRONOSsGlobalMIDIChannel,youcanuseitto playadifferentsoundthanthelocalkeyboardin CombinationsorSongs,ascontrolledbytheTimbreor TrackMIDIsettings.

6. Connections to MIDI equipment & computers


Connections to MIDI equipment
Thekeyboard,controllers,andsequenceretc.ofthe KRONOScanbeusedtocontrolanexternalMIDItone generator.Conversely,anotherMIDIkeyboardor sequencercancontrolthetonegeneratorofKRONOS toproducesound. UseMIDIcablestoconnecttheMIDIconnectorsof KRONOSwiththeMIDIconnectorsofyour externaldevice.

23

Introduction to KRONOS

Formoreinformation,seeConnectingMIDIdevices &computersonpage 1127oftheParameterGuide.

Connections to a computer via MIDI


InconjunctionwithMIDIsoftwareonyourcomputer, youcanusetheKRONOSasaMIDIcontroller,and transmittheKRONOSsequencerplaybackasMIDI data.YoucanalsoplaytheKRONOSsoundsfromthe computer.Todoso: UseaMIDIinterfacetoconnecttheMIDI connectorsofKRONOStotheMIDIconnectorsof yourcomputer. Formoreinformation,seeConnectingMIDIdevices &computersonpage 1127oftheParameterGuide. Note:SomeUSBMIDIinterfacesmaynotbeableto transmitorreceivetheKRONOSsMIDISystem Exclusivemessages.

Thelicenseagreementforthissoftwareisprovided separately.Youmustreadthislicenseagreement beforeyouinstallthissoftware.Yourinstallationofthis softwarewillbetakentoindicateyouracceptanceof thisagreement.

Windows System Requirements


Computer:USBportrequired(aUSBhostcontroller madebyIntelisrecommended) Operatingsystem:MicrosoftWindowsXPHome Edition/ProfessionalServicePack2orlater;alleditions ofMicrosoftWindowsVistaandMicrosoftWindows7

Macintosh System Requirements


Computer:USBportrequired Operatingsystem:MacOSX10.4.11,10.5.8,orOSX 10.6.4orlater

7. Connection to a computer via USB


TheKRONOSsUSBBportletsyouconnecttoaUSB equippedMacorWindowsPC,forsendingand receivingMIDIandaudio,andforconnectingtothe KRONOSEditor. Todoso: 1. InstalltheKorgUSBMIDIdriverfromthe includedAccessoryDVD2,orasdownloaded fromtheKorgwebsite. OnAccessoryDisc2,theinstallersarelocatedinthe followingdirectories.Doubleclickthedriverinstaller tostarttheinstallation. Windows:Windowsfolder/DrvTools folder/DrvTools_e.exe MacOSX:Macfolder/KORGUSBMIDIDriver folder/KORGMIDIDriver.pkg 2. Followtheonscreeninstructionstocompletethe installation. ForbothWindowsandMacOSXtheKRONOSuses thestandard,builtinUSBaudiodrivers,sono additionalinstallationisnecessaryforaudio. 3. TurnontheKRONOS. 4. ConnecttheKRONOSsUSBBporttooneofyour computersUSBports. WhentheKRONOSisconnected,thecomputerwill recognizeitasaUSBMIDIDeviceandUSBAudio Device. Formoreinformation,includingdetailsonsettingup andusingtheKRONOSEditor/PlugInEditor,please seetheKRONOSEditor/PlugInEditorManual (PDF).

About the software


ThemostrecentversionsoftheKorgdriversand Editor/PlugInEditorcanbedownloadedfromthe Korgwebsite(http://www.korg.com/kronos).

Please note before use


Copyrighttoallsoftwareincludedinthisproductis thepropertyofKorgInc.

24

Update information New features in software version 2.0

Update information New features in software version 2.0


KRONOSsoftwareversion2.0addsanumberofnew features,includingUserSampleBanks,supportfor installingasecondinternalSSD,improvedAkaiand SoundFont2.0import,andsupportforUSBethernet adaptorsfortransferringfilesbetweentheKRONOS andyourcomputer. Inadditiontothesenewfeatures,theupdateincludes variousimprovementsandresolutionstospecific operationalissues. Ifyoureusinganolderversion,youcandownloadthe latestsoftwarefreeofchargefromtheKorgwebsite (http://www.korg.com/kronos).

Second Internal SSD support


TheKRONOSnowsupportsinstallationofasecond internalSSD,formorestorageofsamples,audio tracks,andprogramdata.Installationmustbedoneby anauthorizedservicecenter;userinstallationisnot supportedandmayvoidyourwarranty.Contactyour KorgDistributorfordetailsonpurchaseand installation.

USB Ethernet and FTP support


TheKRONOSnowsupportsUSBEthernetadaptors andincludesabuiltinFTPserverforfast,easyfile transferwithpersonalcomputers.Youcanbackup filestoyourcomputer,transfersamplestothe KRONOS,andorganizeandrenamefilesand directoriesontheKRONOSinternaldisks. TheKRONOSsupportsaspecificsetofofftheshelf USBEthernetadaptors.SupporteddevicesasofMay 2012arelistedbelow. AppleUSBEthernetAdapter(MC704ZM/A) CiscoLinksysUSB300M TRENDnetTU2ET100 BUFFALOLUA3U2AGT BUFFALOLUA3U2ATX BUFFALOLUAU2KTX IODATAETX3US2 LogitecLANTX/U2B LogitecLANTX/U2H3 PlanexUE100TXG3 Adaptorsotherthanthoselistedabovewillnot functionproperly. Formoreinformation,seeConnectingtocomputers viaUSBEthernetandFTPonpage 167.

User Sample Banks


UserSampleBanksbringthebenefitsofEXstoyour owncustomsamplelibraries.Youcanloadandplay gigabytesofyourcustomorconvertedsamplesat once,usingVirtualMemory.Diskandmemory managementisimproved:youcancreatesubsetsof UserSampleBanks,andmixandmatchpartsof differentbanks,withoutduplicatingsamplesondisk. Itsalsoeasytosharesoundswithfriendsand collaborators,sinceProgramsmaintainlinkstoUser SampleBanksevenwhensamplesaremovedondisk orloadedontodifferentsystems. Formoreinformation,seeUserSampleBankson page 154.

Improved Akai and SoundFont 2.0 import


Version2.0featuressignificantlyimprovedAkaiand SoundFont2.0importfunctionality.Mostnotably,up to16stereovelocityzonesarenowsupportedwithina singleHD1Program,byusingstereoMultisamples andbothOSC1andOSC2.

New features in software version 1.5


KRONOSsoftwareversion1.5addsanumberofnew features,includingtheabilitytoloadmoresoundsand samplesatonce,supportforinstallingadditional RAM,andsupportforKorgUSBpadcontrollerssuch asthenanoPAD2. Version1.5alsosupportstheKRONOSEditorand PluginEditorsoftware,providingeditor/librarian capabilitiesforMacOSXandWindowsand compatibilitywithpopularDAWsoftware. Inadditiontothesenewfeatures,theupdateincludes variousimprovementsandresolutionstospecific operationalissues.

7 additional User Banks


KRONOSversion1.5adds7moreUserBankseachof Programs,WaveSequencesandDrumKits,numbered USERAAthroughUSERGG.Thesebanksare initializedbydefault,freeforstoringeitheryourown soundsorlibrariesfromKorgandthirdpartysound developers. ProgramBanksareeasilyaccessedfromthefront panelhardwarebypressingboththeINTandUSER buttonssimultaneously.Forinstance,toselectUSER DD,pressbothINTDandUSERD.

25

Introduction to KRONOS

Support for additional RAM


Installationofanadditional1GBofRAMisnow supported,andcanbeperformedatanyauthorized Korgservicecenter.Thisapproximatelydoublesthe maximumavailablesampleRAM,uptoabout2GB.Of course,whenloadingEXsusingVirtualMemory,the totalsizeoftheloadedsampledatacanbemuch greater. TheKRONOSuseswidelyavailable,offtheshelf DIMMs.InstallationbyanauthorizedKorgservice centerisrequired;userinstallationisnotsupported andmayvoidyourwarranty.Formoreinformationon howtopurchaseandarrangeforinstallationofRAM, pleasecontactyourcountrysKorgDistributor: http://www.korg.co.jp/English/Distributors/index.html ForcompatibilitywiththeKRONOS,RAMmust complywiththefollowingspecification: 240PinPC26400CL5(orCL6)DDR2800nonECC UnbufferedDIMM1GB

oranyVSTorAUcompatiblesoftwareonMacOSX. TheKRONOSEditorandPlugInEditorwillbe availableforfreedownloadatwww.korg.com/kronos.

4x increase to Sampling Mode Multisamples, Samples and Multisample Indexes


ThemaximumnumberofMultisamplesinSampling Modehasbeenincreasedfrom1,000to4,000,andthe maximumnumbersofSamplesandMultisample Indexeshaveeachbeenincreasedfrom4,000to16,000. These4xincreaseswillbeespeciallyhelpfulwhen loadinglibrarieswithlargenumbersofrelativelyshort samples,suchasdrums. NotethatEXsandUserSampleBankdatadoesnot counttowardsthesemaximums;theyapplytothe SamplingModedataonly.

Support for USB MIDI and Korg USB pad controllers


Version1.5addssupportforconnectingUSBMIDI classcompliantcontrollersdirectlytotheKRONOS. Forinstance,youcanuseaKorgmicroKEYasan auxiliarysynthactionkeyboardforaKRONOS73or 88. Evenbetter,KorgUSBMIDIcontrollerswithpads includingthenanoPAD,nanoPAD2,padKONTROL, microKONTROL,andKONTROL49areautomatically mappedtotheKRONOSchordpads,forplayingand programmingdrums,triggeringchords,andselecting andassigningchordsforChordMode. Formoredetails,seeUSBMIDIcontrollerson page 1128oftheParameterGuide.

KRONOS Editor and Plug-In Editor


Version1.5addssupportfortheKRONOSEditorand PlugInEditor,whichletyoueditandorganizesounds fromyourMacOSXorWindowscomputer.Plugin operationallowsyoutosavesettingsaspartofyour projectwithanyVSTcompatibleWindowssoftware,

26

Playing and editing Programs


Playing Programs
Whats a Program?
ProgramsarethebasicsoundsoftheKRONOS.You canplaythembythemselves,layerthemtogetherin Combinations,orplayadifferentProgramoneachof the16MIDItracks,eitherfromtheinternalsequencer orfromexternalcomputerbasedsequencers. Thissectionofthemanualtakesaquicklookatplaying Programs,includingtoursofthefrontpanel controllersandbasiceditingtechniques.

Selecting Programs
ThereareseveraldifferentwaystoselectPrograms. Eachoneisconvenientinadifferentway: Usingthefrontpanelbuttons,valueslider,and valueknob,youcanselectProgramsquicklyvia physicalcontrols SelectingbyBankandnumber(viathetouch screen)letsyoubrowsethroughallofthePrograms inmemory,tofindtheonethatyouwant SelectingbyProgramcategory(viathetouch screen)letsyoufilterProgramsbysoundtype,such asPianosorDrums UsingafootswitchletsyouchangeProgramseven whilebothhandsarebusyplayingonthekeyboard convenientforliveapplications MIDIprogramchangemessagesletyouselect Programsremotely,fromeitheraMIDIsequencer oranexternalMIDIcontroller

Program Bank Contents


Asshippedfromthefactory,thecontentsofthe ProgramBanksareasfollows: Programbankcontents Bank
INTA INTBF GM (I-G) g(1)g(9) g(d) USERA USERB USERC USERD USERE USERF USERG USERAACC USERDDEE USERFFGG

Contents
SGX-1, EP-1, and best of all other EXi HD-1 Programs GM2 main Programs GM2 variation Programs GM2 drum Programs HD-1, including Ambient Drums and Sound Effects AL-1 AL-1 and CX-3 STR-1 MS-20EX & PolysixEX MOD-7 Initialized HD-1 Programs Programs for EXs trial versions * Initialized EXi Programs * Initialized HD-1 Programs * EXi

Bank Type

HD-1

GM

Set Lists
ProgramscanalsobeselectedinSetLists,alongwith CombinationsandSongs.Formoreinformation,see SetListsonpage 113.

Bank type can be set to either HD-1 or EXi

Overview: Program Banks


KRONOSshipsfromthefactorywithabout1,800 Programsloadedintomemory.Allofthefactory Programscanbeoverwrittenwithyourownedits,if desiredexceptfortheGMbanks. HundredsofotherProgramslotsareleftopenforyour ownprogrammingoradditionalsoundlibraries.The exactcontentsmaydifferdependingontheKRONOS model. Programsareorganizedinto21Banks,asdescribed below.YoucanalsostoremanymoreProgramsonthe internaldisk(s),oronexternalUSB2.0devices. Additionalbanksofsoundsmayalreadybeonthe internaldiskasshippedfromthefactory. USERGisthedefaultlocationforProgramscreated byresampling.

*BankcontentsmaydifferdependingontheKRONOS model.

Changing the Bank Type for USER banks


BankscancontaineitherHD1ProgramsorEXi Programs,butnotboth.Thisassignmentisfixedfor theInternalbanks,butcanbesetseparatelyforeachof theUserbanks. TochangethetypeofaUserbank: 1. PressthefrontpanelGLOBALbuttontoenter Globalmode. 2. SelecttheBasictab. 3. Pressthepagemenubutton,andselectSet ProgramUserBankType. 4. ChangetheTypeforthedesiredbanks.Leaveall oftheotherbankssettoNoChange.

27

Playing and editing Programs

Important:Settingabankstypewilleraseallofthe Programdatainthebanksomakesurethatyoure noterasinganyProgramsyouwanttokeep! 5. PresstheOKbutton. Anareyousure?dialogappears. 6. Ifyourecertainofthechange,pressOKagain. Theselectedbankswillnowbeinitializedtousethe newProgramtypes.

Selecting by bank and number


YoucanselectProgramsfromalistorganizedby Programbank. 1. PresstheProgramSelectpopupbutton. TheBank/ProgramSelectdialogappears. Bank/ProgramSelectmenu

Selecting with the front-panel buttons


YoucanselectProgramsusingthefrontpanelbuttons, withouttouchingthescreen.Todoso: 1. MakesurethatthefrontpanelPROGbuttonislit. ThismeansthatyoureinProgrammode,inwhichyou canselectandeditPrograms.Ifthebuttonisntlit, pressitnow;itwilllightup,andthemainProgram Playpagewillappear. 2. GotothemainProgramPlaypage. ThemainPlaypageshowsanoverviewofthesound structure,suchasoscillators,filters,etc. 3. MakesurethattheProgramnameisselected. Ifitisnotselected,gotothePROGRAMP0:Playpage andtouchtheProgramsname,sothatitshighlighted. 4. UsetheVALUEcontrollerstoselecttheprogram numberthatyouwishtoplay. Youcanusethefollowingmethodstoselectaprogram. TurntheValuedial. PresstheInc orDec buttons. Usethenumerickeypad[0][9]tospecifythe number,andpresstheENTERkey. 5. ToselectbanksINTAGorUSERAG,press andreleasethecorrespondingBANKbutton. Forexample,toselectbankINTB,presstheIBbutton inthetoprowofBankbuttons.TheIBbuttonwill light,andthenameINTBwillappearintheupperleft oftheLCDscreen. WhenyouselectaBank,thebuttonsLEDwilllight, andtheselectedbankwillappearontheupperleftside oftheLCDscreen. 6. ToselectbanksUSERAAGG,pressandholda pairofIandUBANKbuttonstogether. Forexample,toselectbankUSERCC,pressandhold theICbutton,andthenpresstheUCbutton.Ifyou prefer,youcanalsopressthemintheoppositeorder: firstUC,andthenIC. Inthisillustration,bankINTAisselected.Theliston therightshowstheProgramscontainedinthatbank. 2. Pressthetabsontheleftsideofthedisplayto selectabank. Therearemorebanksthancanbeshownatonetime, sothebanksaredividedintotwogroupsoftabs:INT AUSERGandUSERAAUSERGG. 3. Ifnecessary,usetheMorebuttonsbelowthe tabstoswitchbetweenshowingthetabsforINT AUSERGandUSERAAUSERGG. 4. PressoneoftheProgramnamesinthelisttoselect aProgram. TheselectedProgramwillbehighlighted,andthe keyboardwillimmediatelyswitchtothenewsound. 5. Ifyoulike,playafewnotestohearthenew Program. YoucanplaythenewProgramwhilethemenuisstill showing,withoutneedingtopressOK. 6. WhenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedProgram, presstheOKbuttontoclosethepopupmenu. IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,theselectionyoumade herewillbediscarded,andyouwillreturntothe programthathadbeenselectedbeforeyouopenedthe menu.

28

Playing Programs Selecting Programs

Selecting by Category
YoucanselectProgramsfromwithinacategory,such askeyboard,organ,bass,anddrums.Whenshipped fromthefactory,theProgramsareorganizedinto16 categories,eachwithseveralsubcategories.Thereare also2morecategories,initiallynamedUser16and User17,whichyoucanuseandrenameasdesired. 1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton. TheCategory/ProgramSelectdialogappears. Category/ProgramSelectmenu

2. TouchtheFavoritebox,underneaththeTempo parameter,sothattheboxisfilledinwithared square(thisshowsthattheboxischecked). 3. WritetheProgram. Thisisanimportantstep.Ifyoudontwritethe Program,thechangetotheFavoritescheckboxwont beretained. FordetailsonhowtowritePrograms,seeSavingyour editsonpage 42.

Using a footswitch to select Programs


YoucanassignafootswitchtostepthroughPrograms onebyone,eithergoingup(0,1,2,3,etc.)orgoing down(3,2,1etc.).ThisletsyouchangePrograms withoutusingyourhandsgreatforquickProgram changesinliveperformancesituations. Therearetwowaysofdoingthis:byassigningthe footswitchtoProgramUp/Down,ortoValueInc/Dec. ProgramUp/Downisrecommendedfornormaluse, whileValueInc/Decisaspecialpurposesetting,as describedbelow. Note:ThesesettingsapplytoSetListsand Combinations,aswell.

Assigning the footswitch to Program Up/Down


Intheillustrationabove,theMotionSynthcategoryis selected.ThelistontherightshowsthePrograms whichbelongtothatcategory. 2. Pressthetabslocatedtotheleftsideofthedisplay toselectadifferentcategory. Thenameoftheselectedcategorywillbedisplayedin fullinthelowerleftofthedisplay. 3. Optionally,focusonamorespecificgroupof soundsbyselectingasubcategoryfromthe secondcolumnoftabs. Thefullnameofthesubcategoryalsoappearsinthe lowerleftofthedisplay. 4. Pressoneofthenamesinthecenterareatoselecta Program. TheselectedProgramwillbehighlighted. 5. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedprogram, presstheOKbuttontoclosethepopupmenu. IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,yourselectionwillbe discarded,andyouwillreturntotheProgramthathad beenselectedwhenyouopenedthepopupmenu. AssigningthefootswitchtoProgramUporProgram DownletsyoudirectlycontrolProgramchangesfrom thefootswitch. Tosetthisup: 1. Connectafootswitchtotherearpanel ASSIGNABLESWITCHinput. Useasimpleon/offfootswitch,suchastheoptional KorgPS1. 2. PresstheGLOBALbuttontoenterGlobalmode. 3. GototheControllerstaboftheControllers/Scales page. 4. SettheFootSwitchPolarityparametertomatch theconnectedswitch. 5. Atthetopofthepage,settheFootSwitchAssign parametertoProgramUp(orProgramDown). Forthissettingtopersistafterpowerdown,youneed towritetheGlobalsettings. 6. Openthemenu,andselecttheWriteGlobal Settingcommand. TheWriteGlobalSettingdialogwillappear. 7. PressOK,andthenOKagaintoconfirm. Now,whenyoureturntoProgrammode,thefoot switchwillstepthroughtheProgramsonebyone.

Using the Favorites check-box


TheBankandCategoryselectpopupsbothincludea Favoritecheckboxatthebottomofthescreen.This letsyoutrimthelisttoshowonlyProgramsyouve markedasfavorites. IftheselectedBankorCategorycontainsnoPrograms markedasFavorites,thecheckboxwillbegrayedout andunavailable.Whenshippedfromthefactory,no Programswillbemarked(weleavethatuptoyou, sincetheyshouldbeyourfavorites!). TomarkaProgramasaFavorite: 1. GototheProgramP0:Playpage.

Assigning the footswitch to Value Inc/Dec


ThisletsyouusetheAssignableFootSwitchto duplicatethefunctionsofthefrontpanelInc or Dec buttons. Thisisaspecialcasesetting,butitmaybeconvenient ifyouliketokeeptheBankorCategoryselect windowsopenasyouplay,sothatyoucanseethelist ofavailableProgramsorCombinations.Inthisspecific case,theProgramUp/Downassignmentswillnot work(sinceProgramchangesareignoredwhilethe

29

Playing and editing Programs

windowisopen).However,assigningtheFootSwitch totheIncorDecbuttonletsyoustepthroughtheitems inthelist,onebyonejustlikepressingthefront panelbuttons. Tosetthisup: 1. Followsteps14underAssigningthefootswitch toProgramUp/Down,above. 2. Atthetopofthepage,settheFootSwitchAssign parametertoValueInc(orValueDec). Forthissettingtopersistafterpowerdown,youneed towritetheGlobalsettings. 3. Openthemenu,andselecttheWriteGlobal Settingcommand. TheWriteGlobalSettingdialogwillappear. 4. PressOK,andthenOKagaintoconfirm. Now,thefootswitchwillactjustlikepressingthe frontpanelIncorDecbutton. Note:Thefootswitchwillworklikethisfortheentire KRONOSnotjustwhentheProgramorCombination Selectwindowisopen.

General MIDI Programs


InternalbankGcontainsafullsetofGeneralMIDI2 Programs,aswellassubbanksg(1)g(9)(GM2 variationprograms),andbankg(d)(drums). WhenyouselectProgramsusingtheBankorCategory windows,youllnoticethataVariationbuttonappears whenyouselectbankINTG.Eachtimeyoupressthis button,orrepeatedlypressthefrontpanelINTG button,youllstepthroughtheGeneralMIDIbanksin thefollowingorder:Gg(1)g(2)g(8)g(9)G

Selecting Programs via MIDI


YoucanselectanyProgramfromanybankbyusing MIDIProgramChangemessagesinconjunctionwith MIDIBankSelectmessages.WhenyouselectPrograms fromthefrontpanel,theappropriateMIDImessages aresentautomatically(unlessMIDIfiltersareactive; seebelow). IfyouareenteringtheMIDImessagesmanuallyintoa sequencer,notethattheBankSelectmessageneedsto comebeforetheProgramSelectmessage.

In Program mode, use the Global MIDI Channel


WiththeexceptionoftheDrumTrack,alltransmission andreceptionofMIDIdatainProgrammodeis performedontheGlobalMIDIChannel.Youcanset thisontheGlobalmodeP1MIDIpage.

Bank Map
BankSelectmessagescanworkinoneoftwoways,as controlledbytheBankMapparameterontheGlobal P0BasicSetuppage.Thefactorydefaultsettingwill workformoststandardapplications,andmostpeople willneverneedtochangeit.IfyouuseGeneralMIDI sequences,thealternativeGM(2)settingmaybe helpful.Formoreinformation,seeBankMapon page 755oftheParameterGuide.

MIDI filters
YoucanuseMIDIfilterstocontrolwhetherornot ProgramChangeandBankSelectmessageswillbe transmittedand/orreceived.Thefiltersaresetupon theGlobalmodeP1MIDIpage.Formoreinformation, see11c:MIDIFilteronpage 775oftheParameter Guide.

KRONOS Plug-In Editor


TheKRONOSPlugInEditorincludessupportfor patchlists,allowingyoutoselectPrograms, Combinations,Songs,andSetListsSlotsbynamefrom withinyourDAWsoftwareofchoice.

30

Playing Programs Using Controllers

Using Controllers
TheKRONOSprovidesalotofhandsonwaysto controlthesoundthemodandpitchbendjoystick, theVectorjoystick,theribboncontroller,twoswitches (SW1andSW2),andtheControlSurfaceknobs, sliders,andswitches. Thesecontrolsletyoumodifythetone,pitch,volume, effects,etc.inrealtimewhileyouplay.

Vector Joystick
TheVectorJoystickletsyou controlthevolumebalance betweenOSC1andOSC2,and canalsogenerateCC messagestomodulate Programandeffects parameters. InCombiandSequencemodes,theVectorJoystickcan doallofthis,plusbalancethevolumesofthedifferent ProgramsintheCombi. TheVectorJoystickdoesallofthisinconjunctionwith theVectorEnvelope,whichisaflexible,multisegment envelopewithafewinterestingtwists.Formore information,seeUsingVectorSynthesisonpage 55.

Joystick

Resetting the Vector Joystick to the center


YoucanusethefrontpanelRESETCONTROLSbutton toresettheVectorJoysticksoutputvaluetoitsdefault centerposition.Todothis: Thejoystickmovesinfourdirections:left,right, forwards(awayfromyourself),andbackwards (towardsyourself).Eachofthefourdirectionscanbe usedtocontroladifferentfunction,suchas modulatingProgramoreffectsparameters.These assignmentscanbedifferentforeveryProgram,but generally,theydothefollowing: StandardJoystickfunctions Move the joystick
Left Right Forwards (away from yourself) Backwards (towards yourself)

1. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbutton. 2. WhileholdingRESETCONTROLS,movethe VectorJoystick. 3. ReleasetheRESETCONTROLSbutton. Thejoysticksoutputvaluewillnowberesettothe centerposition.

Ribbon Controller
Moveyourfingertotheleftandrightontheribbon controllertoapplyaneffect. Normally,thisisusedtocontrolpitch,volumeorfilter etc. YoucanusetheLockfunctionofSW1orSW2keysto holdtheeffectevenafteryoureleaseyourfingerfrom theribboncontroller.Formoredetails,seeUsingthe Lockfunctiononpage 32.

Controller Normally controls Name


JSX JS+X JS+Y JSY Pitch bend down Pitch bend up Vibrato Filter LFO (wah)

Joystick Lock
Thejoystickisspringloaded,sothatitautomatically returnstothecenterpositionwhenyouletgo. However,youcanuseeitherofthetwofrontpanel switches(SW1orSW2),orafootswitch,tolockthe currentpositionofthejoystick.Thisleavesyourhands freetoplayonthekeyboard,ortouseother controllers.Formoreinformation,pleaseseeUsing theLockfunctiononpage 32.

SW1 and SW2


Thesearethetwoswitches abovethejoystickand ribbon.YoucanuseSW1 andSW2tocontrolprogramparametersviaAMS (AlternateModulation),oreffectparametersviaDMod (DynamicModulation). Theycanalsotransposethekeyboardbyoctaves,turn portamentoon/off,orlockthemodulationvaluesof theribboncontroller,joystick,oraftertouch. Eachswitchmayworkaseitherasatoggleora momentaryswitch.InTogglemode,eachpress alternatesbetweenonandoff;inMomentarymode, theswitchonlychangesforaslongasyouholdit down.

31

Playing and editing Programs

EachProgram,Combination,andSongstoresitsown settingsforwhattheswitcheswilldo,andwhether eachswitchisonoroff(basedontheircurrentstates whentheProgram,Combination,orSongissaved). YoucanalsomakesettingsforSamplingmodeasa whole. InProgrammode,youcanchecktheassignmentsof SW1andSW2onthePlaypageAssignmenttab. Inallmodes,youcanedittheassignmentsforSW1/2 ontheSetUpControllerspage.
Programs (HD-1 and EXi) Combinations and Songs Sampling mode P1: Basic/Vector P1: EQ/Vector/Controller P4: EQ/Controller

4. Releasethejoystick,andplaythekeyboard. Themodulationwillstaythesameasitwaswhen SW2waspressed.Movingthejoystickawayfrom yourselfwillnotaffectthesound. 5. PresstheSW2keyonceagaintoreleasetheLock function.

WhenusingSW1/2forAMSorDmod,thedefault settingsareSW1Mod.:CC#80andSW2Mod.:CC#81. Foranexample,seeUsingDmodtochangethe feedbacklevelviaSW1onpage 209.Foracomplete listofthepossibleassignments,seeSW1/2 Assignmentsonpage 1104oftheParameterGuide. Note:Ifyouwishtokeepthesesettingsafterthepower isturnedoff,youmustsavetheProgram, Combination,orSong.SettingsforSamplingmode cannotbesaved. AnexampleofsettingsinaProgram

Locking the Ribbon Controller


1. SelectProgramINTB044:RealSuitE.Piano. 2. PresstheSW2key. TheLEDonSW2willlightup. 3. Touchtheribboncontroller,andmoveyourfinger leftandright. Movementinthe+Xdirectionwillbrightenthetone, andmovementintheXdirectionwilldarkenthe tone. 4. Liftyourfingerupfromtheribboncontroller. Thesoundwillremainasitwaswhenyoulast touchedtheribbon. 5. PresstheSW2keyonceagaintoreleasetheLock function. 6. PressthetablabeledCntrl/ViewEffect,togotothe Controller/ViewEffectpage. Intheupperrighthandportionofthescreen,notice thatSW2isassignedtoJSY&RibbonLock,andisset toToggle.ThismeansthatSW2isassignedtocontrol theLockfunctionforboththejoysticksYaxisandthe ribboncontroller.ManyProgramsandCombinations usethisassignment.

Using the Lock function


Locking the Joystick
1. Usingthefactorysounds,selectProgramINT B044:RealSuitE.Piano,andplaythekeyboard. 2. Movethejoystickawayfromyourself(the+Y direction). Thevibratoeffectwilldeepen. 3. Whileholdingthejoystickawayfromyourself, presstheSW2switch. Whenyoupresstheswitch,itsLEDwilllightup, andthemodulationeffectatthispointwillbe maintained.

Youcanalsolockboththeribbonandthejoystickat thesametime: 1. Movethejoystickinthe+Ydirection 2. PresstheSW2keytoturnontheLockfunction. 3. Moveyourfingerontheribboncontroller. 4. Releasethejoystick,andliftyourfingerupfrom theribbon. Theeffectsofboththeribbonandthejoystickwillbe maintaineduntilyoupressSW2againtoreleasethe lock. Lockcanalsobeappliedtoaftertouch,byassigning SW1orSW2toAfterTouchLock. FordetailsonthefunctionsthatyoucanassigntoSW1 andSW2,pleaseseetheSW1/2Assignments,on page 1104oftheParameterGuide.

32

Playing Programs Using Controllers

Control Surface knobs, sliders, & switches


TheControlSurfacehas8knobs,8slidersplusa masterslider,and16switches.Youcanusethesefor manydifferenttasks: Controllingmixer features,including volume,pan,EQ,FX sends,mute,andsolo Modulatingand editingsounds ControllingKARMA Controllingexternal MIDIdevices Youcanswitchthe ControlSurfacebetween itsdifferentfunctions usingeithertheon screentabsonthe ControlSurfacepage (theleftmosttabonP0 Play),orthefrontpanel ControlAssignswitches. Thetabsandthefront panelswitchesmirror oneanother;whenyou changeoneofthem,theotherchangesaswell. InProgrammode,youcanselectoneoffivedifferent functions: TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouadjustthevolume,pan,and sendlevelsforOscillators1and2,alongwiththe ProgramEQ(plussimilarcontrolsfortheDrumTrack, withtheexceptionofpan).InCombiandSequence modes,youcanalsousethistoselecttwodifferent banksofTimbresorTracks,asshownbytheLEDsto therightoftheswitch. AUDIO(INPUTS)letsyouadjustthevolume,pan, andsendlevelsfortheanalog,S/P DIF,andUSBaudio inputs.InSequencemode,youcanalsousethisto selecttwobanksofharddiskrecordingtracks,as shownbytheLEDstotherightoftheswitch. EXT(External)letsyousendMIDImessagesto externalMIDIdevices. RTKNOBS/KARMA(RTstandsforRealtime)lets youmodulatesoundsandeffectswiththeknobs,and controlKARMAwiththeslidersandswitches.For moredetails,seeEditingsounds&effectswiththe RealtimeKnobs,onpage 39. TONEADJ/EQ(ToneAdjust/EQ)givesyouhandson accesstosoundediting,usingthesliders,knobs,and switches.Formoredetails,seeUsingToneAdjust, onpage 41 Youcanfreelychangebackandforthbetweenthe differentfunctions,withoutlosinganyofyouredits.

1. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbutton. 2. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,movea sliderorknob,orpressoneofthecontrolsurface buttons. Theslider,knob,orswitchwillberesettothevalue storedintheProgram(or,ifapplicable,thedefault value). 3. Whenyouredone,releasetheRESET CONTROLSbutton. Toresetagroupofcontrolsatonce: 1. MakesurethattheControlSurfaceisshowingthe parametersyouwanttoreset. Asasafetyprecaution,youcanonlyresetthe parameterscurrentlydisplayedontheControlSurface. ThistakesintoaccountboththecurrentControlAssign setting,andtheMIXERKNOBSbutton. Forinstance,ifyouwanttoresetthevolumeandpan forbothOscillators,makesurethatControlAssignis settoTIMBRE/TRACK,andthatMIXERKNOBSisset toINDIVIDUALPAN. 2. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbutton. 3. WhileholdingdownRESETCONTROLS,press thecurrentControlAssignbuttonagain. Allofthesliders,knobs,andswitchesintheControl Assigngroupwillberesettothevaluesstoredinthe Program. Youcanalsoresetallofthefadersandswitchesinthe KARMAmodule,byholdingRESETCONTROLSand thenpressingtheKARMAMODULECONTROL button.Similarly,toresetasingleKARMAScene,hold RESETCONTROLSandpressanyoftheSCENE buttons. Finally,youcanalsousethistoclearallsolos,by holdingRESETCONTROLSandthenpressingthe SOLObutton. Formoreinformation,seeRESETCONTROLSon page 22oftheParameterGuide.

VALUE slider
WhenaprogramnumberisselectedinProgramP0: Playpage,orwhenacombinationnumberisselected inCombinationmodepageP0:Playpage,youcanuse theVALUEslidertomodulateProgramandeffects parameters.

Keyboard
Velocity
Velocityisameasureofhowhardyouplayanoteon thekeyboard.Thiscanbeusedtomodulatemany differentaspectsofthesound,suchasvolume, brightness,orthecharacteroftheattack.

After Touch
Thekeyboardcanalsomeasurehowhardyoupress downafteryouplayanotehencethetermafter touch.Youcanusethistoshapenotesovertime, controlling(forinstance)volumeorvibratoamount.

Resetting controls to their saved values


ThefrontpanelRESETCONTROLSbuttonletsyou recallthestoredordefaultsettingsforanyslider,knob, orswitchonthecontrolsurface. Toresetasingleknob,slider,orswitch:

33

Playing and editing Programs

Note Number
Soundscanbeprogrammedtochangeincharacter basedonthenotebeingplayed.Asyouplayhigheror loweronthekeyboard,thenotenumbercanmodulate thetimbresuchasbecomingbrighterasyouplay higher.Envelopesmayalsobecomefasterorslower; thevolumemaychange;andsoon.

TimeKnobs,SW1/2,thepads,KARMAsliders,or KARMAswitches TheswitchsfunctionissetinGlobalmode(onthe ControllerstaboftheControllers/Scalespage),sothat italwaysworksthesameregardlessofthecurrent Program,Combi,orSong. Formoreinformation,pleaseseeSettingupthe AssignableSwitchandPedalonpage 161.

Foot Pedals and Switches Damper Pedal (Sustain)


Thedamperpedalisalsosometimescalledthesustain pedal.Itactslikethesimilarlynamedpedalonan acousticpiano;whenyouholddownthepedal,notes willcontinuetosustainevenwhenyouliftyourhands offofthekeyboard.

Assignable Foot Pedal


Thisletsyouuseacontinuouscontrollerpedal,suchas theKorgEXP2footcontrollerorKorgXVP10 EXP/VOLpedal,asanassignablecontroller. LiketheAssignableFootSwitch,describedabove,the FootPedalcanbeusedformanydifferentfunctions, including: MasterVolume ChannelVolume,Pan,orExpression Assignablesoundmodulation,asseveraldifferent AMSorDmodsources EffectsSendlevelcontrol Duplicationofmanyfrontpanelcontrols,including themodulationjoystick,ribbon,valueslider,Real TimeKnobs,orKARMAsliders Thepedalsfunctionissetglobally(ontheControllers taboftheControllers/Scalespage),sothatitalways worksthesameregardlessofthecurrentProgram, Combi,orSong.Formoreinformation,pleasesee SettinguptheAssignableSwitchandPedalon page 161.

Damper Switch vs. Half-Damper


Youcanuseeitherastandardfootswitch(suchasthe KorgPS1)oraspecialhalfdamperpedal(suchasthe KorgDS1H)astheDamper. Ifyouuseafootswitch,itwillworklikeanormal synthesizersustainpedal:noteswillsustainforever,as longasthepedalishelddown. Ahalfdamperpedalisaspecialtypeofcontinuous footpedal(normalfootpedalswontworkproperlyfor thisapplication).Itoffersmoresubtlecontrolof sustain,whichcanbeespeciallyusefulforpiano sounds. Theoffandfullonpositionsofthehalfdamperwork justlikethefootswitch,butintermediatepositions modulatethereleasetimetoincreasesustainwithout makingitinfinite. TheKRONOSwillautomaticallysensewhenahalf damperisconnectedtotherearpanelDAMPERinput. Forproperoperation,youwillalsoneedtocalibrate thepedal,usingtheCalibrateHalfDampercommand intheGlobalpagemenu.

Damper and MIDI


TheDamperPedalissentandreceivedasMIDICC #64.InCombiandSequencemodes,youcanfilter CC#64sothatitonlyaffectssomeofthesoundsinthe CombiorSong.

Assignable Foot Switch


Thisletsyouuseasimplefootswitch,suchastheKorg PS1,asanassignablecontroller.Thefootswitchcan performawidevarietyoffunctions,suchas: Anassignablesourceformodulatingsoundsand effects Portamentoon/off Programselectupordown Sequencerstart/stoporpunchin/out TapTempo KARMAon/off,Latchon/off,orSceneselect DrumTrackon/off ChordSW Duplicationofmanyfrontpanelcontrols,including themodulationjoystick,ribbon,valueslider,Real

34

Playing Programs Using the Chord Pads

Using the Chord Pads


Overview
Programs,Combinations,andSongsallhaveaPads pageontheninthtabofP1: Programs:Basic/Vector>Pads CombinationsandSongs:EQ/Vector/Controller>Pads Youcanusethesepadsfor: StoringandselectingchordsforChordmode Selectingandtriggeringchords,especiallyforuse withKARMA Playingdrumsounds,especiallyinconjunction withacompatibleUSBMIDIpaddevice Thepadscanplayuptoeightnotechordsandthey evenrememberthevelocitiesoftheindividualnotes withinthechord. Inadditiontoplayingsoundsdirectly,thepadsare alsousedtoselectchordsforChordmode.Formore information,seeUsingChordmodeonpage 36. 2. UnderMIDICC#AssignVectorJoystick/Pads, setPads18tothedesiredMIDInotes. YoucanalsouseMIDICCs,ifyouprefer.WithCCs, thevalueoftheCCisusedasthepadsvelocity. Itsassimpleasthat;thepadswillnowrespondtothe specifiednotesorCCsontheGlobalchannel. Beaware,however,thatthiswillcompletelydedicate thesenotestotriggeringthepads;theywillnolonger triggersoundsnormally.Forthisreason,youmaywish toassignnoteseitherbeloworabovethestandard keyboardrange(forinstance,C1throughG1). AllofthisalsoappliestonotesplayedontheGlobal Channelfromthelocalkeyboard,withthesame restriction:theassignednotesbecomededicatedto playingthepads. Formoreinformation,see21c:MIDICC#Assign VectorJoystick/Padsonpage 782oftheParameter Guide.

Playing the pads from Korg USB MIDI controllers


YoucanalsoplaythepadsusingKorgUSBMIDI controllersequippedwithdrumpads,including: nanoPADandnanoPAD2 microKONTROL padKONTROL KONTROL49 TouseanyoftheseKorgcontrollers,simplyconnect thecontrollertooneoftheKRONOSstwoUSBA ports.TheKRONOSwillautomaticallydeterminethe MIDIassignmentsofthecontrollerspads18,and mapthemdirectlytotheKRONOSpads. Formoredetails,seeUSBMIDIcontrollerson page 1128oftheParameterGuide.

Toavoiddamagingthedisplay,usecarewhen playingtheonscreenpads.Donotpressstrongly onthedisplayorstrikeforcefully;instead,usea lightandprecisetouch.Velocityiscontrolledby position,andnotbyforce.

Enable Pad Play button


Thepadsplayeverytimeyoutouchwithintheir boundaries.Ifyoureeditingthestorednotesand velocitiesmanually,youmaywishtotemporarily disablethisfeature.Todoso: 1. TouchthePadPlaybuttonatthetopofthedisplay, toturnitoff. Thebuttonslightwillgodark,toshowthatitis disabled. Onceyourefinishedediting,turnitonagain: 2. TouchthePadPlaybuttonagain,toturniton. Thebuttonslightwillgoon,toshowthatitisenabled. Note:EnablePadPlayappliesonlytotheonscreen pads,anddoesnotaffectpadtriggeringfromMIDI, thelocalkeyboard,orUSBMIDIdevices.

Playing the pads


Playing the pads from the screen
Youcanplaythepadsdirectlyfromthescreen. Velocityiscontrolledbywhereyoutouchthepad; lowerissofter,andhigherislouder.(Youcanalso enableFixedVelocitymode;seeFixedVelocityon page 36.) Ifindividualnotesinthechordhavedifferentstored velocities,thesearescaledbytheoverallvelocity. Note:fromthescreen,onlyonepadcanbeplayedata time.

Playing the pads from MIDI or the keyboard


PadscanbetriggeredbyincomingMIDInotesorCCs, orfromthelocalkeyboard.Todoso: 1. GototheGlobalP2:Controllerspage.

35

Playing and editing Programs

Assigning notes and chords to pads


Youcanassignsinglenotesandchordstothepadsin threedifferentways.

Copying notes from one pad to another


Tocopythenoteassignmentsfromonepadtoanother: 1. Pressandreleasethepadwhosenotesyouwantto copy. 2. PresstheChordAssignbutton. 3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketocopythe notes. Thenewpadwillnowplaythesamenotesasthe originalpad.

Play the notes, and then press Chord Assign


1. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes. 2. PresstheChordAssignbutton. 3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketoassignthe notes. Thatsit!Thenotesarenowassignedtothepad.

Merging two or more pads together


Usingtheonscreenpads,onlyonepadcanbeplayed atatime.WhenusingMIDI,thekeyboard,oraKorg USBMIDIpadcontroller,however,multiplepadscan beplayedatonce.Youcanusethistomergetogether theassignmentsfromtwoormorepads,aslongasthe totalnumberofnotesis8orfewer.Todoso: 1. Playandholdallofthepadsthatyoudliketo merge,sothattheyreallsoundingatthesame time,andthenreleasethem. Allofthepadsmustbehelddownatthesametime. 2. PresstheChordAssignbutton. 3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketocopythe notes. Youcanevenuseoneofthepadsthatwasbeing merged,ifyoulike.Afterpressingthedestinationpad, youredone.

Press Chord Assign, and then play notes


Thismethodletsyoucreateachordoutofwidely spacednotes,evenifyoucantplayallofthenotes simultaneously. 1. PresstheChordAssignbutton. 2. Playasinglenote,orachordofupto8notes. Youcanplayasinglenote,orasimplechord. Ifyoulike,youcanalsoplayupto8notesasalegato phrase.Aslongasyoutakecarethatthenotesoverlap eachother,theentirephrasewillberecordedasa singlechord.Youcantakeaslongasyouliketoplay thephrase. 3. Pressthepadtowhichyoudliketoassignthe notes. Afterpressingthepad,youredone!

Editing notes and velocities


Onceassigned,youcanedittherecordednotesand velocities.Ifyoulike,youcanalsoenternewnotesthis way,bymanuallyenteringthemasparametervalues. Formoreinformation,pleasesee19:Padson page 54oftheParameterGuide.

Fixed Velocity
Eachpadstoresavelocitylevelforeachofits8notes. TheFixedVelocitybutton,onthedisplayabovethe pads,controlswhetherornotthepadsrespondtothe touchlocation. WhenFixedVelocityison,thepadsalwaysusetheir storedvelocitysettings,regardlessofwhereyoutouch thepad. WhenFixedVelocityisoff,touchingthetopofthepad producesthepresetvelocities.Whenyouplaylower onthepad,thepresetvelocitiesarescaleddown accordingly,maintainingthebalancebetweenthenotes inthechord.

Copying pads
Copyingonepadtoanotherisjustlikeassigningnotes fromthekeyboard. Aswithassigningnotestothekeyboard,youcan eitherplaythepadsfirst,orpressChordAssignfirst. Intheinterestofsavingspaceandtime,onlythefirst methodisdescribedbelow.

Using Chord mode


Overview
Chordmodeletsyouchooseoneofthechords assignedtothepads,andthenplayitfromthe keyboard.Thechordistransposedaccordingtothe notethatyouplay;theplayednotespecifiesthelowest noteofthechord,andthehighernotesaretransposed tomatch.AswhenplayingchordsfromthePads themselves,eachnoteinthechordcanhaveadifferent storedvelocity,scaledbytheplayednote. Inadditiontousingtheonscreenparameters,youcan turnChordmodeonandoffviaSW1/2ortheFoot Switch,andchangechordssimplybypressingthe pads.InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcan makethesesettingsforeachTimbreorTrack,as desired.Naturally,youcancontrolallofthisviaMIDI aswell. Chordmodecanduplicatethewaythatsimilar featuresworkedonclassicanalogsynths(suchasthe originalPolysix),butitcanalsousealloftheVoice Assignoptionstocreatedifferenteffectssuchasmono legatochordswithfingeredportamento,orpoly chordsthatoverlaponeanother. Finally,notethatyoudonthavetouseChordmodeto playfullchords;youcanalsouseittocreatemore subtleeffects,suchasstackedoctavesorfifths.Youcan evenadjusttherelativelevelsoftheseadditional pitchesviathestoredvelocitiesoftheindividualchord notes.

36

Playing Programs Using Chord mode

Chord Switch
TheChordSwitch(abbreviatedChordSW)letsyou turnChordmodeonandoffviaSW1/2ortheFoot Switch. Important:ProgramswillonlyrespondtotheChord SWiftheirChordparameterhasbeensettoeither BasicorAdvanced.IfitssettoOff,thentheswitch willhavenoeffect.

What if Timbres/Tracks share the same channel, but have different Chord settings?
IfTimbres/Trackssharethesamechannel,buthave differentChordsettings,thentheChordSWaffects eachTimbre/Trackindividually,asbelow: Stored Setting Off Chord SW = On
Off

Basic
Basic Off

Advanced
Advanced Off

Assigning SW1/2 to control Chord on/off


WithinanyindividualProgram,Combi,orSong,you canseteitherSW1orSW2toturnChordmodeonand off.Todoso: 1. IntheProgram,Combi,orSong,gototheSetUp Controllerspage. 2. SelectChordSWastheassignmentforSW1or SW2.

Chord SW = Off Off

Example setup: keyboard split


Tocreateasplitwithasinglenotebassinthelefthand, andachordontheright: 1. SelectabassProgramforTimbre1,andapiano ProgramforTimbre2. 2. SetTimbre1sChordtoOff,andTimbre2sChord toBasic. Now,theChordSWwillenable/disablethechordfor therighthandonly.

Assigning the Foot Switch to control Chord on/off


YoucanalsoassigntheFootSwitchtoturnChord modeonandoff,sothatyoudontneedtomoveyour handsfromthekeyboardwhileperforming.This settingwillapplyglobally,regardlessofthecurrent Program,Combi,orSong.Todoso: 1. GototheGlobalFootSwitchAssignpage. 2. SelectChordSWfortheAssignableFootSwitch.

Details: initial state of Chord on/off


Normally,whenyouselectaProgram,Combi,orSong, ChordmodewillbeonoroffassetbytheChord parameter. TheexceptioniswhenSW1orSW2isassignedtothe ChordSwitch.Inthiscase,thestoredon/offstateof SW1/2controlswhetherChordmodewillbeonoroff bydefault. Notethatthisdefaultstateisslightlymorecomplexin CombinationandSequencermodes: InCombinationmode,SW1/2affectonlyTimbres ontheGlobalchannel.Othertrackswillbeassetby theirChordparameters. InSequencermode,SW1/2affectonlytheTrackson thesamechannelasthecurrentKeyboardTrack. ThisdeterminestheinitialstatewhenaSongisfirst selected,sincethecurrentKeyboardTrackisstored withtheSong.Othertrackswillbeassetbytheir Chordparameters.

Enabling Chord mode


Program mode
ToenableChordmodeforaProgram: 1. GototheProgramBasicpage 2. SettheChordparametertoBasicorAdvanced. OnceyouveselectedeitherBasicorAdvanced,Chord modeisenabledimmediately.Optionally,youcanthen turnChordmodeoffandonviatheChordSW,using eitherSW1/2ortheAssignableFootSwitch. IfyousetChordtoOff,thenitwillalwaysremainoff, regardlessoftheChordSW.Thisisparticularlyuseful inCombiandSequencermodes,sinceitallowsyouto createsplitsandlayersinwhichsomeTimbres/Tracks useChordmode,butothersdonot.

Basic and Advanced modes


TherearetwoonsettingsforChordmode:Basic (Bsc)andAdvanced(Adv). BasicrecreatesthechordmodeoftheoriginalPolysix. Eachtimeyouplayanewchord,itwillcutoffthe previouschord.ThisoptionignorestheVoiceAssign settings. AdvancedusestheProgramsVoiceAssignparameters tocreateavarietyofdifferenteffects,suchasmono legatochordswithfingeredportamento,orpoly chordsthatoverlaponeanother.TheVoiceAssign settingsapplyasiftheentirechordwasasinglenote, witheachpitchinthechordcreatedbyanadditional transposedoscillator. Poly,PolyLegato,SingleTrigger,Mono,Mono Legato,MonoMode,LegatoOffset,MonoPriority, andMonoandPolyUnisonallapply.

Combination and Sequencer modes


ToenableChordmodeforaTimbreinaCombi,ora trackinaSong: 1. Gotopage22OSC(underTimbreParametersor TrackParameters,respectively). 2. SettheTimbre/TracksChordparametertoBasic orAdvanced. Alternatively,youcansettheTimbre/TracktoPRG. Thisisthedefault,whichusesthesettingfromthe Program.NotethatiftheProgramsChordmodeisset toOff,theTimbre/TrackwillnotrespondtotheChord Switch.

37

Playing and editing Programs

YoucanachievethesameeffectasBasic,above,by settingChordtoAdvanced,VoiceAssigntoMono, PrioritytoLastNote,andLegatotoOff.

JustaswiththePads,thestoredvelocitiesarescaledby thevelocityoftheplayednote. InCombiandSequencermodes,aslongastheroot noteofthechordiswithintheTimbre/Trackkeyboard zone,theentirechordwillbeplayedinthat Timbre/Trackevenifsomeofthenotesextendbeyond theTimbre/Trackskeyzone.

Creating and editing chords


Chordsareassignedtothepads,stored,andeditedas describedunderUsingtheChordPadsonpage 35.

Selecting chords
TheChordfunctionusesthechordsassignedtothe Pads.Toselectachordtoplayfromthekeyboard(or viaMIDI): 1. SelectthedesiredpadfromtheSourcepopup menu or: WhenChordisenabled,pressapad. WhenChordmodeisenabled,pressingapadeditsthe Sourceparameter.Thepadwillnotplayanysounds byitself;itonlyselectsthechordtobeplayedfromthe keyboard. ChordmodeisenabledwhentheChordSWiseither unassignedorturnedOn,and... InProgrammode,ChordissettoBasicor Advanced InCombimode,ChordissettoBasicorAdvanced onanyTimbre(withStatussettoINT)onthe Globalchannel InSequencermode,ChordissettoBasicor AdvancedonanyTrack(withStatussettoINTor BTH)onthesameMIDIchannelasthecurrent KeyboardTrack InCombimode,selectionviathePadsaffectsall TimbresontheGlobalChannel.InSequencermode, thisaffectsTracksonthesameMIDIchannelasthe currentKeyboardTrack.

Chords and MIDI


TheChordSWandSourcePadsettings(including selectionsviathePads)aretransmittedandreceived viaSysEx,whichcanberecordedandplayedbackvia internalorexternalsequencers. InCombiandSequencermodes,therearediscrete SysExmessagesperTimbre/TrackforbothChordSW andSourcePad,sothateachTimbre/Trackcanbeset individuallyifdesired.Notethatthisallowsmore flexibilitythanwhenusingthelocalkeyboardsChord SWandPads. WhentheChordSWorthefrontpanelPadsareused tochangethechordstate,separatemessagesaresent foreachaffectedTimbreorTrack,including: InCombimode,eachTimbreontheGlobal Channel InSequencermode,eachTrackonthesameMIDI channelastheKeyboardTrack

What if Timbres/Tracks share the same channel, but have different Source settings?
IfTimbres/Trackssharethesamechannelbuthave differentSourcesettings,theywillmaintainthe differentsettingsaslongasthePadsarenotusedto selectadifferentchord.AssoonasaPadisused,allthe Timbres/Trackswillbesettothesamechordunless theyaresettoPRG. WhenSourceissettoPRG,theTimbre/Trackusesthe SourcechordstoredintheProgram,insteadofanyof thechordsfromthecurrentCombiorSong.This makesiteasytouseChordmodeforsoundspecific effects,suchasoctaves,stackedfifths,andsoon.

Playing chords
Thelowestnoteoftheselectedchordistransposedto matchthenoteplayedonthekeyboard.Highernotes aretransposedaccordingly.Forinstance,letssaythat: ThestoredchordisF4,Bb4,andEb5 YouplayaD3onthekeyboard(orviaMIDI) Inthiscase,theresultingchordwillbeD3,G3,andC4.

38

Easy Program Editing Quick edits using the knobs, sliders, and switches

Easy Program Editing Quick edits using the knobs, sliders, and switches
YoucaneditanyoftheProgramsshippedwith KRONOS,oryoucanstartwithaninitializedProgram tocreatesoundsfromscratch. Youcandomanybasiceditsdirectlyfromthefront panelControlSurfaceknobs,switches,andsliders, withouteverdelvingdeeperintotheLCDinterface. Forinstance,youcanusetheknobstochangeattack andreleasetimes,makesoundsbrighterordarker, altereffectsdepths,modulateKARMAsphrase generation,andsoon. Theknobs,sliders,andswitches willdodifferentthings,depending oftheControlSurfaceCONTROL ASSIGNsetting.Forediting Programs,thethreeimportant CONTROLASSIGNsettingsare TIMBRE/TRACK,RT KNOBS/KARMA,andTONE ADJ/EQ. TIMBRE/TRACKletsyouadjust thevolume,pan,andsendlevels forOscillators1and2andthe DrumTrack,alongwiththe ProgramEQ. RTKNOBS/KARMAletsyou modulatesoundsandeffectswiththeknobs,and controlKARMAwiththeslidersandswitches. TONEADJ/EQ(ToneAdjust)givesyouhandson accesstomoredetailedsoundediting,usingthe sliders,knobs,andswitches. Note:EQisonlyavailableinSetListmode.Formore information,seeGraphicEQonpage 119. 6. PresstheMIXERKNOBSbutton untiltheCHANNELSTRIPLED lightsup. Thismakestheknobscontrolavirtual channelstrip,includingpan,EQ,and effectssends. 7. Useknobs26toadjustthePrograms3bandEQ. TheEQaffectsbothOSC1andOSC2.Noticethatthe displayshowsyouthegainvaluesindB,andtheMid FrequencyinHz.Alsonotethatknob2,EQTrim,lets youcompensateforgainchangescausedbytheEQ.

8. PressSELECTbutton1.

ThisselectsOSC1.WhentheknobsareinCHANNEL STRIPmode,theselectedOscillatorisimportant. WhileEQalwaysappliestobothOscillators,thePan andEffectsSend1/2knobsaffectonlytheselected Oscillator. NoticethatPanisavailable,indifferentways,with bothsettingsoftheMIXERKNOBSbutton. 9. Useknobs7and8toadjustEffectsSends1and2 forOSC1. Internally,thesystemfiguresouthowtheOscillatoris routedtotheMasterEffects,andautomaticallyadjusts theappropriatesendparameters.

Adjusting volume, Pan, EQ, and FX sends


InTIMBRE/TRACKmode,theControlSurfaceputs allofthebasicmixingcontrolsunderyourfingertips. 1. PresstheTIMBRE/TRACKbuttonunder CONTROLASSIGN. ThebuttonsLEDwilllightup. 2. Optionally,gototheControlSurfacetabofthe Playpage. ThispagemirrorstheControlSurface.Often,itwill showyoualittlemoreinformationabouttheknob assignments,exactvalues,andsoon. 3. PresstheMIXERKNOBSbutton untiltheINDIVIDUALPANLED lightsup. Thismakesknobs1&2controlpanfor OSC1andOSC2,respectively. 4. Usesliders13toadjustthe volumesofOSC1,OSC2,andtheDrumTrack. 5. Useknobs1&2toadjustthepanpositionsof OSC1andOSC2. TheDrumTrackspaniscontrolledseparately,inthe DrumKititself.

Editing sounds & effects with the Realtime Knobs


TheRealtimeKnobsareatraditionalfeatureofKorg workstations,combiningmodulation,quickedits,and handsoncontrol. InRTKNOBS/KARMAmode,knobs14have dedicatedfunctions,asprintedonthefrontpanel: FilterCutoff,FilterResonance,FilterEGIntensity,and ReleaseTime.Allofthesecorrespondtostandard MIDICCs. Knobs58canbeassignedtoawidevarietyof functions,manyofwhichalsohavecorresponding MIDICCs.Often(butnotalways),knobs5and6 modulatesynthesisparameters,knob7controlsthe depthofachorusorothermodulationeffect,andknob 8controlsreverbdepth.

39

Playing and editing Programs

RealTimeKnobfunctions Knob
1 2 3 4 5-6 7 8

6. HoldtheRESETCONTROLSbutton. Normally controls 7. WhileholdingRESETCONTROLS, movefirstknob1,andthenknob2. Asyoumovetheknobs,theirvalueswill beresettothedefault,centerpositions. 8. ReleasetheRESETCONTROLS button. Now,yourebacktotheoriginalelectricpianosound.

MIDI CC
74 71 79 72

Filter Cutoff Frequency Filter Resonance Filter EG Intensity EG Release Time

Varies for each Program Often Chorus Depth - but can vary per Program Often Reverb Depth - but can vary per Program

Knob edits can be saved


TheRealTimeKnobsaregreatformodulatingsounds inperformance,orforrecording.Ifyoulike,youcan alsosavetheeditedversionofthesound,usingthe normalWriteProgramcommand(seeSavingyour editsonpage 42). Internally,asingleknobusuallyaffectsseveral differentparameters.WhenyouwriteaProgram,the editsaresavedintotheindividualparameters,andnot totheknobitself.AfterwritingtheProgram,youll noticethattheknobshavereturnedtotheircenter positionssincetheoldeditedvaluesarenowthe newsavedvalues.

Whenyoumoveaknob,itsendsoutthecorresponding MIDICC.Also,whentheCCisreceivedviaMIDIor generatedbyKARMA,theknobvaluechangesto matchtheCCvalue. Generally,theknobsscaletheProgramsinternal settings.Whentheknobisinthecenter,thesettingsare asprogrammed.Tomovethesettingstotheir maximumvalue,turntheknoballthewaytotheright; tomovethemtotheirminimumvalue,turntheknob allthewaytotheleft. Knobscaling
99 Parameter Value

Assigning functions to REALTIME KNOBS 58


WhentheControlSurfaceCONTROLASSIGNisset toRTKNOBS/KARMA,thefourknobsontheright functionasRealtimeKnobs58(User14).Thesecan performanumberofdifferentfunctions,suchas modulatingsoundsoreffects,adjustingeffectssend levels,andsoon. EachProgram,Combination,andSongstoresitsown settingsforwhattheknobswilldo.Youcanalsomake settingsforSamplingmodeasawhole.

As Programmed

00 0 64 CC Value 127

Forexample: 1. SelectProgramINTB017,SmoothOperators. Thisisanelectricpianosound;letsseewhatwecando tomakeitsoundabitdifferent. 2. PresstheRTKNOBS/KARMAbuttonunder CONTROLASSIGN. TheTONEADJUSTLEDwilllightup. 3. Whileplayingthesound,turnknob1(Filter Frequency)totheright,slowly,toabout3oclock. Noticehowthepianobecomesasortofsynthsweep. 4. Next,turnknob2(FilterResonance)totheright, alsotoabout3oclock. 5. Withknob2inthatposition,trymovingknob1 backandforthasyouplay. Withtheresonanceincreased,itnowsoundslike youreplayingthroughawahpedal. Next,letssaythatyoudecidethatsnotreallywhat youwantedso,wellsettheknobsbacktotheir defaultvalues.Youcouldmovethembacktothe straightup,12oclockposition,andthenadjustthem sothattheyreexactlyinthemiddle,buttheresan easierway

WhenusingtheknobsforAMSorDmod,its importanttounderstandthatassignmentisatwostep process.First,youassigntheknobtosendaMIDI controller,suchasKnobMod.1(CC#17).Second,you assignthatMIDIcontrollertomodulateoneormore Programoreffectsparameters. Forthefirstpartoftheabove,usethemodesSetUp Controllerspage.Formoreinformation,SeeSW1and SW2onpage 31. Thedefaultassignmentsforknobs58areKnobMod.1 (CC#17),KnobMod.2(CC#19),KnobMod.3(CC#20), andKnobMod.4(CC#21),respectively.Foracomplete listofthepossibleassignments,seeRealtimeKnobs 58Assignmentsonpage 1105oftheParameter Guide. Heresanexampleofhowtosetupknob5(User1)to controlaProgramsfilterandampEGattacktime: 1. PressthePROGswitchtoenterProgrammode. 2. PresstheBasic/Vectortab,andthenthe Controllerstababoveit,togototheP1: Basic/VectorSetUpControllerspage. 3. PresstheModulationKnobAssignKnob5 popupbutton,andchooseF/AAttack. 4. PressthefrontpanelRTKNOBS/KARMAbutton (underCONTROLASSIGN). 5. Turnknob5(USER1)tocontrolthefilterandamp EGattack.

40

Easy Program Editing Quick edits using the knobs, sliders, and switches

Note:Ifyouwishtokeepthesesettingsafterthepower isturnedoff,youmustsavetheProgram, Combination,orSong.Notethatthesettingsfor Samplingmodecannotbesaved.

Noticethatthesoundhaschangedfromanelectric pianointoasoftpad.Next,letsaddjustabitofpitch modulation,tomakethesoundmorerich. 7. Lookattheassignmentsforknobs2and5. Knob2isassignedtoPitchLFO1Intensityinother words,theamountofpitchmodulationfromLFO1. Knob5isassignedtoLFO1Speed. 8. Turnknob2eversoslightlytotheright,sothat theLCDreads+01or+02. 9. Turnknob5totheright,untilabout2oclock,so thattheLCDreadsabout40. 10.Playafewmorenotes. Thepitchmodulationhasaddedsomeshimmertothe sound.Now,maybeitcoulduseabitmoreedge 11.LookattheassignmentsforSELECTswitches1 and2. TheseareprogrammedtoraisetheFilterFrequency andFilterResonance,respectively.Switchesarejust on/off,butyoucansetaspecificvaluefortheOn position;noticethe+10and+40intheswitchsvalue boxes. 12.Pressthetwoswitches,onebyone. Thesoundnowhasamoreinterestingcharacter,due tothefilters.Sinceitsbrighter,wevealsorestored someoftheelectricpianocharacter. Prettyeasy,huh?Notedependingontheparameter, youmaysometimeshearglitchesinthesoundasyou movethecontrol.

Using Tone Adjust


ToneAdjustletsyouuseallofthesliders,knobs,and switchesontheControlSurfacetoeditProgram parameters,liketheknobsonananalogsynth.Each physicalcontrolcanbeassignedtoanyoneofa numberofProgramparameters. ThespecificparametersavailablethroughToneAdjust willvarydependingonthetypeofProgram.HD1 Programssupportacertainsetofparameters;eachEXi alsohasitsownsetofparameters.Formore information,see: CommonToneAdjustParametersonpage 32ofthe ParameterGuide. HD1ToneAdjustParametersonpage 33ofthe ParameterGuide. AL1:ToneAdjustonpage 222oftheParameter Guide. CX3:ToneAdjustonpage 244oftheParameter Guide. STR1:ToneAdjustonpage 292oftheParameter Guide. MS20EX:ToneAdjustonpage 319oftheParameter Guide. PolysixEX:ToneAdjustonpage 335oftheParameter Guide. MOD7:ToneAdjustonpage 385oftheParameter Guide. SGX1:Toneadjustonpage 393oftheParameter Guide. EP1:ToneAdjustonpage 413oftheParameter Guide.

Changing parameter assignments


ThefactoryProgramsincludedefaultassignmentsof ToneAdjustparameterstotheknobs,sliders,and switches.Ifyoulike,youcanchangeanyofthe assignments.Todoso: 1. GototheControlSurfacetabofthePlaypage. Onthispage,youcanseetheparameterassignments foreachcontroller,suchasFilterEGAttack,Pitch Stretch,andsoon. 2. Pressthepopupbuttonnexttooneofthe parameterassignments. Apopupwindowwillappear,withalonglistof parameters.Youcantellvariousthingsaboutthe selections,justfromthewaytheyappearinthelist: ParameterswhichaffectonlyOSC1orOSC2are prefixedwith[OSC1]and[OSC2],respectively. ParameterswhichaffectbothOscillators,butwhich arespecifictoHD1Programs,areprefixedwith [OSC1&2]. Theothergroupofparameters,atthebeginningof thelist,areCommon.Thatis,youcanusethem withmostEXiPrograms,aswellasHD1 Programs. ParameterscanonlybeassignedtooneTone Adjustcontrolatatime.Ifaparameterisalready assigned,itsgrayedout. 3. Selectaparameterfromthelist. Theparameterisnowassignedtothecontrol.Tocancel outofthelistwithoutmakingachange,justtouchon thescreenoutsideofthepopupwindow.

Editing HD-1 sounds


1. SelectProgramINTC115,SmoothOperators. 2. PresstheTONEADJ/EQbuttonunderCONTROL ASSIGN. ThebuttonsLEDwilllightup. 3. GototheControlSurfacetabofthePlaypage. ThispagemirrorstheControlSurface.Itsveryuseful withToneAdjust,sinceitshowsyoutheparameter assignments,exactvalues,andsoon. 4. Lookattheassignmentsforsliders5,6,and8. Slider5isassignedtoAmpEGAttack;slider6is assignedtoAmpEGDecay;andslider8isassignedto AmpEGRelease. 5. Raiseeachofthethreesliderssothattheyare about4/5ofthewaytothetop. TheLCDshouldshowtheirvaluesasbetween+60and +70.Inotherwords,youvejusteditedtheamp envelopesothattheattack,decay,andreleaseareall muchlongerthantheywerebefore. 6. Playafewnotes.

41

Playing and editing Programs

Editing EXi sounds


ThePolysixEXworksparticularlywellwithTone Adjust,soletstakealookatitnow. 1. SelectProgramUSERE004PhunkyPowerBass. ThisusesthePolysixEX. 2. UnderCONTROLASSIGN,presstheTONE ADJ./EQbutton. 3. Playthekeyboardwhilemovingsliders14and knobs12. Noticeastheknobgraphicsonthedisplaymoveas well.Sliders14controltheenvelopeshape;knobs12 controlthefiltercutoffandresonance. 4. Onthedisplay,presstheControlSurfacetab. Thispageshowstheassignmentsandvaluesforallof thesliders,knobs,andswitches. 5. PresstheMaintabtoreturntothemainPlaypage. 6. TouchthePolysixEXgraphicaroundtheCutoff andResonanceknobs. ThedisplayjumpstothePolysixEXMainpage. 7. ExperimentwithplayingwhileusingtheControl Surfacesliders,knobs,andswitches. Noticehowthegraphicsrespond,aswell.Youcanalso selectagraphiccontrolonthescreenandedititsvalue usinganyofthedataentrycontrols.

3. Afterenteringthename,pressOK. Thetexteditwindowwilldisappear,returningyouto themainWritedialog. 4. UnderToatthebottomofthedialog,pressthe popupbuttonnexttoProgramtobringupthesave locationdialog. 5. SelectalocationtosavetheeditedProgram. YoucanwritetoanylocationinbanksINTAF, USERAG,andUSERAAGG.Toavoid overwritingthefactorysounds,itssafertouseaslotin oneoftheemptyUserbanks. Important:HD1Programscanonlybewrittento HD1Banks,andEXiProgramscanonlybewritten toEXiBanks.Formoreinformationonthedefault Banktypes,andonhowtochangethem,pleasesee ProgramBankContentsonpage 27,and ChangingtheBankTypeforUSERbankson page 27. 6. Afterselectingthelocation,pressOK. 7. PressOKagaintostartthewriteprocess. 8. Ifyouresureyouwanttowritetothislocation, pressOKagain. Afterthat,youredone! Formoreinformation,seeWritingProgramsand Combinationsonpage 182. Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds afterwritingtheProgram.Thisallowsthesystem timetocompletetheprocess,whichincludessaving abackupofthedatatotheinternaldisk.

Using COMPARE
Whenyoureintheprocessofeditingasound, pressingtheCOMPAREbuttonwillrecallthesaved versionofthesound,asitwasbeforeyoustarted editing.Toindicatethatyouarelisteningtothesaved version,thebuttonsLEDwilllightup. PressingCOMPAREagainreturnsyoutotheversion youareediting,andtheLEDwillgooutagain. IfyoueditwhiletheCOMPARELEDislit,thekeywill againgodarkandyourpreviouseditswillbelost.

Saving edits to GM Programs


YoucaneditGMPrograms,butyoumustthensave themtoaBankotherthanINTG;theGMPrograms themselvescannotbeoverwritten.

Shortcut: SEQUENCER REC/WRITE


YoucanalsousetheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEbutton toquicklyupdatethecurrentProgram,usingthe existingname,bank,number,andcategory.Todoso: 1. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEbutton. TheUpdateProgramdialogwillappear. 2. PressOKtowritetheprogram.

Resetting individual controls


TheRESETCONTROLSbuttonletsyourevertan individualknob,slider,orswitchtoitssavedsetting. Formoreinformation,seeResettingcontrolstotheir savedvaluesonpage 33.

Saving to disk

Saving your edits


Onceyouvetweakedthesoundtoperfection,youll wanttosaveyourwork.Tosaveyouredits: 1. SelecttheWriteProgramcommandfromthepage menu,attheupperrighthandcornerofthescreen. Youcanalsocallupthismenucommandbyholding ENTERandpressing0onthenumerickeypad. Thisbringsupadialogboxwhichallowsyoutosave theProgram.Optionally,youcanalsoselectanew location,changetheProgramsname,andassignittoa soundcategory(suchaskeyboard,guitar,etc.). 2. PresstheTbuttontobringupthetextedit dialog. YoucangivetheProgramadescriptivenameusingthe onscreenkeyboard.

YoucanalsosaveandmanageProgramsonthe internalharddrive,andonUSBstoragedevices.For moreinformation,seeSavingtodisks,CDs,andUSB mediaonpage 186.

42

Detailed Program Editing Editing HD-1 Programs

Detailed Program Editing Editing HD-1 Programs


Creating your own Programs
YoucancreateyourownoriginalHD1soundsby editingthefactoryPrograms,orbyinitializinga Programandstartingfromscratch.Youcansavethese ProgramsintoanybankotherthanINTA(whichis reservedforEXiPrograms)andINTG(which containsGeneralMIDIPrograms). YoucanalsocreateProgramsusingyourown Multisamples,eitherfromSamplingModeorUser SampleBanks.Inaddition,youcanplayaProgram andresampleyourperformance,orsampleanexternal audiosourcewhilelisteningtothesoundofa Program. Page
P9: Master/ Total Effects

Main features
Select Master send effects and Total effects, and adjust their settings.

Fordetailsonhowtoselectthedifferentpages,see Basicoperationsonpage 17. YoucansamplefromwithinProgrammode includingresamplingtheProgramitself.Formore information,seeSamplinginProgramand Combinationmodesonpage 148. Youcanalsomixinliveaudioinputs,andprocess themthrougheffects.Formoreinformation,see Usingeffectswiththeaudioinputsonpage 207. NotethatthepageandparameterstructuresofEXi ProgramsaredifferentthanthoseofHD1Programs.

Overview of editing pages


P0:Playiswhereyouselectandplayprograms,make quickeditsusingtheControlSurface,andadjustthe KARMAsettings.Theotherpagesletyoumodifythe soundinmoredetailedways. Page Main features
Select and play Programs Perform easy edits using the Realtime Knobs, KARMA sliders, and Tone Adjust Adjust mix parameters including volume, pan, EQ, and send levels Quick sampling and re-sampling Set the Program to Single, Double, Single Drum, or Double Drum Select Mono or Poly voice allocation Select a scale (e.g., Equal Temperament) Set up controllers Set up Vector synthesis Set up the Drum Track On-screen pads Select Multisamples, Wave Sequences. or Drum Kits Settings related to the pitch, including the pitch EG. Settings related to the filter (tone), including the filter EG. Settings related to the amplifier (volume), including amp EG and pan. Settings for the 3-band EQ For each of the two LFOs provided for each oscillator, select the LFO type and speed, etc. (Settings in the pitch, filter, and amp pages determine how much the LFOs affect the sound.) Mix and modify AMS sources using the two AMS mixers provided for each oscillator. Set up how the Common Key Track output changes as you play up and down the keyboard Settings related to KARMA. Select insert effects and make settings for them. Specify send levels to the Master effects and routing to the outputs.

Basic HD-1 Structure


Multisamples and Wave Sequences
ThesoundoftheHD1startswithoneormore Multisamples.Thesecanberecordingsofinstruments likepiano,bass,guitar,strings,organs,analogsynths, andsoon,orpurelydigitallycreatedtimbres. YoucanplaytheseMultisamplesdirectly,orusethem throughWaveSequences,whichplayaseriesof differentMultisamplesovertimetocreaterhythmsor complex,evolvingtimbres.

P0: Play

Oscillator Mode
HD1SingleProgramshaveoneoscillator,andDouble Programshavetwooscillators.Eachoscillatorincludes acompletesynthesisvoice,withvelocityswitched Multisamples,dualfilters,EGs,LFOs,andsoon. SingleandDoubleDrummodesaresimilar,butuse DrumKits(ascreatedinGlobalmode)insteadof Multisamples. SingleandSingleDrumProgramsuseoneoscillator, foramaximumof140notepolyphony. DoubleandDoubleDrumProgramsusetwo oscillators,foramaximumof70notepolyphony.

P1:Basic/ Vector

P2: Osc/Pitch

P3: Filter

P4: Amp/EQ

A note about polyphony


Polyphonymeansthenumberofnotesthatyoucan playatatime.Thisnumberwillvarydependingonthe particularsoundbeingplayed,andhowthatsoundis produced.Generallyspeaking: DoubleProgramsusetwiceasmanyvoicesas SinglePrograms. WaveSequencesusetwiceasmanyvoicesas Multisamples. StereoMultisamplesusetwiceasmanyvoicesas MonoMultisamples,andStereoWaveSequences usetwiceasmanyvoicesasMonoWaveSequences. IftheVectorEGisenabled,thenumberofvoices usedincreasesslightly.

P5: Common LFO

P6: AMS Mixer/ Common Key Track P7: KARMA P8: Insert Effects

43

Playing and editing Programs

Program Basic: P1 - 1

Vector: P1 - 5, 6 KARMA: P7

Controllers: P1 - 8 Pads: P1 - 9

Drum Track: P1 - 3 Tone Adjust: P0 - 9

Audio Input: P0 - 8

Common LFO: P5 - 9 OSC1 LFO1: P5 - 1 OSC1 LFO2: P5 - 2 Master Effects 1, 2: P9 Insert Effects 112: P8 Total Effects 1, 2: P9

Routing: P8-1

OSC1 Basic: P2 - 1 OSC1 Pitch: P2 - 2

Filter1(A/B): P3 - 1

Amp1/Driver1: P4 - 1 Amp1 Mod: P4 - 2

3Band EQ : P4 - 9

OSC1, 2

AUDIO OUTPUT L/MONO, R

Filter Key Track: P3 - 2 Filter1 Mod: P3 - 2 Filter1 LFO Mod: P3 - 3

Insert Effects Master Effects Individual Outputs Filter1 EG: P3 - 4 AMS Mixer: P6 - 1 Amp1 EG: P4 - 3 REC Bus FX Control Bus OSC 1 OSC 2

AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1, 2, 3, 4

Pitch EG : P2 - 9

Common KeyTrack: P6 - 9

Oscillator / Pitch

Filter

Amplifier

EQ

Effects

P11, P22, etc. indicate the on-screen pages and tabs used when editing on the KRONOS.

Voice Assign Mode


TheVoiceAssignModeselectswhethertheProgram willplaypolyphonically(Poly)ormonophonically (Mono). WhenthisissettoPoly,youcanplaybothchordsand melodylines.WhenthisissettoMono,onlyonenote willsoundevenifyouplayachord. NormallyyoullsetthistoPoly,butMonoisuseful whenplayingsoundssuchassynthbasses,synth leads,andothersoloinstruments.Tryswitching betweenPolyandMono,andlistentotheresults.

Thiscommandisusefulwhenyouwanttosetboth Oscillatorstothesamesettings,orwhenyouwantto duplicatesettingsyouveusedbefore.

Working with Multisamples


Asdescribedabove,thesoundoftheHD1startswith oneormoreMultisamples.Youcanplaythese Multisamplesdirectly,orusethemthroughWave Sequences,whichplayaseriesofdifferent Multisamplesovertimetocreaterhythmsorcomplex, evolvingtimbres. InSingleandDoublemodes,eachOscillatorcanplay uptoeightMultisamplesorWaveSequences.InSingle andDoubleDrumsmodes,eachOscillatorplaysa DrumKit.

Using Drum Kits


YoucancreateandeditDrumKitsinGlobalmode.For eachnoteonthekeyboard,youcanselectuptoeight velocitycrossfadeddrumsamples,makefilterand ampsettings,andspecifyroutingtotheeffectsandto theindividualaudiooutputs. Formoreinformation,seeUsingDrumKitson page 176. InPrograms,onceyouvesettheOscillatorModeto SingleorDoubleDrums,youcanselectbetweenthe 152userprogrammableDrumKits,plusanadditional 9GM2kits.Formoreinformationonthefactory sounds,seetheVoiceNameList.

Multisamples, Wave Sequences, and Drum Kits


Multisamples,DrumKits,andWaveSequencesallow youtoplaysamplesindifferentways. Multisampleslayoutoneormoresamplesacross thekeyboard.Forinstance,averysimpleguitar Multisamplemighthavesixsamplesoneforeach string. WaveSequencesplaybackaseriesofdifferent Multisamplesovertime.TheseMultisamplesmay crossfadetocreatesmooth,evolvingtimbres,or changeabruptlytocreaterhythms. Asthenamesuggests,DrumKitsareoptimizedfor playingdrumsamples.

Copying settings between OSC1 & OSC2


ManyoftheProgramparameterscanbesetdifferently forOSC1andOSC2.Theseincludeallofthe parameterson: AllofthetabsontheOSC/Pitchpage,exceptforthe PitchEG AllofthetabsontheFilterpage AllofthetabsontheAmppage,exceptforEQ AllofthetabsontheLFOpage,exceptfor CommonLFO TheAMSMixertabs YoucanusethepagemenusCopyOscillator commandtocopytheseparametersfromone Oscillatortoanother.Youcanevencopyparameters fromanOscillatorinadifferentProgram.

Velocity splits, crossfades, and layers


Asmentionedabove,unlessyoureinSingleorDouble Drummode,eachOscillatorhaseightvelocityzones, namedMS1(thehighestvelocity)throughMS8(the lowest).ThismeansthattheProgramcanplay differentMultisamplesorWaveSequences,depending onhowhardyouplay. EachofthesezoneshasseparatesettingsforLevel, StartOffset,andsoon.Also,eachofthezonescanfade intothenext,tocreatesmoothvelocitytransitions. Zonescanevenbelayeredtogether,twoatatime.

Selecting Multisamples
Letscreateasimplevelocitycrossfadebetweentwo Multisamples,usingjustOSC1. 1. GototheOSC1BasictaboftheOSC/Pitchpage.

44

Detailed Program Editing Using LFOs and Envelopes (EGs)

2. SettheMS1andMS2Typeparametersto Multisample. 3. SettheTypesforMS38toOff. 4. SelectROMStereoastheMultisampleBankfor MS1andMS2. TherearefourmaintypesofMultisampleBanks: ROM,SamplingMode,EXs,andUserSampleBanks. Foreachtype,youcanalsochoosebetweenlookingat monoandstereoMultisamples.Notethatstereo Multisampleswillrequiretwiceasmanyvoicesas monoMultisamples. ROMMultisamplesarethebuiltinfactorysounds, andarealwaysavailable.Theseareorganizedby category,suchaspianos,guitars,bells,etc. SamplingMode(Smp)Multisamplesaretheonesthat youcanseeandeditinSamplingMode.Thesemay includeAkai,SoundFont2.0,AIFForWAVfilesloaded fromdisk,ornativeKRONOSsamples(including thirdpartysoundlibrariesandsamplesthatyoucreate yourself).AnythingthatcanbeusedinSampling ModecanalsobeloadedasaUserSampleBank. EXsMultisamplebanksarePCMexpansionsets createdespeciallyfortheKRONOS.Eachhasitsown uniquenumber;forinstance,theROMExpansionis EXs1,andtheConcertGrandPianoisEXs2.Onlythe currentlyloadedEXsbankswillappearinthismenu. UserSampleBanksbringthebenefitsofEXstoyour ownsamplelibraries.Youcanloadandplaygigabytes ofyourcustomorconvertedsamplesatonce,using VirtualMemory.Theyareshownasapathtoafileon aninternaldisk,includingthefilenameandthenames ofallenclosingdirectories.Onlythecurrentlyloaded UserSampleBankswillappearinthismenu.Formore information,seeUserSampleBanksonpage 154of theOperationGuide. 5. PresstheMultisamplepopupforMS1.

ThisbringsupalistofMultisamples,organizedby category.Usethetabsattheleftofthescreentobrowse throughthedifferentcategories. 6. SelectaMultisamplebytouchingitsnameinthe list. 7. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection. 8. DothesameforMS2. NowthatyouveassignedMultisamplestoMS1and MS2,letssetupthevelocityrangesandcrossfades. 9. SetMS2sBottomVelocityto001,anditsXfade Rangeto0. 10.SetMS1sBottomVelocityto80. Now,MS2willsoundwhenyouplaysoftly,at velocitiesof79orlessandMS1willsoundwhenyou playharder,withvelocitiesof80ormore. Youcanalsoseethissplitvisually,inthegraphiconthe rightsideoftheLCD. 11.Next,setMS1sXfadeRangeto20,anditsCurveto Linear. Noticethatthegraphicnowshowsthetworanges taperingintooneanother.Between80and100,MS2 willfadeout,andMS1willfadein,creatingagradual velocitytransitioninsteadofahardsplit. 12.Ifyoulike,adjusttheLevelsforthetwo Multisamples.

Rev. (Reverse) check box


Rev.(Reverse)letsyouplaytheselectedMultisample backwards,withoutlooping.Thiscanproduce interestingresultsforsoundeffectsorotherunusual timbres.ReverseappliesonlytoMultisamples;when theTypeissetWaveSequence,thisisgrayedout. Note:thisdoesnotapplytosamplesfromEXsorUser SampleBankswhoseLoadMethodissettoVirtual Memory.

Using LFOs and Envelopes (EGs)


Using LFOs
EachOscillatorhastwoLFOs:LFO1andLFO2.There isalsoasingleCommonLFO,sharedbyboth Oscillators.WhileLFO1andLFO2areseparatefor eachvoice,theCommonLFOissharedbyallvoicesin theProgram.Thismakesitusefulwhenyouwantallof thevoicestohaveanidenticalLFOeffect. YoucanusetheseLFOstomodulatemanydifferent Programparameters,including: Pitch(forvibrato) Filters(forwaheffects) Volume(fortremolo) Pan(forautopanning) TheLFOscanmodulatemanyotherparameters,in additiontothoselistedabove.

Basic LFO programming


TheKRONOSLFOsareverypowerful,andofferlots ofcontrolforthepoweruser.Itssimpletogetstarted withthem,thoughandthegraphicsontheLCDshow howtheparametersaffectthesound.Letstakeabrief tour. 1. GototheOSC1LFO1taboftheLFOpage.

45

Playing and editing Programs

2. SelecttheWaveformparameter. 3. UsetheInc orDec buttonstoscrollthrough thedifferentwaveforms,andlookattheirshapes inthegraphicdisplay.

Frequency Modulation
AMScanbeusedtovarytheLFOspeed.Thisletsyou changetheLFOspeedbyoperatingacontroller,orby theEGorKeyboardTracksettings.

MIDI/Tempo Sync.
IfMIDI/TempoSyncischecked,theFrequency settingwillbeignored,andtheLFOwillsynchronize tothesystemtempo,assetbytheTEMPOknobor externalMIDIclocks. Thisletsyouproducevibrato,wah,autopan,or tremoloeffectsthatlocktotheDrumTrack,KARMA, WaveSequences,theinternalsequencer,orexternal MIDIsequencers.

EGs (Envelope Generators)


Anenvelopecreatesamodulationsignalbymoving fromoneleveltoanotheroveraspecifiedtime,and thenmovingtoanotherleveloveranotherperiodof time,andsoon.
note-on Level Attack Level Break Level note-off

Thereareanumberofwaveformstochoosefrom.Each aresuitedtodifferentapplications: TriangleandSinearetheclassicLFOshapesfor vibrato,tremolo,panning,andfilterwaheffects. Squareisusefulforgatedfilterandampeffects, andcreatesapolicesireneffectwhenmodulating pitch. TheGuitarwaveformisdesignedespeciallyfor guitarvibrato,sinceitbendsonlyupwardsfrom thebasevalue. SawandExponentialSawDownaregoodfor rhythmicfilterandampeffects. Random1(S/H)createstheclassicsampleand holdeffect,whichisgreatformodulatinga resonantfilter. 4. Afterlookingatthedifferentwaveforms,select Triangle. 5. SelecttheShapeparameter,andusetheVALUE slidertomovethroughitsdifferentsettings,from 99to+99. Noticehowtheshapeofthewaveformbecomesmore curved,andhow99emphasizesthelowerpartofthe shape,and+99emphasizestheupperpart. 6. SelecttheStartPhaseparameter,andusethe VALUEslidertosweepthroughitsrangeof values. Noticehowthewaveformshiftsfromsidetoside. Amongotherthings,thisletsyouoffsettheLFOsfrom oneanotherintime,whichcancreateinteresting organiceffects. 7. UsetheFrequencyparametertosetthespeedof theLFO. 8. UsetheFadeandDelaysettingstocontroltheway theLFOsoundsatthebeginningofthenote. FormoreinformationonLFOs,seeProgramP5:LFO onpage 92oftheParameterGuide. AlloftheseparameterscontrolthewaythattheLFO itselfworks.InorderfortheLFOtoactuallyaffectthe sound,youcanusethededicatedLFOroutingsonthe Filter,Pitch,andAmppages,orusetheLFOsasAMS sourcesforawidevarietyofparameters.

Sustain Level

Release Level

Decay Time Attack Time Start Level

Slope Time

Time Release Time

TheHD1includesthreeEGs,forPitch,Filter,and Amp.Theseproducetimevaryingchangesinpitch, tone,andvolumerespectively.Theycanalsobeusedto modulateanumberofotherProgramparametersvia AMS.

46

Detailed Program Editing Using Alternate Modulation (AMS) and the AMS Mixers

Using Alternate Modulation (AMS) and the AMS Mixers


AMS(AlternateModulationSource)referstoanyof theassignablemodulationsourcesinKRONOS, including: Builtinphysicalcontrollers,suchastheJoystick, Ribbon,andRealTimeKnobs IncomingMIDIcontrollers,orMIDIcontrollers generatedbyKARMAortheVectorEG ModulatorssuchastheFilter,Pitch,andAmpEGs, theLFOs,ortheAMSMixers Intensityisaparameterthatsetsthedegree(speed, depth,amountetc.)towhichAMSwillcontrolthe modulation. Anumberoffrequentlyusedmodulationroutings, suchasusingthejoysticktovarythepitch,are providedasadditional,dedicatedroutings,separate fromAMS. NotethatnotallAMSsourcesmaybeavailablefor somemodulationdestinations. FordetailsonalternatemodulationandAMS,see AlternateModulationSources(AMS),onpage 1089 oftheParameterGuide.
A+B Output AMS B: EG

3. AssigntheAMSMixerastheFilterResonance AMSsource. AMSMixerA+Bexample


AMS A: LFO

Scaling one AMS source with another


WhentheTypeissettoAmtAxB,themixerusesthe AMSBinputtoscaletheamountofAMSA.For instance,youcancontroltheamountLFO1withthe FilterEG,orcontroltheamountofthePitchEGwith theribbon. AMSMixerAmtAxBexample

Using the AMS Mixers


TheAMSMixerscombinetwoAMSsourcesintoone, orprocessanAMSsourcetomakeitintosomething new. Forinstance,theycanaddtwoAMSsourcestogether, oruseoneAMSsourcetoscaletheamountofanother. YoucanalsousethemtochangetheshapesofLFOs andEGsinvariousways,modifytheresponseof realtimecontrollers,andmore. TheAMSMixeroutputsappearinthelistofAMS sources,justliketheLFOsandEGs. Thisalsomeansthattheoriginal,unmodifiedinputsto theAMSMixersarestillavailableaswell.Forinstance, ifyouuseLFO1asaninputtoaAMSMixer,youcan usetheprocessedversionoftheLFOtocontrolone AMSdestination,andtheoriginalversiontocontrol another. Finally,youcancascadethetwoAMSMixerstogether, byusingAMSMixer1asaninputtoAMSMixer2.

AMS A: LFO

AMS B: EG

Amt A*B Output

Smoothing
TheSmoothingTypesmoothsouttheAMSinput, creatingmoregentletransitionsbetweenvalues.You haveseparatecontroloftheamountofsmoothing duringtheattack(whenthesignalisincreasing)and decay(whenitsdecreasing). Lowsettingsprovidesubtlecontrollersmoothing, creatingmoregradualaftertouch,forinstance.Higher settingscreateautofadeeffects,transformingaquick gestureintoalongerfadeinand/orfadeoutevent. Smoothingcanalsobeusedtoaltertheshapeof programmablemodsources,suchasLFOsandEGs. Forinstance,youcanturnablipintoasimple envelopeshape,asshownbelow.

Adding two AMS sources together


AMSmixerswilldodifferentthingsdependingon theirTypesetting.TheA+BsettingmergestwoAMS sourcesintoone.Thiscanbehandywhenyouneedto addonemoremodulationsourcetoaparameter,but youvealreadyusedupalloftheavailableAMSslots. Forinstance,letssaythatyoureusinganLFOto modulateFilterResonance,andthenyoudecidethatit wouldbeinterestingtoscalethatparameterwithan EGaswell.ResonancehasonlyasingleAMSinput, butyoucaneasilymergetheLFOandtheEGtogether usingtheA+BAMSMixer: 1. AssigntheLFOtoAMSA. 2. AssigntheEGtoAMSB.

47

Playing and editing Programs

AMSMixerSmoothingexamples
Original AMS A: Smoothing with Long Attack and Short Release:

Selectivepitchbend,usingaswitchonpage 103 Selectivepitchbend,usingonlythejoystickon page 104 Generatingastaticvalueonpage 104

Suggestions on using AMS


Smoothing with Short Attack & Long Release:

Whenmakingsettingsforalternatemodulation,think oftheeffectthatyouwishtoproduce,whattypeof modulationwillbenecessarytoproducethateffect, andwhatparameteroftheoscillator,filter,oramplifier needstobecontrolled. Next,selectasource(AMS)andsettheIntensity.If youproceedlogicallyinthisway,youwillachievethe desiredeffect. Forexample,ifyouwanttocontrolaguitarsoundso thatitapproachesfeedbackwhenyoumovethe joystick,youmightsetupthejoysticktomodulatethe filterfrequencyandresonance.

More AMS Mixer features


TherearemoremixerTypes,includingOffset,Shape, andQuantize,whichofferevenmorepossibilitiesfor creativeprogramming.Formoredetails,seethese sectionsintheParameterGuide: 61:OSC1AMSMixeronpage 98 UsingSW1/2toturnanAMSsourceonandoff onpage 100 MutingindividualWaveSequencestepswith SW1onpage 100 Convertingfrombipolartounipolaronpage 100 Convertingfromunipolartobipolaronpage 100 QuantizedRibbonPitchBendonpage 102

Controller Setup page


Foreachprogram,thistabletsyoumakesettingsfor theSW1andSW2key,andforRealTimeKnobs58. Formoreinformation,seeSW1andSW2onpage 31, and18:SetUpControllers,onpage 53ofthe ParameterGuide.

Controlling Pitch
Pitch bend
TheJS(+X)andJS(X)settingsspecifytheamountof pitchchange(insemitones)thatwilloccurwhenMIDI pitchbendmessagesarereceivedorwhenthejoystick ismovedtoleftorright.Asettingof+12allowsthe pitchtobecontrolledamaximumofoneoctave upward;asettingof12allowsthepitchtobe controlledamaximumofoneoctavedownward. Ribbonspecifiestheamountofpitchchange(in semitones)thatwilloccurwhenMIDIcontrolchange (CC)#16messagesarereceived,orwhenyoumove yourfingerleftandrightontheribboncontroller.With asettingof+12,thepitchwillberaisedoneoctaveat thefarrightoftheribboncontroller,andwillbe loweredbyoneoctaveatthefarleftoftheribbon controller. TouchandyousetanappropriatevalueforIntensity, vibratowillbeappliedwhenyouapplypressuretothe keyboardorwhenMIDIaftertouchmessagesare received.

Pitch EG
WhentheIntensityvalueissetto+12.00,thepitchEG specifiedinthePitchEGpagewillproducea maximumof1octaveofpitchchange. Torealisticallysimulatetheslightchangeinpitchthat occurswhenastringispluckedorattheattackofa brassorvocalsound,youcanusetheEGtocreatea subtlechangeinpitchattheattack.

Portamento
Portamentomakesthepitchchangesmoothlywhen youplaythenextnotebeforereleasingtheprevious note. TheTimeparametercontrolshowlongittakethepitch tochange.Asthisvalueisincreased,thepitchwill changeoveralongertime.Withavalueof000,there willbenoportamento. YoucanturnPortamentoonandoffviaSW1orSW2, byassigningthemtoPorta.SWCC#65.

Creating Vibrato
YoucanuseanLFOtocreatevibrato. LFO1/2Intensitysetsthedepthtowhichtheselected LFOwillaffectthepitch.Withasettingof+12.00, vibratowillproduceamaximumof1octaveofpitch change. JS+YIntspecifiestheamountofvibratothattheLFO willproducewhenthejoystickispushedawayfrom yourself. Intensity(AMSIntensity)specifiesthedepthof vibratothatwillbeappliedbytheLFOwhen modulatedbytheselectedAMS(AlternateModulation Source).Forexample,ifLFO1AMSissettoAfter

48

Detailed Program Editing Using Filters

Using Filters
Thefiltersallowsyoutodiminishoremphasize specifiedfrequencyareasofthesound. Thetoneofthesoundwilldependsignificantlyonthe filtersettings. Thebasicfiltersettings,includingtherouting,type, cutofffrequency,andresonance,aresetontheP3: Filterpage.

Filter Types
Thisselectsthepartsofthesoundwhichwillbe affectedbythefilter,asdescribedbelow.Withthe SerialandParallelroutings,youcanindependentlyset thetypesforFilterAandFilterB. Thefilterswillproduceverydifferentresults dependingontheselectedfiltertype.Theselections willchangeslightlyaccordingtotheselectedFilter Routing,toshowthecorrectcutoffslopeindBper octave. LowPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich arehigherthanthecutofffrequency.LowPassisthe mostcommontypeoffilter,andisusedtomakebright timbressounddarker. HighPass.Thiscutsoutthepartsofthesoundwhich arelowerthanthecutofffrequency.Youcanusethisto maketimbressoundthinnerormorebuzzy. BandPass.Thiscutsoutallpartsofthesound,both highsandlows,exceptfortheregionaroundthecutoff frequency.Sincethisfiltercutsoutbothhighandlow frequencies,itseffectcanchangedramatically dependingonthecutoffsettingandtheoscillators multisample. Withlowresonancesettings,youcanusetheBand Passfiltertocreatetelephoneorvintagephonograph sounds.Withhigherresonancesettings,itcancreate buzzyornasaltimbres. BandReject.Thisfiltertypealsocalledanotchfilter cutsonlythepartsofthesounddirectlyaroundthe cutofffrequency.Trymodulatingthecutoffwithan LFOtocreatephaserlikeeffects.

Filter Routing
Eachoscillatorhastwofilters,FilterAandFilterB.The Routingparametercontrolswhetheroneorbothofthe filtersareused,andifbothareused,itcontrolshow theyareconnectedtoeachother. TheSingleroutingusesonlyFilterAasasingle2pole, 12dB/octavefilter(6dBforBandPassandBandReject). TheSerialroutingusesbothFilterAandFilterB.The oscillatorfirstgoesthroughFilterA,andthenthe outputofFilterAisprocessedthroughFilterB. ParallelalsousesbothFilterAandFilterB.The oscillatorfeedsbothfiltersdirectly,andtheoutputsof thetwofiltersarethensummedtogether. The24dB/4poleroutingmergesbothfilterstocreatea single4pole,24dB/octavefilter(12dBforBandPass andBandReject).IncomparisontoSingle,thisoption producesasharperrolloffbeyondthecutoff frequency,aswellasaslightlymoredelicate resonance.Manyclassicanalogsynthsusedthis generaltypeoffilter. SerialandParallelRouting

Oscillator

Filter A (Low Pass)

Filter B (High Pass)

Filter A (Low Pass) Oscillator Filter B (High Pass)

49

Playing and editing Programs

FilterTypesandCutoffFrequency

Atmediumsettings,theresonancewillalterthetimbre ofthefilter,makingitsoundmorenasal,ormore extreme.Atveryhighsettings,theresonancecanbe heardasaseparate,whistlingpitch. Tomaketheresonancetrackthekeyboardpitch,see KeyFollow,onpage 74oftheParameterGuide.

Low Pass

Modulating the filters


Youcanmodulatethefiltercutofffrequencyusingthe FilterEG,theLFOs,keyboardtracking,andother builtinandMIDIcontrollers.Thisisagreatwayto addarichvarietyoftonalchangetothesound.

High Pass

Filter EG

Band Pass

Band Reject

Cutoff Frequency

Resonance
Resonanceemphasizesthefrequenciesaroundthe cutofffrequency,asshowninthediagrambelow.

TheFilterEGisamultistageenvelope,whichyoucan usetomodulatethefilter(naturally!)aswellasother Programparameters.TheEGitselfissetuponthe FilterEGtab;thewaythatitaffectsthefiltersis controlledbytheparametersdescribedbelow,onthe FilterModtab: TheIntensitytoAandIntensitytoBsettingscontrol thebasicamountofEGmodulationforfilter frequenciesAandB,respectively,beforeother modulation. TheVelocitytoAandVelocitytoBsettingsletyouuse velocitytoscaletheamountofEGmodulation. TheAMSsettingselectsaAMSmodulationsourceto scaletheamountoftheFilterEGappliedtoFiltersA andB.ThetwofiltersshareasingleAMSsource,with separateintensitysettings.

Low resonance

LFO modulation
YoucanmodulatethefilterviaLFO1,LFO2,andthe CommonLFO.Amongotherapplications,LFO modulationofthefiltercanproducetheclassicauto waheffect. TheFilterLFOModtabletsyousetupthefollowing parametersseparatelyforeachLFO:
High resonance

IntensitytoAandIntensitytoBspecifyhowmuch theLFOchangesthetone. JSYIntensitytoAandJSYIntensitytoBspecifythe depthofthewaheffectproducedbytheLFOwhenthe joystickismovedtowardyourself,orwhenCC#2is received.

Whenthisissetto0,thereisnoemphasis,and frequenciesbeyondthecutoffwillsimplydiminish smoothly.

50

Detailed Program Editing Using the Amp section

TheAMSsettingselectsaAMSmodulationsourceto scaletheamountoftheLFOappliedtoFiltersAandB. ThetwofiltersshareasingleAMSsource,with separateintensitysettings. Forexampleif,AMSissettoAfterTouch,applying pressuretothekeyboardproducesanautowah effect.

Youcanthinkoftheresultingshapeasbeingliketwo foldingdoorsattachedtoahingeinthecenter.Atthe Centerkey(themainhinge),thekeyboardtrackinghas noeffect.Thetwofoldingdoorsswingoutfromthis centerpointtocreatechangesinthehigherandlower rangesofthekeyboard. KeyboardTrackShapeandIntensity

Keyboard Track
Mostacousticinstrumentsgetbrighterasyouplay higherpitches.Atitsmostbasic,keyboardtrackingre createsthiseffectbyincreasingthecutofffrequencyof alowpassfilterasyouplayhigheronthekeyboard. Usually,someamountofkeytrackingisnecessaryin ordertomakethetimbreconsistentacrosstheentire range. TheKRONOSkeyboardtrackingcanalsobemuch morecomplex,sinceitallowsyoutocreatedifferent ratesofchangeoveruptofourdifferentpartsofthe keyboard.Forinstance,youcan: Makethefiltercutoffincreaseveryquicklyoverthe middleofthekeyboard,andthenopenmore slowlyornotatallinthehigheroctaves. Makethecutoffincreaseasyouplayloweronthe keyboard. Createabruptchangesatcertainkeys,forsplitlike effects.

Intensity = +99 (Original Shape)

Intensity = +50 (Less Effect)

Intensity = 0 (No Effect)

Intensity = 99 (Inverted)

How Key Track works: Keys and Ramps


Thekeyboardtrackingworksbycreatingfourramps, orslopes,betweenfivekeysonthekeyboard.The bottomandtopkeysarefixedatthebottomandtopof theMIDIrange,respectively.Youcansettheother threekeysnamedLowBreak,Center,andHigh Breaktobeanywhereinbetween. ThefourRampvaluescontroltherateofchange betweeneachpairofkeys.Forinstance,iftheLow CenterRampissetto0,thevaluewillstaythesame betweentheLowBreakkeyandtheCenterkey. IntensitytoAandIntensitytoBadjusttheeffectthat keyboardtrackingwillhaveonfiltersAandB.For moreinformation,see32a:KeyboardTrack,on page 72oftheParameterGuide.

AMS Modulation
InadditiontotheEG,LFOs,andKeyTrack,youcan usetwoAMSsourcestomodulatethefilters.For instance,youcouldusetheribbontochangethe brightness,orusetheAMSoutputofaWaveSequence.

Using the Amp section


TheAmpsectionincludescontrolsforvolume,pan, andthedrivercircuit.Youcancontrolthevolume usingtheAmpEG,LFO1/2,KeyTrack,andvelocity, alongwithotherAMSsources. EachOscillatorhasitsownAmpsection:Amp1for OSC1,andAmp2forOSC2. Thevolumeofanoteonaviolinorwindinstrument canbevariedduringthenotebythemusician(i.e.,by regulatingtheamountofpressureontheboworthe forceofthebreath).
Volume Piano Volume Organ Volume remains constant until note is released

Volume decays gradually

Background: what does Amp mean?


Differentsoundshavecharacteristicshapestotheir volumelevels. Forexample,thevolumeofapianonotebeginsata highvolumetheinstantyouplaythenote,andthen decreasesgradually. Thevolumeofanorgannote,ontheotherhand, remainsconstantaslongasyoucontinuepressingthe key.
Time Time

51

Playing and editing Programs

Pan

Amp modulation

Pan
ThemainPanparametercontrolsthestereoposition afterthesignalhaspassedthroughtheoscillator,filter, andamp.NormallyyoullsetthistoC064,sothatthe soundiscenteredequallybetweentheleftandright speakers. TocreateastereoeffectwhenOscillatorModeissetto Double,settheAmp1/Driver1pagePantoL001,and theAmp2/Driver2pagePanR127.Thiswillmake OSC1gototheleftspeaker,andOSC2gototheright speaker. WithasettingofRandom,thepanwillchange randomlyeachtimeyouplayanoteonKRONOS, producinganinterestingeffect.

ThebasicvolumelevelissetbytheAmpLevel parameter.Youcanthenalterthisusingthe modulationsourcesbelow:

Keyboard Track
Thisletsyouvarythevolumerelativetothenoteyou play.Formoreinformation,seeKeyboardTrackon page 51.

Amp Modulation
VelocityIntensityisusedbymostprogramsto decreasethevolumeofsoftlyplayednotesand increasethevolumeofstronglyplayednotes,andthe AmpModulationparameteradjuststhedepthofthis control.NormallyyouwillsetAmpModulationto positive(+)values.Asthissettingisincreased,there willbegreatervolumedifferencebetweensoftly playedandstronglyplayednotes.

Pan AMS and Intensity


Intensityspecifiesthedepthofthepanmodulation fromtheselectedAMSsource. IfyousetAMStoNoteNumber,thepanwillchange accordingtothekeyboardpositionofeachnote played.WithasettingofLFO1or2,thesoundwill sweepfromsidetoside,creatinganautopaneffect. Othersettingsallowyoutomovetheoscillatorpanby usingarealtimecontroller,anenvelope,orother modulationsources.

LFO1/2
SpecifieshowtheLFOswillproducecyclicchangesin volume(tremoloeffect). ThevolumewillbeaffectedbytheLFO(s)forwhich yousetanLFO1Intensity,LFO2Intensityvalue. Intensity(AMSIntensity)adjuststhedepthbywhich thetremoloeffectproducedbytheLFOwillbeaffected whenyouassignanAMS(LFO1AMS,LFO2AMS). ForexampleifyousetAMStoJSY(CC#02),tremolo willbeappliedwhenyoumovethejoystickof KRONOStowardyourself,orwhenCC#02isreceived.

Pan - Use DKit Setting


UseDKitSettingapplieswhenOscillatorModeisset toDrums.Ifthisischecked,theProgramcanusea differentpanpositionforeachdrumsound,as specifiedbytheDrumKit.Ifthisisunchecked,all drumsoundswillusetheProgramspanposition.The factorypresetsandGMdrumkitsuseindividualpan positionsforthedifferentdrums,sonormallyitsbest toleavethischecked.

Amp EG
TheAmpEGletsyoucontrolhowthevolumechanges overthecourseofanote. Everyinstrumenthasitsowncharacteristicvolume envelope.Thisispartofwhatgiveseachinstrumentits identifiablecharacter. Conversely,bychangingthevolumecontourfor instance,applyingastringlikeAmpEGcurvetoan organmultisampleyoucanproduceinterestingand unusualsounds.

52

Detailed Program Editing Using EXi

Piano

Thetwomainparameters,DriveandLowBoost,work togethertocreatetheoveralleffect. Drivecontrolstheamountofedgeandbiteinthe timbre.Lowsettingswillproducemildsaturation,and highersettingscreatemoreobviousdistortion. Often,itsusefultoincreasetheLowBoostalongwith theDrive.

Organ

Strings

Note:evenwhentheDriveamountissetto0,the Drivecircuitstillaffectsthetimbre.Ifyourgoalisa completelypristinesound,usetheBypasscontrol instead. LowBoostisaspeciallowfrequencyEQwhich controlsthebodycharacterofthesound.Thespecific EQfrequenciesaffectedwillchangewiththeDrive setting. Higheramountsincreasethebassboost,andwillalso intensifytheeffectoftheDriveparameter.

Drive
TheDrivecircuitaddssaturationandoverdrivetothe sound,foreverythingfromsubtlefatteningtodrastic distortion.Unlikeanoverdriveeffect,Driveprocesses eachvoiceindividually,sothetimbrestaysthesame regardlessofhowmanyvoicesarebeingplayed.

Using EXi
InEXiPrograms,youcanselectoneortwoEXitobe splitorlayeredtogether.EachEXihasitsownsonic characteranddifferentpagesofparameters. ToselectdifferentEXi: 1. SelectanEXiProgram. Note:EXiProgramsarestoredinEXiBanks,separate fromHD1Programs.INTAisalwaysanEXiBank; dependingonsettings,anyofUSERAGand AAGGmayalsobeEXibanks. 2. PresstheCommonbutton. 3. PresstheBasic/Vectortab. TheP4:Basic/VectorProgramBasicpageappears.

SGX-1 Premium Piano


Redefining the workstation piano
Youveneverheardapianolikethisonaworkstation. Everynoteissampledinstereoat8velocitylevelswith noloops,forsmoothresponseandnaturaldecays plusmultiplevelocitylayersoftruedamperresonance. Subtleperformancenuancesintegrateseamlesslywith theKRONOShardware,includingreleasevelocityand damperpedalvelocity. TheSGX1alsoprovidestheexceptionallyhigh polyphonythatrealacousticpianosoundsrequire upto100dualstereonotes,theequivalentof400mono voices.

4. UnderEXi1InstrumentType,atthetopleftofthe display,selectanyoftheEXi. YoucanalsoselectasecondEXiunderEXi2 InstrumentType,butfornowletsconcentrateonEXi 1. 5. PresstheEXi1buttonatthebottomofthedisplay. Thetabswillchangetoshowthepagesfortheselected EXi.Timetoexplore!

EP-1 MDS Electric Piano


New technology, classic sounds
TheEP1providesincrediblerecreationsofsixclassic tineandreedelectricpianos,alongwithmodeled vintageeffects.BasedonKorgsMultiDimensional Synthesis(MDS),theEP1deliversnaturalrealtime expressionwithoutthelimitationsofordinarysample

53

Playing and editing Programs

playback.Forinstance,youllappreciatethenatural decayandastonishinglysmoothgradationof dynamicsfrompptoff,withouttelltalesplitpoints justliketherealinstruments. Realtimecontrolovernoiseelements,including mechanicalkeyoffnoisescontrolledbyrelease velocity,givesyourperformancesevengreaterrealism anddetail.

PolysixEX
Rich-sounding, versatile, and easy-to-use synth
Withitsselfoscillatingfourpolefilter,smoothanalog oscillatorandsuboscillator,andrich,builtinchorus andensembleeffects,thePolysixEXprovesyoudont havetobefancyinordertobegreat. BasedontheclassicKorgPolysixanalogsynth,its timbreisdistinctlydifferentfromtheAL1andthe MS20EX,butwedidntstopthere;weadded modulationofeverycontrolonthefrontpanel,fora worldofsoundsimpossibleontheoriginal. ItsalsoverywellsuitedtohandsoncontrolwithTone Adjust,withaknob,slider,orswitchforalmostallof theoriginalPolysixcontrols.Asabonus,itsalso capableofextremelyhighpolyphonyupto180 voices!

CX-3 Tonewheel Organ


Modeled organ with drawbar control
BasedonKorgsgroundbreakingCX3keyboard(with additionalrefinements),theCX3isadetailedtone wheelorganmodelwithlivedrawbarcontrol, Perfecttonewheelphasecoherencymeanssolid, powerfulsoundingchordsjustliketherealthing.A choiceoftonewheeltypes,adjustableovertones, leakage,noise,andkeyclickmodelingprovide unparalleledrealism. Ampmodeling,Vibrato/Chorus,andRotarySpeaker effectsarebuiltin.EXmodeletsyouintroduce additionaldrawbarandpercussionharmonics,fornew timbresunavailableontraditionalorgans.

STR-1 Plucked String


Physical modeling, from the real to the fantastic
Physicshasbroughtuslasers,cellphones,electric carsandnowtheSTR1.Whatwoulditsoundliketo playharmonicsonametalbarpluckedbyapiano, ortosingintoaguitarstring?PlaywiththeSTR1and discover. Inadditiontounique,experimentaltimbres,theSTR1 isgreatfortraditionalinstrumentsfromguitars, basses,harps,andworld/ethnicsoundstoclavinets, harpsichords,bells,andelectricpianos. Youcanalsoprocesssamplesandliveaudioinput throughthephysicalmodelincludingaudio feedbackfromanyoftheKRONOSeffects.

AL-1 Analog Modeling Synthesizer


Modern virtual analog synth
TheAL1isourfeaturepacked,modernvirtualanalog synth.Itspatentedultralowaliasingoscillators(using completelydifferenttechnologythantheHD1) recreateallthepowerandgloryoftrueanalog synthesiswithouttheartifactsthatcanplaguelesser instruments. Morphingwaveformsallowyoutochangethe oscillatorshapesinrealtime.Resonancemodelinglets youchoosebetweenclassicfiltersounds,andthe extraordinarilyflexibleMultiFilterletsyoucreateyour ownhybridfiltershapes.Hardsync,analogstyleFM, drive,lowboost,andringmodulationofferplentyof tonetwistingpower.

MOD-7 Waveshaping VPM Synthesizer


Patch-panel VPM/waveshaping/PCM processor
CombineVariablePhaseModulation(VPM), waveshaping,ringmodulation,samples,and subtractivesynthesiswithamodularpatchpanel system,andyouhavetheMOD7.Exceptionally versatile,itofferseverythingfromclassicFM keyboards,bellsandbasses(includingtheabilityto importsoundsfromvintageDXsynths)torhythmic soundscapesandsparkling,epicpads. Vastsamplemanglingcapabilities,withincredible flexibilityandpower,letyoucreateincrediblyrich processingenvironments:combinemultiplestagesof filtering,waveshaping,andringmodulation,evenuse samplesasFMmodulators,allpatchedtogether howeveryoulike.

MS-20EX
Patch-panel synth with unique, aggressive tone
AdramaticexpansionofKorgsclassicMS20analog synth,theMS20EXputsmodularpatchcablesunder yourfingertips.Modulatefilterswithaudiorate oscillators;turnaudioinputsintocontrolsignals; controlalloftheoriginalknobswithmodsources includingadditionalenvelopes,LFOs,andrealtime controllers. Itsatweakersdream,butevenwithoutthepatch panel,theMS20EXwouldmakewaveswithits unique,aggressivetonedueinlargeparttoits unusualfilters,whicharecompletelydifferentfrom thoseineithertheAL1orthePolysixEX.

54

Detailed Program Editing Using Vector Synthesis

Using Vector Synthesis


VectorSynthesisletsyoucontrolProgramandEffects parametersbymovingtheVectorJoystick,byusingthe programmableVectorEnvelope,orbythecombination ofthetwo. WhentheVectorJoystickisinitscenterposition,the VectorEnvelopehascompletecontroloverthepoints position.Likewise,whentheVectorEnvelopeisinthe center,theVectorJoystickhascompletecontrol. WhentheVectorEnvelopeisinuse,theVectorJoystick offsetsthepositionbyuptohalfwayacrosseitheraxis. Forinstance,iftheEnvelopeisallthewaytotheright oftheXaxis,andtheJoystickisallthewaytotheleft, theactualVectorpositionwillbeinthecenteroftheX axis. Hint:toquicklyresettheVectorJoysticktoitscenter value,holddownthefrontpanelControlResetbutton andmovethejoystick.

What does Vector mean?


Modulationgenerallyworksbymovingasingle control.likeaslider,inastraightline.Atoneendofthe control,themodulationisatitsminimum;attheother end,itsatitsmaximum. VectorSynthesisisalittledifferent.Itworksby movingaroundapointonatwodimensionalplane, bothleftrightandupdown. Youcanthinkofthispointasbeingpositionedontwo differentlinesatonce:aleftrightline(theXaxis),and anupdownline(theYaxis). Inotherwords,insteadofjusthavingonevalue(likea slider),eachVectorpointhastwovalues:oneforX, andoneforY.Seethegraphicbelowforanexample. VectorPointandXandYaxisvalues
Vector Point +127 Y value: +50 Y-Axis 0

Vector Volume Control and CC Control


TheVectordoestwomainthings:itcancontrolthe relativevolumeofthetwoOscillatorsinProgram mode(orofupto16ProgramsatonceinCombi mode),anditcangenerateCCsforcontrolling ProgramandEffectsparameters.

Vector and MIDI


TheVectorfeaturesinteractwithMIDIintwodifferent ways:throughtheVectorJoystick,andthroughthe VectorCCControl. TheVectorJoysticksendsandreceivestwoMIDI controllers:onefortheXaxis,andtheotherfortheY axis.InGlobalmode,youcanassignthesetoanyMIDI CCnumbersyoulike.ThedefaultsareCC#118forthe Xaxis,andCC#119fortheYaxis.
0 X-Axis X value: 90 +127

127

TheVectorJoystickanditsCCscontroltheVector position,inconjunctionwiththeVectorEG. TheVectorCCControl,ontheotherhand,isgenerated bytheVectorposition.Normally,thiswillonlyaffect internalsoundsandeffects.Ifyoulike,however,you canalsoenableaGlobalparametertosendthese generatedCCstoexternalMIDIdevices. FormoreinformationonVectorSynthesis,see15: VectorControlonpage 46oftheParameterGuide.

Inadditiontomovingthepointdirectlywiththe VectorJoystick,youcanalsousetheVectorEnvelope tomoveitspositionautomaticallyovertime,asshown below. VectorEnvelopemovingtheVectorPoint


+127

Y-Axis

127

0 X-Axis

+127

Vector Joystick and Vector Envelope


YoucanmovetheVectorpointusingthecombination oftheVectorJoystickandtheVectorEnvelope.Thetwo worktogether,althoughyoudontnecessaryhaveto usethembothatthesametime.

55

Playing and editing Programs

Vector Synthesis System

Vector CC MIDI Output

Global switch: Vector MIDI Out Vector Joystick Vector CC MIDI Output Vector CC Control

Vector Joystick

Global Controllers MIDI CC Assignments Defaults: X=118, Y=119

Vector Joystick MIDI In

Vector CC Control

Vector EG

scale

VJS X and Y modes

X+/ and Y+/ CC Assignments Program switch: Enable CC control

Vector CC Modulation of Program and FX Parameters

Vector Volume Control

Osc 1/2 Center Volume and Equal Power settings

Program switch: Enable Volume control

Vector Modulation of Oscillator Volume

Effects
Effectsarecoveredintheirownsectionofthemanuals, sowewontgointotoomuchdetailhere.Seethecross referencesbelowformoreinformation.

Master Effects
TherearetwoMasterEffects,whichareaccessed throughSends1and2.Thesearebestsuitedtoeffects suchasreverbsanddelays,butyoucanusethemwith anytypeofeffect. Formoreinformation,seeMastereffectson page 203.

Insert Effects
InsertEffectsletyousendeitherindividualOscillators ortheentireProgramthroughupto12effects,in series.Youcanuseanytypeofeffects,fromdistortions andcompressorstochorusesandreverbs.TheInsert Effectscanberoutedtothemainoutputs,ortoanyof theindividualoutputs. Formoreinformation,seeInserteffectsonpage 202.

Total Effects
ThetwoTotalEffectsarededicatedtoprocessingthe mainL/Routputs.Theyreideallysuitedtooverallmix effects,suchascompression,limiting,andEQbutas withtheothereffectssections,youcanuseanytypeof effectthatyoulike. Formoreinformation,seeProgramP9:Master/Total Effectonpage 143oftheParameterGuide.

Automatically importing a Program into Sequencer mode


TheAutoSongSetupfeaturecopiesthecurrent ProgramorCombinationintoaSong,andthenputs theKRONOSinrecordreadymode. Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhile youreplaying,youcanusethisfunctiontostart recordingimmediately.Todoso: 1. HolddowntheENTERkeyandpressthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEkey. TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillopenandaskAre yousure? 2. PressOK. YouwillautomaticallyenterSequencermode,andwill beintherecordreadystate. 3. PresstheSTART/STOPkeytostartthesequencer andbeginrecording.

56

Playing and editing Combinations


Playing Combinations
Whats a Combination?
Combinations,orCombisforshort,letyousplitand layerupto16Programsatonce. ACombiismadeupof16Timbres.EachTimbrehasa Program,alongwithparametersforkeyandvelocity zones,mixersettings,MIDIchannelandcontroller filtering,andsoon. AswithPrograms,eachCombihas12InsertEffects,2 MasterEffects,and2TotalEffects,forshapingand transformingthesoundsoftheindividualTimbres. Finally,Combiscanuse4KARMAmodulesatonce, forcomplexandlayeredgeneratedeffects.

Selecting Combinations
Thereareseveraldifferentwaystoselect Combinations.Eachoneisconvenientinadifferent way: Usingthefrontpanelbuttons,valueslider,and valueknob,youcanselectCombinationsquickly viaphysicalcontrols SelectingbyBankandnumber(viathetouch screen)letsyoubrowsethroughallofthe Combinationsinmemory,tofindtheonethatyou want SelectingbyCombinationcategory(viathetouch screen)letsyoufilterCombinationsbysoundtype, suchasPianosorDrums UsingafootswitchletsyouchangeCombinations evenwhilebothhandsarebusyplayingonthe keyboardconvenientforliveapplications MIDIprogramchangemessagesletyouselect Combinationsremotely,fromeitheraMIDI sequenceroranexternalMIDIcontroller Combinationbankcontents Bank
INTAC INT-D INT-D INTEG, USERAG

No.
000127

Description
Factory Combinations

000095 096127 User Combinations 000127

Selecting with the front-panel buttons


1. MakesurethattheCOMBIbuttonislit. ThismeansthatyoureinCombinationmode,inwhich youcanselectandeditCombinations.Ifthebutton isntlit,pressitnow;itwilllightup,andthemain CombinationPlaypagewillappear. 2. GotothemainCombinationPlaypage. ThemainPlaypageshowstheselectedProgram, status,pan,andvolumefortimbres116. 3. MakesurethattheCombinationnameisselected. Ifitisnotselected,gototheCombinationP0:Play pageandtouchtheCombinationsname,sothatits highlighted. 4. UsetheVALUEcontrollerstoselectthe Combinationnumberthatyouwishtoplay. Youcanusethefollowingmethodstoselecta Combination. TurntheValuedial. PresstheInc orDec buttons. Usethenumerickeypad[0][9]tospecifythe number,andpresstheENTERkey. 5. PressaBANKbutton(INTorUSERAG)to switchbanks. WhenyouselectadifferentBank,thebuttonsLEDwill light,andtheselectedbankwillappearontheupper leftsideoftheLCDscreen. Forexample,toselectbankINTB,presstheIBbutton inthetoprowofBankbuttons.TheIBbuttonwill light,andthenameINTBwillappearintheupperleft oftheLCDscreen.

Set Lists
CombinationscanalsobeselectedinSetLists,along withProgramsandSongs.Formoreinformation,see SetListsonpage 113.

Overview: Combination Banks


KRONOSshipsfromthefactorywithhundredsof factoryprogrammedCombinations.Youcancreate yourownoriginalcombinationsbyeditingthese factorysetcombinations,orbyinitializinga combinationandstartingfromscratch. Over1,400Combinationslotsareleftopenforyour ownprogramming,oradditionalsoundlibraries. TheseCombinationsareorganizedinto14Banksof128 Combinationseach,asdescribedbelow.Youcanalso storemanymoreCombinationsontheinternaldrive, oronexternalUSB2.0devices. FormoredetailsonthefactoryCombinations,please refertotheVoiceNameList. YoucanplayaCombinationandresampleyour performance,orsampleanexternalaudiosourcewhile listeningtothesoundofaCombination.

57

Playing and editing Combinations

Combination Select

Category (Category/Combination) Popup button

Favorite

Combination Select Popup button

Category (Category/Program) Popup button Bank/Program Select Popup button Program Select Status Play/Mute Solo On/Off Pan

Volume Timbre 01

Selecting by Bank and number


YoucanselectCombinationsfromalistorganizedby Combinationbank. 1. PresstheCombinationSelectpopupbutton. TheBank/CombinationSelectdialogappears. Bank/CombinationSelectmenu:

5. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselected Combination,presstheOKbuttontoclosethe popupmenu. IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,theselectionyoumade herewillbediscarded,andyouwillreturntothe Combinationthathadbeenselectedbeforeyouopened themenu.

Selecting by Category
YoucanselectCombinationsfromwithinacategory, suchaskeyboard,organ,bass,anddrums.When shippedfromthefactory,theCombinationsare organizedinto16categories,eachwithseveralsub categories.Therearealso2morecategories,initially namedUser16andUser17,whichyoucanuseand renameasdesired. 1. PresstheCategorypopupbutton. TheCategory/CombinationSelectdialogappears. Category/CombinationSelectmenu

Inthisillustration,bankINTAisselected.Theliston therightshowstheCombinationscontainedinthat bank. 2. Pressthetabsontheleftsideofthedisplayto selectabank. 3. Pressoneofthenamesinthelisttoselecta Combination. TheselectedCombinationwillbehighlighted,andthe keyboardwillimmediatelyswitchtothenewsound. 4. Ifyoulike,playafewnotestohearthenew Combination. YoucanplaythenewCombinationwhilethemenuis stillshowing,withoutneedingtopressOK. Intheillustrationabove,theSynthcategoryisselected. ThelistontherightshowstheCombinationswhich belongtothatcategory.

58

Playing Combinations Selecting Combinations

2. Pressthetabslocatedtotheleftsideofthedisplay toselectadifferentcategory. Thenameoftheselectedcategorywillbedisplayedin fullinthelowerleftofthedisplay. 3. Optionally,focusonamorespecificgroupof soundsbyselectingasubcategoryfromthe secondcolumnoftabs. Thefullnameofthesubcategoryalsoappearsinthe lowerleftofthedisplay. 4. PressoneoftheCombinationnamesinthecenter areatoselectaCombination. TheselectedCombinationwillbehighlighted. 5. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselected Combination,presstheOKbuttontoclosethe popupmenu. IfyoupresstheCancelbutton,yourselectionwillbe discarded,andyouwillreturntotheCombinationthat hadbeenselectedwhenyouopenedthepopupmenu.

Drum Track
TheDrumTrackintegrateswithalltheotherfeatures ofCombinationmode,includingKARMA.Fordetails, seeUsingtheDrumTrackinCombinationmodeon page 240.

Using the Favorites check-box


TheBankandCategoryselectpopupsbothincludea Favoritecheckboxatthebottomofthescreen.This letsyoutrimthelisttoshowonlyCombinations youvemarkedasfavorites.Formoreinformation,see UsingtheFavoritescheckboxonpage 29.

Using a footswitch to select Combinations


Youcanassignafootswitchtostepthrough Combinationsonebyone,eithergoingup(0,1,2,3, etc.)orgoingdown(3,2,1etc.).Thisletsyouchange Combinationswithoutusingyourhandsgreatfor quickProgramchangesinliveperformancesituations. Formoreinformation,seeUsingafootswitchtoselect Programsonpage 29.

Selecting Combinations via MIDI


YoucansendMIDIProgramChangemessagesto KRONOSfromexternalMIDIdevices,suchas computersequencersorotherMIDIcontrollers.In conjunctionwithMIDIBankSelect,youcanusethese toselectanyCombinationfromall14Banks. Formoreinformation,seeSelectingcombinations, onpage 1130oftheParameterGuide.

Using controllers to modify the sound


Youcanusethejoystick,ribboncontroller,SW1,SW2, VectorJoystick,VALUEslider,keyboard,footpedals andswitches,andtheControlPanelknobs,sliders,and switchestocontrolthesound. Formoreinformation,seethecorresponding explanationforPrograms:UsingControllerson page 31.

59

Playing and editing Combinations

Easy Combination editing Changing the Programs within a Combi


ChangingtheProgramsassignedtothe16Timbresisa quickwaytodramaticallyalterthesoundofthe Combination. TherearetwowaystoselectProgramsforaTimbre: SelectingProgramsfromthefrontpanelandLCD, eitherbyBankorbyCategory SelectingProgramsviaMIDIprogramchange messages Note:MIDIprogramchangesonlyworkforTimbres whoseStatusissettoINT. 3. SelectaProgram,andpressOK. TheCategorySelectwindowwilldisappear.Notethat thenewProgramisnowselectedforTimbre1. 4. Pressthepopupbuttondirectlyunderthe Categorybutton. ThisistheBank/Numberselectbutton.Itbringsupa windowwhichletsyouselectProgramsbyBank again,justlikethesimilarwindowinProgrammode. 5. SelectadifferentProgram,andpressOK. TheProgramintheTimbreisnowchangedtotheone youjustselected.Also,theBank/Numberparameteris nowhighlighted,whichmeansthatwecanusethe frontpanelbuttonstoselectBanksandPrograms. 6. PressoneofthefrontpanelBankbuttons. or: ToselectbanksUSERAAGG,pressandholda pairofIandUBANKbuttonstogether.For example,toselectbankUSERCC,pressandhold theICbutton,andthenpresstheUCbutton. NoticethatTimbre1sBankandProgramchangeto matchtheselectedBank. 7. UseInc/Dec,theVALUEdial,orthenumeric keypadtoselecttheProgram.

Selecting Programs for Combi Tracks


TochangetheProgramassignedtoaTimbre: 1. GototheProgSelect/MixertabofthePlaypage. Thispageshowsall16Timbresatonce,includingtheir Programassignments,volume,pan,play/mute,solo, andmore. 2. TouchthepopupbuttonatthetopofTimbre1. ThisistheCategoryselectbutton.Itbringsupa windowwhichallowsyoutoselectaProgramby Category,identicaltothesimilarfunctioninProgram mode.

Adjusting the mix


YoucanuseboththeControlSurfaceandtheLCDto setthevolume,pan,andEQsettingsforeachTimbre, aswellastheirPLAY/MUTEandSoloOn/Offstates. ThebuttonhastwoLEDs:oneforTimbres18,andthe otherforTimbres916.Pressthebuttontoswitch betweenthetwo. 2. Optionally,gototheControlSurfacetabofthe Playpage. 3. PresstheMIXERKNOBSbutton untiltheINDIVIDUALPANLED lightsup. Thismakesknob1controlTimbre1s pan,andknob2controlTimbre2span, andsoon. 4. Usesliders18toadjustthevolumesofTimbres1 8,respectively. 5. Useknobs18toadjustthepanpositionsof Timbres18. 6. PresstheMIXERKNOBSbutton untiltheCHANNELSTRIPLED lightsup. Thismakestheknobscontrolavirtual channelstrip,includingpan,EQ,and effectssends. 7. PressMIXSELECTbutton1. TheChannelStripnowcontrolsthePan,EQ,andFX SendsforTimbre1. 8. Useknobs26toadjusttheTimbress3bandEQ, andknobs7and8tocontroltheTimbresEffects Sends1and2.

Setting mix parameters from the LCD


1. GototheProgSelect/MixertabofthePlaypage. Thispageshowsthevolume,pan,play/mute,solo,and Programassignmentsforall16Timbres. 2. SelecttheonscreenVolumesliderforTimbre1. 3. UseInc/Dec,theVALUEdial,orthenumeric keypadtosetthevolumeasdesired. 4. SelecttheonscreenPanknobforTimbre1,and edititsvalueasdesired. Timbrepaninteractswiththepanstoredinthe Program.AsettingofC064reproducesthePrograms oscillatorpansettings.AdjustingtheTimbrePanwill movethesoundtoleftorrightwhilepreservingthe panrelationshipbetweentheoscillators.Asettingof L001isfarleft,andR127isfarright.

Using the Control Surface for the mix


Youcanalsoeditthemixerparametersdirectlyfrom theControlSurface,eightTimbresatatime. 1. PresstheTIMBRE/TRACKbuttonunder CONTROLASSIGN,sothatthe18LEDlightsup.

60

Easy Combination editing Easy KARMA editing

Internally,thesystemfiguresouthowtheOscillatoris routedtotheMasterEffects,andautomaticallyadjusts theappropriateeffectssendparameters. 9. PressMIXSELECTbutton2.

TheChannelStripnowcontrolsthePan,EQ,andFX SendsforTimbre2.EachTimbrehasitsown, dedicatedstereo3bandEQ. 10.EdittheChannelStripforTimbre2asdesired. NoticethatPanisavailable,indifferentways,with bothsettingsoftheMIXERKNOBSbutton.

Easy KARMA editing


KARMAstandsforKayAlgorithmicRealtimeMusic Architecture.Itsanimmenselypowerful performancetool,andcanprovideawiderangeof musicaleffectsincluding: Arpeggiation Drumandinstrumentgrooves ComplexCCgestures(asifitwasautomatically movingknobsorjoysticksforyou) Musicalphrasegeneration Anycombinationoftheabove andmuchmore. YoucancontrolmanyKARMAparametersdirectly fromthefrontpanel. 1. GototheControlSurfacetabofthePlaypage. 2. PresstheRTKNOBS/KARMAbuttonunder CONTROLASSIGN. TheLCDwillnowshowtheKARMAparameters assignedtotheslidersandswitches. 3. MovethesliderstochangetheKARMA parameters. FormoreinformationonKARMA,seeUsing KARMAonpage 213.

Turning KARMA on and off


TheoverallcontrolforKARMAistheON/OFFbutton. Turnthebuttonon(LEDlit)toenableKARMA;turn thebuttonoff(LEDoff)todisableKARMA.

LATCH button
WhenLATCHisturnedon,KARMAwillcontinueto playevenafteryouvestoppedplayingonthe keyboard,drum/chordpads,orMIDIIn. Thisisconvenientwhenyouwanttoplayontopofa KARMAgeneratedgroove,forinstance.

Selecting KARMA Scenes


EachCombicanhaveupto8KARMAScenes,which arepresetsfortheKARMAparameters.Different Scenesmayproducedramaticallydifferenteffects.You canselectScenesdirectlyfromtheControlSurface: 1. PresstheRTKNOBS/KARMAbuttonunder CONTROLASSIGN. TheControlSurfacewillswitchtoRealTimeKnobs andKARMAmode. 2. SelectScenesbypressingthetoprowofControl Panelswitches. NotethatnotallCombiswillnecessarilyhave8 differentScenes.

Editing KARMA parameters via the sliders


YoucanalsoeditvariousKARMAparametersinreal time,usingtheControlSurfacesliders.Thespecific parameterswillvarydependingontheCombi,soit maybehelpfultolookattheLCD:

61

Playing and editing Combinations

Detailed Combination editing


YoucaneditanyoftheCombinationsshippedwith KRONOS,oryoucanstartwithaninitialized Combinationtocreatesoundsfromscratch. Naturally,youcanusethefactoryProgramstocreate newCombis,oruseyourowncustomPrograms.If youreintheprocessofeditingaPrograminProgram mode,andyouusethePrograminaCombi,youllhear theeditedversioninCombimodeaswell. AswithPrograms,youcandomanybasicedits directlyfromthefrontpanelControlSurfaceknobs, switches,andsliders,withouteverdelvingdeeperinto theLCDinterface.Forinstance,youcanusetheknobs tochangeattackandreleasetimes,makesounds brighterordarker,altereffectsdepths,modulate KARMAsphrasegeneration,andsoon.Fordetailson howtheseworkinProgrammode,seeQuickedits usingtheknobs,sliders, and switchesonpage 39. Toaddfinishingtouchestothesound,setuptheInsert, Master,andTotalEffectsasdesired(ontheP8:Insert EffectsandP:9Master/TotalEffectspages,respectively.) Theseeffectscanbedifferentfromthoseofthe individualProgramsinProgrammode,ifdesired. Inaddition,youcanmakeKARMAsettings(ontheP7: KARMApage)andcontrollersettings(ontheP3:MIDI Filter/Zonespage)tocreatethefinishedCombination.

Soloing timbres
YoucanusetheControlSurfaceSolofunctiontolisten totheCombisindividualTimbres.Formore information,seeSoloswitchandSelectswitches18 onpage 430.

Using COMPARE
Whenyoureintheprocessofeditingasound, pressingtheCOMPAREbuttonwillrecallthesaved versionofthesound,asitwasbeforeyoustarted editing.Toindicatethatyouarelisteningtothesaved version,thebuttonsLEDwilllightup. PressingCOMPAREagainreturnsyoutotheversion youareediting,andtheLEDwillgooutagain. IfyoueditwhiletheCOMPARELEDislit,thekeywill againgodarkandyourpreviouseditswillbelost.

A suggested approach for editing


First,selectaProgramforeachTimbre,ontheProgram Select/MixertaboftheP1:Playpage.(Notethatyou donthavetouseall16Timbres!) Next,createanydesiredkeyboardorvelocitysplits, layers,orcrossfadesbetweenthedifferentTimbres. YoucandothisontheKeyboardZonesandVelocity ZonestabsoftheP3:MIDIFilter/Zonespage. Afterthis,adjustthevolumesoftheTimbres(backon theProgramSelect/Mixertab),andsetupanyother Timbreparametersasdesired.

Resetting individual controls


TheRESETCONTROLSbuttonletsyourevertan individualknob,slider,orswitchtoitssavedsetting. Formoreinformation,seeResettingindividual controlsonpage 42.

Combination overview
Combination page structure
ThemainP0:Playpageoffersaccesstothemost importantaspectsofCombis,including: SelectingandplayingCombinations SelectingindividualPrograms MakingbasicsettingsforKARMA Editingmixersettingsandsoundparametersvia theControlSurface Quicksamplingandresampling Thedetailededitingpages,P1throughP9,giveyou moreindepthaccesstotheCombispowerfulkeyand velocityzones,MIDIfiltering,VectorSynthesis, KARMA,DrumTrack,andEffects. Page Main features
Select and play Combinations Perform easy edits using the Realtime Knobs, KARMA sliders, and Tone Adjust Adjust mix parameters including volume, pan, EQ, and send levels Select a Program for each timbre Quick sampling and re-sampling P2: Timbre Params

Page

Main features
Adjust EQ settings for each Timbre Assign functions to SW1/2 and Real-Time knobs 5-8 Set up Vector synthesis Set up the Drum Track Set up the on-screen pads Set various parameters for each timbre, such as MIDI channel, OSC select, Pitch etc. Set up MIDI transmission/reception filters for each Timbre. Set up keyboard and velocity zones for each Timbre. ------ Make detailed KARMA settings. Select insert effects and make settings for them. Specify send levels to the Master effects and routing to the outputs. Select Master send effects and Total effects, and adjust their settings.

P1:EQ/Vector/ Control

P3: MIDI Filter/Zone P4: P5: P6: P7: KARMA

P0: Play

P8: Insert Effects

P9: Master and Total Effects

62

Detailed Combination editing Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches

Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage, pleaseseeBasicoperationsonpage 17. YoucansamplefromwithinCombinationmode includingresamplingtheCombinationitself.Formore information,seeSamplinginProgramand Combinationmodesonpage 148. Combinationstructureandcorrespondingpages

Youcanalsomixinliveaudioinputs,andprocess themthrougheffects.Formoreinformation,see Usingeffectswiththeaudioinputsonpage 207.

Timbre1 Program

Vector: P1 - 5,6,7

Controllers: P1 - 8 Pads: P1 - 9

Drum Track: P1 - 3 Tone Adjust: P0 - 9

Audio Input: P0 - 8

Parameters 3Band EQ

Routing: P8-1, 2 KARMA: P7

Timbre2 Program

Parameters 3Band EQ

Master Effects 1, 2: P9 Timbre Insert Effects 112: P8 Total Effects 1, 2: P9

Timbre3 Program

Parameters 3Band EQ

AUDIO OUTPUT L/MONO, R

Insert Effects Master Effects Individual Outputs

Timbre4 Program

Parameters 3Band EQ
REC Bus FX Control Bus

AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1,2,3,4

Timbre16 Program

Parameters 3Band EQ

P11, P22, etc. indicate the KRONOS on-screen pages and tabs.

Layers, Splits, and Velocity Switches


WithinaCombination,youcanusenotenumberand velocitytodeterminewhichTimbreswillsound. TheProgramsassignedtoeachTimbrecansoundin threeways:aspartofalayer,asplit,oravelocity switch.ACombinationcanbesettouseanyoneof thesemethods,ortousetwoormoreofthesemethods simultaneously.
Program B Program A Strong Soft Keyboard playing dynamics Velocity Switch: Keyboard playing dynamics (velocity) switches between different programs.

Layer
LayerscausetwoormoreProgramstosound simultaneouslywhenanoteisplayed.
Program A Program B Layer: Two or more programs sound simultaneously.

OnKRONOS,youcanuseadifferentProgramforeach ofuptosixteenTimbres,andcombinetwoormoreof theabovemethodstocreateevenmorecomplex setups.


Program A Program D Program C Strong Soft Keyboard playing dynamics

Program B

Example: B and C/D are split. In the lower keyboard range, A and B are layered. In the higher keyboard range, C and D are switched by velocity and layered with A.

Split
SplitscausedifferentProgramstosoundondifferent areasofthekeyboard.
Program A Program B Split: Different programs will sound in different areas of the keyboard.

Asanadditionalpossibility,youcansettheslopefora keyzoneorvelocityzonesothatthevolume diminishesgradually.Thisletsyouchangeasplitintoa keyboardcrossfade,oravelocityswitchintoavelocity crossfade.


Program A Program B Keyboard X-Fade (keyboard crossfade): As you play from low notes to high notes, the volume of A will fade out, and the volume of B will fade in.

Velocity Switch
VelocitySwitchescausedifferentProgramstosound dependingonthevelocity(howhardyouplaythe notes).

63

Playing and editing Combinations

Creating Key Splits and Layers


LetscreateaCombiwhichcombinesbothsplitsand layers,likethediagrambelow:
Timbre 1 Timbre 2 Timbre 3 Brass Strings Piano

Next,ifyousettheBottomSlopeoftimbre1to12,and settheTopSlopeoftimbre2to12,thesoundwill changegraduallyinsteadofchangingsuddenly.

Creating Velocity Switches


Next,letscreateasimplevelocityswitched Combination,likethediagrambelow:
Timbre 1 Brass Strings 127 64 63 1 Velocity switch

C1

B3 C4

G9

Timbre 2

1. GototheProgSelect/Mixerpage. 2. SelectapianosoundforTimbre1,abrasssound forTimbre2,andastringssoundforTimbre3. 3. GototheMIDItaboftheP2:TimbreParameters page. 4. ForTimbres13,setStatustoINTandMIDI ChanneltoGch(theGlobalChannel). 5. GototheKeyboardZonestaboftheMIDI Filter/Zonespage. 6. SetTimbre1sTopKeytoG9,anditsBottomKey toC4. 7. SetTimbres2and3toaTopKeyofB3,anda BottomKeyofC1. Youcanalsoenterthesevaluesbyselectingthe parameter,andthenholdingdowntheENTERkey andplayinganoteonthekeyboard. 1. GototheProgSelect/Mixerpage. 2. SelectabrasssoundforTimbre1,andastrings soundforTimbre2. 3. GototheMIDItaboftheP2:TimbreParameters page. 4. ForTimbres1and2,setStatustoINTandMIDI ChanneltoGch(theGlobalChannel). 5. GototheVelocityZonestaboftheMIDI Filter/Zonespage. 6. SetTimbre1sTopVelocityto127,anditsBottom Velocityto64. 7. SetTimbre2toaTopVelocityof63,andaBottom Velocityof1.

Velocity Zone Slope


SimilartoKeyZoneSlopes,asdescribedabove,these letyoufadeinandfadeoutsoundsgraduallyovera velocityrange,insteadofasimplehardswitch. Inthecaseoftheaboveexample,youcouldsetthe velocityzonesofthetwoTimbressothattheypartially overlap.Then,settheTopSlopeandBottomSlopeso thatthesoundchangesgradually,insteadofchanging suddenlybetweenvelocityvaluesof63and64.

Key Zone Slope


Inadditiontohardsplits,inwhichthesound changesabruptly,youcanusetheSlopeparametersto graduallyfadeasoundinoroutoverarangeofkeys. Intheexampleabove,youcouldsettheBottomKeyof timbre1toG3,andsettheTopKeyoftimbre2toG4, sothatthesetwotimbresoverlap.

MIDI Settings
Timbre Parameters MIDI page
Status
ThiscontrolsthestatusofMIDIandtheinternaltone generatorforeachTimbre.Normally,ifyoureplaying aninternalProgram,thisshouldbesettoINT. IfthestatusissettoOff,EXT,orEX2,thatinternal soundswillnotbeplayed.Offsimplydisablesthe Timbreentirely.TheEXTandEX2settingsallowthe TimbretocontrolanexternalMIDIdevice.Formore information,seeStatusonpage 454oftheParameter Guide.

MIDI Channel
TimbresthatyouwishtoplayfromKRONOSs keyboardmustbesettotheglobalMIDIchannel.Your playingonthekeyboardistransmittedontheglobal MIDIchannel,andwillsoundanytimbrethatmatches thischannel.NormallyyouwillsetthistoGch.When thisissettoGch,theMIDIchannelofthetimbrewill alwaysmatchtheglobalMIDIchannel,evenifyou changetheglobalMIDIchannel. Onsomepreloadedcombinations,Timbresusedby KARMAmayhavetheirMIDIChannelssetto somethingotherthanGch.Thesewillbetimbres thatplayonlywhenKARMAisonaveryuseful techniqueforcreatingKARMAlized combinations. Formoreinformation,see71c:MIDII/Oon page 471oftheParameterGuide.Inparticular,notethe relationshipsbetweenKARMAassignmentsandMIDI Channel.

Bank Select (when status=EX2)


WhentheStatusissettoEX2,theseparametersallow youtotransmitMIDIBankSelectmessagesfor changingbanksonexternalMIDIdevices.

64

Detailed Combination editing Altering Programs to fit within a Combination

MIDI filter settings


ForeachMIDIFilteritem,youcanspecifywhetheror notthecorrespondingMIDImessagewillbe transmittedandreceived.Thecheckeditemswillbe transmittedandreceived. TheMIDIfiltersdontturnthefunctionsthemselveson oroff.Instead,thefilterjustcontrolswhetherornot thatMIDImessagewillbetransmittedandreceived.

Forexample,ifportamentoison,portamentowillbe appliedtotheinternalKRONOSsoundevenif PortamentoSWCC#65isunchecked. Asanotherexample,letssaythatyouveselecteda bassProgramforTimbre1,andapianoProgramfor Timbre2,withthegoalofcreatingabass/pianosplit. Youcouldmakethefollowingsettingssothatpressing thedamperpedalaffectsonlyTimbre2spianosound: 1. GototheMIDIFilter1taboftheMIDI Filter/Zonespage. 2. ChecktheEnableDamperboxforTimbre1. 3. UnchecktheEnableDamperboxforTimbre2.

Altering Programs to fit within a Combination


YoucanmakevariouschangestoProgramswithinthe contextofaparticularCombination,tomakethemfit betterwithotherPrograms,ortocreateparticular soniceffects.Thesechangesdonotaffecttheoriginal Programs,orhowthoseProgramssoundinother Combinations.

OSC Select
Normally,thisshouldbesettoBTH(Both). IfthetimbreisusingaprogramwhoseOscillator ModeisDoubleorDoubleDrums,andyouwantonly OSC1orOSC2(notboth)tosound,setthistoOSC1 (onlyOSC1willsound)orOSC2(onlyOSC2will sound).

Timbre Parameters: OSC

Portamento
Normally,thisshouldbesettoPRG. IftheProgramusesportamento,butyoudliketo disablethisforthecurrentCombination,setthis parametertoOff. Conversely,ifyouwanttoforcetheportamentotobe on,orjusttochangetheportamentotime,setthistoa valueof001127.Theportamentowillchangetouse thenewlyspecifiedtime.

Force OSC Mode


NormallythisshouldbesettoPRG,sothatthesound willplayassetbytheoriginalProgram. Ifyouwishtoforceapolyphonicprogramtosound monophonically,setthiseithertoMN(Mono)orLGT (Legato).Conversely,setthistoPolyifyouwishto forceamonophonicprogramtoplaypolyphonically. Formoreinformation,seeForceOSCMode,on page 455oftheParameterGuide.

65

Playing and editing Combinations

Timbre Parameters: Pitch

Use Programs Scale, Scale


Thisspecifiesthescaleforeachtimbre.Ifyoucheck UseProgramsScale,thescalespecifiedbythe programwillbeused.Timbresforwhichthisisnot checkedwillusetheScalesetting.

Delay
YoucansetsomeTimbressothattheydontsound immediatelyatnoteon.Thiscancreatecooleffects, andmoredramaticlayers. YoucanspecifythedelayforeachTimbreeitherin milliseconds(ms),orinrhythmicvalueswhichsyncto thesystemtempo. IfyousettheDelaytoKeyOff,theTimbrewillsound whenthenoteisreleased.

Transpose, Detune (BPM Adjust)


Theseparametersadjustthepitchofthetimbre. Inalayertypecombination,youcansettwoor moretimbrestothesameprogram,andcreatea richersoundbyusingTransposetoshifttheirpitch apartbyanoctaveorbyusingDetunetocreatea slightdifferenceinpitchbetweenthetwo. Insplittypecombinations,youcanuseTranspose toshiftthepitch(insemitoneunits)ofthe programsspecifiedforeachkeyzone. Ifyouwishtochangetheplaybackpitchofadrum program,useDetune.IfyouchangetheTranspose setting,therelationshipbetweennotesanddrum soundswillchange.

Editing Programs with Tone Adjust


UsingToneAdjust,youcanmakedetailededitsto ProgramswithinthecontextoftheCombi.Theseedits willnotaffecttheoriginalProgram,oranyother CombiswhichusetheProgram.ToeditaProgram withToneAdjust: 1. PresstheTONEADJ/EQbuttonunderCONTROL ASSIGN. TheTONEADJUSTLEDwilllightup. 2. GototheControlSurfacetabofthePlaypage. ThispagemirrorstheControlSurface.Itsveryuseful withToneAdjust,sinceitshowsyoutheparameter assignments,exactvalues,andsoon. 3. SelecttheTimbrewhoseparametersyoudliketo adjust. ThiscorrespondstotheTimbreselectedin TIMBRE/TRACKmode.Youcansetthisusingthe TimbreparameterontherightsideoftheLCD,orby holdingdowntheTONEADJ/EQbuttonandpressing anyoftheControlPanelswitches.Thetoprowselects Timbres18,andthebottomrowselectsTimbres916. 4. Editthecontrolsasdesired. Inadditiontoeditingthevalues,youcanalsochange theassignmentsofToneAdjustparameterstothe sliders,knobs,andswitches.Formoreinformation,see UsingToneAdjustonpage 41.

Adjusting the BPM of multisamples or samples created in Sampling mode


Ifatimbresprogramusesmultisamplesorsamples thatyoucreatedinSamplingmode(orloadedinDisk mode)ataspecificBPMvalue,youcanusethepage menucommandDetuneBPMAdjusttocallupanew BPMvalue.ThischangestheBPMbyadjustingthe playbackpitch. Formoreinformation,seeDetuneBPMAdjust,on page 504oftheParameterGuide.

Effects
Effectsarecoveredintheirownsectionofthemanuals, sowewontgointotoomuchdetailhere.

Master Effects
TherearetwoMasterEffects,whichareaccessed throughSends1and2.Thesearebestsuitedtoeffects suchasreverbsanddelays,butyoucanusethemwith anytypeofeffect. Formoreinformation,seeMastereffectson page 203.

Insert Effects
InsertEffectsletyousendeitherindividualOscillators ortheentireProgramthroughupto12effects,in series.Youcanuseanytypeofeffects,fromdistortions andcompressorstochorusesandreverbs.TheInsert Effectscanberoutedtothemainoutputs,ortoanyof theindividualoutputs. Formoreinformation,seeInserteffectsonpage 202.

66

Detailed Combination editing Automatically importing a Combination into Sequencer mode

Total Effects
ThetwoTotalEffectsarededicatedtoprocessingthe mainL/Routputs.Theyreideallysuitedtooverallmix effects,suchascompression,limiting,andEQbutas withtheothereffectssections,youcanuseanytypeof effectthatyoulike.

Automatically importing a Combination into Sequencer mode


TheAutoSongSetupfeatureautomaticallyappliesthe settingsofthecurrentCombinationtoasong. Ifinspirationforaphraseorsongstrikesyouwhile youreplayingaprogramorcombination,youcanuse thisfunctiontostartrecordingimmediately. HolddowntheENTERkeyandpressthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEkey.TheSetuptoRecord dialogboxwillopenandaskAreyousure?.Press OK.YouwillautomaticallyenterSequencermode, andwillbeintherecordreadystate.Pressthe START/STOPkeytostartthesequencerandbegin recording.

Saving your edits


Onceyouvetweakedthesoundtoperfection,youll wanttosaveyourwork.Tosaveyouredits: 1. SelecttheWriteCombinationcommandfromthe pagemenu,attheupperrighthandcornerofthe screen. Youcanalsocallupthismenucommandbyholding ENTERandpressing0onthenumerickeypad. Thisbringsupadialogboxwhichallowsyoutosave theCombination.Optionally,youcanalsoselectanew location,orchangetheCombinationsname. 2. PresstheTbuttontobringupthetextedit dialog. YoucangivetheCombinationadescriptivename usingtheonscreenkeyboard. 3. Afterenteringthename,pressOK. Thetexteditwindowwilldisappear,returningyouto themainSavedialog. 4. UnderToatthebottomofthedialog,pressthe popupbuttonnexttoCombinationtobringupthe savelocationdialog. 5. SelectalocationtosavetheeditedCombination. YoucanwritetoanylocationinbanksINTandUSER AG.Toavoidoverwritingthefactorysounds,itssafer touseaslotinoneoftheemptyUserbanks. 6. Afterselectingthelocation,pressOK. 7. PressOKagaintostartthewriteprocess. 8. Ifyouresureyouwanttowritetothislocation, pressOKagain. Afterthat,youredone! Formoreinformation,seeWritingProgramsand Combinationsonpage 182. Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds afterwritingtheCombination.Thisallowsthe systemtimetocompletetheprocess,whichincludes savingabackupofthedatatotheinternaldisk.

Saving to disk
YoucanalsosaveandmanageCombinationsonthe internaldiskandUSBstoragedevices.Formore information,seeSavingtodisks,CDs,andUSB mediaonpage 186.

67

Playing and editing Combinations

68

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)


Sequencer overview About the KRONOS sequencer
TheKRONOSsequencercanholdupto200songsand 400,000MIDIeventsor300,000audioevents.Itconsists ofa16trackMIDIsequenceranda16trackaudio recorder,givingyouatotalof32tracks. ViaMIDI,youcanrecordfromandplaythrough externalMIDIdevices,aswellastheKRONOS keyboard,physicalcontrollers,andinternalsounds. The24bit,48kHzaudiorecordersupports16tracksof playbackandfoursimultaneouschannelsofrecording. Audiotrackscanrecordexternalaudiosourcessuchas guitarsandvocalsaswellastheKRONOSinternal sounds.Youcanevenrecordmixautomationfor volumeandpan. Whenyouvecompletedasong,youcanresampleitto aWAVEfileanduseDiskmodetoburnyourWAVE filestoanaudioCDonaUSBCDR/RWdrive(not included). WithitsbroadrangeofcapabilitiessuchasIntrack Sampling,TimeStretch/Slice,KARMA,highquality effects,andphysicalcontrollers,theKRONOSisthe idealenvironmentformusicproductionorlive performance.

Sequencer edits must be saved to disk


Whenyouturnoffthepower,thesettingsmadein Sequencermodeandthesongdata,andanyuser patterndatathatyourecordedwillnotbebacked up.Ifyouwishtokeepthisdata,youmustsaveitto theinternaldriveoranexternalUSBdevicebefore turningoffthepower.(YoucouldalsodoaMIDI datadumptoanexternaldatafiler,ifyouprefer.) Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,the KRONOSwillnotcontainanysongdata.Ifyouwish toplayasongonthesequencer,youmustfirstload datafromdisk.(Alternatively,youcouldsend KRONOSaMIDIdatadumpwithSongdata).For moreinformation,seeLoadingdatafromdiskon page 190,andReceivingSysExdatadumpson page 810oftheParameterGuide.

Sequencer mode structure


Songs
AsongconsistsofMIDItracks116,amastertrack, audiotracks116,songparameterssuchasthesong name,Vector,KARMA,DrumTrack,effects,andRPPR settings,and100userpatterns. Amaximumof200songscanbeloadedintothe KRONOSmemoryatonce.Thousandscanbestored ontheinternaldisk,oronUSBstoragemedia. MIDItracks116andaudiotracks116eachconsistof setupparameterslocatedatthestartlocation,and musicaldatawithinthetrack.Themastertrack consistsoftempoandtimesignaturedata. Formoreinformation,seeSetupparameters& Musicaldataonpage 511oftheParameterGuide. YoucaneditMIDItracksbyusingEventEdit operationstomodifytherecordeddataorinsertnew data,andbyusingTrackEditoperationssuchas CreateControlData,whichinsertspitchbend, aftertouch,orcontrolchangedata. Youcanalsoeditaudiotracksinavarietyofways includingEventEditingoperationsthatletyouinsert ordeleteaudioevents,andRegionEditingoperations. RegionEditingallowsyoutoselectWAVEfilesandto editthestart/endaddressesofaWAVEfileinsingle sampleunits.

Patterns
Therearetwotypesofpatterns:presetpatternsand userpatterns. Presetpatterns:Patternssuitablefordrumtracks arepresetininternalmemory,andcanbeselected foranysong. Userpatterns:Eachsongcanhaveupto100 patterns.Whenusingapatterninadifferentsong, usetheUtilitymenucommandsCopyPatternor CopyFromSongetc.tocopythepattern.Youcan setthepatternlengthtooneormoremeasures,as desired.

Song recording and editing


Songrecordingisperformedontracks.Youcanrecord MIDItracksineitheroftwoways;realtimerecording orsteprecording.Forrealtimerecordingyoucan chooseoneofsixrecordingmodes. Audiotrackscanberecordedinrealtime,orcreated byaddingWAVEfiles.

69

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

This is a conceptual diagram of Sequencer mode including the hard disk recording function.

Sampling memory (RAM)


Sample

Sample

Song
Setting parameters Setting parameters Setting parameters Performance data Performance data Performance data Performance data

(Routing: P8) MIDI Routing 1,2 Audio Routing 1,2

Pattern U00...U99 RPPR Setup (P5)

Vector, Controllers, Drum Track Setup (P1)

KARMA (P7)

MIDI Track 01..16

Setting parameters

Master Effect 1, 2 (P9) Track

Setting parameters

Performance data

Insert Effect 1...12 (P8) Insert Effects Master Effects Individual Outputs
Region

Total Effect 1, 2 (P9)

AUDIO OUTPUT L/MONO, R

Master Track

Tempo and time signature data


Setting parameters Setting parameters Setting parameters Performance Performance Performance Performance
Audio events Automation events Audio events Automation events Audio events Automation events Audio events Automation events Region Region Region Region

(FX Ctrl BUS) (REC BUS)

AUDIO OUTPUT INDIVIDUAL 1...4

Audio Track 01..16

Setting parameters

Setting parameters

Performance

Audio events Automation events

Region

Audio recording function

WAVE (Mono)

Internal disk
Make Audio CD
WAVE (Stereo)

Resampling (L/R 2ch Mix)

Parentheses such as (P7) indicate the KRONOS page used for editing.

Patternsalwayscontainonlyasingletrackofmusical data.Ifyouwanttousepatternsonmultipletracks, youllneedtouseaseparatepatternforeachtrack. TousepatternsinaSong,eitherplacetheminaMIDI trackusingthePuttoMIDITrackmenucommand,or copythemusingtheCopytoMIDITrackmenu command. YoucanalsousepatternswiththeRPPR.Formore information,seeUsingRPPR(RealtimePattern Play/Record)onpage 106. Sequencermodepagestructure Page Explanation
Song playback/recording Easy editing using the realtime knobs, KARMA sliders, and Tone Adjust Edit mix parameters such as volume, pan, Play/Mute, and Solo On/Off Select programs for MIDI tracks Choose the recording mode Make settings for sampling, resampling, and audio EQ adjustments for each track Function assignments for the SW1 and SW2 switches and realtime knobs 58 Vector Synthesis settings Drum Track settings Assignments for the on-screen pads

Sequencer patterns and Drum Track patterns


PresetpatternsaredirectlyavailableforuseasDrum Trackpatterns. UserpatternscanalsobeusedwiththeDrumTrack, buttheymustfirstbeconvertedintouserDrumTrack patterns(viatheConverttoDrumTrackPatternmenu commandonP5:Pattern/RPPR). Whenyouconvertauserpattern,itwillbestoredin internalmemory,andwillnotdisappearevenwhen youturnoffthepower. Page
P2: Track Parameters

Explanation
Parameter settings for each track (MIDI channel, OSC selection, pitch settings, etc.) MIDI receive/transmit filter settings for each track Keyboard zone and velocity zone settings for each track Track editing Pattern recording and editing RPPR settings Convert User patterns to User Drum Track patterns Detailed KARMA settings

P0: Play/REC

P3: MIDI Filter/Zone P4: Track Edit

P5: Pattern/RPPR

P1: EQ/Vector/ Controller

P6: P7: KARMA

70

Sequencer overview Sequencer mode structure

Page
P8: Insert Effect P9: Master/Total Effect

Explanation
Insert effect selection, settings, send level to master effects, output routing Master effect and total effect selection and settings

Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage,see Basicoperationsonpage 17. YoucansamplefromwithinSequencermode includingresamplingtheSongitself.Formore information,seeSamplinginProgramand Combinationmodesonpage 148. Youcanalsomixinliveaudioinputs,andprocess themthrougheffects.Formoreinformation,see Usingeffectswiththeaudioinputsonpage 207.

Set Lists
SongscanalsobeselectedinSetLists,alongwith ProgramsandCombinations.Formoreinformation, seeSetListsonpage 113.

71

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Playing Songs Playback


InordertoplaybackaSonginthesequencer,youmust firsteitherloadtheSongfromdisk,sendtheSongto theKRONOSviaMIDISysEx,orrecordanewSong. Letsstartbyloadingandplayingthedemosongdata. 1. Followtheinstructionsforloadingandplaying thedemosongsunderListeningtothedemo songsonpage 1347oftheQuickStartGuide. Now,letsexperimentwiththedifferentcontrols. 3. PresstheLOCATEbuttontoreturntothestartof theSong. ThelocatepointdefaultstothestartoftheSong.You canchangethisasdesired;seeLOCATEsettingson page 73. 4. PressthePAUSEbuttontopauseplayback. PressthePAUSEswitchonceagaintoresume playback. 5. Pressthe<<REWorFF>>buttonstorewindorfast forward. Youcanuse<<REWandFF>>duringplaybackor whilestopped. Ifyoulike,youcanadjusttherewind andfastforwardspeedsusingthe FF/REWSPEEDpagemenucommand. 6. Tosetthetempo,turntheTEMPO knoborpresstheTAPTEMPO switchatthedesiredinterval.

2. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPbutton. Pressingthisoncestartsplayback;pressingitagain stopsplayback.Pressingitathirdtimeresumes playbackfromwhereitstopped. Note:SEQUENCERSTART/STOPhasaspecial functiononP5:Pattern/RPPR.Onthispage,insteadof playingtheSong,START/STOPplaystheselected pattern.


Meter

Tempo

Song Select Popup Track 2 Track 1 Category Program Select Play/Mute/Rec Solo Pan

Volume

Mute and Solo


MuteletsyousilenceanyoftheMIDItracks116, audiotracks116,oranyoftheaudioinputs(analog1, 2,USB1,2,S/P DIFL/R).Sololetsyouhearanyofthese tracksorinputsbyitself.Thesefunctionscanbeused invariousways.Forexample,youcanlistenonlyto therhythmsectionofthepreviouslyrecordedtracks whileyourecordnewtracks.LetstryouttheMuteand Solofunctions.

1. UseSongSelecttoselectthesongthatyouwant toplayback. 2. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. 3. Presstrack1Play/Rec/Mute. ThedisplaywillchangefromPlaytoMute,andthe playbackoftrack1willnolongerbeheard.Inthis way,themutefunctionallowsyoutosilencea specifiedtrackuntilthetrackisunmuted. Presstrack2Play/Rec/Mute.Thedisplaywill change,andtheplaybackoftrack2willalsobe

72

Playing Songs Playback

muted.Tocancelmuting,pressPlay/Rec/Muteonce again.

LOCATE settings
YoucanpresstheLOCATEswitchtomovetothe registeredlocation.Initially,thiswillmoveto 001:01.000.

Tip:Play/Rec/Mutecanbecontrolledfromthefront panelmixersection,orfromtheP0ControlSurface pageoftheLCDscreen.(SeeThecontrolsurfacein Sequencermodeonpage 74.) 4. Presstrack1SoloOn/Off. Solowillbehighlighted,andthistime,onlytrack 1willbeheard.Thisisknownassoloingthe track. IfbothMuteandSoloareused,theSolofunction willbegivenpriority. Presstrack2SoloOn/Off. Thedisplaywillchange,andyouwillhearthe playbackoftracks1and2. Note:Solo(on)appliestoalltracks,includingMIDI tracks116,audiotracks116,andallaudioinputs (analog,USB,andS/P DIF).If,asinthisexample, youveturnedSoloonforonlyMIDItracks1and2, youwillnothearMIDItracks316,audiotracks1 16,oranyoftheaudioinputs.

Tochangetheregisteredlocation,usetheSetLocation pagemenucommand.Alternatively,youcanregistera locationduringplaybackbyholdingdowntheENTER switchandpressingtheLOCATEswitch. Whenyouselectasong,theLOCATEsettingis automaticallyinitializedto001:01.000. Formoreinformation,seeSetLocation(forLocate Key)onpage 626oftheParameterGuide.

Loop playback
Whenrecordingorplayingbackasong,youcan individuallylooptheMIDItracksthatareplaying. IntheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackLooppage,check TrackPlayLoopfortheMIDItracksyouwanttoloop, anduseLoopStartMeasureandLoopEndMeasure tospecifythestartingandendingmeasureofthe regionthatwillplaybackasaloop. IfPlayIntroischecked(enabled),themeasures precedingtheloopwillbeplayedbackasan introductionbeforetheloopbegins. Ifyouplaybackfromthefirstmeasurewiththe settingsshowninthescreenshotbelow,thespecified regionofmeasureswillrepeatasfollows.Notethat PlayIntroisenabledforTrack1,butdisabledforTrack 2.
Measure 1 Track 1 Track 2 1 9 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 6 7 8 5

5. ToswitchSolooff,pressSoloOn/Offonceagain. PressSoloOn/OffforbothMIDItracks1and2. Thedisplaywillchange,andtheplaybackoftracks 1and2willbemuted.IftheSolofunctionisturned offforalltracks,playbackwillbeaccordingtothe Play/Rec/Mutesettings. Tip:Play/Rec/Mutecanbecontrolledfromthefront panelmixersection,orfromtheP0ControlSurface pageoftheLCDscreen.(SeeThecontrolsurfacein Sequencermodeonpage 74)

10 9

10 9

10 9

10 9

10 9

10 9

IfPlayIntroisdisabled(unchecked)forTrack1,the specifiedregionofmeasureswillrepeatasfollows.
Measure 1 Track 1 Track 2 5 9 2 6 3 7 4 8 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 5 10 11 12 13 6 7 8 5

Exclusive Solo
Normally,SoloworksinExclusiveSolooffmode,in whichyoucansolomorethanonetrackatatime(asin theexampleabove).Incontrast,ExclusiveSoloon modeallowsonlyonetracktobesoloedatatime, makingiteasytoswitchbetweensoloedtracks. UsetheExclusiveSolopagemenucommandto specifyhowtheSolofunctionwilloperate. ExclusiveSolooff:Youwillbeabletosolomorethan onetrackatatime.Thestatusofatrackwillchange eachtimeyoupressitsSoloOn/Offbutton. ExclusiveSoloon:WhenyoupressaSoloOn/Off button,onlythattrackwillbesoloed. TheSOLOsettingisnotstoredwhenyousavethe song. Tip:YoucanturnExclusiveSoloon/offbyholding downtheENTERswitchandpressingnumerickey1 (whennotinP4orP5).

10 9

10 9

10 9

10 9

10 9

10 9

Track Play Loop Loop Start Measure Loop End Measure Play Intro

73

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

The control surface in Sequencer mode


InSequencermode,youcanusetheninesliders,eight knobs,andsixteenswitchesofthecontrolsurfaceto editthesoundofeachtrackduringplayback,tocontrol KARMA,ortotransmitMIDImessagestoexternal devices. Ifyouusethecontrolsurfacetocontrolthemixer duringrecording,yourmoveswillberecorded,and willbereproducedduringplayback.Ifyouwantto adjust(andrecord)mixersettingsformultipletracks, usemultitrackrecording. Asexplainedbelow,youusethefrontpanel CONTROLASSIGNswitchestoselectthefunctions thatwillbecontrolledbythesliders,knobs,and switches. Youcanalsoviewthecontrolsurfacesettingsinthe LCDscreen,andeditthemthere.Youmayfindit convenienttodisplaytheP0:Play/RECControl Surfacepagefirst,sothatyoucanwatchthesettings youremakingfromthecontrolsurface. MIXPLAY/MUTE:Theseswitchescontrolthe Play/Rec/Mutestatus.RecisavailableifMultiRECis turnedon. MIXSELECT:Pressthesebuttonstoselectthecurrent track.Thiscurrenttrackappliestothechannelstrip (whenMIXERKNOBSissettoCHANNELSTRIP), andtoToneAdjust. Youcanalsousethesebuttonstochangethe Keyboard/Rectrack,sothatyoucanswitchbetween tracksdirectlyfromtheControlSurface.Todothis: 1. GototheControlSurfacetaboftheP0:Playpage. 2. SetCONTROLASSIGNtoTIMBRE/TRACK, usingeitherthefrontpanelbuttonortheon screentab. 3. Checktheboxontherighthandsideofthescreen, labeledLinkKBD/RECTrktoCtrlSurface. Now,youllbeabletochangetheKeyboard/Rectrack directlyfromtheControlSurface. IfyoupresstheSOLOswitch,theMIXSELECT buttonswillcontroltheSoloOn/Offstatus.TheSolo behaviorwilldependontheExclusiveSolosetting. Note:IfanyMIDItrack,Audiotrack,oraudioinputis soloed,theSOLOswitchLEDwillblink. Tip:ToturnSolooffforalltracks,holddownthe RESETCONTROLSbuttonandpresstheSOLO button. Tip:ToturnMuteoffforalltracks,holddownthe RESETCONTROLSbuttonandpressthe TIMBRE/TRACKbutton.

CONTROL ASSIGN
TIMBRE/TRACK
WhenTIMBRE/TRACKisselected,thecontrolsurface willeditthepan,EQ,effectsend,Play/Rec/Mute status,SoloOn/Offstatus,andvolumeofeachMIDI track. TheLEDsattherightoftheTIMBRE/TRACKswitch indicatewhetherMIDItracks18or916arecurrently selected.Thesliders,knobs,andswitcheswillcontrol therespectivesetoftracks. KNOBS:IfyouwanttoviewandeditthePansetting foralleighttracksatonce,presstheMIXERKNOBS switchtomaketheINDIVIDUALPANLEDlight,and usetheknobstoeditthePansettings.Converselyif youmaketheCHANNELSTRIPlight,theknobswill controlthepan,EQ,andeffectsendsforasingletrack. UsetheMIXSELECTswitchestoselectthetrackyou wanttoedit,andusetheknobstocontrolit.

AUDIO
WhenAUDIOisselected,thecontrolsurfacewilledit thepan,EQ,effectsend,Play/Rec/Mutestatus,Solo On/Offstatus,andvolumeoftheaudioinputsoraudio tracks.

74

Playing Songs The control surface in Sequencer mode

TheLEDsattherightoftheAUDIOswitchindicate whetheraudioinputs,audiotracks18,oraudiotracks 916arecurrentlyselected.Thesliders,knobs,and switcheswillcontroltherespectivesetofinputsor tracks. KNOBS:IfyoupresstheMIXERKNOBSswitchto maketheINDIVIDUALPANLEDlight,theknobswill controlthePansettingofthesixinputs,tracks18,or tracks916.IftheCHANNELSTRIPLEDislitandIN isselected,theknobswillcontrolthepanandeffect sendsforasingleinput.If18or916areselected,the knobswillcontrolthepan,EQ,andeffectsendsfora singletrack. UsetheMIXSELECTswitchestoselecttheinput/track youwanttocontrol,andusetheknobstocontrolthem. MIXPLAY/MUTE,MIXSELECT:Theseswitcheswork inthesamewayastheydoforTIMBRE/TRACK,as describedabove.

EXTERNAL
WhenEXTERNALisselected,thecontrolsurfaceis usedtotransmitMIDImessagestoanexternalMIDI device.Formoreinformation,see09e:Externalon page 540oftheParameterGuide.

RT KNOBS/KARMA
WhenRTKNOBS/KARMAisselected,theslidersand switchesofthecontrolsurfaceareusedtocontrol KARMA.Formoreinformation,see09f:RT(Real TimeKnobs)/KARMAonpage 541oftheParameter Guide.

TONE ADJ/EQ
WhenTONEADJ/EQ(ToneAdjust)isselected,the controlsurfaceisusedtotemporarilyadjustthe programusedbyeachMIDItrack.Forexamplewhile yourecreatingasong,youcanusethiscapabilityto adjustthesoundappropriatelyforyoursongwithout goingbacktoProgrammode;youmightsoftenthe toneofthebassorspeeduptheattackofastrings program,andmakethesechangeshappeninrealtime whilethesongplays. UseTrackintherightsideoftheLCDtoselectthe MIDItrackyouwanttoadjust. Formoreinformation,see09g:ToneAdjuston page 543oftheParameterGuide. Note:EQisonlyavailableinSetListmode.Formore information,seeGraphicEQonpage 119.

75

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

MIDI recording
Youcanrecordupto400,000events(e.g.,notes),up to200songs,andupto999measuresineachsong. Themaximumtimingresolutionis1/480partsper quarternote. TherearesixteentracksforMIDIperformancedata, andamastertrackwhichcontrolsthetime signatureandtempo. YoucanperformandrecordusingKARMAandthe DrumTrack. YoucanperformandrecordusingRPPR(Realtime PatternPlay/Recording). Thereare697builtinpresetpatternsidealfordrum tracks,andinadditionyoucancreateupto100 userpatternsforeachsong.Thesepatternscanbe usedasperformancedataforasong,orwiththe RPPRfunction.

Preparations for recording


Beforeyoubeginrecording,makesurethatthe Globalmodememoryprotectsettingisturnedoff. Formoreinformation,seeMemoryprotecton page 185. 3. SpecifythetonegeneratorandMIDIchannelthat willbeplayedbyeachMIDItrack.

Selecting a Song
Beforewecanbeginthisexample,weneedtoselectan emptysongwherewecanrecord. 1. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode. 2. GotothefirsttaboftheP0:Play/RECpage. ThefullpagenameisMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer. 3. PresstheSongSelectPopupbutton. TheSongselectionpopupwillappear. 4. Chooseanew,emptySongfromthelist,andpress theOKbutton. IntheP2:TrackParametersMIDIpage,Status specifieswhethereachtrackwillsoundtheinternal tonegeneratororanexternaltonegenerator.MIDI ChannelspecifiestheMIDIchannelforeachtrack. NormallywhenusingtheKRONOSasa16timbre soundmodule,youwillselectINTorBTH. Ingeneral,youshouldsetMIDIChannelto differentchannels116foreachtrack.Tracksthat aresenttothesameMIDIchannelwillsound simultaneouslywheneitherisrecordedorplayed. StatusINT:Duringplayback,theKRONOS internaltonegeneratorwillplaytheMIDIdata recordedonthattrack.Whenyouoperatethe KRONOSkeyboardorcontrollers,youwillbe playingandcontrollingthetrackselectedbyTrack Select.MIDIdatawillnotbetransmittedtoan externaldevice. StatusEXT,EX2,BTH:Duringplayback,theMIDI datarecordedonthattrackwillbetransmittedfrom MIDIOUTtoplayanexternalsoundmodule.When youoperatetheKRONOSkeyboardorcontrollers, MIDIdatawillbetransmittedtoplayandcontrol theexternalsoundmoduleselectedbyTrack Select.(TheMIDIchanneloftheexternaltone generatormustbesettomatchtheMIDIChannel ofKRONOStracksthataresettoEXT,EX2orBTH.) IfStatusissettoBTH,boththeexternaltone generatorandinternaltonegeneratorwillbe soundedandcontrolled. 4. Adjusttheeffectsettings. MakesettingsforeacheffectinP8:InsertEffectand P9:Master/TotalEffect.

Tip: Set Song Length


Bydefault,newsongsare64measureslong.Ifyoud liketorecordmorethan64measures,gotothep4: TrackEditpage,andusetheSetSongLength commandinthepagemenu.Formoreinformation,see SetSongLengthonpage 642oftheParameterGuide.

Track settings
Sinceweregoingtorecordanewsonginthisexample, wewillstartbyexplaininghowtoassignaprogramto eachMIDItrack,andmakebasicsettingssuchas volume. Fordetailsonaudiotracks,refertoAudiorecording onpage 89. 1. AssignaprogramtoeachMIDItrack. UseProgramSelect(P0:Play/RECMIDITrack ProgSelect/Mixerpage)toassignaprogramtoeach MIDItrack. AtthistimeyoucanpresstheCategorypopup andselectprogramsbycategory. YoucancopyvarioussettingsfromProgramsor Combinations,includingeffects,KARMAsettings, ToneAdjust,andsoon. Whenassigningaprogram,youcanuseTrack Selecttoselectthetrackforwhichyouaremaking assignments,andtryplayingthesound. 2. SetthepanandvolumeofeachMIDItrack. Pansetsthepanofeachtrack,andVolumesetsthe volumeofeachtrack.

76

MIDI recording Preparations for recording

Formoreinformation,seeUsingeffectsin CombinationsandSongsonpage 204,Sequencer P8:InsertEffectonpage 609oftheParameter Guide,andSequencerP9:Master/TotalEffecton page 621oftheParameterGuide. 5. Setthetempoandtimesignature. Tosetthetempo,youcanturntheTEMPOknobor presstheTAPTEMPOswitchatthedesired interval.Alternatively,youcanselectq(Tempo)in theP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer page(orsimilarpage),andusetheVALUE controllerstosetthetempo.SetTempoModeto Manual. Nextyouwillsetthetimesignature.Inthis example,wellexplainhowtosetthetimesignature usingtheMeterfield.Normally,youspecifythe timesignaturebeforerecordingthefirsttrack,and thenbeginrecording. a)PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and setMeterto**/**. b)Press**/**tohighlightit,andusetheVALUE controllerstosetthetimesignature. c)PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto beginrecording.Whentheprecounthasendedand Locatereaches0001:01:000,presstheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitchtostoprecording.Thetime signatureyouspecifiedhasbeenrecordedonthe Mastertrack. IfyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch duringtheprecount,thetimesignaturewontbe recorded. 6. SettheRECResolutionasdesired. WhenyourecordMIDIinrealtime,thisparameter controlstimingcorrection,alsoknownas quantization.Thisalsoapplieswhenrecording audioautomationdata. ThisonlyaffectsnewlyrecordedMIDI;itdoesnot changeanypreviouslyrecordedtracks. Forexample,letssupposethatyourecordedsome eighthnotesbutyourtimingwasnotquiteperfect, asshowninpart1oftheillustrationbelow.IfREC Resolutionweresettoewhenyourecorded,the timingwouldautomaticallybecorrectedasshown inpart2oftheillustration.IfRECResolutionis settoHi,thenoteswillberecordedwiththetiming atwhichyouplaythem.

Whenyouarefinishedmakingthesesettings,thebasic setupiscomplete.Youcannowrecordasdescribed underRecordingprocedureonpage 93

Saving your song parameter settings


AlloftheabovesettingscanbesavedasaTemplate Song.Ifyoufrequentlyusethesamesettings,thiscan bearealtimesaver.Formoreinformation,see TemplateSongs,below.

Template Songs
TemplateSongsstoreprettymucheverythinginthe SongexceptfortheMIDIandaudiodataitself.This includesProgramselections,trackparameters,effects andKARMAsettings,andtheSongsnameandtempo. ThefactorypresetTemplateSongsletyougetupand runningquicklywithmatchedsetsofsoundsand effectsforvariousstylesofmusic.Youcanalsocreate yourownTemplateSongswithyourfavoritesounds andsetups. NotethatTemplateSongsdonotincludetheMIDI dataforsongtracksandpatterns,audiodata,or settingsthatgovernhowthemusicaldataisplayed back,includingMeter,Metronome,PLAY/MUTE,and TrackPlayLoop(includingStart/Endmeasure). WhileloadingaTemplateSong,youcanalso optionallyloadoneormoreDrumTrackpatterns. 1. IntheP0:Play/RECpage,pressthepagemenu buttonandselecttheLoadTemplateSong command. Adialogboxwillappear.

2. IntheFromfield,choosetheTemplateSongyou wanttoload. 3. ChecktheCopyPatterntoMIDITracktoo? checkbox. Whenthisboxischecked,adialogboxforcopyinga patternwillautomaticallyappearafterLoadTemplate Songiscomplete. Ifthisisnotchecked,onlytheselectedTemplateSong willbeloaded. 4. PresstheOKbuttontoloadthetemplatesong,or presstheCancelbuttontoexitwithoutmaking changes. WhenyoupressOK,theTemplateSongssettingswill becopiedintothecurrentSong.

7. Makeothersettingsasnecessary. MakesettingsforKARMA(P7:KARMA),MIDI filtering(P3:MIDIFilter/Zone),etc. YoumayalsowishtouseToneAdjusttoadjustthe sound.(SeeTONEADJ/EQonpage 75)

77

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Byloadingadrumtrackandthecorrespondingpreset pattern,youcaninstantlysetupaDrumTrackto matchtheTemplateSong. 8. ToloadtheDrumpattern,presstheOKbutton. Afterthepatternisloaded,theMeasurewillcountup automatically.Youcanthencopyanotherpatternif desired.Forinstance,youcanusedifferentpatterns oneaftertheothertobuildupasong,withdifferent patternsforverse,chorus,andbridge. IfCopyPatterntoMIDITracktoo?wascheckedin step3,theCopyPatternToMIDITrackdialogbox willappear. Thisisthesamedialogboxastheonethatappearsfor theCopyToMIDITrackmenucommand. 5. InthePatternfield,selectapatterntocopy. 6. IntheToMIDITrackfield,selectthetracktouse fortheDrumTrackpattern. 7. IntheMeasurefield,setthemeasureonwhich youdlikethepatterntostart. Note:IneachoftheeighteenpresetTemplateSongs, track1isalwaysassignedtoaDrumProgram.(In somecases,othertracksmayalsohaveDrum Programs.) Followingthenamesforeachofthepresetpatterns, themusicalstyleandthenameofthemostsuitable DrumProgramsarepartiallydisplayed.(Refertothe VNLforacompletelistofDrumPrograms.) Afteryouvefinishedaddingpatterns,presstheExit button,andyouredone!

Saving your own Template Songs


YoucanalsosaveyourownTemplateSongs: 1. SetupaSongtoyourtaste,includingPrograms, effects,KARMAsettings,theSongname,andso on. 2. IntheP0:Play/RECpage,pressthepagemenu buttonandselecttheSaveTemplateSong command. 3. IntheTofield,selectoneofthe16userTemplate Songlocations,U0015. 4. PressOKtosavetheTemplateSong. Formoreinformation,seeSaveTemplateSongon page 625oftheParameterGuide

Recording MIDI in real-time


WhenyouvefinishedwithPreparationsfor recording,asdescribedabove,youcanstart recording! Realtimerecordingletsyourecordyourperformance ontheKRONOS,includingthenotesthatyouplay, joystickandknobmovements,andsoon.Thisisin contrasttosteprecording,whichisdescribedinalater section. Thedefaultistorecordontoasingletrackatatime.As analternative,multitrackrecordingallowsyouto simultaneouslyrecordmultiplechannelsofdataonto multipletracks.Thisishandyforusewhenrecording RPPR,KARMA,ortheDrumTrack,orforrecording theoutputofanexternalsequencerinasinglepass.

Recording setup
InP0:Play/RECPreferencepageRecordingSetup, selecttherealtimerecordingmethodyouwanttouse.

Location

Track Select

78

MIDI recording Recording MIDI in real-time

Overwrite
Withthismethod,themusicaldatapreviously recordedonatrackisoverwrittenbythenewly recordeddata.Whenyouperformoverwriterecording onapreviouslyrecordedtrack,itsmusicaldatawillbe deletedandreplacedbythenewlyrecordeddata. Normallyyouwillusethismethodtorecord,andthen modifytheresultsbyusingothertypesofrealtime recordingorMIDIeventediting. 1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwant torecord. 2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverwrite.

Manual punch-in
Whilethesongisplaying,youcanpressthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchoraconnected pedalswitchatthedesiredlocationtostartorstop recording.Withthismethod,themusicaldata previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewly recordeddata. 1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwant torecord. 2. SettheRecordingSetuptoManualPunchIn.

3. InLocation,specifythelocationatwhichyou wishtobeginrecording. 4. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and thenpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. IftheMetronomeSetupisstillsettothedefault settings,themetronomewillsoundforatwo measureprecount,andthenrecordingwillbegin. Playthekeyboardandmovecontrollerssuchasthe joysticktorecordyourperformance. 5. Whenyoufinishplaying,presstheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitch. Recordingwillend,andthelocationwillreturnto thepointatwhichyoubeginrecording. IfyoupressthePAUSEswitchinsteadofthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,recordingwill pause.WhenyoupressthePAUSEswitchonce again,recordingwillresume.Whenyouare finished,presstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP switchtostoprecording.

3. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasures earlierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobegin recording. 4. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbegin. 5. Atthepointatwhichyouwishtobeginrecording, presstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. Recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboardand operatecontrollerssuchasthejoysticktorecord yourperformance. 6. Whenyoufinishrecording,pressthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. Recordingwillend(playbackwillcontinue). Note:InsteadofpressingtheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEswitchinsteps5and6,youcanusea footswitchconnectedtotheASSIGNABLE SWITCHjack. SettheGlobalP2:Controllers/ScalespageFoot SwitchAssigntoSongPunchIn/Out. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothe locationthatyouspecifiedinstep3.

Overdub
Withthismethod,thenewlyrecordedmusicaldatais addedtotheexistingdata. Whenyouperformoverdubrecordingonapreviously recordedtrack,thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeadded tothepreviouslyrecordeddata. Itisbesttoselectthismodeifyouwillberecording additionalcontroldata,recordingadrumpattern,or recordingthetempointhemastertrack.Withthis mode,datacanbeaddedwithouterasingtheexisting performancedata. 1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwant torecord. 2. SettheRecordingSetuptoOverdub.

Auto punch-in
Firstyoumustspecifytheareathatwillbererecorded. Thenrecordingwilloccurautomaticallyatthe specifiedarea.Withthismethod,themusicaldata previouslyonthetrackisoverwrittenbythenewly recordeddata. 1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwant torecord. 2. SettheRecordingSetuptoAutoPunchIn.

3. InM(AutoPunchInStartMeasure),M(Auto PunchInEndMeasure)specifytheareathatyou wishtorecord. 3. Fortherestoftheprocedure,refertosteps35of Overwrite. ForexampleifyouspecifyM005M008,recording willoccuronlyfrommeasure5tomeasure8. 4. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasures earlierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobegin recording.

79

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

5. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and thenpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbegin. Whenyoureachthestartinglocationyouspecified instep3,recordingwillbegin.Playthekeyboard andoperatecontrollerssuchasthejoysticktorecord yourperformance.Whenyoureachtheending locationyouspecifiedinstep3,recordingwillend. (Playbackwillcontinue.) 6. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothe locationyouspecifiedinstep4.

Similarly,benderdatawillbedeletedaslongasyou tiltthejoystickintheX(horizontal)direction,and aftertouchdatawillbedeletedaslongasyouapply pressuretothekeyboard. Whenyouareonceagainreadytorecordmusical data,unchecktheRemoveDatacheckbox. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillend,andyouwillreturntothe recordingstartlocationthatyouspecifiedinstep4. IfLoopAllTracksisselected,normalplaybackwill beloopedaswell.

Multi (multitrack recording)


Multitrackrecordingallowsyoutosimultaneously recordontomultipletracks,eachwithadifferent channel. 1. IntheupperrightoftheLCDscreen,checkMulti REC. 2. MakethedesiredRecordingSetupsettings. YoucanrecordusingOverwrite,Overdub,Manual PunchIn,orAutoPunchIn.

Loop All Tracks


Thismethodletsyoucontinuerecordingasyouadd musicaldata. Thespecifiedregioncanberecordedrepeatedly.Thisis idealwhenrecordingdrumphrases,etc. 1. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwant torecord. 2. SettheRecordingSetuptoLoopAllTracks. IfMultiRECischecked,itwillnotbepossibleto selectLoopAllTracks.

3. UseLocationtospecifythemeasureatwhich recordingwillbegin. 3. InM(LoopStartMeasure),M(LoopEnd Measure)specifytheareathatyouwishtorecord. ForexampleifyouspecifyM004M008,recording willoccurrepeatedly(asaloop)frommeasure4to measure8. 4. InLocation,specifyalocationseveralmeasures earlierthanthepointatwhichyouwishtobegin recording. 5. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and thenpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbegin.Whenyoureachthestarting locationyouspecifiedinstep3,recordingwill begin.Playthekeyboardandoperatecontrollers suchasthejoysticktorecordyourperformance. Whenyoureachtheendinglocationyouspecified instep3,youwillreturntothestartinglocation,and continuerecording. Themusicaldatathatislooprecordedwillbe addedtothepreviouslyrecordeddata. 6. Youcanalsoerasespecificdataevenwhileyou continuelooprecording. IfyoupresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch duringlooprecording,allmusicalwillberemoved fromthecurrentlyselectedtrackaslongasyou continuepressingtheswitch. BycheckingtheRemoveDatacheckboxyoucan eraseonlythespecifieddata.Duringloop recording,pressthenotethatyouwishtodelete, andonlythedataofthatnotenumberwillbe deletedfromthekeyboardaslongasyoucontinue pressingthatnote. 4. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. 5. Forthetrackyouwanttorecord,press Play/Rec/MutetomakeitindicateRec. 6. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. WiththedefaultsettingsforMetronomeSetup,the metronomewillsoundforatwomeasurepre count,andthenrecordingwillbegin.Nowyoucan performonthekeyboardandcontrollers,anduse theKARMAorRPPRfunctionsifdesired. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillstop,andyouwillreturntothe locationspecifiedinstep4.

An example of realtime recording


Inthisexample,wellassignadrumprogramtoMIDI Track01andcreatethefollowingonemeasuredrum phrase.
Hi hat: F#3 Snare: E3 Bass drum: C3

1. Createanewsong,andspecifyadrumprogram forMIDITrack01.UseTrackSelecttoselect MIDITrack01,andverifythatyouhearadrum program. 2. GototheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage.In RecordingSetup,specifyLoopAllTracksand setittoM001M001. Formoreinformation,seeLoopAllTrackson page 80.

80

MIDI recording MIDI step recording

Withthissetting,measure1willberecorded repeatedly.Thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeadded ateachpass. 3. SetRECResolutiontox. 4. PresstheSEQUENCEREC/WRITEswitch,and thentheSTART/STOPswitch. Themetronomewillsoundatwomeasurecount down,andthenrecordingwillbegin. 5. Asshowninthemusicalexampleprintedabove, startbyplayingtheC3noteofthekeyboardto recordthebassdrumforonemeasure. 6. Next,playtheE3noteofthekeyboardtorecord thesnareforonemeasure,andthentheF#3noteto recordthehihat. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto stoprecording.

8. Playbacktheresult,andlistentothedrum performanceyourecorded. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.When youvefinishedlistening,presstheSTART/STOP switchonceagaintostopplayback. 9. Ifyourenotsatisfiedwiththeresult,pressthe COMPAREswitchtoreturntothestatepriorto recording,andthenrerecordfromstep4. Note:Whenyourefinishedrecording,changethe RecordingSetupbacktothenormallyused Overwrite(P0:Play/RECPreferencepage). Inaddition,accesstheP0:Play/RECMIDITrack Looppage,checkTrackPlayLoopforMIDITrack 01,andsettheLoopStartMeasureandLoop EndMeasureto001.Whenyouplayback,MIDI track01willrepeatedlyplaythefirstmeasure.

MIDI step recording


Steprecordingistherecordingmethodinwhichyou specifythedurationandstrengthofeachnote,anduse thekeyboardtospecifythepitchofeachMIDInote. YoucanusetheRestbuttonandTiebuttonofthe dialogboxtoinputrestsandties. Steprecordingisusefulwhenyouwanttocreate mechanicallyprecisebeats,orwhenyouneedto recordaphrasethatwouldbedifficulttoplaybyhand inrealtime,orwhenyoufinditdifficulttoplay extremelycomplicatedorrapidpassages. 4. Pressthepagemenubutton,andpresspagemenu commandMIDIStepRecording. Adialogboxwillappear.

An example of step recording


Inthisexample,wellassignabassprogramtoMIDI Track02andsteprecordthefollowingtwomeasure bassphrase. 5. InStepTime,useSelecttospecifythebasic timingvalueatwhichyouwillinputnotesand rests. InputthefirstC3notease.(adottedeighthnote). 1. SpecifyabassprogramforMIDITrack02.Use TrackSelecttoselectMIDITrack02,andverify thatyouhearabassprogram. 2. GototheP4:TrackEditTrackEditpage. 3. SetFromMeasureto001. Withthissetting,steprecordingwillbeginfrom measure1. Usetheradiobuttonatthelefttoselecte. Youcanchoosefromtherangeofw(awholenote)r (a32ndnote). Inputadottednotebyselecting.withtheradio buttonsatright. Youcanspecify3toenteratriplet.Ifyouwantto usetheunmodifiedlengthofthenotethatsselected attheleft,choose. NoteDurationindicatesthelengththatthenote itselfwillsound.Smallervalueswillproducea staccatonote,andlargervalueswillproducea legatonote.Forthisexample,leavethissetting unchanged. NoteVelocityisthevelocity(playingstrength), andlargervalueswillproducealoudervolume.Set thistoKey. IfyouselectKeyforthisparameter,thevelocity withwhichyouactuallyplaythekeyboardwillbe input. 6. Onthekeyboard,pressandthenreleasethefirst C3notethatyouwanttoinput. ThedatayouinputwillappearintheLCDscreenas numericalvalues.Intheupperright,Measure001

81

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

BeatTick01.000willchangetoMeasure001Beat Tick01.360.Thenextnoteyouinputwillbeplaced atthislocation. 7. Inputtheremainingnotesasdescribedinsteps5 and6.(YouvealreadyinputthefirstC3note.) Inadditiontothemethodsdescribedinsteps5and 6,youcanalsousethefollowinginputmethods. Toinputarest,presstheRestbutton.Thiswill inputarestoftheStepTimevalue. Tomodifythelengthofanote,youcanmodifythe Steptimevaluebeforeyouinputthenote. Howeverifyouwanttoextendthelength(tie)of thenote,presstheTiebutton.Atthistime,the previouslyinputnotewillbeextendedbytheStep timelength. Todeleteanoteorrestthatyouinput,pressthe StepBackbutton.Thepreviouslyinputnotewillbe deleted. Toinputachord,simultaneouslypressthenotesof thedesiredchord.Evenifyoudonotpressthem simultaneously,notesthatarepressedbeforeyou fullyremoveyourhandfromallkeysonthe keyboardwillbeinputatthesamelocation. Ifyouwanttoverifythepitchofthenotethatyou willinputnext,pressthePAUSEswitch.Inthis state,playingakeywillproduceasound,butwill notinputanote.PressthePAUSEswitchonce againtocanceltherecordpausestate,andresume inputtingnotes. Note
C3 G3

Note

Step Time: Select


-

Step Time: .3-

Key, Button
Rest button C3 key Rest button F2 key Tie button F2 key Rest button A2 key A3 key Rest button

Measure/ Beat Tick


002 / 01.120 002 / 01.360 002 / 02.000 002 / 02.240 002 / 03.000 002 / 03.240 002 / 03.360 002 / 04.000 002 / 04.240 002 / 04.360

C3

F2 Tie F2

A2 A3

8. Whenyouarefinishedrecording,presstheDone button. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay back. GototheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackLooppage, checkTrackPlayLoopforMIDITrack02,setLoop StartMeasureto001,andLoopEndMeasureto 002.MIDItrack02willplaymeasures12 repeatedly. 9. Ifyourenotsatisfiedwiththeresult,pressthe COMPAREswitchtoreturntothestatepriorto recording,andthenrerecordfromstep4. Whenyoubeginsteprecording,alldataintheMIDI trackthatfollowsthemeasurewhereyoubegan recordingwillbeerased.Youneedtobeawareof thisifyoubeginsteprecordingfromameasure midwaythroughthesong. Ifyouwanttocopydataintoameasurethatalready containsdata,performsteprecordinginanempty MIDItrack,andusetheMoveMeasureorCopy Measuremenucommands.Formoreinformation, seeCopyMeasureonpage 646oftheParameter Guide,andMoveMeasureonpage 647ofthe ParameterGuide. Ifyouwanttoeditoraddtotherecordeddata,you canusetheMIDIEventEditfunction.Formore information,seeEventEditonpage 654ofthe ParameterGuide.

Step Time: Select


. -

Step Time: .3-

Key, Button
C3 key G3 key Rest button C4 key Rest button C4 key D3 key Eb3 key E3 key F3 key

Measure/ Beat Tick


001 / 01.000 001 / 01.360 001 / 02.000 001 / 02.240 001 / 03.000 001 / 03.120 001 / 03.240 001 / 04.000 001 / 04.240 002 / 01.000

C4

C4 D3 Eb3 E3 F3

Recording the sound of a Combination or Program


Hereshowyoucaneasilycopythesettingsofa CombinationorProgram,andthenrecordusingthat sound. WhenyoureperforminginProgramorCombination mode,youcanusetheAutoSongSetupfunctionto automaticallythecurrentProgramorCombination intoasong.Alternatively,youcanusetheSequencer modesCopyFromCombiandCopyfromProgram menucommands.

Auto Song Setup


YoucanuseAutoSongSetupwithbothProgramsand Combinations.Inthisexample,wellusea Combination. 1. SaveanyeditstotheCombination. Ifyouvemadeanyeditsevensimplethingslike changingpanandvolumefortheTimbresmustsave thenewsettingsusingUpdateCombinationorWrite Combinationbeforeproceeding.

82

MIDI recording Recording the sound of a Combination or Program

2. HolddowntheENTERswitchandpressthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillappear. 3. PresstheOKbuttontoperformtheAutoSong Setup. TheKRONOSwillautomaticallyswitchtoSequencer mode,andtheCombinationssettingswillbeapplied tothefirstunusedsong. 4. Youwillautomaticallyenterrecordreadymode, andthemetronomewillbeginsoundingaccording tothesettingsinP0:Play/RECPreferencepage. Formoreinformation,see05d:MetronomeSetup onpage 528oftheParameterGuide. 5. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,and realtimerecordingwillbegin. Whenyourefinishedrecording,pressthe START/STOPswitchonceagain. Selecttheprogramorcombinationthatyouwantto copy(i.e.,thecopysource). Wewillcopytheeffectsettingsofthecombination aswell,sochecktheIFXsAll,MFXsandTFXs checkboxes. CheckMultiRECStandby.TheStatuswillbe automaticallysettoRECfortheMIDItracksneeded torecordthatcombination. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecopy. Noticethatwhenyouexecutethiscommand,the Play/Rec/Mutesettingofeachtrackwillbeset automatically.TheMultiRECcheckboxwillbe checked. 3. Beginrecording. PresstheLOCATEswitchtosetthelocationto 001:01.000. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and thenpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Note:Ifyouplaythekeyboardduringtheprecount beforerecording,KARMAandtheDrumTrackwill startplayingthemomentrecordingbegins. 4. Recordyourperformance. 5. Whenyouarefinishedperforming,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Ifyoumadeamistakeorwanttorerecord,youcan usetheComparefunction(presstheCOMPARE switch)torerecordasmanytimesasyouwant. (TheMultiRECcheckboxwillbeuncheckedwhen youuseCompare,soyouwillneedtocheckit again.)

Auto Song Setup and Combinations: Details


WithCombinations,AutoSongSetupisessentiallya shortcutforusingtheCopyFromCombimenu commandwiththefollowingsettings: IFXsAll,MFXsandTFXschecked MultiRECchecked Formoreinformation,seeCopyfromCombination onpage 626oftheParameterGuide

Auto Song Setup and Programs: Details


WithPrograms,AutoSongSetupisessentiallya shortcutforusingtheCopyFromProgrammenu commandwiththefollowingsettings: IFXsAll,MFXsandTFXschecked withKARMAchecked TosettoMIDITrack01 KARMAModulesettoA WithDrumTracksettoTrack10 Additionally,severalSongparametersarechanged: MultiRECchecked MIDITracks1and10aresettoREC Formoreinformation,seeCopyFromProgramon page 626oftheParameterGuide

Setup in Sequencer mode (Copy From Combination and Copy From Program)
InSequencermode,youcanusetheCopyFrom CombiandCopyFromProgrampagemenu commandstosetupaSongbasedonaCombinationor Program.Inthisexample,wellexplainhowtosetupa songbasedonacombination. Note:MakesurethattheglobalMIDIchannel(Global P1:MIDIMIDIpage,MIDIChannel)issetto01. 1. Selectanew,emptysong. 2. SelectthepagemenucommandCopyFrom Combi. Adialogboxwillappear.

83

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Recording multiple MIDI tracks from an external sequencer


1. MakesurethattheMIDIOUTofyourexternal sequencerisconnectedtotheMIDIINofthe KRONOS. Ifitisnotconnected,turnoffthepower,makethe connection,andthenturnthepoweron. Formoreinformation,seeMIDIapplicationson page 1127oftheParameterGuide. 2. IntheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIpage,setMIDI ClocktoExternalMIDI.Withthissetting,the KRONOSwillsynchronizetoMIDIclock messagesfromyourexternalsequencer. MakesurethatReceiveExt.RealtimeCommandsis checked. ControlSurfacepageoftheLCDscreen.(SeeThe controlsurfaceinSequencermodeonpage 74.)

5. IntheP2:TrackParametersMIDIpage,useMIDI ChanneltospecifytheMIDIchannelofeach track. SettheMIDIchannelofeachKRONOStrackto matchtheMIDIchannelofeachexternalsequencer track.Dataofthematchingchannelwillberecorded oneachKRONOStrack. MakesurethatStatusissettoINTorBTH. 6. PresstheLOCATEswitchtosetthelocationto 001:01.000. 3. CreateanewsonginSequencermode,andinthe P0:Play/RECPreferencepage,checktheMulti RECcheckbox.SetRecordingSetuptoOverwrite. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchto enterrecordstandbymode. 8. Startyourexternalsequencer. TheKRONOSsequencerwillautomaticallybegin recordingwhenitreceivestheMIDIStartmessage transmittedbyyourexternalsequencer. 9. Whenplaybackhasended,stopyourexternal sequencer. TheKRONOSsequencerwillautomaticallystop recordingwhenitreceivestheMIDIStopmessage transmittedbytheexternalsequencer.Youcanalso stoprecordingbypressingtheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitchoftheKRONOS. Afterthis,youcanplaybackthenewlyrecorded sequence: 10.IntheGlobalP1:MIDIpage,setMIDIClockto Internal. 11.SetTempoModetoAuto. 4. PressPlay/Rec/MutetoselectRECforthetracks youwanttorecord. Forthetracksyoudontwanttorecord,selectPlay orMute. Tip:YoucanalsocontrolthePlay/Rec/Mutesetting fromthefrontpanelmixersection,orfromtheP0 12.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto playback. Note:Ifthecorrectsoundsarenotselectedwhenyou startplayingback,youmaybeabletosolvethe problembyusingthepagemenucommandMIDI EventEdit(P4:TrackEdit)torespecifythe ProgramChangedata.

84

MIDI recording Recording System Exclusive events

Recording System Exclusive events


ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDI deviceortheparameterchangesproducedwhenyou editaMIDItrackparameter,audiotrackparameteror effectparametercanberealtimerecordedonanyMIDI track. Duringplayback,theexclusivemessagesyourecorded willcontrolthetrackparametersandeffectparameters ofthesong,andcanbesenttoexternalMIDIdevices. Note:YoucanusethepagemenucommandPutEffect SettingtoMIDITracktoinsertanexclusiveevent containingtheparametersettingsforaninserteffect, mastereffectortotaleffectintothedesiredlocationof atrack,sothatthesesettingswillautomaticallyswitch duringplayback. GM,XG,andGSexclusivemessagescanbe recordedonatrack,buttheKRONOSstone generatorwillnotrespondtothesemessages. 2. SelectMIDITrack09inTrackSelect,andrecord parameterchangesasdesired. Note:Forthisexample,selectanemptytrack.Ifyou wanttorecordontoaMIDItrackthatalready containsdata,settheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage RecordingSetuptoOverdub,asdescribedon page 79.

Recording internal parameter changes


YoucanuseSysExforautomationofinternalKRONOS effectsandProgramparameters. Asanexample,letsrecordashortphraseontrack1, addaninserteffect,andthenrecordparameter changesforthateffectonanunusedtrack. Note:Inordertorecordsystemexclusivemessages, makesurethattheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIsetting EnableExclusiveischecked.

SelectMIDITrack09inTrackSelect.Thenpress theSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchandthenthe START/STOPswitch,andbeginrecording. Attheappropriatetimewhilerecording,adjustthe parameter(s)thatyouwanttorealtimerecord. SelectanothereffectforIFX1intheP8:InsertEffect InsertFXpage,andedittheeffectparametervalues, orusetheP0:Play/RECControlSurfacepageTone Adjustcontrolstoeditthesoundinrealtime.

1. SelectthedesiredprogramforMIDItrack1,and routeittoIFX1.Thenrecordaphraseofabout sixteenmeasures. IntheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer page,useProgramSelecttoselectthedesired programforMIDITrack01. IntheP8:InsertEffectMIDIRouting1page,route theMIDITrack01BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.Out Assign)toIFX1.ThenintheP8:InsertEffectInsert FXpage,selectthedesiredeffectforIFX1. SelectMIDITrack01inTrackSelect.Thenpress theSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchandthenthe START/STOPswitch,andrecordaphraseofabout sixteenmeasures.

Note:Fordetailsontheeffectsparametersthatyou canrecordinrealtime,pleaseseeSystem

85

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Exclusiveeventssupportedin Sequencer modeon page 661oftheParameterGuide. 3. Stoprecording. Note:Exclusivemessagesarealwaysrecordedon thecurrenttrackselectedbyTrackSelect.Inthis example,theyarerecordedonMIDItrack9. Note:IntheMIDIeventeditscreenyoucanviewthe recordedexclusiveeventsandtheirlocation. ExclusiveeventsaredisplayedasEXCL. Toviewtheseevents,gototheP4:TrackEditTrack Editpage,andselectthepagemenucommand MIDIEventEdit.ThenintheSetEventFilters dialogbox,checkExclusiveandpresstheOK button.
Location Event display

Exclusiveeventscannotbechangedtoadifferent typeofevent.Norcanothereventsbechangedinto exclusiveevents. 4. Ifyougotothepage(e.g.,P8:InsertEffect)that showstheparametersyouadjustedinrealtime, youcanwatchtherecordedchangesbereproduced whilethesongplaysback.

Exclusive messages that can be recorded in realtime


Thefollowingexclusivemessagescanberecordedin realtime: ExclusivemessagesreceivedfromanexternalMIDI device ParameterchangesinSequencermode(seeSystem Exclusiveeventssupportedin Sequencer modeon page 661oftheParameterGuide) MasterVolumeuniversalexclusivemessages assignedtothefootpedaloraknob

Recording patterns
Recording and editing patterns
Youcanrecordpatternsineitheroftwoways;realtime recordingorsteprecording.However,patternrealtime recordingdiffersfromsongrealtimerecordinginthat youcanuseonlyLooptyperecording. YoucaneditpatternsbyusingEventEditoperationsto modifytherecordeddataorinsertnewdata.Youcan alsousetheGetFromMIDITrackpagemenu commandtoconvertadesiredregionofperformance datafromaMIDItrackintoapattern.Conversely,you canusethePuttoMIDITrackorCopytoMIDITrack pagemenucommandstoplaceorcopythe performancedatafromapatternintoaMIDItrack. YoucanalsouseyourpatternswiththeDrumTrack, viatheConverttoDrumTrackPatternmenu commandonP5:Pattern/RPPR. 1. Createanewsong,andasdescribedin Preparationsforrecordingonpage 76,setthe tracktotheprogramthatwillbeusedbythe pattern. 2. GototheP5:Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage(See thediagrambelow). 3. UseTrackSelecttoselectthetrackthatyouwill usetorecordthepattern. Thepatternwillsoundwiththeprogramandother settingsoftheselectedtrack. 4. SetPattern(PatternBank)toUser,andset PatternSelecttoU00. UserpatternsU00U99canbecreatedforeachsong. 5. SelectthepagemenucommandPattern Parameter. Adialogboxwillappear.

Recording patterns in real-time


Hereshowyoucanuserealtimerecordingtocreatea pattern.UserpatternscanbeaccessedbytheRPPR functioninthesamewayaspresetpatterns,andcanbe copiedtoorplacedinasong.Playbackdatafroma trackcanalsobecopiedtoapattern. Whenrealtimerecordingapattern,apatternofthe specifiednumberofmeasureswillplayback repeatedly,allowingyoutocontinueaddingmusical datatoit.

6. Setthenumberofmeasuresinthepatterntoa Lengthof04(fourmeasures),andsetMeterto atimesignatureof4/4.PresstheOKbutton. 7. Asnecessary,setRECResolutiontoapply realtimequantization.

86

MIDI recording Recording patterns

8. Beginrealtimerecording. Youcanrecordinthesamewayasyoudidwhen recordingtrackswithLoopAllTracks.(SeeLoop AllTracksonpage 80.) PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch,and thenpresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Aftertheprecount,patternrecordingwillbegin. Playthekeyboardandoperatethejoystickand othercontrollerstorecordyourperformance. Whenyoureachtheendofthepattern,the sequencerwillreturntothebeginningofthepattern andcontinuerecording.Ifyoucontinuerecording, thenewlyrecordeddatawillbeaddedtothe previouslyrecordeddata.
Pattern Select

9. Ifyouwanttodeletespecificdatawhileyou continuepatternrecording,youcanpressthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchorcheckthe RemoveDatacheckbox. Fordetailsrefertostep6ofLoopAllTrackson page 80. 10.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto stoprecording. Ifyoumadeamistakeordecidetorerecord,press theSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop recording,andpresstheCOMPAREswitch.Then beginthepatternrecordingprocedureagainasin step8.

Control data in pattern recording


Torecordcontroldatainapattern,youshouldrestore thecontroldatatoitsnormalvaluewithinthepattern. Ifyoufailtorestorethenormalvalue,unnecessary controldatamayremaininastuckpositionwhen youplacethepatterninasongorusetheRPPR functiontoplaythepattern.However,thefollowing controldatawillbeautomaticallyresettothe followingvalueswhenthesongorRPPRfunction finishesplayingthepattern,orwhenplaybackis halted. Controller
Modulation 1 (CC#01) Modulation 2 (CC#02) Expression (CC#11) Ribbon controller (CC#16) Damper switch (CC#64) Sostenuto switch (CC#66) Soft switch (CC#67) EG sustain level (CC#70)

Controller
Resonance level (CC#71) EG release time (CC#72) EG attack time (CC#73) Low pass filter cutoff (CC#74) EG decay time (CC#75) LFO1 speed (CC#76) LFO1 depth (pitch) (CC#77) LFO1 delay (CC#78) Filter EG intensity (CC#79) SW1 modulation (CC#80) SW2 modulation (CC#81) Channel after touch Pitch bender

Reset value
64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 64 (center) 00 (zero) 00 (zero) 00 (zero) 00 (zero)

Reset value
00 (zero) 00 (zero) 127 (max) 64 (center) 00 (zero) 00 (zero) 00 (zero) 64 (center)

Using KARMA for pattern recording


IfKARMAissettooperateforthetrackthatisselected forTrackSelect,andrecordtheperformanceof KARMAintothepattern.

87

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Other ways to record


Multi-track recording with KARMA and the Drum Track
Youcanrecordmultitrackperformancesgeneratedby KARMAand/ortheDrumTrack.Formore information,seeUsingKARMAinSequencermode onpage 232.

Multi-track recording with RPPR


Youcanrecordmultitrackperformancesgeneratedby RPPR.Formoreinformation,seeUsingRPPR (RealtimePatternPlay/Record)onpage 106.

Using the control surface to record changes in the pan, EQ, volume, or Tone Adjust parameters of a MIDI track
Duringrealtimerecording,youcanusethecontrol surfacetocontrolthepan,EQ,volume,orToneAdjust parameters,andrecordthesechangessothattheywill bereproducedduringplayback. Ifyouwillbeadjustingmorethanonetrack simultaneously,youllneedtousemultitrack recording. Note:Changesyoumakeusingthecontrolsurfaceare transmittedascontrolchangesorsystemexclusive messages.Inordertorecordthesechanges,theGlobal P1:MIDIMIDIEnableControlChangeandEnable Exclusiveitemsmustbechecked.MovetoGlobal modeandmakesurethattheseitemsarechecked.

88

Audio recording Audio recording overview

Audio recording Audio recording overview


Therearesixteenaudiotracks.Theyallow16or24 bitlinearPCMrecordingwithamaximumtimeof 80minutes. Automationdata(volume,pan,EQ,send1/2)can berecordedforeachtrack. Uptosixteentrackscanbeplayedback simultaneously,anduptofourtrackscanbe recordedsimultaneously. TheStereoPairfunctionletsyouassigntwotracks asapairforrecording,control,andediting. Youcanchoosefromabroadrangeofinternal busesastherecordingsource;AudioInput12, S/P DIF,USB,RECBus14,themainL/Routputs, orindividualoutputs14(yes,youcandirectly recordfromtheoutputs,allinthedigitaldomain). Youcanalsoroutethesignalveryflexibly,for examplebyinsertingeffectsintoexternalaudio sourcesandrecordingtheresult. Whenyourecord,anaudioeventandregiondata arecreatedandassignedtothetrack.Theregion datacontainsalinktotheWAVEfile(audiodata) thatsrecordedonthedisk.Youcaneditina varietyofways,forexamplebychangingthe locationoftheaudioevent,orbyediting/replacing theregiondataorWAVEfile. Autoormanualpunchin/outareprovided. TheRehearsalfunctionletsyoupracticeapunch in/outwithoutactuallyrecording. Youcanusethecontrolsurfacemixertoadjustthe panandvolumeetc.oftheaudiotracks,andrecord theseoperationsasautomationeventssothatthe
SONG00 Audio events Performance Start, Volume, Region No. data Automation Events Volume, Pan, Send, EQ Audio events Performance Start, Volume, Region No. data Automation Events Volume, Pan, Send, EQ

panandvolumechangeswillbereproducedduring playback. Whenrecordingaudiotracks,theMIDIClockmust besettoInternal.Formoreinformation,seeMIDI Clock(MIDIClockSource)onpage 772ofthe ParameterGuide.

Audio events and regions in an audio track


Whenyourecordonanaudiotrack,theactualaudio dataisrecordeddirectlyontheinternaldriveasa WAVEfile.Atthistime,aregionisalsocreated;this containsinformationspecifyingwhatportionofthat WAVEfileistobeactuallyplayedback.Inaddition,an audioeventwhichassignsthatregioniscreated;this specifiesthelocationinthesongatwhichtheaudio willplay. Whenplaybackreachesapointinthesongwherean audioeventislocated,theWAVEfileonthediskwill beplayedasspecifiedbytheaudioeventandthe region.Inotherwords,theaudiowillnotplayifeither theaudioevent,theregion,ortheWAVEfileare missing. Pleasenotethataudioeventsandregionscanbe deletedbyaudioeventeditingorregionediting, andcanalsobeeasilylostifyouturnoffthepower beforesavingtothedisk.IfonlytheWAVEfileis leftonthedisk,thiswilloccupydiskcapacityforno purpose;werecommendthatyouexecuteDelete UnusedWAVFilestofreeupanysuchwasted space.

Audio Track 01

Setting parameters

Region00

Region01

Audio Track 02

Setting parameters

Region02

Hard Disk

Region 0000: Guitar1 Song No.: Song00 Track No.: Track01 Allow Tempo: On Tempo: 120 Start: 000 End: 95999 Anchor Point: 0 Wave Name: GUITAR1.WAV 0001: Guitar2

NEWFIL_A

SONG000

ATRACK01

GUITAR1.WAV GUITAR2.WAV

ATRACK02

VOICE1.WAV

NEWFILE.SNG

NEW SONG

Tracks PATTERN 00

0002: Voice1

Regions

TRK01_00 TRK01_01 TRK02_00

89

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

How audio data is stored on the disk


WhenyousaveSongstodisk,theyrestoredinan .SNGfile.This.SNGfilecontainsallofthedatafrom Sequencermode,includingalloftheSongsinmemory, exceptfortherelatedaudiofiles. Whenyousavean.SNGfile,itsrelatedaudiofilesare storedinaseparatedirectory.Thisdirectoryiscreated automatically,withinthesamedirectoryasthe.SNG file.(Itsalsocreatedifyouloadapreexisting.SNGfile whichdoesnthaveamatchingaudiodirectory.)The directorysnameconsistsofthe.SNGfilename followedby_A(forAudio). Forinstance,ifthe.SNGfileisnamed WAMOZART.SNG,itsaudiodirectorywillbenamed WAMOZART_A. Thismaindirectorycontainssubdirectoriesforeach song,namedSONG000,SONG001,etc.Theseinturn containsubdirectoriesforeachaudiotrack,named ATRACK01,ATRACK02,andsoon.Withineachofthe tracksubdirectories,eachindividualaudiotakeis storedasaWAVEfile.

Temporary audio files


Ifyourerecordinganewsong,andhaventyetsavedit asan.SNGfile,theaudiofilesarestoredina temporarylocationondisk.Thedirectorystructureis thesameasdescribedabove,exceptthatthemain audiodirectoryisnamedTEMP. Onceyousavethesong(s)toan.SNGfile,these directoriesandaudiofileswillbecopiedtothenew _Afolderautomatically.Ontheotherhand,iffor somereasonyoudontorcantsavebeforeturningoff thepower,youllbegiventhechancetorestorethese audiofilesthenexttimethatyoustartupthe instrument,asdescribedbelow.

Recovering temporary audio files


Iftherearetemporaryaudiofilesfromtheprevious session,youllseethefollowingdialogthenexttime youstartuptheKRONOS: Thereareunsavedaudiofilesfromyourprevious recordingsession. Doyouwanttorestorethesefiles,ordeletethem fromthedisk? [Restore][Delete] IfyoudontintendtousetheWAVEfiles,we recommendthatyoudeletethemsotheydontwaste spaceontheinternaldisk.Todeletethem,pressthe Deletebutton. Ifyouwanttosavethesefiles,presstheRestorebutton tokeepthem. Notethatwhiletheaudiofilescanberecoveredthis way,therestofthesequencerdatacannotberestored.

Move or re-name audio and .SNG files together


Ifyoumoveorrenameanexisting.SNGfile,make suretomoveorrenameitscorrespondingaudio directoryaswell.Themainaudiodirectorymustbein thesamefolderasthe.SNGfile,andmustbenamedas describedabove.

Audio input settings and recording source selection


Use Global Setting
Youcanconfiguretheaudioinputsseparatelyforeach Song,ifdesired.Alternatively,youcanusetheGlobal setting,asmadeontheGlobalP0:BasicSetupAudio page. IfUseGlobalSettingisenabled,theSongwilluse theseGlobalsettings,andalloftheothersettings underAudioInputwillbegrayedout.

Audio Input settings


JustasinProgramandCombinationmodes,Sequencer modeincludesamixerfortheaudioinputs,including analog,USB,andS/P DIF.Youcanusethistomixand processtheinputspriortorecording,ifyoulike.For instance,youcanmixseveralinputstogetherandsend themtothesameRECbus,orprocessaninputthrough effectsandthenrecordtheresult. Asanalternative,youcanignorethemixersettings andjustrecorddirectlyfromtheinputs. Input1&2aretheanalogaudioinputsfromthe INPUT1&2jacks.Formoreinformation,seeAnalog AUDIOINPUTSonpage 8.

90

Audio recording Audio input settings and recording source selection

USB1&2aretheleftandrightchannelsoftheUSB audioinput.Formoreinformation,seeUSBportson page 8. S/P DIFL&S/P DIFRaretheleftandrightchannels oftheopticalS/P DIFinput.Formoreinformation,see S/P DIFIN&OUTonpage 9.

1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudiosignalwillbeoutputtothe RECbusesinstereo.AccordingtothePansetting,it willbesentinstereotobuses1and2,or3and4.

Send1 (to MFX1), Send2 (to MFX2)


Thesespecifythelevelatwhichtheexternalaudio inputsignalwillbesenttothemastereffects. Send1(toMFX1)sendsthesignaltomastereffect1. Send2(toMFX2)sendsthesignaltomastereffect2. IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)issettoIFX112,thesend levelstothemastereffectsarespecifiedbytheSend1 andSend2settingsthatfollowIFX112.

Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.)


Thisspecifiestheoutputbusforeachaudiosignal. Off:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillnotbesentto anybus.However,youcanstillrecordtheexternal audiosignaldirectlybyusingtheP0:Play/RECAudio TrackMixerpageRECSourcesettingtochoosean externalinput(AudioInput1/2,S/P DIFL/R,USB1/2) forrecording. L/R:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesenttothe L/Rbus.Choosethiswhenyouwantothersignalssuch theKRONOSinternaltonegeneratortoberecorded alongwithanexternalaudiosource.SetRECSourceto L/R. IFX112:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesent totheIFX112bus.Choosethiswhenyouwantto applyaninserteffectwhilerecording.SetRECSource tomatchthepostIFXBusSelectsetting. 14:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentin monototheselectedindividualoutput. 1/2and3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesent viaPaninstereotoINDIVIDUAL1/2or3/4.SetREC SourcetothecorrespondingINDIV.setting. BeawarethatifyouchangeBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.) fromOfftoL/RorIFX,thevolumelevelfrom AUDIOOUTL/MONOandRjacksorfromthe headphonejackmayincreaseabruptly.Pleaseuse caution.

PLAY/MUTE
Theseindicatewhethereachexternalaudioinput signalisinPlayorMutecondition. UsetheMIXPLAY/MUTE16switchestochangethe status.

SOLO On/Off
ThisindicatestheSOLOstatusofeachexternalaudio inputsignal.UsetheMIXSELECT16switchesto changethesolostatus. SoundwillbeoutputonlyfromchannelswhoseSOLO isOn.Otherchannelswillbemuted.Solooperation includesbothMIDItracksandaudiotracks.

Pan
Thisspecifiesthepanningofeachexternalaudioinput signal.Ifyouareinputtingastereoaudiosource,you willnormallypantheinputstoL000andR127 respectively.

Level
Thiscontrolstheleveloftheexternalaudiosignal.The defaultis127. Note:theanalogaudiosignalsfromAUDIOINPUTS1 &2areconvertedintodigitalformbyanA/D converter.Thisparametersetsthelevelofthesignal immediatelyafterthisconversion. Ifthesoundisdistortedeventhoughthislevelsetting isverylow,seeTipsforeliminatingdistortionwhen usingtheanaloginputsonpage 95.

FX Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus)


ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheFX Controlbus(stereotwochannel(FXCtrl1,2)).For moreinformation,seeFXControlBusesonpage 860 oftheParameterGuide.

REC Bus
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheREC buses(fourmonochannels:1,2,3,4). TheRECbusesarededicatedinternalrecordingbuses thatyoucanuseforrecordingorsamplingaudio tracks. RecordingbecomespossibleifyouchooseaRECbus astheSourceBus.Forexample,youcanusetheREC busesifyouwanttorecordonlyanaudioinputsource thatisbeingplayedalongwiththesongbeingoutput fromtheL/Rbus(i.e.,recordtheinputsource,butnot thesongplayback).Youcanalsomixseveralaudio inputstotheRECbuses,ormixthedirectsignalfrom audioinputstoRECbusesalongwithpostIFXsound andrecordtheresult. Off:ThesignalwillnotbeoutputtotheRECbuses. NormallyyouwillleavethisOff. 1,2,3,4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto thespecifiedRECbus.ThePansettingisignored,and thesignalissentinmonaural.

Avoiding extraneous noise


Ifcablesareconnectedtoanyoftheaudioinputs (analog,S/P DIF,orUSB),anynoisecarriedbythe cableswillenterintotheKRONOSmixerstructure. Thismayincludehiss,hum,andotheraudionoise. Toavoidnoisefromunusedaudioinputs,either: SettheinputsLevelto0 or SetallofthebusassignmentstoOff,includingBus Select(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign),RECBus,andFX ControlBus Ifnoaudiocablesareconnectedtotheanalogaudio inputs,theinputsignalsareforcedtozero, preventinganyadditionalnoise.

91

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

REC Source = Audio Input 1, 2, 1/2

L/R BUS

REC REC 1/2 3/4

Indiv. 1/2 3/4

CLIP !

Recording Track: REC (Mono) Track: REC (Mono) Stereo

Insert Effects Audio Input 1 Level Pan Insert Effects Audio Input 2 Level Pan Insert Effects Sequencer Playback Keyboard BUS = L/R or IFX1-12

Master Effects Total Effects


[x] Source Direct Solo

Monitor L/MONO R AUDIO OUTPUT HEADPHONES

Audio Track Mixer


Youcanspecifytheaudiosourcetorecordfrom,and changethePlay/Mutestatus,SOLOstatus,pan,and volumeforplayback.

IfStereoPairisonandAudioInput1/2isselected, AUDIOINPUT1willbeinputtotheoddnumbered track,andAUDIOINPUT2willbeinputtotheeven numberedtrack.Similarly,USB1/2.andS/P DIFL/R willbeinputtotheoddnumberedandeven numberedtracksrespectively. L,R,L/R:TheL/RbusafterpassingthroughTFX1and 2willberecorded.Choosethisifyouwanttorecordan externalaudiosignalbeingsenttotheL/Rbus,orthe soundbeingproducedbytheKRONOS(andsentto theL/Rbus)inresponsetosequencerplayback, keyboardplaying,orMIDIinput. IfStereoPairison,Lissenttooddnumberedtracks, andRissenttoevennumberedtracks. REC1,2,1/2,REC3,4,3/4:TheREC1/2orREC3/4 buseswillberecorded.Choosethisifyouwantto recordonlytheaudioinputwhilehearingthe sequencerplaybackandyourkeyboardplayingfrom theL/Routputs.Youcanalsomixseveralaudioinputs totheRECbuses,orusetheRECbusestomixthe directsoundfromtheaudioinputswiththesound processedbyinserteffects,andrecordtheresult. IfStereoPairison,RECbus1(3)issenttoodd numberedtracks,andRECbus2(4)issenttoeven numberedtracks. Indiv.14,Indiv.1/2and3/4:Thisallowsyoutorecord thesignalattheindividualoutputsdirectly,without theneedforanexternalcable.Similarlytousingthe RECbuses,youcanchoosethiswhenyouwantto monitortheL/Routputwhilerecordingadifferent signal. IfStereoPairisonandyouveselectedIndiv.1/2,the Indiv.bus1willbesenttooddnumberedtracks,and Indiv.bus2willbesenttoevennumberedtracks.

REC Source
Thisselectsthesourcethatwillberecordedonthe track.Thesignalofthebuslineyouspecifyherewillbe recorded.Seebelowforadiagramofbuseswhen recordingfromtheaudioinputs;formoredetailed diagrams,seeunder02:AudioTrackMixeron page 519oftheParameterGuide. IfyousettheTrackSelectfieldtoAudioTrack,you willbeabletomonitortheRECSourceofthattrack. Theoptionswilldifferslightlydependingonwhether ornotStereoPairisenabled. AudioInput1,2,1/2,USB1,2,1/2,orS/P DIFL,R, L/R:Choosethesetodirectlyrecordtheaudioinput fromtheanalog,S/PDIF,orUSBinputs.Theinputs willberecordeddirectlywithoutpassingthroughthe L/Rbus,RECbuses,orIndividualbuses.Noneofthe AudioInputsettingswillaffecttherecordedsignal; thisincludesBus(IFX/Indiv),Pan,Level,Solo,and Play/Mute.SeethediagramRECSource=Audio Input1,2,1/2.

Play/Rec/Mute
Usethistomuteanaudiotrack,ortoselectthe recordingtracksformultitrackrecording.During playback,orforsingletrackrecording(normal recording),itispossibleonlytoselectPlayorMutefor tracks(playbacktracks)otherthantherecordingtrack. Formultitrackrecording,trackscanbesettoPlay, Mute,orRec.Thesettingwillalternateeachtimeyou pressthePlay/Rec/Mutebutton.

Solo On/Off
ThisturnstheSolofunctionon/off.

Pan
Thisspecifiesthepanofaudiotrack.

92

Audio recording Recording procedure

Volume
Setsthevolumeofaudiotracks116.

Recording procedure
AudioTrackAutomationEvents:Thepreviously recordeddatawillremain,andthenewlyrecorded datawillbeaddedtoit.

Manual Punch In
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtousethe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchorafootswitchto rerecordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecorded track.

Auto Punch In
Selectthismethodwhenyouwishtoautomaticallyre recordselectedportionsofapreviouslyrecorded track. ForbothManualPunchInandAutoPunchIn, recordingwilloccurasfollows. AudioTrackAudioEvents,AudioTrackAutomation Events:Onlythemeasuresyourecordedwillbe overwritten;thedatainsubsequentmeasureswill remainunchanged.

Loop All Tracks

Recording Setup
Theseparametersspecifyhowaudiotrackswillbe recorded. Fordetailsoneachrecordingmethod,refertothe examplesforMIDItracks.(SeeRecordingsetupon page 78) However,thisdiffersfromMIDItrackrecordingas follows.

Choosethismethodifyouwanttorepeatedlyrecord trackautomationeventsoveraspecifiedregionof measures,addingdataateachpass.Onlyautomation eventscanberecorded.YoucanuseRemoveDatato removeaudiotrackautomationevents. Audioeventscannotberecorded.Thismeansthatif yousetTrackSelecttoAudioTrack,andturn AutomationOnlyOff,youwillbeunabletostart recording.

Overwrite
Whenrecordingforthefirsttime,youwillnormally selectthismethod. Tobeginrecording,presstheSEQUENCERREC/ WRITEswitchandthentheSEQUENCERSTART/ STOPswitch.Tostoprecording,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchonceagain. AudioTrackAudioEvents:Onlythemeasuresyou recordedwillbeoverwritten;thedatainsubsequent measureswillremainunchanged. AudioTrackAutomationEvents:Alldatafollowing themeasureatwhichyoubeginrecordingwillbe erased.

Recording Setup (Audio Track)


HDR Bit Depth
Youcanchoosetorecordeither16bitor24bitdata. 24bityieldshigherfidelity,butusesmorespaceon disk.

Automation Only
Normallyyouwillrecordwiththisunchecked.Both audiotrackautomationeventsandaudioeventswill berecorded. Ifthisischecked,onlyaudiotrackautomationevents willberecorded.Usethissettingifyouwanttorecord automationafterrecording.

Overdub
SelectthismethodwhenyouwishtoaddAudioTrack AutomationEventdatatoapreviouslyrecordedtrack. Tobeginrecording,presstheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEswitchandthentheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitch.Tostoprecording,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchonceagain. AudioTrackAudioEvents:AswithOverwrite,only themeasuresyourecordedwillbeoverwritten;the datainsubsequentmeasureswillremainunchanged.

Auto Input
Thisparametercontrolsmonitoringduringrecording. Itautomaticallyswitchesallrecordenabledtracks betweenmonitoringtherecordinputandthetrack playback,accordingtowhetherornotrecordingis active. Thisletsyoulistentoaudioyouvealreadyrecorded whenpunchingin,andalsomeansthatyoudonthave todisabletrackrecordenablesinordertolistento playback.

93

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Thisappliesonlytorecordenabledtracks.IfMulti RECisoff,thisistheRECTrack(asselectedinthe TrackSelectmenu).IfMultiRECison,thismeansto alltrackswhosePlay/Rec/MutebuttonissettoRec. Normally,AutoInputshouldbeenabled(checked). Whenenabled,recordenabledtrackswillbe monitoredasfollows: Whenstopped,themonitorcarriestheinputsignal. Whenplayingbutnotrecording,themonitor carriesthetrackplayback. Whenrecording,themonitorcarriestheinput signal. Foraudiotrackswhicharenotrecordenabled,youll alwaysbemonitoringthetrackplayback. Audiotrackmonitoring (Input:RECSource,Track:trackplayback) During Stop During Play During Rec Auto Input During Punch Rec InOut Out In

Recording Level 1, 2, 3, 4 Level Meter 1, 2, 3, 4


ThisadjuststhefinalstagesignallevelofeachREC Sourcebeingrecordedtotheaudiotracks. Theupperpartofthelevelmeter/slidershowsthe correspondingaudiotracknumber. Ifyoureusingsingletrackrecording,RecordingLevel 1andLevelMeter1bothapply. Ifyoureusingmultitrackrecording,thesettingsfor trackswhosePlay/Rec/MuteisRECwillbevalid. Whenusingsingletrackrecording,thelevelmeterwill showtherecordinglevelifyousetTrackSelectto AudioTrack.Whenusingmultitrackrecording,press theSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchtoenterrecord standbymode,andthelevelmeterwillshowthe recordinglevel. Note:Thesettingsuptothispointarethesameasif youexecutedthepagemenucommandAuto HDR/SamplingSetupwiththeHDR(AudioTrack Recording)setting,tomakethesetupautomatically. AudioInput,RECSource,TrackSelect,and Overwritearesetautomatically.Formoreinformation, seeAutoHDR/SamplingSetuponpage 629ofthe ParameterGuide.

Record Tracks

On Off On

Input Track Input

Input Track

Input Track*

Setting levels
Track Playback

Other Tracks

Forthebestresults,setthelevelsasdescribedbelow: 1. IfMultiRECisoff,setTrackSelecttoanAudio Track. or IfMultiRECisOn,recordenablethedesired Tracks,andthenpresstheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEswitch. TheLevelMeter(s)willnowshowtherecording level(s). 2. Initially,settheRecordingLevel(s)to0.0dB. 3. Adjustthelevel(s)oftheinputsignal(s)sothatit isashighaspossiblewithoutactivatingtheCLIP! orADCOVERLOAD!messages. IfyoureusingAUDIOINPUTS1and/or2,adjustthe volumeusingrearpanelMIC/LINEswitchesand LEVELknobs. IfyoureusingtheUSBorS/P DIFinputs,adjustthe outputlevelofyourexternalaudiosource. Ifyouresamplingexternalaudiothroughtheinternal effects,youmayalsoneedtoadjusttheindividual effectsinputand/oroutputlevelparameters. Ifyoureusinginternalsounds,adjustthelevelsusing thecontrolsurface,effectsinput/outputtrim,etc. 4. Ifthelevelisstillnothighenough,increasethe RecordingLevelusingtheonscreenslider. Again,thegoalistogetthelevelashighaspossible withoutactivatingtheCLIP!orADCOVERLOAD! messages.

Off

Source Direct Solo


Ifthisisunchecked,theL/R(postTFX)andbusline signal(s)specifiedbyRECSourcewillbesentfromthe L/Rjacksandtheheadphonejackasspecifiedbythe AudioInputBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)andpostIFXBus Sel.settings.Thisisthenormalstate. Normallyyouwillleavethisunchecked,andCheck thisifyouwanttomonitoronlythesoundthatsbeing recorded.Onlythesignalofthebuslinespecifiedby RECSourcewillbeoutputtotheL/Rjacksandthe headphonejack.WhenusingMultiREC,youllhear thesoundfromtheRECSourcebuseswhose Play/Rec/MutesettingissettoREC. Note:IftheRECSourceisL/R,thissettingisignored; theL/R(postTFX)signalisoutputfromtheL/Rjacks andtheheadphonejack.

Rehearsal
Checkthisifyouwanttorehearsebeforeactually recordingonanaudiotrack.(recordingwillnot actuallyoccur).

Audio Track Recording Level


Thisindicatestheinputleveltotheaudiotrack selectedforTrackSelect(whenusingsingletrack recording),ortheinputleveltotheaudiotrackswhose Play/Rec/MutesettingisREC(whenusingmultitrack recording:maximum4tracks).

94

Audio recording Recording procedure

Tips for eliminating distortion when using the analog inputs


Ifsoundfromtheanaloginputsisdistorted,butthe CLIP!messagedoesntappear,itspossiblethat distortionisoccurringattheanaloginputstage,orthat distortionisbeingcausedbythesettingsoftheinternal effects. IftheADCOVERLOAD!messageappearsabovethe RecordingLevelmeters,thedistortionisdueto excessivelevelsattheinput.Inthiscase,eitherlower theoutputleveloftheexternalaudiosource,oradjust theMIC/LINEgainselectswitchandLEVELknobso thatthismessagedoesnotappear. Ifthereisdistortion,buttheADCOVERLOAD! messagedoesnotappear,itspossiblethatthe distortionisbeingcausedbythesettingsoftheinternal effects.Tosolvethisproblem,eitherlowertheinput Level,oradjusttheeffectssettings(suchaschanging theindividualeffectInputTrimparameters).

UseGlobalsettingOff INPUT1 BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):Off Pan:L000 Level:127 RECBus:Off

Examples of audio track recording


Recording an external input on audio track 1
Inthisexample,wellexplainhowaguitarconnected totheAudioInput1jackcanberecordedonaudio track1. Recordingandplaybackonanaudiotrackcanoccur untiltheendofthemastertrack.Youcannotrecord forlongerthan80minutes. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,use RECSourcetoselectAudioInput1(In1),sothat thesignalfromAudioInput1willberecorded directlyonaudiotrack1. AudioTrack1RECSource:AudioInput1(In1)

Connect your guitar


1. ConnectyourguitartotherearpanelAUDIO INPUT1jack. PresstheAUDIOINPUTMIC/LINEswitchinward toselecttheLINEposition,andsettheLEVELknob ataboutthecenter.

Guitar Effect unit

LINE

Ifyouconnectaguitarwithpassivepickups(i.e.,a guitarthatdoesnotcontainapreamp),youwillbe unabletosampleitatthecorrectlevelbecauseofthe impedancemismatch.Suchguitarsshouldbe routedthroughapreamporaneffectunitfirst,and thenconnectedtotheKRONOS.

GototheP8:InsertEffectAudioRouting1page. SettheoutputforAudioTrack1asfollows. BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign):L/R Send1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2):000

Setup
2. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioInputSamplingpage, settheAudioInputparametersasdescribed below. Thefollowingsettingsaremadebydefault,soyou dontneedtomakethemyourself:

95

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Note:IfTakeisunchecked,youwillbeabletoenter upto24charactersasthefilename.Ifitischecked, youwillbeabletoinputupto22characters. Note:Ifyouwantthemetronometosoundduring recording,useMetronomeSetuptomake metronomesettings.Formoreinformation,see0 5d:MetronomeSetuponpage 528oftheParameter Guide.

Set the recording level


5. Playyourguitaratthevolumeyouintendto record. IftheADCOVERLOAD!(ADconverterinput overload)indicationappears,turntherearpanel LEVELknobtowardMINtoadjustthelevel appropriately. Forthebestsound,adjustthelevelashighas possiblewithoutallowingtheADCOVERLOAD ! indicationtoappear. 6. Thelevelmeterwillshowthevolumeoftheguitar signalthatwillberecorded. 3. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,setTrack SelecttoAudioTrack01.
Location Track Select

IftheCLIP!indicationappears,usetheVALUE controlleretc.tolowertheRecordingLevelslider (locatedintherightsideofthedisplay)from+0.0 downtoanappropriatelevel. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay backthesong,andcheckthevolumebalance.Ifyou wanttomonitoronlytheguitarsoundduring playback,checkSourceDirectSolo.

Record
7. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,use Locationtospecifythelocationatwhich recordingwillbegin. Ifyouwanttostartrecordingfromthebeginningof thesong,setthisto001:01.000. 8. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch TheKRONOSwillbeinrecordreadymode.If youvemademetronomesettings,themetronome willsoundthecount. 9. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Recordingwillstartfromthelocationyouspecified inLocation. AUDIOTRK01(LevelMeter1,RecordingLevel1, Name1,Take,TakeNo.)willappear. UsetheName1fieldtospecifyanameforthe regionandWAVEfilethatwillbecreated. Ifyouintendtorecordseveraltakesonthesame track,checktheTakeoptionbox. 4. SpecifytherecordingmethodinRecordingSetup andRecordingSetup(AudioTrack). Overwrite:selected AutomationOnly:unchecked SourceDirectSolo:unchecked AutoInput:checked Rehearsal:unchecked Note:Ifyouwanttorecordfromthebeginningof thesongorfromthemeasurespecifiedbyLocation, youshouldselectOverwrite. Ifyouhavespecifiedametronomeprecount (Precount[Measure]),recordingwillbeginafter theprecount.Ifaperformancehasalreadybeen recordedonaMIDItrack,thatMIDItrackwillalso playback. 10.Tostoprecording,presstheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitch.

Listen to the recorded result


11.GototheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage. InAudioTrack1,setthepanandvolumeetc.for audiotrack1. Play/Rec/Mute:Play SoloOn/Off:Off Pan:C064 Volume:100 12.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto playbackthesong.

96

Audio recording Recording procedure

Note:YoucanusefunctionssuchasComparewhen recordingaudioevents,justasyoucanwhen recordingMIDItracks. Note:Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffectonan audiotrack,setBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign) toIFX1IFX12. ThenselectL/RastheBusSelectsetting(P8:Insert EffectInsertFXpage)thatfollowstheinserteffect youused. Note:Ifyouwanttoapplymastereffectstoanaudio track,useSend1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2)toset thesendlevelstothemastereffect.Ifyoureusing aninserteffect,adjusttheSend1andSend2settings thatfollowthatinserteffect.

Recording an external input source on audio track 2 while you listen to the previouslyrecorded audio track 1
Inthisexample,wellrecordanotherguitar performanceonaudiotrack2whilemonitoringthe performanceyoupreviouslyrecordedonaudiotrack1 asdescribedinRecordinganexternalinputonaudio track1. 1. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,set theAudioInput2RECSourcetoAudioInput1(In 1). AUDIOTRACK2RECSource:AudioInput1(In1) 2. SetTrackSelecttoAudioTrack02. 3. Recordasdescribedinstep8andfollowingofthe precedingsection.

3. IntheP8:InsertEffectInsertFXpage,selectthe desiredeffectandrouteittoRECbus1. IFX1On/Off:On IFX1:thedesiredeffect BusSel.:Off RECBus:1

Applying an insert effect while you record


Inthisexample,wellapplyaninserteffecttothe guitarthatsconnectedtoAudioInput1,andrecord theeffectprocessedsoundonaudiotrack1.

Connect your guitar


1. Connectyourguitar. Fordetailedinstructions,seeRecordinganexternal inputonaudiotrack1onpage 95.

Setup
2. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioInput/Samplingpage, settheAudioInputparametersasshownbelow thatthesignalfromtheAUDIOINPUT1jackis senttoIFX1. UseGlobalSetting:Off BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):IFX1 INPUT1Level:127 INPUT1Pan:L000 INPUT1RECBus:Off

4. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,set RECSourcetoREC1sothatthesignaloftheREC buswillberecordedonaudiotrack1. AudioTrack1RECSource:REC1

97

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

switchtoplaybackthesong.Whenyoureachthe measureatwhichyouwanttostartrecording,press theSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchorthefoot switchtobeginrecording.Whenyoureachthe measureatwhichyouwanttostoprecording,press theREC/WRITEswitchorfootswitchonceagain; recordingwillend.

Rehearse
Ifdesired,youcansimulatetheactionofrecording withoutactuallyrecording.Thiswillfunctionjustasif youwererecording,butnoaudioevent,region,or WAVEfilewillbecreated. 3. InRecordingSetup(AudioTrack),checkthe Rehearsaloption. 4. UseLocationtospecifythelocationatwhich youwanttostartrecording.Setthisseveral measuresearlierthantheregionyouspecifiedfor M***M***. 5. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. 5. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,setTrack SelecttoAudioTrack01. Theremainingstepsarethesameasstep3and followingoftheprecedingsectionRecordingan externalaudiosourceonaudiotrack1.Pleaserefer tothatsectionfordetails. Youwillenterrecordreadymode. OnceyoupresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE switch,youwillbeunabletochangetheaudiotrack selectioninTrackSelect. 6. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbeginfromthemeasurespecifiedby Location,andsimulatedrecordingwilloccuronly intherangeofmeasuresspecifiedbyM***M***. Thenplaybackwillresume,andwillcontinuetothe endofthesong. Note:IftheRecordingSetup(AudioTrack) parameterAutoInputisOff,youwillalwaysbe abletoheartheRECSource.Formoreinformation, seeAutoInputonpage 527oftheParameter Guide. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto stoprecording. 8. InRecordingSetup(AudioTrack),uncheckthe Rehearsaloption.

Punch-in recording an external input source on an audio track


Inthisexample,wellshowhowtopunchinrecorda portionofthetrackyourecordedinRecordingan externalinputonaudiotrack1. DontchangetheP0:Play/RECAudioInput/ SamplingpageAudioInputsettings,theP0:Play/ RECPreferencepageRecordingSetup(Audio Track)settings,ortheP0:Play/RECAudioTrack MixerpageRECSourcesettings.Wewillusethese settingsastheyare.

Setup
1. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,makesure thatAudioTrack01isselectedfortheTrack Selectparameter. 2. UseRecordingSetuptospecifyhowrecording willstart. Inthisexample,choosepunchinrecording. AutoPunchIn:on M***M***:Specifytherangeofmeasuresfor whichyouwanttorecord. AUDIOTRK01Name,Take,TakeNo.:Specifythe regionandwavefilenamethatyouwanttorecord. Note:IfyousetRecordingSetuptoAutoPunchIn andsetM***M***tothedesiredrangeof measures,playbackwilloccuruntilthatrangeof measures,andthenonlythespecifiedrangeof measureswillberecorded. IfyousetRecordingSetuptoManualPunchIn,the measuresyouspecifybypressingtheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEswitchorfootswitchwillberecorded. Inthiscase,presstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP

Record
9. UseLocationtospecifythelocationatwhich youwanttostartrecording.Setthisseveral measuresearlierthantheregionyouspecifiedfor M***M***. 10.PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. Youwillenterrecordreadymode. OnceyoupresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE switch,youwillbeunabletochangetheaudiotrack selectioninTrackSelect. 11.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbeginfromthemeasurespecifiedby Location,andrecordingwilloccuronlyinthe rangeofmeasuresspecifiedbyM***M***.Then playbackwillresume,andwillcontinuetotheend ofthesong. Note:IftheRecordingSetup(AudioTrack) parameterAutoInputisOff,youwillalwaysbe abletoheartheRECSource. 12.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto stoprecording.

98

Audio recording Other variations of audio track recording

Listen to the recorded result


13.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto playbackthesong. Makeoutputsettingsfortheaudiotrackas describedunderListentotherecordedresulton page 96. 14.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto stopplayback.

Compare the recorded result


PresstheCOMPAREswitch(theCOMPAREswitch LEDwilllight),andplayback. Theaudiotrackpriortopunchinrecordingwill playback. OnceagainpresstheCOMPAREswitch(the COMPARELEDwillgodark),andplayback. Theaudiotrackfollowingpunchinrecordingwill playback.

Other variations of audio track recording


Bouncing audio tracks
Bouncingletsyoucombinetwoormoretracksinto eitherasinglemonotrack,orastereopair. Inthisexample,wellshowhowaudiotracks1and2 canbebouncedtoaudiotrack3. Beforeyouproceed,youllneedtorecordontoaudio tracks1and2.Torecordonaudiotrack2,make settingsasdescribedunderRecordingSetupon page 93,butintheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixer page,setAudioTrack2RECSourcetoREC1,andin theP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,setTrackSelect toAudioTrack02. 4. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,useTrack SelecttoselectAudioTrack03. 5. InRecordingSetup,RecordingSetup(Audio Track),specifythedesiredrecordingmethod. RecordingSetup Overwrite:on RecordingSetup(AudioTrack) AutomationOnly:unchecked SourceDirectSolo:unchecked AutoInput:checked Rehearsal:unchecked AudioTRK03 Name,Take,TakeNo.:Specifythedesiredregion andWAVEfilenametoberecorded. 6. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,set RECSourcesothatLwillberecordedonaudio track3. Audiotrack3RECSource:L Note:Thesettingsuptothispointarethesameasif youusedthepagemenucommandAuto HDR/SamplingSetuptoexecuteBounceAudio Trackwiththefollowingsettings.Formore information,seeBounceAudioTrackonpage 631 oftheParameterGuide. Mode:Mono From:AudioTrack01:checked AudioTrack02:checked To:AudioTrack03 Whenbouncerecordingaudiotracks,turnthe metronomeoff(MetronomeSetupSound:Off).

Setup
1. IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,set upbothaudiotracks1and2asshownbelow: Play/Rec/Mute:Play SoloOn/Off:On Pan:L000 Volume:127 Note:ByturningonSoloforbothAUDIO1and AUDIO2,youarespecifyingthatonlytheseaudio trackswillbeheardandrecorded. 2. IntheP8:InsertEffectAudioRouting1page,set upbothaudiotracks1and2asshownbelow: BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign):L/R Send1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2):000 Note:Ifyouwanttoapplyinserteffectstotheaudio tracks,setBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)to yourchoiceofIFX1IFX12.ThenchooseL/Rforthe BusSelectsetting(P8:InsertEffectInsertFXpage) thatfollowstheinserteffectyoureusing. Note:Ifyouwanttoapplymastereffectstoanaudio track,useSend1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2)to adjustthesendlevelstothemastereffects.Ifyouare usinganinserteffectontheaudiotrack,adjustthe Send1andSend2thatfollowtheinserteffectyoure using. 3. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto playbackthesong,andadjustthebalanceofthe audiotrack1and2outputlevels. Theoutputlevelofeachaudiotrackisadjustedin theP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpagebythe audiotrack1andaudiotrack2Volumesetting. Whenyouvefinishedmakingadjustments,stop playback.

Record
7. SetLocationtothebeginningofthesong(001: 01.000). 8. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. Youwillbeinrecordreadymode. OnceyoupresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITE switch,youwillbeunabletochangetheaudiotrack selectioninTrackSelect. 9. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Playbackwillbegin,andbouncerecordingwillalso beginsimultaneously. Whentheaudiotrackshavefinishedplayingback, recordingwillalsoend.Songplaybackwillalsoend automatically.

99

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Listen to the recorded result


10.IntheP0:Play/RECAudioTRACKMixerpage, mutetheplaybackofbothaudiotracks1and2. Play/Rec/Mute:Mute SoloOn/Off:Off 11.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto playbackthesong. Makeoutputsettingsforaudiotrack3asdescribed inListentotherecordedresultonpage 96. 12.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto stopplayback. IfyouwanttocreateaWAVEfileonthediskfroma songthatincludesaudiotracks,seeResamplinga songtocreateaWavefileonpage 152.

4. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNAUDIOswitch severaltimessothattheHDR18LEDlocatedat therightoftheswitchislit. 5. InthecenteroftherightedgeoftheLCD,check LinkKBDRECTrktoCtrlSurface. IfyoucheckthisandpresstheMIXSELECT3 switch,eachknobwillcontrolaudiotrack3,andat thesametimeTrackSelectwillswitchtoAudio Track03. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay back,andoperatetheknobsandslidersetc.to rehearseyourmix. IfMIXERKNOBissettoCHANNELSTRIP,knob1 willcontrolpan,knobs26willcontrolEQ,and knobs7and8willcontrolthesendlevels.Useslider 3toadjustthevolumeofaudiotrack3. Whenyouvefinishedrehearsing,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop. PresstheLOCATEswitch.

Recording automation events for pan, EQ, and volume etc. on an audio track
Allaudiotrackparameters(Pan,Volume,Send1/2, andEQ)canberecordedinrealtime.Inthisexample, wellrecordPanandVolumechangesonaudiotrack3. GototheP0:Play/RECAudioTrackMixerpage,and useTrackSelecttoselectAudioTrack03asthetrack toberecorded.YoucouldusetheVALUEcontrollerto operateadesiredparameter,butusingthecontrol surfaceletsyoumixuptoeighttrackssimultaneously.

Record
6. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitch. Themetronomewillbeginsounding,andyouwill beinrecordreadymode. 7. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Afteratwomeasurecount,recordingwillbegin. Usetheslidersetc.tocontrolthevolume. Note:Whenrecordingautomationevents,youcan usequantization,theresolutionsetting,andthe comparefunctioninthesamewayasforaMIDI track. 8. Whenyourefinishedrecording,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop recording. 9. Listentotherecordedresult. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay back. Ifyouwanttorecordagain,usetheCompare function(presstheCOMPAREswitch)torerecord. 10.Ifyouwanttocontinueaddingautomationevents, repeattherecordingprocedurefromstep6.

Setup
1. GototheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage. 2. InRecordingSetup,RecordingSetup(Audio Track),choosethedesiredrecordingmethod. Inthisexample,wellchooseoverdubrecordingso thatwecanrecordrepeatedpasses,addingmore automationdataoneachpass. RecordingSetup Overdub:on RecordingSetup(AudioTrack) AutomationOnly:checked IfyourecordwithoutcheckingAutomationOnly, audioeventswillalsoberecorded.Notethatthis willeraseandoverwritetheaudioeventsthat alreadyexist. 3. GototheP0:Play/RECControlSurfacepage.

100

Audio recording Placing a WAVE file in an audio track

Placing a WAVE file in an audio track


YoucanplaybackaWAVEfilebyimportingitintoa regionofanaudiotrack. Important:YoucanonlydirectlyimportWAVEfiles fromtheinternaldisk.TousefilesfromCDsor externalUSBdevices,youmustfirstcopythemtothe internaldisk,andthenimportthecopiedfileintothe Song. Note:Tobeimported,WAVEfilesmustbeat44.1kHz or48kHzsamplerate,andlessthan80minuteslong. 1. GototheP4:TrackEditpage. 2. UseTrackSelecttoselecttheaudiotrackin whichyouwanttoplacetheWAVEfile. 3. ChoosetheAudioEventEditpagemenu commandtoopenthedialogbox. 5. Selecttheregionintowhichyouwanttoimport theWAVEfile,andpresstheImportbutton locatedbelow.Adialogboxwillopen.

Event

6. UseDriveSelect,Open,andUptonavigate tothedesireddirectory,selecttheWAVEfileyou wanttoimport,andpresstheOKbuttontoimport thefileintotheregion.

4. Selecttheeventatwhichyouwanttoinserta region,andpresstheInsertbuttonlocatedatthe lowerleft.Adialogboxwillopen.

WhenselectingaWAVEfile,youcanpressthePlay buttontoauditionthefilestohelpyoufindthe desiredone. YoucanalsousetheNamefieldlocatedaboveto assignanametotheregion.EdittheNameafter youveselectedafile. Note:TheOKandPlaybuttonsareavailableonlyif youveselecteda44.1kHzor48kHzWAVEfile. Otherwise,thebuttonwillbegrayedoutandyou wontbeabletopressit. Editingaregionwillaffecttheaudiotrackforthe entiresong.Usecautionwheneditingaregionthats alreadyusedinanaudiotrack.

101

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

7. PresstheOKbutton,theselectedregionwillbe placedintheaudiotrack.

8. Selecttheeventthatyouwanttoedit,andusethe locationparametersMeasureandBeatTickto editthelocationoftheevent. Youcantplacetwoormoreeventsatthesame location. 9. PresstheDonebutton. 10.PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,and makesurethattheWAVEfileplaysback. YoucanpresstheCOMPAREswitchtoreturntothe statepriortotheedityoujustperformed. Wevekeptthisexamplesimple,butyoucanalso performeditingoperationssuchaschangingthe playbackpositionoftheWAVEfileinstepsofasingle sample,changingthelocationrelativetoananchor point,orcrossfadingtwoaudioevents.Formore information,seeAudioAutomationEditonpage 641 oftheParameterGuide.

102

Song editing Songs

Song editing
YoucanapplyavarietyofeditingoperationstoSongs, MIDITracks,andAudioTracks,asdescribedbelow.

Songs
InitializeSong:Thiscommanderasesalldatainthe currentsong,andrestoresallparameterstotheir defaultstates.Formoreinformation,seeInitialize Song,asdescribedonpage 624oftheParameter Guide. CopyFromSong:Thiscommandcopiesallofthe settingdataandmusicaldatafromthespecifiedsong tothecurrentlyselectedsong.Formoreinformation, seeCopyFromSongonpage 624oftheParameter Guide. FF/REWSpeed:Thisallowsyoutosetthespeedat whichfastforwardorrewindwilloccurwhenyou presstheFForREWbuttons.Formoreinformation, seeFF/REWSpeedonpage 625oftheParameter Guide. GMInitialize:ThiscommandtransmitsaGMSystem OnmessagetotheSequencermode,resettingallMIDI trackstotheGMsettings.Formoreinformation,see GMInitializeonpage 626oftheParameterGuide. BounceAllTracksToDisk:Thiscommandrecordsall tracksinthesongtoasinglestereoWAVEfile.For moreinformation,seeBounceAllTracksToDiskon page 635oftheParameterGuide. SetSongLength:Thiscommandchangesthelengthof thespecifiedsong.Whenitisexecuted,thelengthof themastertrackwillchange,andthenumberof measuresplayedwillchange.Formoreinformation, seeSetSongLengthonpage 642oftheParameter Guide.

Auto HDR/Sampling Setup


Thiscommandwalksyouthroughmakingthe appropriatesettingsforvariouscommonoperations, includingdiskrecording,audiotrackbouncing, sampling/resampling(intracksampling,etc.),and creatinganaudioCD.Formoreinformation,seeAuto HDR/SamplingSetuponpage 629oftheParameter Guide. Initialize:Setsaudiorecordingandsampling parameterstotheirdefaultvalues. HDR(AudioTrackRecording):Makesthenecessary settingsforrecordingexternalaudio,suchasguitarsor vocals. BounceAudioTrack:Makesthenecessarysettingsfor bouncerecordingaudiotracks. 2chMixtoDisk:Makessettingsforresamplinga completedsongtoastereoWAVEfile.Youcanthen burnthesefilestoaCDonaUSBCDR/RWdrive(not included),usingtheDiskmodeMakeAudioCDpage. ResampleSEQPlay:Makessettingsforresampling. InTrackSampling:Makessettingsforsampling externalaudiousingInTrackSampling.

MIDI Tracks
Track editing
MIDIStepRecording:Itallowsyoutospecifythe lengthandvelocityofeachnotenumerically,andto inputMIDIdata,thepitches,fromthekeyboard.You canusetheRestbuttonandTiebuttontoenterarestor tie.Formoreinformation,seeMIDIStepRecording onpage 636oftheParameterGuide. MIDIEventEdit:Hereyoucaneditindividualevents ofMIDIdata.Formoreinformation,seeMIDIEvent Editonpage 637oftheParameterGuide. BounceTrack:Thiscommandcombinesthemusical dataofthebouncesourceandbouncedestination tracks,andplacesthecombineddatainthebounce destination.Allmusicaldatainthebouncesourcewill beerased.Formoreinformation,seeBounceTrack onpage 643oftheParameterGuide. CreateControlData:Thiscommandcreatescontrol change,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempodatainthe specifiedregionofaMIDItrackorthemastertrack. Formoreinformation,seeCreateControlDataon page 647oftheParameterGuide. EraseControlData:Thiscommanderasesdatasuchas controlchanges,aftertouch,pitchbend,ortempoin thespecifiedrange.Formoreinformation,seeErase ControlDataonpage 648oftheParameterGuide. Quantize:ThiscommandcorrectsthetimingofMIDI dataofthetypeyouspecify(notedata,controlchange, aftertouch,pitchbend,programchange,etc.)inthe track.Formoreinformation,seeQuantizeon page 648oftheParameterGuide. Shift/EraseNote:Thiscommandshifts(moves)or erasesthespecifiednotenumbersinaspecifiedMIDI trackandrangeofmeasures.Formoreinformation,see Shift/EraseNoteonpage 649oftheParameter Guide. ModifyVelocity:Thiscommandmodifiesthevelocity valuesofnotesinthespecifiedareasothattheywill changeovertimeaccordingtoaselectedcurve.For moreinformation,seeModifyVelocityonpage 650 oftheParameterGuide.

103

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Pattern editing
StepRecording(LoopType):Hereyoucanperform steprecordingintoapattern.Formoreinformation, seeStepRecording(LoopType)onpage 654ofthe ParameterGuide. EventEdit:Hereyoucaneditindividualeventsofthe musicaldatainapattern.Formoreinformation,see EventEditonpage 654oftheParameterGuide. PatternParameter:Thiscommandspecifiesthe numberofmeasuresandthetimesignatureofthe selectedpattern.Formoreinformation,seePattern Parameteronpage 655oftheParameterGuide. ErasePattern:Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthe selectedpattern.Formoreinformation,seeErase Patternonpage 655oftheParameterGuide. CopyPattern:Thiscommandcopiesthesettingsand musicaldataoftheselectedpatterntoanotherpattern. Formoreinformation,seeCopyPatternonpage 655 oftheParameterGuide. BouncePattern:Thiscommandcombinesthemusical dataofthebouncesourcepatternandbounce destinationpattern,andplacesthecombinedmusical datainthebouncedestination.Formoreinformation, seeBouncePatternonpage 655oftheParameter Guide.

GetFromMIDITrack:Thiscommandtakesmusical datafromaMIDItrackandloadsitintothespecified pattern.Formoreinformation,seeGetFromMIDI Trackonpage 656oftheParameterGuide. PutToMIDITrack:Thiscommandplacesapattern intoaMIDItrack.Formoreinformation,seePutTo MIDITrackonpage 656oftheParameterGuide. CopyToMIDITrack:Thiscommandcopiesthe specifiedareaofmusicaldatafromthespecified patterntoaMIDItrackasmusicaldata.Formore information,seeCopyToMIDITrackonpage 656of theParameterGuide. ConverttoDrumTrackPattern:Thiscommand convertsauserpatternintoauserdrumtrackpattern, whichcanthenbeusedwiththeDrumTrackinany mode.Formoreinformation,seeConverttoDrum TrackPatternonpage 657oftheParameterGuide. LoadDrumTrackPattern:Thiscommandloadsauser DrumTrackpatternintoauserpattern.Formore information,seeLoadDrumTrackPatternon page 657oftheParameterGuide. EraseDrumTrackPattern:Thiserasesthespecified DrumTrackpattern.Formoreinformation,seeErase DrumTrackPatternonpage 635oftheParameter Guide.

Common to MIDI tracks and audio tracks


EraseTrack:Thiscommanderasesthedatafromthe specifiedtrack.Itisnotpossibletoerasethemaster trackbyitself.Formoreinformation,seeEraseTrack onpage 642oftheParameterGuide. CopyTrack:Thiscommandcopiesmusicaldatafrom thecopysourcetracktothespecifiedtrack.Formore information,seeCopyTrackonpage 642ofthe ParameterGuide. EraseMeasure:Thiscommanderasesthespecified type(s)ofmusicaldatafromthespecifiedrangeof measures.TheEraseMeasurecommandcanalsobe usedtoremoveonlyaspecifictypeofdata.Unlikethe DeleteMeasurecommand,executingtheErase Measurecommanddoesnotcausethesubsequent measuresofmusicaldatatobemovedforward.For moreinformation,seeEraseMeasureonpage 643of theParameterGuide. DeleteMeasure:Thiscommanddeletesthespecified measures.WhentheDeleteMeasurecommandis executed,themusicaldatafollowingthedeleted measureswillbemovedtowardsthebeginningofthe sequence.Formoreinformation,seeDeleteMeasure onpage 644oftheParameterGuide. InsertMeasure:Thiscommandinsertsthespecified numberofmeasuresintothespecifiedtrack.Whenyou executetheInsertMeasurecommand,themusicaldata followingtheinsertlocationwillbemovedbackward. Formoreinformation,seeInsertMeasureon page 645oftheParameterGuide. RepeatMeasure:Thiscommandrepeatedlyinsertsthe specifiedmeasuresforthespecifiednumberoftimes. WhenyouexecutetheRepeatMeasurecommand,the measureswillbeinsertedfollowingthemeasure specifiedbyToEndofMeasure,andmusicaldata followingtheinserteddatawillbemovedbackward. Formoreinformation,seeRepeatMeasureon page 646oftheParameterGuide. CopyMeasure:Thiscommandcopiesthemeasuresof musicaldataspecifiedastheFromsourcetothe beginningofthemeasurespecifiedastheTo location.WhenyouexecutetheCopyMeasure command,theexistingtrackdataatthecopy destinationwillberewritten.Formoreinformation, seeCopyMeasureonpage 646oftheParameter Guide. MoveMeasure:Thiscommandmovesthespecified measuresofperformancedatatoanothermeasure. WhenyouexecutetheMoveMeasurecommand,the performancedatafollowingthemovesourcemeasures willmoveforwardbythecorrespondingnumberof measures,andtheperformancedatafollowingthe movedestinationwillmovebackward(i.e.,laterinthe song)bythesamenumberofmeasures.Formore information,seeMoveMeasureonpage 647ofthe ParameterGuide.

104

Song editing Audio Tracks

Audio Tracks
AudioEventEdit:Thiscommandletsyouedit individualaudioeventsthathavebeenrecorded,or trim(i.e.,makeadjustmentsinstepsofasinglesample to)theregionusedbyaudioevents.Formore information,seeAudioEventEditonpage 638ofthe ParameterGuide. AudioAutomationEdit:Thisletsyoueditindividual automationdataevents.Formoreinformation,see AudioAutomationEditonpage 641ofthe ParameterGuide. RegionEdit:Hereshowtoedittheregionsusedinan audiotrack.InadditiontoImportingorPastinga region,youcanusetheTrimdialogboxtospecifythe rangeinwhichaWAVEfilewillplayback.Formore information,seeRegionEditonpage 651ofthe ParameterGuide. VolumeRamp:Thiscommandmodifiesthedata values(volume)ofthespecifiedarea.Youcan graduallyincrease(FadeIn)ordecrease(FadeOut)the volumebetweenthestartandendpoints.Formore information,seeVolumeRamponpage 653ofthe ParameterGuide. CopySongsTempotoRegion:Thiscommand changesthetempousedbythespecifiedregionsof audioeventssothattheaudioeventtempowillmatch thetempoofthelocationinwhichthoseregionsplay back. Ifthetempoofanaudiotrackmatchesthetempoofthe MIDItracks,executingthiscommandtomatchthe regiontempowillensurethattheAdjustRegionto SongsTempo(TimeStretch)orAdjustSongsTempo toRegioncommandscanbeexecutedcorrectly.For moreinformation,seeCopySongsTempotoRegion onpage 653oftheParameterGuide. AdjustSongsTempotoRegion:Thiscommand createstempoeventsinthemastertracktomatchthe tempooftheregionsusedbytheaudioeventsinthe specifiedrange. Thisisusefulifyoucreateaudiotracksinapreviously recordedregion,andwantalltracks(includingMIDI tracks)tomatchthatregion.Formoreinformation,see AdjustSongsTempotoRegiononpage 653ofthe ParameterGuide. AdjustRegiontoSongsTempo(TimeStretch):Ifthe tempoofregionsusedbyaudioeventsinthespecified rangediffersfromthetempooftherangeinwhich thoseregionsplayback,youcanexecuteTimeStretch (Sustaining)tocreatenewWAVEfilesandregions. Audioeventsthatusethenewlycreatedregionswill alsobecreatedautomatically. Ifyouwanttomodifythetempoofanexistingsong,it isconvenienttofirstspecifythedesiredtempointhe mastertrack,andthenexecutethiscommandsothat theaudiotrack(s)willbecreatedaccordingtothenew tempo.Formoreinformation,seeAdjustRegionto SongsTempoonpage 654oftheParameterGuide.

105

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Using RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/Record)

ThissectionexplainshowtoassignapatterntoRPPR, andhowtoplayandrecordusingRPPR.

Creating RPPR data


1. Createanewsong,andchooseadrumprogramfor MIDItrack1. 2. SelecttheRPPRSetuptaboftheP5:Pattern/RPPR page.Inthispage,theRPPRfunctionis automaticallyturnedon. 7. WiththeC#2parameterselected,presstheCopy button. 8. Assignpatternstootherkeys. SelecttheD2parameter,andpressthePastebutton. TheAssign,Bank,PatternName,Track Name,Mode,Shift,andSyncsettingsyou madeinsteps5and6willbecopiedautomatically.

3. Selectthekeytowhichthepatternwillbe assigned. SelectC#2.HolddowntheENTERswitchandplay akey,orusethescrollbarlocatedattherighttofind thekey. Note:C2andlowerkeysareusedtostopplayback, andcannotbeassigned. 4. CheckAssignforC#2. 5. SetBanktoPreset,andsetPatternNameto P00. 9. ModifyonlythePatternName.SelectPattern Name,andpressthe switchtoselectP01. 10.SelecttheD#2parameter,andpressthePaste button. TheAssign,Bank,PatternName,Track Name,Mode,Shift,andSyncsettingsyou madeinsteps5and6willbecopiedautomatically. Asyoudidinstep9,setPatterntoP02. Note:WhenmakingRPPRsettings,youcanusethe CopybuttonandPastebuttoninthiswayto efficientlyassigntheBank,PatternName,and TrackNameetc.toeachkey. 11.Asdescribedabove,assignseveralotherpatterns suchasP03andhigher. 12.PresstheC#2key.Theassignedpatternwillplay. TakeyourfingerofftheC#2key,andpresstheD2 key.Thepatternwillchange,andplaybackwill begin.Atthistime,thepatternoperationwill dependontheSyncandModesetting. SetKEYtoC#2,andsetSynctoMeasure.Make thesamesettingforD2(Seethediagramabove). 6. SetTrackNametoT01. Theselectedpatternwillbeplayedaccordingtothe settings(program,etc.)ofthetrackyouselecthere. Nowpressthenotesconsecutively.Noticethatthe patternsoperateinadifferentway. WiththeMeasuresetting,patternswillbe handledinonemeasureunits.Thesecondand

106

Using RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play/Record) RPPR playback

subsequentpatternswillstartinsyncwiththeend ofpreviouslyplayedpattern. IfyouchangetheModesettingtoOnce,theentire patternwillplaybacktotheendevenifyourelease yourfingerfromthekeyboardimmediately.

13.Tostopplayback,eitherpressthesamekeyonce again,orpresstheC2orlowerkey.

RPPR playback
LetsusetheRPPRyoucreatedtoperformintheP0: Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage. 1. SelecttheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/ Mixerpage(Seethediagrambelow). 2. ChecktheRPPRcheckbox. TheRPPRfunctionwillbeturnedon.Settheon/off foreachsong. 3. Playthekeyboard,andpatternswillbeginplaying accordingtotheRPPRsettings. PatternplaybackforakeywithaSyncsettingof BeatorMeasurewillsynctotheplaybackofthe firstpattern.Formoreinformation,seeSyncon page 592oftheParameterGuide. Ifyouareplayingthepatterninsynchronization (whenSyncisBeat,Measure,orSEQ),thepattern willstartaccuratelyifyouplaythenoteslightly earlierthanthetimingofthebeatormeasure.Even ifyouplaythenoteslightlylaterthanthebeator measure(butnolaterthana32ndnote),itwillbe consideredtohavestartedatthebeatormeasure, andthebeginningofthepatternwillbe compressedsothattheremainderoftheplayback willbecorrect. IfyouwishtotriggertheRPPRfunctionfroman externalMIDIdevice,usetheMIDIchannelthatis selectedforTrackSelect. 4. ToturnofftheRPPRfunction,unchecktheRPPR checkbox.

Play RPPR while a Song plays back


RPPRcanbeplayedinsynchronizationwiththe playbackofasong. PatternplaybackforakeywithaSyncsettingofSEQ willsynchronizetotheplaybackofthesong.(See Synconpage 592oftheParameterGuide.)Startthe songplayback,andthenpressthekey.Thepattern playbackwillstartinsynchronizationwiththe measuresofthesong. Synchronizationwillbelostifyouusethe<<REW orFF>>switcheswhileasongisplaying. Note:IfyouwantRPPRpatternplaybacktobeginat themomentthatsongplaybackbegins,itisagood ideatoinsertanemptymeasurecontainingnomusical databeforethesongplaybackbegins. Note:Ifthesongisstopped,thepatternwill synchronizetothetimingofKARMA.

Recording an RPPR performance


YoucanrecordRPPRperformancesinrealtime. Ifyouareusingonlyonetrack(suchasMIDITrack01), setTrackSelecttothedesiredtrack,anduncheck MultiRec. Ontheotherhand,evenifRPPRusesonlyonetrack, usemultitrackrecordingifyouwillbeselecting anothertrackinTrackSelectandrecordingits performanceatthesametime. Youshouldalsoselectmultitrackrecordingifyou specifiedtheRPPRdatausingmultipletracksrather thanjustasingletrack,andwanttosimultaneously recordtheperformanceofmultipletracks. Note:TheRPPRpatternwillberecordedas performancedataonthetracksusedbythepattern. Inthisexample,wellexplainhowyoucanrecordan RPPRperformanceandakeyboardperformanceatthe sametime.Beforeyoucontinue,usetheP0:Play/REC

RPPR On

107

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

MIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpagetoassignadrum programtoMIDItrack1,andabassprogramtoMIDI track2. 1. AssignseveralkeysstartingwithC#2topreset patterns. ChecktheC#2Assignsetting,andsetBankto PresetandPatternNametothedesiredpreset pattern.ForTrackName,selectMIDItrack1(T01) towhichyouassignedadrumprogram. 2. ForeachRPPRpattern,setSynctoSEQ(Seethe diagramabove). WithasettingofSEQ,patternsplayedbytheRPPR functionwhilethesequencerisplayingorrecording willstartinsynchronizationwiththemeasuresof thesequencer.
Sync settings Key 1 on Key 2 on Key 1 off

patterntostartplaying,regardlessofthetrackthats selectedinTrackSelect. Keystowhichpatternsarenotassignedcanbe playedintheusualway.Youcanplaytheprogram thatsassignedtotheMIDItrackyouselecthere. 5. SinceyouwantthetracksyouplayviaRPPRand thetrackyouplayfromthekeyboardtobe recordedatthesametime,checktheMultiREC checkbox. Note:IfRecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks, itwillnotbepossibletoselectMultiREC.Setthe RecordingSetuptoOverwrite. 6. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchto enterrecordreadymode. 7. Forthetracksyouwillberecording(MIDITrack1, 2),pressPlay/Rec/Mutetomakethemindicate REC. Makesurethatthetracksyourenotrecordingare indicatedasPlayorMute. 8. PresstheLOCATEswitchtosetthelocationto 001:01.000. 9. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch,and thenpressakeythatplaysanRPPRpattern. If,duringtheprecountbeforerecording,youpress akeythatsassignedtoanRPPRpattern,thepattern willbeginplaying(andbeingrecorded)themoment thatrecordingbegins. RecordtheRPPRpatternplaybackandkeyboard performance. Whenrecordingtheplaybackofpatternstriggered byRPPR,thetimingoftherecordedeventsmaybe slightlyskewed.Ifthisoccurs,trysettingREC ResolutiontoasettingotherthanHi. 10.Whenyouarefinishedperforming,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Recordingwillend,andthesequencerwillreturnto thelocationatwhichrecordingbegan. Ifyoumadeamistakeduringyourperformanceor wouldliketorerecord,youcanusetheCompare function(presstheCOMPAREswitch)torerecord asmanytimesasyouwish. 11.Ifyouwanttorecordothertracks,uncheckthe MultiREC(Seestep5)orRPPR(Seestep4) checkboxesasnecessary.

Song Patterns 1 and 2 are set to Mode=Manual, and have identical Sync settings Sync: Off Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Sync: Beat Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Sync: Measure Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Sync: SEQ Pattern 1

Pattern 2

3. SelecttheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProg Select/Mixerpage. 4. ChecktheRPPRcheckbox,andsetTrack SelecttoMIDITrack02. WhentheRPPRfunctionison,pressingakeyto whichapatternisassignedwillcausetheassigned

108

Sampling in Sequencer mode Recording an RPPR performance

Sampling in Sequencer mode


SamplingisstillavailableinSequencermodewhich canbeveryconvenient.Themainareasoffunctionality aresummarizedbelow.Formoreinformation,see SamplinginSequencermodeonpage 151. Multisampleetc.youcreatecanbeplayedbackin Sequencermodetogetherwithinternalprograms. TimeSlice(inSamplingmode)letsyoudivideupa rhythmloopsample,andcreateplaybackdatathat triggersthedividedsamplesattheappropriate timing.Youcanplaybackthisperformancedatain Sequencermode,andadjusttheplaybacktempo withoutaffectingthepitchoftherhythmloop sample.Youcanevenexchangethenotenumbers oftheperformancedataorchangeitstimingto transformtheoriginalrhythmloopsampleintoa completelynewrhythmloop. InTrackSamplingletsyousampleanexternal audiosourcethatsplayingalongwiththesong, andautomaticallycreatenotedatainthetrackto playthissampleatthecorrecttime. YoucanresampleyourcompletedsongstoWAVE files,andcreateanaudioCDbyburningthose WAVEfilesinDiskmode.

109

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

Saving your Song


Thissectionexplainshowtosaveyoursongonthe internaldisk. Toensurethatyourdatawillbereproducedperfectly, werecommendthatyouuseSaveAlltosaveyour song.Thissavesyoursounds,samples,andSongatthe sametime,withnamestotiethemtogether: Programs,Combinations,globalsettings,Drum Kits,WaveSequences,userDrumTrackpatterns, andSetLists Songs,includinganyaudiodata SamplingModeMultisamplesandsamples LinkstoloadedEXsandUserSampleBankdata Note:WAVEfilescreatedbyrecordingaudiotrackswill bemovedtoadifferentdirectory.Fordetails,seeHow audiodataisstoredonthediskonpage 90. Whenyouturnoffthepower,theSequencermode settings,recordedsongs,anduserpatternswillbe lost.Userdrumpatternswillberetained,however. Tosaveyourdata,proceedasfollows. 1. Makesurethatthemediaisabletosavedata. (Settingupmedia) 2. PresstheDISKbuttontoenterDiskmode. 3. SelecttheDiskSavepagebypressingtheFiletab, andthentheSavetab. 4. MakesurethatDriveSelectissetto HDD:INTERNALHD. 5. Ifthedrivecontainsdirectories,selectthe directoryinwhichyouwanttosavethedata. PresstheOpenbuttontomovetoalowerlevelof thedirectorystructure,ortheUpbuttontomoveto ahigherlevel. Ifyouwanttocreateanewdirectory,movetothe levelatwhichyouwanttocreatethedirectory,and executetheUtilitypagemenucommandCreate Directory. 6. Pressthepagemenubuttontoopenthepage menu,andselectSaveAll.

7. Usethetexteditbuttontoenterafilename. 8. PresstheOKbuttontostarttheSaveoperation. 9. Whensavingiscompleteandyoureturntothe Savepage,theLCDscreenwillshowtheresulting files. Formoredetails,seeSavingmemorycontentsto diskonpage 187.

110

Other notes about Sequencer mode KRONOS sequencer file formats

Other notes about Sequencer mode KRONOS sequencer file formats


TheKRONOSsequencersupportsboththeinternal KRONOSSongformat,andStandardMIDIFiles. Ifyoulike,youcanconvertdatabetweenthetwo formats,simplybyloadingthedatainoneformatand thensavingitintheother. Formoreinformation,seeSavetoStandardMIDI Fileonpage 849oftheParameterGuide,andSave SEQonpage 847oftheParameterGuide. NotethatGM,XG,andGSexclusivemessagesdo notaffecttheKRONOSwhentheyareplayedback.

OASYS Song Format


TheKRONOSsequencercanloadandplaytheOASYS songformat,withthefollowingcaveats: TheKRONOSpreloadedProgramsarenotthe sameasthoseoftheOASYS.PleaseloadthePCG filesavedwiththeSong. TheresolutionoftheKRONOSsequencerishigher thanthatoftheOASYS(480ppqvs.192ppq). Playbacktimingmaybesubtlydifferent. Audiodirectorynamesmustbeeditedslightly. OASYSfileswerelimitedto8characters,andsothe nameoftheaudiofiledirectorywastypically abbreviated.Forinstance,ifthe.SNGfilewas namedWAMOZART.SNG,theOASYSaudio folderwouldbenamedWAMOZA_A. TheKRONOSsupportslongfilenames,andexpects toseetheentire.SNGnameintheaudiofolder name.BeforeyouloadanOASYS.SNGfile,editthe nameoftheaudiodirectorysothatitmatchesthe KRONOSstandard:thesamenameasthe.SNGfile, followedby_A(forAudio).Inthecaseabove, youdrenameWAMOZA_Ato WAMOZART_A.

KRONOS Song format


ThisisthenativeKRONOSsequencerformat,whichis requiredtoensurethatallKRONOSspecificdatais savedcorrectly.

Standard MIDI Files


YoucanalsoloadandsaveStandardMIDIFiles(SMF), forcompatibilitywithothersequencers.Notethat someKRONOSspecificdatamaynotbemaintained wheninSMFfiles.

GM, XG, and GS System Exclusive Data


TheKRONOSsequencercanrecordSystemExclusive messages,includingXGorGSdata.Formore information,seeSystemExclusiveeventssupported in Sequencer modeonpage 661oftheParameter Guide.

The Compare function


Whenyouperformrealtimerecording,steprecording, ortrackediting,thisfunctionallowsyoutomake beforeandaftercomparisons. IfyoucontinueeditingwhentheCOMPAREswitchis lit,thekeywillgodark.Thisnowbecomesthemusical datathatwillbeselectedwhentheCOMPAREswitch isdark.Anypreviousunsavededitswillbelost. Allcommandsexceptforthepagemenucommands MemoryStatusandFF/REWSpeedoftheP5: Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage. SongEdit P0P3andP7P9pages:Pagemenucommands DeleteSongandCopyFromSong

Operations for which Compare is available


Ingeneral,MIDItrack,audiotrackandpatternevent datacannotbereturnedtoitsoriginalstate. Comparingsongparametersispossibleonlyduring songediting(whenexecutingapagemenucommand). RecordingtoaMIDItrack Recordingtoaaudiotrack TrackEdit Allcommandsexceptforthepagemenucommands MemoryStatus,FF/REWSpeedandSet LocationoftheP4:TrackEditTrackEditpage. Recordingtoapattern PatternEdit

Comparing after sampling


TheConverttoProgramandConverttoSeqEvent optionsintheSelectSampleNo.dialogaffecttheway thatCompareworkswithsamplinginSequencer mode.Ifbothareenabled,Compareaffectssequencer eventsandreturnsMultisamplesandSamplestothe statepriortosampling;unwantedsampleswillnot remain.IfonlyConverttoSeqEventisenabled, Compareaffectsonlysequencerevents.Ifneitherare enabled,Comparehasnoeffectonthesampling process. Formoreinformation,seeSelectSampleNo.on page 628oftheParameterGuide. TheProgramwillnotbeaffectedbytheCompare, andwillnotreturntoitspriorstate.

111

Creating songs (Sequencer mode)

WAVEfilesarenotdeletedwhenyoucompareedits toaudiotracks.TodeleteaWAVEfileyounolonger need,usethemenucommandDeleteUnusedWAV Files,asdescribedonpage 852oftheParameter Guide.

Operations for which Compare is not available


Editingsongparameters Pagemenucommandsotherthanthoselisted underOperationsforwhichCompareis available,above.

Memory Protect
Beforeyourecordatrackorpattern,oreditthemusical data,youwillneedtoturnoffthememoryprotect settinginGlobalmode.Formoreinformation,see Memoryprotectonpage 185.

About MIDI
Track status
Youcanspecifywhethereachtrackwillusethe internalKRONOSsounds,oruseanexternalMIDI tonegenerator. WhentheTrackStatus(P2MIDIpage)issettoINTor BTH,operatingKRONOSskeyboardandcontrollers willsoundandcontrolKRONOSsowntonegenerator. WhenStatusissettoEXT,EX2orBTH,operating KRONOSskeyboardandcontrollerswillsoundand controltheexternaltonegenerator.(TheMIDIchannel oftheexternaltonegeneratormustmatchtheMIDI ChannelofthetrackthatissettoEXT,EX2orBTH.)

IfyouwishtousetheSequencermodeofthe instrumentasa16trackmultitimbraltonegenerator, selectINTorBTH.Formoreinformation,seeStatus onpage 564oftheParameterGuide.

Synchronizing the sequencer with an external MIDI device


Therecord/playbacktempoofKRONOSssequencer canbesynchronizedtoanexternalMIDIdevicesuch asasequencerorrhythmmachine.Formore information,seeSynchronizingtheplaybackof KARMAorsequenceronpage 1138oftheParameter Guide.

112

Set Lists
Set List Overview
SetListsmakeitsimpletoplayandorganizeanyofthe soundsloadedintotheKRONOS,withoutregardfor whatbanktheyrestoredinorwhethertheyre Programs,Combinations,orevenSongs. Largeonscreenbuttonsmakesoundselectionfastand foolproof,andtheProgramUporDownfootswitch assignmentscanbeusedforhandsfreesound changes.Cut,copy,paste,andinserttoolsmakere orderingasnap. SmoothSoundTransitions(SST)lettheprevioussound anditseffectsringoutnaturally,makingiteasyto changesoundsduringaliveperformance.SSTisactive inalloftheKRONOSmodes,butSetListsgiveyou greatercontroloverthetransitions.Youcanfinetune theringouttimeforeachsound,sothat(forinstance) onesoundfadesoutveryquickly,whileanother soundsdelayscontinuetorepeatfortenortwenty seconds. Longcomments(upto512characters)letyoustore lyricsorperformancenoteswiththesound. SetListsaregreatforliveperformance,buttheyrealso handyfororganizingsoundsingeneral.Forexample, youcancreateaSetListwithallofyourfavoriteString sounds,includingbothProgramsandCombinations.

Set Lists and Slots


ASetListhas128Slots,eachofwhichcanbeassigned toanyProgram,Combination,orSong.16Slotsare shownatonce,aslargeonscreenbuttons.Youcan have128SetListsinmemoryatonce.Onewayof thinkingaboutthisisthataSetListisabankofSlots.

113

Set Lists

Selecting and playing sounds


SetListPlaypage

Set List Name Slot Name Slot Comments

Selected Slot

Previous button

Next button

Selecting Set Lists


ThelargenameintheSetListdisplayisthenameof thecurrentSlot,sothatyoucaneasilyseethesound thatyoureplaying.TheSetListnameisinsmallertext atthetoplefthandcornerofthescreen. TheVALUEsliderisreservedformodulation,and sendsCC#18whentheSlotcontainsaProgramor Combination. OnceyouveselectedaSetList,youcanselectSlots withinthelist.Formoreinformation,seeSelecting Slots,below.

Selecting with the front-panel buttons


YoucanselectSetListsusingthefrontpanelbuttons, withouttouchingthescreen.Todoso: 1. PresstheSETLISTbuttontoenterSetListmode. 2. PressthePlaytabtogototheSetListP0:Play page. ThemainPlaypageshowsthe16Slotbuttons,the commentsforthecurrentSlot,andanoverviewofthe EQ. 3. TouchtheSetListnametoselectit. TheSetListnamewillbecomehighlighted. 4. UsetheVALUEcontrollerstoselectthedesiredSet List. Youcandoanyofthefollowing: TurntheValuedial. PresstheInc orDec buttons. Usethenumerickeypad[0][9]tospecifythe number,andpresstheENTERkey.

Selecting via the touch-screen


YoucanselectSetListsfromanonscreenlist,aswell. 1. PresstheSetListpopupbutton(totheleftofthe SetListname). TheSetListSelectdialogappears. 2. PressoneofthenamesinthelisttoselectaSet List. TheselectedSetListwillbehighlighted,andthe keyboardwillimmediatelyswitchtothefirstSlotin theSetList. 3. Ifyoulike,playafewnotestohearthesoundof thefirstSlotintheSetList. 4. WhenyouaresatisfiedwiththeselectedSetList, presstheOKbuttontoclosethepopupmenu. Alternately,youcanpresstheCancelbuttontoreturn tothepreviouslyselectedSetList.

114

Selecting and playing sounds Selecting Slots

Selecting Slots
Selecting within the current group of 16
Toselectoneofthe16Slotsshownonthedisplay: 1. Pressthedesiredbutton. Thebuttonbecomeshighlighted,andthelargeSlot number/nameatthetopofthescreenareupdated accordingly. Alsonoticethatthecommentsarea,abovetheSlot buttons,updatestoshowthecontentsfortheselected Slot.

Selecting with Inc/Dec


1. Touchoneofthe16onscreenSlotbuttons. OnceaSlotisselected,youcanusetheIncandDec buttonstostepthroughthelistofsounds. Ifyoureonthe16thSlotonthecurrentpage,pressing IncwilladvanceyoutothefirstSlotofthenextgroup of16.

Program Up/Down footswitch


TheProgramUp(orProgramDown)footswitch alwaysstepsthroughthelist,regardlessofwhetheror notoneofthebuttonshastheUIfocus. TheassignablefootswitchcanbeassignedtoProgram UporProgramDownontheGlobalmodeControllers page.

Selecting outside the current group of 16


ToselectanewSlotwhichisnotwithinthecurrent groupof16: 1. Usethenextandpreviousarrowbuttonsatthe bottomofthescreentobrowsethroughthegroups of16. Thelabelsfornext/previouswillvarydependingon thecurrentgroupof16;forinstance,ifthecurrent groupis015,thebuttonswillshow112127and1631, respectively. Asyoubrowse,thecurrentselectiondoesnotchange untilyouactuallypressoneofthe16buttons. 2. Whenthedesiredgroupof16isdisplayed,press thebuttonforthedesiredSlot. Thebuttonbecomeshighlighted,andthecomments andlargeSlotnumber/nameatthetopofthescreenare updatedaccordingly.

Wrapping between Set Lists


Inc/DecandProgramUp/DownwrapbetweenSet Lists.Forinstance: 1. SelectSlot127inSetList5. 2. PressInc,ortheProgramUpfootswitch. Slot0ofSetList6isselected. NotethatwhenchangingtoadifferentSetList,any editstotheSetListwillbelost.

Selecting Slots and Set Lists via MIDI


MIDI In
ProgramChangemessagesontheGlobalChannel selecttheSlot,andBankSelectmessagesontheGlobal ChannelselecttheSetList.

Selecting using data entry controls


Inadditiontousingthetouchscreenbuttons,youcan selectSetListandSlotsusingthestandarddataentry controls,includingthenumerickeypad,rotary encoder,andInc/Dec. TheVALUEsliderisreservedformodulation,and sendsCC#18whentheSlotcontainsaProgramor Combination.

MIDI Out
SelectingaSlotsendsProgramChangeandBankSelect messages,asabove. Whenselected,CombinationsandSongscantransmit otherProgramChangeandBankSelectmessageson otherchannels,astheydoinCombinationand Sequencermodes.

Returning to the current group of 16 Slots


Ifyouhavenavigatedawayfromthecurrentgroupof 16,youcanreturneasily: 1a.Touchthenameofthecurrentitem,atthetopof thescreen(e.g.SGX1/PRGIA000KRONOS GermanGrand). Thedisplaychangestoshowthegroupof16 containingthecurrentselection.

Global P0 Bank Map


TheGlobalP0BankMap(Korg,GM(2))parameter doesnotaffectthereceptionortransmissionofSetList ProgramandBankSelectmessages.

Stepping through Slots in order


InadditiontoselectingSlotsviatheonscreenbuttons, youcanuseInc/Decorafootswitchassignedto ProgramUporProgramDowntostepthroughthe Slotsinorder,onebyone.

115

Set Lists

Editing Set Lists


SetListEditpage
Bank & Number Select

Set List Name Slot Name Sound Type Category Select or Keyboard Track

Selected Slot

Previous button

Overview
ForeachSlot,youcan: AssignanyProgram,Combination,orSong NametheSlot

Enteratextcomment(suchaslyricsorperformance notes),whichisshownwhentheSlotisselectedon themainscreen Setthevolume,holdtime,andkeyboardtrack(for Songs). YoucanalsoeasilyrearrangetheSlotsusingtheCut, Copy,Paste,andInsertbuttons.

Selecting and re-arranging sounds


Choosing a sound for a Slot
1. GototheSetListEditpage. 2. SelecttheSlotthatyoudliketoedit. Noticetheparameterswhichappearabovethe16Slot buttons.TheseletyousetupthecurrentSlot. 3. Atthetopleftoftheparameterbox,selectthe desiredType:Program,Combination,orSong. EachSlotcanplayeitheraProgram,aCombination,or aSong.WhenyouchangetheType,theBank& NumberandCategoryorTrackparameterswill updateaccordingly. CategoryappearsforProgramsandCombinations; KeyboardTrackappearsforSongs. 4. UsingeithertheBank&NumberorCategory popupmenus,selectthedesiredProgram, Combination,orSong. Formoreinformation,seeSelectingbybankand numberonpage 28,SelectingbyCategoryon page 29,andSongSelectonpage 515. NotethatyoucanusethesamesoundinmultipleSlots withinthesameSetList.Forinstance,youmighthave afavoritepianosoundwhichyouuseinanumberof differentsongs.YoucancreateanynumberofSlots whichusethissamepianosound,eachwithdifferent namesandcomments

Setting the MIDI Track for Songs


WithSongs,youcanassignthelocalkeyboardtoplay anyofthe16MIDITracks.Ifyoulike,youcanhavethe sameSonginmultipleSlots,eachwithadifferent

116

Editing Set Lists Detailed Set List editing

Track.YoucanthenswitchbetweentheSlots,changing thesoundassignedtothekeyboard,astheSong continuestoplay. ThisparameterappliestoSongsonly.IfthecurrentSlot isaProgramorCombination,itdoesnotappear.

1. SelecttheSlotyoudliketocopy. 2. PresstheCopybutton. 3. SelecttheSlotyoudliketoreplace. 4. PressthePastebutton. TheselectedSlotwillbereplacedbythecopiedSlot.

Adding items to the Set List from other modes


Program,Combination,andSequencermodeseach haveacommandintheirP0pagemenus:AddtoSet List. WhenyouusetheAddtosetlistcommand,the currentProgram,Combination,orSongisinsertedat thecurrentSlotofthecurrentSetList,similartousing theSetListEditpagesInsertcommand. TheparametersoftheSlotaresetasfollows: ThenameoftheProgram,Combination,orSongis copiedintotheSlotname.Youcanchangethislater ifdesired. Iftheitembeingcopiedisasong,thecurrent KeyboardTrackiscopiedintotheSlotsKeyboard Trackparameter.

Inserting a Slot in the middle of a Set List


YoucanalsoinsertacopiedSlotinthemiddleofaSet List,whileleavingtherestofthelistintact.Todothis: 1. SelecttheSlotyoudliketocopy. 2. PresstheCopybutton. 3. SelecttheSlottospecifytheinsertpoint. ThecopiedSlotwillbeplacedinfrontoftheselected Slot,andtherestoftheSetListwillmovetomake room. 4. PresstheInsertbutton.

Removing a Slot from a Set List


YoucanremoveaSlotfromthemiddleofaSetList, whileleavingtherestofthelistintact.Todoso: 1. SelecttheSlotyoudliketoremove. 2. PresstheCutbutton. ThisremovestheSlotfromthelist,andmovestherest ofthelisttofillinthenowemptyspace. Ifyoulike,youcanPasteorInserttheSlotthatwas removedviaCut,similartotheCopyoperations describedabove.

Re-arranging Slots
TheCut,Copy,Paste,andInsertbuttonsmakeit simpletorearrangetheSlots.

Copying a Slot to another location


TocopyoneSlottoanother(forinstance,ifyouhavea soundthatyoudliketouseinmultipleSlots):

Detailed Set List editing


Naming a Slot
YoucannameaSlotseparatelyfromthenameofthe Program,Combination,orSongitcontains.For instance,ifyourecreatingaSetListforagig,youcan nametheSlotsafterthesectionofmusicinwhich theyreused,suchasMontanaIntro.Todoso: 1. PresstheTbuttontobringupthetextedit dialog. 2. Enterthenameasdesired,andthenpressOK. Slotnamescanhaveupto24characters. SetListSlotVolume
Program, Combination, or Song Master Volume Universal Exclusive Master Volume (Fom Knobs, Pedals, MIDI, or Sequencer) Front Panel Analog Volume Knob

Set List Slot Volume

TFX 2 & EQ

Headphone & Main L/R Outputs

S/PDIF Output

Controlling Slot volume


YoucancontrolthevolumeseparatelyforeachSlot. Forinstance,youmightsetthevolumesofterforaSlot playinganaccompanimentpart,andlouderforaSlot withaleadsound.Todoso: 1. AdjusttheVolumeparameter. NotethatthestoredMasterVolumesettingoftheSlots Program,Combination,orSongstillappliesaswell. YoucaneditthisfromtheControlSurface,ifdesired. SeethegraphicbelowfordetailsonhowtheSetList volumeinteractswithothervolumecontrols.

Entering comments
EachSlotcanhaveacommentofupto512characters, forlyrics,performancenotes,andsoon.Todoso: 1. PresstheEditCommentbuttontobringupthetext editdialogbox. 2. Enterthecommentasdesired,andthenpressOK. Youcanreadtheentirecomment,evenwithmultiple lines,ontheSetListPlaypage.

117

Set Lists

Saving your edits


OnceyouvemadeaSetList,youllwanttosaveyour work.Todoso: 1. SelecttheWriteSetListcommandfromthepage menu,attheupperrighthandcornerofthescreen. Youcanalsocallupthismenucommandbyholding ENTERandpressing0onthenumerickeypad. Thisbringsupadialogboxwhichallowsyoutosave theSetList.Optionally,youcanalsoselectanew location,orchangetheSetListsname. 2. PresstheTbuttontobringupthetextedit dialog. YoucangivetheSetListadescriptivenameusingthe onscreenkeyboard. 3. Afterenteringthename,pressOK. Thetexteditwindowwilldisappear,returningyouto themainWritedialog. 4. UnderToatthebottomofthedialog,pressthe popupbuttonnexttoSetListtobringupthesave locationdialog. 5. SelectalocationtosavetheeditedSetList. 6. Afterselectingthelocation,pressOK. 7. PressOKagaintostartthewriteprocess. 8. Ifyouresureyouwanttowritetothislocation, pressOKagain. Afterthat,youredone! Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds afterwritingtheSetListdata.Thisallowsthe systemtimetocompletetheprocess,whichincludes savingabackupofthedatatotheinternaldisk.

Editing a Slots Program, Combination, or Song


Whenyoureinarehearsalorsoundcheck,youmay needtomakequickeditstoasoundintheSetList. Withthisinmind,youcan: JumptotheeditingpagesfortheselectedProgram, Combination,orSong Makethedesirededits Savetheedits ReturneasilytotheoriginalSetListpage Todoso: 1. SelectthedesireditemintheSetList. Next,fromanyoftheSetListpages: 2a.Inthemenu,selecttheEdit[Type]command. TheactualnameofthecommandwillbeeitherEdit Program,EditCombination,orEditSong,depending ontheselectedSlot. or: 2b.HoldthefrontpanelENTERbutton,andtouch theSlotsbutton. ThemodewillchangetoProgram,Combination,or Sequenceasappropriate,andthesystemwilldisplay theP0pagefortheselecteditem. TheProgram,Combination,orSequencemode buttonsLEDwillblink,andtheSetListLEDremains solidlyon,toshowthatyouareeditinganiteminaSet List.TheSetListsettings,includingEQandvolume, continuetoaffectthesound. 3. Editasdesired. 4. Writeyouredits. Formoreinformation,seeSavingyoureditson page 42(forPrograms),Savingyoureditsonpage 67 (forCombinations),orSavingyourSongon page 110. 5. PresstheSETLISTbuttontoreturntotheSetList. SetListmodewillbeasyouleftit,withthesameSet ListandSlotselected.

Set Lists and the Control Surface


Overview
TheControlSurfaceisthegroupofknobs,buttons,and sliderstotheleftofthedisplay.Youcanuseitfor handsoncontrolofmixing,KARMA,andexternal devices,aswellassynthmodulationandediting.Itsa prettydeepandpowerfulpartoftheKRONOS;foran indepthlookatsomeofwhatitcando,seeQuick editsusingtheknobs,sliders, and switcheson page 39. Inthispartofthemanual,welljustlookattheunique waysthattheControlSurfaceworksinSetListmode. Ingeneral,theControlSurfaceworksverysimilarlyfor Program,Combination,andSongs.However,thereare somesmalldifferencesbetweenthem,matchingtheir differentcapabilities.Forinstance,Programshave threemixerchannels(forthetwooscillatorsorEXi, plusDrumTrack),whileCombinationsandSongs havesixteenchannels.TheSetListsControlSurface pagewillchangetomatchthecurrentSlottype. FormoreinformationonhowtheControlSurface worksinthedifferentmodes,see: Programs:ControlSurfaceknobs,sliders,&switches onpage 33,andQuickeditsusingtheknobs, sliders, and switchesonpage 39 Combinations:Adjustingthemixonpage 60,Easy KARMAeditingonpage 61,andEditingPrograms withToneAdjustonpage 66 Songs(Sequencermode):Thecontrolsurfacein Sequencermodeonpage 74

118

Editing Set Lists Set Lists and the Control Surface

Most Control Surface edits not stored in the Set List


Important:OnlytheGraphicEQsettingsarestored withtheSetList.AllotherControlSurfaceeditsarenot storedwiththeSetList.Instead,theymustbestored withtheoriginalProgram,Combination,orSong.For moredetails,seeSavingControlSurfaceedits, below.

Allbandsarepeaking,includingthehighandlow bands. ThereisasinglegraphicEQsettingforeachSetList, whichappliestoallSlotsinthelist.

Using the Control Surface with the Graphic EQ


ThelastbuttonintheControlAssignsection,TONE ADJ,hasanadditionaloptioninSetListmode; pressingthebuttontogglestheControlSurface betweenToneAdjustandEQ. SimilartotheTimbre/TrackandAudiobuttons,the settingisindicatedbyLEDstotherightofthebutton. TosettheControlSurfacetocontroltheGraphicEQ: 1. PresstheTONEADJ/EQbuttonuntiltheEQ buttonislit. IfyoupressanotherControlAssignbutton,andthen pressTONEADJ/EQagain,theControlSurfacereturns tothefunctionlastselectedforthebutton.For instance,ifyoulastuseditforEQ,thenEQwillbe selected. Asashortcut,youcanalsotouchtheEQgraphiconthe SetListPlaypage.ThiswilljumptotheControl Surfacepage,andsetControlAssigntoEQ.

Saving Control Surface edits


AnychangesthatyoumakeviatheControlSurface editingmixerlevels,forinstance,ortweakingthereal timeknobsaretemporaryunlesstheyaresaved,just astheyareintheothermodes. However,ifyoumakechangesthatyoudliketokeep, youcansaveyoureditstoProgramsorCombinations directlyfromSetListmode.Todoso: 1. MakeyoureditsusingtheControlSurface. 2. Inthepagemenu,selectthecommandUpdate ProgramorUpdateCombination. Theactualnamewilldependonwhetherthecurrent SlotisaProgramorCombination. Songsworkslightlydifferently,sincetheydonthavea Writecommand(andmustbesavedtodisk).Alledits madeinSetListmodeapplydirectlytotheSongsin memory,andcanbesavedtodiskasdesired.

Reset Controls
WhenontheEQpage,RESETCONTROLS+TONE ADJ/EQresetsallEQparameters,includingBypass,to thevaluesstoredintheSetList. RESETCONTROLS+Sliderresetstheslidersbandto thestoredvalue.

Using the Control Assign From setting


TheControlAssignsettingdeterminesthefunctions assignedtotheControlSurface,suchasthemixer, ToneAdjust,KARMAandRealTimeKnobs,andso on. ControlAssignFromsetswhethertheControlAssign appliestotheSetListasawhole,andstaysthesame regardlessofwhichSlotisselected,orinsteadchanges accordingtothesavedvaluefortheProgram, Combination,orSonginthecurrentSlot. Forinstance,youmaywishtohavetheControlSurface stayassignedtotheSetListEQallthetime.Inthis case,setControlAssignFromtoSetList. Or,youmaywishtohavetheControlSurfaceupdate tomatchthecurrentProgram,Combination,orSong. Forinstance,youmightwanttouseToneAdjustfor drawbarsonanorganProgram,andthenonthenext SlotusethesliderstocontrolKARMAina Combination.Inthatcase,setControlAssignFromto Slot.

Graphic EQ
SetListshaveanadditionalControlSurfaceoption,not availableintheothermodes:EQ.Thisisanineband graphicEQappliedtothesoundafterTFX2,which tailorsthesoundfromthemainstereooutputs (includingtheanalogL/Routputs,S/PDIF,andUSB). YoucanusethisEQtocompensatefortheacoustic environmentofaspecificcluborotherperformance venue.Theslidersaremappedtotheninebandsofthe EQ,forquickandintuitiveadjustments.

119

Set Lists

Smooth Sound Transitions Overview


SmoothSoundTransitions(SST)helptoavoidjarring discontinuitieswhenchangingbetweenPrograms, Combinations,andSongs,byallowingtheprevious soundanditseffectstoringoutnaturallyasyouplay thenewlyselectedsound.Youcanevencontinueto holdnotesontheoldsound(onthekeyboardorwith thesustainpedal)asyouplaythenewsound. SSTappliestoallmodesnotjusttheSetList.For instance,notesandeffectsaresustainedwhen changingfromoneCombinationtoanotherin Combinationmode,orfromaProgram(inProgram mode)toaCombination(inCombinationmode). ThereareonlytwoparametersthatrelatetoSST:the GlobalHoldTime,andtheHoldTimeforeachSlotin aSetList.Underthehood,though,theresalotgoing on.Welltalkaboutsomeofthisindetailbelow,butif youreinahurry,herearethemainthingsthatyou needtoknow: SSTworksbetweentwosoundsatatime:the currentsoundandtheprevioussound.Ifyouselect anewsoundwhiletwooldersoundsarestill overlapping,theoldestsoundstops. SSTrequiresthattheeffectsforboththeoldand newsoundsfitintotheavailableprocessingpower. Forfactorysounds,thisshouldalmostneverbea problem.Intheunlikelyeventthattheeffectsdont fit,theoldersoundwillbesilenced,includingallof itsnotesandeffects. TheHoldTimeparameterscontrolhowlongthe oldsoundringsoutafterallofitsnoteshavebeen released. KARMAandtheDrumTrackstopwhenyou changesounds.Theirnoteswillcontinuetoring outnaturally.

Using Smooth Sound Transitions


Using Hold Time
TheKRONOShastwoHoldTimeparameters.As notedabove,thesecontrolhowlongtheoldsound ringsoutafterallofitsnoteshavebeenreleased. OneoftheseparametersisontheGlobalBasicpage, anditcontrolstheholdtimeforeverythingoutsideof theSetList,includingProgram,Combination,and Sequencermodes.Theother,intheSetListSlot parameters,controlstheholdtimeforeachindividual Slot.Letslookathowthisoneworks. 1. GototheSetListEditpage. 2. SelectSetList127. Thishasbeenleftinitializedforyourownuse. 3. SelectSlot1,andsetitsProgramtoUE075 CX3/MS20LeadSplit. Thissoundhasalongdelayontheleadsound,which willhelptodemonstratetheeffectofHoldTime. 4. SetSlot1sHoldTimeto10seconds. 5. WithSlot1stillselected,presstheCopybutton. 6. SelectSlot3. WellleaveSlot2settothedefaultpianosound. 7. PressthePastebutton. Slot3becomesacopyofSlot1,withthesameProgram setting. 8. SetSlot3sHoldTimeto0seconds. 9. Playabriefphraseontheleadsynthsoundonthe righthandsideofthekeyboard,andthenpauseto listen. Noticehowthedelayrepeatsforalongtime,asthe soundgraduallyfadesaway.HoldTimedoesntaffect thesoundaslongasyoustayonthesameSlot. 10.Playthephraseagain,andthistimeimmediately switchtoSlot2. Thistime,thesounddisappearsveryquickly.The HoldTimecomesintoplaywhenyouchangebetween differentsounds.NotethatitstheoldSlotsHoldTime (Slot3inthiscase)thatdeterminesthespeedofthe fade. Also,noticethateventhoughHoldTimeissetto0 seconds,itsstillasmoothfade;aftertheHoldTime haselapsed,theresalwaysahalfsecondorsofadeto silence. 11.SelectSlot1. Remember,thisSlotsHoldTimeissetto10seconds. 12.Playthephraseagain,andimmediatelyswitchto Slot2. Noticehowthedelayrepeatsforalongtime. 13.PlaysomethingbrieflyonSlot2spianosound, andthenpausetolisten. NoticehowthedelayfromSlot1isstillfadingout, alongsidethepianosound. So,whywouldyouwanttochangethisinthefirst place?Eventhoughthedefaultof5secondsworkswell tosmoothtransitionsingeneral,theremaybetimesin liveperformancewhenyoudeitherliketheeffectsand decayingnotestoringoutforalongtime,orfadeaway immediately.TheperSlotHoldTimegivesyouthis control.

Hold Time starts after notes are released


TheHoldTimestartsonlyafteryoureleaseanynotes beingplayedontheoldsound.Continuingfromthe exampleabove: 1. SelectSlot3.

120

Smooth Sound Transitions Using Smooth Sound Transitions

2. Playandholdanoteontheleadsynthsoundon therighthandsideofthekeyboard. 3. Whileholdingthenote,switchtoSlot2. Noticehowthenotecontinuestoplay. 4. Afterholdingthenoteforawhile,releasethenote. Afteryoureleasethenote,theHoldTimestarts,and thesoundfadesawayquickly.

Limitations
Whenyouselectanewsound,theprevioussounds KARMAandDrumTrackpatternsstop.Anynotes beingplayedbytheDrumTrackorKARMA (includingthosegeneratedbyKARMAsThruInand ThruOutZones)arereleased,andthendecay normally. Similarly,thePolysixEXarpeggiatorstopsplayingon soundchange. WheneditingEXiPrograms,changingtheEXimodel ofthecurrentProgramwillsilenceanyvoicesfromthe previoussound.Notethatthishappensonlywhen actuallyeditingtheProgram,andnotsimplywhen changingfromoneProgramtoanother. Resourcelimitationsmaypreventtheprevioussound fromringingoutuntilsilence.Forinstance: Notesmaybestolen. Ifthereisnotenoughprocessingpowerfortheold andneweffectsrackstocoexist,boththeoldeffects rackandalloldvoiceswillbesilenced.

Global Hold Time


TheGlobalHoldTimeparameterisontheGlobal Basicpage.Asmentionedabove,itcontrolsthehold timeforeverythingoutsideoftheSetList,including Program,Combination,andSequencermodes.The defaultsettingis5seconds,whichshouldworkwellin mostcases,butyoucanchangeitifyoulike.

Stopping sustaining or held notes


Sometimes,youmaywanttostopsoundingvoices immediatelyforinstance,ifasoundissettohold indefinitely.Todoso: 1. Selectadifferentsound,includinganyProgram, Combination,Song,orSetListSlot. 2. Selectadifferentsoundagain. Forinstance,withinaSetListwithSlot1selected, selectSlot2andthenreturntoSlot1.Or,onProgram A000,pressthefrontpanelCOMBIbutton(which selectsaCombination)andthenpressthefrontpanel PROGbutton(toreselectthepreviousProgram).At thesecondchange,allnotesheldfromtheoriginal soundwillbestolen.

Other details
Controllers
Mostcontrollers(Joystick+/Y,Aftertouch,realtime knobs,etc.)affectonlythenewsound,andnottheold. Sustain,Sostenuto,JoystickX(pitchbend),andNote Gatecontinuetoaffecttheoldsound,aswellasthe new.YoucanusetheCombinationandSongMIDI FiltersforadditionalcontrolovertheseMIDI messages,ifdesired.

Effects
Internally,theKRONOShastwoseparatesetsof effects,liketworacksofeffects.Oneoftheseracksis usedbythecurrentsound;theotherisusedbythe previoussound.Thisallowsthetwosetsofeffectsto worksimultaneously;forinstance,theprevious soundsdelayscancontinuetoringoutwhileyoure playingthenewsound. Thereareonlytwooftheseeffectsracks,however. Everytimethatyouselectanewsound,theolderof thetwoeffectsracksissilencedandreconfiguredfor thenewsound. Also,itspossibleforthecombinedrequirementsofthe twoeffectsrackstoexceedtheavailableprocessing power.Ifthishappens,theoldeffectsrackissilenced immediately. Note:Whentheoldeffectsrackissilenced,allofthe noteswhichwereplayingthroughitaresilencedas well.

121

Set Lists

122

Sampling (Open Sampling System)


Sampling overview About sampling on the KRONOS
Overview
TheKRONOScansampleexternalaudiofromthe analog,S/P DIF,orUSBinputs,at48 kHz16bit resolution(or24bitwhensamplingtodisk),inmono orstereo.YoucanrecordsamplesintoRAM,orsample directlytodisk. Youcanalsodigitallyresamplethecompletesoundof aProgram,Combi,orSong,playedliveorsequenced, includinganyeffectsandKARMAgeneratedevents. UsinganexternalUSBCDdrive(notincluded),you canalsosample(orrip)directlyfromanaudioCD, inthedigitaldomain. Finally,youcanprocesstheinputsthroughtheIFX, MFX,andTFX,orthroughthesynthesisfunctionsof EXisuchastheMS20EXandMOD7. Youcancombineanyandallofthesefeaturesatonce. Forinstance,youcansamplealiveguitarrifffromthe audioinputs,processedthroughKRONOSeffects, whilelisteningtoandeitherrecordingornotrecording aKARMAgeneratedphrase. YoucanuseyoursamplesdirectlyinDrumKits,or makethemintoMultisamplesandusethemanywhere thatyouuseROMMultisamples,suchasinHD1 ProgramsorWaveSequences. Note:TochecktheamountofsampleRAMavailable, see01f:FreeSampleMemory/Locationson page 684oftheParameterGuide. Theamountofsamplingtimedependsontheamount offreeRAM,asshownbelow. FreeRAMandapproximatesamplingtimes Free RAM
16 MB 64 MB 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB

Approximate Sampling Time (min:sec) Mono


2:54 11:39 23:18 46:36 93:12

Stereo
1:27 5:49 11:39 23:18 46:36

Installing additional RAM


Anadditional1GBDIMMcanbeinstalledintothe KRONOSatanyauthorizedKorgservicecenter, bringingthetotalphysicalRAMto3GB.(The KRONOSXshipsfromthefactorywith3GBalready installed,andcannotbeexpandedfurther.) Thisapproximatelydoublesthemaximumavailable sampleRAM,uptoabout2GB.Ofcourse,when loadingEXsorUserSampleBanksusingVirtual Memory,thetotalsizeoftheloadedsampledatacanbe muchgreater. TheKRONOSuseswidelyavailable,offtheshelf DIMMs.InstallationbyanauthorizedKorgservice centerisrequired;userinstallationisnotsupported andmayvoidyourwarranty.Formoreinformationon howtopurchaseandarrangeforinstallationofRAM, pleasecontactyourcountrysKorgDistributor: http://www.korg.co.jp/English/Distributors/index.html ForcompatibilitywiththeKRONOS,RAMmust complywiththefollowingspecification: 240PinPC26400CL5(orCL6)DDR2800nonECC UnbufferedDIMM1GB

KSC Files and User Sample Banks


KSCstandsforKorgSampleCollection.KSCfiles groupyourSamplesandMultisamplestogether,and letyouloadthemasUserSampleBanks.UserSample BanksmaybeloadedeitherintoRAM,ormayuse VirtualMemory,justlikeEXs.Theyhaveotherbenefits aswell.Formoreinformation,seeCreatingand saving.KSCfilesonpage 165.

Sampling and RAM


TheKRONOScomeswith2GBofRAMpreinstalled; theKRONOSXcomeswith3GBofRAM. Approximately1GBofthisRAMisusedbythe operatingsystemandROMsampledata.The remainderissharedbetweenthesamplesinEXs,User SampleBanks,andSamplingMode. ThismeansthatthesizeofthecurrentlyloadedEXs andUserSampleBankstradesoffagainstthememory availableforSamplingMode.Themorespaceusedby EXsandUserSampleBanks,thelessisavailablefor SamplingMode. UsingVirtualMemoryforEXsandUserSampleBanks generallyletsyouloadmoresamplesatonce,butmay stilluseasubstantialamountofRAM.

Sampling to disk
Youcansampledirectlytodisk(includingtheinternal diskandUSBstoragedevices),creatingaWAVEfile. Thisletsyourecordupto80minutescontinuously,in eithermonoorstereo(mono:approximately440MB, stereo:approximately879 MB). AslongastheyfitintotheavailableRAM,theseWAVE filescanthenbeloadedintoSamplingModeandused inDrumKits,HD1ProgramsorWaveSequences. (NotethatafterloadingthemintoSamplingMode, youllneedtosavethemagain;theWAVEfilescantbe useddirectlyforPrograms,etc.)

123

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

WAVEfilescanalsobeusedinaudiotracksofthe sequencer,orusedtocreateanaudioCD.Formore information,seeAudiorecordingonpage 89,and CreatingandplayingaudioCDsonpage 195. Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds aftersamplingtodisk.Thisallowsthesystemtime tocompletetheprocess.

Thehigherthesamplingfrequency,theclosertothe originalanalogsignalthewaveforminmemorywill be. Eachlevelisreadandconvertedintodigitaldata.The accuracyofthelevelmeasurementisdeterminedby thebitresolution.Thisprocessconvertsananalog signalwithinfiniteresolutionintoadigitalsignalwith finiteresolution.With16bitresolution,eachlevelis indicatedin65,536steps(thesixteenthpoweroftwo). Thegreaterthebitresolution,theclosertotheoriginal analogsignalthewaveforminmemorywillbe. 48kHz16bitsamplingisthesamequalityasinaudio devicessuchasDATs.CDsuse44.1kHz16bit sampling,whichisaslightlylowersampling frequency.
Level

24-bit sampling to disk


Whensamplingtodisk,youcanchooseeither16bitor 24bitresolution.Both16and24bitWAVEfilescanbe useddirectlyinSequencermodeaudiotracks.When loadedasRAMsamples,24bitWAVEfilesare automaticallyconvertedto16bitresolution.

Sampling in Sampling mode


InSamplingmode,youcansampleanalogaudiofrom connectedmicrophonesorlineinputs,ordigitalaudio fromS/P DIForUSB.Ifyoulike,youcanalsosample throughtheKRONOSeffects. YoucanevensampledirectlyfromaudioCDsinan externalUSBCDR/RW. Samplescanbeprocessedthrougheffectsand internallysampledagain(resampled).Youcanuse eitherAutomodewhichautomaticallyappliesthe specifiedeffectprocessingtotheselectedsample,or Manualmodewhichletsyouplaythesample manuallywitheffectsappliedandresampleyour performance.

Analog waveform
Time

Level

48 kHz = 48,000 times every second = 0.0208 mS cycle 16 bit = 65,536 levels of data

Sampled digital waveform

Time

Program, Combination, Sequencer modes


InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,you canresampleacompleteliveperformanceincluding filters,effects,KARMA,andevensequencerplayback. Youcanalsosampleexternalaudiosources,mixthe KRONOSsoundswiththeexternalaudioandsample thecombinedresult,orevenmonitortheperformance oftheKRONOSwhilesamplingonlytheexternal source.

Samples and Multisamples


Samples
Thedatathatisrecorded(sampled)intointernal memoryorloadedfromafileisreferredtoasasample orsamplefile.Samplesconsistoftheactualwaveform data,andparametersthatspecifyhowthedatawillbe playedback,suchasStart,LoopStart,andEnd Address.Samplescanbeusedinmultisamplesand drumkits. SamplingModesupportsamaximumof16,000 Samplesatonce.SamplesinEXsandUserBanksdo notcounttowardsthismaximum. TheKRONOScanshareasinglewaveformamong multiplesamples.Thisallowsyoutocreatemultiple sampleswithdifferentplaybackaddressesfromthe samewaveformwithoutwastinginternalmemory.For example,supposethatyouhavewaveformdatathat recordsavoicesayingOneTwoThree.Thissingle pieceofwaveformdatacouldbesharedbythree samples,withtheplaybackofsampleAproducing OneTwoThree,sampleBproducingOneTwo, andsampleCproducingTwoThree. Formoreinformation,seeCopyonpage 735ofthe ParameterGuide.

In-Track Sampling in Sequencer mode


InSequencermode,youcansamplewhileplaying alongwithaSong,andautomaticallycreatenotedata totriggerthenewsamplesattheappropriatemoment intheSong.Youcanthenmanipulatethesesamples usingthesynthesisabilitiesoftheHD1,forcreative alternativestoHDR.ThisiscalledInTrack Sampling.

Sampling frequency and bit resolution


Asshowninthediagram,samplingreadsthelevelof theanalogsignalatfixedintervalsalongthetimeaxis, andstoresthelevelsinmemoryasdigitaldata. Thetimebetweentheseintervalsiscalledthe samplingfrequency.48kHz(kiloHertz)meansthat samplingisperformed48,000timeseachsecond,so thattheintervalsare1/48,000ofasecondapart approximately0.02083ms(milliseconds).

Multisamples
MultisampleslayoutoneormoreSamplesacrossthe keyboard.Forinstance,averysimpleguitar MultisamplemighthavesixSamplesoneforeach string.

124

Sampling overview About sampling on the KRONOS

EachSampleiscontainedinanIndex,whichincludes parametersforthekeyrange,originalSamplepitch, tuning,level,andsoon. Multisamplescaneachhaveupto128Indexes.

Multisample
Index001 Top Key Index002 Top Key Index003 Top Key Index004 Top Key

Using multisamples
Whensamplinganinstrumentthatisabletoproducea widerangeofpitches,suchasapiano,recordingjust onesampleandapplyingit(playingitback)overthe entirepitchrangewillnotproduceanaturalsounding result.Byusingamultisampleyoucanrecordseparate samplesforeachpitchrange,andassignthesesamples totheirrespectivepitchrangestoavoidanyunnatural soundsduringplayback. AlloftheinstrumentalsoundsintheKRONOSs internalpresetmultisamplesareconstructedinthis way.Forexample,youmightrecordonesampleper octave,andassigneachofthesesamplestoanindex coveringaoneoctaverangeonthekeyboard. Byassigningmultiplesamplessuchasphrasesamples orrhythmloopstodifferentindexeswithina Multisample,youcanplaymultiplesamples simultaneously.Youcanassigndifferentphrasesto eachkey.Alternatively,thesesamplescouldbe assignedatoneoctaveintervals,andplayedasphrase variationswithdifferentplaybackpitchesandtempos. SamplingModesupportsamaximumof4,000 Multisamplesatonce.MultisamplesinEXsandUser Banksdonotcounttowardsthismaximum. MultisamplesmaybeuseddirectlyinPrograms,or withinWaveSequences.Theycanbeusedwith KARMAtoproduceinterestingresults(forexample, byusingKARMAtoautomaticallyplaysoundeffects orspokensamples).
Index 001 Index 002 Index 003 Index 004

0000: Sample A

0001: Sample B

0002: Sample C

0003: Sample D

Multisample Wave Seq. Sample Drum Kit

Program OSC (Single/Double) Program OSC (Single/Double) Program OSC (Drums/Double Drums)

ConceptualdiagramoftheOpenSamplingSystem
Resampling Programs, Combinations and Songs AUDIO INPUTS Analog signal Analog/digital convertor Insert Effects (Master Effects)

RAM (memory): Digital/analog convertor


Sample 0000 ... 15999

ADC
Digital signal (Ripping)

Digital signal

DAC

Analog signal

AUDIO OUTPUTS

USB CD-R/RW Drive (Audio CD) Digital signal S/P DIF INPUT Digital signal USB Audio Digital signal Used by Combinations and Songs

Program
Multisample 0000 ... 3999 Disk

RAM (internal memory)


WAVE File

125

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

Preparations for sampling Audio Settings


Audio input settings
The Audio Input page
ThispageisavailableinProgram,Combination, Sequencer,andSamplingmodes,andletsyouadjust thevolume,pan,effectssends,andbussingforthe audioinputs,includinganaloginputs1&2,USB1&2, andS/P DIFL&R.OutsideofSamplingmode,thisis themainpageforsamplingrelatedsettings. PageswithAudioinputsettingsinclude: Mode
Sampling Combination Program Sequencer Global

Sampling can bypass the mixer entirely


Whensampling,youllusetheSourceBusparameter toselectthesourceoftheaudiotosample.Depending ontheselectedSourceBus,youmayormaynotneed tousetheAudioInputmixeratall. Forinstance,ifyouresamplingthroughtheKRONOS effects,youllneedtousetheAudioInputmixerto sendthedesiredaudioinputtotheeffects. However,ifyousimplywanttosampletheinput directly,youcanjustsettheSourceBustothedesired input,andyouredonewithnoneedtodoanysetup intheAudioInputmixer.

Page
P0: Recording Audio Input P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling P0: Play/REC Audio Input/Sampling P0: Basic Setup Audio

Audio Input mixer


Input 1 & 2, USB 1 & 2, S/P DIF L & R
Input1&2:Thesearetheanalogaudioinputs,for eithermicrophonesorlinelevelsignals.Formore information,seeAnalogAUDIOINPUTSonpage 8. USB1&2:ThesearetheUSBaudioinputs,for samplingfromaconnectedcomputer. S/P DIFL&R:Thesearetheinputsettingsfordigital inputfromaninstrumentorDATplayeretc.connected totheS/P DIFINjack.TheKRONOSsupportsS/P DIF inputandoutputat48kHz. WhenusingS/P DIF,makesurethattheSystem Clockissetcorrectly.Formoreinformation,see SystemClockonpage 756oftheParameter Guide.

Using the control surface with the Audio Inputs


Youcanusethecontrolsurfacetoadjustmostofthe AudioInputmixerparameters,includingPlay/Mute, Solo,Pan,Level,andSends1and2. Formoreinformation,andAdjustingvolume,Pan, EQ,andFXsendsonpage 39.

Global audio input settings


EachProgram,Combination,andSongcaneitheruse thesingle,Globalaudioinputmixersetup,orhaveits owncustomsettings.Samplingmode,ontheother hand,hasitsown,separatesettingsfortheaudio inputs. ForPrograms,Combinations,andSongs,thechoiceof whetherornottousetheGlobalsetupiscontrolledby theUseGlobalSettingparameter. WhenUseGlobalSettingisOn,theProgram, Combination,orSongusestheGlobalsettings.Thisis thedefault,andletsyouchangefreelybetween differentsoundswithoutaffectingtheaudioinputs. Also,anyeditsmadeonAudioInputpagewillaffect theGlobalsetting,alongwithanyotherPrograms, Combis,orSongswhichusetheGlobalsetting. Ontheotherhand,itmaysometimesbeconvenientto saveaparticularmixersetupwithanindividual Program,Combi,orSong,tosetupspecialsubmixer settingsoreffectsprocessingforparticularinputs.For example,youcansetupaProgramtouseamicinput withavocoder,asdescribedunderVocoder(Program mode)onpage 861. Inthiscase,setUseGlobalSettingtoOff,andthe audioinputswillusetheProgramscustomsettings.

Bus Select (IFX/Indiv.)


Thissetstheoutputbusfortheexternalaudioinput signal.Youcansendtheaudiodirectlytophysical outputs,ortotheinserteffects. L/R:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesenttothe L/Rbus.Choosethisifyouwanttosamplethe performanceoftheKRONOSitselfalongwiththe othersignalsoftheL/Rbus.SetSourceBustoL/R. IFX112:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesent totheIFX112bus.Chooseoneofthesesettingsifyou wanttoapplyaninserteffectwhilerecording.Setthe SourceBustomatchtheBusSelectthatfollowsthe inserteffect. 14:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto INDIVIDUAL14outputsinmono.Pandoesnot applyinthiscase. 1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto theselectedpairofoutputsinstereo,withthestereo positioncontrolledbythePanparameter.SetSource BustothecorrespondingIndiv.input. Off:Theexternalaudiosignalwillnotbesenttoabus. InSamplingmode,ifyouwanttosampleanexternal audiosignaldirectlywithoutroutingitthroughabus, gototheP0:RecordingAudioInputpage,andchoose theexternalinputyouwanttosample(AudioInput1 2,S/P DIFLR,USB12)astheSourceBus.

126

Preparations for sampling Audio Settings

PleasenotethatwhenyouchangeBusSelect (IFX/Indiv.)fromOfftoL/RorIFX,thevolumelevel totheAUDIOOUTL/MONOandRjacksortothe headphonesmaydramaticallyincrease.

Send1(toMFX1):Sendthesignaltomastereffect1. Send2(toMFX2):Sendthesignaltomastereffect2. IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)issettoIFX112,thesend levelstothemastereffectsaresetbythepostIFX112 Send1andSend2.

FX Ctrl Bus (FX Control Bus)


TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreateeffects sidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolaneffectwith oneaudiosignal(thesidechain),whiletheeffect processesacompletelydifferentaudiosignal.Thisis convenientforusewithvocoders,compressorsand limiters,gates,etc. KRONOSincludestwotruestereoFXControlBuses. Formoreinformation,seeFXControlBuseson page 860oftheParameterGuide.

PLAY/MUTE
Thisindicateswhethertheexternalaudiosignalbeing inputisinPLAYorMUTEstatus. YoucancontrolthisusingthefrontpanelMIX PLAY/MUTE16switches.

SOLO On/Off
ThisindicatestheSOLOstatusofeachexternalaudio signalinput.YoucanusetheMIXSELECT16 switchestochangethis. Soundwillbeoutputonlyfromchannelsforwhich SOLOisOn.Otherchannelswillbemuted.Thesolo functionincludestheoscillatorsofthetonegenerator.

REC Bus
ThissendstheexternalaudioinputsignaltotheREC buses(fourmonochannels;1,2,3,4). TheRECbusesarededicatedinternalbusesusedfor samplingorforrecordingaudiotracksinSequencer mode. Ifyouwanttosamplethesebuses,setSourceBustoa RECbus. InSamplingmode,youcanmixseveralaudioinputsto aRECbusforsampling,oryoucanmixthedirect soundofaudioinputswiththesoundprocessedby inserteffectsandsamplethecombinedresultfromthe RECbus. Inothermodes(e.g.,Programmode),youcanusethe RECbusestosamplejustanaudioinputthatsplaying alongwithaKARMAperformancebeingoutputtothe L/Rbus. Off:Theexternalaudiosignalwillnotbesenttothe RECbuses.Thisisthedefault. 1,2,3,4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentto thespecifiedRECbusinmono.ThePansettingis ignored. 1/2,3/4:Theexternalaudioinputsignalwillbesentin stereotothespecifiedpairofRECbuses.ThePan settingsendsthesignalinstereotobuses1and2or buses3and4.

Pan
Thisspecifiesthepanningoftheexternalaudioinput signal.Wheninputtingastereoaudiosource,youwill normallysettheinputstoL000andR127respectively.

Level
Specifiestheleveloftheexternalaudiosignalthatwill beinput.Normallyyouwillsetthisat127. Theaudiosignalsfromtheanaloginputsare convertedbyanA/Dconverterfromanalogto digitalsignals.Thisparametersetsthelevelofthe signalimmediatelyafterithasbeenconvertedinto digitalform.Ifthesoundisdistortedeventhough thislevelsettingisverylow,itispossiblethatthe soundisdistortingearlierthantheA/Dconverter. YoullneedtoadjusttheMIC/LINEgainselect switch,theLEVELknob,ortheoutputlevelofyour externalaudiosource. IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)isntOff,raisingtheLevel willbringtheexternalinputsignalintothe KRONOSaudiosystem.Anynoisefromtheinputs (evenifnoactualsignalispresent)maybeheardat theKRONOSoutputs.

Send1 (to MFX1), Send2 (to MFX2)


Theseadjustthelevelsatwhichtheexternalaudio inputsignalissenttothemastereffects.
Computer

Mic Guitar Effect unit

Digital recorder, effect, etc.

USB B LINE MIC

127

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

Topreventthis,ifyourenotusinganinput,turnits BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)off,orsetitsLevelto0.REC BusandFXControlBusshouldalsobeturnedoffif yourenotusingthem. ThesameistruefortheRECSourceparameter.If RECSourceissettoaninput,thatinputwillbe passedthroughdirectlytotheoutputsevenifthe inputsBusSelectisOff,oritsLevelis0. Finally,forthesamereason:ifyourenotusingthe analoginputs,turntherearpanelLEVELknobsto theminimum,andsettheMIC/LINEswitchesto LINE.

IfyouchooseREC1/2,RECbus1isinputtotheL channelandRECbus2isinputtotheRchannel.Ifyou chooseREC3/4,RECbus3isinputtotheLchanneland RECbus4isinputtotheRchannel. AudioInput1/2,S/P DIFL/R,USB1/2:Choosethese settingsifyouwanttodirectlysamplefromtheanalog, S/P DIF,orUSBinputs.Theinputwillbesampled directlywithoutbeingroutedthroughtheL/Rbus, RECbuses,orIndividualbuses.Theinputswillbe connecteddirectly,regardlessoftheAudioInput settingsforBusSelect(IFX/Indiv),Pan,andLevel. IfyouchooseAudioInput1/2,AUDIOINPUT1is inputtotheleftchannelandAUDIOINPUT2isinput totherightchannel. Indiv.1/2and3/4:TheIndiv.1/2Indiv.3/4buseswillbe sampled.Choosethesesettingsifyouwanttosample onlytheaudioinputswhilemonitoringtheL/R outputs,similarlytowhenusingtheRECbuses. IfyouchooseIndiv.1/2,Indiv.bus1isinputtotheL channelandIndiv.bus2isinputtotheRchannel. SimilarlyforIndiv.3/4,thebusesareinputtotheLand Rchannelsrespectively.

Setting the recording level


TheRecordingLevelLandRparametersadjuststhe signallevelatthefinalstageofsampling.Forthebest qualitysampling,setthelevelashighaspossible withoutallowingthelevelmetertoindicateCLIP! PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchtoenterrecord standbymode;thelevelmeterswillindicatethe recordinglevelofthesignalfromthebuslineyou selectedinSourceBus.Youcanusetheslidertoadjust thesignallevel.Startwiththesliderat0.00,andadjust thelevelashighaspossiblewithoutallowingthebar indicatortoexceed0dB. Thedefaultsettingis0.0dB.

Source Direct Solo


Ifthisisunchecked,theL/R(postTFX)signalandthe signalofthebuslinespecifiedforSourceBuswillbe outputfromtheL/Rjacksandtheheadphonejack accordingtotheAudioInputBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.) settingandthepostIFXBusSel.setting. Normallyyouwillleavethisunchecked,sothatSource BusandL/Rarebothheard.Checkthisifyouwant tomonitoronlythesoundthatsbeingrecorded.Only thesignalofthebuslineselectedforSourceBuswill beoutputfromtheL/Rjacksandtheheadphonejack. Note:IfSourceBusisL/R,thissettingisignored,and theL/R(postTFX)signalwillalwaysbeoutputfrom theL/Rjacksandheadphonejacks.

Specifying the recording method (Recording Setup)


Source Bus
TheSourceBusparameterscontrolswhataudiowillbe capturedduringsampling. L/R:TheL/RbusfollowingTFX1and2willbe sampled.TheaudiosignalssenttotheL/Rbusand soundsplayedontheKRONOSfromthekeyboardor viaMIDIINandsenttotheL/Rbuswillbesampled. NormallyyouwillusetheL/Rsetting.(Seethe diagrambelow) REC1/2,REC3/4:TheREC1/2orREC3/4buseswillbe sampled.UsetheRECbuseswhenyouwanttoplay thekeyboardorplaybackanaudioCDwhilesampling onlytheaudioinput.Youcanalsomixseveralaudio inputsourcestotheRECbuses,ormixthedirectsound ofanaudioinputwithsoundprocessedbyaninsert effectandmixthemtotheRECbusesforsampling.

Trigger
Thiscontrolshowsamplingwillbeinitiated. Thetriggersyoucanselectwilldifferdependingonthe mode. InProgramandCombinationmodes,youcanselect eitherSamplingSTARTSWorNoteOn. InSamplingmode,youcanselecteitheroftheabove, plusThreshold.

Source BUS = L/R

L/R BUS

REC REC 1/2 3/4

Indiv. 1/2 3/4

Master Effects Total Effects Insert Effects USB CD-R/RW Drive Audio Input Level Pan

CLIP !!

Sampling L-Mono R-Mono Stereo

Monitor L/MONO R AUDIO OUTPUT HEADPHONES

Insert Effects OSC BUS = L/R or IFX1-12

128

Preparations for sampling Audio Settings

Input Recording Level [dB]

Sampling Setup

Metronome Setup

InSequencermode,youcanselectanyoftheabove, plustheSequencerSTARTSW. Forthetriggermodethatsmostappropriateinvarious situations,refertothevariousexamplesofsampling laterinthischapter. SamplingSTARTSW:Whenyoupressthe SAMPLINGREC,youwillentersamplingstandby mode;samplingwillbeginwhenyoupressthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. NoteOn:PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthen presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter samplingstandbymode.Samplingwillbeginwhen youplaythekeyboard. Threshold:Samplingwillbeginautomaticallywhen theinputlevelexceedsthespecifiedLevelvalue. SequencerSTARTSW:PresstheSAMPLINGREC switchandthentheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch toentersamplingstandbymode.Thenpressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtobeginsampling. Usethiswhenyouwanttoresamplethesong playback. Tostopsampling,presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP switchonceagain.Samplingwillalsoendifyoukeep samplinguntilthetimespecifiedbySampleTime.

The Recording Setup page in each mode


Mode
Sampling

Page
Sampling P0 Recording

Combination Combination P0 Audio Input/Sampling Program Sequencer Program P0 Audio Input/Sampling Sequencer P0 Audio Input/Sampling

Samplingmode

Save to Mode Sample Time

Making settings for the sample to be recorded (REC Sample Setup/Sampling Setup)
Nextwewillspecifythelocationintowhichthedata willbesampled,selectmonoorstereosampling,and specifythesamplingtime. InSamplingmode,thesesettingsaremadeinREC SampleSetup.InCombination,Program,and Sequencermodes,thesesettingsaremadeinSampling Setup.Thesesettingsapplyonlyineachrespective mode.

Free Sample Memory / Free Number

129

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

Programmode

Mode
Specifiesthechannel(s)thatyouwanttosample,and specifywhetheramonoorstereosamplewillbe created. TheLandRchannelsofthebusspecifiedbySource Buswillbesampled. LMono:TheLchannelofthebusspecifiedbySource Buswillbesampledinmono. RMono:TheRchannelofthebusspecifiedbySource Buswillbesampledinmono. Stereo:TheLandRchannelsofthebusspecifiedby SourceBuswillbesampledinstereo.Thiswillcreatea stereomultisampleandsamples.

Sample Time
Save to Mode Sample Time

Specifiestheamountoftimethatyouwishtosample. Thiscanbesetin0.001secondincrements.Ifyou recordasampleinthiscondition ([REC][START][STOP]),thechangeintimewillbe displayedautomatically. IfSavetoissettoDisk,themaximumvalueis calculatedfromtheamountofremainingspaceonthe diskspecifiedbySelectDirectory/FileforSampleto Disk.Themaximumsampletimeis80minutes. Whensamplingtodisk,bitresolutionmayalsoaffect themaximumsamplingtime.24bitdatauses50% morespacethan16bitdata.

Save to
Specifiesthedestinationtowhichthedatawillbe writtenduringsampling. RAM:ThesamplewillbewrittentoRAMmemory. SampleswrittenintoRAMmemorycanbeheard immediatelyinSamplingmode. Disk:ThesoundwillberecordedtodiskasaWAVE file.Youcanselectadisk,directory,andfilenamefor therecordedfileusingtheSelectDirectory/Filefor SampletoDiskmenucommand.

Auto +12 dB On
Ingeneral,theRecordingLevelshouldbesetto0(dB). Formoreinformation,seeSettingtherecordinglevel onpage 128. Inordertomaintainheadroom,theKRONOS generallyplaysbacksamples12dBsofterthanthe originalvolume(if+12dBisoff).Thisisappropriate forsoundswhichwillbeplayedbackpolyphonically, suchassamplesofacousticinstruments. Fordrumloopsandsimilarmaterial,ontheother hand,youmaywishtoplaybackthedataatthesame levelatwhichitwassampled.Inthiscase,turnonthe +12dBparameter(SamplingP2LoopEditpage). IfyousamplewiththeAuto+12dBOnsetting checked,+12dBwillautomaticallybeturnedon,and therecordedsamplewillplaybackatthesamelevelat whichitwassampled.

Sample to Disk (Bit Depth)


Drive Select Done Open Up Play

UseDriveSelecttoselectthedesireddrive,whichcan beeitheraninternaldiskoraUSBstoragedevice. Then,usetheOpenorUpbuttonstomovetothe desiredfolderlevel,andusetheNameparameterat thetopofthewindowtospecifyanameforthesample file.PresstheDonebuttontoconfirmthesettings youvemade. Whilethisdialogisopen,youcanalsoauditionthe selectedWAVEfilebypressingtheonscreenPlay buttonorthefrontpanelSAMPLINGSTART/STOP switch.Tostopplayback,eitherpresstheSAMPLING START/STOPswitchagain,ortouchtheonscreen Stopbutton.

WhenSaveToissettoDisk,youcanchoosetorecord ateither16bitor24bitresolution. WhenSaveToissettoRAM,theresolutionisfixedat 16bit.

Optimizing RAM memory


Optimizationrearrangesanyunusedmemoryareasso thatalloftheremainingmemorycanbeused,which mayincreasetheamountofRAMavailablefor sampling.Thisoptimizationcanhappeneither manuallyorautomatically. AutomaticoptimizationisenabledviatheAuto OptimizeRAMparameterontheGlobalmodeP0: BasicSetuppage.Whenthisisturnedon,RAMwill automaticallybeoptimizedwhensamplingends.

130

Preparations for sampling Audio Settings

ThisoptionwillkeepthegreatestamountofRAMfree forsampling.However,itrequiresalittletimetowork, andsothesoundwillstopforatimeaftersampling ends.Also,ifasongisplayinginSequencermode,the playbackwillstop. Becauseofthis,ifyoureplayingbackasongor recordingmultiplesamplesatonce,itsprobablybetter toleaveAutoOptimizeRAMturnedoff.Onceyoure finishedsampling,orifyounoticethattheamountof availableRAMisgettinglow,usetheOptimizeRAM menucommandtodotheoptimizationmanually.You canfindthiscommandonthemenusoftheSampling pagesinProgram,Combination,andSequencer modes,aswellasonpagesP04inSamplingmode. Youcancheckontheremainingamountofmemoryin SamplingmodeontheP0:Recordingpage,underFree SampleMemory/Locations.Formoreinformation,see 01f:FreeSampleMemory/Locationsonpage 684of theParameterGuide.

Using the metronome


Themetronomecanbehelpfulwhenyouwanttoplay aProgramorCombinationataspecifictempoand sampleyourperformance. YoucanmakemetronomesettingsinMetronome Setup,inProgramorCombinationP0:PlayAudio Input/Sampling.Youmightfinditconvenienttoset Bus(OUTPUT)SelecttooneoftheIndiv.14outputs, connectthe(INDIVIDUAL)14jackstoamixer,and monitorthemetronomeviayourmixer.

Automatically setting-up for the desired sampling method (Auto Sampling Setup)
Ineachmode,AutoSamplingSetupautomatically makestheappropriatesettingsforthesampling relatedparameters.ForexampleinProgrammodeyou canusethistomakethenecessarysettingsfor resamplingyourplayingonaprogram,ortomake settingsforsamplingonlyanexternalaudiosource whileyoumonitoryourplayingonaprogram. However,theseautomaticsettingsassumetypical situations,soyoullneedtoadjusttheparametersto meetyoursituation. Thisfunctionisavailableinthefollowingpages: Mode
Sampling

Page
Sampling P0: Recording

Combination Combination P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling Program Sequencer Program P0: Play Audio Input/Sampling Sequencer P0: Play/REC Preference, Audio Input/Sampling

131

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

Sampling and editing in Sampling mode


InSamplingmode,youcanrecordsamples,andedit sampledatathatyousampledorloadedfrommedia (includingWAVEandAIFFformats).Youcanalso assigntheeditedsamplestoindexes(zones)tocreatea multisample. Samplingmodepagestructure Page
P0: Recording

Explanation
Sampling and resampling Various settings for sampling Audio input settings Edit using the control surface

P1: Sample Edit

Sample waveform editing Sample playback parameter settings Start, loop start, and end address settings Loop and reverse playback on/off Editing operations such as Time Slice and Time Stretch

P2: Loop Edit

P3: Multisample Edit P4: EQ/ Controller P5: Audio CD P6: P7: P8: Insert Effect P9: Master, Total Effects

Assign samples to multisamples, and specify the zone and original key EQ adjustments for multisample playback Assign functions to controllers Play back audio CDs Rip audio CDs ---- Select and edit insert effects, adjust send levels to the master effects, and specify the routing to the outputs Select and edit master send effects and total effects

Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage,refer toBasicoperationsonpage 17. SamplingcanbeperformedinanypageP0P9of SamplingmodebyusingtheREC/WRITEswitchand theSTART/STOPswitch.Recordingrelatedsettings suchasinputlevelaremadebytheparametersofP0: Recording,andthesesettingsarevalidfortheother pagesaswell. Theselectedmultisampleorsamplecanbeplayed fromthekeyboardinanypage,allowingyoutohear theresultsofyoureditingineachpage.

132

Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Creating multisample indexes and samplingP0: Recording

Creating multisample indexes and samplingP0: Recording


Hereshowtocreateindexesinamultisample,and assignasampletoeachindex. 1. PresstheSAMPLINGbuttontoenterSampling mode. 2. SelecttheP0:RecordingRecordingpage. 3. SelectMultisampleSelect,andcreatea multisample. Tocreateanewmultisample,pressthe MultisampleSelectpopupbutton.Thenpressa MultisampleNo.inthelistforwhichnonamehas beenentered,orusethenumerickeys09toinputa numberandthenpresstheENTERswitch. Adialogboxwillappear. Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,Position willbeRight(toselectedindex),ZoneRange willbe 1Keys,andOriginalKeyPositionwillbeBottom, sothatindexeswillbecreatedasshownbelow.This isconvenientwhenyouwanttosamplemultiple takesofaphraseorrhythmloopinasingle operation.

IfyousetZoneRangeto12Keys,indexeswillbe createdatintervalsofoneoctave.

5. SelectIndex. YoucanalsoselectIndexbyholdingdownthe ENTERswitchandplayingapadoranoteonthe keyboard.Forthisexample,select001. Ifyouwanttocreateastereomultisample,checkthe Stereobox,andpresstheOKbutton. Ifyouwanttocreateamonauralmultisample, unchecktheStereobox,andpresstheOKbutton. 4. PresstheCreatebuttontocreateanindex. Immediatelyafterthepoweristurnedon,Index willshow001/008.Thisindicatesthatthereareeight indexes,andthatthefirstindexisselected(seethe illustrationbelow). PresstheCreatebuttonseveraltimes.Eachtimeyou pressit,anindexwillbecreated.Thekeyboard displaywillindicatethezoneandoriginalkey locationofeachindex. Note:Theindexthatiscreatedwhenyoupressthe CreatebuttonwillbecreatedaccordingtotheP0: RecordingRecordingpageCreateZonePreference settings.(ThesesettingscanalsobemadeinP3: MultisampleEditpage,CreateZonePreference) 6. AssignasampletotheIndex. IfRAMmemoryalreadycontainssamples,use SampleSelecttoselectthesampleandassignit. Ifyouwanttorecordanewsample,youcansample itnow. Thesampleyourecordwillbeautomatically assignedtotheindexyouselectedinstep4. Theassignedsamplewillsoundwhenyouplaythe keyboardintherangeoftheindextowhichthe sampleisassigned. 7. Repeatsteps5and6toassignasampletoeach index. Thenumberandorderoftheindexesina multisample,therangeofeachindex,andthe originalkeypositioncanbefreelychangedlaterif desired.(SeeMultisampleeditingonp.145)

Multisample Select Popup Keyboard & Pad

Index Sample Select Create

Create Zone Preference

133

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

Creating multiple samples


Intheexampleproceduredescribedabove,several indexeswerecreated(bypressingtheCreatebutton severaltimes),andthensampleswereassignedtoeach Index. Asanalternativemethod,itisalsopossibletocreate oneindex,sampleintoit,andthenrepeatthesetwo steps. 1. PresstheCreatebuttononcetocreateanindex. 2. Recordasample. Therecordedsamplewillautomaticallybeassigned totheindexyoucreatedinstep1. 3. Repeatsteps1and2. Thisisanefficientwaytorecordmultiplesamples.

Forexample,youmightassigntheinfrequentlyplayed highesteightnotesofthekeyboardtocorrespondto thepads.Tomakethesetting,selectthenotenumber field,andplaythedesiredkeywhileholdingdownthe ENTERswitch. OnscreenpadsinSamplingmode

Assigning samples to the pads


InSamplingmode,youcanusethepadstoplay samplesdirectly.Theonscreenpadsareavailableon theP4:EQ/Controlspage.USBcontrollers,MIDIinput, andthelocalkeyboardcanallcontrolthepadsaswell; formoredetails,seePlayingthepadsonpage 35. Bydefault,pads18correspondtotheC2G2keys.For example,thedefaultIndexsettingfor001/008sets OrigKeyandTopKeytoC2.Theassignedsamplewill soundwhenyouplaytheC2key.Thesamesample willalsosoundwhenyouplaypad1. Similarly,ifyouassignsamplestoIndex002008,the samplesthatsoundwhenyouplaytheC#2G2keys willalsosoundwhenyouplaypads28. Foreachpad,youcanchangethenotenumbersused toplaysamples. Assigningsamplestothepads
Index zone (currently selected Index is reversed) Original Key (currently selected Original Key is displayed in red) Pads 1...8 correspond to C2...G2. On-screen Pads are available on the P4:EQ/Control page.

Index01

Index02 Index03...Index08

C4 key Keyboard range By holding down the ENTER switch and playing a note, you can select the corresponding index, and the specified key will be the base key and will be shown in blue.

134

Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Basic examples of sampling

Basic examples of sampling


Sampling your voice from a mic, and playing it back as a one-shot sample
Inthisexample,welluseamicconnectedtoAUDIO INPUT1tosampleyourvoice. 4. SetSourceAudiotoAudioInput1/2. Thismeansthatyoullbesamplingtheinstrument orotherexternalaudioinputsourceconnectedto AUDIOINPUT1and2. 5. TotherightofSourceAudio,selectMonoL. Withthissetting,theinputfromtheINPUT1jack willbesenttotheinternalLchannelandsampled monaurally. 6. FortheSavetofield,selectRAM. ThesampleddatawillbewrittenintoRAM memory. 7. TurnIFXOff. Youwillbesamplingwithoutapplyinganinsert effect. 8. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand.
Mic

Connect a mic
1. ConnectamictotherearpanelAUDIOINPUT1 jack. 2. PresstheAUDIOINPUTMIC/LINEswitchsothat itsintheMIC(outward)position,andsetthe LEVELknobnearthecenter. Formoredetails,seeAudioinputsettingson page 126.

Youhavenowmadethesettingsnecessaryfor sampling. Note:Takealookatthesettingsthathavebeenmade. AudioInput:Inputs1and2havebeenroutedtothe L/Rbus,withtheirPansethardleftandhardright respectively,andinputlevelssetto127. SourceBUS:L/R Thesound(s)senttotheL/Rbuswillbesampled.With thesettingsabove,thisincludesInputs1and2. Trigger:SamplingSTARTSW SamplingwillstartwhenyoupresstheSAMPLING START/STOPswitch. RecordingLevel:+0.0 Thisisthedefaultsettingforrecordinganexternal input. Saveto:RAM YouwillbesamplingtoRAMmemory. 9. PresstheRecordingtabtogototheP0:Recording Recordingpage.

MIC

Sampling Setup
1. GototheSamplingP0:RecordingAudioInput page. PresstheSAMPLINGbuttontoenterSampling mode.MakesurethattheSamplingP0:Recording pageisdisplayed. Ifitisnot,presstheEXITswitch,andthenpressthe AudioInputtab. 2. ChoosethemenucommandAutoSampling Setup. Adialogboxwillappear.AutoSamplingSetup automaticallysetsmanyoftheparameters necessaryforsampling.Youcanusethesesettings asaguidelinewhensampling.

3. SelectRECAudioInput. Thiswillmakesettingsforsamplinganexternal audiosource.

135

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

UnderRECSampleSetup.notethatSamplingMode hasbeensettoLMono.Thismeansthatthesoundof theinternalLchannelwillbesampledinmono. Next,letschangetheTriggersetting.Thiscontrols howsamplingwillstart.Currently,itssettostartwhen youpresstheSamplingSTART/STOPbutton.Well changeittomakesamplingstartwhentheaudioinput exceedsaspecifiedvolume. 10.GobacktotheSamplingP0:RecordingAudio Inputpage. 11.Makethefollowingsettings. Trigger:Threshold Withthissetting,samplingwillstartwhentheinput exceedsaspecificvolume. ThresholdLevel:30dB Fromtherecordreadystate,recordingwillstart automaticallywhentheaudioinputexceeds30dB. PreTriggerREC:005ms Recordingwillbeginimmediately(5ms)before samplingisstarted,sothattheattackofthesoundis notlost. 14.Whenyouvefinishedmakingadjustments,press theSAMPLINGRECswitch.

Record
15.PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. TheKRONOSwillbeinrecordreadymode. 16.Speakintothemic,sayingtheword(s)youwantto sample. (Example:Its) Recordingwillstartwhenthelevelexceedsthe Level30dBsetting. 17.Whenyouvefinishedsayingtheword(s),press theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. Thiscompletesthesamplingoperation.Thenew samplewillbeautomaticallyassignedtoSample (SampleSelect).

Hear the sampled result


18.Thesampleyoujustrecordedwill(bydefault)be assignedtoIndex001.Whenyoupressthe OrigKeykey(C2)forIndex001,youwillhear thesoundyoujustsampled. Noticethatthesamplewillloop(playrepeatedly)if youholddownthekey.Weregoingtoturnlooping off.

Turn looping off


19.PresstheLoopEdittabtogototheP2:LoopEdit page. UncheckLoop.Nowthesamplewillnotloopeven ifyouholddowntheC2key.

Set the recording level


12.Speakorsingatthevolumeyouintendtorecord. IftheADCOVERLOAD!(ADconverterinput overload)indicationappears,turntherearpanel LEVELknobtowardMINtoadjustthelevel appropriately. Forthebestsound,adjustthelevelashighas possiblewithoutallowingtheADCOVERLOAD ! indicationtoappear. 13.PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. Speakintothemic,andnoticethatthelevelmeter indicatesthevolumeofthesoundthatwillbe recorded. IftheCLIP!indicationappears,usetheVALUE controllertolowertheRecordingLevelslider (shownintherightofthedisplay)fromthe+0.0 settingtoanappropriateposition.

136

Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Basic examples of sampling

Next,wellspecifythatloopingwillbeturnedoff foreachnewlyrecordedsample. 20.PressthelowerRecordingtabandthentheupper RecordingtabtogototheP0:Recording Recordingpage. 21.UncheckAutoLoopOn. IfAutoLoopOnischecked,theLoopsettingwill automaticallybeturnedonwhenyousample,so thatthesamplewillloop.

Trigger:Threshold ThresholdLevel:30dB PreTriggerREC:005ms FordetailsonRecordingSetup,refertostep3of Samplingyourvoicefromamic,

Record the next sample


22.IntheP0:Recording,Recordingpage,select Indexandpressthe switchtoselect002. 23.PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthenthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. Speakintothemic,sayingtheword(s)youwantto sample. (Example:So) Whenyouvefinishedspeaking,pressthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. 24.Repeatsteps14and15severaltimesmoreto recordafewmoresamples. (Example:Easy,To,Sample,With, KRONOS)

Listen to the recorded result


25.Playthekeysoneafteranother. PlaythekeysstartingatC2insemitonesteps.The samplesyoujustrecordedwillplayoneafter another. (Forexampleifyousequentiallyplaythekeysfrom C2throughF#2,youwillhearItsSoEasyTo SampleWithKRONOS.) Themultisampleyoucreatedcanbeusedasa programorcombination.(SeeConvertinga MultisampletoaProgramonpage 146)

3. GototheP8:InsertEffectInsertFXpage. PresstheIFXtab,andthentheInsertFXtab. 4. SelectIFX1,usethenumerickeystoinput1,0,1, andpresstheENTERswitchtoselect101:Reverb Hall. PressIFX1On/Offtoturniton.

Sampling external audio through insert effects


Inthisexample,wellapplyaninserteffecttothe soundfromamicconnectedtotheAUDIOINPUT1 jack,andsampletheprocessedsoundinstereo.

Connect a mic
1. ConnectyourmictotherearpanelAUDIOINPUT 1jack.(SeeSamplingyourvoicefromamic,and playingitbackasaoneshotsampleonpage 135)

Setup
2. IntheP0:RecordingAudioInputpage,makethe followingsettings. INPUT1 BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):IFX1 Pan:C064 Level:127 ThisspecifiestheinputlevelandpanoftheINPUT 1jack,andassignsIFX1busasthedestination. SamplingSetup SourceBus:L/R 5. Speakintothemic,andverifythatreverbis applied. YoucanusetheIFX1page(IFX1tab)toeditthe effectsettings. 6. MakesurethattheBusSel.thatfollowsIFX1isset toL/R. 7. PresstheEXITswitch,andthenpressthe RecordingtabtogototheP0:Recording Recordingpage.

137

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

8. SettheRECSampleSetupModetoStereo. Withthissetting,thesoundoftheinternalL/R channelscanbesampledinstereo.

Applying an insert effect to a sample and resampling the result


Theprocessofapplyinganinserteffectetc.toa sampledsoundandthensamplingitonceagainis calledresampling. 1. IntheP0:RecordingRecordingpage,assignthe samplethatyouwanttoresampletoSample Select. Whenthepowerisfirstturnedon,theassigned samplewillbesettoOrig.KeyC2. 2. Makethefollowingsettings. INPUT1 BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):Off Turnoffthebussesforallsixaudioinputs. SamplingSetup SourceBus:L/R ThesoundsenttotheL/Rwillbesampled. Trigger:SamplingSTARTSW AfteryouvepressedtheSAMPLINGRECswitch toentersamplingreadymode,resamplingwill beginwhenyoupresstheSAMPLING START/STOPswitch. Resample:Auto Thesampleassignedtotheindexwillberesampled automatically. Key:C2 UseKeytospecifythesamplethatwillbe resampled. RecordingLevel:0.0 Thisisthedefaultsettingforresampling.

9. SelectIndex. Ifyouwanttocreateanewindex,presstheCreate button. 10.Samplethesound. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch,andthenthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenterrecord readymode. Speakthewordyouwanttosample. Recordingwillstartwhenthelevelexceedsthe Level30dBsetting. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostop sampling. 11.Playthekeyboard. PresstheOrigKeykeytohearthesoundyou sampled.

Sampling from the S/P DIF input


Ingeneral,samplingfromtheS/P DIFinputsisvery similartosamplingfromtheanaloginputs.For instance,torecordastereosamplefromtheS/P DIF inputs,setupthesamplingparametersasbelow: SourceBus:S/P DIFL/R Resample:Manual RecordingLevel[dB]:asdesired Mode:Stereo Important:Wheneverusingthedigitalinputsand outputs,makesurethattheGlobalSystemClock parameterissetcorrectly.Formoreinformation,see SystemClockonpage 756oftheParameterGuide.

Saveto:RAM ThedatawillbewrittentoRAMmemory. SamplingMode:Stereo ThesoundoftheinternalL/Rchannelswillbe sampledinstereo. Auto+12dBOn:On The+12dBsettingwillautomaticallybeturnedon forthesamplesyourecord.

138

Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Editing loops

BeawarethatifyouchangetheBussettingfromOff toL/RorIFX112,thevolumelevelsenttothe AUDIOOUTL/MONOandRjacksandthe headphonesmayriseexcessively.

PresstheC2key,andverifythatreverbisapplied. AlsomakesurethattheBusSel.followingIFX1is settoL/R. 6. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch,andthenthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitch. ThesampleassignedtoC2willplayautomatically, andresamplingwillbegin. Whenthesamplefinishesplaying,resamplingwill end. Thesamplethatwascreatedbyresamplingwill automaticallybeassignedtoSampleSelect. Note:InSamplingmode,theP8RoutingpageBus SelectparameterwillautomaticallybesettoL/R whenresamplingends.Thispreventsaninsert effectfrombeingappliedinduplicatewhenyou monitortheresultsofresamplingthroughaninsert effect. Ifyouwanttoapplyaninserteffectonceagain,re selectIFX1. Note:Asanalternativetoautomaticallyresampling asdescribedabove(ResampleAuto),youcan simplysamplethesoundsthatyouplayfromthe keyboard(ResampleManual). InSampleSelect,assignthesamplethatyouwill resample,andsetResampletoManual.SetTrigger toNoteOn,andsetSampleModetoStereoas desired.Thensetthebusandeffectasdescribedin steps2and7,presstheSAMPLINGRECandthen theSTART/STOPswitch,andthenpresstheC2key tostartresampling.Whenyouwanttostop resampling,presstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP switch.

3. InP2:LoopEdit,checkthe+12dBsetting. 4. IntheP8:InsertEffectRoutingpage,setBus SelecttoIFX1.

5. IntheP8:InsertEffect,InsertFXpage,setIFX1to 101:ReverbHall,andturnIFXOn/OffON.

Editing loops
Youcanedittheplaybackaddressatwhichthesample willbelooped.TheP2:LoopEditpageletsyoudothe followingthings. Youcanspecifytheloopingaddressesbyediting Start,End,andLoopStartwhilewatchingthe waveform.FunctionslikeZoomIn/Out,UseZero, andGridmakeeditingeasy. Youcanturnloopingon/off,adjustthetuningof theloopplayback,applya+12dBplaybackboost, orreversetheplayback. YoucanusetheTimeSlicefunctionto automaticallydetecttheattacksofkickandsnare notesetc.inarhythmloopsample(alooped samplecontainingadrumpattern),and automaticallyslicethesampleattheappropriate locations.Thisfunctioncanautomaticallycreate performancedata(notes)toplaythedivided samplesattheappropriatemoments,lettingyou playthisphraseinSequencermodeatthedesired tempowithoutaffectingthepitchoftheindividual notes.Youcanalsodothingslikechangingthe pitchofjustthesnaredrum,replacingitwithan entirelydifferentsample,orchangingtheplayback

139

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

timingofthephraseinthesequencertotransform theoriginalrhythmloopintoanentirelydifferent rhythmloop.(Stereosamplesaresupported.) YoucanusetheTimeStretchfunctiontomodifythe tempowithoutchangingthesamplespitch.When executingTimeStretch,youcanchooseeither Sustaining(suitableforloopsofsustainedsounds suchasstringsorvocal)orSlice(suitablefor loopsofdecaytypesoundssuchasdrums).(Stereo samplesaresupported.) Sometimeswhenloopingasampleofpitched instrumentssuchasstringsorwinds,thelooped portionmayplaybackinanunnaturalway.By executingtheCrossfadeLoopfunctionyoucan eliminatethisproblemsothattheloopsounds right.

SelectLoopStart(highlighted),andusethe [VALUE]dialorotherVALUEcontrollerstomodify thevalue.Thecorrespondingverticallinewill move.SetStartandEndinthesameway.Inthe exampleshownbelow,Startissetimmediately beforethefirstwaveform,LoopStartisset immediatelybeforethesecondwaveform,andEnd issetasdesired.

Start (Red)

Loop Start (Green)

End (Blue)

ZOOM

Loop settings
1. Selectthesampleforwhichyouwishtomakeloop settings. Toselectthesample,usetheSampleSelectorIndex parametersofP2:LoopEditpageoroftheP0: Recording,Recordingpage. IfyouuseSampleSelecttoselectthesample,be awarethattheassignmenttotheindexwillalso change. 2. IntheP2:LoopEditpage,usetheLoopcheck boxtoturnloopplaybackon/offforthesample. Loopingwillbeturnedoniftheboxischecked. Thiswilloperatebetweentheaddressesyouspecify instep3. LoopOn:StartEndLoopStartEnd(Loop StartEndisrepeated) LoopOff:StartEnd

4. ByusingtheZOOMbuttonyoucanchangethe rangethatisdisplayed.WhenStartis highlighted,zoomwillbeperformedfromthe startaddress.


cab

Areaashownintheillustrationdisplaysthe entiresample.Areabindicatestheregionwithin theentiresamplethatisshowninareac.Asyou zoominonthetimeaxis,thisshowsyouwherethe zoomedregionislocatedwithintheentiresample. UsetheZoombuttonstospecifyhowareacwill showamagnified(zoomin)orreduced(zoomout) viewofthewaveform.

Use Zero
IftheUseZerocheckboxischecked,onlythose addresseswherethewaveformdatacrossesthezero levelwillbefoundautomaticallywhensearching, andcanbeset.Thisletsyoueasilymakeaddress settingswherenoiseislesslikelytooccurwhen looping.

Toplaythesample,pressthekeytowhichthe sampleisassigned(thekeyrangethatishighlighted inKeyboard&Pad). AsamplewaveformthatwassampledwithSample ModesettoStereowillbedisplayedintwolevels. TheupperlevelistheLchannel,andthelowerlevel istheRchannel. 3. SetthestartaddressinStart,theloopstart addressinLoopStart,andtheendaddressin End.

Truncate
5. Ifnecessary,usethepagemenucommand Truncatetodeleteunwanteddatathatfalls outsidethestart(orloopstart)andendaddresses. SelecttheFront&Endradiobutton. Inthisexample,wewillnotchangethesettingsof theSavetoNo.andOverwritecheckboxes,so presstheOKbuttontoexecute.

140

Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Using Time Slice

Whenyouexecutethisoperation,thetruncated sampledatawillautomaticallybeassignedtothe index.

Using the grid to make loop settings


Gridoverlaysagridonthewaveformdisplayto indicatethetempoBPM.Thishelpsyoumakeloop settingsthatmatchthetempo. YoucanalsoviewthegridintheP1:SampleEditpage, andusethegridtoeditthewaveformtomatchthe tempo. 1. CheckGrid. Thegridwillappearinthewaveformdisplay. SetResolutionasdesired,andspecifythetempo BPMvalue. Thegridisdisplayedaccordingtotheplayback pitchatthebasekey(thekeyshowninbluefor Keyboard&Pad).Youcanselectthebasekeyby holdingdowntheENTERswitchandplayingakey. Pressthebasekeytoplaythesample,andpressthe TAPTEMPOswitchatquarternoteintervalsalong withthephrase.ThiswillenableTapTempoand specifythetempo. 2. SettheendaddressEndsothatitcoincideswith agridline. ThiswillmakethelooplengthmatchtheBPM. Ifloopingison,thegridisdisplayedbeginningat theLoopStart.Ifloopingisoff,thegridisdisplayed beginningattheStart. 3. Ifyouwanttohidethegriddisplay,uncheckthe Gridoption.

Inthedialogboxesofsomepagemenuitems,there isaSavetoNo.settingthatletsyouspecifythe samplenumbertowhichtheeditedsamplewillbe saved.Atthistime,avacantsamplenumberwillbe selectedautomatically,soyouwillchangethe settingonlyifyouwanttospecifythesave destinationnumber. IfyoucheckOverwriteinthedialogboxofthe command,thedatapriortoeditingwillbedeleted andoverwrittenbytheediteddata.Normally,you willexecutetheWriteoperationwithoutchecking this,sothattheunediteddataispreserved.When youarecompletelyfinishedwithyourediting,you canusethepagemenucommandDeleteSampleto deleteunneededsamples.

Using Time Slice


TimeSliceisafunctionthatdetectstheattackofthe kickorsnareetc.inarhythmloopsample(asample consistingofaloopedpatternofdrumsetc.),and automaticallydividesitintoseparateinstrumental sounds.Eachofthedividedinstrumentalsoundsis madeintoasampleofitsown,andthenautomatically expandedintoamultisampleandprogram.Pattern playbackdatafortheSequencermodeusingthe dividedsamplesisalsocreatedautomatically. Thetimeslicessamplecanbeusedinthefollowing waysbythesongofSequencermode. Multiplerhythmloopsamplesofdifferingtempo canbematchedtothesametempowithout changingtheirpitch. Youcanchangethetempoinrealtimewithout affectingthepitch. Asanexample,wewilldescribehowarhythmloop samplecanbetimeslicedinSamplingmode,andthen howtherhythmloopsamplecanbeplayedin Sequencermode. Youwillneedtoproviderhythmloopsamplesof drumsetc.Youcaneitherrecordtheseonthe KRONOS,orloadtheminDiskmode.Initially,you shouldtrythisusingaonemeasurepatternin4/4time withafairlysimplebeat,andrecordthepatternasa monorhythmloopsample. 1. UseSampleSelecttoselectthesampledatathat youwanttotimeslice. Playbackthesample,andverifythatthebeatsthat youwanttoloopareplayedcleanly. Iftheyarenotplayedcleanly,maketheappropriate settingsforthestartaddressStartandendaddress End,andexecutethepagemenucommand Truncate(SeeLoopsettingsonpage 140).

141

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

2. GototheP2:LoopEditpage.Selectthepagemenu commandTimeSlice. TheSetSampleTempodialogboxwillappear.

Ifyouwanttocreatetheperformancedataina track: TurnProgramandSeq.EventOn(checked) Program:asdesired(forinstance,UG000) Track:On Song:000,Track:01,Meter:4/4 StartMeasure:001,Time:008

3. Specifythenumberofquarternotebeatsinthe sample,anditstempo. IfyouknowthetempoinBPM,settheSourceBPM accordingly. IfyoudonotknowtheBPM,useBeattoenterthe totalnumberofbeats,andtheBPMwillbe calculatedautomatically. 4. PresstheOKbutton. Thesamplewillautomaticallybesliced,anda dialogboxwillappear. PresstheSavebuttontosavethedata. Youwillreturntothedialogboxofstep4. Ifyouwanttocreatetheperformancedataina pattern: Inordertoauditiontheperformancedataasit wouldbeifcreatedasapattern,presstheSave buttononceagaintogototheSaveSamples&MS dialogbox. TurnProgramandSeq.EventOn(checked) Whenyouplaythekeyboard,C2willplaythe originalsample(Source),andD2andsubsequent keyswillplaythedividedsamples. Whilelisteningtoeachdividedsample,adjust Sensitivitysothateachdrumstrikeorotherrhythm instrumentsoundisdividedintoitsownsample.In somecases,itmaynotbepossibletoslicethe samplecleanlyevenifyouadjustSensitivity.Ifthe attackofthenextsoundisincludedintheendofthe precedingsample,orifonesamplecontainstwo notes,youwillneedtoeditthesamples. Ifyouwanttoedit,holddowntheENTERswitch andselecttheIndexthatisassignedtothenotethat youwanttoedit.(Thisportionofthewaveform displaywillbehighlighted.)Thenyoucanmake adjustmentsbyadjustingStartorEnd,andbyusing DividetoseparateorLinktocombine. Formoreinformation,seeTimeSliceonpage 740 oftheParameterGuide. 5. PresstheSavebutton. TheSaveSamples&MSdialogboxwillappear. Hereyoucansavethetimeslicedsamplesandthe multisample. Atthistime,settheitemsintheSaveWithareato specifytheconversiondestinationfortheprogram thatwillusethesamplesandmultisample,andfor theperformancedata(trackorpattern)thatwillbe usedinSequencermodetorecreatetherhythm loopsample. PresstheSavebuttontosavethedata. Youwillreturntothedialogboxofstep4. 6. PresstheExitbutton. Program:asdesired(forinstance,UG001) Pattern:On Song:001,Pattern:U00,Meter:4/4 RPPR:On(checked),Key:C#2,Track:01

142

Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Using Time Slice

7. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode, andselect000forSongSelect.

information,seeTimeStretchonpage 745ofthe ParameterGuide. 8. InSongSelect,choose001. Thefollowingsongdatahasbeenset/created automaticallyasyouspecifiedinstep5. P0:Play/RECpage Song:001,Meter:4/4,Tempo:112,RPPR:On P0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage Track01Program:asdesired(forinstance,UG001) P5:Pattern/RPPR,RPPRSetuppage Key:C#2,Assign:On, Pattern:User,U00,Track:Track01 Patterndata:1measure(D2)

Thefollowingsongdatahasbeenset/created automaticallyasyouspecifiedinstep5. P0:Play/RECpage Song:000,Meter:4/4,Tempo:112 P0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage Track01Program:asdesired(forinstance,UG000) P5:TrackEdit,TrackEditpage Track01:trackdata:8measures(D2)

IntheP0:Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixer page,presstheC#2key.TheRPPRfunctionwill beginplayingpatternU00. IntheP5:Pattern/RPPR,PatternEditpage,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostartplayback ofpatternU00. WhenyoupresstheC#2keyintheP5: Pattern/RPPR,RPPRSetuppage,theRPPRfunction willstartplayingpatternU00. Inthesamewayasinstep7,changingtheplayback tempowillnotaffectthepitch. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostart playback. Asanexample,setq (Tempo)to100.Noticethat thepitchdoesnotchangewhenyouplaybackata differenttempo. Ifthebeatoftheoriginalrhythmloopsampleisnot reproducedcorrectlywhenyouchangethetempo, orifobtrusivenoiseisheard,thisisbecausethe samplewasnotslicedappropriatelyinstep4.The wayinwhichthepercussioninstrumentsounds weredividedwillhaveamajorimpactonthe qualityoftheplaybackwhenthetempoischanged. Youwillneedtoadjustthewayinwhichthe samplesaredividedinstep4. Thesilencebetweensamplesmaybecomeobtrusive ifyouplaybackataslowertempo,ornoisemay occurbetweensamplesifyouplaybackatafaster tempo.Toavoidsuchproblems,youcansetStretch NewBPMorRatioinstep5tothetempoat whichyouwanttoplayback,andexecutetime stretchtoadjustthelengthofeachsample.Formore

143

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

Sample waveform editing


IntheP1:SampleEditscreenyoucandothefollowing things. YoucansettheEditRangeStartandEndwhile watchingthewaveform.Youcanusefunctions suchasZoomIn/Out,UseZero,andGridtoedit thewaveformefficiently. Youcaneditthesamplewaveformusingavariety ofcommandssuchascut,copy,mix,insert, normalize,volumeramp,andreverse. ARateConvertfunctionletsyoulowerthe samplingfrequencyofthesampledatainarangeof 2/3to1/6,producingdownsampledeffects. TheLinkfunction(Link:withcrossfade)letsyou connecttwosamplesintoone.Whendoingso,you canapplyacrossfadesothatthesustainedportion ofthesampleswillchangegraduallytocreatea naturaltransitionbetweenthetwosamples. 1. Selectthesamplethatyouwishtoedit. UseSampleSelectorIndexintheP1:SampleEdit pageortheP0:Recording,Recordingpagetoselect thesample. IfyouuseSampleSelecttoselectthesample,be awarethattheindexassignmentwillalsochange. 2. SelecttheP1:SampleEditpage.

Ifyouwanttoauditiontheselectedregion,pressthe PlaybuttonintheLCDortheSAMPLING START/STOPswitch.Theselectedregionwillplay atthepitchofthebasekey(thebluekeyinthe keyboarddisplay).Youcanspecifythebasekeyby holdingdowntheENTERswitchandplayinganote onthekeyboard. Whenyouplayakeytowhichthesampleis assigned(thehighlightedrangeofthekeyboard displayedinKeyboard&Pad),thesamplewillbe playedbackaccordingtoitsloopsettings. TheprocedureforusingtheZOOMandUseZero checkboxesisthesameasforP2:LoopEdit. 4. Fromthelistofpagemenu,selectthedesired editingcommand.Maketheappropriatesettings inthedialogbox,andpresstheOKbuttonto execute. Fordetailsonthemanysampleeditingfeatures,see Sampling:PageMenuCommandsonpage 726of theParameterGuide.

Thewaveformdataofthecurrentlyselectedsample willbedisplayed. SamplewaveformsrecordedwithSamplingMode settoStereowillbeshownintwolines.Theupper lineistheLeftchannelwaveform,andthelowerline istheRightchannelwaveform. 3. UseEditRangeStartandEndtospecifythe rangethatyouwishtoedit. Theselectedrangewillbehighlighted.

144

Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Multisample editing

Multisample editing
Editingamultisampleisaccomplishedwithanumber ofoperationsi.e.creatingindexesforthemultisample andassigningasampletoeachindex,editing operationssuchasdeleting,copying,andinserting indexes,anddetailedsettingssuchassampleleveland pitchforeachindex. MultisampleeditingisperformedinP3:Multisample. YoucanalsodosomebasiceditsintheP0:Recording Recordingpage. TheCreatebuttonhasthesamefunctionasthe CreatebuttoninP0:Recording(seeCreating multisampleindexesand samplingP0: Recording onpage 133).

Modifying the settings of an index


1. Makethesettingsdescribedinsteps13of Editingtheindexes. 2. Setparametersfortheselectedindex. UseSampletospecifythesamplefortheselected index.Youcanalsoselectasamplehere. UseOrig.Key(OriginalKey)tospecifytheoriginal keyofthesample. ChangingtheTopKeywillchangetheupperlimit ofthezone.Simultaneously,thelowerlimitofthe nextnumberedindexwillalsochange.Range indicatesthezonedeterminedbytheTopKey setting. Leveladjuststheplaybacklevelofthesample.You canusethistoensurethatallsamplesina multisamplehaveaconsistentlevel. IfyoucheckConstantPitch,allnotesintheindex zonewillsoundthesampleatitsoriginalpitch. Pitchadjuststhesamplepitchforeachindex.You canusethePitchBPMAdjustpagemenu commandtosettheloopintervaltothedesired tempo.Formoreinformation,seePitchBPM Adjustonpage 750oftheParameterGuide.

Editing the indexes


Tochangethenumberororderoftheindexes,usethe Insert,Cut,Copy,andCreatebuttons. 1. SelecttheP3:MultisampleEditpage.

2. UseMultisample(MS)toselectthemultisample thatyouwishtoedit. 3. SelecttheIndex. Youcanalsoselectanindexbyholdingdownthe VALUEcontrollerorENTERswitchandplayinga noteonthekeyboard. 4. Pressthebuttonstomodifythenumberororderof theindexes,andeditthem. Todeletetheselectedindex,presstheCutbutton. TheInsertbuttonisusedinconjunctionwiththe CutandCopybuttons.Thecontentsoftheindex thatwasCutorCopiedwillbeinserted.

EQ and controllers
TheP4:EQ/Controllerpageletsyouuseamid sweepablethreebandEQtoadjustthesound.Youcan alsousethecontrolsurfacetocontroltheEQ.Notethat thisisfortemporaryuseinSamplingmodeonly;it doesnotaffectthesampledataitself. HereyoucanalsoassignthefunctionsofSW1/2,Real TimeKnobs58,andthenotenumbersandvelocities playedbypads18.

Sampling from an Audio CD


TheKRONOSallowsyoutoripdigitalaudiodata fromanaudioCDinsertedinaconnectedUSBCD drive.Todoso: 1. GototheSamplingP5:AudioCDpage. PresstheSAMPLINGbutton,andthenpressthe AudioCDtabintheLCDscreen. 2. InsertanaudioCDintotheconnectedUSBCD R/RWdrive. Next,makeafewsettingssothatyoucanmonitor theCDR/RWDriveAudioInput.Thesesettings dontaffecttherippingprocessitself. 3. Forboththeleftandrightchannels,setBusSelect (IFX/Indiv.)toL/R,andLevelto127. 4. SettheleftchannelsPantoL000,andtheright channelsPantoR127. 5. InDrive(DriveSelect),choosethedrivethat containstheaudioCD. 6. RaisetheVolume. 7. UseTracktoselectthetrackthatyouwanttorip. 8. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchto playbacktheaudioCDtrack. 9. Duringplayback,presstheENTERswitchatthe pointswhereyouwantrippingtobeginandend.

145

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

ThiswillsetRangeStartandRangeEnd. IfyoupresstheENTERswitchthreeormoretimes, RangeStartandRangeEndwillrespectivelybeset Themethodgivenaboveapplieswhensomething otherthanRangeStartorRangeEndisselected (highlighted). IfRangeStartorRangeEndareselected (highlighted),thesettingwillbeupdatedeachtime youpresstheENTERswitch. IfRangeStartorRangeEndareselected (highlighted),thisregionwillplayback. Whenyoufinishmakingsettings,pressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostopplayback oftheaudioCD. 10.Verifytheregionthatwillberipped. SelecteitherRegionStartorRegionEnd(the displaywillbehighlighted),andpressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.TheCDwill playfromRangeStarttoRangeEndandthenstop. Ifyouwanttoadjustthelocation,usetheVALUE controllerstomodifytheRangeStartorRangeEnd settings,ormovethecursortoaparameterother thanRangeStartandRangeEndandrepeatstep8 tomakethesettingonceagain. Ifyouwanttomovethetrackplaybackstart locationtothebeginningofthetrack,pressthe LOCATEswitch. 11.WhenyouhavefinishedsettingRangeStartand RangeEnd,selectthepagemenucommand Destination. Adialogboxwillappear. Specifythedestinationtowhichtherippedsample willbewritten.

SelectRAMifyouwanttoripthesampleintoRAM memory.Inthiscase,youcanalsosetSampleNo. (L),(R)tospecifythesamplenumberthatwillbe written.Normallyyoucanleavethisunchanged.

SelectDISKifyouwanttoripthesampletomedia. UseDriveSelecttoselectthedrive,andusethe OpenandUpbuttonstoselectthedirectoryin whichthedatawillbesaved.Alsospecifyaname fortheWAVEfilethatwillbesaved. 12.PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteripping,orpress theCancelbuttontocancelwithoutexecuting. WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,theObey CopyrightRulesdialogboxwillappear. 13.CarefullyreadtheCOPYRIGHTWARNINGin theQuickStartGuide,andifyouconsenttothe terms,presstheOKbuttontobeginripping.Ifyou donotconsenttotheterms,presstheCancel buttontocanceltheoperation.

Saving, converting to Programs, and Comparing


Saving Samples and Multisamples
AnySamplesandMultisamplesthatyoucreateor editinSamplingModemustbesavedinDisk mode,ortheyllgoawaywhenyouturnoffthe power.ThisisdifferentfromProgramsand Combinations,whichcanbewrittentomemory.For moreinformation,seeSometypesofdatamustbe savedtodiskonpage 186. TosaveonlytheSamplesandMultisamples,usethe SaveSampleDatamenucommandontheDiskSave page. Ifyouwanttocreateanarchiveofthecurrentsetup, includinganyPrograms,WaveSequences,orDrum Kitswhichusethesampledata,werecommendthat youuseSaveAllinordertoensurethatthesounds willbereproducedcorrectlythenexttimeyouload them. Formoreinformation,seeSavingtodisks,CDs,and USBmediaonpage 186.

KSC Files and User Sample Banks


KSCstandsforKorgSampleCollection.KSCfilesare savedtoandloadedfromdisk;theygroupyour SamplesandMultisamplestogether,andletyouload themasUserSampleBanks. UserSampleBanksmaybeloadedeitherintoRAM,or mayuseVirtualMemory,justlikeEXs.Theyhave otherbenefitsaswell.Formoreinformation,see Creatingandsaving.KSCfilesonpage 165.

Converting a Multisample to a Program


InpagesP0:RecordingP4:EQ/Controller,youcanuse theConvertMSToProgrampagemenucommand. Whenyouexecutethiscommand,thesettingsofthe currentlyselectedMultisamplewillbeconvertedintoa Program.InProgrammodeyoucanmakefilter,amp andeffectsettingsetc.,andplaythesampleasa program.TheresultingProgramcanbeusedina combinationorsong. IfyouwanttouseaMultisamplecreatedinSampling modeasaProgram,gototheProgramP2:OSCPitch pageandselectRAMMonoorRAMstereoastheBank forOSC1Multisample/WaveSequenceorOSC2

146

Sampling and editing in Sampling mode Saving, converting to Programs, and Comparing

Multisample/WaveSequenceBank(whenTypeisset toMultisample).Inthiscase,theMultisamplewill soundaccordingtothesettingsoftheprogram parameters. 1. UseMultisampleSelect(MS)toselectthe Multisamplethatyouwanttoconverttoa Program. 2. ChooseConvertMSToProgramtoopenthe dialogbox.

Compare
InSamplingmode,thereisnoComparefunctionthat letsyoureturntothestatepriortoediting. Ifyouwanttopreservethestatepriortoediting,usea functionsuchasCopySampleorCopyMStocopythe multisampleorsamplebeforeyoubeginediting.For moreinformation,seeCopySampleonpage 727of theParameterGuide,andCopyMS(Copy Multisample)onpage 729oftheParameterGuide. InsomeofthepagemenucommandsontheSample EditandLoopEditpages,youcanexecutewiththe Overwriteoptionuncheckedinthedialogbox,sothat thesampledatapriortoeditingwillbepreserved.

3. Pressthetexteditbuttontoopenthetextedit dialogbox,andinputanewprogramname(upto 24characters).Bydefault,thiswillbethenameof themultisample. 4. EnableordisableUseDestinationProgram Parametersasdesired. UseDestinationProgramParametersunchecked: Whenyouexecutethecommand,themultisample ofthedestinationProgramwillbereplacedbythe multisampleyouselecthere,andtheotherProgram parameterswillbeinitializedsothatitreproduces thesoundheardinSamplingmode. TheprogramwillbeconvertedwithanOscillator Mode(Program11a)ofSingle. UseDestinationProgramParameterschecked: Whenyouexecutethecommand,themultisample oftheconversiondestinationprogramwillbe replacedbythemultisampleyouselecthere,butthe otherprogramparameterswillnotbeinitialized. Choosethisifyouwanttousetheparameter settingsofanexistingprogram. IfyoucheckUseDestinationProgramParameters, pleasebeawareofthefollowingpoint. ThedestinationprogramsOscillatorModemustbe Single.Ifthisisnotthecase,themessageOscillator Modeconflictswillappearwhenyouattemptto executethecommand.Tosolvethis,changethe OscillatorModesettingofthedestinationProgram. 5. UsetheToProgramfieldtospecifythe conversiondestinationprogram. WerecommendthatyouuseProgrambanksUSER GorAAGGforsavingProgramscreatedin Samplingmode. 6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecute. 7. PressthePROGRAMbuttontoenterProgram mode,selecttheconvertedprogram,andtryitout.

147

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

Sampling in Program and Combination modes Overview


InadditiontousingSamplemode,youcanalsosample bothexternalaudiosourcesandinternalsoundsin Program,Combination,andSequencermodes. Forinstance,youcanresampleaperformancethatuses theKRONOSsfullrangeoffeatures,includingfilters, effects,DrumTrack,andKARMA.Youcaneven sampleafull,multitimbralsequence,playedeither fromtheinternalsequenceroranexternalMIDI sequencer. YoucanalsosampletheKRONOSsperformance togetherwithaudiofromanexternalinputsource,or monitortheperformanceoftheKRONOSsKARMA functionandsequenceretc.whileyousampleonlythe externalaudiofromtheinputjacks.

Resampling a KARMA phrase in Program mode


Youcanresamplethesoundofaprogramor combinationbeingplayedbyyourselforbyKARMA. Inthisexample,wellexplainhowtosamplea KARMAgeneratedphraseinProgrammode.Youcan sampleinasimilarwayinCombinationorSequencer modesaswell. 1. PressthePROGRAMbuttontoenterProgram mode,andselecttheprogramthatyouwantto resample. 2. TurnonKARMA(KARMAON/OFFswitchlit), playthekeyboard,andverifythataphraseis generated. 3. PresstheAudioIn/SamplingtabtogototheP0: PlayAudioInput/Samplingpage. Makethefollowingsettings. AudioInput UseGlobalSetting:Off BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):Off TurnallexternalinputsOff. RECORDINGLEVEL RecordingLevel:0.0 Thisisthedefaultsettingforresampling. SamplingSetup SourceBus:L/R ThesoundsenttotheL/Rbuswillberesampled. Trigger:NoteOn Samplingwillstartthemomentyouplaythe keyboard. Saveto:RAM SamplingwilloccurtoRAMmemory. Mode:Stereo ThesoundoftheinternalL/Rchannelswillbe sampledinstereo. Tip:TheKRONOSwillautomaticallymakethe abovesettingsforyouifyouexecutetheAuto SamplingSetupResampleProgramPlaypage menucommand.Inaddition,itwillalsoassignthe MultisampletoanewProgramafteryouvefinished resampling.Formoreinformation,seeAuto SamplingSetuponpage 149. 4. Adjusttherecordinglevel. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandusethe RecordingLevelslidertoadjustthelevel. PlaywithKARMAturnedon,andusetheVALUE slidertoadjusttheRecordingLevelsliderashigh aspossiblewithoutallowingtheCLIP!indication toappear. Whenyouvefinishedmakingadjustments,press theSAMPLINGRECswitch. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnKARMA off. 5. Sample. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturniton. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoput theKRONOSinrecordreadymode. Playthekeyboard. Recordingwillstartthemomentyouplaythe keyboard. Whilerecordingcontinues,allthesoundyou produceusingthekeyboardorcontrollerswillbe recorded. PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostop recording. 6. Listentothesoundyouresampled. GototheSamplingP0:RecordingRecordingpage. PresstheSAMPLINGbutton,thentheEXITswitch, andthentheRecordingtabintheupperlineofthe LCDscreen. UseMultisampleSelecttoselectthemultisample thatyouresampled. PlaytheC2keytoheartheresampledsound. 7. Ifyouwanttoconvertthismultisampleintoa program,choosetheConvertMSToProgram pagemenucommand,selectthedesiredprogram, andexecutetheconversion. Formoreinformation,seeConvertinga MultisampletoaProgramonpage 146.

148

Sampling in Program and Combination modes Auto Sampling Setup

Auto Sampling Setup


TheKRONOSprovidesalotofflexibilityin samplingwhichmeansthattherearesometimesalot ofparameterstobesetup.TheAutoSamplingSetup menucommandprovidesshortcutstosetupallofthe parametersforvariouscommonsamplingtasks, includingresampling,samplingfromtheaudioinputs, andrestoringinitializedsettings. InthisexamplewellexplainhowyoucanuseAuto SamplingSetuptomakethesettingsdescribedunder ResamplingaKARMAphraseinProgrammodeon page 148. 1. Carryoutsteps1and2ofResamplingaKARMA phraseinProgrammodeonpage 148. 2. PresstheAudioInput/Samplingtabtogotothe P0:PlayAudioInput/Samplingpage. 3. ChoosetheAutoSamplingSetuppagemenu command.Adialogboxwillopen. 4. Makethefollowingsettingsinthedialogbox. ResampleProgramPlay:On Thismakestheappropriatesettingsforresampling yourplayingonaprogram. Saveto:RAM TheresampleddatawillbewrittenintoRAM memory. ConverttoProgram:On Program:asdesired Afterresampling,thedatawillautomaticallybe convertedintotheprogramnumberyouspecifiedin Program. 5. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand. TheKRONOSwillmaketheappropriatesettingsfor resampling. 6. Resampleyourplayingasdescribedinsteps4and 5oftheprecedingsection. 7. Listentothesoundyouresampled. GototheProgramP0:PlayMainpage.Pressthe PROGRAMbutton,thentheEXITswitch,andthen theMaintabintheupperlineoftheLCDscreen. SelecttheprogramyouspecifiedforProgramin thedialogbox. PlaytheC2keyandyouwillhearthesoundyou resampled.

Mixing a KARMA drum phrase with a live guitar input, and sampling the result
HereshowyoucanresampleKARMAtogetherwith anexternalaudioinputsource. Inthisexample,wewillexplainhowaguitar connectedtotheAUDIOINPUTjackcanbeplayed alongtoadrumphraseplayedbytheKRONOS,and howbothcanbesampledtogether. Samplingcanbeperformedinasimilarwayin CombinationandSequencermodesaswellasin Programmode. 1. PressthePROGRAMbuttontoenterProgram mode,andselectthedrumprogramthatyouwant toresample. 2. TurnKARMAon(KARMAON/OFFswitchlit), playthekeyboard,andverifythatthedrum phraseplays. TurnLATCHon.PresstheLATCHswitchtomakeit light. Alsoadjustthetempoqasdesired. 3. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnoff KARMA. 4. ConnectyourguitartotherearpanelAUDIO INPUT1jack. PresstheAUDIOINPUTMIC/LINEswitchinward toselecttheLINEposition,andsettheLEVELknob ataboutthecenter.
Guitar Effect unit

LINE

Ifyouconnectaguitarwithpassivepickups(i.e.,a guitarthatdoesnotcontainapreamp),youwillbe unabletosampleitatthecorrectlevelbecauseofthe impedancemismatch.Suchguitarsshouldbe routedthroughapreamporaneffectunit. 5. PresstheAudioIn/SamplingtabtogototheP0: PlayAudioInput/Samplingpage. Makethefollowingsettings. AudioInput UseGlobalSetting:Off INPUT1 BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):L/R Pan:asdesired Level:127 RECBus:Off TheinputfromAUDIOINPUT1willbesenttothe L/Rbus.

149

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

RECORDINGLEVEL RecordingLevel:0.0 Thisisthedefaultsettingforresampling. SamplingSetup SourceBus:L/R ThesoundsenttotheL/Rbuswillbesampled. Trigger:SamplingSTARTSW PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchtoenterrecord standbymode.ThenpresstheSAMPLING START/STOPswitchtostartsampling. MetronomePrecount:4 WhenyoupresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchto enterrecordstandbymodeandthenpressthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostartsampling, afourbeatcountwillsound,andthenrecording willbegin.(Themetronomewillnotsoundduring recording.) Saveto:RAM ThesamplewillberecordedtoRAMmemory. Mode:Stereo ThesoundoftheinternalL/Rchannelswillbe sampledinstereo. MetronomeSetup Bus(Output)Select:L/R Level:asdesired TheoutputofthemetronomewillbesenttotheL/R bus. 6. Playyourguitaratthevolumethatyouwillbe recording. IfthedisplayindicatesADCOVERLOAD!(AD converterinputoverload),turntherearpanel [LEVEL]knobtowardMINtoadjustthelevel appropriately. Thebestaudioqualitywillbeobtainedatthe highestpossiblelevelthatdoesnotcausean overload;i.e.,alevelthatisslightlybelowthepoint whereADCOVERLOAD!isdisplayed. 7. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. Playyourguitar,andthelevelmeterwillindicate thevolumeatwhichtheguitarwillbesampled.

PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturniton, playthekeyboardtostartthedrumphrase,and playyourguitarwhileadjustingthefinalvolume. IftheCLIP!indicationappears,usetheVALUE controllertolowertheRecordingLevelslider (locatedintherightsideofthedisplay)below+0.0 toanappropriatelevel. Ifthebalancebetweeninstrumentsisnottoyour liking,usetheLEVELknobortheperformance editorAmpLeveltoadjustthebalance. 8. Whenyouhavefinishedmakingadjustments, presstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnoff KARMA. 9. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturniton, andthenpresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchto enterrecordreadymode. WhenyoupresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOP switch,acountdownwillbegin.Playthekeyboard duringthecountdown. Afterafourbeatcountdown,recordingwillstart. Playyourguitar.KARMAwillalsostartafterthe countdown. 10.PresstheSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostop recording. 11.PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnitoff. 12.Listentothesoundthatwassampled. GototheSamplingP0:RecordingRecordingpage. PresstheSAMPLINGbutton,thentheEXITswitch, andthentheRecordingtabintheupperlineofthe LCDscreen. UseMultisampleSelecttoselectthemultisample thatyouresampled. PlaytheC2key,andyouwillhearthesoundthat wasresampled. 13.Ifyouwanttoconvertthismultisampleintoa program,choosetheConvertMSToProgram pagemenucommand,selectthedesiredprogram, andexecute.(SeeConvertingaMultisampletoa Programonpage 146)

Sampling a guitar from the audio inputs, while listening to a KARMA drum phrase
Herewellexplainhowyoucansamplejustthesound ofanexternalinputsourcewhilelisteningtoa performancegeneratedbyKARMA. Youcandothisbymodifyingthesettingsinstep5of theprecedingMixingaKARMAgenerateddrum phrasetochangethemasfollows. INPUT1 BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):Off RECBus:1 TheinputfromAUDIOINPUT1willbesenttoREC bus1. SamplingSetup SourceBus:REC1/2 ThesoundsenttoRECbus1/2willbesampled.The soundoftheinternaltonegeneratorsenttotheL/R buswillnotbesampled. Mode:LMono ThesoundoftheinternalLchannelwillbesampled inmonaural. Modifythesettingsasshownabove,sampleyour playing,andthenlistentothesample.

150

Sampling in Sequencer mode In-Track Sampling

Sampling in Sequencer mode


InSequencermode,youcansamplejustlikein ProgramandCombinationmodes,buttheresan additionaloptionuniquetoSequencermode:InTrack Sampling. InTrackSamplingletsyousampleanaudiosource thatsbeingplayedalongwiththesong.Duringthe samplingprocess,thesystemwillautomaticallycreate aProgramtoholdthenewsample,andMIDInotesto playitinsyncwiththesong.Youmightusethisto recordavocalorguitarpart,forinstance.

In-Track Sampling
Inthisexample,wellshowthesoundofaguitar connectedtotheAUDIOINPUT1jackcanbeaddedto yoursong. 1. InSequencermode,selectthesongtowhichyou wanttoaddtheguitarsound. Youcaneithercreateasong,oruseDiskmodeto loadapreviouslycreatedsong. 2. ConnectyourguitartotherearpanelAUDIO INPUT1jack. PresstheAUDIOINPUTMIC/LINEswitchinward toselecttheLINEposition,andsettheLEVELknob ataboutthecenter. Ifyouconnectaguitarwithpassivepickups(i.e.,a guitarthatdoesnotcontainapreamp),youwillbe unabletosampleitatthecorrectlevelbecauseofthe impedancemismatch.Suchguitarsshouldbe routedthroughapreamporaneffectunit. 3. GototheSequencerP0:Play/RECAudio Input/Samplingpage. 4. WewillbemodifyingtheAudioInputsettings,so turntheInputUseGlobalSettingoff. 5. ChoosetheAutoHDR/SamplingSetuppagemenu command. Thedialogboxwillappear. 6. ChooseInTrackSampling. 7. MakethefollowingsettingsforInTrack Sampling. SourceAudio:AudioInput1/2 TheinputfromtheAUDIOINPUT1and2jacks willbesampled. MonoL/MonoR/Stereo:MonoL Thesoundwillbesampledinmono. To:asdesired ThetrackyouwanttouseforInTrackSampling. MIDInotedatatotriggerthesamplewillbe recordedinthetrackyouselected. Program:asdesired Theconvertdestinationprogramnumber.When samplingiscompleted,anewmultisamplewillbe automaticallycreated,convertedtoaprogram,and assignedastheprogramforthetrack. 8. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand. PreparationsforInTrackSamplingarenow completed. Letstakealookatthesettingsthatweremade. AudioInput INPUT1 BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):Off Pan:L000 Level:127 RECBus:1/2 TheinputfromAUDIOINPUT1willbesenttoREC bus. RECORDINGLEVEL RecordingLevel:0.0 Thisisthedefaultsettingforsampling. SamplingSetup SourceBus:REC1/2 ThesoundsenttoREC1/2buswillbesampled. Trigger:SamplingSTARTSW PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchtoenterrecord standbymode.ThenpresstheSAMPLING START/STOPswitchtostartsampling. Saveto:RAM ThesamplewillberecordedtoRAMmemory. Mode:LMono Thesoundoftheinternalleftchannelwillbe sampledinmono. 9. Forthisexample,changethesettingsasfollows. Pan:C64 Trigger:Threshold,ThresholdLevel:asdesired SampleTime:asdesired

151

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

10.Playyourguitaratthevolumethatyouwillbe recording. IfthedisplayindicatesADCOVERLOAD!(AD converterinputoverload),turntherearpanel [LEVEL]knobtowardMINtoadjustthelevel appropriately. Forthebestsound,adjustthelevelashighas possiblewithoutallowingtheADCOVERLOAD ! indicationtoappear. 11.PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. Whenyouplayyourguitar,thelevelmeterwill indicatethevolumeatwhichtheguitarwillbe sampled. IfthedisplayindicatesCLIP!,usetheVALUE controllerstolowertheRecordingLevelslider(in therightofthedisplay)below+0.0toan appropriatelevel. 12.Whenyouhavefinishedmakingadjustments, presstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. 13.PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch,andthenthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter recordingstandbymode.

PresstheLOCATEswitchtoresetthesongplayback locationtothebeginningofthesong,andpressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplayback. Beginplayingatthepointwhereyouwantto record. SamplingwillbeginwhentheThresholdLevel volumeisexceeded. 14.Atthepointwhereyouwanttostopsampling, presstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch. Songplaybackandsamplingwillend. SamplingwillalsostopifthespecifiedSample Timeisreached. 15.PresstheLOCATEswitchtoreturntothe beginningofthesong,andpresstheSEQUENCER START/STOPswitch.Noticethatthesampled audioisplayedbackalongwiththesong. FordetailsonhowtheComparefunctionworksfor InTrackSampling,refertoInTrackSamplingon page 151.

Resampling a song to create a Wave file


YoucanrecordacompletedSongtoastereoWAVE file,andthenburnthatWAVEfiletoanaudioCD usingaconnectedUSBCDR/RWdrive.Formore information,seeCreatingandplayingaudioCDson page 195. 1. InSequencermode,selectthesongfromwhich youwanttocreateaWAVEfile. Eithercreateasong,oruseDiskmodetoloada previouslycreatedsong. Amaximumof80minutesforeithermonoorstereo canbewrittentomediainonesamplingoperation (mono:approximately440MB,stereo: approximately879MB). 2. GototheSequencerP0:Play/RECAudio Input/Samplingpage. 3. WewillbemodifyingtheAudioInputsettings,so turntheInputUseGlobalSettingoff. 4. ChoosetheAutoHDR/SamplingSetuppagemenu command. TheAutoHDR/SamplingSetupdialogboxwill appear. 5. Choose2chMixtoDisk. 6. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethecommand. PreparationsforInTrackSamplingarenow complete. AudioInput INPUT1&2,USB1&2,S/P DIFL&R BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.):Off RECBus:Off Turnoffthebussesforallsixaudioinputs. RECORDINGLEVEL RecordingLevel:0.0 Thisisthedefaultsettingforresampling. SamplingSetup SourceBus:L/R ThesoundsenttoL/Rbuswillbesampled.

152

Sampling in Sequencer mode Resampling a song to create a Wave file

Trigger:SequencerSTARTSW PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandSTART/STOP switchtoenterrecordstandbymode.Thenpress theSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostart recording. Saveto:Disk Thesamplewillbesavedtothedisk,directory,and filenamespecifiedinSelectDirectory/Filefor SampletoDisk. Mode:Stereo ThesoundoftheinternalL/Rchannelswillbe sampledinstereo. 7. UsethepagemenucommandSelectDirectory/File forSampletoDisktosetthedisk.directory,and filenamefortheWAVEfile. UseDriveSelectandtheOpenandUpbuttonsto selectthedirectoryinwhichtheWAVEfilewillbe saved. Pressthetexteditbuttontogotothetexteditdialog box,andenterafilename. LeaveTakeNo.checked.Thenumberattherightof TakeNo.willbeinputasthelasttwocharactersof thefilename. Thisnumberwillincrementeachtimeyousample, ensuringthatthefilenamewillnotbethesameeven ifyousamplerepeatedly. Afteryouhavemadethesettings,presstheDone buttontoclosethedialogbox. 8. SetSampleTimetothelengththatyouwantto sample. Setthistoavalueslightlygreaterthanthelengthof thesong. 9. SettheSampletoDiskparametertothedesired bitdepth. Youcansampletodiskateither16bitor24bit resolution. 10.Settherecordinglevel. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitch. Note:Itwilltakebetweenseveralsecondstonearlya minutefromthemomentyoupresstheSAMPLING RECswitchuntiltheKRONOSentersstandbymode (i.e.,untiltheSAMPLINGRECswitchchangesfrom blinkingtolit).Thistimeisrequiredinorderto allocatesufficientspaceonthedisk. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay backthesong,andadjustthesamplingvolume whileyouwatchthelevelmeters.Thedefault settingis0.0dB.Ifthelevelistoolow,usethe VALUEcontrollertoraisethelevelashighas possiblewithoutcausingtheCLIP!indicatorto appear. Whenyoufinishmakingadjustments,pressthe SAMPLINGRECswitch. PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtostop thesongplayback.ThenpresstheLOCATEswitch. 11.Startsampling. PresstheSAMPLINGRECswitchandthenthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoenter recordingstandbymode.

PresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtoplay backthesong.Samplingwillbeginatthesametime. Whenthesongfinishesplayingback,pressthe SAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtostopsampling. UsethepagemenucommandSelectDirectory/File forSampletoDisktoverifythattheWAVEfilewas created.SelectthefileandpresstheSAMPLING START/STOPswitchtolistentothesoundthatwas sampled.

153

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

User Sample Banks


Overview
UserSampleBanksbringthebenefitsofEXstoyour ownsamplelibraries.Youcanloadandplaygigabytes ofyourcustomorconvertedsamplesatonce,using VirtualMemory.Diskandmemorymanagementis easy:youcancreatesubsetsofUserSampleBanks,and mixandmatchpartsofdifferentbanks,without duplicatingsamplesondisk. Itsalsoeasytosharesoundswithfriendsand collaborators,sinceProgramsmaintainlinkstoUser SampleBanksevenwhensamplesaremovedondisk orloadedontodifferentsystems. TofreeallRAMforusebySamplingMode: 1. GotheKSCAutoLoadpage. 2. UncheckallselectedKSCfiles. 3. PresstheDoAutoLoadNowbutton. Aconfirmationdialogappears. 4. PressOKtoconfirm. Allsampledatawillbeunloaded,exceptfortheROM banks.

Saving User Sample Banks


SavingaKSCfilewhichincludesSamplingModedata automaticallycreatesaUserSampleBank.Todoso: 1. CreateyourownsetofsamplesinSampling Mode,loadpreviouslycreatedsamples,orload samplesfromAkaiorSoundFont2.0formats. 2. InDiskmode,gototheSavepage. 3. Selecttheinternaldisk(ifyouhavetwointernal disksinstalled,selecteitherone). YoucanalsosavetoaUSBstoragedevice,butinorder toworkasaUserSampleBank,thefilesmustbeonan internalSSD. 4. Inthemenu,selecttheSaveSamplingData command. 5. SettheIncludeparametertoSamplingModeData. ThissaveseverythingfromSamplingMode,andkeeps theKSCfilecleanbynotsavinglinkstoEXsorother UserSampleBanks.

Sampling Mode and User Sample Banks


SamplingModeandUserSampleBanksaretwo differentwaystoworkwithyoursampledata,andyou canswitchbackandforthbetweenthetwoas necessary. SamplingModeletsyoucreateandeditSamplesand Multisamples.However,itdoesnthaveaccessto VirtualMemory.WhenloadedasaUserSampleBank, thesamplesaremorelikeEXs;theycanaccessVirtual Memory,buttheycantbeedited. UseSamplingModetocreateandedityour SamplesandMultisamples,ortoimportsounds fromAkaiandSoundFont2.0formats. Whenyouredoneediting,loadthedataasaUser SampleBankinordertoaccessVirtualMemory. Atanytime,youcanloadthesampledatainto SamplingModeagain,toedittheexistingdataor addmoreSamplesorMultisamples. Programs,WaveSequences,andDrumKitswill rememberwhichMultisamplesandSamplestheyuse, regardlessofwhetherthedataisloadedintoSampling ModeorasaUserSampleBank.(Formore information,seeUserSampleBankIDsonpage 156.)

.KSC files
KSCstandsforKorgSampleCollection..KSCfiles containlinkstoSamplingMode,EXs,and/orUser SampleBankdata,includingMultisamples,Samples, andDrumSamples.Loadinga.KSCfileloadsallofthe linkeddata. Ifa.KSCincludeslinkstoSamplingModedata,other .KSCfilescanlinktothat.KSCasaUserSampleBank. Formoreinformation,seeCreatingandsaving.KSC filesonpage 165.

6. SetSamplingModeDataOptionstoAll. 7. GivetheKSCfileadescriptivename. 8. PressOKtosavethefile. Thatsit!YouvenowsavedaUserSampleBanktothe disk.Touseit,youllneedtoloaditasdescribedbelow.

Freeing up space in RAM


TocreateandeditdataforUserSampleBanks,youll useSamplingMode.Ifyoureworkingwithavery largesetofsamples,youmaywishtofreeupRAMby temporarilyunloadingallothersampledata. Important:thiswillclearalldatafromSampling Mode,aswellasunloadingallEXsandUserSample Bankdata.Ifyouhaveanyunsavededitstodatain SamplingMode,makesurethatyousavetodisk beforeproceeding!

Saving creates two KSC files


WhenyousaveaKSCwhichincludesSamplingMode data,twoKSCfilesarecreated: AKSCwiththenameyouvespecified,which includestheactualSamplesandMultisamplesfrom SamplingMode. AsecondKSCwhichincludeslinkstothefirst KSCsSamplingModeData,withLoadMethodset toVirtualMemory.ThenameforthisKSCisthe nameyouvespecifiedfollowedbythetext

154

User Sample Banks Resampling a song to create a Wave file

_UserBank.Forinstance,ifthefirstKSCisnamed BillGig.KSC,thesecondwillbe BillGig_UserBank.KSC.Thisisthefilethatyoull loadtoaccessthesampledataasaUserSample Bank. BothfilesmaycontainreferencestootherEXsorUser SampleBanks,dependingonthesettingoftheInclude parameterintheSavedialog.

6. PressOKtoloadtheUserSampleBank. Thatsit!AnyPrograms,WaveSequences,orDrum KitswhichusedthedatafromSamplingModewill automaticallyusethesamedatafromtheUserSample Bank. YoucanalsousetheKSCAutoLoadsettingstoloadit automaticallyatstartup,asdescribedin Automaticallyloadingsampledataonpage 164.

Editing User Sample Banks


Atanytime,youcanloadaUserSampleBanksdata intoSamplingModeandedittheSamplesor Multisamplesasdesired,oraddnewSamplesor Multisamples.Todoso: 1. GotothefolderinwhichyouvesavedyourKSC fromSavingUserSampleBanks,above. 2. Selectthe[name].KSCfiletheonewithout UserBankinthename. 3. PresstheLoadbutton. TheLoadKSCdialogwillappear. 4. Set.KSCAllocationtoClearSamplingModeData. Thisisimportant,inordertopreservetheUserSample BankID.Formoreinformation,seeUserSampleBank IDs,below. 5. PressOKtoloadthedata. 6. Editasdesired,butdontchangethenumberingof existingMultisamples(orSamples,ifyouveused themforDrumKits).Ifyouaddnew MultisamplesorSamples,addthemattheendof thelist. Programs,WaveSequences,andDrumKitsreferto MultisamplesandSamplesbytheirnumberinthe bank.Tomakesurethatexistingsoundscontinueto workproperly,keepthatnumberingthesame. 7. SavetheKSC. Fordetails,seeSavingUserSampleBanks,above.

Loading User Sample Banks


Oncesavedtodisk,UserSampleBankscanbeused muchlikeEXs.ToloadaUserSampleBank: 1. GotothefolderinwhichyouvesavedyourKSC fromSavingUserSampleBanks,above. 2. Selectthe[name]UserBank.KSCfile. 3. PresstheLoadbutton. TheLoadKSCdialogwillappear.

Converting older sounds


OlderPCGandKSCfileswillcontinuetoworkjustas theydidpreviously:RAMsampledatawillloadinto SamplingMode,andPrograms,WaveSequences,and DrumKitswillplaythatsampledata.UserSample Banksoffermanyadvantages,however,anditseasyto convertyouroldPCGsandKSCswithRAMsamples tothenewformat.Todoso: 1. LoadtheoldformatKSCfile,andthePCG(s) whichusetheKSCssamples. 4. IfyouvejustsavedtheKSCthatyouwanttoload, set.KSCAllocationtoClearSamplingModeData. ThiswillunloadthedatafromSamplingMode.Data inUserSampleBankscanbeloadedeitherinto SamplingMode(forediting),orasaUserSampleBank (forplaybackwithVirtualMemory),butnotbothat thesametime. 5. Fornow,leavetheLoadMethodsettothedefault of.KSCSetting. Theautomaticallycreated[name]_UserBank.KSCfile willbesettouseVirtualMemory. 2. FollowalloftheinstructionsunderSavingUser SampleBanksonpage 154. 3. GotoProgramMode,andselectaProgramwhich usestheKSCssamples. 4. IfitsanHD1Program,gototheP2:OSC/Pitch page;forSTR1orMOD7Programs,gotothe PCMOscpage. 5. Openthemenu,andselecttheRemap/MSSample Bankscommand. TheRemap/MSSampleBanksdialogappears. 6. SettheInparameterappropriately.

155

Sampling (Open Sampling System)

IfalloftheloadedsoundsusejustthisoneKSC,select AllPrograms,WaveSequences,andDrumKits. IfoneentirebankusesjustthisKSC,butotherbanks usedifferentKSCs,selecttheappropriatebank. IfsoundswithinasinglebankusemultipleKSCs, selecttheCurrentProgramoption.Forinstance,some userskeepallsamplerelatedProgramsinBankUSER G,butProgram000usesFriday.KSC,Program001uses Saturday.KSC,andsoon.TheCurrentProgramoption letsyoudealwitheachProgramindividually.There aresimilarcommandsforindividualWaveSequences andDrumKits. 7. SettheFromparametertoSmp:OldRAM. 8. SettheToparametertoSmp:[filename], matchingthenewnamefortheKSC. Thisisthenameyoucreatedinstep7underSaving UserSampleBanksonpage 154. 9. PressOK. AllreferencestotheoldRAMbankwillbechangedto usethenewUserSampleBank. 10.IfyouusedtheCurrentProgramoption,repeat theindividualremappingsasnecessary. 11.SaveaPCGfilewiththenewlyconverted Program,WaveSequence,andDrumKitdata.

WhentheGlobalSampleManagementpages UnloadAllcommandisusedforSamplingMode Data WhentheGlobalKSCAutoLoadpagesDoAuto loadNowcommandisused(unlessoneoftheauto loadedfilesincludesSamplingModeData,as describedbelow) Onsave,ifForcenewUserSampleBankIDis selected(seeForcenewUserSampleBankID, below) SamplingModeassumestheIDofanexistingKSC underthefollowingcircumstances: WhenaKSCwithSamplingModedataisloaded usingtheClearSamplingModeDataorClearAll options,orwhenSamplingModehasnotbeenused sincestartup Similartotheabove,butwhenloadingtheentire folderofSamplingModedatawhenbrowsing withinaKSC SamplingModekeepsitscurrentIDunderthe followingcircumstances: IfSamplingModehasbeenusedsincestartup,and aKSCisloadedintoSamplingModewith allocationsettoAppend WhenindividualSamplesand/orMultisamplesare loaded

User Sample Bank IDs


Underthehood,theKRONOSkeepstrackofUser SampleBanksbyaspecialIDsavedintheKSCfile. ThisletsthesystemfindandrecognizetheUser SampleBankifyouchangethenameorlocationonthe disk,andevenifitsusedonanotherKRONOS altogether. AnIDisinitiallyassignedwhenthesamplesare createdinSamplingMode.ThisIDstayswiththedata aslongasyouloadandsaveusingKSCsevenifyou savetoadifferentlocation,orwithadifferentname.It alsostayswiththedataregardlessofwhetherits loadedasaUserSampleBank,orloadedinto SamplingModeforediting. Itwillnotbepreserved,however,ifyouloadorsave individualSamplesorMultisamples. Iftherearemultiplefilesoninternaldiskswiththe sameID,theonewiththemostrecentmodification dateonewillbeused.KSCsonUSBstoragedevicesare ignoredforthispurpose. WhenyoulookatthebanknameinPrograms,Drum Kits,andWaveSequences,youllseethefullfilepath oftheassociatedKSCfile.

Force new User Sample Bank ID


ThisoptionisavailableintheSaveSamplingData dialog,butnotintheSaveAlldialog.Itshouldbeused onlyinspecialcases. Forinstance,youmightuseForcenewUserSample BankIDifyouhaveloadedaUserSampleBank, editeditsubstantially,andwishtosavetheresultasa totallynewUserSampleBank.Afterdoingso,youll alsoneedtousetheRemapMS/SampleBank ReferencesmenucommandtoassignPrograms,Wave Sequences,orDrumKitstousethenewbankinstead oftheoldone.

Limitations: KARMA Wave Sequencing and Tone Adjust


KARMA Wave Sequencing
Duetotechnicallimitations,KARMAWave SequencingselectionofMultisampleandDrum SampleBankssupportsonlyROM,thecurrent SamplingModedata,andEXs1EXs125. IfyouneedtouseKARMAWaveSequencingwith yourownsampledata,youmustloaditintoSampling Mode.

What triggers a change to the User Sample Bank ID?


SamplingModeisgivenanewIDunderthefollowing circumstances: Atsystemstartup IftheClearSamplingModeDataoptionisused whenloadingaKSCwhichdoesnotinclude SamplingModedata.

Tone Adjust MS Bank


Similarly,theToneAdjustMSBankmetaparameter supportsonlyROM,thecurrentSamplingModedata, andEXs1EXs125.ToneAdjustMS/WS/DKitSelect canstillbeusedtoselectdifferentMultisamplesor DrumSamplesfromwithinthecurrentbank, includingEXsabove125andUserSampleBanks,as longasMSBankisnotused.

156

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits


Global mode overview
InGlobalmodeyoucanmakeoverallsettingsthat applytotheentireKRONOS,suchasmastertune,key transpose,effectglobalswitch,globalMIDIchannel, andsystemclock. Inaddition,youcancreateuserDrumKits,Wave Sequence,andScales,makesettingsforthedamper pedalandassignablefootswitches/pedals,andspecify categorynamesforprogramsandcombinations. Globalmodepagestructure Page
P0: Basic Setup

Features
Basic settings for the entire KRONOS Audio input settings Sample management MIDI settings for the entire KRONOS MIDI controller settings in External mode Footswitch and pedal setup MIDI settings for the KARMA sliders, on-screen pads, and VJS User scales Edit category/sub category names for Programs, Combinations and KARMA Edit Wave Sequences Edit Drum Kits View system information Authorize options

P1: MIDI

P2: Controllers /Scales P3: Category Name P4: Wave Sequence P5: Drum Kit P6: Options Info

Note:Fordetailsonhowtoaccesseachmodeandpage, pleaseseeBasicoperationsonpage 17.

To save changes, you must use the Write command


EditstoGlobalmodeparameterswillnotbe preservedafterthepoweristurnedoffunlessyou firstsaveyoursettings.Threetypesofdataare handledinGlobalmode:WaveSequences(Global P4),userDrumKits(GlobalP5),andallotherglobal settings(GlobalP0P3).Eachtypeofdataisstored separately,andcanalsobesavedtointernalor externaldrivesinDiskmode. Formoreinformation,seeWritingGlobalsettings onpage 185,Savingtodisks,CDs,andUSB mediaonpage 186. NotethatComparecantbeusedinGlobalmode, exceptwheneditingWaveSequencesandDrum Kits.

157

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

Global Settings Basic Setup


Tuning and Transposing
Tuning to another instrument
Toadjustthetuninginfineincrements,inorderto matchotherinstrumentsorrecordedmusic: 1. PresstheGLOBALbuttontoenterGlobalmode. 2. PresstheBasictabtogototheBasicSetuppage. 3. AdjusttheMasterTunetothedesiredpitch. TheMasterTuneisadjustableoverarangeof50cents (onesemitone=100cents).WhenMasterTuneisat0, middleAistunedto440Hz. 4. SettheVelocityCurvetosuityourplayingstyle. VelocityCurve4isthedefault,andshouldworkfor mostplayers. Curve9isdesignedspecificallyforplayingpiano soundsfromtheweightedRH3keyboardsinthe73 noteand88notemodels. Fordetailsontheothercurves,seethegraphicbelow, aswellasVelocityCurveonpage 754ofthe ParameterGuide. Velocitycurves
Convert Position = PreMIDI
Velocity (Keyboard to MIDI Out) 127

Convert Position = PostMIDI


Velocity (MIDI In to sound engines) MAX

Transposing the keyboard


Youcanalsotransposethekeyboardinsemitones,for quickkeychanges(forinstance,ifthebanddecidesto playasonginFratherthanE).Todoso: 1. InGlobalmode,gototheBasicSetuppage. 2. AdjusttheKeyTransposeasdesired. Youcanadjustthetranspositionoverarangeof1 octave. 3. IfyoureusingMIDIortheinternalsequencer, presstheMIDItabtogotothemainMIDIpage. 4. SettheConvertPositionaccordingtowhetheror notyoureusinganexternalMIDIcontrollerto playtheKRONOS. PreMIDIisthenormalsetting.Thisappliesthe transposition(aswellasthevelocityandaftertouch curves,describedbelow)tobothMIDIoutputfromthe KRONOSkeyboard,andtheinternalsounds.Thisis alsorequiredinordertorecordtheoutputofthe curvesintotheinternalsequencer. PostMIDIappliesthetranspositionandcurvesto incomingMIDI,foradjustingtheKRONOSresponse toanexternalMIDIcontroller. Whensimplyplayingtheinternalsoundsfromthe KRONOSkeyboard,bothsettingsworkthesame.

5 4 3 2

Velocity effect
1

8 6 5 4 3 2 1 9

8 7 9

1 Soft

Strong

127

Keyboard

Transmitted Table Curve 19

Received Table Curve 4

Sound

Curve 4 MIDI

Curve 19

Pre

Post

Global Convert Position

5. SettheAfterTouchCurvetosuityourplaying style. AfterTouchCurve3isthedefault,andshouldwork formostplayers. Curve1requiresgreateramountsofpressure,while Curve5produceseffectswithonlylightpressure. Curves68areforspecialpurposes;formoredetails, seeAfterTouchCurveonpage 754oftheParameter Guide. AfterTouchcurves
For a setting of PreMIDI
After Touch (KBDMIDI Out) 127

Velocity and after touch curves: adjusting the keyboard response


Velocityandaftertouchcurvesletyouadjusttheway theKRONOSrespondstohowyouplayonthe keyboard.Thedefaultsettingsshouldworkformost players,buttherearemanyotherchoicestoletyou customizetheresponsetomatchyourownstyle. Tosetthevelocityandaftertouchcurves: 1. IfyoureusingMIDIortheinternalsequencer, presstheMIDItabtogotothemainMIDIpage. 2. SettheConvertPositionaccordingtowhetheror notyoureusinganexternalMIDIcontrollerto playtheKRONOS. SeeTransposingthekeyboard,above,fordetailson ConvertPosition. 3. PresstheBasictabtogototheBasicSetuppage.

For a setting of PostMIDI


After Touch (MIDI InTG) MAX

8:RANDOM
5 4 7 3 6 2 1

Aftertouch effect

4 7 6 3 2 1

8:RANDOM

0 Soft Strong 0 127

Bypassing the effects


Inserteffects,mastereffects,andtotaleffectscanbe bypassedglobally.ThisappliestotheentireKRONOS regardlessofthemode.Forexample,ifyouve connectedtheKRONOSsoutputstoanexternalmixer

158

Global Settings Basic Setup

andareusinganexternaleffectprocessortoapply reverborchorustothesound,youcanturnoffthe KRONOSsmastereffectsandtotaleffects.

IftheEffectGlobalSWIFX112Off,MFX1&2Off, andTFX1&2Offitemsarechecked,theinserteffects, mastereffect,willrespectivelybebypassed.

Tuning and transpose settings Velocity/aftertouch curve settings Effect bypass settings

KARMA & Drum Track settings

Memory protect settings Select the mode that is selected at power-on

Beep setting

Linking KARMA to Programs and Combinations


YoucanspecifywhethertheKARMAsettingswritten toaprogramorcombinationwillalsobeselectedwhen youselectthatprogramorcombination,orwhetherthe KARMAsettingswillnotchangewhenyouswitchthe programorcombination. WhentheKRONOSisshippedfromthefactory,the formersettingisselected.Youcanusethelattersetting ifyouwanttousethesameKARMAsettingsto generatephrasesandpatternswhileyouselectandtry outdifferentprogramsandcombinations. IftheLoadKARMASettingsWhenChanging ProgramorCombinationboxesareselected,selecting aprogramorcombinationrespectivelywillalsoselect theKARMAsettingsthatarewritteninthatprogram orcombination.

IfPowerOnModeissettoMemorize,KRONOSwill poweronusingthesamemodeandpagethatwere selectedwhenthepowerwasturnedoff.

Sounding a beep when you press the LCD screen


IfBeepEnableisselected,abeepwillsoundwhenyou pressanobjectintheLCDscreen.Uncheckthisitemif youdontwantabeeptosound.

Protecting the memory


IfoneormoreoftheMemoryProtectcheckboxesare checked,operationssuchaswriting,loading,orsong recordingwillbeprohibitedforthecorresponding typeofmemory.

Adjusting the brightness of the LCD


YoucanadjusttheappearanceoftheLCDdisplayby usingtheLCDSetupmenucommand,ontheGlobal BasicSetuppage.Todoso: 1. PresstheGLOBALswitchtoenterGlobalmode. 2. PresstheBasictabinthelowerline,andthenthe Basictablocatedaboveit. TheGlobalBasicSetuppagewillappear. 3. Fromthepagemenulocatedintheupperrightof theLCD,chooseLCDSetup. TheLCDSetupdialogwillappear. 4. Setthebrightnessasdesired 5. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmthechanges,or presstheCancelbuttontoreverttotheprevious settings.

Globally disabling KARMA and the Drum Track


IfAllKARMA/DTOffischecked,allKARMAand DrumTrackfunctionalitywillbeturnedoff.KARMA willnotstarteveniftheKARMAON/OFFswitchison, andtheDrumTrackwillnotstarteveniftheDRUM TRACKON/OFFswitchison.

Recalling the last-selected mode and page at power-on


ThestateofKRONOSwhenthepoweristurnedon willdependonthesettingofPowerOnMode. IfPowerOnModeissettoReset(factorysetting), KRONOSwillautomaticallyselecttheSetListmode P0:Playpage.

159

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

Global audio settings


Making default audio input settings
TheGlobalAudioInputpagecontrolsthedefault mixersettingsfortheaudioinputs,includinglevel, pan,effectsbussing,andsoon.Italsoletsyouroute themainL/Routputstoapairofindividualoutputs, forspecificapplicationsinliveperformanceand recording. EachProgram,Combination,andSongcaneitheruse theseGlobalaudioinputmixersettings,orhaveits owncustomsettings.ThisiscontrolledbytheUse GlobalSettingparameter,ontheProgram, Combination,orSongsAudioInput/Samplingpage. ThedefaultforUseGlobalSettingisOn(checked). Thisletsyouchangefreelybetweendifferent Programs,Combis,andSongswithoutaffectingthe audioinputs. Also,anyeditsmadeinthemodesAudio Input/SamplingpagewillaffecttheGlobalsetting,and viceversa. Ontheotherhand,itmaysometimesbeconvenientto saveaparticularmixersetupwithanindividual Program,Combi,orSong,tosetupspecialsubmixer settingsoreffectsprocessingforparticularinputs.For example,youcansetupaProgramtouseamicinput withavocoder,asdescribedunderVocoder(Program mode)onpage 861oftheParameterGuide. Inthiscase,settheProgram,Combi,orSongsUse GlobalSettingtoOff(unchecked),andtheaudio inputswillusethecustomsettings. Withthisinmind,theGlobalsettingsapplyinthe followingsituations: Whenthispage(GlobalAudioInput)isopen. InProgram,Combination,andSequencermodes,if theAudioInput/SamplingpagesUseGlobal SettingcheckboxisOn(checked).Thiscanbeset independentlyforeachProgram,Combination,and Song. InotherpagesofGlobalmode,ifyouswitchto GlobalmodefromaProgram,Combi,orSongwith UseGlobalSettingsettoOn(checked). Similarly,inDiskmode,ifyouswitchtoDiskmode fromaProgram,Combi,orSongwithUseGlobal SettingsettoOn(checked).

MIDI settings
Global MIDI Channel
TheGlobalMIDIChannelisthemostimportantMIDI relatedsettingintheKRONOS.Itdeterminesthemain MIDIchannelusedforbothProgramandCombination modes,forinstance.TosettheGlobalMIDIChannel: 1. GototheGlobalP1:MIDIpage. 2. IntheMIDISetupsection,settheMIDIChannel asdesired. 3. UsetheWriteGlobalSettingmenucommandto savetheMIDIClocksetting. Formoreinformation,seeWritingGlobalsettingson page 185.

Synchronizing to a MIDI-connected computer


IfyouwanttosynchronizetheKRONOStempotoa computerconnectedviaMIDI: 1. GototheGlobalP1:MIDIpage. 2. IntheMIDISetupsection,settheMIDIClockto AutoMIDI. 3. UsetheWriteGlobalSettingmenucommandto savetheMIDIClocksetting. Formoreinformation,seeWritingGlobalsettingson page 185.

MIDI Clock synchronization


TheKRONOScanuseitsowninternaltempo,or synchronizetoexternalclocksfromeitherMIDIor USB. ThetwobestgeneralpurposesettingsareAutoMIDI andAutoUSB.Thesecombinethefunctionalityof InternalandExternalMIDI/USB,sothatyoudont havetomanuallyswitchbetweenthetwo: Ifexternalclocksarebeingreceived,theycontrol theKRONOStempo. Ifexternalclocksarenotbeingreceived,the KRONOSusesitsinternaltempoinstead.

External Controllers
YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetotransmitMIDICC messagestoexternalMIDIdevices.Eachslider,knob, andswitchcanbeassignedtoaseparateMIDI controllerandMIDIchannel. Youcancreateupto128differentExternalSetups.For instance,youmightmakeonesetupforcontrolling severaldifferentpiecesofMIDIgearonstage,another forcontrollingasoftwaresynthesizer(suchasoneof KorgsLegacyCollectionsynths),andsoon.

Synchronizing to a USB-connected computer


IfyouwanttosynchronizetheKRONOStempotoa computerconnectedviaUSB: 1. GototheGlobalP1:MIDIpage. 2. IntheMIDISetupsection,settheMIDIClockto AutoUSB.

160

Global Settings Pedal and other controller settings

Creating an External Setup


TocreateanewExternalSetup: 1. GototheGlobalP1:MIDIpage,andpressthe External1tab. TheExternal1pageappears,withMIDIchanneland CCassignmentsforeachoftheControlSurfacesliders, knobs,andswitches. 2. Atthetopofthepage,settheExternalModeSetup parametertotheExternalSetupthatyoudliketo edit. 3. Setupeachslider,knob,andswitchasdesired. SlidersandknobssendthefullrangeofCCvalues, from0to127.Switchesjustsendavalueof0when theyreturnedoff,and127whentheyreturnedon. GchmeansthatthesliderwilltransmitontheGlobal MIDIChannel. 4. UsetheWriteGlobalSettingmenucommandto savethenewExternalSetup. Formoreinformation,seeWritingGlobalsettingson page 185.

1. OntheGlobalExternal1page,settheExternal ModeSetupparametertotheExternalSetupthat youdliketouse. 2. PressthePROGbuttontoenterProgrammode. 3. UnderCONTROLASSIGN,presstheEXTbutton. ThisputstheControlSurfaceintoExternalmode. 4. GototheControlSurfacepage. LookattheSetupparameterontherighthandsideof thedisplay.NoticethattheExternalSetupyouselected instep1isstillactive. 5. UsetheSetupparametertoselectadifferent ExternalSetup. 6. PresstheCOMBIbuttontoenterCombination mode. 7. UnderCONTROLASSIGN,presstheEXTbutton. 8. GototheControlSurfacepage. LookattheSetupparameterontherighthandsideof thedisplay.NoticethattheExternalSetupyouselected inProgrammodeisstillactive.Theselectionstays activeuntilyouchangeit,regardlessofwhatsound youselectorwhichmodeyourein.Thismakesiteasy toselectdifferentKRONOSsoundswithoutdisrupting anyexternalMIDIcontrol,andviceversa.

Selecting External Setups


OnceyouvecreatedoneormoreExternalSetups, yourereadytouseittocontrolexternaldevices.First, youllwanttoselectthesetup.

Pedal and other controller settings


TheControllerstaboftheControllers/Scalespagelets youcontrolhowthefootswitchesandfootpedalwill work,aswellassettingupcontrollermappingsforthe KARMAcontrolsandthechordpads. Dmod(dynamicmodulation)sourceforcontrolling effects Portamentoon/off Sostenuto Softpedal Stepupordownthroughsounds,including Programs,Combinations,andSetListSlots Start/stopthesequencer Punchin/outonthesequencer Taptempo KARMAon/off DrumTrackon/off ChordModeon/off Selectminandmaxvaluesforcontrollers,including thejoystick,ribbon,knobs,andKARMAsliders. Triggerchordsfromtheonscreenpads

Setting up the Assignable Switch and Pedal

Assignable Pedal
Youcanspecifythefunctionthatwillbeperformedby anassignablepedal(theoptionalXVP10EXP/VEL pedalorEXP2footcontroller)connectedtothe ASSIGNABLEPEDALjack. ThisiscontrolledbytheFootPedalAssignparameter. Youcanchoosefromthefollowingfunctions: Mastervolume Alternatemodulationsource Effectdynamicmodulationsource Portamentopitchchangespeed

Assignable Switch
FootSwitchAssignletsyouassignafunctiontoa footswitch(suchastheoptionalKorgPS1)connected totherearpanelASSIGNABLESWITCHjack. Youcanchoosefromthefollowingfunctions: AMS(AlternateModulation)sourceforcontrolling sounds

161

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

Volume Pan Pan(followinginserteffects) Sendlevelstothemastereffects Duplicatethefunctionofanothercontroller,suchas thejoystickorribbon Note:Youcanusethisasasourceforalternate modulationoreffectdynamicmodulation,anduseit tocontrolprogramparametersoreffectparameters.In thiscase,setFootSwitchAssigntoFootSW(CC#82), andFootPedalAssigntoFootPedal(CC#04).

IfyouhaveconnectedaKorgPS1pedalswitch,set thisto()KorgStandard.Ifthepolarityisnotset correctly,thepedalwillnotfunctionappropriately. 3. EitherpressthePROGswitchtoenterProgramP0: Play,orpresstheCOMBIswitchtoenter CombinationP0:Play. Whenyoupressthefootswitch,theprogram/ combinationwillchange.

KARMA, Pad, Vector


Youcanassigncontrolchangemessagestothe KARMAswitchesandsliders,andtothevector joystickXaxisandYaxis. Youcanalsoassigneithercontrolchangemessagesor notenumberstopads18.Formoredetailsonpads andMIDI,seePlayingthepadsfromMIDIorthe keyboardonpage 35and21c:MIDICC#Assign VectorJoystick/Padsonpage 782oftheParameter Guide. Thedefaultsettingsshouldworkwellinmostcases.To restorethedefaultsettings,usetheResetController MIDIAssignpagemenucommandandchoose DefaultSetting.

Changing Programs and Combinations with the foot switch


1. PresstheFootSwitchAssignpopupbutton,and selecteitherProgramUporProgramDown. ProgramUpwillcausethenexthigherprogram numbertobeselectedeachtimeyoupressthefoot switch. ProgramDownwillcausethenextlowerprogram numbertobeselectedeachtimeyoupressthefoot switch. 2. SettheFootSwitchPolaritytothepolarityofthe footswitchyouhaveconnected.

Creating user scales


Creating an original scale, and assigning it to a Program
Youcanchoosethesescalesfromthefollowingpages. Mode
Program Combination Sequencer

Page
P1 Program Basic: Scale P2 Pitch: Scale, Use Programs Scale P2 Pitch: Scale, Use Programs Scale

Hereishowtosetthescaletypeforeachtimbrein Sequencermode. 1. Createauseroctavescaleorauserallnotesscale. Selectakey,andusetheVALUEcontrollerstoadjust thepitch.Therangeof99raisesorlowersthepitch approximatelyonesemitoneaboveorbelowthe standardpitch. Note:Youcanalsoselectakeybyholdingdownthe ENTERswitchandplayingthedesirednoteonthe keyboard. OntheUserScalepage,youcancreateyourown originalscales.TheseincludesixteendifferentUser OctaveScales,inwhichthepitchofeachnoteofthe octaveisrepeatedforalloctaves,andoneUserAll NoteScale,inwhichthepitchofeachofthe128notes canbespecifiedindependently. Byadjustingthepitchofeachkeyintherangeof99 cents,youcanraiseorloweritbyapproximatelyone semitonerelativetothenormalpitch. Theuserscalesyoucreateherecanbeusedby specifyingthescaleforaprogram,foreachtimbreofa combination,orforeachtrackofasong. Note:Youcancopyoneofthepresetscalesandeditit tocreateanoriginalscale.Todoso,usethepagemenu commandCopyScale. 2. PresstheSEQbuttontoenterSequencermode. 3. PresstheTrackParametertabandthenthePitch tabtogototheP2:TrackParametersPitchpage. 4. IfyouwanttheTracktousethescalesavedwith itsindividualProgram,checkthetracksUse ProgramsScalecheckbox. Tracksthatarenotcheckedwillusethescalespecified byScaleType(SongsScale). 5. SetType(SongsScale)toselectthescaleforthe currentlyselectedsong.

162

Global Settings Setting Category Names for Programs, Combinations, and KARMA

Setting Category Names for Programs, Combinations, and KARMA


Program, Combination, KARMA Category
TheCategoryNamepagesletyouassignnamestothe Program,Combination,andKARMAcategoriesand subcategories.

EditingtheCategorynamesisverysimple: 1. PresstheT(Text)buttonnexttothenameyoud liketoedit. Thetexteditingdialogwillappear. 2. Enterthenewname,andpressOK. ToeditaSubCategoryname: 1. ChoosetheMainCategoryfromthepopupmenu. 2. EdittheSubCategorynamesasdescribedabove.

163

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

Automatically loading sample data Using the KSC Auto-Load list to select which samples to load
Whats a KSC?
KSCstandsforKorgSampleCollection.KSCfiles containlinkstoSamplingMode,EXs,and/orUser SampleBankdata,includingMultisamples,Samples, andDrumSamples.LoadingaKSCfileloadsallofthe linkeddata. YoucanloadKSCfilesinDiskmode,andthe KRONOScanalsoautomaticallyloadoneormoreKSC filesatstartup.TheGlobalKSCAutoLoadpagelets youkeepalistofyourfavoriteKSCfiles,andselect whichonesfromthelistareloadedautomaticallyat startup.YoucanalsoloadKSCfilesimmediately, withoutrestarting,directlyfromthispage. Notethatyoucankeepfilesinthelistwithoutloading them.Forinstance,youmighthaveoneKSCfilefora recordingproject,andadifferentKSCfileforalive band.Thelistletsyoukeepthemathandforeasy loadingwhendesired,andmayoftenbemore convenientthanusingDiskmode. Note:TheKSCAutoLoadsettingsaresaved automatically,andarenotpartoftheGlobalPCGfile. Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds aftermakinganychangestotheAutoLoadsettings. Thisallowsthesystemtimetocompletetheprocess, whichincludessavingthesettingstotheinternal disk. Note:WhenyouloadaKSCinDiskmode,its automaticallyaddedtothelistonatemporarybasis.If youthenchecktheKSCsAutoloadcheckbox,the KSCisaddedtothelistjustasifithadbeenaddedby usingAddKSC.Otherwise,anyautomaticallyadded KSCsareclearedfromthelistatthenextstartup.

Removing a KSC from the list


YoucanalsoremoveKSCsfromthelist.Notethatthis onlyaffectsthecontentsofthelist;itdoesnotaffectthe filesthemselves.Todoso: 1. SelecttheKSCfilethatyoudliketoremove. 2. PresstheRemoveKSCbutton. Aconfirmationdialogappears. 3. PressOK. TheKSCfilewillberemovedfromthelist.

Selecting which KSC will be loaded


ToselectwhetherornotaKSCwillbeloaded: 1. CheckorunchecktheAutoloadboxnexttothe KSCnameinthelist. Thatsit!Thenexttimethatthesystempowerson,the checkedKSCfileswillbeloaded.Youcanalsoload themimmediately,asdescribedbelow.

Applying changes immediately


Normally,changestheautoloadsettingsonlytake affectafterthenextrestart.Youcanalsoloadandun loadKSCsimmediately. Important:thiswillclearallRAMandEXsdatain memory.IfyouhaveanyunsavededitstoRAM SampleorMultisampledata,makesurethatyousave youreditsbeforeproceeding! 1. PresstheDoAutoloadNowbutton. Aconfirmationdialogappears. 2. PressOK. AnychangesyouvemadebyaddingorremovingKSC fileswillbeapplied,withsampledataloadedandun loadedasnecessary.Notethatthismaytakesometime tocomplete. TheDoautoloadnowbuttonisgrayedoutifthe selectedsamplesexceedthemaximumavailableRAM, #ofMS,#ofSamples,or#ofMSIndexes.

Adding a KSC to the list


ToaddaKSCtothelist: 1. GototheGlobalBasicKSCAutoLoadpage. 2. PresstheAddKSCbutton. TheAddKSCfiledialogappears,allowingyouto selectKSCfilesfromdisk. 3. SelectthedesiredKSCfiles. YoucanuseMultipleselecttochoosemorethanone file,ifdesired. 4. PressAdd. TheselectedKSCfileswillbeaddedtothelist.

Loading into RAM or Virtual Memory


TheLoadMethodsetsthepreferredwaytoloadthe KSCssamples:loadthementirelyintoRAM,oruse VirtualMemory.

164

Automatically loading sample data Creating and saving .KSC files

Notethatifthedataisextremelylarge,andwouldnot fitintoRAMregardlessofwhichothersampleswere loaded,thedatawilluseVirtualMemoryregardlessof thissetting. ThesesettingsapplyonlytoEXsandUserSample Bankdata;SamplingModedataisalwaysloadedinto RAM. RAM:ThesampleswillbeloadedintoRAM.Thishas theadvantageofallowingreversesampleplayback. VirtualMemory:ThesampleswilluseVirtual Memory.Thisgenerallyallowsyoutoloadmorelarge samplesatonce.Notethatthesamplesmaystill requireasignificantamountofRAM. KSCSettings:KSCscanstoreseparateloadmethod settingsforeachMultisampleorDrumSample,based onthesettingswhentheKSCwassaved.SettingLoad methodtoKSCSettingsusestheseindividualsettings.

Freeshowstheamountofmemorystillavailable. ThenextsectionshowsthenumbersofMultisamples, Samples,andMultisampleIndexescurrentlyusedin SamplingMode,outoftheavailablemaximum.Data inEXsandUserBanksdoesnotcounttowardsthese maximums. Multisamplesshowsthecurrentnumberof MultisamplesinSamplingMode,outofthemaximum of4,000. SamplesshowsthenumberofSamplesinSampling Mode,outofthemaximumof16,000. MSIndexesshowsthetotalnumberofIndexesinall MultisamplesinSamplingMode,outofthemaximum of16,000.

Memory capacity exceeded


IfthesizeofthesampledatainMBaddsuptogreater thanthetotalavailablememory,thenthereareseveral indicationsinthegraphic: TheFreeboxturnsred,andshowstheamountby whichtheselecteddataexceedstheavailable memory,asanegativenumber ThewordOVERappearsinredtotherightofthe Freebox,withthreeexclamationpointsonasecond line

Memory usage graphic


Thisshowstheamountofmemoryusedbythe differenttypesofsamples,alongwiththeslotsusedfor SamplingModeMultisamples,Samples,and MultisampleIndexes(keyzoneswithinMultisamples).

Show Current or Selected Auto-Load


Thisselectswhetherthegraphicshowsthecurrent stateofmemory,orthestateofmemoryasitwouldbe afterdoinganautoloadusingthecurrentsettings. ItspossiblefordifferentKSCfilestorefertothesame sampledata;forinstance,twoKSCfilesmaypointto thesamesetofGrandPianomultisamples.Thesystem takesnoteofthis,sothattheredundantdataiscounted onlyonce. EXS/USRBANKshowstheamountofmemoryused forsamplesinEXsandUserSampleBanks. SAMPLINGshowstheamountofmemoryusedfor samplesinSamplingMode.

Max numbers exceeded for Sampling Mode Multisamples, Samples, or Multisample Indexes
Asnotedabove,SamplingModecanhaveupto4,000 Multisamples,16,000Samples,and16,000Multisample Indexes.Ifanyoftheselimitswouldbeexceededby theselectedautoload,thentherearetwoindicationsin thegraphic: Thenumbersfortheaffecteddatatype(e.g., numberofSamples)areshowninred Thebargraphforthedatatypeturnsred,instead ofblue,andextendstofilltheentirelength

Creating and saving .KSC files


Creating a subset of PRELOAD.KSC
Youmaydecidethatyouwanttoremovesomeofthe factoryloadedsamplesfrommemory,inordertomake roomforoptionalKorgorthirdpartyEXs,orforyour ownsamples.Thisiseasytodo.Youcanunloadan entireEXs,ifyouwish,orunloadindividual MultisamplesorDrumSamples. Unloadingdoesnotaffectthedatastoredondisk;it onlychangeswhatiscurrentlyloadedintomemory. TheUnloadalldatafromselectedbankdialogwill appear. 3. Selectthedesiredbank(suchasanEXs). 4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirm,orCanceltoexit thedialogwithoutmakingchanges. 5. ProceedtotheinstructionsunderSavingaKSC file,below.

Unloading individual items


TounloadindividualMultisamples,DrumSamples,or Samples: 1. GototheGlobalSampleManagementpage. 2. Abovethelistofsampledata,selectthedesired BankandType. ForEXsandUserSampleBanks,thepossibleTypesare MultisampleorDrumSample.ForSamplingMode,the possibleTypesareMultisampleorSample. 3. Selectthedesireditems(Multisamplesor Samples)fromthelist.

Unloading an entire bank of data


Tounloadanentirebankofdataatonce: 1. GototheGlobalP0:SampleManagementpage. Thispageofferstoolsformanagingthesampledata currentlyloadedintotheKRONOS. 2. Inthemenu,selecttheUnloadallinbank command.

165

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

Toselecttwoormoreitemsatonce,enablethe MultipleSelectcheckbox. 4. PresstheUnloadbutton. Aconfirmationdialogwillappear. 5. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirm,orCanceltoexit thedialogwithoutmakingchanges. Sampledatamaybesharedbytwoormore MultisamplesorDrumSamples.IfaSampleisused onlybytheMultisampleorDrumSamplebeing unloaded,theSamplewillbeunloadedaswell.Ifthe Sampleisusedelsewhere,itwillstayloaded.

Inordertonavigatebackoutofthe.KSCfile,thismust bedisabled. 14.PresstheUpbuttonseveraltimes,untilyoure backattherootlevelofthedisk. 15.ProceedtotheinstructionsunderSavingaKSC file,below.

Saving a KSC file


1. InDiskmode,gototheSavepage. 2. Inthemenu,selecttheSaveSamplingData command. Adialogappears.Therearemanyoptionshere;you cansaveeitherSamplingModeData,LinkstoEXsand UserSampleBanks,orboth.Therearealsovarious optionsforsavingonlyasingleMultisampleorSample fromtheuserdata.Inthiscase,weregoingtosave everything. 3. SetIncludetoBothSamplingMode&Links. 4. SetSamplingModeDataOptionstoAll. 5. GivetheKSCfileadescriptivename. 6. PressOKtosavethefile. Thatsit!Youvenowcreatedandsavedyourown.KSC file.Youcannowloadthislater,orsetitto automaticallyloadatstartup. Ifyouvecreatedthis.KSCfileasasubsetof PRELOAD.KSCtomakeroomforothersamples,make suretodisableautoloadforPRELOAD.KSCas describedunderSelectingwhichKSCwillbeloaded onpage 164. Toreloadyourprevioussetofautoloadedsamples, followtheinstructionsunderApplyingchanges immediatelyonpage 164.

Creating a new KSC by loading individual Multisamples


YoucanalsoloadafewMultisamplesfromanexisting KSC,andthensaveouttheresultasanewKSC. Important:thisexamplewilldeleteanySamplesor MultisamplesinSamplingMode!Makesurethatyou saveanydatathatyouwanttokeep. 1. GototheDiskLoadpage. 2. Selecta.KSCfileondisk. 3. PresstheOpenbutton. Yourenowlookinginsidethe.KSCfile.Eventhough the.KSCfileisjustalist,pointingtootherfiles,you canbrowsethroughitonthediskasifitcontained directories.AtthetopleveloftheKSCfile,youllsee oneormorefolders,dependingontheKSC:onefor SamplingModeData,andoneforeachreferenced UserSampleBankorEXs.Ifthe.KSCfiledoesnthave atypeofdata,therewontbeafolderforit. 4. Selecttheoneofthefolders,andpressOpento lookinside. UserSampleDatawillcontainoneortwofolders,for MultisamplesandSamples.Usually,therewillbeboth. EXsandUserSampleBankfolderswillcontainoneor twofolders,forMultisamplesandDrumSamples. 5. SelectafolderofMultisamples,andpressOpento lookinside. 6. TouchtheMultipleSelectcheckboxatthebottom ofthescreen,sothatitschecked. 7. TouchafewMultisamplestoselectthem. 8. PresstheLoadbutton. 9. AnAreYouSuremessageappears,toconfirmthat youwanttoloadmultiplefiles;pressOK. TheLoaddialogappears. 10.SetSample&MSAllocationtoClearAll. Whenwesavethe.KSCfile,wellbeincludingallof theloadedsamples.Thisoptionletsusstartwitha cleanslate. 11.IfyoureloadingEXsorUserSampleBankdata, settheLoadMethodasdesired. SeeLoadingintoRAMorVirtualMemoryon page 164. 12.PressOKtoloadtheMultisamples. Now,onlytheselectedMultisamplesareloaded. 13.UnchecktheMultipleSelectcheckbox.

166

Connecting to computers via USB Ethernet and FTP Creating and saving .KSC files

Connecting to computers via USB Ethernet and FTP


Overview
YoucanuseaseparatelypurchasedUSBEthernet adaptorandtheKRONOSsbuiltinFTPserverforfast, easyfiletransferwithpersonalcomputers.For instance,youcan: backupfilestoyourcomputer transfersamplestotheKRONOS organizeandrenamefilesanddirectoriesonthe KRONOSinternaldisks Ifyouneedmoreinformationabouthowtoconfigure yourFTPsoftware,seeitsdocumentation. Afterconnecting,youshouldbeabletoseetheinternal disk(s)ofyourKRONOS.YoucanthenuseyourFTP clientsoftwaretotransferfilesbetweentheKRONOS andyourcomputer.

Network Troubleshooting
TheStatusparametershowsthecurrentstateofthe KRONOSnetworkconnection.Normalstatesare showninblacktext,anderrorsareshowninred. IftheStatusshowsanerror,trythefollowing: 1. PresstheConfigurebuttontoopentheConfigure TCP/IPdialog. 2. PressOKtoclosethedialog. ThiswillmakeKRONOSattempttoreconnecttothe network;watchtheStatusparametertoseeits progress. 3. Makesurethatallethernetcablesareconnected properly. Ifpossible,itssometimeshelpfultoswapthecables themselves. Networktroubleshootingisoutsidethescopeofthis manual,buthereareafewotherthingstotry: 4. Ifpossible,useDHCPinsteadofmanual addressing. 5. TryrestartingtheDHCPserver(usually,thiswill bethenetworkrouter).

Important: compatible USB ethernet adaptor required


TheKRONOSsupportsaspecificsetofofftheshelf USBEthernetadaptors.Foracompletelist,seeUSB EthernetandFTPsupportonpage 25.

Whats FTP?
FTPstandsforFileTransferProtocol,andisa standardwaytoaccessfilesovernetworks.Youcan useFTPtotransferfilesbetweentheKRONOSinternal disk(s)andanymoderncomputersystem. TheKRONOSisanFTPserver,andyourcomputer willbetheFTPclient.FreeFTPclientsoftwareis availableforallmodernoperatingsystems;somemay includebuiltinFTPsupport.Ifyoudontalreadyhave FTPclientsoftware,trysearchingforfreeftpclient foryouroperatingsystem(e.g.,WindowsorMac).

Connecting to the KRONOS via FTP


OntheKRONOS: 1. ConnectacompatibleUSBethernetadaptor. 2. Connectanethernetcablefromtheadaptortoyour localnetwork. Forconnectiontoawirelessnetwork,youllneedto useawirelesstoethernetbridge. 3. GototheGlobal05Networkpage. ThispageletsyousetuptheUSBethernetconnection andconfiguretheFTPserver. 4. SettheUserNameandPasswordasdesired. Theusernamemustbeatleastonecharacter,andcan beupto32characters,includingletters,numbers,and dashes.Thepasswordmaybeleftblank,ifyouarenot concernedaboutsecurity;liketheusername,itcanbe upto32characters. 5. Leavetheotherparameterssettotheirdefaults. 6. NotetheIPaddressshownintheTCP/IPsection. Thiswillbesomethinglike10.0.1.2,or192.168.1.2. YourenowreadytoconnecttotheKRONOSfrom yourcomputer. Onyourcomputer: 7. Ifyouhaventalreadydoneso,installFTPclient software. 8. IntheFTPclientsoftware,connecttotheIP addressfromstep6above,withthenameand passwordfromstep4.

167

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

Using Wave Sequences Wave Sequence Overview


Whats a Wave Sequence?
WaveSequencesplaybackaseriesofdifferent Multisamplesovertime.Youcanusethistocreatea varietyofuniquetimbralandrhythmiceffects,as describedbelow. WaveSequencesaresimilartoDrumKits,inthatyou createandedittheminGlobalmode,andthenuse theminPrograms.InHD1Programs,youcanuse WaveSequencesjustasyouwouldnormal Multisamples,includingvelocityswitchesor crossfades,layeringdifferentWaveSequencesonthe twoOscillators,andsoon. Alsolikedrumkits,whenyouplayaWaveSequence inGlobalmode,itwillusethesettingsfromthe previouslyselectedProgramorCombi. Youcancreatemanydifferenteffectswithwave sequences,fromsubtletoextreme.Hereare descriptionsofthreecommonuses:rhythmicWave Sequences,crossfadingWaveSequences,andvelocity switchedWaveSequences.

Velocity-Switching Wave Sequences


BysettingeachstepsdurationtoGATE,andthen modulatingtheStartStepbyvelocity,youcancreatea soundwithupto64velocityswitches.Forinstance, youcanusethistoswitchbetweenalargenumberof differentattacktransients.

Wave Sequence banks


TherearebuiltinfactorysoundsintheInternalbank (I000throughI139)aswellassomeoftheuserbanks, asshownbelow.Youcanoverwritethemifyouwish, butdoingsomaychangethesoundsofthefactoryHD 1Programs,aswellastheCombiswhichusethem. USERBthroughUSERGGareemptywhenshipped fromthefactory.Youcanusetheseforstoringsounds thatyoucreateyourself,optionalsoundbanksfrom Korg,orthirdpartysoundlibraries.Eachuserbank contains32WaveSequences. WaveSequencebankcontents Bank Contents
Factory Wave Sequences Initialized Wave Sequences Factory Wave Sequences Initialized Wave Sequences

Rhythmic Wave Sequences


RhythmicWaveSequencesuseshortorabrupt crossfades,sothattransitionsbetweenthedifferent Multisamplescreatearhythmicphrase.Flexibleswing amount,rests,andtiesletyoubuildcomplexpatterns, whichyoucanthensynctoKARMAandthesystem tempo.

INT 000139 INT 140149 USERA 0024 USERA 2531 USERB00G31 USERBB00GG31

Crossfading Wave Sequences


Byusinglongdurationsandcrossfadetimes,Wave Sequencescanproducecomplex,evolvingtimbres. ModulatingtheStartStep,Position,andDuration makesthesoundevenmoreorganic,sothateverynote canplaytheWaveSequencealittledifferently.

Programming Basics
TheWaveSequenceparametersarespreadovertwo pages.TheSeqParameterspagehascontrolsforthe WaveSequenceasawhole,suchasthestartandend steps,looping,andmodulation. TheStepParameterspagegoesdeeperintothe structureoftheWaveSequence,allowingyoutoedit eachofthe64Steps. Programs,Combinations,andSongsalsohavea handfulofWaveSequencerelatedparameters,tomake iteasiertofitWaveSequencesinwithothersounds andrhythmiccomponents(suchasKARMA). TheWaveSequencegraphic,shownonboththeSeq ParametersandStepParameterspages,givesyoua quickoverviewofthesequence,ataglance: Thecurrentstepismarkedbyaredarrow. RedboxesareMultisamplesteps. GreenboxesareTiesteps. WhiteboxesareReststeps. ThelengthoftheWaveSequence,fromtheStart SteptotheEndStep,isshownbyarectangular outline. TheLoopishighlightedinblue. OntheStepParameterspage,thehorizontalscroll baratthetopofthegraphicshowsyoutheeight stepscurrentlydisplayedonthescreen. AtthebottomrightofthegraphicisaSolobutton. Whenthisisturnedon,theWaveSequencewill playonlythecurrentstep,includingitsfadeinand fadeout.

168

Using Wave Sequences Adjusting the sound of an individual step

WaveSequencegraphic

Whats in a step?
WaveSequenceshave64steps(althoughyoudont havetouseallofthemseeSettingthelengthofthe sequenceonpage 169).Eachstepincludes: Atypesetting,whichmakesthestepeitherplaya Multisample,continuetheprevioussteplikeatied note,orplayonlysilencelikeamusicalrest. AselectedMultisample,whichsetsthebasicsound ofthestep. MultisampleReverseandStartOffsetparameters, whichmodifythebasicsoundoftheMultisample. Volume,coarsetuning,andfinetuningforthe Multisample. Aduration,whichcontrolshowlongthesteplasts. Youcansetthedurationineithermillisecondsor musicalbeats. Acrossfadetime,whichsetshowlongittakesto fadeintothenextstep. Fadeinandfadeoutshapesforthecrossfade,for subtlecontrolofthetransitionbetweenthisstep andthenextstep. TwoAMSoutputvalues,whichcanbeusedto controlotherProgramparameters.

3. SettheEndStepasdesired. ThereadonlyLengthparameterwillshowyouthe totalnumberofstepsbetweenthetwopoints.

Setting up the loop


WaveSequencescanloop,sothatsomeorallofthe stepsareplayedrepeatedlylikeadrumloop,oraloop inasequencer. Youcansetthestartandendoftheloopseparately fromthestartandendoftheWaveSequenceitself.The loopcaneitherplayforaslongasthenoteisplayed,or repeataspecifiednumberoftimes.Finally,youcan choosewhethertheloopplaysforwards,plays backwards,oralternatesbetweenbackwardsand forwards. Tosetuptheloop: 1. SettheLoopStartandEndStepsasdesired. 2. SettheLoopDirection. ForwardsplaysfromtheStartSteptotheLoopEnd, andthenskipsbacktotheLoopStart. Backwards/ForwardsplaysfromtheStartSteptothe LoopEnd,thenbackwardsfromtheLoopEndtothe LoopStart,andthenforwardsagaintotheLoopEnd, andsoon. BackwardsplaysfromtheStartSteptotheLoopEnd, thenbackwardsfromtheLoopEndtotheLoopStart, andthenskipsbacktotheLoopEnd,andsoon. 3. SettheLoopRepeats. Youcansetthelooptorepeataspecificnumberof times,between1and127.Youcanalsomaketheloop keepplayingforaslongasthenoteisheld(theINF setting),ornotrepeatatall(theOffsetting).

Setting the length of the sequence


Youcanuseanythingfrom1to64stepsinaWave Sequence.Youalsodonthavetostartonstep1.Toset thelengthofthesequence: 1. GototheSeqParameterspage. 2. SettheStartStepasdesired. YoucanalsomodulatetheStartStepinrealtime;for moreinformation,seeStartStepmodulationon page 174.Modulatingthestartstepdoesnotchange theEndStep.

Adjusting the sound of an individual step


Youcanmakesomebasicadjustmentstothesoundof eachstepsMultisample,includingchangingits volumeandpitch,makingitplayinreverse,and changingthesamplestartpoints. YoucanalsousetheAMSOutputstomodulateother ProgramparametersoutsideoftheWaveSequence, suchasFilterFrequency,Pan,andsoon. Toeditsteps: 1. GototheStepParameterspage. Thispageshowstheparametersforeightstepsata time.Usethescrollbarattherightofthescreento changewhichstepsareinview. 2. Inorderforasteptomakeasound,setitsTypeto Multi(Multisample). 3. SelectaMultisampleusingtheBankand Multisamplepopupmenus.

169

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

MonoandstereoMultisamplesarestoredindifferent Banks.Eachstepcanbeeithermonoorstereo.Note thatevenifonlyonestepusesastereoMultisample, theentireWaveSequencebecomesstereo,anduses twiceasmanyvoicesitsthepricethatyoupayfor power! 4. SettheLevel(volume)asdesired. Thiscanbeusefulforeveningouttheperceivedlevels ofdifferentMultisamples,orforaccentingstepsin rhythmicsequences. 5. SettheTransposeandTuneasdesired. TransposesetstheMultisamplescoarsetuning,in semitones.Youcanusethistochangetheoctavefor individualsteps,tocreatemelodies,ortocreate interestingvariationsonpercussionsoundsbyextreme transposition. Tunecontrolsthefinetuning,incents(1/100ofa semitone).Smallvariationsintuningcancreatean interesting,organicfeel. 6. UseReverseandStartOffsettochangetheway thattheMultisampleplays. ReverseplaystheselectedMultisamplebackwards, withoutlooping.(Ifindividualsampleswithinthe MultisamplearealreadysettoReverse,theywillstill playinreverse,regardlessofthissetting.) StartOffsetletsyouselectfromupto8pre programmedsamplestartpoints(forROMandEXs), orbetweenthenormalstartpointandtheloopstart (forSamplingModeandUserSampleBanks).

Modulating Program parameters per step


EachstephastwoAMSOutputvalues.Theseactkind oflikestepsequencers,allowingyoutomodulateany AMSdestinationintheProgram.Inotherwords, virtuallyanyProgramlevelparametercanhavea differentsettingforeachstepoftheWaveSequence. Forinstance,toadjusttheFilterFrequencyseparately foreachstep: 1. SelecttheProgramthatyoullusefortheWave Sequence. 2. GototheFilterMod1taboftheFilterpage. Thispagehasthefiltermodulationparametersfor OSC1. 3. UnderFilterAModulation,setoneoftheAMS sourcestoWaveSeqAMSOut1.

Using Insert/Cut/Copy/Paste
YoucanusetheInsert,Cut,Copy,andPastebuttonsto copyalloftheparametersfromonesteptoanother,or tomoveasteptoadifferentpositioninthesequence. Toinsertacopyofastepintothesequence: 1. Selectthestepyoudliketocopy. Youcandothisbytouchinganyofthesteps parameters,orbydirectlyeditingtheStepparameter undertheWaveSequencegraphic.Theselectedstepis shownbyaredarrowontheleftsideofthescreen,as wellasaredarrowinthegraphic. 2. PresstheCopybutton. Yourenowreadytoinsertorpastethestep. 3. Selectthestepwhichyoudliketofollowthenew step. 4. PresstheInsertbutton. Thecopiedstepisinsertedattheselectedposition.The previouslyselectedstep,andallstepsfollowingit, movedowntomakeroomfortheinsertedstep. Toremoveastepfromthesequence: 1. Selectthestepyoudliketoremove. 2. PresstheCutbutton. Theselectedstepwillberemovedfromthesequence, andallfollowingstepswillshiftuptofillinthespace.

4. SettheIntensityasdesired. ThismeansthattheAMS1outputwillmodulatethe FilterFrequency.Now,youjustneedtosetupthe WaveSequencetosendvaluesout: 5. GototheWaveSequenceStepParameterspage. 6. Foreachstep,enterthedesiredvalueforAMS Out1. 7. GototheOSC1BasictaboftheOSC/Pitchpage. 8. SetMS1tousetheWaveSequenceyoueditedin step5. TheFilterFrequencywillnowchangewitheverystep. YoumaywonderwhatiftheProgramusesmorethan oneWaveSequence,andeachissendingoutdifferent AMSvalues?Nottoworry.Underthehood,eachWave Sequenceactuallyhasitsowncompletevoice structure,whichallowstheAMSvaluestobedifferent foreachone.

Modulating individual steps with the AMS Mixer


YoucancombinetheWaveSequenceAMSOutputs withtheAMSMixertomodulateindividualsteps.For instance,youcansetupSW1tomuteaparticularstep. WellstartbyassumingthatyouhavealreadysetOSC1 toplaytheWaveSequence.Then: 1. OntheWaveSequenceStepParameterspage,set step1sAMSOut1to127. 2. SetAMSOut1forallotherstepsto0. 3. GototheAMSMix1taboftheAMS Mix/CommonKTrackpage.

170

Using Wave Sequences Using rhythmic Wave Sequences

4. OnAMSMixer1,settheTypetoAmtAxB. 5. ForAMSA,selectWaveSeqAMSOut1. 6. SettheAMSAAmountto00. 7. ForAMSB,selectSW1Mod(CC#80). 8. SettheAMSBAmountto+99. 9. GototheAmp1ModtaboftheAmp/EQpage.

10.UnderAmpModulation,settheAMSsourceto AMSMixer1. 11.UndertheAMSsourceselection,settheIntensity to99. SW1willnowmuteandunmutestep1.Youcanuse thissametechniqueforanyperstepmodulation.

WaveSequencestepDurations,Crossfadetimes,andFadeInandFadeOutshapes
Step 1 Duration Step 2 Duration Step 3 Duration Step 4 Duration

Volume

Time Step 1 Crossfade Xfade In = Log Step 2 Crossfade Xfade Out = Exp Step 3 Crossfade Xfade In = Off Step 4 Crossfade Xfade Out = Off

Xfade In = Lin

Xfade Out = Log

Using rhythmic Wave Sequences


Creating rhythmic Wave Sequences
TocreatearhythmicWaveSequence: 1. OntheSeqParameterspage,settheModeto Tempo. ThismakestheWaveSequencesynchronizetothe systemtempo,assetbyeithertheTempoknoborMIDI Clock. 2. SetRuntoOn. Thisisthedefaultsetting;theWaveSequencewill movefromsteptostepautomatically. 3. SelecttheMultisamplesthatyoudliketouse,and settheStart,End,andLoopStart/Endstepsas desired. 4. SettheLoopRepeatstoINF. Thiswillmakethesequencerepeataslongasyouhold thenote. 5. OntheStepParameterspage,usetheBaseNote andMultiply(x)parameterstosettherhythmic valuesforeachstep. Forinstance,tocreateadottedeighthnote,settheBase Noteto1/16,andMultiply(x)to3. 6. SettheStepXfadetimestorelativelyshortvalues, suchas05ms. Thispreservestheinitialtransientsofthesamples. 7. Tocreatepausesintherhythm,settheStepType toRest.

Doubling or halving the rhythmic pulse


Youmaysometimeswanttoslowdowna16thnote rhythmsothatitbecomes8thnotesinstead,orvice versa.The/2andx2buttonsmakethiseasy. Pressthe/2buttontocuttheBaseNoteand/or Multiplysettingsinhalf,sothat1/4notesbecome1/8 notes,1/8notesbecome1/16notes,andsoon. Pressthex2buttontomultiplytheBaseNoteand/or Multiplysettingsbytwo,sothat1/8notesbecome1/4 notes,1/4notesbecome1/2notes,andsoon. Note:thesebuttonsonlyappearwhentheModeisset toTempo.

Setting the tempo


EachProgram,Combi,andSonghasitsowntempo setting.Youcanchangethetemposimplybyadjusting thefrontpanelTEMPOknob,orbytappinginquarter notesontheTAPTEMPObutton. TheresalsoaGlobalmodeparameterwhichletsyou switchbetweenusingtheinternaltempoortempo fromanexternalMIDIsource(suchasacomputer basedsequencer).TosynctoanexternalMIDIsource: 1. PresstheGLOBALbuttontoenterGlobalmode. 2. SelecttheMIDItab. 3. UnderMIDISetup,settheMIDIClockparameter asdesired. InternalusesthetempostoredwiththeProgram, Combi,orSong,andsetbytheTEMPOknob.

171

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

ExternalMIDIsyncstoincomingMIDIclocks,and ignorestheTEMPOknob. Autoisacombinationoftheabove.Whenclocksare receivedviaMIDI,itsyncstotheincomingclocks; whennoclocksarebeingreceived,itdefaultstothe storedtemposettings.

WaveSequenceSwing
Swing Resolution = Beat 1
3 3

Beat 2

Swing = 0%

+100 100 +200

Swing = +100%

Swing = 100%

Using Swing
Swingaddsahumanfeeltotherhythm,andprovides aneasywaytoturnasquarerhythmintoashuffle groove. Thisworksbyadjustingthepositionoftheupbeats, relativetotheWaveSequencesSwingResolution setting.Forinstance,iftheSwingResolutionissetto 1/8,Swingaffectseveryother8thnote. WhiletheSwingResolutionisstoredintheWave Sequence,theSwingamountissetintheProgram, CombiTimbre,orSongTrack.Thisletsyouuseasingle WaveSequenceindifferentPrograms,Combis,and Songs,eachwithdifferentamountsofswing. Forinstance,toturnan8thnoterhythmintoashuffle: 1. CreateorselectaWaveSequencewithan8thnote rhythm. 2. OntheSeqParameterspage,makesurethat SwingResolutionissettoan8thnote. 3. CreateorselectthePrograminwhichyoudliketo usetheWaveSequence. 4. GototheOSC1BasictaboftheOSC/Pitchpage. 5. SetMS1tousetheWaveSequenceyouselectedin step1. 6. GototheProgramBasictaboftheBasic/Vector page. 7. UnderWaveSequence,settheSwingparameterto +100%. Thismakesthe8thnotesintoatriplet,shufflepattern. Positivevaluesmaketheupbeatslater,andnegative valuesmakethemearlier.WhenSwingissetto+300%, upbeatswillbemovedallthewaytothenextdown beat.Atthispoint,thenotesontheupbeatswillnotbe heardatall. IfyouareusingtheWaveSequenceinconjunction withKARMA,youmaywishtoadjustKARMAs swingamountaswell.

Swing = +200%

Swing = +300%

+300

Keeping notes in sync


Bydefault,theWaveSequencesforeachnoterun independentlyfromoneanother,sothateachnote soundsasanindividualvoice. WithrhythmicWaveSequences,however,youmay sometimeswantalloftheWaveSequencesinachord tostarttogetherandsynctogether,inlockstep. KRONOSgivesyoutwotoolstomakethishappen: KeySyncOff,andQuantizeTriggers.

Key Sync Off


EachProgram,eachCombiTimbre,andeachTrackina SonghasitsownKeySyncsetting.ThenameKey SynccomesfromthesimilarsettingforLFOs, meaningrestartseparatelyforeachnoteon. WhenKeySyncisOn,eachnotesWaveSequence(s) willprogressindependently,sothateachonecanbeon adifferentstep,ormovingatadifferentrate. WhenKeySyncisOff,ontheotherhand,allofthe WaveSequenceswillbesynchronizedonthesame step.Thereisoneexceptiontothis,however:if Durationismodulatedwithvelocityornotenumber, theWaveSequencescanstillprogressatdifferentrates. ToturnKeySyncOffinaProgram: 1. GototheProgramBasictaboftheBasic/Vector page. 2. MakesurethattheKeySyncparameterisnot checked. ToturnKeySyncOffinaCombiorSong: 1. GototheWaveSequence/KARMAtabofthe TimbreParameterspage(forCombis),orTrack Parameterspage(forSongs). Eachofthe16TimbresorTrackshasitsownKeySync parameter.Ifyoulike,youcansetthemallseparately. 2. SettheKeySynccheckboxesasyoulike. Remember,tosynchronizeallofthenotes,turnKey Syncoff.

Swing with multiple Wave Sequences


IfaProgramcontainsmultipleWaveSequenceswith differentSwingResolutionsettings,theProgramwill usethefinestvalue.Forinstance,ifoneWaveSequence issetto1/8andtheotherissetto1/16,theProgramwill use1/16.

Quantize Triggers
QuantizeTriggersallowsyoutoforcemostTempo modeWaveSequencenoteonstobeinsync,makingit easiertoplayalongwithotherrhythmicelements. WhenQuantizeTriggerisOn,noteonsarequantized to8thnotesusingthecurrenttemporeference.(See belowforafewmoredetails.) Thetemporeferencecancomefromdifferentsources, dependingonthecurrentmode,andwhetherornot KARMAison:

172

Using Wave Sequences Creating smooth, evolving timbres

InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAisoff, noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesounding TempomodeWaveSequence,ifany. InProgramandCombimodes,ifKARMAison, noteonsaresynchronizedwithKARMA. InSequencemodeduringplaybackorrecording, noteonsaresynchronizedwiththesequence. InSequencemode,whilethesequencerisstopped, noteonsaresynchronizedwithRPPRand KARMA. EachProgram,eachCombiTimbre,andeachTrackina SonghasitsownQuantizeTriggerssetting. ToturnonQuantizeTriggersinaProgram: 1. GototheProgramBasictaboftheBasic/Vector page. 2. ChecktheQuantizeTriggersbox. ToturnonQuantizeTriggersinaCombiorSong: 1. GototheWaveSequence/KARMAtabofthe TimbreParameterspage(forCombis),orTrack Parameterspage(forSongs). Eachofthe16TimbresorTrackshasitsownQuantize Triggersparameter.Ifyoulike,youcansetthemall separately. 2. SettheQuantizeTriggerscheckboxesasyoulike.

QuantizeTriggers

Note-On Wave Sequence Rhythm Quantize Triggers Quantize Triggers Note-On

Quantize Triggers Quantize Triggers

How Quantize Triggers works


TheQuantizeTriggersfeaturetriestomakeagood guessatwhereyouintendedthenotetobe.Ifyouplay thenotejustabitlatewithina32ndnoteofthe8th noteitwillassumethatyoumeantthenotetosound onthebeatthatjustpassed.Inthiscase,thenotewill playimmediately. Ontheotherhand,ifyouplaythenoteuptothree 32ndnotesearly,itwillassumethatyoureintending thenotetosoundonthenextbeat.Inthiscase,the noteonisdelayeduntilthenext8thnote.

Creating smooth, evolving timbres


Crossfaded Wave Sequences
Tocreateasmooth,crossfadingWaveSequence: 1. OntheSeqParameterspage,settheModetoTime. Thisturnsofftemposynchronization,sothatyoucan setWaveSequencedurationsinmilliseconds. 2. SetRuntoOn. Thisisthedefaultsetting;theWaveSequencewill movefromsteptostepautomatically. 3. SelecttheMultisamplesthatyoudliketouse,and settheStart,End,andloopstepsasdesired. 4. OntheStepParameterspage,settheDurationsto relativelylongvalues,500msormore. 5. SettheXfadeparameterstolongvaluesaswell. Tocrossfadecontinually,withoutpausingtoheara singlesteponitsown,settheXfadetimesthesameas theDurations. Note:InTimemode,theactualcrossfadetimecannot exceedthetotaldurationofthetwostepsbeing crossfaded.IftheXfadesettingwouldexceedthis limit,thecrossfadetimewillbeclippedinternally. 6. AdjustthestepLevelstosmoothoutperceived volumedifferencesbetweendifferent Multisamples. 7. AdjusttheFadeInandFadeOutshapestotaste. Theshapescanhelpyoutofinetunethetransitions betweenthesteps.

Stretching or compressing the sequence


Ifyouliketheproportionsofthestepdurationsand crossfades,butwantthewholesequencetogofasteror slower.TheExp/Comp(Expand/Compress)button makesthiseasy: 1. OntheStepParameterspage,presstheExp/Comp button. Adialogboxwillappear. 2. Inthedialogbox,settheExpand/Compress% parameterasdesired. 100%meansthecurrentdurationandcrossfadetimes. Values99andbelowmakethetimesshorter,and values101andabovemakethemlonger. 3. PresstheOKbutton. Thestepdurationsandcrossfadetimeswillbe adjustedbytheselectedpercentage. Note:theExp/Compbuttonappearsonlywhenthe ModeissettoTime. YoucanalsostretchandcompressWaveSequencesin realtime,viaAMS.Formoreinformation,see Durationmodulationonpage 174.

173

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

Modulating Wave Sequences


Position modulation
PositionmodulationletsyouoffsettheWaveSequence fromthecurrentstep.IfRunisturnedOn,TheWave Sequencewillcontinuetoprogressthroughitssteps duringmodulation,kindoflikefastforwardingwhile playingatapeorCD. Tosweepthroughasequencemanually,creatingthe distinctivesoundofafamousGermansynthesizer: 1. SetRuntoOff. ThismeansthattheWaveSequencewillstayonthe currentstep,untilyoumodulatetheposition. 2. UnderModulationandPosition,selectanAMS source,suchastheribbonoranEG. 3. SettheIntensitytoapositivevaluetomove forwardthroughthesteps,oranegativevalueto movebackwards. Forinstance,ifIntensityissetto+14,themaximum amountofmodulationwillmove14stepsforwardin theWaveSequence. 1. MakesurethatNoteOnAdvanceisOff. WhenNoteOnAdvanceisOn,StartStepmodulation isdisabled. 2. SettheStartStepto10,andtheEndStepto25. 3. SettheLoopStartandLoopEndtothesame points10and25. Thesequencewillnowloopthrough16steps,from10 to25. 4. SettheStartStepAMS(totherightoftheStart Stepparameter)toVelocity. 5. SettheIntensityto9. Playingatthehighestvelocitieswillnowstartthe sequenceatstep1(movingitforwardby9steps);at thelowestvelocities,thesequencewillstillstartatstep 10. Ingeneral,negativemodulationmovestheStartStep earlierinthesequence,tothelimitofStep1.Positive modulationmovestheStartSteplaterinthesequence, tothelimitoftheEndStep.

Position modulation and loops


PositionAMSaffectsonlythecurrentstep,anddoes notchangetheloopstartorloopend.Thismeansthat PositionAMScanmaketheWaveSequencejumpinto themiddleoftheloop,orjumpbackoutoftheloop again.

Note-On Advance
Thisfeatureletsyouadvancethestartpointofthe WaveSequencebyonestepwitheachnewnoteon.If LoopRepeatsisnotsettoOff,NoteOnAdvancewill stepthroughtheloop,payingattentiontotheloop directionandnumberofrepeats. Forinstance,letssaythattheWaveSequenceStart Stepis2,andtheEndStepis6.Also,theLoopStartis setto3,theLoopEndissetto5,andtheLoop DirectionissettoForward. IfRepeatTimesisOff,NoteOnAdvancewillmake theWaveSequenceplayasfollows: 1stnote:2,3,4,5,6 2ndnote:3,4,5,6 3rdnote:4,5,6 4thnote:5,6 5thnote:6 6thnote:2,3,4,5,6 7thnote:3,4,5,6 8thnote:4,5,6 9thnote:5,6 10thnote:6 11thnote:2,3,4,5,6 etc IfRepeatTimesis1,NoteOnAdvancewillmakethe WaveSequenceplayasfollows: firstnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,6 2ndnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,6 3rdnote:4,5,3,4,5,6 4thnote:5,3,4,5,6 5thnote:3,4,5,6 6thnote:4,5,6

Duration modulation
Durationmodulationletsyoudynamicallycontrolthe stepdurationandcrossfadetimes.Youcanspeedupor slowdowntheWaveSequencesothatitrunsbetween 1%and400%oftheoriginalrate. ByusingVelocity,keytracking,ornotenumberasthe AMSsource,youcanmaketheWaveSequenceson everynotehaveslightlydifferenttiming(or dramaticallydifferenttiming,forthatmatter!)Thiscan beveryusefulformakingacrossfadedWave Sequencesoundmoreorganic.Forinstance,tomake theWaveSequencemovefasterwhenyouplayat highervelocities: 1. GototheSequenceParameterspage. 2. UnderModulationandDuration,selectVelocity astheAMSsource. 3. SettheIntensitytoavaluelessthan100%,suchas 90%. Valuesbelow100%makethedurationsshorter,sothe WaveSequencemovesmorequickly.Valuesabove 100%makethedurationslonger,sothesequence movesmoreslowly.

Start Step modulation


YoucanuseaMIDIcontroller,suchasVelocity,to selectadifferentstartstepforeachnote,tointroduce morevarietyintothetimbre.Youcanmovethestart stepeitherforwardsorbackwards.Forinstance:

174

Using Wave Sequences Saving Wave Sequences

7thnote:5,6 8thnote:6 9thnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,6 10thnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,6 11thnote:4,5,3,4,5,6 12thnote:5,3,4,5,6 13thnote:3,4,5,6 14thnote:4,5,6 15thnote:5,6 etc Finally,ifRepeatTimesisINF,NoteOnAdvancewill maketheWaveSequenceplayasfollows.Notethatthe WaveSequenceneverreturnstothestartstep,sinceits outsideoftheloop: firstnote:2,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5 2ndnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5

3rdnote:4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5 4thnote:5,3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5 5thnote:3,4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5 6thnote:4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5 7thnote:5,3,4,5,3,4,5 8thnote:3,4,5,3,4,5 9thnote:4,5,3,4,5,3,4,5 10thnote:5,3,4,5,3,4,5 etc

Note-On Advance and Key Sync


NoteOnAdvanceisalsoaffectedbythesettingofthe KeySyncparameter. IfKeySyncisOn,thestartpointwilladvancebyone stepforeachnote. IfKeySyncisOff,thestartpointwilladvancebyone stepforeachnewphrase.Formoreinformation,see KeySynconpage 788oftheParameterGuide.

Saving Wave Sequences


Onceyouvespentallthistimeediting,youllwantto saveyourwork.TosaveyourWaveSequenceedits: 1. SelecttheWriteWaveSequencecommandfrom thepagemenu,attheupperrighthandcornerof thescreen. Thisbringsupadialogboxwhichallowsyoutosave theWaveSequence.Optionally,youcanalsoselecta newlocation,orchangedetheWaveSequencesname. 2. PresstheTbuttontobringupthetextedit dialog. YoucangivetheWaveSequenceadescriptivename usingtheonscreenkeyboard. 3. Afterenteringthename,pressOK. Thetexteditwindowwilldisappear,returningyouto themainSavedialog. 4. PressthepopupbuttonnexttoWaveSeqtobring upthesavelocationdialog. 5. SelectalocationtosavetheeditedWave Sequence. Toavoidoverwritingthefactorysounds,itssaferto useaslotinoneofthesevenUserbanks. 6. Afterselectingthelocation,pressOK. 7. PressOKagaintostartthewriteprocess. 8. Ifyouresureyouwanttowritetothislocation, pressOKagain. Afterthat,youredone! Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds afterwritingtheWaveSequencedata.Thisallows thesystemtimetocompletetheprocess,which includessavingabackupofthedatatotheinternal disk. TheWaveSequenceTempo,KeySync,Swing,and QuantizeTriggersettingsarestoredwitheach Program,Combination,orSong.Theseparameters areprovidedontheWaveSequencepagesforuse duringediting,butarenotactuallysavedwiththe WaveSequence.IfyouvemovedfromProgramor Combinationmodeandeditedtheseparameters, returntothepreviousmodeandwriteyouredits.

175

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

Using Drum Kits Drum Kit Overview


Whats a Drum Kit?
DrumKits,asthenameimplies,areoptimizedfor creatingdrumsounds.Theyofferanumberofspecial features,suchas: Eachnotecanplayadifferentsound InsteadofselectingMultisamples(whichspanthe entirekeyboard),youcanselectDrumSamples (whichcontainasingledrumsound).Thesecanbe fromtheROM,RAM,orEXsbanks. Oneachnote,youcanuseuptoeightDrum Samples,withvelocitycrossfades Eachnotehasseparatesettingsforthemost importantsoundparameters,includingvolume, filtercutoffandresonance,envelopeattackand decay,pitch,driveandlowboost,andgainforeach bandoftheProgramEQ. Forinstance,youcouldcombinehighdriveand lowcutofffrequencytocreatealofieffectononlya fewsounds,whiletherestofthesoundsremained clearandpristine. EachnotecanberoutedtodifferentInsertEffects, orhaveseparateFXSendamounts.Forinstance, youcansendasnaresoundthroughadedicated compressor. YoucanuseDrumKitsonlyinProgramswhose OscillatorModeissettoSingleorDoubleDrums. FordetailsonthefactoryprogrammedDrumKits, pleaseseetheVoiceNameList. DrumKitbankcontents Bank
INT0039, USERA00USERC05 GM 08 USERC06USERG15 USERAA00USERGG15

Contents
Factory Drum Kits GM2 Drum Kits User Drum Kits

The9DrumKitsintheGMbankarecompatiblewith theGM2soundmap.TheotherDrumKitsmayuse differentmappings,whereappropriate.

Drum Kit Programs and Oscillator Mode


TheProgramsOscillatorModesetting,onthe ProgramBasictaboftheBasic/Vectorpage,sets whethertheProgramisusedtoplayDrumKitsorto playnormalMultisamples(suchaspianos,strings, etc.). YoullseetheresultsofthissettingontheOSC1/Basic taboftheOSC/Pitchpage.IftheOscillatorModeisset toSingleorDouble,youcanselectuptoeight MultisamplesforeachOscillator,withvelocity switchesorcrossfades. IftheOscillatorModeissettoSingleDrumsor DoubleDrums,youllbeabletoselectaoneortwo DrumKits.Therearestilleightlevelsofvelocity switchesandlayersbutthesearewithintheDrumKit itself,andnotstoredoreditedintheProgram.

Drum Kit memory structure


TheKRONOShasover270DrumKits,dividedinto Internal,User,andGM(GeneralMIDI)groupsas shownbelow.Youcaneditorwriteintoanyofthe locationsexceptfortheGMbank,whichcannotbe erased.

Before you start editing


First, select a Drum Program
DrumKitsareeditedinGlobalMode.Whileyourein GlobalMode,youllplaythekitthatyoureeditingasif youwereplayingitfromwithintheProgram,Combi, orSongwhichwasselectedbeforeyouenteredGlobal mode. So,beforeyouenterGlobalmode,itsbesttoselecta Programwhichisalreadysetupfordrums,withthe appropriateEGsettings,effects,andsoon.Justusethe ProgramCategoryselectpopup,andchooseadrum ProgramsuchasStudioStandardKit.

Working with Double Drum Programs


IfyouselectaDoubleDrumsProgrambeforeentering Globalmode,theDrumKitfromOscillator1willbe selectedandreadyforediting.WheneditinginGlobal mode,theselectedDrumKitwillalwaysplayasifit wereintheProgramsOscillator1. TheDrumKitinOscillator2willcontinuetosoundas well,althoughyoucantedititdirectly.Youcancontrol thevolumebalancebetweenthetwokitsusingthe controlsurface,withoutleavingGlobalmode.Todo so: 1. PresstheCONTROLASSIGN[TIMBRE/TRACK] button. TheControlSurfacewillthencontrolthevolumesof thetwoOscillators. 2. UsetheMIXVOLUMES[1][2]sliderstoadjust thevolumesofthedrumkits.

176

Using Drum Kits Editing Drum Kits

OSC1/Basic Octave setting


Inorderforthenotemappingstomatchthekeyboard, theOscillatorsOctavesettingneedstobe+0[8].All DrumKitProgramsshouldhavethissettingalready.If youreunsure,youcancheckthisyourself: 1. GototheOSC1/BasictaboftheOSC/Pitchpage. 2. CheckthattheOctaveparameter(nearthetopof thepage)issetto+0[8]. Withasettingotherthan+0[8],therelationship betweenthekeysandtheDrumKitsoundmapwillbe incorrect.

Make sure that Memory Protect is disabled


Beforeyoustartediting,gototheGlobalBasicpage, andlookintheMemoryProtectsection.Makesure thatDrumKitisnotcheckedifso,youwontbeable tomakeanyedits.

Drum Kits may be used by more than one Program


WhenyoueditaDrumKit,allProgramsthatusethat DrumKitwillbeaffected.Toavoidchangingthe factoryvoicing,youmaywishtocopyDrumKitsto emptylocationsintheUSERbanksbeforeediting.

Editing Drum Kits


Basic Editing
1. SelecttheProgramthatyouwishtousewhile editingtheDrumKit. Formoreinformation,seeFirst,selectaDrum Program,above. 2. PressthefrontpanelGLOBALbuttontoenter Globalmode. 3. GototheSampleSetuptaboftheDrumKitpage. 4. UsetheDrumKitparameter,atthetopofthe screen,toselecttheDrumKitthatyouwishto edit. Youcansavethistoadifferentmemorylocationafter editing,ifyoulike. 5. UsetheKeyparametertoselectthenotethatyou wishtoedit. Toselectakey,youcanuseanyofthestandardVALUE controllers(theslider,dial,numerickeypadetc.).Asa shortcut,youcanalsoholddowntheENTERkeyand playanoteonthekeyboard. ThisKeyselectionappliestoallthreeDrumKitediting tabs. 6. UsetheAssigncheckboxtospecifywhetherthe keywillhaveitsownsettings,orusethesame settingsasthenexthighernote. IfAssignischecked,thekeywillhaveitsownsettings. Thisisthedefault. IfAssignisnotchecked,thekeywonthaveitsown settings.Instead,itwillusethesamesettingsasthe nexthighernoteexceptthatthedrumsampleswillbe playedatalowerpitch.Theamountofpitchchange dependsonthePitchSlopeparameter,ontheOSC1 PitchtaboftheOSC/Pitchpage. Usethissettingwhenyouwantonlytochangethe pitch,suchaswithtomorcymbalsounds.

Creating a velocity crossfade


Forthiskey,letscreateasimplevelocitycrossfade betweentwostereodrumsamples. 1. Ontheleftsideofthescreen,makesurethatDS1 andDS2areturnedOn. JustpresstheOn/Offbuttonstotogglethem,if necessary. 2. Similarly,makesurethatDS38areturnedOff. Whentheyareturnedoff,mostoftheirparameterswill begrayedout. 3. SelectROMStereoastheBankforDS1andDS2. TherearethreemaintypesofDrumSampleBanks: ROM,RAM,andEXs.Foreachtype,youcanalso choosebetweenlookingatmonoandstereoDrum Samples.NotethatstereoDrumSampleswillrequire twiceasmanyvoicesasmonoDrumSamples. ROMDrumSamplesarethebuiltinfactorysounds, andarealwaysavailable.Theseareorganizedby category,suchasbassdrums,snares,hats,etc. RAMDrumSamplesincludeAkai,SoundFont2.0, AIFForWAVfilesloadedfromdisk,andsamples createdinSamplingmode. EXsDrumSamplebanksarePCMexpansionsets createdespeciallyfortheKRONOS.Eachhasitsown uniquenumber;forinstance,theROMExpansionis EXs1,andtheConcertGrandPianoexpansionisEXs2. OnlythecurrentlyloadedEXsbankswillappearon thismenu. 4. PresstheDrumSamplepopupforDS1. ThisbringsupalistofDrumSamples,organizedby category.Usethetabsattheleftofthescreentobrowse throughthedifferentcategories. ForalistoftheDrumSamplenames,pleaseseethe VoiceNameList. 5. SelectaDrumSamplebytouchingitsnameinthe list. 6. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmyourselection. 7. DothesameforDS2. NowthatyouveassignedDrumSamplestoDS1and DS2,letssetupthevelocityrangesandcrossfades.

177

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

8. SetDS2sBottomVelocityto001,anditsXfade Rangeto0. 9. SetDS1sBottomVelocityto80. Now,DS2willsoundwhenyouplaysoftly,at velocitiesof79orlessandDS1willsoundwhenyou playharder,withvelocitiesof80ormore. Youcanalsoseethissplitvisually,inthegraphiconthe rightsideoftheLCD. 10.Next,setDS1sXfadeRangeto20,anditsCurveto Linear. Noticethatthegraphicnowshowsthetworanges taperingintooneanother.Between80and100,DS2 willfadeout,andDS1willfadein,creatingagradual velocitytransitioninsteadofahardsplit.

Using Hold
TheProgramHoldparametercanbeespeciallyuseful fordrumprograms,sinceitletsthesamplesringout naturallyregardlessofhowlongyouholddownthe note.Thewaythatthisworksdependsonsettingsin boththeProgramandtheDrumKit,asdescribed below. ToenableHold: 1. InProgrammode,gototheProgramBasictabof theBasic/Vectorpage. 2. UnderKeyZone,makesurethattheHoldcheck boxischecked. OnceyouveturnedonHoldfortheProgram,the functioniscontrolledonanotebynotebasis accordingtosettingswithintheDrumKit. 3. InGlobalmode,gototheVoiceMixertabofthe DrumKitpage. 4. Foreachkey,settheEnableNoteOffReceive parameterasdesired. Ifthisparameterisunchecked,thekeywillbeheld. Ifitischecked,thekeywillnotbeheld. IfyouturnoffHoldintheProgram,nokeyswillbe heldregardlessoftheirEnableNoteOffReceive setting.

Fine-tuning the sound of each sample


1. Ifyoulike,adjusttheLevelsforthetwoDrum Samples. Thiscanbeveryusefulincreatingasmoothvelocity splitorcrossfade. 2. SetthetuningandEGparametersasdesired. ForeachDrumSample,youcancontroloffsetstothe Programssettingsfortransposition,tuning,andEG attackanddecaytimes. 3. GototheSampleParametertab. Thispageletsyoumakeevenmoreadjustmentstothe sound.ForeachDrumSample,cancontroloffsetsto theProgramssettingsforfiltercutoffandresonance, drive,andlowboost.Additionally,youcancontrolthe gainforeachbandoftheEQ. Formoreinformation,pleaseseeGlobalP5:Drum Kitonpage 796oftheParameterGuide. 4. Repeatsteps13tosetupeachkeyoftheDrum Kit. Youcanalsocopysettingsfromonekeytoanother, usingtheCopyKeySetupmenucommand.

Controlling effects for each key


DrumKitshavetheirown,builtinmixers.Foreach key,youcancontroltheInsertEffectsbussing,Master Effectssends,andpan. Touseseparatebussettingsforeachkey: 1. InProgrammode,gototheRoutingtaboftheIFX page. 2. MakesurethattheUseDKitSettingcheckboxis checked. WhenUseDKitSettingison,theProgramwillusethe BusSelectandEffectsSendsettingsforeachkeyofthe DrumKit. WhenUseDKitSettingisoff,theProgramwillignore theDrumKitsBusSelectandEffectsSendsettings. 3. InGlobalmode,gototheVoiceMixertabofthe DrumKitpage. 4. UsetheBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign) parametertosenddrumsoundsthroughtheirown Inserteffects,ortotheindividualoutputs. Ifyoulike,youcansendeachnotetoitsownInsert effect,ortotheindividualaudiooutputs,inadditionto themainL/Routputs. Forexample,youmightsendallsnaresoundstoIFX1, allkicksoundstoIFX2,andtheremainingsoundsto L/R. 5. UseSend1(MFX1)andSend2(MFX2)tosetthe sendlevelstothemastereffects.

Using Exclusive Groups


1. SelecttheVoice/Mixertab. 2. UsetheExclusiveGroupstomakeonedrum soundcutoffanotherdrumsoundsuchasclosed andopenhihats. Forexample,letssaythatyouveassignedanopenhi hatandaclosedhihattothesameexclusivegroup: Playtheopenhihatsound. Whileitsstillringing,playtheclosedhihat. Theopenhihatsoundwillbecutoffsimulating theactionofaphysicalhihat.

178

Using Drum Kits Saving Drum Kits

Controlling pan for each key


Touseseparatepansettingsforeachkey: 1. InProgrammode,gototheAmp1/Driver1tabof theAmp/EQpage. 2. UnderPan,makesurethattheUseDKitSetting checkboxischecked. WhenUseDKitSettingison,theProgramwillusethe pansettingsforeachkeyoftheDrumKit. 3. InGlobalmode,gototheVoiceMixertabofthe DrumKitpage.

4. UsethePanparametertospecifythekeysstereo outputposition.

Double Drum Programs


DoubleDrumProgramsletyoulayertwoDrumKits together.Mostoften,thesewillbeclosemicdand ambientversionsofthesameacousticdrums,sothat youcancontrolthebalancebetweenthetwo.You couldalsousethisforcreativelayeringandspecial effects,ofcourse! EverythingelseaboutDoubleDrumProgramsisthe sameasforSingleDrumPrograms.

Saving Drum Kits


Onceyouvespentallthistimeediting,youllwantto saveyourwork.TosaveyourDrumKitedits: 1. SelecttheWriteDrumKitcommandfromthepage menu,attheupperrighthandcornerofthescreen. Thisbringsupadialogboxwhichallowsyoutosave theDrumKit.Optionally,youcanalsoselectanew location,orchangetheDrumKitsname. 2. PresstheTbuttontobringupthetextedit dialog. YoucangivetheDrumKitadescriptivenameusing theonscreenkeyboard. 3. Afterenteringthename,pressOK. Thetexteditwindowwilldisappear,returningyouto themainSavedialog. 4. PressthepopupbuttonnexttoDrumKittobring upthesavelocationdialog. 5. SelectalocationtosavetheeditedDrumKit. Toavoidoverwritingthefactorysounds,itssaferto useaslotinoneofthesevenUSERbanks. NotethatalthoughyoucaneditGeneralMIDIkits,you canonlysavetheseeditstolocationsintheINTor USERbanks.TheoriginalGMkitscannotbeover written. 6. Afterselectingthelocation,pressOK. 7. PressOKagaintostartthewriteprocess. 8. Ifyouresureyouwanttowritetothislocation, pressOKagain. Afterthat,youredone! Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds afterwritingtheDrumKitdata.Thisallowsthe systemtimetocompletetheprocess,whichincludes savingabackupofthedatatotheinternaldisk.

179

Global Settings, Wave Seq., Drum Kits

180

Loading & saving data, and creating CDs


Saving data Overview
Therearethreewaystosavedata;youcanwriteitinto internalmemory,saveittodisk(ontheinternaldiskor externalUSBstoragemedia,includingCDR/RW),or transmititasaMIDIdatadump.Youcanalsouse WAVEfilestocreateanaudioCDthatcanbeplayedby CDplayers.

Songs must be saved to disk


AswithSamplingModedata,Songsmustbesavedto disk;theycannotbesavedininternalmemory.

Saving to disk, CDs, and USB media


Thefollowingfiletypescanbesavedtodisk: .PCGfiles SetLists,Programs,Combinations,globalsettings, DrumKits,UserDrumTrackPatterns,andWave Sequences.(Youcanchoosewhichdatatypesare included,viaoptionsintheSavedialog.) .SNGfiles Songandregiondata. .KMPfiles TheseareKorgformatMultisamples. .KSFfiles TheseareKorgformatSamples. .KSCfiles ThesestorecollectionsofEXsMultisamplesand DrumSamples,and/orUserMultisamplesand Samples. .KFXfiles Effectpresetdata. .KGEfiles KARMAGEdata. .MIDfiles SavesaSequencermodesonginStandardMIDI File(SMF)format. .EXLfiles Systemexclusivedatafromanexternaldevicethat wassavedontheKRONOS.(Thisallowsthe KRONOStobeusedasadatafiler.) .WAVand.AIFfiles: UsersamplescanbeexportedasWAVEorAIFF files. .KCDfiles: ThesearetracklistsforaudioCDs.

Writing to internal memory


Thefollowingtypesofdatacanbewrittenintothe internalmemory. Programs Programs000127inbanksINTAF,USER AGandAAGG Combinations Combinations000127inbanksINTAG,USER AG Globalsettings (GlobalP0:BasicP3:CategoryName) UserWaveSequences BanksINT:000149,BanksUSERAGG:0031 UserDrumKits BanksINT:0039,BanksUSERAGG:0015 UserDrumTrackPatterns User000999 FXPresets Preset0015andUser0015foreacheffect UserTemplateSongs User015.Theseincludetheprogramselections, trackparameters,effectsettings,KARMAsettings, andthenameandtempoofthecurrentsongasa reusabletemplate.Formoreinformation,seeSave TemplateSongonpage 625oftheParameter Guide.

Sample data must be saved to disk


SamplingModeMultisamplesandSamplesmustbe savedtoandloadedfromdisk;theycannotbe writtenintointernalmemory. Thismeansthatifyouturnthepoweroffandthenon onceagain,butdonotreloadthenecessary MultisamplesorSamplesintoSamplingMode,any datathatusesthoseMultisamplesorSampleswillnot soundasintended.ThiscanincludeCombinations, Programs,DrumKits,WaveSequences,and Multisamples. Oncetheyvebeensavedtodisk,youcansetthe KRONOStoautomaticallyloadthematstartup.For details,seeAutomaticallyloadingsampledataon page 164.

MIDI data dump


Thefollowingtypesofdatacanbetransmittedasa MIDIdatadumpandsavedonanexternaldatafileror otherdevice. SetLists,Programs,Combinations,globalsettings, DrumKits,DrumTrackPatterns,andWave Sequences Songs Formoreinformation,seeDumpProgramon page 809oftheParameterGuide.

181

Loading & saving data, and creating CDs

About preload data and preset data


Preloaddatareferstothesoundsandotherdata loadedintheKRONOSwhenitisshippedfromthe factory.Youarefreetorewritethisdata,andwiththe exceptionofthedemosongs,thedatawillbewrittento thelocationlistedinWritingtointernalmemory.All ofthisdataisstoredintheinternaldisk,andbackups areprovidedontheincludedAccessoryDiscs. ProgramsINTAFandUSERAF CombinationsINTACandINTD000095 DrumKitsINT:0039,A00B15,andC0005

WaveSequencesINT:000139andUSERA0024 Demosongs Presetdataisdatathatcannotberewrittenbythe Writeoperation.Thisincludesthefollowingdata: TheGeneralMIDIProgrambanks,includingG, g(1)g(9),andg(d):001128 PresetDrumKits144(GM)152(GM) PresetTemplateSongsP00P17 PresetpatternsP000P697

Writing to internal memory


Writing Programs and Combinations
EditstoProgramsandCombinationscanbesavedto theinternalmemory,whichwellrefertoasWriting. Ifyouwanteditstobepreservedafterthepoweris turnedoff,youmustwritethem. TherearetwowaystowriteProgramsand Combinations,asdescribedbelow:usingtheWrite menucommands,andusingtheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEbutton. Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds afterusinganyoftheWritecommands.Thisallows thesystemtimetocompletetheprocess,which includessavingabackupofthedatatotheinternal disk. Beforeyouwritedataintomemory,youmustturn offtherelatedmemoryprotectsetting(s)inGlobal mode.(SeeMemoryprotectonpage 185.) CombinationsrelyonProgramstomakesounds, buttheydontcontaintheactualProgram parameters.Instead,theysimplyrememberthe Programbanksandnumbers.IfyoueditaProgram thatsusedbyaCombination,orloadadifferent Programintothesamebankandnumber,thesound oftheCombinationwillalsochange. ThescreenshownisforProgrammode 2. Checktheprogram/combinationnamedisplayed intheupperline(thewritingsource). 3. Ifyouwishtochangethenameoftheprogram/ combination,pressthetexteditbutton. Thetextdialogboxwillappear.Enterthenameofthe program/combination.SeeEditingnameson page 184. Afteryouhaveenteredthename,presstheOKbutton toreturntotheWriteProgram/WriteCombination dialogbox. 4. InCategory,specifythecategoryoftheProgram/ Combination. 5. SelectaSubCategoryaswell. BothCombinationsandProgramscanbeselectedby Category,inadditiontobankandnumber.Formore informationaboutCategoriesandPrograms,see SelectingbyCategoryonpage 29;forsimilar informationaboutCombinations,seeSelectingby Categoryonpage 58. YoucanalsoselectProgramsbyCategoryfromwithin CombinationsandSongs.Formoreinformation,see SelectingProgramsforCombiTracksonpage 60. 6. UseTotospecifythebankandnumberofthe writingdestinationprogram/combination. UsetheVALUEcontrollersortheBANKswitchesto makeyourselection. 7. ToexecutetheWriteoperation,presstheOK button.Tocancelwithoutexecutingpressthe Cancelbutton. WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,thedisplaywillask Areyousure?WhenyoupresstheOKbuttononce again,thedatawillbewritten.

Using the Write commands


1. AnywhereinProgramorCombinationmodes, selectthepagemenucommandWriteProgram orWriteCombination. TheWriteProgramorWriteCombinationdialogbox willappear. Note:Youcanalsoreachthesamedialogboxby holdingdowntheENTERbuttonandpressing0onthe numerickeypad.(SeeShortcutsonpage 7.)

Using the SEQUENCER REC/WRITE button


InProgramandCombinationmodes,pressingthe SEQUENCERREC/WRITEbuttonopenstheUpdate dialogbox. Thisisashortcutmethodwhichsaveschangestothe currentbank/numberlocation,overwritingtheold versionoftheProgramorCombination.(Ifyouwantto savechangestoadifferentbankand/ornumber,use theWritemenucommandinstead.) ToupdateaProgramorCombination: 1. PresstheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEbutton.

182

Saving data Writing to internal memory

TheUpdateProgram/UpdateCombinationdialog boxwillappear.

The Edit Buffer, Write, and Compare


Editbuffersaretemporaryareasinmemoryusedfor storingedits.Therearefiveseparateeditbuffers,one foreachofthefollowingdatatypes: SetLists Programs Combinations

2. Towritethedata,presstheOKbutton.Tocancel withoutwriting,presstheCancelbutton.

WaveSequences DrumKits EachtimeyouselectoneoftheseitemsaSetList, Program,etc.itscopiedintothedatatypesedit buffer.Whenyoumakeedits,thechangesareapplied toversionintheeditbuffer,andnottothestored version. UsingthemenucommandWritecopiestheeditbuffer backtothestoredversion,makingtheedits permanent. Notethatthereisonlyoneeditbufferforeachdata type.Forinstance,ifyoustarttoeditProgramINT A000,andthenchangetoProgramUSERG127,the editstoINTA000willbelost. Changingtoadifferentdatatypedoesnotclearthe editbuffer,however.Forinstance,youcanedita Program,switchtoCombimodetohearhowthe ProgramsoundsinaCombination,andthenswitch backtoProgrammodewithoutlosingyoureditsto eithertheProgramortheCombination.
Editing applies to the data in the edit buffer. Programs or combinations will play according to the data in the edit buffer. When you write, the program or combination settings will be saved in internal memory. Edit Buffer Write Select Edit When you select a program or combination, its data is called from internal memory into the edit buffer.

Saving Tone Adjust edits


ToneAdjusteditsaresavedindifferentways dependingonwhethertheparameterisRelativeor Absolute,andwhetheryouresavingaProgram, Combination,orSong. Relativeparameterstypicallyadjusttwoormore Programparameterssimultaneously.Forinstance, Filter/AmpEGAttackTimeaffectsatotalofsix Programparameters.ThevalueoftheRelative parametershowstheamountofchangetothese underlyingProgramparameters. Absoluteparametersusuallycontrolasingle Programparameter,suchasOscillator1 Transpose.TheProgramandToneAdjust parametersmirroroneanother;whenyouchange one,theotherwillchangetomatch. Programmode: EditstoRelativeparametersaffectthesound immediately,butdontchangetheunderlying ProgramparametersettingsuntiltheProgramis saved.WhentheProgramissaved,theKRONOS calculatesthecombinedeffectsofToneAdjustand dedicatedCCmodulation(fromtheRealTime Knobs,forinstance),andsavestheresultsintothe Programparametersdirectly.Atthatpoint,allof theRelativeparametersareresetto0. EditstoAbsoluteparametersareimmediately reflectedinthecorrespondingonscreen parameters,andviceversa. CombinationandSequencermodes: EditstobothRelativeandAbsoluteparametersare writtenandpreservedastheToneAdjustsettings fortheTimbreorTrack.

Internal Memory
Program INTA 0...127 Combination INTA 0...127 Wave Seq INT 0...149 Drum Kit INT 0...39

Compare
TheCOMPAREbuttonletsyougobackandforth betweenthestoredversionofthesoundandthe versionintheeditbuffer.TheLEDontheCOMPARE buttonletsyouknowwhichversionyourelisteningto. Forinstance: 1. SelectaCombination. 2. ChangeTimbre1toplayadifferentProgram. 3. PresstheCOMPAREbutton. TheCOMPARELEDlightsup,andTimbre1returnsto theoriginalProgram. 4. PresstheCOMPAREbuttonagain. TheCOMPARELEDturnsoff,andTimbre1switches backthenewProgram.

Writing Drum Kits and Wave Sequences


FordetailsonhowtowriteWaveSequenceeditsto memory,seeSavingWaveSequencesonpage 175. FordetailsonhowtowriteDrumKiteditstomemory, seeSavingDrumKitsonpage 179.

183

Loading & saving data, and creating CDs

Compareoperatesonthetypeofdatayourecurrently workingwith.Forinstance,whenyoureinSetList mode,itactsontheSetList;whenyoureintheWave SequenceeditpagesonGlobalP4,itactsontheWave Sequence.

1. Pressthetexteditbutton toopenthetextedit dialogbox.(SeethegraphicTexteditdialog, below.) 2. PresstheClearbuttontodeletethepreviousname. 3. PresstheShiftbuttontoswitchtouppercase characters,andpressthecharacterP. 4. PresstheShiftbuttonagaintoswitchtolowercase characters,andpressthecharactersi,a,n,o. ThetextwillnowreadPiano. 5. PresstheSpacebuttontoenteraspace,andthen pressthecharacters0,1. ThetextwillnowreadPiano01. 6. PresstheOKbuttontoclosethedialogbox. Ifyoudontneedtomakeanycorrections,pressthe OKbuttonagaintocompletetheWritecommand, includingtheeditedname.

Editing names
YoucanchangethenamesofSetLists,Programs, Combinations,Songs,UserPatterns,DrumKits,Wave Sequences,Multisamples,Samples,andmore,as showninthetablebelow.Youcanalsochangethe namesofProgram,Combination,andKARMA CategoriesandSubCategories. Asanexample,hereshowtochangethenameofa ProgramtoPiano01usingtheWritepagemenu command: Texteditdialog
Text Cursor

Character Set Selects the type of character.

Character buttons

Shift button Switches between uppercase and lowercase characters. Delete button Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Cancel button, OK button If you are satisfied with the text that you input, press the OK button. If you wish to discard your input and exit the text edit box, press the Cancel button.

Cursor buttons Move the cursor to left or right.

Clear button Delete all characters of the text. Space button Insert a space at the cursor location.

Where can names be changed?


Namescanbechangedonthefollowingpages.
Set Lists Set List Slots Programs Combinations Wave Sequences Drum Kits Set List P09 page menu command: Write Set List Set List P1: Slot Name parameter Program P09 page menu command: Write Program Combination P09 page menu command: Write Combination Global P4 page menu command: Write Wave Sequence Global P5 page menu command: Write Drum Kit Program, Combination, Sequencer, and Sampling modes P8 & P9 page menu command: Write FX Preset Sequencer P0, 1, 2, 3 page menu command: Rename Song P4: Track Edit Edit Region

Tracks Patterns Sampling Mode Multisamples Sampling Mode Samples Categories & sub categories Files

Sequencer P4: Track Name Sequencer P5: Pattern Name Sampling P04 page menu command: Rename MS Sampling P04 page menu command: Rename Sample Global P3: Program, Combination, and KARMA Category tabs Disk Save: Save AllSave Audio CD Track List, Disk Utility page menu command: Rename

Effect Presets

Songs Regions

184

Saving data Writing to internal memory

Memory protect
MemoryProtectletsyoupreventcertaintypesofdata frombeingoverwrittenaccidentally.Thereare individualcheckboxestoenableMemoryProtectfor differentpartsofthesystem,asdescribedbelow. ForPrograms,Combinations,Songs,SetLists,Drum Kits,WaveSequences,andKARMAGEs,Memory Protectprevents: UsingtheWritecommandtosaveedits Loadingthedatatypefromdisk ReceivingdumpsofthedatatypeviaMIDISysEx WhenenabledforSongs,MemoryProtectalso preventsrecordinginSequencermode. WhenenabledforInternalHDDSave,MemoryProtect preventssavinganydatatotheinternaldisk. Beforesavingedits,loadingdata,andsoon,usethe followingproceduretoturnthememoryprotectoff. 1. PresstheGLOBALswitchtoenterGlobalmode. 2. GototheGlobalP0:BasicSetupBasicpage,and selecttheBasicpage. PresstheBasictabatthebottom,andthenpressthe Basictababoveit.

Writing Global settings


AnyeditsinGlobalpagesP0P3aretemporaryuntil youusetheWritecommandtostoretheminthe internalmemory.IfyoudontusetheWritecommand, yourchangeswillbegonewhenyouturnoffthe power. (NotethatWaveSequencesandDrumKitsarestored separatelyfromtheotherGlobalparameters.)
Editing will affect the data that has been called into the memory area. Edit Memory Area When you Write, the When the power is various Global mode turned on, the settings P0P3 settings will be Write Power On are called into the saved in internal memory. memory area. Internal Memory
Global Setting P0...P3

Therearetwowaystowriteglobalsettings.

Using the Write page menu command


1. Towriteglobalsettings(thevarioussettingsin GlobalP0P3),pressthepagemenucommand WriteGlobalSettinginGlobalP0P3. TheWriteGlobalSettingdialogboxwillappear.

Note:Thesamedialogboxwillalsoappearif,ineachof theabovepages,youholddowntheENTERswitch andpressthe0switch.(SeeShortcutsonpage 7) 2. ToexecutetheWriteoperation,presstheOK button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,thedisplaywillask Areyousure?PresstheOKbuttononceagainto writethedata.

Using the (SEQUENCER) REC/WRITE switch to write


3. PresstheMemoryProtectcheckboxforeach typeofdatayouwishtowriteorsave,sothatthe boxisunchecked. 1. IntheGlobalP0P3pages,presstheSEQUENCER REC/WRITEswitch. Adialogboxwillappear.

2. ToexecutetheWriteoperation,presstheOK button.Tocancel,presstheCancelbutton. Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds afterwritingtheGlobaldata.Thisallowsthesystem timetocompletetheprocess,whichincludessaving abackupofthedatatotheinternaldisk.

185

Loading & saving data, and creating CDs

Saving to disks, CDs, and USB media


Some types of data must be saved to disk
Everythingthatyoucreateoreditwithinthe KRONOSsounds,songs,samples,etc.canbesaved todisk,andbackeduponexternalmedia. AsdescribedunderWritingtointernalmemoryon page 182,sometypesofdatacanbewritteninto internalmemory,withoutusingtheDiskmodeSave commands. Othertypesofdatamustbesavedtodiskbeforethe poweristurnedoff,oranychangeswillbelost.This includesSongandregiondatafromSequencermode, aswellasSamplingModeMultisamplesandSamples. Inordertokeepthisdata,youmustwriteittothe internaldiskortoanexternalUSBstoragedevice(hard disks,flashmedia,CDR/RWdrive,etc.).Whenyouve comeupwithsettingsyoulike,itsagoodideatosave them,sothatyoullalwaysbeabletoreloadthemif desired. Donotturnoffthepowerforatleast10seconds aftersavingdata.Thisallowsthesystemtimeto completetheprocess,whichmaycontinueinthe backgroundevenafterthediskoperationappearsto becomplete. Finally,youcansampleaudiofromCDDA(audioCD) discs,andcanalsorecordyourownmusictoaudio CDs.Formoreinformation,seeSamplingfroman AudioCDonpage 145,andCreatingaudioCDson page 195.

USB Floppy disks


MSDOSformat3.5inch2HDand2DDfloppydisks canbeused.Theformattedcapacityofthefloppydisks willbe1.44MB(18sectors/track)for2HD,and720KB (9sectors/track)for2DD.

Media setup
Beforesavingorloadingdata,makesurethatthe desireddiskorUSBstoragemediaisselected.

Setup for saving data on the internal disk


1. PresstheDISKbuttontoenterDiskmode. 2. UseDriveSelecttoselectHDD:INTERNALHD.

Types of media you can use


Internal SSD
Theinternaldiskisa30GBsolidstatedrive,providing fast,quietoperationandshockresistance.

USB storage media (hard drives, flash media, etc.)


TheKRONOSsupportsMSDOSFAT16andFAT32 formattedUSBstoragedevices,includingharddisks, removabledisks,andflashmedia. Capacityrecognized: FAT32:upto2terabytes=2,000Gigabytes(GB) FAT16:upto4GB
Drive Select

Setup for using a USB device


1. UseaUSBcabletoconnecttheUSB2.0connector oftheKRONOStotheUSBconnectorofyourUSB device(harddisk,removabledisk,CDR/RW). Note:TheKRONOSsUSB2.0connectorssupporthot plugging;youcanconnectordisconnecttheUSBcable whilethepowerison.Howeverinordertodoso,your USBdevicemustalsosupporthotplugging. 2. Turnonthepower. 3. IfyouareusingaUSBharddisk,removabledisk, orCDR/RWdrive,turnonthepowerofyourUSB deviceanduseaUSBcabletoconnectittothe KRONOSsUSB2.0connector. Note:TheabovestepassumesthatyourUSBdevice supportshotplugging.Ifyouareusingadevicethat doesnotsupporthotplugging,connectitwiththe powerturnedoff.Afterpluggingitin,turnonthe power. WhiletheKRONOSisaccessingtheUSBdevice,do notconnectanotherUSBdeviceordisconnectthe connecteddevice.Doingsomaydamageyourdata. 4. PresstheDISKbuttontoenterDiskmode.

USB CD-R/RW and DVD drives


KRONOSsupportsthreeCDR/RWformats:UDF,CD DA(audioCDs)andISO9660(level3). StandardsavingandloadingfromCDR/RWdrives usestheUDFformat,whichallowsyoutotreatCDs muchasyouwouldaharddrive.Formore information,seeCDR/RWdisksontheKRONOS: UDF and packetwritingonpage 1153ofthe ParameterGuide. YoucanloaddatafromISO9660(level3)discs,but KRONOSdoesnotwritedirectlytoISO9660format. Youcan,however,convertaUDFformattedCDR/RW toISO9660format,foreasierloadingonothersystems. Formoreinformation,seeConverttoISO9660 Formatonpage 853oftheParameterGuide. YoucanalsoloaddatafromUDFformattedDVD ROMs.

186

Saving data Saving to disks, CDs, and USB media

5. WaitafewsecondstoallowUSBdevicestobe recognized. 6. UseDriveSelecttoselectthedesireddevice. Ifyouareusingaremovabledisk,insertthemedia. AfteryouexchangemediainyourUSBdevice,press theLCDscreentomaketheKRONOSdetectthe media.Whenthemediahasbeendetected,theLCD screenwilldisplayinformationaboutthemedia. 7. Ifthemedianeedstobeformatted,executethe Formatoperation. Mediarequiringformattingisindicatedas UnformattedinDriveSelect.Formoreinformation, seeFormattingmediaonpage 188. 7. Pressthetexteditbuttonandenteranameforthe files.(SeeEditingnamesonpage 184.) AllofthefilescreatedbySaveAllwillsharethisname, butwithdifferentfileextensions.Ifyouloadoneof thesefileslater,youllbegiventheoptionto automaticallyloadalloftheotherrelatedfilesas wellahandytimesaver. 8. Fornow,leavealloftheboxescheckedinthe Selectionbuttondialogs. Thereareindividualcheckboxesforeachbankof ProgramsandCombis,andforvariousothertypesof data.Leavingallofthesecheckedensuresthatyoure savingeverythingyoullneed.

Saving memory contents to disk


Youcansavevarioustypesofdataindividually,as listedunderSavingtodisk,CDs,andUSBmediaon page 181.However,youcanalsosaveallofthemost importantcontentsofmemoryatonce,including: SetLists,Programs,Combinations,DrumKits, WaveSequences,UserDrumTrackPatterns,and globalsettings Songsandrecordedaudio SamplingModeMultisamplesandSamples LinkstoloadedEXsandUserSampleBankdata Ifyousavethisdatatolowcapacitymedia,you mayneedmorethanonedisk. Tosavealloftheabovedataatonce: 1. Preparethemediaonwhichyouwanttosavethe data.(SeeMediasetuponpage 186.) 2. PressthefrontpanelDISKswitchtoenterDisk mode. 3. SelecttheDiskSavepage.PresstheFiletab,and thentheSavetab. 4. PressDriveSelecttoselectthesavedestination drive. 5. Ifthemediacontainsdirectories,selectthe directoryinwhichyouwanttosavethedata. PresstheOpenbuttontomovetoalowerlevel,or presstheUpbuttontomovetoanupperlevel. Note:Ifyouaresavingdataonhighcapacitymedia,we recommendthatyoucreatedirectoriestoorganizethe mediaintosections. Tocreateanewdirectory,movetothelevelatwhich youwanttocreatethedirectory,andusetheUtility pagemenucommandCreateDirectory. 6. SelecttheSaveAllcommandfromthepagemenu. SaveAllwillsavethesounds,songs,andsampledata, andKARMAGEsatthesametime. Adialogboxwillappear.Thecontents,settings,and operationsforthedialogboxwilldependonthetype ofdatathatyouaresaving.

9. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutetheSaveoperation. Allofthedatawillbesaved,creatingahandfulof differentfiles.Fordetails,seeFiletypesincludedin SaveAll,below. Whenthesaveiscomplete,thesystemreturnstothe Savepage,andthedisplaywillshowtheresulting file(s).Theamountoftimerequiredwilldependonthe amountofdatabeingsaved. Ifafilewiththesamenamealreadyexistsonthe media,youwillbeaskedwhetheryouwantto overwrite.Ifyouwishtooverwrite,presstheOK button.Ifyouwishtosavewithoutoverwriting,press theCancelbutton,redotheoperationfromstep6,and renamethedatainstep7beforesavingit.

Split files
Ifthedatadoesnotfitontotheselectedvolume,the Nospaceavailableonmediumdialogboxwill appear.YoucanpresstheOKbuttontodividethefile willbedividedandsaveittomultiplevolumesof media(suchasmultipleUSBsticks).Ifyoudontwant todividethefile,presstheCancelbutton,andsavethe filetolargercapacitymedia. Formoreinformation,seeSaveAll(PCG,SNGand KSC)onpage 846oftheParameterGuide.

187

Loading & saving data, and creating CDs

File types included in Save All


Thevarioustypesofdataaresavedasthefollowing files. .PCGfile:ThiscontainsallofthePrograms, Combinations,Drumkits,WaveSequences,andglobal settingsfromtheinternalmemory. .SNGfile:ThiscontainsalloftheSongsfrom Sequencermode. Note:Iftheaudiotrackscontainrecordeddata,region datawillalsobesavedatthistime.TheWAVEfilesare storedinadirectorynamedafterthe.SNGplus_A attheend,inthesamedirectoryasthe.SNGfileitself. .KSCfile:ThislistsalloftheMultisamplesand SamplesinSamplingMode,alongwithallofthe loadedEXsandUserSampleBankMultisamplesand DrumSamples. Directory:AdirectorycontainingtheUser Multisamples(.KMPfiles)andSamples(.KSFfiles) thatarelistedinthe.KSCfile.

4. UnchecktheGlobalSettingandSetListcheck boxes. Ifyouresavingjustoneortwobanksofsounds,you dontneedtosavethese. 5. IfthesoundsrelyonuserDrumTrackpatterns, leaveDrumTrackPatternchecked. 6. Pressthetexteditbuttonandenteranameforthe file.(SeeEditingnamesonpage 184.) 7. PressOKtosavethesounds.

Data dependencies
WhenusingSaveAll,SavePCG&SNG,andSave PCGtosaveCombinations,youshouldalsoremember tosavetheProgramsusedbyeachtimbre(ortheDrum KitsandWaveSequencesusedbythePrograms)atthe sametime. SimilarlywhensavingPrograms,youshouldalso remembertosavetheDrumKitsandWaveSequences usedbytheprograms. Note:Ifyourprogramsordrumkitsusemultisamples andsamplesthatwerecreatedinonKRONOS,we recommendthatyouuseSaveAlltosavethedata. WhenyouuseSavePCGorSaveSamplingDatato individuallysaveaprogramordrumkit,ora multisampleorsamplethatyoucreated,we recommendthatyousavethemunderthesame filenameinthesamedirectory.WhenyouuseLoad PCGtoloada.PCGfile,theidenticallynamed.KSC filewillalsobeloadedsothatthecorrect multisamples/sampleswillcorrespondautomatically.

Using the KRONOS as a data filer


TheKRONOScanreceiveMIDISystemExclusivedata sentbyanexternaldevice,andsavethisdatatomedia. (ThisissometimesreferredtoasDataFiler functionality.)Formoreinformation,seeSave Exclusiveonpage 850oftheParameterGuide)

Formatting media
Newlypurchasedmediaormediathathasbeenused byanotherdevicemaynotbeabletobeusedasis.In thiscase,youmayneedtoformatthemediabeforeyou canuseitwiththeKRONOS. TheKRONOSisshippedwiththeinternaldisk alreadyformatted. WhencreatingaudioCDs,youdontneedtoformat theCDR/RWmedia. Whenyouformat,alldatasavedonthatmediawill beerased.Ifyouhadusedacomputeretc.tosetup thatdrivesothatitcanbeusedasmultipledrives (partitions),thisdatawillalsobeerased.Besureto doublecheckbeforeyouformat. Afterformatting,itisnotpossibletopressthe COMPAREswitchtoreturntothepreviousstate. 1. Makesurethatthemediayouwanttoformatis inserted. (SeeMediasetuponpage 186) 2. PresstheDISKbuttontoenterDiskmode. 3. SelecttheDiskUtilitypage.PresstheFiletab, andthentheUtilitytab. 4. PressDriveSelect,andchoosethedrivethatyou wanttoformat.

Saving only a single bank of sounds


Youcanalsochoosetosaveonlyasinglebankof sounds,orjustafewbanks,withoutsavinganyother data.Todoso: 1. GototheSavepage,andselectthediskand directoryintowhichyoudliketostorethe sounds. Fordetails,seesteps1through5underSaving memorycontentstodiskonpage 187. 2. SelecttheSave.PCGcommandfromthepage menu. TheSavePCGDatadialogappears. 3. PresseachSelectionbutton,andinthedialogbox thatappears,selectonlythebanksthatyoudlike tosave. Remembertosaveanydependentdata!Forinstance,if ProgramsuseWaveSequences,youneedtosavethe WaveSequencesaswell.SeeDatadependencies, above.

188

Saving data Saving to disks, CDs, and USB media

5. Pressthepagemenubuttontoaccessthepage menu,andpressFormattoopenthedialogbox.

6. InVolumeLabel,usethetexteditbuttonto accessthetexteditdialogbox,andspecifythe volumelabel. Thepreviouslyspecifiedvolumelabelwillbe displayed.Ifnovolumelabelhadbeenspecifiedfor themedia,orifanonDOSmediawasinserted,this willindicateNEWVOLUME. 7. Specifytheinitializationformat. QuickFormat:NormallyyoushoulduseQuick Formattoinitializethemedia. Selectthisifthemediahasalreadybeenphysically formatted,orifyouwanttoformatmediathathas beenUDFformattedbytheKRONOS.Sinceonlythe systemareaofthemedianeedbeformatted,thiswill requirelesstime. Note:FortheinternaldiskyoucanonlyselectQuick Format. FullFormat:Selectthiswhenformattingmediathat hasnotbeenphysicallyformatted,ormedia(CDRW) thathasnotbeenUDFformatted. Note:Normally,itisnotnecessarytoperformaFull Formatonmediathathasbeenphysicallyformattedat 512bytes/block.ExecutetheQuickFormatforsuch media. Note:YouwillnormallyselectFullFormatforCDRW mediaetc.thathasnotbeenUDFformatted.Ifanerror messageofMedianotformattedappears,execute FullFormat. Dependingonthecapacityofthemedia,executingFull Formatmayrequireasubstantiallengthoftime. 8. Specifythefilesystem. UseFAT16toformatmediaof4GBorless(suchas flashmedia),anduseFAT32toformatlargermedia (theoretically,upto2Terabytes). 9. PresstheOKbuttontoformat,orpresstheCancel buttonifyoudecidetocancel. WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,amessagewillaskyou forconfirmation.PresstheOKbuttononceagainto executetheFormatoperation. YoumustformataCDR/RWdiscifyouwanttouse itforpacketwriting,orifithaspreviouslybeen usedbyanotherdevice. YoudonotneedtoformataCDR/RWdiscthatyou willusetocreateanaudioCD. YoumustusetheKRONOStoformatthemedia. TheKRONOSwillnotcorrectlyrecognizemedia thathasbeenformattedbyanotherdevice.

189

Loading & saving data, and creating CDs

Loading data from disk


Thetypesofdatathatcanbeloadedfrommediaare showninthediagramSupportedfiletypeson page 192.(Formoredetails,seeLoadselectedon page 828oftheParameterGuide.) TheDiskmodeLoadpageletsyouloaddatafromthe internaldiskoranyUSB2.0MassStorageDevice,such asharddrives,flashmedia,CDR/RWdrives,etc.

Loading Songs, sounds, samples, and KARMA GEs together


Asanexamplehere,wellexplainhowtoloadasong whichusesProgramsthatyouveedited,Multisamples thatyouvecreated,andcustomKARMAGEs.Insuch cases,itisbesttoloadalldata. Whenloadingdata,makesurethattheGlobalmode memoryprotectsettingisunchecked.Formore information,seeMemoryprotectonpage 185. 1. MakesurethatthediskorUSBstoragemediais readyforyoutoloaddata.(SeeMediasetupon page 186.) 2. PresstheDISKbuttontoenterDiskmode. 3. SelecttheDiskLoadpage.PresstheFiletab,and thentheLoadtab. PressDriveSelectandselectthemediafromwhich youwanttoload. 4. Navigatetothedirectorythatcontainsthefileyou wanttoload,andselectthe.SNGfile. PresstheOpenbuttontomovetoalowerlevel,or presstheUpbuttontomovetoahigherlevel. Theselected.SNGfilewillbehighlighted. Note:Thecontentsandsettingsofthedialogboxwill differdependingonthetypeoffilethatyouare loading. AsdescribedunderSavingmemorycontentstodisk onpage 187,theKRONOSassumesthatif.SNG,.PCG, .KSC,and.KGEfilessharethesamename,theyre associatedwithoneanother.Thenextfewoptionslet youloadthesesimilarlynamedfiles,iftheyexist. 6. ChecktheLoad********.PCGtoocheckbox. ThisloadsthePrograms,WaveSequences,DrumKits, etc.alongwiththe.SNGfile. 7. Use.PCGContentstospecifythedatathatyou wanttoloadfromthe.PCGfile. Youcanloadonlyasinglebank,ifyoulike.Forthis example,wewanttoallthedatainthe.PCGfile,so wellselectAll. 8. ChecktheLoad********.KGEtoocheckbox. ThisloadstheuserKARMAGEsalongwiththe.SNG file. 5. PresstheLoadbutton. Alternatively,youcanusetheLoadSelectedcommand inthepagemenu. Adialogboxwillappear. 9. ChecktheLoad********.KSCtoocheckbox. ThisloadstheMultisamples,Samples,etc.alongwith the.SNGfile. 10.Use.SNGAllocationtospecifywhetherornot toeraseanySongscurrentlyinmemory. Appendwillloadthesongintothesongnumberthat followsthesong(s)currentlyexistingininternal memory,withoutleavingavacantnumber. Clearwilleraseallsongsfrominternalmemory,and loadthesongsintothenumbersfromwhichtheywere saved. 11.Use.KSCAllocationtospecifywhetherornotto eraseanysamplescurrentlyinmemory.

190

Loading data from disk Loading Songs, sounds, samples, and KARMA GEs together

AppendwillleaveallcurrentlyloadedSampling Mode,EXs,andUserSampleBankdataintact. SamplingModeMultisamplesandSampleswillbe loadedintothenextavailablevacantnumbers followingtheexistingdata. ClearSamplingModeDatawilleraseall MultisamplesandSamplesfromSamplingMode,and loadthedatainthesameconfigurationwithwhichit wassaved.ExistingEXsandUserSampleBankdatais leftintact. ClearAllissimilartoClearSamplingModeData, above,butalsounloadsexistingEXsandUserSample Bankdatabeforeloadingthenew.KSCfile.Thisfrees upthemostmemoryforthenew.KSC. Youcanusetheinformationatthebottomofthedialog box,includingMemoryRequired,(Memory) Available,andEnoughslotsforSamples&MS,to determinewhetherornotyouneedtofreeuproomfor thenew.KSC. 12.SettheLoadMethodasdesired. ThissetsthepreferredwaytoloadtheEXsandUser SampleBankdataintheKSC:loaditintoRAM,oruse VirtualMemory.Notethatifthedataisextremely large,andwouldnotfitintoRAMregardlessofwhich othersampleswereloaded,thedatawilluseVirtual Memoryregardlessofthissetting. ThesesettingsapplyonlytoEXsandUserSample Banks;SamplingModedataisalwaysloadedinto RAM. RAM:ThesampleswillbeloadedintoRAM.Thishas theadvantageofallowingreverseplayback. VirtualMemory:ThesampleswilluseVirtual Memory.Thisgenerallyallowsyoutoloadmorelarge samplesatonce.Notethatthesamplesmaystill requireasignificantamountofRAM KSCSettings:KSCscanstoreseparateloadmethod settingsforeachMultisampleorDrumSample,based onthesettingswhentheKSCwassaved.SettingLoad methodtoKSCSettingsusestheseindividualsettings. 13.PresstheOKbuttontoloadthedata. NeverremoveordisconnectUSBstoragedevices whiledataisbeingloaded.

Loading multiple files at once


Youcanusewildcardstospecifymultiple.KMP, .KSF,.AIF,.WAV,SoundFont2,AkaiProgram,and AkaiSamplefiles,andloadthemsimultaneously.For moreinformation,seeLoadingmultiplefilesatonce onpage 837oftheParameterGuide.

191

Loading & saving data, and creating CDs

Supportedfiletypes

DOS file

.PCG file

All programs

1 program bank I-A...F, U-A...GG

1 program

(Grey)
All combinations 1 combination bank I-A...G, U-A...G 1 combination DOS directory

(Red)
All drum kits (User) 1 drum kit bank INT, U-A...GG 1 drum kit DOS directory (created by Save SEQ on the KRONOS)

(Purple)
All wave sequences 1 wave sequence bank INT, U-A...GG 1 wave sequence DOS directory (created by Save Sampling Data on the KRONOS)

(Grey)
All set lists 1 set list 1 slot Undefined DOS file

All drum track patterns

1 drum track pattern

Global settings

(Blue)

.SNG file

1 song (000-199)

Track

User pattern (U00...99)

All regions

Region

DOS file
(Red)

.KFX file

All effects All presets (P)

1 effect All presets (P)

1 effect 1 preset (P)

.MID file

.EXL file All effects All presets (U) 1 effect All presets (U) 1 effect 1 preset (U) .KCD file

.KGE file

All GEs

1 GE Bank USER-A...USER-L

1 GE .SYX file

All Template

1 GE bank Template USER-A...USER-D

(Grey)

.exsins

.KSC file

Sampling mode data

All multisamples

1 multisample .KMP file

1 sample .KSF file

.KMP file

All un-referenced samples

1 sample .KSF file

.KSF file

UserBank .KSC file

EXs and User Sample Bank data

All multisamples

1 multisample

Sound font file

All drumsamples

1 drumsample

.AIF file

AKAI S1000/S3000
.WAV file (16bit)

Partition

Volume

AKAI format Program file

.WAV file (24bit) AKAI format Sample file

(Purple)

192

Loading data from disk Loading individual banks from a .PCG file

Loading individual banks from a .PCG file


1. Selectthe.PCGfilecontainingthedatayouwant toload. Refertosteps14ofLoadingSongs,sounds,samples, and KARMA GEs togetheronpage 190.Selectthe .PCGfileinstep5. WhenyoupressOK,thesourcebanksPrograms, Combinations,DrumKits,andWaveSequenceswillbe loadedintothedestinationbank.Globalsettingdata willnotbeloaded. Ifyouset.PCGContentstoBankINTA,andToto BankINTA,datawillbeloadedasfollows. Programs BankINTA:loadedintoBankINTA Combinations BankINTA:loadedintoBankINTA DrumKits INT:loadedintoBankINT WaveSequences INT:loadedintoBankINT Whendataisloadedintoabankthatisdifferentthan itsoriginalbank,thedata(bank,program,pattern,and kitnumbers,etc.)willautomaticallybereconfiguredso thatafterloading,thevarioustypesofdatawill correspondcorrectlyineachmode. 2. PresstheLoadbutton. Youcanloadindividualbanksbyusing.PCG Contentsinthedialogboxtoselecttheloadsource bank,andTotoselecttheloaddestinationbank. Thefollowingdatawillalsobereconfigured automaticallyifyouhavecheckedLoad.SNGtoo(so thatsongdataisloadedatthesametime),the followingdatawillalsobereconfiguredautomatically inordertoensurethatthesongdataplaysback correctly. Thebankofeachprogramusedbycombinations Thebankofeachdrumkitandwavesequenceused byeachprogram Thebankoftheprogramusedbyeachtrackofthe song Ifthesongcontainstrack/patternevents,the programbankswithintheseevents

Loading data by individual item or bank


TheKRONOSletsyouloadprograms,combinations, drumkits,andwavesequencesindividuallyorby individualbanks. Thisisaconvenientwaytorearrangecombinationsin theorderinwhichyouwillusethemduringalive performance. BeawarethatifyouchangetheorderofPrograms, thesoundsplayedbyCombinationsmayalsobe affected. Asanexamplehere,wewillexplainhowa CombinationsavedinbankINTFcanbeloadedinto INTE000. 1. MovetotheBankINTFdirectory,andselectthe combinationthatyouwanttoload.(.PCG file/Combinations/BankINTF/) Theprocedureisasfollows. 1)Performsteps15underLoadingSongs,sounds, samples,and KARMA GEs togetheronpage 190. Selectthe.PCGfilecontainingthedatayouwantto load(itwillbehighlighted),andpresstheOpen button. 2)PressCombinationstohighlightit,andpress theOpenbutton. 3)PressBankFtohighlightit,andpresstheOpen button.

193

Loading & saving data, and creating CDs

4)Pressthescrollbartofindthecombinationyou wanttoload,andhighlightitinthedisplay. Alternatively,youcouldselectanyfile,sincethe desiredfilecanbeselectedlaterfromthedialogbox.

Note:WhenyoupressthekeyboardoftheKRONOS, theselectedcombinationwillsound.However,the internalprogramswillbeusedastheprogramofeach timbre. 2. PressthepagemenubuttonandselecttheLoad Selectedpagemenucommand. Thedialogboxwillappear.

3. UsetheCombination(upperline)toselectthe loadsourcecombination,anduse(To) Combination(lowerline)tospecifythe destinationcombination.Forthisexample,select INTE000. Asshippedfromthefactory,thisCombilocationis empty;ithasnoname,andmakesnosound. 4. PresstheOKbuttontoexecuteloading;theloaded combinationwillbeassignedtoINTE000.

194

Creating and playing audio CDs Creating audio CDs

Creating and playing audio CDs


Requires a USB CD-R/RW drive (not included)
IfyouhaveanexternalUSBCDR/RWdrive,youcan sampledirectlyfromaudioCDs(aswellassimply playingthem),andcreateyourownaudioCDs.

Creating audio CDs


InconjunctionwithanexternalUSBCDR/RWdrive, youcanusetheKRONOStocreateaudioCDsofyour music.Todothis,youll: BouncethecompletedSongstoWAVEfiles ArrangetheWAVEfilesinatracklist,intheorder thatyoudlikethemtoappearontheCD BurnthetracklisttoaCD

Part 1: Bouncing to disk


IfyourestartingwithSongsyouvecreatedin Sequencermode,youllfirstneedtobouncetheSongs toWAVEfilesontheinternaldisk. 1. InSequencermode,selectthefirstsongthatyou wanttoburntotheCD. 2. Gotothe08:AudioIn/Samplingpage. 3. SelectthemenucommandBounceAllTracksTo Disk. Adialogboxwillappear,showingthefilesystem. 4. UseDriveSelect,Open,andUptoselectthe directoryinwhichtheWAVEfilewillbesaved. 5. UseNametospecifytheWAVEfilesname. 6. PresstheOKbuttontostartthebounce. TheSongwillstartplaying.Recordingwillbeginand endautomatically,andtheresultingstereoWAVEfile willbesavedtothedisk. RepeatthestepsaboveforalloftheSongsthatyoud liketoburntotheCD,andthenproceedtoPart2 below.

3. AddtheWAVEfilesthatyouwanttowritetothe CD. Select====End====(itwillbehighlighted),and presstheInsertbutton. TheInsertTrackdialogboxwillappear.

Make sure that theres space on the drive


WhenyoucreateanaudioCD,theKRONOSfirst savesadraftversionoftheCDontothesamedrive thatcontainstheoriginalWAVfiles,andthenburns theactualCD.Thismeansthatthedrivemusthave enoughfreespacetowriteasecond,temporary copyofalltheCDsWAVEfiles.Makesurethatyou haveenoughspacebeforeyoustart.

Usethedriveselect,OpenandUpbuttonstogoto thedirectorythatcontainstheWAVEfile,andselect theWAVEfilethatyouwanttoaddtothelist. YoucanpressthePlaybuttontoplaybackthe sampleforauditioning.Alternatively,youcanpress theSAMPLINGSTART/STOPswitchtoplayit. IfyouhaveselectedaWAVEfilewithasampling frequencyotherthan44.1kHzor48kHz,itwillnot bepossibletopresstheInsertbutton. 48kHzWAVEfileswillbeautomaticallyconverted to44.1kHzwhenyouusetheWritetoCD command. Toaddthefile,presstheInsertbutton. Youcancontinueaddingfilesuntilyoupressthe Exitbutton.Thefileswillbeaddedtothetracklist intheorderinwhichyouselectedthem.Ifyouwant

Part 2: Making the CD


1. PresstheDISKbuttontoenterDiskmode. 2. GototheAudioCDMakeAudioCDpage. ThispageletsyouselectagroupofWAVEfilestoburn totheaudioCD.EachWAVEfilewillbecomesatrack ontheCD,andsowellcallthisgroupofWAVEfiles thetracklist.Beforeyouaddanyfiles,thetracklist willshowonly====End====.

195

Loading & saving data, and creating CDs

toaddalltheWAVEfilesinthedirectory,pressthe InsertAllbutton. Note:IfyouchecktheMultipleSelectoption,youll beabletoselectmultipleWAVEfilesandinsert theminasingleoperation. Whenyouhavefinishedaddingfilestothelist, presstheExitbuttontoclosethedialogbox. NoticethattheWAVEfileshavebeenaddedtothe tracklist. UseSpeedtosetthewritingspeed.Thiswillindicate thespeedssupportedbytheCDR/RWdriveyouare using.Inthisexample,settheSpeedtothelowest valueavailable(suchas1x). Insomecases,fasterspeedsmaycausewriteerrors. UseModetospecifythewritingmethod. Note:Dependingonthedriveyouareusing,itmaynot bepossibletowriteatthespecifiedspeed.We recommendthatthefirsttimeyouwrite,youselect Testtoperformawritingtestinordertodeterminethe speedcapabilitiesofyourdrive.Testwillnotwrite datatotheCDR/RWmedia,butwillperformallother processingjustaswhendataisactuallywritten.Ifan erroroccurs,thedisplaywillshowthemessageError inwritingtomedium. PresstheOKbuttontoexecutethewritingtest. Afterverifyingthatdatacanbewrittencorrectlyatthe specifiedspeed,selectWrite. ExecutefinalizetoospecifieswhetherFinalizationwill beexecutedaftertheaudiotrackshavebeenwrittento theCDR/RWmedia.Iffinalizationhasbeenexecuted, thedisccanbeplayedbackonaCDplayer,butitwill nolongerbepossibletoaddmoretracks. Note:Ifyouonlywanttoexecutefinalization,usethe FinalizeAudioCDcommand. 6. WhenyouarereadytowritetotheCDR/RW media,ortoexecuteawritingtest,presstheOK button.Tocancelwithoutexecuting,pressthe Cancelbutton. WhenyoupresstheOKbutton,theObey CopyrightRulesdialogboxwillappear. 7. CarefullyreadCOPYRIGHTWARNINGon page 3oftheQuickStartGuide,andifyou consenttotheterms,presstheOKbuttontobegin burningtheCD.Ifyoudonotconsenttotheterms, presstheCancelbuttontocanceltheoperation. Inordertoavoiderrors,donotsubjectthedriveto physicalshockorvibrationwhileCDR/RWmedia isbeingwritten.

YoucanalsousethePlaybuttontoplayany44.1kHz or48kHzWAVEfile. ToaddotherWAVEfilestothetracklist,pressthe Insertbuttononceagain. Ifyouwanttoaddanothertrack,selecttheWAVEfile thatfollowsthetrackyouwanttoadd.Ifyouwantto addthetracktotheendofthetracklist,select ====End====.ThenpresstheInsertbutton. TodeleteaWAVEfilefromthetracklist,selectthe WAVEfilethatyouwanttodelete,andpresstheCut button.Subsequenttrackswillbemovedforwardin thelist. Note:Formoredetailsonothereditingoperations, pleasesee11c:DriveSelect,Commandbuttonson page 824oftheParameterGuide,andSwapTrack onpage 854oftheParameterGuide. 4. InsertablankCDRorCDRWdiskintothedrive. IntheMakeAudioCDpage,useDriveSelecttoselect theexternalUSBCDR/RWdrive.TheCDR/RWdrive isshownasCDD:BlankDisc. AnaudioCDcannotbecreatedonadiscthat containsdataotherthanaudio(e.g.,files).Inthis case,itwillnotbepossibletoselectthemenu commandsWritetoCDorFinalizeAudioCD. Note:SincesomeaudioCDplayersareunabletoplay backCDRWmedia,werecommendthatyouuseCD RmediaforaudioCDs. 5. SelectthemenucommandWritetoCDtoopenthe dialogbox,andspecifyhowtheCDwillbe written.

Saving Track Lists


Thetracklistwillbelostwhenthepoweristurnedoff. Ifyouwanttokeepthisdata,youmustsaveit. 1. IntheSavepage,selectthedirectoryinwhichyou wanttosavethetracklist. 2. SelectthepagemenucommandSaveAudioCD TrackListtoopenthedialogbox. 3. PresstheOKbuttontosavethedata,orpressthe Cancelbuttontocancelwithoutsaving.

196

Creating and playing audio CDs Playing audio CDs

Playing audio CDs


YoucanplayaudioCDsincludingCDsyouve createddirectlyontheKRONOS,inconjunctionwith anexternalUSBCDR/RWdrive. Todoso: 1. PressthePlayAudioCDtabtogotothePlay AudioCDpage.

2. InDriveSelect,selectyourUSBCDR/RWdrive. DriveSelectwillindicateAudioCD. 3. Toallowmonitoring,settheCDR/RWDrive AudioInputasfollows. LEFT:Bus(IFX/Indiv.)L/R,FXCtrlBusOff,REC BusOff,Send1/Send2000,PanL000,Level127 RIGHT:Bus(IFX/Indiv.)L/R,FXCtrlBusOff,REC BusOff,Send1/Send2000,PanR127,Level127 Volume:127 4. UseTracktoselectthetrack,andpressthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitchtobegin playback.

197

Loading & saving data, and creating CDs

Other disk operations Setting the date and time


KRONOShasaninternalcalendar,whichisusedto recordthedateandtimewhenyousavedata.Youcan setthedateandtimebyusingtheDiskUtilitypages SetDate/Timemenucommand. Youwillneedmakethesesettingsafteryoupurchase theKRONOS,andafterreplacingthecalendarbackup battery. 1. PresstheDISKbuttontoenterDiskmode. 2. SelecttheDiskUtilitypage.PresstheFiletab, andthentheUtilitytab. 3. Openthepagemenu,andselecttheSetDate/Time command. Thefollowingdialogboxwillappear. 4. UsetheVALUEcontrollerstosetthecorrectyear, month,day,hour,minute,andsecond. 5. PresstheOKbutton. Ifthecalendarbackupbatteryrunslow,the followingmessagewillappearintheLCDscreen: Theclockbatteryvoltageislow.Pleasereplacethe battery,andsetthedateandtimeinDiskmode Ifthecalendarbackupbatteryrunsdown completely,thecalendarwillbeinitialized,andthe dateandtimewillnotberecordedcorrectly.Your KorgDistributorcanhelpyoufindaservicecenter toreplacethebattery.

198

Using Effects
Effects overview Effects basics
TheKRONOSprovides12inserteffects,twomaster effects,andtwototaleffects,togetherwithamixerthat controlstheroutingoftheseeffects.Alloftheseare stereoin/out. Specificparametersoftheseeffectscanalsobe controlledinrealtimefromtheKRONOScontrollers orviaMIDImessagesusingDynamicModulation (Dmod),byMIDI/TempoSync,orbyusingacommon LFOortheVectorEGtoapplysynchronizedchangeto differingmodulationeffects. Pleasenotethatpowerusedbytheeffectsmay sometimeshaveanimpactontheavailablenumberof voices(althoughgenerallyonlyinextremeconditions). Formoreinformation,seeAboutpolyphonyon page 16.

What is REMs

*?

Effect types
Youcanchoosefrom185differenteffectsinthe followingcategories: Effecttypes
Dynamics: 000010 EQ/Filter: 011026 OD/Amp/Mic: 027039 Cho/Fln/Phs: 040054 Mod/P.Shift: 055076 Delay: 077099 Reverb/ER: 100108 Mono-Mono: 109140 Mono/Mono: 141185 Effects which control volume, such as compressors, limiter, and gates Effects which control frequency content, such as EQ, multi-mode filter, exciter, and wah Overdrive and amp modeling effects such as guitar/bass amps and mic preamps Choruses, Flangers, Phasers, and other pitch and phase modulation effects Other modulation effects such as tremolo and rotary speaker, and pitch shifters Delays Reverb and early reflections Chains of two mono effects in series Dual Mono parallel effects, with independent mono effects for the left and right inputs

(ResonantstructureandElectroniccircuit ModelingSystem)isKorgsproprietarytechnologyfor digitallyrecreatingthenumerousfactorsthatproduce andinfluenceasound,rangingfromthesound productionmechanismsofacousticinstrumentsand electric/electronicmusicalinstruments,tothe resonancesofaninstrumentbodyorspeakercabinet, thesoundfieldinwhichtheinstrumentisplayed,the propagationrouteofthesound,theelectricaland acousticresponseofmicsandspeakers,andthe changesproducedbyvacuumtubesandtransistors.

Maximum number of effects and maximum voice polyphony


ForeacheffectIFX112,MFX1and2,andTFX1and2, youarefreetochooseanduseanyof185typesof effect.Thereisnolimitationonthemaximumnumber ortypeofeffectsyoucanuse.DuringSmoothSound Transitions,theKRONOSmayuseupto34effectsat once(includingtheSetListEQ). However,acertainamountofdigitalprocessing capabilitymustbeusedinordertoproduceeacheffect. ThePerformanceMeterspageshowstheamountof processingpowercurrentlybeingused.Youcanfind thisonthePerfMeterstabofP0inProgram, Combination,andSequencermodes.

199

Using Effects

Effect I/O
Insert effects
InsertEffects(IFX112)arestereoin/stereoout.Ifyou setWet/DrytoDry,theinputsignalwillpassthrough withoutbeingprocessedbytheeffect.Ifyouset Wet/DrytoWet,theprocessedsignalwillbeoutputin oneofthefollowingways:
Mono In - Mono Out Wet Mono In - Stereo Out Stereo In - Stereo Out
+ Effect

Selecting000:NoEffectwillmutetheoutput.The processedsignalwillbeoutputinoneofthefollowing ways,accordingtothetypeofeffects001185.


Mono In - Mono Out Wet Mono In - Stereo Out Stereo In - Stereo Out
+ Effect

Effect Effect Effect

Effect Effect Effect

Total Effects
ThetotaleffectsTFX1andTFX2arestereoin/stereo out.TheDry(unprocessed)sideoftheWet/Dry parametersendsthestereoinputsounddirectlytothe stereooutput.ThewayinwhichtheWet(processed) sideisoutputdependsonthetypeofeffect,asfollows.
Mono In - Mono Out Wet Mono In - Stereo Out Stereo In - Stereo Out
+ Effect

Master Effects
TheI/OsofMasterEffectsMFX1andMFX2arestereo in/stereoout.Send1andSend2determinethesend leveltotheMasterEffects. MastereffectswillnotoutputtheDry(unprocessed) signalspecifiedinWet/Dry.OnlytheWet(processed) signalwillbeoutput.Theoutputsignalsfromthe MasterEffectsareroutedtotheL/Rbuswiththe outputlevelspecifiedbyReturn1andReturn2.These outputsignalsaremixedwiththeoutputsignalsfrom thebusspecifiedbyBusSelect(P8:Routingpagein eachmode)L/R,orwiththeoutputsignalsfromthe busspecifiedbyBusSelect(InsertFXpageineach mode)L/R,thenroutedtothetotaleffect.

Effect Effect Effect

Note:TheParameterGuideincludesblockdiagramsfor eachindividualeffect,whichincludetheeffects input/outputstructure.

Set List EQ
SetListshaveanadditionaleffectsslotnotavailablein theothermodes:adedicatedninebandgraphicEQ appliedtothesoundafterTFX2,whichtailorsthe soundfromthemainstereooutputs(includingthe analogL/Routputs,S/PDIF,andUSB). Formoreinformation,seeGraphicEQonpage 119.

Effects in each mode


Program mode
ForHD1Programs,youcanuseinserteffectsto processthefinalsoundinthesamewaythatyouuse theFilter,Driver,Amplifier,andEQ(equalizer)to processthesoundfromtheoscillators(OSC1&2). Thenthemastereffectsareusedtocreateoverall ambiencesuchasreverb,andusethetotaleffectsto makefinaladjustments.Allofthesesettingscanbe madeindependentlyforeachProgram. EXiProgramsmayhaveadifferentfilterandamp structureforeachtype,butyoucanalsoapplyinsert effects,mastereffects,andtotaleffectstoEXi1&2,just asforOSC1&2anHD1Program. InbothHD1andEXiPrograms,theDrumTrackalso hasitsownindependentroutingtotheeffects.

Combination and Sequencer modes


InCombinationandSequencermodes,youcanusethe trackEQandinserteffectstoprocesstheprogram sound(andaudiotracksound)ofeachtimbre/track.

Programmode
Oscillator1 Oscillator2 Filter1 Filter2 Driver1 Driver2 Amplifier1 Amplifier2 EQ EQ

Send

Master Effect 1, 2

Return OUTPUT L/MONO, R

Insert Effect 112

Total Effect 112

Drum Track

200

Effects overview Effects in each mode

Thenyoucanusethemastereffectstocreateoverall ambience,andusethetotaleffectstomakefinal adjustments. InCombinationmodeyoucanmakethesesettingsfor eachcombination,andinSequencermodeyoucan makethemforeachsong. InSequencermode,youcanswitchbetweeneffectsor modifytheeffectparametersandrecordthesechanges, sothateffectswillswitchautomaticallyoreffect parameterswillbemodifiedautomaticallyasthesong playsback.

InSequencermodeyoucanalsousetheeffectswhen recordingexternalaudiosourcestoaudiotracks. UsetheP0AudioInput/Samplingpageofeachmode tomakeaudioinputsettings.Alternatively,youcan checkUseGlobalSettingandmakethesesettingsin theGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetupAudiopage. NormallyyouwillleaveUseGlobalSettingchecked. Uncheckthisifyouwantprogramsandcombinations tousetheirownsettings.Forexamplewhenwriting theprogramasavocodereffectprogram. Wheneffectsareappliedtotheaudioinputs,certain effecttypesorparametersettingsmaycause oscillationtooccur.Ifthisoccurs,adjusttheinput level,outputlevel,oreffectparameters.Pleasebe awareofthisparticularlywhenusinganeffectthat hasahighgain.

Sampling mode
InSamplingmode,theanalog,S/P DIF,andUSBaudio inputs,aswellasplaybackfromaUSBCDdrive,can beprocessedbyinserteffects,mastereffects,andtotal effects,andthensampled.UsetheP0:Recording AudioInputpagetomakeaudioinputsettingsfor Samplingmode.ThesesettingsapplyonlytoSampling mode. Samplesthatyouveassignedasamultisamplecan alsobeprocessedbytheinserteffects,mastereffects, andtotaleffects,andthenresampled.

Audio Inputs
Youcanalsouseaudiofromtheanalog,S/P DIF,and USBaudioinputsinPrograms,Combinations,and Songs. Youcanapplytheinserteffects,mastereffects,and totaleffectstoexternalaudiosourcesandsample them,orusetheKRONOSasa6in(AUDIOINPUT1 2,S/P DIFINL,R,andUSB)6outeffectprocessor. Youcanalsouseanexternalmicinputtocontrola vocodereffect(093:Vocoder),andmodulatethe internalsounds.Forexamples,seeVocoder(Program mode)onpage 861oftheParameterGuideand RhythmicVocoder(Combinationmode)onpage 862 oftheParameterGuide.

CombinationandSequencer modes

Send

Master Effect 1, 2

Return OUTPUT L/MONO, R

Timbre 1 /MIDI Track 1

EQ

Insert Effect 112

Total Effect 112

Timbre 16 /MIDI Track 16

EQ

Audio Track 1

EQ

Audio Track 16

EQ

Samplingmode
AUDIO INPUT (1, 2) USB B (1, 2) S/P DIF IN (L, R) Audio CD

Send

Master Effect 1, 2

Return Sample Recording

Insert Effect 112

Total Effect 112

Send

Master Effect 1, 2

Return

Sampling

EQ

Insert Effect 112

Total Effect 112

Resampling

AudioInput

Oscillator1 Oscillator2

Filter1 Filter2

Driver1 Driver2

Amplifier1 Amplifier2 EQ

Send

Master Effect 1, 2

Return OUTPUT L/MONO, R

Insert Effect 112

Total Effect 112

AUDIO INPUT (1, 2) USB B (1, 2) S/P DIF IN (L, R)

201

Using Effects

Effects selection and routing


Theinserteffects,mastereffects,andtotaleffectshave thesamestructureinallmodes,buttherouting settingswilldeterminehowtheoscillatorsofa Program,timbresofaCombination,ortracksofaSong willbesenttoeachinserteffect,mastereffectortotal effect.Inthepagesthatfollow,wewillexplainhow youcanmakeroutingsettingsandeffectsettingsin eachmode.

Using effects in Programs


Routing to IFX, outputs, and buses
1. GototheProgramP8:InsertEffectRoutingpage. 5. RECBussendstheoscillator1and2outputtothe RECbuses. IntheP0AudioInput/Samplingpage,youcanset theSamplingSetupSourceBustoaRECbus,and samplethesignalbeingsenttotheRECbus. NormallyyouwillturnthisOff,sinceyouwill usuallysetSourceBustoL/Rwhensamplingthe outputofoscillator1and2.

Drum Track routing


TheDrumTrackroutingiscontrolledseparatelyfrom themainProgram.Theoptionsareverysimilarto thoseforthemainProgram,asdescribedabove.The DrumTrackroutingparametersareontheProgram P1:Basic/VectorDrumTrackpage(P4inEXi Programs).

2. UseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)tospecify thebustowhichtheoscillatoroutputwillbesent. Ifyouwanttheoscillatoroutputtobeinputto inserteffect1,chooseIFX1. L/R:Theoutputwillnotbesenttothetotaleffects. Afterpassingthroughthetotaleffect,thesoundwill besenttoAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONOand R. IFX112:TheoutputwillbesenttoinserteffectIFX 112. 14,1/23/4:TheoutputwillbesenttoAUDIO OUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL)14.Itwillnotbesentto theinserteffects,themastereffects,orthetotal effects. Off:TheoutputwillnotbesenttoAUDIO OUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONO,R,orto (INDIVIDUAL)14.Choosethisifyouwantthe signaltobeseriesconnectedtothemastereffectsat thesendlevelsspecifiedbySend1(MFX1)and Send2(MFX2). 3. OSCMFXSendspecifiesthesendlevelfromeach oscillatortothemastereffects. ThiscanbesetonlywhenBusSelect (IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)iseitherL/RorOff. IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoIFX1 12,thesendleveltothemastereffectsissetby Send1andSend2(InsertFXpage)afterthesignal passesthroughtheinserteffects. 4. FXControlBus(AllOSCsto)sendsthe oscillator1and2outputtotheFXControlbus.Use thisifyouwanttheaudioinputtotheeffecttobe controlledbyadifferentsound. YoucanusethetwoFXControlbusestocontrol effectsfreely.

Insert effects
1. GototheInsertFXpage.

2. Choosetheeffecttypethatyouwanttousefor eachinserteffectIFX112. Whenyoupressthepopupbutton,alleffectswillbe displayed,organizedintoninecategories.Usethe pageslocatedatthelefttoselectacategory,and selectaneffectfromthatcategoryontheLCD screen. YoucanusetheCopyInsertEffectpagemenu commandtocopyeffectsettingsfromanother programetc.Also,youcanuseSwapInsertEffect toexchange(forexample)IFX1andIFX12. 3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnontheinsert effect. Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,theinserteffectwill beswitchedon/off.WhenOff,theresultwillbethe sameaswhen000:NoEffectisselected.Theinput soundwillbeoutputwithoutchange.

202

Effects selection and routing Using effects in Programs

4. MakeChainsettings. IftheChaincheckboxischecked,theinserteffect willbeconnectedinseries.Sincetheoutputofthe oscillatorisbeingsenttoIFX1instep2,making settingsasshowninthediagramstep6would connectallfiveinsertioneffectsIFX1IFX2 IFX3IFX4IFX5inseries,sothattheseeffects wouldbeinsertedintotheoutputoftheoscillator. 5. MakesettingsforPan(CC#8),BusSel.(Bus Select),Send1,Send2,RECBusandCtrlBusfor thesoundafterithaspassedthroughtheinsert effects. Ifyouvespecifiedachain,thesettingsthatfollow thelastIFXinthechainwillbevalid(exceptfor CtrlBus). Pan:SetsthepanoftheIFXoutput. BusSel.(BusSelect):Specifiestheoutput destination.NormallyyouwillsetthistoL/R.Ifyou wishtosendthesoundthathaspassedthroughthe inserteffectstoAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL) 14,select14,1/2,or3/4. Send1,Send2:Setsthesendlevelstothemaster effects.Forthisexample,setthisto127. CtrlBus:TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreate effectssidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolan effectwithoneaudiosignal(thesidechain),while theeffectprocessesacompletelydifferentaudio signal.Thisisconvenientforusewithvocoders, compressorsandlimiters,gates,etc.Formore information,seeFXControlBusesonpage 860of theParameterGuide. RECBus:Thesoundprocessedbytheinserteffect willbesenttotheRECbus.IntheP0Audio Input/Samplingpage,youcansettheSampling SetupSourceBustoaRECbus,andsamplethe signalthatissenttotheRECbus.Usethisifyou wanttosampleonlythesoundofanaudioinput sourcebeingprocessedbyaninserteffect(andnot samplethesoundoftheoscillatoroutput). Alternatively,thedirectsoundfromtheaudio inputscanbemixedwiththesoundprocessedbyan inserteffect,senttoaRECbus,andsampled. 6. GototheP8:InsertEffectInsertFXpage,andedit theparametersoftheinserteffectyouselected. PresstheIFX112tab,usethetabsattheleftto selectIFX112,andedittheeffectparameters. Effect1On/Off:Turnstheinserteffecton/off.This islinkedwiththeon/offsettingintheInsertFX page. P(EffectPreset):Selectsaneffectpreset.The KRONOSinternalmemorycontainseffect presetswhichareparametersettingsforeacheffect from001:St.DynaCompressorthrough185: Mt.BPMDly//Mt.BPMDly. Effectparametersyoueditaresavedaspartofeach program,buteffectpresetsallowyoutosave favoriteparametersettingsforeacheffect.Formore information,seeEffectPresetsonpage 211.
Wet/Dry

Effect On/Off

P (Effect preset)

Effect Parameters

Fordetailsontheindividualeffects,see: Dynamicsonpage 889oftheParameterGuide EQandFiltersonpage 902oftheParameter Guide Overdrive,Ampmodels,andMicmodelson page 918oftheParameterGuide Chorus,Flanger,andPhaseronpage 927ofthe ParameterGuide ModulationandPitchShiftonpage 940ofthe ParameterGuide Delayonpage 961oftheParameterGuide ReverbandEarlyReflectionsonpage 983ofthe ParameterGuide MonoMonoSerialonpage 988oftheParameter Guide Mono/MonoParallelonpage 1004ofthe ParameterGuide

Master effects
Theinputlevelstothemastereffectsaresetbythe Send1&2levels.IfSend1&2arezero,themaster effectswillnotbeheard.Send1goestoMFX1,and Send2goestoMFX2. 1. GototheProgramP9:Master/TotalEffect Routingpage.

2. InMFX1andMFX2,selectthetypeofeachmaster effect.

203

Using Effects

Theprocedureisthesameaswhenselectingan inserteffect. 3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnonthemaster effect. Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,themastereffect willbeswitchedon/off.WhenOff,theoutputofthe mastereffectwillbemuted. 4. UseReturn1andReturn2toadjusttheoutput levelsofthemastereffects. Note:Foreacheffect,theWetvalueoftheWet/Dry parameteristheoutputlevelattheeffect.The returnvalueismultipliedwiththis(Return=127 willbex1.0)todeterminetheactualoutputlevelof themastereffect. 5. SelecttheMFX1andMFX2pages,andsetthe parametersforeachselectedeffectasdesired.

Theoutputfromthemastereffectsissenttothetotal effectsviatheReturn1andReturn2settingsonthe ProgramP9:Master/TotalEffectRoutingpage. Afterbeingprocessedthroughthetotaleffects,the signalgoestotheAUDIOOUTPUT(MAIN)L/MONO andRoutputs. 1. GototheProgramP9:Master/TotalEffect Routingpage. 2. ChoosethedesiredtotaleffectforTFX1andTFX2. Theprocedureisthesameaswhenselectingan inserteffect.(Seestep7) 3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnthetotaleffectson. Thetotaleffectwillbeswitchedon/offeachtime youpressthebutton.IfthisisOff,theresultwillbe thesameasif000:NoEffectisselected.Theinput soundwillbeoutputwithoutchange. 4. AccesstheTFX1orTFX2pages,andeditthe parametersofeacheffecttoadjustthefinalsound asdesired. FordetailsontheUsingeffectsinProgramsstep 11.

Total Effects
IfyouuseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)tochoose L/Rastheoscillatoroutput,orifyousetthepostIFX BusSelecttoL/R,thesignalwillgothroughthetotal effect.

Using effects in Combinations and Songs


InCombination,andSequencermodes,youcan specifytheroutingofeachtimbre/tracktotheinsert effects,mastereffectsandtotaleffects.Thesesettings aremadeinthesamewayineachofthesemodes.We willbeusingtheexampleofCombinationmodeinour explanationhere. 3. UseSend1andSend2tospecifythesendlevelof eachtimbretothemastereffects. ThiscanbesetonlyifBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.Out Assign)issettoL/RorOff. Note:Theactualsendlevelisdeterminedby multiplyingthisbytheSend1orSend2 settingsforoscillators1and2withintheprogram selectedbythetimbre.Iftheprogramparameter Send1orSend2issetto0,theresultinglevel willstillbe0evenifyouraisethissendlevel. IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)issettoIFX1 12,thesendlevelstothemastereffectsaresetby Send1andSend2(InsertFXpage)followingthe inserteffects. 4. GototheCombinationP8:InsertEffectRouting2 page. BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)isthesameasin theRouting1page.Youcansetitfromeitherpage. FXControlBussendstheoutputofthetimbretoan FXControlbus.Usethiswhenyouwanttheaudio inputtoaneffecttobecontrolledbyanothersound. TherearetwoFXControlbuses,whichgivesyoua greatdealoffreedomforcontrollingeffectsfreely. RECBussendstheoutputofthetimbretoaREC bus.IntheP0AudioInput/Samplingpage,youcan settheSamplingSetupSourceBustoaRECbus, andsamplethesignalthatissenttotheRECbus. Usethisifyouwanttosampleonlythesoundofa specifictimbre. Note:SequencermodehassettingsforMIDIRouting 1/2andAudioRouting1/2.Thesespecifytheeffect routingforMIDItracksandaudiotracks. InSequencermode,youcanalsochooseaRECbus astheRECSourceforeachtrackintheP0Audio

Routing to IFX, outputs, and buses


1. GototheCombinationP8:InsertEffectRouting1 page.

2. UseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.OutAssign)tospecify thebustowhicheachtimbrewillbeoutput. ChooseIFX1ifyouwanttosendtheoutputofa timbretoinserteffect1. Therouting,inserteffects,andchainsettingsare showngraphicallyintheupperpartofthedisplay screen.Inthisexample,T01(timbre1)usesIFX1and 2.T02usesIFX2,T03usesIFX3and4,T02andT05 useIFX4,andT06andT07useIFX5.

204

Effects selection and routing Using effects in Combinations and Songs

TrackMixerpage,sothatthesignalssenttotheREC bus(es)canberecordedtothedisk.

Insert effects
Continuingfromtheabove: 1. GototheCombinationP8:InsertEffectInsertFX page.

SamplingSetupSourceBustoaRECbus,and samplethesignalthatissenttotheRECbus.Use thisifyouwanttosampleonlythesoundofan audioinputsourcebeingprocessedbyaninsert effect(andnotsamplethesoundoftheoscillator output).Youcanalsousethisifyouwanttosample onlyaspecifictimbre.Alternatively,thedirect soundfromtheaudioinputscanbemixedwiththe soundprocessedbyaninserteffect,senttoaREC bus,andsampled. Note:InSequencermode,youcanalsochooseaREC busastheRECSourceforeachtrackintheP0 AudioTrackMixerpage,sothatthesignalssentto theRECbus(es)canberecordedtothedisk. YoucanuseMIDItocontroldynamicmodulation (Dmod)foreacheffect,thepostIFXpan(CC#8), andSend1andSend2. Anasterisk*isshownattherightofCh01Ch16 forthechannelnumberoftracksroutedtoIFX.If youveroutedmultipletracksthathavediffering MIDIchannelsettings,thisspecifiesthechannelon whichtheywillbecontrolled.

2. Choosetheeffecttypethatyouwanttousefor eachinserteffectIFX112. Pressthepopupbutton,andchooseaneffectfrom theninecategories. 3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnontheinsert effect. Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,theinserteffectwill beswitchedon/off.WhenOff,theresultwillbethe sameaswhen000:NoEffectisselected.Theinput soundwillbeoutputwithoutchange. 4. MakeChainsettings. IftheChaincheckboxischecked,theinserteffect willbeconnectedinseries. MakesettingsforPan(CC#8),BusSel.(Bus Select),Send1,Send2,RECBusandCtrl Busforthesoundafterithaspassedthroughthe inserteffects. Ifyouvespecifiedachain,thesettingsthatfollow thelastIFXinthechainwillbevalid(exceptfor CtrlBus). Pan:Setsthepan. BusSel.(BusSelect):Specifiestheoutput destination.NormallyyouwillsetthistoL/R.Ifyou wishtosendthesoundthathaspassedthroughthe inserteffectstoAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL) 14,select14,1/2,or3/4. Send1,Send2:Setsthesendlevelstothemaster effects.Forthisexample,setthisto127. CtrlBus:TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreate effectssidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolan effectwithoneaudiosignal(thesidechain),while theeffectprocessesacompletelydifferentaudio signal.Thisisconvenientforusewithvocoders, compressorsandlimiters,gates,etc.Formore information,seeFXControlBusesonpage 860of theParameterGuide. RECBus:TheIFXoutputwillgototheRECbus.In theP0AudioInput/Samplingpage,youcansetthe

5. GototheIFX112pagestoedittheindividual effectparameters. Formoredetails,seestep6underUsingeffectsin Programs,beginningonpage 202.

Master effects and Total effects


Thesesettingscanbemadeinthesamewayasin UsingeffectsinPrograms(p.203). YoucancontroltheseeffectsviaMIDIontheCtrl Ch.ThespecifiedMIDIchannelwillcontrol dynamicmodulation(Dmod)fortheMasterand TotalEffects.

205

Using Effects

Using effects in Sampling mode


InSamplingmode,youcanapplyeffectstoexternal audiosourcesfromtheAUDIOINPUT12and S/P DIFINjacks,andsampletheresult.Youcanalso applyeffectstotheaudiofromaUSBaudioCD,and sampletheresult.Itsalsopossibletoapplyeffectstoa multisampleandresampletheresult. ByselectingaRECbusastheSourceBus,youcan samplethesignalthatsbeingsenttotheRECbus. Normallywhensamplinginthismode,youwill turnthisOff,sincetheSourceBuswillbesettoL andR.

Routing an external input


1. GototheSamplingP0:RecordingAudioInput page.

Insert effects
1. GototheInsertFXpage.

2. UseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)tospecifythebusto whicheachaudioinputwillbesent. Forexampleifyouwantthesignalfromadevice connectedtoAUDIOINPUT1tobeinputtoinsert effect1,settheINPUT1BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)to IFX1. 3. UseSend1andSend2tospecifythesendlevelof eachtimbretothemastereffects. ThiscanbesetonlyifBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)isset toL/RorOff. IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)issettoIFX112,thesend levelstothemastereffectsaresetbySend1and Send2(InsertFXpage)followingtheinserteffects. 4. SetPLAY/MUTEandSoloOn/Offasdesired.You canusethecontrolsurfacetomakethesesettings. 5. UsePantosetthepanningoftheaudioinput. Ifyoureinputtingastereoaudiosource,youwill normallysettheinputstoL000andR127 respectively. 6. UseLeveltoadjusttheleveloftheaudioinput. Normallyyouwillleavethisat127. 7. FXControlBussendstheoutputofthetimbreto anFXControlbus. TheFXControlBusesletsyoucreateeffects sidechains.Sidechainsletyoucontrolaneffect withoneaudiosignal(thesidechain),whilethe effectprocessesacompletelydifferentaudiosignal. Thisisconvenientforusewithvocoders, compressorsandlimiters,gates,etc.Formore information,seeFXControlBusesonpage 860of theParameterGuide. 8. RECBussendstheaudioinputtoaRECbus.

2. Choosetheinserteffectthatyouwanttouseon theaudioinput. Pressthepopupbutton,andchooseaneffectfrom theninecategories. 3. PresstheOn/Offbuttontoturnontheinsert effect. Eachtimeyoupressthebutton,theinserteffectwill beswitchedon/off.WhenOff,theresultwillbethe sameaswhen000:NoEffectisselected.Theinput soundwillbeoutputwithoutchange. 4. MakeChainsettings. IftheChaincheckboxischecked,theinserteffect willbeconnectedinseries. 5. MakesettingsforPan(CC#8),BusSel.(Bus Select),Send1,Send2,RECBusandCtrl Busforthesoundafterithaspassedthroughthe inserteffects. Ifeffectsarechained,thesettingsthatfollowthelast IFXarevalid(exceptforCtrlBus). Pan:Setsthepan. BusSel.(BusSelect):Specifiestheoutput destination.NormallyyouwillsetthistoL/R.Ifyou wishtosendthesoundthathaspassedthroughthe inserteffectstoAUDIOOUTPUT(INDIVIDUAL) 14,select14,1/2,or3/4. Send1,Send2:Setsthesendlevelstothemaster effects.Forthisexample,setthisto127. CtrlBus:Thesignalprocessedbytheinserteffect willbesenttotheFXControlbus.Usethisifyou wanttouseanothersoundtocontroltheaudio beinginputtoaneffect.YoucanusethetwoFX Controlbusestocontroleffectsfreely. Formoreinformation,seeFXControlBuseson page 860oftheParameterGuide.

206

Effects selection and routing Using effects with the audio inputs

RECBus:Thesoundprocessedbytheinserteffect willbesenttotheRECbus.IntheP0AudioInput page,youcansettheSamplingSetupSourceBusto aRECbus,andsamplethesignalthatissenttothe RECbus.NormallyyouwillsamplewithSource BussettoL/RandRECBusturnedOff.Howeverby usingtheRECbus,thedirectsoundoftheaudio inputandthesoundprocessedbytheinserteffect canbemixedtoaRECbusandsampled. 6. AccesstheIFX112pagesandedittheparameters ofeacheffect. Formoredetails,seestep6underUsingeffectsin Programs,beginningonpage 202. Fordetailsonapplyinganeffecttoanexternalaudio inputandsamplingtheresult,seeSamplingexternal audiothroughinserteffectsonpage 137.

Sending the output of a multisample to an effect bus


1. Ifyouwantthesamplesassignedtoamultisample tobesenttoaneffectbus,gototheSamplingP8: InsertEffectRoutingpage,andmakesettingsfor BusSelect(AllOSCsto).

Master effects and Total effects


MastereffectsworkthesameasthedoinProgram mode,asdescribedunderMastereffectson page 203. Fordetailsonresamplingthrougheffects,see Applyinganinserteffecttoasampleandresampling theresultonpage 138.

Using effects with the audio inputs


JustasyoucaninSamplingmode,theProgram, Combination,andSequencermodesalsoletyouapply theKRONOSeffectstothesignalsfromtheanalog, S/P DIF,orUSBinputsandsampletheresult,ortouse theKRONOSasa6in(analog,S/P DIF,andUSB)6out effectprocessor.YoucanalsousetheKRONOSasa vocodereffect(026:Vocoder)thatusesanexternalmic inputtocontroltheinternalsounds. InputrelatedsettingsaremadeintheP0Audio Input/Samplingpageofeachmode.Normally,youwill makesettingsintheGlobalmodeP0:BasicSetup Audiopageandsharethesesettingsinallmodes,but youcanalsomakeindividualsettingsforaspecific program(inProgrammode)if,forexample,youwant tousethatprogramasavocoder. settings.Ifso,adjusttheinputlevel,outputlevel, andeffectparameters.Inparticular,usecaution whenusinghighgaineffects.

Routing to IFX, outputs, and buses


1. GototheGlobalP0:BasicSetupAudiopage. Note:YoumustmovetoGlobalmodefromthe mode(otherthanSamplingmode)inwhichyou wanttoinputtheexternalaudiosignals.Ifyou movefromSamplingmodetoGlobalmode,the AudioInputsettingsofSamplingmodewillbe maintained,andyouwontbeabletoviewthe settingsofthispage. ThesesettingsarenotusedinSamplingmode. AudioinputsettingsforSamplingmodearemade intheSamplingP0:RecordingAudioInputpage. Whenapplyingeffectstothesignalsfromthe analog,S/P DIF,orUSBinputs,oscillationmay occurdependingontheeffecttypeandparameter 2. UseBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)tospecifythebusto whicheachaudioinputwillbesent. Forexampleifyouwantthesignalfromadevice connectedtoAUDIOINPUT1tobeinputtoinsert effect1,settheINPUT1BusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)to IFX1. 3. UseSend1andSend2tospecifythesendlevelof eachtimbretothemastereffects. ThiscanbesetonlyifBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)isset toL/RorOff. IfBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)issettoIFX112,thesend levelstothemastereffectsaresetbySend1and Send2(InsertFXpage)followingtheinserteffects. 4. SetPLAY/MUTEandSoloOn/Offasdesired.You canusethecontrolsurfacetomakethesesettings.

207

Using Effects

5. UsePantosetthepanningoftheaudioinput.If youreinputtingastereoaudiosource,youwill normallysettheinputstoL000andR127 respectively. 6. UseLeveltoadjusttheleveloftheaudioinput. Normallyyouwillleavethisat127. 7. FXControlBussendstheoutputofthetimbreto anFXControlbus. Usethiswhenyouwanttheaudioinputtoaneffect tobecontrolledbyanothersound.TherearetwoFX Controlbuses,whichgivesyouagreatdealof freedomforcontrollingeffectsfreely. 8. RECBussendstheaudioinputtoaRECbus. IntheP0AudioInput/Samplingpage,youcan chooseaRECbusastheSamplingSetupSourceBus sothatthesignalsenttotheRECbuscanbe sampledorrecorded(onlyinSequencermode). NoisecanentertheKRONOSviathesebuses;see Avoidingextraneousnoiseonpage 91. Ifyouwanttosavetheeditedsettingsinthe KRONOS,youmustwritethem.UsetheGlobal modepagemenucommandWriteGlobalSetting todothis. 9. IfyouwanttousetheGlobalmodeInputsettings intheothermodes,checktheUseGlobal Settingoption. Ifyouwanttomakeindependentsettingsfor programs,combinations,andsongs,uncheckthis setting.

208

Detailed effects editing Dynamic modulation (Dmod)

Detailed effects editing Dynamic modulation (Dmod)


Dynamicmodulation(Dmod)letsyouuseMIDI messagesortheKRONOSscontrollerstomodulate specificeffectparametersinrealtime. Formoreinformation,seeDynamicModulation Sources(Dmod)onpage 1101oftheParameterGuide.

Using Dmod to change the feedback level via SW1


5. IntheP1:Basic/VectorSetUpControllerspage, settheSW1functiontoSW1Mod.CC#80,andthe ModetoToggle. 6. ChooseP8.SettheFeedbackSourcetoSW1Mod. (CC#80),andsetAmountto+30.

Dmod Example
Asanexample,letssetupdynamicmodulationto controlaneffectparameterinrealtime. 1. AsdescribedintheprocedureforUsingeffectsin Programsonpage 202,setIFX1to091:L/C/RBPM Delay.Verifythatyourehearingadelayeffect. 2. GototheProgramP8:InsertEffectIFX1page.

Using Dmod to change the delay level via the Joystick


3. SetInputLevelDmodto+100. 4. SetSourcetoJS+Y:CC#01. Thedelaysoundwilldisappear. Theinputleveltotheeffectcanbecontrolledbythe joystick.Asyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourself, thedelaysoundwillgraduallyincrease.

Whenyoumovethejoystickawayfromyourselfand presstheSW1switch,thefeedbacklevelwillincrease, andthedelaysoundwillcontinueforalongertime. TheAmountsettingspecifiesthefeedbacklevelthat willbeineffectwhentheSW1switchispressed.If Amountissetto10,pressingtheSW1switchwill reducethefeedbacklevelto0.

MIDI/Tempo Sync
MIDI/TempoSyncletsyousynchronizeeffectsLFOs anddelaytimestothesystemtempo.Formore information,seeTempoSynchronizationon page 859oftheParameterGuide.

Using MIDI/Tempo Sync to synchronize delay time to tempo


1. SetuptheeffectsasdescribedunderDmod Exampleonpage 209. 2. SetBPMtoMIDI. 3. ForL,C,andR,settheDelayBaseNoteandTimes asdesired.

209

Using Effects

Forthisexample,setDelayBaseNotetoe andTimes tox1sothattheeffectwillbeeasilyunderstandable. Thedelaytimewillrepeatatanintervalofa8thnote. 4. RotatetheTEMPOknob,andthedelaytimewill change. Whenyou(pushthejoystickawayfromyourselfand) presstheSWswitch,thefeedbacklevelwillrise,and thedelayswillbecomelonger. 5. WhenyouturnontheKARMAON/OFFswitch, KARMAwillbeginplaying.

SelectanydesiredKARMAGE.Whenyourotatethe TEMPOknob,thedelaytimewillchangein synchronizationwiththechangingtempoofthe KARMA. Dependingonthespecificdelayeffect,youmay hearanoiseifyouchangethetempowhilethedelay issounding.Thisisbecausethedelaysound becomesdiscontinuous,andisnotamalfunction. Forsomeeffects,youcansynchronizetheLFO frequencytothetempo.Settheeffectparameters MIDI/TEMPOSynctoOn,andBPMtoMIDI.For moreinformation,seeTempoSynchronizationon page 859oftheParameterGuide.

Common FX LFO
TwoCommonFXLFOsareavailableformodulation effects,suchaschoruses,filters,phasers,etc.IntheP8 CommonFXLFOpageofProgram,Combination, Sequencer,orSamplingmodes,youcanspecifythe resetconditionsandspeedofCommonFXLFO1and 2. Normally,theLFOsoftwoormoremodulationtype effectsusedsimultaneouslywillnothave synchronizedphaseevenifyousetthemtothe identicalFrequency,sincetheLFOsarebeing generatedindependently. HoweverifyouselectCommon1orCommon2forthe LFOTypeparameterofamodulationtypeeffect,the effectwillusenotitsownindividualLFObutthe CommonLFOyouspecifyhere.Thisallowsyoutouse asingleCommonFXLFOtosimultaneouslycontrol twoormoremodulationtypeeffectssuchasflanger, phaser,orautopanwiththesamephase.Sinceyoucan makeindependentsettingsforLFOwaveformand phaseoffsetforeacheffect,youarefreetocreate complexcombinationsofeffects.
Common FX LFO
LFO Type = Common1

Common FX LFO1
Frequency[Hz] Reset

Stereo Flanger
Waveforem = Triangle Phase Offset = 0 [deg]

Generate original LFO waveform

Stereo Phaser
Waveforem = Sine Phase Offset = 0 [deg]

Stereo Auto Pan


Waveforem = Sine Phase Offset = +90 [deg]

210

Detailed effects editing Effect Presets

Effect Presets
EffectPresetsletyoueasilystoreandrecallallofthe settingsforanindividualeffect.Youcanstoreupto16 userpresetsforeacheffecttype,inadditionto15re writablefactorypresets.
Effect On/Off P (Effect preset)

:ThisshowsthatnoEffectPresethasbeen selected.Youllseethisifyouvejustselectedaneffect, writtenaProgram,orselectedanewProgram. Selectingthissettingfromthemenuwillnothaveany effect. 4. Edittherecalledparametersasdesired.

Saving Effect Presets


Ifyouvecomeupwithsettingsyoulikeandwantto savethemasanewpreset,youcansavethem. 1. OntheIFX112page,touchthemenubuttonto openthepagemenu. 2. Inthemenu,selecttheWriteFXPresetcommand. TheWriteFXPresetdialogwillappear. 3. NamethePresetasdesired. 4. OpentheTopopup,andselectthePreset numbertosaveto.
Wet/Dry Effect Parameters

Youcansaveintoanyoftheslots,butwerecommend thatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15. 5. PressOKtosavethePreset,orCanceltoexit withoutsaving.

Thesamepresetsappearinallofthemodes(Program, Combination,Sequence,andSampling),andsetsof presetscanbesavedtoandloadedfromdisk. Notethateditstoeffectsparametersareautomatically storedwiththeProgram,Combination,orSongyou dontneedtostorethemasanEffectPreset.Presetsjust makeiteasiertoreuseyourfavoritesettings. Forinstance,youcansaveanEffectPresetwhile workingonaparticularProgram,andthenlateruse thesameEffectPresetinadifferentProgram,Combi, orSong. Note:Programs,Combinations,andSongssavethe effectsparametersettings,buttheydontsavethe numberoftheselectedEffectPreset.Ifyouselectan EffectPreset,andthensavetheProgram,theEffect Presetsettingwillrevertto.

Selecting Effect Presets


1. SelectaneffectintheInsertFXpage. 2. TheP00:InitialSetsettingswillberecalled. P(EffectPreset)willshow. 3. UseP(EffectPreset)toselectaneffectpreset: P00P15orU00U15. Thestoredparameterswillberecalled.Notethatthis willoverwriteallparametersoftheeffect. P00:InitialSet:Thesearethedefaultsettingsthatare recalledwhenyouselectaneffecttypeintheInsertFX page.Youcantsaveyourownsettingshere. P01P15:ThesecontainKorgpresetdata.We recommendthatyoustoreyoursettingsinU00U15. U00U15:Theseareareasinwhichyoucanstoreyour ownsettings.

211

Using Effects

212

Using KARMA
Overview - What is KARMA?
KARMAstandsforKayAlgorithmicRealtimeMusic Architecture,namedafteritsinventor,StephenKay. KARMAgeneratesMIDIdata,usingmanydifferent algorithmsseamlesslyintegratedtoprovidea powerfulmusicgenerationengine.Basedonthe notesandchordsyouplay,KARMAcreatesphrases andpatternsinrealtime,generatingnotjustnotesbut MIDIcontroldataaswell.TheKARMAarchitecture allowsthevariousalgorithmstobereconfiguredand variedinrealtime,asyouplaythem. Forexample,youcancreatethedynamictempo changesthatoccurwithinaharpglissando,the synchronizedchangesinvolumeandtonethatoccur aspartofabrassphrase,therandomnesswithina drumphrase,thecrescendoanddiminuendoofafill in,changesinphraseortoneofatechnogroove, complexinterweavingphrasesthatwouldbe impossibletoplayonakeyboard,guitarstrumming andfingerpickingsimulationswithnaturalsounding changes,andbackinggroovesthatfollowyour keyboardplayinginrealtimeallunderyourcontrol. KARMAletsyouproducephrasesandpatternsatafar moremusicalandflexiblelevelthanconventional arpeggiatorsorpatternplaybackfunctions. OntheKRONOS,KARMAisdesignedtoworkinclose conjunctionwiththenumerousotherfunctions,giving youunbelievableperformancepoweronstageorinthe studio.

The structure of KARMA


KARMAconsistsofthefollowingmajorparts.

KARMA modules
AKARMAmoduleusesaGE(GeneratedEffect)to createaphraseorpattern. InProgrammode,onlyoneKARMAmodule(A)is used.InCombinationorSequencermodes,four KARMAmodules(A,B,C,D)canbeused.For example,eachmodulemightbeusedtogenerate phrasesandpatternsforaseparatesound,suchas drums,bass,guitar,andpiano. InProgrammode,theKARMAmoduletransmits andreceivesallMIDIdataontheGlobalMIDI channelspecifiedbyMIDIChannel. InCombinationandSequencermodes,theMIDI datafromeachKARMAmoduleistransmittedand receivedontheInputChannelandOutput Channelspecifiedforeachmodule.

Basedonnotedatafromthekeyboard,theGEuses variousinternalparameterstocontrolhowthenote datawillbedeveloped,andhowrhythm,chord structure,andvelocityetc.willbecontrolledto generateaphraseorpattern.MIDIcontrolchangesand pitchbenddatacanalsobegeneratedin synchronizationwiththephraseorpattern.Asa capabilityuniquetotheKRONOS,KARMAcan generateMIDIexclusivemessagestocontrolwave sequencing,whichswitchesbetweenmultisamplesetc. ofaprograminrealtime.Thisletsyoucreatephrases andpatternsinwhichthetonecolorandnotepitches changeindependently. TheKRONOSprovidesalargenumberofGEsthatcan beusedforavarietyofinstruments,performance techniques,andmusicalstyles.

GE RTP Real Time Parameters


AGEconsistsofovertwohundredinternal parameters.IneachGE,upto32oftheseinternal parametersarepreselectedasthemostsuitable

GE (Generated Effect)
ThephrasesandpatternsproducedbyaKARMA modulearecreatedbyaGE(GeneratedEffect).

MIDI IN

KARMA function
GE
(Generated Effect)

MIDI OUT

KARMA module parameters

Phrases or patterns

Tone generator

213

Using KARMA

parametersforuseincontrollingthephraseorpattern. TheseparametersarecalledtheGErealtime parameters.


KARMA - Program mode KARMA function
KARMA module A MIDI IN
GE (Generated Effect) GE parameters
01: Rhythm: Swing% 02: Note Series: Interval 03: Note Series: Inversion

Youcancontrolthephraseorpatternbyeditingthese parameters,orbyassigningthemtotheKARMA CONTROLSslidersorKARMASWITCHbuttonsand operatingtheseduringyourperformance.

KARMA module parameters


Key Zone Bottom Key Zone Top Receive MIDI Filter Transmit MIDI Filter Transpose Note Trigger Env1 Trigger etc . . .

....
32: Repeat: Repetitions:

Phrases or patterns
GE RTP, Perf RTP (Real-Time Parameters)
GE Parm 01 (Rhythm: Swing) Module Parm (Env1 Trigger)

KARMA REALTIME CONTROLS


MASTER

Dynamic MIDI

KARMA - Combination/ Sequencer mode KARMA function


MIDI IN
Input Ch 01ch = 01ch

KARMA module A
x xx x

GE : #0010: Drums1
GE Real-Time parameters: 01 ... 32

KARMA module parameters

Output Ch = 02ch

Drums Pattern

KARMA module B
Input Ch = 01ch

GE : #0100: Bass Riff10


GE Real-Time parameters: 01 ... 32

KARMA module parameters

Output Ch = 03ch

Bass Riff

KARMA module C
Input Ch = 01ch

GE : #0200: Funk Guitar2


GE Real-Time parameters: 01 ... 32

KARMA module parameters

Output Ch = 04ch

E.Guitar Riff

KARMA module D
Input Ch = 01ch

GE : #0300: E.P Phrase3


GE Real-Time parameters: 01 ... 32

KARMA module parameters

Output Ch = 05ch

E.Piano Phrase

GE RTP, Perf RTP (Real-Time Parameters)


GE Parm 01 (Rhythm: Swing) Module Parm (Env1 Trigger)

KARMA REALTIME CONTROLS

Dynamic MIDI

RTC Model
AllofthepresetGEshaveaninternallyspecifiedRTC Model.TheRTCModelisacertainstandardizationof themorethantwohundredinternalparametersofthe

GE,basedonthetypeandpurposeofthatGE. GEsforwhichthesameRTCModelhasbeenspecified will(bydefault)havethesameparametersassignedas theirGErealtimeparameters.Thismeansthatevenif

214

Overview - What is KARMA? The structure of KARMA

youreswitchingthroughvariousGEsthathavethe sameRTCModel,youwillbeabletocontrolthemina uniformmannerandmakevalidcomparisonsbetween them,sincetheirdefaultstatewillbethesame.Of course,youarefreetoedittheGErealtimeparameters. Inthepreloadedprogramsandcombinations,the KARMACONTROLSslidersandswitchesare assignedinauniformmannerdependingontheRTC ModelfortheGEusedbyeachmodule.Forexampleif aKARMAmoduleusedbyaprogramorcombination usesaGEoftheDrum/Percussioncategory,the KARMAREALTIMECONTROLSslidersandKARMA SWITCHESwillbeassignedsothatSlider1controls theswingandSlider2controlsthepatternvariation. Ofcourse,youarealsofreetoedittheREALTIME CONTROLSassignments. EachGEisassignedoneofthefollowingRTCModels. DP1Drum/Perc BL1Bass/Lead DM1DrumMelodic GV1GatedVel/Pattern GC1GatedCCs CL1Comp/Lead WS1WaveSeq1 WS2WaveSeq2 EG1DualEnvGen LF1DualLFOs MR1MelodicRepeat MB1MelRpt/Bend RB1RealTimeBend CustomafewGEsmayrequirespecialRTC setups,outsideofthenormalRTCModels.Inthis case,theassignmentofRTCControlsisleftupto thesounddesignerofthespecificProgramor Combination. Anexampleis2028:VJSMotion.IfyouloadthisGE, itclearsallRTCModelassignments(whentheGE LoadOptionsaresettothedefaultsetting).With suchGEs,itsgenerallybesttocopytheModule fromanexistingProgram,sothatyouhavean exampleofhowtomapthecontrols.

KARMA module parameters


Thesearetheparametersthatcontrolthephrasesand patternsgeneratedbyaKARMAmodule. Youcansettheseparametersindependentlyforeach KARMAmodule.TheseparametersincludetheGE selection,MIDIinput/outputchannel,keyzone,MIDI filtering,andtriggering.

GE RTP (GE Real-Time Parameters) Perf RTP (Perf Real-Time Parameters)


Thesearetheparametersthatyoucancontrolviathe KARMACONTROLSslidersorKARMASWITCHES. IfGErealtimeparameters(GERTP)andKARMA moduleparameters(PerfRTP)areassignedtothe KARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA SWITCHES,youllbeabletocontroltheminrealtime tomodifythephraseorpatternwhileyouplay.

Dynamic MIDI
DynamicMIDIisafunctionthatusestheKRONOS controllersorMIDIcontrolmessagestocontrolspecific functionsofKARMA. Forexample,thisenablesyoutousethejoystickto playstrummedguitarchords,useafootswitchto controltheRun/MutestatusofaKARMAmodule,or usethedamperpedaltolatchaKARMAmodule. Youllbeabletocontroltheminrealtimewhileyou play.

KARMA CONTROLS
ThesearefrontpanelcontrolsusedtocontrolKARMA. Thesettingsofthesecontrolscanbesaved independentlyforeachprogram,combination,and song.

ON/OFF switch
ThisswitchesKARMAon/off.

LATCH switch
Ifthisison,thephraseorpatternwillcontinueplaying evenafteryouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.

Auto RTC Setup


Thisisaconvenientfunctionthatautomaticallymakes KARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMASWITCH assignmentsaccordingtotheRTCModelsettingofa GE.UsetheLoadGEOptionsdialogboxtomakethese settingsautomatically.Hereyoucanchoosewhether youwantKARMAcontrollerassignmentstobemade automaticallywhenyouusetheGESelectparameterto selectaGE.IfyouvechosenAutoRTCSetupinthis dialogbox,theassignmentswillbemade automaticallyeachtimeyouchangetheGE.This meansthatregardlessofthetypeofGEthatsselected, youwillimmediatelybeabletousethestandard KARMACONTROLassignments.

MODULE CONTROL switch


InCombinationorSequencermode,thisselectsthe modulethatwillbecontrolledbytheKARMAsliders 18,KARMASWITCHES18,andKARMASCENE switches18. MASTER:Choosethissettingifyouwanttocontrol modulesA,B,C,andDsimultaneously.Forexample, thisletsyouuseslider1tocontroltheGErealtime parameterSwingforallmodulesA,B,C,andD. A,B,C,D:Chooseoneofthesesettingsifyouwantto controlthecorrespondingmoduleindividually. Note:InProgrammodeonlyMASTERcanbeselected, andmoduleAwillbecontrolled.

215

Using KARMA

KARMA CONTROLS sliders 18 KARMA SWITCHES 18 KARMA SCENES 18


WhenCONTROLASSIGNissettoRTKNOBS/ KARMA,thesecontroltheKARMAmodule(s)selected byMODULECONTROL. Byoperatingthesecontrols,youcanadjustGErealtime parametersandKARMAmoduleparameterstofreely varythephrasesorpatternsgeneratedbytheKARMA module.(UseGERTP,PerfRTPtospecifythe parameterthateachcontrolwillaffect.)

SCENE switches
Theseswitchesletyoustorethesettingsofsliders18 andswitches18aseightdifferentscenes(SCENE1 8).InCombinationorSequencermodes,scenescan storeseparatesettingsforeachmodule,andyoucan usetheMODULECONTROLswitchandtheScene Matrixfunctiontocontrolthis. Formoreinformation,see75d:ModuleControl SceneMatrixonpage 479oftheParameterGuide.

216

Performing with KARMA Performing with KARMA in Program mode

Performing with KARMA


Basedonyourkeyboardplayingoronthenotedata receivedfromMIDIIN,KARMAautomatically generatesadiversevarietyofphrasesorpatterns,such asguitarorkeyboardbackingriffs,bassphrases,or drumpatterns.YoucanusetheKARMACONTROLS slidersandtheKARMASWITCHEStofreelymodify thesephrasesorpatterns. TheKRONOScontainspreloadedprogramsand combinationsthattakefulladvantageofKARMA, coveringawiderangeofinstruments,playing techniques,andmusicalgenres.Intheseprogramsand combinations,theparametersmostusefulfor controllingKARMAhavebeenassignedtothe KARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA SWITCHES.

Performing with KARMA in Program mode


InProgrammodeyoucanuseoneKARMAmoduleto generateaphraseorpatternappropriateforthesound oftheprogram.

Adjusting the performance tempo


1. UsetheTEMPOknobortheTAP TEMPOswitchtoadjustthe performancetempo. Thiswillchangetheq =valuelocated intheupperrightofthedisplay.Youcan adjustthetempoinarangeof40.00 300.00.TheLEDlocatedabovetheTAP TEMPOswitchwillblinkatintervalsof aquarternote( q ). AsanalternativetousingtheTEMPOknobortheTAP TEMPOswitch,youcanchooseq =inthedisplay,use numerickeys09toenterthetempo,andthenpress theENTERswitch.YoucanalsousetheVALUE controllertosetthetempo.TheLEDwillblinkatthe tempoyouspecify. Note:ThesettingoftheTEMPOknobisalsosaved whenyouwriteaprogram. IftheGlobalP1:MIDIMIDIpageMIDIClock parameterissettoExternal,orsettoAutoandMIDI Clockmessagesarebeingreceived,theTempo displaywillindicateq =EXT,andtheKRONOS willbesynchronizedtoanexternalMIDIdevice.In thiscase,youwontbeabletochangethetempoby operatingtheKRONOS.

Selecting a Program and switching KARMA on/off


1. PressthePROGRAMswitchtoenterProgram mode,andselectthedesiredprogram.(See SelectingProgramsonpage 27.)

Asyoustepthroughtheprograms,youllfindsome programsforwhichtheKARMAON/OFFswitchLED islit. Pressakeyoronscreenpad(on theP1:Basic/VectorPadspage), andKARMAwillbeginplaying. InotherProgramsaswell,you canpresstheON/OFFswitch (LEDlit)toturnKARMAon. Note:IftheDrumTrackison, andtheTriggerModeissetto WaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrack willstartplaying simultaneously.

217

Using KARMA

Checking note-on/off and key zone


Thescreenshownbelowisarealtimedisplayofthe notedatareceivedfromthekeyboard,pads18,and MIDIIN,andthenoteon/offdatageneratedbythe KARMAmodule,togetherwiththenameofthechord thatwasdetected. 1. GototheProgramP0:PlayKARMAGEpage.

sliders, KARMA SWITCHES 18, SCENE 18 switches


Parametersusefulforcontrollingthephraseorpattern arealreadyassignedtotheKARMACONTROLS18 sliders,KARMASWITCHES18,andSCENE18 switches.Youcanoperatethesecontrollerstocreatea widerangeofchangesinthephraseorpatternthats playing. 1. GototheProgramP0:PlayKARMAGEpage.

Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thenameofthechord detectedbytheKARMAmodulewillappearinthe ChordfieldofKARMAModuleInfo.

Thelowerpartofthedisplayshowsthenamesofthe slidersandswitchesthatareassignedinthisprogram. Inthepreloadedprograms,theKARMACONTROLS slidersandKARMASWITCHEShavealreadybeen assigned. 2. OperatethefrontpanelKARMACONTROLS18 slidersandKARMASWITCHES18. Thepatternorphrasewillchangeaccordingly. Youcanalsoturntheswitcheson/offbypressingthem inthedisplay.Youcanoperatetheslidersbyselecting themandthenusingtheVALUEcontrollertoadjust thevalue. Thetypeorvalueoftheparameterbeingcontrolledby theslidersandswitchesisshownintheKARMA ModuleInfoKARMAValuefield.Thisletsyousee howtheparametersarebeingaffectedbyyourslider orswitchoperations.

TheCCs/Notesareashowsthekeyzoneofthe KARMAmodule,andthestateofthecontroldataand noteon/offdatageneratedbytheKARMAmodule. (SeeSettingKARMAskeyboardzoneonpage 224.)

Using the KARMA controllers


Note:ThestateoftheKARMAcontrollersissaved whenyouwritetheprogram.

KARMA on/off: ON/OFF switch


KARMAwillturnon/offeachtimeyoupressthe ON/OFFswitch.Ifitison,theswitchLEDwilllight. Whenyouplaythekeyboard,theGEselectedforthe KARMAmodulewillstartgeneratingaphraseor pattern.

Thesavedvalueisshownatthelowerrightofeach sliderorswitch.

Making the performance continue after you remove your hand from the keyboard: the LATCH switch
YoucanmakeKARMAcontinueplayingevenafter youremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard. LEDlit:Latchison.Theperformancewillcontinue evenafteryouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard. LEDdark:Latchisoff.Theperformancewillstop whenyouremoveyourhandfromthekeyboard.

Modifying the phrase or pattern generated by the KARMA module: KARMA CONTROLS 18

218

Performing with KARMA Performing with KARMA in Program mode

3. UsethefrontpanelSCENE18switchestochoose ascene. Theslidersandswitcheswillchangetothesettings thatweresavedinthesceneyouchose. Eachoftheeightscenescontainsthevaluesofsliders 18andswitches18.BypressingaSCENE18switch tochooseascene,youcaninstantlyrecallsettingsfor theeightslidersandeightswitches. Evenifyouswitchscenes,thechangesyoumakeusing sliders18andswitches18areremembereduntilyou selectanotherprogram.Whenyouwriteaprogram, yoursliderandswitchsettingsaresavedinthe respectivescene18.

1. UsetheREALTIMECONTROLknobstoeditthe soundoftheprogram,andusetheslidersand switchestomodifythesavedsettingsineach scene. 2. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSswitch,and presstheCONTROLASSIGNRT KNOBS/KARMAswitch. TheRealTimeControlsknobsettingswillbereset(to thecentervalueof064),andthesettingsofallscenes willreturntotheirstoredsettings. IfyouveusedtheRESETCONTROLSswitchto resettheRealTimeControlsknobsandtoreturnall scenestotheirsavedsetting,thereisnowayto returntotheeditedsettingsofstep1.

Restoring the state of the sliders and switches


Youcandothisbyadjustingthecontrolswhileyou watchtheslidersandswitchesinthescreen,oryoucan usethefollowingmethod. Restoringtheentireprogram 1. PresstheCOMPAREswitch. Theentireprogramwillreverttothestateinwhichit waswritten.(SeeUsingCOMPAREonpage 42.) 2. PresstheCOMPAREswitchonceagain. Theprogramwillreturntotheeditedstate.

Selecting a GE (Generated Effect)


WhenKARMAison,theKARMAmoduleusesaGEto generatephrasesorpatterns.TheKRONOSprovidesa widerangeofGEsthatyoucanuseforavarietyof instruments,playingtechniques,andmusicalstyles (SeeThestructureofKARMAonpage 213). Foreachofthepreloadedprograms,aGEthats appropriateforthesoundoftheprogramisalready selected.IfyouswitchtoadifferentGE,thegenerated phraseorpatternwillchangedramatically. 1. GototheProgramP0:PlayKARMAGEpage.

Restoring all sliders and switches of the selected scene


1. Operatetheslidersandswitchestoeditthevalues savedintheprogram. TheLEDoftheselectedSCENEswitchwillblink. 2. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSswitch,and presstheSCENEswitch. Allslidersandswitcheswillberesettotheirstored settings,andtheSCENEswitchLEDwilllight. 3. Onceagain,holddowntheRESETCONTROLS switchandpresstheSCENEswitch. Allslidersandswitcheswillreturntotheeditedstate ofstep1,andtheSCENEswitchLEDwillblink. Restoringasinglesliderorswitch 1. Operatetheslidersandswitchestoeditthevalues savedintheprogram. 2. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSswitch,and operatethesliderorswitchthatyouwantto restore. Theselectedsliderorswitchwillreturntoitsstored setting. Restoringallscenesettings 1. Ineachscene,operatetheslidersandswitchesto editthevaluessavedintheprogram. 2. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSswitch,and presstheMODULECONTROLswitch. Allsceneswillreturntotheirstoredsettings. IfyouveusedtheRESETCONTROLSswitchto returnallscenestotheiroriginalsetting,thereisno waytoreturntotheeditedsettingsofstep1. ResettingtheREALTIMECONTROLknobsettingsfor allscenes

2. Inthedisplay,presstheGESelectpopupbutton toopentheGESelectmenu.

3. SelectaGEfromthelistintherightsideofthe display. TheselectedGEwillbehighlightedandwillbecome active.

219

Using KARMA

Ifyounowplaythekeyboard,thisGEwillgeneratea phraseorpattern. Whilethismenuisdisplayed,youcanselectandplay theseGEswithoutpressingtheOKbutton. 4. Ifyouaresatisfiedwiththeprogramyouselected, presstheOKbuttontoclosethemenu.

Alternatively,youcanselectaGEbychoosingGE Selectinthedisplay,andoperatingtheVALUEslider orVALUEdial.YoucanalsouseGECategorySelect tochooseaGEbycategory.(SeeGECategorySelect onpage 10oftheParameterGuide.)

Editing KARMA module parameters


FordetailsoneditingtheparametersofaKARMA module,seeEditingKARMAonpage 223.

Performing with KARMA in Combination mode


InCombinationmode,uptofourKARMAmodules canbeoperatingsimultaneously.Youcanusethefour KARMAmodulestogetherwiththesixteentimbre programsinawidevarietyofways,forexampleby usingthemtoindependentlyplayphrasesand patternsforseparateprogramssuchasdrums,bass, guitar,andstrings.

Checking note-on/off and key zone


Thescreenshownbelowisarealtimedisplayofthe notedatareceivedfromthekeyboard,pads18,and MIDIIN,andthenoteon/offdatageneratedby KARMAmodulesA,B,C,andD,togetherwiththe nameofthechordthatwasdetected. 1. GototheCombinationP0:PlayKARMAGE page.

Selecting a Combination and turning KARMA on/off


1. PresstheCOMBIswitchtoenterCombination mode,andselectthedesiredcombination.(See SelectingCombinationsonpage 57.)

Whenyouplaythekeyboard,thenameofthechord detectedbyeachKARMAmodulewillappearinthe ChordfieldofKARMAModuleInfo. Asyoustepthroughthecombinations,youwillnotice thattheKARMAON/OFFswitchLEDislitforsome combinations. Withthesecombinations,KARMAwillbeginplaying whenyouplaythekeyboard. Note:IftheDrumTrackison,andTriggerModeisset toWaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrackwillstartplaying simultaneously. Evenforothercombinations,youcanpressthe KARMAON/OFFswitch(LEDlit)toturnonKARMA. Thedisplayedchordnameisthechordthatisdetected bythemoduleselectedbythefrontpanelMODULE CONTROLswitch.Thewayinwhichchordsare detectedwilldependonthesettingsoftheKARMA module.

TheCCs/Notesareashowsthestatusofthecontrol dataandnoteon/offdatageneratedbyKARMA modulesA,B,C,andD,andthekeyzonesettingsof theKARMAmodules.

Adjusting the performance tempo


Inthesamewayasforaprogram,youcanusethe TEMPOknobortheTAPTEMPOswitchtoadjustthe performancetempo.Changingthetempowillaffect thetempoofallKARMAmodulesthatareoperating. (Seep.217) Youcantadjusttheperformancetempoofeach KARMAmoduleindividually. Note:ChorddetectionisaffectedbytheKARMA moduleskeyzonesettings(Combination71b), Transpose(Combination73b:ModuleParameter Control),andDynamicMIDIDestination (Combination78)ChordScanandSmartScan.

220

Performing with KARMA Performing with KARMA in Combination mode

Using the KARMA controllers


YoucanoperatetheKARMAcontrollerstocontrolthe phraseorpatterngeneratedbyeachKARMAmodule. InCombinationmode,youcanchoosetheKARMA modulethatyouwanttocontrol. Note:ThestateoftheKARMAcontrollersissaved whenyouwritethecombination. 1. GototheCombinationP0:PlayKARMAGE page.

4. UsethefrontpanelSCENE18switchestochoose ascene. ThischangesthescenefortheKARMAmodule(s) selectedbytheMODULECONTROLswitch. IfMODULECONTROLissettoMASTER,each KARMAmodulewillchangetothescenethatissaved asthemastersetting. Eachoftheeightscenescontainsthevaluesofsliders 18andswitches18.BypressingaSCENE18switch tochooseascene,youcaninstantlyrecallsettingsfor theeightslidersandeightswitches. Evenifyouswitchscenes,thechangesyoumakeusing sliders18andswitches18areremembereduntilyou selectanothercombination.Whenyouwritea combination,yoursliderandswitchsettingsaresaved intherespectivescene18.

Name display for the KARMA CONTROLS 18 sliders and KARMA SWITCHES 18
JustasintheequivalentpageofProgrammode,the CombinationP0:PlayKARMAGEpagedisplaysthe slidersandswitchesassignedtothecombination,and theirnames. Inthecombination,thenameshowninsquarebrackets [ ]isthecategoryoftheprogramselectedforthe timbrebeingcontrolledbytheKARMACONTROLS 18slidersandKARMASWITCHES.Thistellsyouthe timbrewhosephraseisbeingcontrolledbythe KARMACONTROLS18slidersandKARMA SWITCHES. Ifmultipletimbresarebeingcontrolled simultaneously,thiswillindicate[MLTI].

Thelowerpartofthedisplayshowsthenamesofthe slidersandswitchesthatareassignedinthis combination. Inthepreloadedcombinations,theKARMA CONTROLSslidersandKARMASWITCHEShave alreadybeenassigned. 2. UsethefrontpanelMODULECONTROLswitch toselectthemodulethatyouwanttocontrol. IfyouselectMASTER,youwillbecontrollingallfour KARMAmodulessimultaneously. IfyouselectAD,youwillbecontrollingthe correspondingKARMAmodule. 3. OperatethefrontpanelKARMACONTROLS18 slidersandKARMASWITCHES18. Theslidersandswitcheswillcontrolthepatternor phrasegeneratedbytheKARMAmoduleselectedby theMODULECONTROLswitch.Ifyouveselected MASTER,youllbeabletocontrolthemoduleon/off statusandvarythepatternsandphrasesgeneratedby alloftheKARMAmodules. Youcanalsooperatetheslidersandswitchesinthe displayorusingtheVALUEcontroller,justasin Programmode. TheKARMAmoduleandthetypeorvalueofthe parameterbeingcontrolledbytheslidersandswitches isshownintheKARMAModuleInfoKARMA Valuefield.ThisletsyouseetheKARMAmoduleand parametersthatarebeingaffectedbyyourslideror switchoperations.

KARMA module Run and Solo settings


InCombinationmode,uptofourKARMAmodules canbeoperatingsimultaneously. IfKARMAisoff,allKARMAmoduleswillbestopped. IfKARMAison,theKARMAmodule(s)youspecify herewilloperate. 1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMAGE Setup/KeyZonespage.

KARMA module

Value Parameter

2. UsetheRunandSolosettingstospecifythe module(s)thatwilloperatewhenKARMAison. KARMAmoduleswhoseRunsettingisOn (checked)willoperate.

221

Using KARMA

IfyouturnSoloOn(checked),onlythatKARMA modulewillsound.Thisisusefulwhenyouare selectingaGE,orwhenyouwanttoauditionthe phrasethatamoduleisgenerating. ModuleswhoseSoloisOn(checked)willsound evenifRunisOff(unchecked). TheSolosettingisclearedwhenyouswitchto anothercombination.Itisnotsavedwhenyouwrite thecombination. KARMAmoduleAwillsound.

KARMAmoduleBwillsound.

KARMAmodulesAandBwillsound.

Note:If isnotshowninthedisplay,Run hasbeenassignedasaperformancerealtime performance.TheKARMASWITCHESetc.will controlRUN.

KARMA module MIDI I/O channel settings


TheMIDIinput/outputchannelsettingforeach KARMAmoduleandtheMIDIchannelsettingofeach timbretogetherdeterminehowtheKARMAmodules willplaythetimbres. IfaKARMAmodulesMIDIoutputchannelmatches theMIDIchannelofatimbre,thephraseorpattern generatedbythatKARMAmodule(ifitsoperating) willplaythattimbre.Fordetailsonmakingthese settings,seeEditingKARMAinCombinationmode onpage 227and71c:MIDII/Oonpage 471ofthe ParameterGuide.

GE (Generated Effect) selection


Justasforaprogram,youcanusetheGESelectfield toselecttheGEusedbyeachmodule.(SeeEditing KARMAinCombinationmodeonpage 227)

KARMA module parameter settings


FordetailsoneditingKARMAmoduleparameters,see EditingKARMAinCombinationmodeonpage 227.

222

Editing KARMA Editing KARMA in Program mode

Editing KARMA
Thissectionexplainshowtomakesettingsfor KARMAineachmode.Fordetailsonhowtoperform usingKARMA,seePerformingwithKARMAon page 217.

Editing KARMA in Program mode


InProgrammodeyoucanuseonlyoneKARMA module(moduleA).KARMAsettingsforaprogram aremadeinthevariouspagesofProgramP7:KARMA. Herewewillexplainhowtousethemajorparameters, suchasselectingaGE.Forotherparameters,see ProgramP7:KARMAonpage 107oftheParameter Guide. LoadGEOptionsspecifieswhetherthesettingsof theKARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA SWITCHESsettingswillbeautomaticallyset, initialized,ormaintainedwhenyouselectaGE. Inthisexample,weveoptedtoautomaticallysetthe sliderandswitchfunctionstothestandardsettingsfor theRTCModeloftheselectedGE,sothatyoullbeable tocontrolthephraseorpatternimmediately. 3. UseGESelecttoselecttheGEusedbythe KARMAmodule. UseTempotosetthetempoofthepatternorphrase generatedbytheGE. UseKARMAT.Sigtospecifythetimesignatureof thepatternorphrasegeneratedbytheGE.Ifyouselect GE/TSthetimesignaturespecifiedbytheGEwillbe used;withanyothersetting,thetimesignaturewill changetemporarily. TheKRONOSprovidesnumerouspresetGEsthatcan beusedforawiderangeofinstruments,playing techniques,andmusicalstyles. CategorySelectshowsthecategoryoftheGEthats selectedfortheKARMAmodule.AllGEsare organizedbycategory.YoucanpressCategorySelect toopentheCategory/GESelectscreen,andchoosea GEbycategoryandsubcategory(seeGECategory Selectonpage 10oftheParameterGuide).

Switching KARMA on/off


EachtimeyoupresstheKARMAON/OFFswitch, KARMAwillbeturnedonoroff.Whenon,theswitch LEDwillbelit. Theon/offstatusissavedwhenyouwritetheprogram.

Selecting a GE
HereshowtoselecttheGEusedbytheKARMA module. 1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAGESetup/Key Zonespage.

Copying KARMA settings from another Program


YoucanusetheCopyKARMAModulepagemenu commandtocopyKARMAsettings(EGselection, KARMAmoduleparametersettings,etc.)fromanother program. 2. PressLoadGEOptionstoopenthedialogbox, turnAutoRTCSetupon,andchecktheUserRTC ModelandResetScenesoptions. 1. Pressthepagemenubuttontoopenthepage menu,andchooseCopyKARMAModule.

223

Using KARMA

2. Specifythecopysourcemode,bank,andnumber. IfyouwanttocopytheGErealtimeparametersettings andscenesettingsfromthecopysourceprogram, choosetheGERTPControlSettings&Scenesoption (checked). Ifyouwanttocopyperformancerealtimeparameters settingsandfrontpanelsettingsfromthecopysource program,choosethePerf.RTP&PanelSettings option(checked). Ifyoutocopythepadsettingsfromthecopysource program,choosethePadsoption(checked). 3. PressOKtoexecutethecopy,orpressCancelif youdecidetocancel.

KARMA module MIDI filtering and CC offset


1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAMIDIFilter/CC Offsetpage.

Setting KARMAs keyboard zone


Hereshowtospecifythezoneofkeysthatwilltrigger KARMA.Forexampleyoumightmakesettingssothat thekeysatthebottomofthekeyboardwilltrigger phrases,andkeysabovethisrangecanbeplayed normally. 1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAGESetup/Key Zonespage.(Seethediagraminstep1of SelectingaGE) 2. UsetheKeyZonesBottomandToptospecifythe keyzone. Anynotesthatfallwithinthisrangeincludingboth playingonthelocalkeyboardandnotesreceivedfrom MIDIINwillbesenttotheKARMAmodule.

Receive MIDI Filter


Thisspecifieswhetherfilteringwillbeappliedtothe MIDIcontroldatareceivedbytheKARMAmodule.If anitemison(checked),thecorrespondingdatawillbe received. WhenKARMAison,MIDIcontroldatareceivedby theKARMAmoduleissentdirectlytothetone generator.Ifthissettingisoff(unchecked),thatdata willnotbesenttothetonegenerator. Intheexampleshownabove,damperpedalmessages areenabledwhenKARMAisoff,anddisabledwhenit ison.

Transmit MIDI filter


Thisspecifieswhetherfilteringwillbeappliedtothe MIDIcontroldatageneratedbytheGEselectedforthe KARMAmodule.Ifanitemison(checked), transmissionisenabled. Intheexampleshownabove,thenotesfromC1 throughB3arebeinginputtotheKARMAmodule. WhenyouplayB3oralowernote,KARMAwill generateaphraseorpattern. 3. IfThruInZoneandThruOutZoneareon (checked),thenotesyouplayonthekeyboardwill playinadditiontothephraseorpatterngenerated byKARMA. Thesetwofieldsarethesettingsforinsideandoutside thekeyzone. YoucanuseTransposeInZoneandTransposeOut Zonetotransposethenotesplayedonthekeyboard insemitonesteps. Intheexampleshownabove,theB3andlowerkeys willcontrolonlythephraseorpatterngeneratedby KARMA,andtheC4andhigherkeyswillbeusedfor manualplayingonthekeyboard.UseTransposeOut Zonetoadjustthepitchofthemanuallyplayed region. Normallyyouwillleavetheseitemson.Ifyoudont wanttousethepitchbendorothercontrolchangedata generatedbytheselectedGE,turntheseitemsoff (unchecked). Intheexampleshownabove,pitchbenddata generatedbytheGEwillnotbetransmitted.

CC Offset
Usethisifyouwanttocontroltheeffectsorthesound oftheprogramwhileKARMAison.Forexample,you mightusethistodecreasethebrightnessofthesound orraisetheresonanceofthesoundinconjunctionwith thephrasethatsbeinggenerated.Alternatively,you mightusethistocontroleffects,forexampleby turningonadelayeffectinconjunctionwitha generatedphrase. UseCCNumbertospecifytheMIDIcontrolchange number.ChooseoneoftheCCnumbersinthe70s whichcontrolthesound,oranAMSorDmodsource (see72c:CCOffsetonpage 111oftheParameter Guide). Intheexampleshownintheprecedingpage,CC#74 andCC#71arecontrollingfiltercutoffandresonance level.

224

Editing KARMA Editing KARMA in Program mode

KARMA module parameters


IntheProgramP7:KARMAModuleParameters ControlandTriggerpagesyoucaneditKARMA moduleparameters. Herewewilldescribehowtoeditthemostfrequently usedparameters.Fordetailsontheotherparameters, referto73a:ProgramNameandTempoon page 112oftheParameterGuide.

1st:Triggeringwilloccuronlyatthefirstnoteyouplay afterturningonKARMA. Dyn:Playingthekeyboardwillnotcausetriggering. Triggeringwilloccurwhenyouoperatethecontroller specifiedbyDynamicMIDI.

GE Real-Time Parameters
HereyoucanedittheGErealtimeparametersthatare selectedbytheKARMAmodule.Youcanalsoassign GErealtimeparameterstotheKARMACONTROLS slidersandKARMASWITCHESsothatyoucanuse themtocontrolthephraseorpatterninrealtimewhile youperform. Note:IfyouusetheAutoRTCSetupfunctionofLoad GEOptions,thestandardsliderandKARMA SWITCHassignmentsfortheRTCModelofthatGE willautomaticallybemadewhenyouselectaGE.(See SelectingaGEonpage 223) 1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAGERealTime Parameterspage.

Control Transpose
Thisletsyoutransposethenotedatabeinginputtothe KARMAmoduleinsemitonesteps.Thiswillcontrol thepitchofthephraseorpatterngeneratedbythe KARMAmodule.Forexampleifyouwanttolowera bassphrasebyoneoctave,setthisto12.

UseGERTCSelecttoswitchthesetofGErealtime parametersyouwanttosee.

ThesebuttonsdisplayGErealtimeparameters116or 1732. ThenumberandtypeofGErealtimeparametersyou caneditherewilldifferdependingontheselectedGE. (Therewillbeamaximumof32.)IneachGE,the parametersmostusefulforcontrollingthephraseor patternareprovidedaspresets. Note:RTCModel:EveryGEcontainsaninternal settingthatindicatesitsRTCModel.Basedonthetype orpurposeoftheGE,theRTCModelprovidesa certaindegreeofstandardizationtotheover200 internalparametersoftheGE.Bydefault,GEsthat havethesameRTCModelwillbepresetwiththesame GErealtimeparameters. 2. UseVALUE,MIN,andMAXtospecifythe value,minimumvalue,andmaximumvalueof eachGErealtimeparameter. WhenyouselectaGE,thedefaultparametervalues thatarepresetforthatGEwillbeassigned.

Control Quantize Trig (Quantize Triggers)


Thisquantizesthetimingofthetriggeringproduced bythenotedata.(SeeSynchronizingKARMAon page 235) Off(unchecked):Triggeringwilloccurthemoment youplaythekey. On(checked):Triggertimingwillbequantizedtothe selectednoteintervalrelativetothebasetempo.

Note Trigger
Thisspecifiesthetriggeringconditionsforthephrase orpatterngeneratedbytheGE.Trytheseoutandsee howtheydiffer. Any:Triggeringwilloccureachtimeyouplayakey, andthephraseorpatternwillplayfromthebeginning. AKR:Triggeringwilloccuronlythefirsttimeyouplay akeyafterhavingreleasedallnotesonthekeyboard.

225

Using KARMA

Thevaluesyouassignherearecontrolledasfollowsby theKARMACONTROLSyouspecifyintheASSIGN field.


Slider 18 Slider 18 (SW) SW 18 DynaMIDI 18 000-064-127 =MIN-VALUE-MAX 000-063 = MIN, 064-127 = MAX Off = MIN, On = MAX Depending on Dynamic MIDI setting

Forthisexample,setMin,Max,andValueto 24,+0,and12respectively. 4. UseAssigntoassignthedesiredcontroller. Forthisexample,wellassignSlider1. 5. UsePolaritytospecifythepolarityofcontrol. Forthisexample,specify+. WhenyousetCONTROLASSIGNtoRT KNOBS/KARMAandoperateslider1,theTranspose settingwillchangeinsemitonestepsoverarangeof 24to+0,with12asthecentervalue. Note:IfyousetParametertoTransposeOctave,the changewilloccurinstepsofoneoctaveoverarangeof 24to+0,with12asthecentervalue. IfyouselectTransposeOctave/5th,thechangewill occurinalternatingstepsofanoctaveorafifth,overa rangeof24to+0with12asthecentervalue.For exampleifthisparameterisattheMinsettingandaC3 noteissounding,movingslider1from000toward127 willcauseapitchchangeofC3G3C4G4 C5.

3. UseASSIGNtoassigneachGErealtime parametertothedesiredcontroller. 4. UsePolaritytospecifythepolarityofcontrol. +:Controltheparameterasshowninthetableabove. :TherelationshipofMINandMAXwillbeinverted. Forexampleasyoumoveasliderfrom000to127,the valuewillbecontrolledfromtheMAXvaluetothe MINvalue.

Perf RTP (Perf Real-Time Parameters)


HereshowKARMAparameterssuchasKARMAkey zoneandKARMAmoduleparameters(i.e.,KARMA parametersotherthanGErealtimeparameters)canbe assignedtocontrollers. IfyouveassignedtheseparameterstoKARMA CONTROLS,youllbeabletocontroltheminrealtime whileyouperform(seeControlSurfaceknobs, sliders,&switchesonpage 33,and76b:PerfReal TimeParametersonpage 123oftheParameter Guide). 1. GototheProgramP7:PerfRealTimeParameters page.

Dynamic MIDI setting


DynamicMIDIletsyouuseaKRONOScontrollerora MIDIcontrolmessagetocontrolaspecificparameter ofKARMA.Youcanspecifyuptoeightcontrollers (Source)andwhattheywilldo(Destination).Formore information,seeDynamicMIDISources& Destinationsonpage 1109oftheParameterGuide.

Naming the KARMA RTC sliders 18 and switches 18


1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAName/NoteMap page.

Asanexample,wellshowhowyoucanuseaKARMA CONTROLSslidertocontroltheKARMAmodule parameterTranspose. 2. UseGroupandParametertoselectthe parameteryouwanttocontrol. Forthisexample,setGroup:Mix,andParameter: Transpose.TurnAon(checked)sothatthesliderwill controlKARMAmodule[A]. 3. Specifytherangeandvaluethatyouwantto control. Thesettingoftheparameterwillbeassignedby default(12inthisexample),asdescribedunder7 3b:ModuleParameterControlonpage 113ofthe ParameterGuide.

HereyoucanselectnamesfortheKARMA CONTROLSslidersandKARMASWITCHES.Youcan savethesesettingsindependentlyforeachprogram. TheKRONOSprovidessuitablepresetnamesforthe KARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA SWITCHES.

Auto Assign KARMA RTC Name


AnappropriatenameforeachKARMACONTROLS sliderandKARMASWITCHwillbedeterminedbased ontheGERTPorPerfRTPbeingcontrolled,andwill beassignedautomatically.(SeeAutoAssignKARMA RTCNameonpage 148oftheParameterGuide.)

226

Editing KARMA Editing KARMA in Combination mode

Linking KARMA settings to Program changes


KARMAsettingscanbesavedindividuallyforeach Program.Normally,whenyouselectanewProgram, itsKARMAsettingswillbeloadedaswell.Insome cases,however,youmaywishtotryoutdifferent ProgramswhilekeepingtheKARMAsettingsthe same. TheGlobalBasicpageLoadKARMASettingswhen changingparametersletyouselectbetweenthesetwo behaviors.ThereareseparatesettingsforPrograms, Combis,andSongs.Tosetthisup:

1. GototheGlobalBasicpage. 2. UnderLoadKARMAsettingwhenchanging,set theProgramscheckboxasdesired. ChecktheboxtoloadtheindividualPrograms KARMAsettings. UnchecktheboxtokeepKARMAsettingsthesame, evenwhenchangingPrograms. Formoreinformation,seeLoadKARMAsettings whenchangingonpage 755oftheParameterGuide.

Editing KARMA in Combination mode


InCombinationmode(andSequencermode)youcan usefourKARMAmodules(modulesA,B,C,andD). Inacombination,youcanusethefourKARMA modulesandthesixteentimbreprogramsinavariety ofways;forexample,separatephrasesorpatternscan playprogramssuchasdrums,bass,guitar,andstrings. KARMAsettingsforacombinationaremadeinthe variouspagesofCombinationP7:KARMA.Herewe willexplaintheprocedureforsettingthemajor parameters,suchasRunandSolosettings,the selectionofaGE,andMIDII/Osettings.Forother parameters,seeEditingtheparametersofeach KARMAmoduleonpage 229.and71b:GE Setup/KeyZonesonpage 471oftheParameterGuide. 2. UseRunandSolotoselectthemodule(s)that willoperatewhenKARMAison. Formoreinformation,see06b:GESelecton page 422oftheParameterGuide. Note:Forthepreloadedcombinations,whenthe MODULECONTROLswitchissettoMASTER, KARMASWITCHES1,2,3,and4willswitchRun on/offformodulesA,B,C,andD.

Selecting a GE
HereshowtoselecttheGEusedbyeachKARMA module.(SeeEditingKARMAinProgrammodeon page 223) 1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMAGE Setup/KeyZonespage. Note:Alternatively,youcanmakethesesettingsinthe CombinationP0:PlayKARMAGEpage. 2. PressLoadGEOptionstoopenthedialogbox, turnAutoRTCSetupon,andchecktheUserRTC ModelandResetScenesoptions. LoadGEOptionsspecifieswhetherthesettingsof theKARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA SWITCHESwillbeautomaticallyset,initialized,or maintainedwhenyouselectaGE. Forthisexample,wellchoosetosetthesliderand switchfunctionsforKARMAmodulesA,B,C,andD tothestandardsettingsfortheRTCModelofthe selectedGE,sothatyoullbeabletocontrolthephrase orpatternimmediately. 3. UseGESelecttoselecttheGEusedbythe KARMAmodule. UseTempotosetthetempoofthepatternorphrase generatedbytheGE. UseKARMAT.Sigtospecifythetimesignatureof thepatternorphrasegeneratedbytheGE.Ifyouselect GE/TSthetimesignaturespecifiedbytheGEforeach modulewillbeused;withanyothersetting,thetime signatureofallGEswillchangetemporarily.

Switching KARMA on/off


EachtimeyoupresstheKARMAON/OFFswitch, KARMAwillbeturnedonoroff.Whenon,theswitch LEDwillbelit.Thison/offstatusissavedwhenyou writetheCombination. WhenKARMAisoff,allKARMAmodulesA,B,C, andDwillbeoff.WhenKARMAison,theKARMA moduleswilloperateasspecifiedbytheirRunand Solosettings.

Run and Solo settings


1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMAGE Setup/KeyZonespage. Note:Alternatively,youcanmakethesesettingsinthe CombinationP0:PlayKARMAGEpage.

227

Using KARMA

MIDI I/O channel settings


YoucanspecifytheMIDIinputandoutputchannels foreachofthefourKARMAmodulesusedbya combination. TheMIDIinput/outputchannelsettingforeach KARMAmoduleandtheMIDIchannelsettingfor eachtimbrewilldeterminetheroutingthatspecifies howtheKARMAmodulesplaythetimbres.Theseare themostimportantsettingswhenusingmultiple KARMAmodulesinacombination. 1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMAGE Setup/KeyZonespage. 2. SpecifytheInputChannelandOutput ChannelofeachKARMAmodule. InputChannel:Foracombination,youwill normallysetthistoGchsothatyourkeyboardplaying willcontroltheKARMAmodule. OutputChannel:SetthistotheMIDIchannelofthe timbre(s)thatshouldbeplayedbythisKARMA module. GchAlso:ThisoptionisavailableifInputChannelis settootherthanGch.Ifyouselect(check)thisoption,a modulethatwouldnormallybetriggeredonlybythe InputChannelwillalsobetriggeredbytheGch.(Gch, Global11a) TimbreThru:Ifthisoptionison(checked),timbres differingfromtheglobalMIDIchannelwillsound whenKARMAisoff.

Whenyoustrikepads14,KARMAmodulesADwill eachtriggeradifferentGEwhichwillplayphrasesor patternsontimbres25. 6. ForKARMAmoduleA,turnGchAlsoon (checked). 7. TurnoffKARMA. Whenyouplaythekeyboard,timbre1willsound. Whenyoustrikepads14,timbres25willsound. 8. TurnonKARMA. Whenyouplaythekeyboard,timbre1willsound. KARMAmoduleAforwhichyouturnedGchAlso on(checked)willtriggeritsGEandplayaphraseor patternontimbre2. Whenyoustrikepads14,KARMAmodulesADwill triggertheirrespectiveGEsandplayphrasesor patternsontimbres25.

Setting example 2
ThisexampleshowshowtheTimbreThruoption works. Selectapianoprogramfortimbre1,abassprogramfor timbre2,andadrumprogramfortimbre3. Wellplaytimbre1manuallyfromthekeyboard. KARMAmoduleAwillbeusedtoplayabassphrase ontimbre2,andKARMAmoduleBtoplayadrum phraseonKARMAmoduleB.(Makesurethatthe globalMIDIchannelis01.) 1. SettheMIDIChannelfortimbres1,2,and3.

Setting example 1
ThisexampleshowshowtheGchAlsooption works. 1. SetMIDIChannelforthefollowingtimbresas follows. Timbre1:Gch Timbre2:2ch Timbre3:3ch Timbre4:4ch Timbre5:5ch 2. SettheMIDIchannelsforthepadsasfollows. Pad1:MIDIchannel=2ch Pad2:MIDIchannel=3ch Pad3:MIDIchannel=4ch Pad4:MIDIchannel=5ch 3. ForeachKARMAmodule,setInputChannel andOutputChannelasfollows. KARMAmoduleA:InputCh=2ch,OutCh=2ch KARMAmoduleB:InputCh=3ch,OutCh=3ch KARMAmoduleC:InputCh=4ch,OutCh=4ch KARMAmoduleD:InputCh=5ch,OutCh=5ch 4. TurnKARMAoff. Whenyouplaythekeyboard,timbre1willsound. Whenyoustrikepads14,timbres25willsound. 5. TurnKARMAon. Whenyouplaythekeyboard,timbre1willsound. Forthisexample,settimbre1to01,timbre2to02,and timbre3to03.Sinceeachtimbreissettoaseparate channel,theKARMAmodulesettothecorresponding channelwillplayonlythattimbre.

228

Editing KARMA Editing KARMA in Combination mode

2. SettheInputChannelandOutputChannelof eachKARMAmoduleasfollows.

KARMAmoduleA:InputCh=Gch,OutCh=02 KARMAmoduleB:InputCh=Gch,OutCh=03 ThetimbresplayedbytheKARMAmodulesare showninred,asspecifiedbythetimbresMIDI channelsettingandtheKARMAmodulesOut Channelsetting.

Editing the parameters of each KARMA module


Youcanspecifythekeyboardzoneinwhicheach KARMAmoduleoperates,makeMIDIfiltersettings, andeditKARMAmoduleparameters.Justasfora program,theseparameterscanbespecified independentlyforeachKARMAmodule.

GE Real-Time Parameters
HereshowtoedittheparametersoftheGEselected foreachKARMAmodule. 3. ForKARMAmodulesAandB,turnRunon (checked),andsetGESelecttoGE.(SeeRun andSolosettingsonpage 227.) KARMAmoduleA:selectabassphraseastheGE KARMAmoduleB:selectadrumphraseastheGE WhenKARMAison,yourplayingonthekeyboard willsoundapianoontimbre1,andwill simultaneouslybesenttoKARMAmodulesAandB. ThebassphrasegeneratedbymoduleAissenton MIDIchannel02toplaytimbre2. ThedrumphrasegeneratedbymoduleBissenton MIDIchannel03toplaytimbre3. 4. UseTimbreThrutospecifywhatwillsound whenKARMAisoff. WhenKARMAisoff,playingthekeyboardwill normallysoundonlythetimbresthatmatchtheglobal MIDIchannel(Ch01). Inthisexample,thiswillbethepianosoundproduced bytimbre1(Ch01). IfTimbreThruison(checked),youllbeabletoplay timbresthatdifferfromtheglobalchannelwhen KARMAisoff. ForKARMAmoduleA,turnTimbreThruon (checked).WhenKARMAisoff,playingthekeyboard willsoundthepianooftimbre1(Ch01)aswellasthe bassoftimbre2(Ch02). 2. Inthetabsattheleft,selectMasterA. 3. SetMIN,MAX,VALUE,ASSIGN,and POLARITY. IntheMastertabs,specifyingASSIGNletsyouedit theMIN,MAX,VALUE,andPolaritysettings. 4. MakesettingsinthesamewayforMasterB,C, andD. ThesettingsyoumakehereareusedwhenMODULE CONTROLissettoMASTER. MasterletsyoucontrolanyparametersofmodulesA, B,C,orD.Youcanalsouseasinglecontrollerto simultaneouslycontrolmultipleparametersin differentmodules;forexample,youmightuseSlider1 tocontroltheRhythm:Swing%parameterof modulesA,B,C,andD. 1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMAGEReal TimeParameterspage.

229

Using KARMA

KARMA module [A]

Perf RTP (Perf Real-Time Parameters)


Inthesamewayasforaprogram,KARMAparameters otherthanGErealtimeparameters(e.g.,KARMA moduleparameters)canalsobeassignedto controllers. ThesesettingsarevalidwhenMODULECONTROLis settoMASTER. 1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMAPerfReal TimeParameterspage.

MODULE CONTROL

KARMA module [B]


KARMA REALTIME CONTROLS MASTER A B C D
KARMA SCENES KARMA SWITCHES

KARMA CONTROLS

KARMA module [C]

KARMA module [D]

5. Inthetabsattheleft,selectModuleA. 6. SetMIN,MAX,VALUE,ASSIGN,and POLARITY. 7. MakesettingsinthesamewayforModuleB,C, andD. TheASSIGNsettingsformoduleA,B,C,andDare usedwhenMODULECONTROLissettoA,B,C,orD respectively.


KARMA module [A]

MODULE CONTROL

KARMA REALTIME CONTROLS


KARMA SCENES

KARMA module [B]

MASTER
KARMA SWITCHES

A B C D

KARMA CONTROLS

KARMA module [C]

KARMA module [D]

WiththeappropriateASSIGNsettings,aGE realtimeparameterof(forexample)moduleAcan controlledindependentlybyMasterandModuleA. Forexampleyoucanmakesettingssothatthe SwingparameterofadrumGEonmoduleAis controlledinMASTERbyslider1overarangeof0 50%,andinMODULEAbyslider1overarangeof 50100%. Master:050% ModuleA:50100% Inthiscase,ifyouswitchMODULECONTROL betweenMASTERandAwhileusingslider1to controltheparameter,theparameterwilloperatein itslastcontrolledstate.IfyousetSwingto0%in MASTER,andthenswitchtomoduleA,Swingwill remainat0%aslongasyoudontmoveslider1. HoweverSwingwillchangeonceyoumoveslider1 tocontroltheparameterintherangeof50100%. 1. SetMODULECONTROLtoMASTER,andset slider1totheminimumposition.Swing operatesat0%. 2. ChangeMODULECONTROLtoA.Swing operatesat0%. 3. Moveslider1tothemaximumposition. Swingoperatesat100%. Theinternalsettingsareautomaticallycontrolledso thatthephrasebeinggenerateddoesnotchange abruptly.IntheaboveexamplewhenyouuseMASTER tosetSwingto0%andthenswitchtomoduleA,the displayedindicationis50100%buttheparameteris actuallyoperatingatavalueof0%.Inthisway,you needtobeawarethatthedisplayedindicationmaynot matchtheactualresult.

Inthesamewayasforaprogram,setGroup, Parameter,Min,Max,Value,Assign,and Polarity.Inacombination,youcanusethefour KARMAmodulesA,B,C,andD. Turnon(check)theA,B,C,and/orDboxesto selectthemodule(s)youwanttocontrol. Intheaboveexample,KARMAREALTIME CONTROLSswitches1,2,3,and4arecontrollingthe Run/MutesettingofmodulesA,B,C,andD respectively.

Dynamic MIDI settings


Youcanmakethesesettingsinthesamewayasfora program.Formoreinformation,seeDynamicMIDI Sources&Destinationsonpage 1109oftheParameter Guide.

Naming the KARMA RTC sliders 18 and switches 18 for MASTER and module AD
Inthesamewayasforaprogram,youcanselectnames fortheKARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA SWITCHES.Thesesettingsaresavedaspartofthe combination.

230

Editing KARMA Editing KARMA in Combination mode

Linking KARMA settings to Combi changes


KARMAsettingscanbesavedindividuallyforeach Combination.Normally,whenyouselectanew Combination,itsKARMAsettingswillbeloadedas well.Insomecases,however,youmaywishtotryout differentCombinationswhilekeepingtheKARMA settingsthesame. TheGlobalBasicpageLoadKARMASettingswhen changingparametersletyouselectbetweenthesetwo behaviors.ThereareseparatesettingsforPrograms, Combis,andSongs.Tosetthisup: 1. GototheGlobalBasicpage. Inacombination,theareainsquarebrackets[ ] automaticallyshowsaportionofthecategorynameof theprogramselectedforeachtimbrecontrolledbythe KARMACONTROLSslidersandKARMA SWITCHES.Thisletsyouknowthetimbrewhose phraseisbeingcontrolledbyeachKARMA CONTROLSsliderandKARMASWITCH. Ifmorethanonetimbreisbeingcontrolled,theareain squarebracketswillindicateMLTI. AutoAssignKARMARTCName(SeeAutoAssign KARMARTCNameonpage 148oftheParameter Guide) 2. UnderLoadKARMAsettingwhenchanging,set theCombinationscheckboxasdesired. ChecktheboxtoloadtheindividualCombinations KARMAsettings. UnchecktheboxtokeepKARMAsettingsthesame, evenwhenchangingCombinations. Formoreinformation,seeLoadKARMAsettings whenchangingonpage 755oftheParameterGuide.

Specifying the random seeds


ForeachGErealtimeparametergroup,youcanspecify whethertherandomseed(usedtogeneraterandom values)willbesharedbetweenthefourKARMA modules. 1. GototheCombinationP7:KARMARandom Seedspage.

Normally,youwillsetthefourmodulestouseseparate randomseedsasshownabove;A:1,B:2,C:3, andD:4.IfyouhaveselectedthesameGEfortwoor moreKARMAmodulesandwantthemtoplayin unisonusingtheidenticalrandomvalues,youmust selectthesamerandomseedforeachofthesemodules. Formoreinformation,see78:RandomSeedson page 484oftheParameterGuide.

231

Using KARMA

Using KARMA in Sequencer mode


InSequencermodeyoucanusefourKARMAmodules (modulesA,B,C,andD).Asinacombination,youcan usetheKARMAmodulestogenerateindependent phrasesorpatternsthatplay(forexample)drum,bass, guitar,andstringsprograms,oryoucancombinethe fourKARMAmodulesandthesixteentrackprograms inawidevarietyofways. ThestructureoftheKARMArelatedparametersisthe sameasinCombinationmode.(SeeEditingKARMA inCombinationmodeonpage 227) InSequencermode,youcanuseKARMAwhile realtimerecordingsongtracksorpatterns. Thenoteon/offdataandMIDIcontroldatagenerated byaKARMAmodulecanberecordedaseventsina trackorpattern.Atthistime,youcanusetheKARMA CONTROLSslidersandKARMASWITCHESto controlthephraseinrealtimewhileyourecordit. Youcanalsocopythesettingsfromacombination,and usemultitrackrecordingtorealtimerecordyour keyboardperformance. Datafromtheinternalsequencerisnotinputtothe KARMAmodule.Also,youcannotusenotedata fromtheinternalsequencertotriggeraKARMA modulesothatitgeneratesphrasesetc. HerewellexplainhowtousetheAutoSongSetup functiontogetstartedwithrealtimerecording.Wewill alsodescribetheprocedureforrealtimerecording (singletrackrecording)usingKARMA,andfor realtimerecording(multitrackrecording)bycopying thesettingsfromacombination.

Auto Song Setup


TheAutoSongSetupfunctionautomaticallycopiesthe settingsofaprogramorcombinationintoasong,and thenputstheKRONOSinrecordreadymode.Youcan thenbeginrecordingimmediatelyjustbypressingthe SEQUENCERSTART/STOPswitch.Thisletsyou seamlesslymovefromplayingaprogramor combinationintoproducingasong,sothatphrasesor ideasforasongthatoccurtoyouwhileusingKARMA canbeimmediatelyturnedintoasong. Procedure(usingtheexampleofCombinationmode) 1. EnterCombinationmode. 2. IntheCombinationP0:PlayProgSelect/Mixer page,selectacombinationandedittheKARMA RTCparametersetc.asdesired. Note:Ifyouwanttokeeptheeditedstateofyour combination,executeUpdateCombinationorWrite Combination. 3. HolddowntheENTERswitchandpressthe REC/WRITEswitch. TheSetuptoRecorddialogboxwillappear. 4. ToexecutetheAutoSongSetupfunction,pressthe OKbutton.Ifyoudecidetocancel,pressthe Cancelbutton. YouwillautomaticallymovetoSequencermode,and thesettingsofthecombinationwillbecopiedtoa song. Thecopydestinationsongwillbethefirstunused song. ContentcopiedfromaCombination: Thesamecontentwillbecopiedaswhenyouexecute theCopyFromCombipagemenucommandwith IFXs,MFXs,andTFXschecked,andMultiREC Standbychecked.Formoreinformation,seeCopy fromCombinationonpage 626oftheParameter Guide. ContentthatiscopiedfromaProgram: Thesamecontentwillbecopiedaswhenyouexecute theCopyFromProgrampagemenucommandwith IFXs,MFXs,andTFXschecked,To:settoMIDI Track01,withKARMAcheckedandTo:setto KARMAModuleA,andwithDrumTrackchecked andTo:tosettoTrack10. 5. TheKRONOSwillautomaticallyenterrecord readymode,andthemetronomewillbegin soundingaccordingtotheMetronomesetting (Sequencer05c). 6. PresstheSTART/STOPswitchtobeginrealtime recording.Whenyouvefinishedrecording,press theSTART/STOPswitchonceagain.(See RecordingMIDIinrealtimeonpage 78.)

232

Using KARMA in Sequencer mode Recording using KARMA (single-track recording)

Recording using KARMA (single-track recording)


Inthefollowingexample,welluseKARMAtorecord adrumpatternontrack1. 1. Selectthedesireddrumprogramfortrack1as describedintheprocedureforrealtimerecording atrackandforpreparingtorecord(seep.78). Alsomakeanyothernecessarysettingsforrecording, suchassettingTrackSelecttoT01.

Specifythecopysourceprogram.Turnon(check)GE RTPControlSettings&ScenesandPerf.RTP& PanelSettings.PressOKtoexecutethecopy. ThesettingsoftheKARMAREALTIMECONTROLS sliders,switches,andsceneswillbecopiedtoModule ControlA. 2. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturnon KARMA. 2. GototheSequencerP7:KARMAGESetup/Key Zonespage. MakeMIDII/OsettingsfortheKARMAmodulesso thatKARMAmoduleAwillplaytrack1(SeeEditing KARMAinCombinationmodeonpage 227). ForKARMAmoduleA,settheInputChanneland OutputChannelto01and01respectively.Setting themtoTchandTchwillhavethesameresult.For moreinformation,see71c:MIDII/Oonpage 471of theParameterGuide. Whenyouplaythekeyboard,KARMAwillgeneratea drumpatternjustasitdidfortheprogram. 3. UsetheSEQUENCERREC/WRITEswitchandthe START/STOPswitchtorealtimerecordontrack1. (SeeRecordingMIDIinrealtimeonpage 78) YoucanoperatetheKARMAREALTIMECONTROLS sliders/switchesandtheSCENEswitcheswhile recording,andthechangesinthepatternorsoundthat occurwillberecordedjustastheyoccur. ThesongtempoandKARMAtempocannotbeset independently. 4. IfyouwanttheKARMAmoduletobein synchronizationwiththesequencerduring recording,checktheQuantizeTriggeroption. AsspecifiedbytheMIDItracksMIDIChannelsetting andtheKARMAmodulesOutChannelsetting,the MIDItrackplayedbytheKARMAmoduleis displayedinred. 3. SelectaGEforKARMAmoduleA,andsetits parameters. YouarefreetoselectaGEandmakesettingsas desired,butinthisexamplewellusetheCopy KARMAModulepagemenucommandtocopyallof theprogramsKARMAsettings.Thisisaneasywayto setupandrecordthephraseorpatternthatthe programsKARMAisgenerating. 1. Usethepagemenubuttonlocatedinthetopleftof thescreentodisplaythepagemenu,andchoose CopyKARMAModule. Thetriggertimingwillbesynchronizedtosixteenth noteintervalsofthesequencerbeat.(See SynchronizingKARMAonpage 235) 5. YoucansynchronizetheKARMAmoduletothe starttimingofthesequencer. GototheSequencerP7:KARMAModuleParameters Triggerpage.

233

Using KARMA

WhileKARMAisrunning,presstheSTART/STOP switch;KARMAwillsynchronizetothesynthesizer timing. IfyouagainpresstheSTART/STOPswitch,the sequencerandKARMAwillbothstop.Ifyouwant tostoponlyKARMA,pressthe(KARMA)ON/OFF switchtoturnitoff.

IfyouwantKARMAtostartatthemoment recordingbegins,pressthe(KARMA)ON/OFF switchtoturniton,andthenplaythekeyboard duringtheprecountbeforerecording.The KARMAmodulewillnotbetriggeredimmediately, butwillbetriggeredinsynchronizationwiththe sequencerwhenrecordingbegins.(See SynchronizingKARMAonpage 235)

Multi-track recording using settings copied from a Combination


Thepreloadedcombinationsincludeadiversearray ofcombinationsthattakefulladvantageofKARMA. Youcanplaythesecombinationstostimulateideasfor songs,andrecordyourplayingtocreatebasictracks. Manyofthesecombinationsconsistoftimbresand KARMAmoduleswithdifferingMIDIchannel settings. Intheexamplebelow,wellshowhowyoucanuse multitrackrecordingtorecordaperformance consistingofmultipleMIDIchannels. 1. Wellstartbycopyingthesettingsofa combinationintoasong.GototheSequencerP0: Play/RECMIDITrackProgSelect/Mixerpage. 2. Intheupperleftofthescreen,pressthepage menubuttontoopenthepagemenu,andchoose CopyFromCombination.

SetthetracksyourenotrecordingtoeitherPlayor Mute.Howeverifyourerecordingtheperformanceof acombination,andnoneofthetrackshavealready beenrecorded,itsoktoleavealltrackssettoREC. 6. PresstheREC/WRITEswitchandthenthe START/STOPswitchtobeginrealtimerecording. (SeeRecordingMIDIinrealtimeonpage 78) Whileyourecord,youcanoperatetheKARMA REALTIMECONTROLSsliders,KARMASWITCHES, andSCENEswitchestovarythepatternorsound.The changesyoucreatewillberecordedjustasyoumake them.

Selectthecopysourcecombination.TurnIFXAll, MFXs,TFXs,andMultiRECStandbyon(checked). PressOKtoexecutethecopy. 3. Thesettingsofthecombinationstimbres116 willbecopiedtoMIDItracks116.Effectsettings, KARMAsettings,andallothercommon parameterswillbecopiedtothetracksofthesong. 4. ChooseTrackSelect.SelectatrackwhoseMIDI channelmatchestheglobalMIDIchannel. PresstheON/OFFswitchtoturnKARMAon,andplay thekeyboardand/orpadstomakeKARMAbegin playinginthesamewayasitdidinthecopysource combination.(Dependingonthetrackyouselectedin TrackSource,theperformancemaynotbethesame aswhenyouwereplayingthecombination.Besureto selectthetrackwhoseMIDIchannelisthesameasthe globalMIDIchannel.) 5. Performmultitrackrecording.Makepreparations forrecordingasdescribedinMulti(multitrack recording)onpage 80.TurnMultiRECon (checked).

ThesongtempoandKARMAtempocannotbeset independently.

234

Synchronizing KARMA Synchronization basics

Synchronizing KARMA Synchronization basics


Synchronization with Wave Sequences
IfyouwantaKARMAmoduletosynchronizewith currentlyplayingWaveSequences(Mode=Tempo), turnQuantizeTriggeron(checked)sothatitwill synchronizetotheselectednoteinterval. KARMAwillbereset,andthephrasesorpatternsit generateswillstartfromthebeginning. WhilethesequencerisplayingandKARMAis stopped,andyouchangethelocationbypressing theLOCATEswitchetc.,KARMAwillbereset,and thephrasesorpatternsitgenerateswillstartfrom thebeginning. IfyouthenpresstheSTART/STOPswitch,the sequencerandKARMAwillbothstop.Ifyouwant tostoponlyKARMA,pressthe(KARMA)ON/OFF switch. IfyouwantKARMAtostartthemomentrecording begins,pressthe(KARMA)ON/OFFswitch,and thenplaythekeyboardduringtheprecountbefore recording.TheKARMAmoduleswillnotbe triggeredimmediately,butwillbetriggeredin synchronizationwiththesequencerthemoment recordingstarts.

Synchronization with the Drum Track


ForinformationonsynchronizingKARMAwiththe DrumTrack,seeUsingKARMAandtheDrumTrack togetheronpage 243.

Synchronization with song start/stop


WhileKARMAisrunning,pressingthe START/STOPswitchwillsynchronizeKARMA withthesequencer.

The Quantize Trigger parameter


ThetriggertimingofaKARMAmodulewilldepend onthesettingofitsQuantizeTriggerparameter. On(checked):ThetriggertimingofaKARMAmodule willbequantizedtotheselectednoteinterval. Off(unchecked):TheKARMAmodulewillbe triggeredatthetimingatwhichyouplaythekeyboard. Formoreinformation,seeQuantizeTriggeron page 117oftheParameterGuide. Note:Ifyouwantawavesequencetosynchronizeto thecurrentlyplayingKARMA,gototheP2:Track ParametersWaveSequence/KARMApageandturn WaveSequenceQuantizeTriggeron.

Synchronization with songs, patterns, and RPPR performance in Sequencer mode


IfyouwantaKARMAmoduletoplay(orberecorded) insynchronizationwiththecurrentlyplayingsong, pattern,orRPPR,turnQuantizeTriggeron. QuantizeTrigOff:TheKARMAmodulewillbe triggeredatthetimingatwhichyouplaythekeyboard. Itwillnotsynchronizetothecurrentlyplayingsong, pattern,orRPPR. QuantizeTrigOn:Thetriggertimingofthe KARMAmodulewillbequantizedtotheselectednote intervalofthecurrentlyplayingsong,pattern,or RPPR. Note:IfyouwantpatternsplayedbyRPPRto synchronizetothecurrentlyoperatingKARMA,set Sync(SequencerP5:Pattern/RPPRRPPRSetup page)toSEQ. Note:Ifyouwantawavesequencetosynchronizeto thecurrentlyplayingsong,pattern,RPPR,orthe currentlyrunningKARMA,gototheP2:Track ParametersWaveSequence/KARMApageandturnon WaveSequenceQuantizeTriggeraswell.Formore information,seeWaveSequenceQuantizeTrigger onpage 460oftheParameterGuide.

Synchronization between KARMA modules A, B, C, and D


InCombinationandSequencermodes,fourKARMA modulescanberunning.EachmodulehasaQuantize Triggersettingthatdetermineshowthatmodulewill synchronizewiththeothermodules. QuantizeTriggerOff:TheKARMAmodulewillbe triggeredatthetimingatwhichyouplaythekeyboard. TherewillbenosynchronizationbetweenKARMA modules;eachwillbetriggeredattheirowntiming. QuantizeTriggerOn:TheKARMAmodulewill synchronizetotheselectednoteintervalofthetiming thefirsttriggeredKARMAmodulethatiscurrently running. Ifyouwanttosimultaneouslytriggermultiple KARMAmodulesfromthekeyboardorpads,turn QuantizeTriggeronforeachoftheseKARMA modules.

235

Using KARMA

Slave operation
ConnecttheMIDIOUTofyourexternalMIDIdevice totheKRONOSMIDIIN. SetMIDIClock(Global11a:MIDISetup)toExternal MIDI.TheKRONOSwillsynchronizetoMIDIrealtime clockandrealtimecommandmessagesitreceivesfrom theconnectedMIDIdevice. Note:IftheKRONOSissettoMIDIClock=Auto,it willalsosynchronizetotheexternalMIDIdeviceinthe samewayifMIDIrealtimeclockmessagesarebeing receivedfromtheexternaldevice. frontpanelSTART/STOPswitch.KARMAalsowillbe controlledinthesamewayaswhenyouoperatethe frontpanelSTART/STOPswitch.(See Synchronizationwithsongstart/stop) WhentheKRONOSreceivesaSongPositionPointer message,itwillchangethelocationofthesongjustas whenyouchangethesonglocationbyoperatingthe KRONOS,andKARMAwillbecontrolledinthesame wayaswhenyouchangethelocationontheKRONOS. InProgramandCombinationmodes,SongStart, Continue,andStopmessagesthattheKRONOS receiveswillcontrolKARMA. WhileKARMAisrunning,SongStart,Continue, andSongPositionPointermessagesreceivedbythe KRONOSwillresetKARMA,causingthegenerated phrasesorpatternstostartfromthebeginning. IfaSongStopmessageisreceived,KARMAwill stop.

Synchronization to MIDI clock


KARMAwillsynchronizetoatempobasedonthe externalMIDIclocktiming.

Synchronization with MIDI realtime commands


InSequencemode,SongStart,Continue,andStop messagesthattheKRONOSreceiveswillcontrolsong playbackandrecordingjustaswhenyouoperatethe

Master operation
ConnecttheKRONOSMIDIOUTtotheMIDIINof yourexternalMIDIdevice. SetMIDIClock(Global11a)toInternal.The connectedexternalMIDIdevicewillsynchronizetothe MIDIrealtimeclockandrealtimecommandsit receives. Note:ThesameappliesifMIDIClock=AutoandMIDI realtimeclockmessagesarebeingtransmitted.For moreinformation,seeMIDIClock(MIDIClock Source)onpage 772oftheParameterGuide. theMIDIsystemrealtimemessageStarttobe sentatthetriggertiming. AftertheStartmessagehasbeensent,turningoff KARMAON/OFFwillsendtheMIDIsystem realtimeStopcommand.

Synchronization via MIDI clock


TheconnectedexternalMIDIdevicewillsynchronize totheMIDIclockoftheKRONOS.

Synchronization via MIDI realtime commands


Enable Start/Stop Out in Prog/Combi
YoucansetupKRONOSsothatstartingandstopping KARMAinProgramandCombimodeswillalso controlstartandstoponexternalMIDIdevices,such assequencersanddrum/groovemachines(suchasthe KorgElectribeseries). Todoso: 1. GototheGlobalMIDIpage. 2. UnderMIDIRoutingSetup,turnonEnable Start/StopOutinProg/Combi. InProgramandCombinationmodes,playinga noteonfromthekeyboardorpadstotriggerthe GEselectedforaKARMAmodulewillalsocause

236

Using the Drum Track


Overview What is the Drum Track?
TheDrumTrackisabuiltindrummachine,fueledby theKRONOSshighqualitydrumsounds. Itgivesyouabeattoplayalongwithasyou experimentwithProgramsandCombinations,oras youworkouttheoutlineofasong.Ifyoureplaying withtheDrumTrackandwanttocaptureyour inspirationquickly,youcanuseAutoSongSetupto immediatelystartrecordinginSequencermode. TherearehundredsofpresetDrumTrackpatterns coveringawiderangeofmusicalstyles,andyoucan alsocreateyourown(aswellexplorelaterinthis chapter). DrumTrackPatterncontents Bank
Preset P000697 User U000999

Contents
Factory Drum Track patterns User Drum Track patterns

ThereareoptionstocontrolhowtheDrumTrack patternstarts,suchasstartingimmediatelywhenyou presstheDRUMTRACKbutton,orwaitinguntilyou starttoplaythekeyboard.Ifyourestartingthepattern byplayingthekeyboard,youhavetheoptionof startingitbyusingaspecificrangeofnotesor velocities. YoucanalsolinktheDrumTrackwithKARMA,so thattheyplayinsyncandstartandstoptogether. InProgrammode,theDrumTrackhasitsownmixer channel(includingEQ)andseparateeffectsrouting, forindependentcontrolofthesound.InCombinations andSongs,theDrumTrackplaysnormalTimbresand Tracks,withallthenormalcontrolsoverProgram selection,EQ,effectsrouting,andsoon.

237

Using the Drum Track

Performing with the Drum Track Using the Drum Track in Program mode
InProgrammode,theDrumTracklivesalongsidethe mainProgram,similartoasecondMIDITrackin Sequencermode. Herewellexplainhowtomakethemostimportant settings.Formoredetails,pleasesee13:Drum Trackonpage 42oftheParameterGuide.

Selecting the Drum Track pattern & sound


1. PresstheBasic/Vectortab,andthenpressthe DrumTracktab. TheDrumTrackpagewillappear.
Pattern Bank/No. Drum Track Program

Turning the Drum Track on and off


1. PresstheDRUMTRACKswitch. TheswitchsLEDwilleitherlightsolidlyorblinkon andoff,dependingontheProgramsTriggerMode setting. IftheLEDissolidlylit:thismeansthattheTrigger ModeissettoStartImmediately.TheDrumTrack patternwillstartaccordingtotheSyncsetting(for moreinformation,seeControllinghowtheDrum Trackstartsandstopsonpage 241).Whenyouturnit off,thepatternwillstop. IftheLEDisblinking:thismeansthattheTrigger ModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.TheDrumTrackpattern willstartwhenyouplaythekeyboardorwhenaMIDI noteonisreceived.IfthefrontpanelLINKEDLED andKARMAON/OFFswitchesarelit,theKARMA performancewillstartandstoptogetherwiththe DrumTrack. Note:IftheselectedpatterniseitherP000:Offoris empty(whichcanhappenwithUserpatterns),the DRUMTRACKswitchwontturnon.

2. NotetheDrumPatternsection,intheupperleftof thedisplay. ThePatternparameterhastwopopupmenus.Theone ontheleftselectsbetweenthePresetandUserbanks; theoneontherightselectsthepatternwithinthebank. 3. Inthepopupmenuontheleft,selectthePreset bank. 4. Inthepopupmenuontheright,selectpattern P001:Pop&Ballad[All]. Next,notetheDrumProgramsectionofthepage(to therightoftheDrumPatternsection).Thisarea containsafewparametersforadjustingthebasic soundoftheDrumTrack. 5. PresstheProgrampopupmenu. TheCategory/ProgramSelectdialogappears.By default,theDrumcategorywillalreadybeselected. 6. SelectadrumProgramfortheDrumTracktoplay. Youcanactuallyselectanysound,evenoutsideofthe Drumcategorybuttheingeneral,thepatternswill onlymakesensewhenplayingadrumProgram. 7. UseVolumetoadjustthevolumeoftheDrum TrackProgram. 8. UseDetunetoadjusttheoverallpitchoftheDrum Programinonecentincrements. Onecentis1/100thofasemitone. Youcanadjustthepitchofindividualdrumsamples byeditingDrumKitsinGlobalmode.

Setting the tempo


1. UsetheTEMPOknobortheTAPTEMPObutton tosetthetempo. Thissetsthesystemtempo,asshownin theq =valuelocatedintheupperright ofthedisplay.TheTAPTEMPObuttons LEDalsoshowsthetempo,blinkingat intervalsofaquarternote( q ). Youcanalsoeditthetempodirectly fromthedisplayusingthestandarddata entrycontrols,includingthenumeric keypad.Simplyselecttheq =inthedisplay,andthen enteravalue. Thetempoisvariablebetween40.00300.00bpm,and issavedwhenyouwritetheProgram.

External clock
IftheMIDIClockparameter(ontheGlobalMIDI Basicpage)issettoExternalMIDIorExternalUSB,or toAutoMIDIorAutoUSBifMIDIClockmessagesare beingreceived,thetempovaluewilldisplayasq = EXT,andtheKRONOSwillsynctotheincoming clocks.Whensyncingtoexternalclock,theTEMPO knobandTAPTEMPObuttonhavenoeffect.

238

Performing with the Drum Track Using the Drum Track in Program mode

Drum Track Play/Mute, (SWITCHES [3])

Drum Track Select, (SWITCHES [11])

[MIXER] T18

KARMA LINKED LED

[DRUM TRACK]

Drum Track Volume (SLIDERS [3])

Shift
ShiftletsyoutransposetheDrumTrackpatternin semitonesteps,causingdifferentinstrumentsofthe drumkittoplay.Thiswillgenerallycauseunexpected results,whichmayoftenbeinterestingexperiment andsee!

Drum Track and the Control Surface


YoucanusethecontrolsurfacetocontroltheDrum Tracksmixparameters,includingvolume,play/mute, soloon/off,EQ,andeffectssends. 1. PlayaDrumTrackpattern. SeeTurningtheDrumTrackonandoffonpage 238. 2. PresstheCONTROLASSIGNTIMBRE/TRACK switch. 3. Onthedisplay,pressthePlaytab,andthenpress theControlSurfacetab. TheControlSurfacepagewillappear. Thispagedisplaysandreflectsthecontrolsurface settings.Itsconvenienttowatchthispagewhileusing thecontrolsurface,sinceitshowstheparameternames andprecisevalues. Note:Youcanusethecontrolsurfaceregardlessofthe pagethatscurrentlyshowninthedisplay. 4. Useslider3toadjusttheDrumTrackvolume. 5. UsePlay/Muteswitch3totoggletheDrumTracks soundonandoff. NotethatthiscontrolsonlythesoundoftheDrum TrackProgram,andisindependentofwhetherornot theDrumTrackpatternisplaying. 6. PresstheMIXERKNOBSbuttonuntil theCHANNELSTRIPLEDlightsup. Thismakestheknobscontrolavirtual channelstrip,includingpan,EQ,and effectssends. 7. PresstheMIXSELECT3buttontoselecttheDrum TrackontheControlSurface. 8. Useknobs26toadjusttheDrumTracksEQ.

Linking with KARMA


YoucanlinkKARMAandtheDrumTracksothatthey startandstoptogether. 1. GototheKARMATriggerpage. 2. IntheModuleParametersTriggersection,inthe ControlGroup,notetheLinktoDrumTrack checkbox. 3. TurnonLinktoDrumTrack. ThefrontpanelLINKEDLEDwilllight. IfLinktoDrumTrackison,KARMAwillbelinked withtheDrumTrackstart/stop. 4. TurntheKARMAON/OFFswitchon. Whenlinked,KARMAwillalwayswaitfortheDrum Track.So,unlesstheDRUMTRACKswitchison, KARMAwontstartyet. 5. TurntheDRUMTRACKswitchon. KARMAwillstarttoplayalongwiththeDrumTrack, accordingtotheDrumTracksTriggerMode.See TurningtheDrumTrackonandoff,above,formore information. IfyouturnofftheDRUMTRACKswitchwhile KARMAisoperating,KARMAwillalsostop. Formoredetails,pleaseseeUsingKARMAandthe DrumTracktogether,onpage 243.

239

Using the Drum Track

Using the Drum Track in Combination mode


Turning the Drum Track on and off
YoucanturntheDrumTrackonandoff,andcontrol thetempo,justasinProgrammode.Formore information,seeTurningtheDrumTrackonandoff onpage 238,andSettingthetempoonpage 238.

Selecting a Drum Track pattern and sound


InProgrammode,theDrumTrackhasaspecial reservedmixerslot,adedicatedProgramselect parameter,andsoonandtheDrumTrackpattern alwaysplaysthatdedicatedProgram.InCombinations (andSongs),theDrumTracksimplysendsMIDIto playoneormoreofthe16Timbres/Tracks. TosetuptheDrumTrackinCombinationmode: 1. GototheCombinationPlaypage. 2. ChooseaTimbretouseastheDrumTrack Program. YoucanusetwoormoreTimbresatonce,ifyouwant togetreallyfancybutingeneral,allyoullneedis one.Inthiscase,letsuseTimbre10. 3. OpentheTimbresCategorypopup,andselecta drumProgram. IF078StandardKitisagoodfirstchoice. 4. GototheTimbreParametersMIDIpage. 5. SetTimbre10(thedrumProgram)toMIDI channel10. Note:ifanothertimbreusesthesameMIDIchannel,the drumpatternwillplaythattimbreaswell. YoucanuseanyMIDIchannel,butitsbesttouse somethingotherthantheGlobalMIDIchannel. Otherwise,theDrumTrackpatternwillplayallofthe soundsassignedtothekeyboard,withunpredictable results. 6. GototheEQ/Vector/Controlpage,andselectthe DrumTracktab. IntheMIDIChannelsection,settheOutputto10(to matchtheTimbreschannel,assetinstep5). 7. Intheupperleftofthepage,selectaDrum Pattern. Formoredetails,seeSelectingaDrumTrackpattern andsoundonpage 240. Note:Ifyouselectanemptypattern,youwontbeable toturntheDRUMTRACKswitchon. 8. PresstheDRUMTRACKswitchtoverifythatthe patternsoundscorrectly. ThemethodoftriggeringwilldependontheTrigger settings.IfTriggerModeisStartImmediately,the DrumTrackpatternwillstartwhenyoupressthe ON/OFFswitch.Formoreinformation,pleasesee SynchronizingtheDrumTrackonpage 244.

240

Drum Track settings Drum Track settings in Program mode

Drum Track settings Drum Track settings in Program mode


Controlling how the Drum Track starts and stops
Youhaveseveraloptionstocontrolhowandwhenthe DrumTrackstartsandstops. 1. GototheBasic/Vectorpage,andselecttheDrum Tracktab. 2. IntheTriggersection,settheModetocontrolhow thepatternwillstartandstop. StartImmediately:WhenyouturnontheDrumTrack bypressingtheDRUMTRACKswitch,theLEDwill lightandtheDrumTrackpatternwillstartaccording totheSyncsetting.Itwillstopwhenyouturnoffthe switch. WaitKBDTrig:WhenyoupresstheDRUMTRACK switchtoturniton,theLEDwillblinkandtheDrum Trackpatternwillwaittostart.Whenyouplaythe keyboardorreceiveaMIDInoteon,theDrumTrack patternwillstartaccordingtotheSyncsetting. 3. SpecifytheSyncsetting. Off:TheDrumTrackpatternwillnotsynchronizeto thecurrentlyrunningKARMA,butwillstart immediately. On:TheDrumTrackpatternwillsynchronizetothe currentlyrunningKARMA. Formoreinformation,seeTheTriggerSync parameteronpage 244. 4. IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,specify theLatchsetting. LatchcontrolswhethertheDrumTrackpatternwill continueplayingevenafteryoutakeyourhandsoffof thekeyboard. Off:IftheDRUMTRACKswitchison,theLEDwill blink,andthepatternwillstartwhenyouplaythe keyboard.Whenyoustopplaying,theDrumTrack willstopaswell. On:IftheDRUMTRACKswitchison(theLEDwill blink),thepatternwillstartwhenyouplaythe keyboard(noteon).Thepatternwillcontinuewhen youreleasethekeyboard(noteoff).Thepatternwill stopwhenyouturntheDRUMTRACKswitchoff(the LEDwillgodark). UseKARMALatchSwitch:Theon/offstatusofthe KARMALATCHswitchwillcorrespondtotheabove OffandOnmodesofoperation.Youwillprobably wanttousethisinconjunctionwithKARMAsLatch operation. 5. IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,specify theKeyboardZoneandVelocityZone. Thesesettingsspecifytherangeofkeysandvelocities thatwilltriggertheDrumTrackpatternwhenyouplay thekeyboard(orreceiveanoteon).

Storing the on/off setting


IftheTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,theon/off statusoftheDRUMTRACKswitchisalsosavedwhen yousavetheProgram. IftheTriggerModeissettoStartImmediately,the switchstatusisalwayssavedasOff,regardlessofthe whethertheswitchisonoroffwhenyouWrite.

EQ adjustments for the Drum Track Program


TheDrumTrackProgramhasitsownthreebandEQ, justliketheProgramsoscillators.Youcancontrolthis ontheDrumTrackpage,ordirectlyfromtheControl SurfaceaswiththeoscillatorEQs. IfyouenableAutoLoadProgramEQ,theEQsettings storedintheDrumProgramwillbeautomatically loadedwhenyouswitchDrumTrackPrograms. Normally,youshouldleavethisenabled. EvenifAutoLoadProgramEQisenabled,youcanstill adjusttheEQmanually.

MIDI in and out


TheDrumTrackcaninteractwithMIDIinseveral differentways.Youcan: TriggertheDrumTrackpatternviaMIDIin PlaytheDrumTrackProgramviaMIDIin TransmittheDrumTrackpatternviaMIDIout

Triggering the Drum Track pattern via MIDI


IfyouretriggeringtheDrumTrackpatternbyplaying thekeyboard,inputontheGlobalMIDIChannelwill triggertheDrumTrackaswell.

Playing the Drum Track Program via MIDI


YoucanplaytheDrumTrackProgramviaMIDI, separatelyfromthemainProgramsound.InProgram mode,theDrumTracksMIDIchannelissetbythe GlobalMIDIpagesProgMIDIChparameter.The defaultischannel10. (InCombinationandSequencermodes,thisworksa littledifferently;seeDrumTracksettingsin Combinationmode,below.) NotethattheDrumTrackProgramdoesnottransmit orreceiveProgramchanges.

241

Using the Drum Track

Transmitting the Drum Track pattern via MIDI


Withthefactorysettings,theDrumTrackpatternwill notbesentviaMIDIout.Ifyoulike,however,youcan dosoforinstance,youcoulduseittoplayan externalMIDIdevice,orrecorditintoanexternal sequencer.Todoso:

1. GototheGlobalMIDIpage. 2. UnderDrumTrackMIDISetup,enableProgMIDI Out. 3. SettheProgMIDICh.asdesired. TheDrumTrackpatternwillthentransmitMIDIon theselectedchannel.

Drum Track settings in Combination mode


UnlikeProgrammode,Combinationmodedoesnot haveadedicatedtrackfortheDrumTrack.Instead, youcanassignanyofthe16TimbrestotheDrum Track. Todoso,selectadrumProgramforthedesired Timbre.Then,settheDrumTracksOutputMIDI channeltomatchthetimbresMIDIchannel.

Triggering the Drum Track pattern via MIDI


IfyouretriggeringtheDrumTrackpatternbyplaying thekeyboard,inputontheGlobalMIDIChannelwill triggertheDrumTrackaswell.

Playing the Drum Track Program via MIDI


SincetheDrumProgram(s)usestandardCombination Timbres,youcanplaytheDrumProgramjustasyou wouldanyotherTimbre.

MIDI in and out


InCombinationmode,MIDIinteractswiththeDrum TrackdifferentlythaninProgrammode.Youcanstill: TriggertheDrumTrackpatternviaMIDIin PlaytheDrumTrackProgramviaMIDIin TransmittheDrumTrackpatternviaMIDIout

Transmitting the Drum Track pattern via MIDI


TheDrumTrackwilltransmitontheMIDIchannel specifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsettingofeach Combination. SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofthetimbreyouve specifiedforthedrumProgram. IfthetimbresStatusisEXTorEX2,theDrumTrack patternwillbetransmittedviaMIDIout

Drum Track settings in Sequencer mode


TheDrumTrackworksmuchthesameinSequencer modeasitdoesinCombinationmode. However,whileCombinationstriggertheDrumTrack patternviatheglobalMIDIchannel,Songstriggerthe DrumTrackpatternontheMIDIchannelspecifiedby DrumPatternInput.NormallyyoullsetthistoTch. WiththeTchsetting,theMIDIchannelofthetrack selectedbyTrackSelectwillautomaticallybeusedas thetriggerchannel. Fordetails,pleaseseeSelectingtheDrumTrack pattern&soundonpage 238. Youcantusenotedatafromtheinternalsequencer asatriggertostartDrumTrackpatterns. IfyoureplayingaProgramorCombinationalongwith theDrumTrackandcomeupwithanideaforasong, youcanuseAutoSongSetuptoimmediatelystart recording.Formoreinformation,seeAutoSong Setuponpage 82.

Drum Track MIDI in and out


InSequencermode,theDrumTracktransmitsand receivesonthefollowingMIDIchannels. Receive:TheDrumTrackwillreceiveontheMIDI channelspecifiedbytheDrumPatternInputsettingof eachsong.NormallyyoullsetthistoTchandusethe KRONOSskeyboardtocontrolthetriggering. Transmit:TheDrumTrackwilltransmitontheMIDI channelspecifiedbytheDrumPatternOutputsetting ofeachsong.SetthistomatchtheMIDIchannelofthe MIDItrackforwhichyouveassignedthedrum Program. IfthetracksStatusisBTH,EXT,orEX2,notedataetc. oftheDrumTrackpatternwillbetransmitted.

InSequencermodeyoucanusetheDrumTrackwhile realtimerecordingasongtrackorpattern. Thenoteon/offdatatransmittedbytheDrumTrack patterncanberecordedaseventsinatrackorpattern.

242

Drum Track settings Using KARMA and the Drum Track together

Using KARMA and the Drum Track together


IfyoureusingtheDrumTrackandKARMAtogether, youcanlinkthestart/stopoperationofboth,and specifywhetherornottheDrumTrackpatternwill playforeachKARMAscene. YoullstophearingtheDrumTrackpattern.Ifyou presstheSCENE1switch,youllheartheDrumTrack patternagain.

Settings in Program mode


Linking KARMA with Drum Track start/stop
HereshowtostartandstoptheKARMAperformance alongwiththeDrumTrackpattern: 1. GototheProgramP7:KARMAModule ParametersTriggerpage. 2. TurnonLinkToDrumTrack. ThefrontpanelLINKEDLEDwilllight. IfLinktoDrumTrackison(selected),KARMAwillbe linkedwiththeDrumTrackstart/stop. 3. TurntheKARMAON/OFFswitchon. Evenwhenyouplaythekeyboard(orreceiveanote on),KARMAwillnotbetriggered. 4. WhenyouturntheDRUMTRACKswitchon,the DrumTrackwillstartatthespecifiedtiming. IfTriggerModeissettoStartImmediately,KARMA willbetriggeredandbeginoperatingwhenyouturn theDRUMTRACKswitchon(ifyoureplayingthe keyboard,oriftheKARMALATCHswitchison). IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,operationwill beginwhenyouplaythekeyboard(orwhenanoteon isreceived). IfyouturntheDRUMTRACKswitchoffwhile KARMAisoperating,KARMAwillalsostop.

Settings in Combination and Sequencer modes


Linking the KARMA performance with the Drum Track pattern start/stop
InCombinationmodeandSequencermode,KARMA canoperateuptofourKARMAmodules simultaneously.Start/stopforeachKARMAmodule canbesynchronizedwiththeDrumTrackpattern start/stop. Herewellexplainhowtomakesettingsin Combinationmode.SettingsforSequencermodeare thesameasinCombinationmode. 1. GototheCombiP7:KARMAModuleParameters Triggerpage. 2. UnderControl,turnontheLinktoDrumTrack settingfortheKARMAmodule(s)thatyouwantto linkwiththeDrumTrackpatternstart/stop. WhenyouturnonLinkforatleastoneofthefour modules,thefrontpanelLINKEDLEDwilllight. 3. WhenyouturntheKARMAON/OFFswitchon andplaythekeyboard(orreceiveanoteon),the KARMAmoduleswhoseLinktoDrumTrackis offwillbetriggered,andwillstart.KARMA moduleswhoseLinktoDrumTrackisonwillnot betriggered. 4. WhenyouturntheDRUMTRACKswitchon,the KARMAmoduleswhoseLinktoDrumTrackison willstartalongwiththeDrumTrack. IfTriggerModeissettoStartImmediately,KARMA willbetriggeredwhenyouturntheDRUMTRACK switchon,andwillbeginoperating(ifKARMA LATCHison). IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,itwillbegin operatingwhenyouplaythekeyboard(orreceivea noteon). IfyouturntheDRUMTRACKswitchoffwhile KARMAisoperating,KARMAwillalsostopif KARMALATCHisoff. 5. Makesettingssothatthebeatwillmatch (synchronizeto)theoperatingKARMAmodules. IntheTriggersectionoftheDrumTrackpage,turn Syncon. 6. MakesettingssothattheKARMAmoduleswill synchronizetothecurrentlyrunningDrumTrack pattern. IntheP7:KARMATriggerA/B/C/Dpage,turn QuantizeTriggeron(selected).

Turning Drum Track on and off for each KARMA scene


ForeachKARMAscene,youcancontrolwhetheror nottheDrumTrackwillplay.Todoso: 1. GototheProgP7:KARMAGERealTime Parameters/Scenespage. 2. SelecttheScenestab,onthelefthandsideofthe page. TheScenespagewillappear. 3. InDrumTrackRun,clearthecheckboxofeach sceneforwhichyoudontwanttheDrumTrackto play. Forexample,youmightturnthisonforscene1andoff forscene2. 4. PresstheKARMAON/OFFswitchtoturniton. OntheControlSurface,selectscene1. 5. PresstheDRUMTRACKswitch. IfTriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig,playthe keyboard(ortransmitanoteonviaMIDI). VerifythatKARMAandtheDrumTrackpatternare playing. 6. OntheControlSurface,selectscene2.

243

Using the Drum Track

Specifying whether the Drum Track will play for each KARMA scene
JustasyoucaninProgrammode,youcanspecify whethertheDrumTrackwillplayforeachKARMA sceneinCombinationmodeandSequencermode.

ThesesettingsaremadebytherespectiveP7: KARMASceneMatrixpageDrumTrackRun parameters.Formoreinformation,seeTurningDrum TrackonandoffforeachKARMAsceneonpage 243.

Synchronizing the Drum Track


The Trigger Sync parameter
ThetriggertimingofaDrumTrackwilldependonthe settingofitsTriggerSyncparameter. On(checked):Thetriggertimingwillbequantizedto thenearestbeatrelativetothebasetempo. Off(unchecked):IfTriggerModeisStartImmediately, triggeringwilloccuratthemomentyoupressthe DRUMTRACKswitch.IfthisissettoWaitKBDTrig, triggeringwilloccuratthemomentyouplaythe keyboard. synchronizationwiththesequencerthemoment recordingstarts.

Slave operation
ConnecttheKRONOSsMIDIINtoyourexternalMIDI devicesMIDIOUT,orconnecttheKRONOSsUSBB connectortoyourcomputersUSBport.Then,setup theKRONOSasdescribedunderMIDIClock synchronizationonpage 160.

Synchronization with MIDI real-time commands


InSequencermode,SongStart,Continue,andStop messagesthattheKRONOSreceiveswillcontrolsong playbackandrecordingjustaswhenyouoperatethe frontpanelSTART/STOPswitch.KARMAalsowillbe controlledinthesamewayaswhenyouoperatethe frontpanelSTART/STOPswitch.(See SynchronizationwithSongs,above.)

Synchronizing the Drum Track with KARMA, the Sequencer, and RPPR performance
IfyouwanttheDrumTrackpatterntoplayinsync withthecurrentlyoperatingKARMAfunction, currentlyplayingsong,orRPPRperformance,turn TriggerSyncon. TriggerSyncOff:IftheTriggerModesettingisStart Immediately,theDrumTrackpatternwillbetriggered themomentyoupresstheDRUMTRACKswitch.If thisissettoWaitKBDTrig,theDrumTrackpattern willbetriggeredthemomentyouplaythekeyboard.It willnotsynchronizetothecurrentlyoperating KARMAfunctionortothecurrentlyplayingsong, pattern,orRPPR. TriggerSyncOn:Triggeringwillsynchronizetothe currentlyplayingsong,patternorRPPRperformance inunitsofameasure.Triggeringwillsynchronizeto thecurrentlyoperatingKARMAfunction(in Sequencermodeifthesongorpatternisstopped)in unitsofabeat. Note:IfyouwanttosynchronizeKARMAtothe currentlyrunningDrumTrack,enabletheQuantize Triggerparameter(ProgP7:KARMATrigger, Combi/SeqP7:KARMATriggerA/B/C/D). Note:IfyouwanttosynchronizetheRPPRpattern performancetothecurrentlyrunningDrumTrack,set theSyncparametertoBeatorMeasure.

Master operation
ConnecttheKRONOSsMIDIINtoyourexternalMIDI devicesMIDIOUT,orconnecttheKRONOSsUSBB connectortoyourcomputersUSBport. SettheGlobalMIDIClocktoInternal.Theconnected externalMIDIdevicewillsynchronizetotheMIDI realtimeclockandrealtimecommandsitreceives. Note:YoucanalsouseMIDIClock=AutoMIDIor AutoUSB,aslongasclockmessagesarenotbeing received.Fordetails,pleaseseeMIDIClock synchronizationonpage 160.

Synchronization via MIDI clock


TheconnectedexternalMIDIdevicewillsynchronize totheMIDIclockoftheKRONOS.

Synchronization with Songs


WhenyoupresstheSEQUENCERSTART/STOP switch,theDrumTrackwillstopalongwiththe sequencer. IfyouwanttheDrumTracktostartsimultaneously withthebeginningofrecording,presstheDRUM TRACKswitchduringtheprecountbefore recording(ifTriggerModeisStartImmediately)or playthekeyboard(ifTriggerModeisWaitKBD Trig).TheDrumTrackswillnotbetriggered immediately,butwillbetriggeredin

244

Creating Drum Track patterns Preparing a user pattern

Creating Drum Track patterns


TocreateaDrumTrackpattern,youllusethe SequencermodeP10:Pattern/RPPRPatternEditpage toconvertauserpatternintoauserDrumTrack pattern.Onceyouveconvertedthepatterninthisway, youllbeabletouseitwiththeDrumTrackineach mode.TheseconvertedDrumTrackpatternsareheld ininternalmemoryevenafteryouturnoffthepower. Thismeansyoucanmanagethemtogetherwiththe ProgramsandCombinations.

Preparing a user pattern


Youllfirstneedtopreparetheuserpatternthatyou wanttoconverttoaDrumTrackpattern. Tocreateauserpattern,youcanrecordthepatternin realtimeintheSequencerPattern/RPPRPatternEdit page,orsteprecordit. Alternatively,performancedatafromatrackcanbe importedintoapattern,meaningthatperformance datayouvecreatedinatrackorSMFdatayouve loadedinMediamodecanbeusedasauserpattern.To dothis,executetheGetFromTrackmenucommandin theSequencerPattern/RPPRPatternEditpage.

Converting a Sequencer pattern to a Drum Track pattern


1. PressthefrontpanelSEQswitchtoenter Sequencermode. 2. GototheSequencerPattern/RPPRPatternEdit page. 3. Selecttheuserpatternthatyouwanttoconvertto aDrumTrackpattern. SetPatterntoUser,andusePatternSelecttoselectthe desiredpattern. 4. ChoosethemenucommandConverttoDrumTrk Patterntoopenthedialogbox.
Song Drum Track Track/RPPR Drum Track 100 User Patterns 1,000 User Drum Track Patterns 522 Preset Patterns Program /Combination

Convert to Drum Track Pattern

Sequencer memory (stored on disk)

Internal memory (saved in RAM)

5. UsetheToDrumTrackPatternSelectfieldto specifytheuserDrumTrackpatternnumberthat willholdtheconverteddata.Whenyouexecute thecommand,thedatawillbeoverwrittenonto thisnumber. 6. IfyouselecttheAllPatternsavailableinSong ***option,allpatternsinthesongthatcontain notedatawillbeconverted,startingwiththe numberyouspecifiedinstep4. 7. IfyouexecutethiscommandwithNoteOnly selected,onlythenoteeventswillbeconverted. 8. PresstheOKbuttonortheENTERswitchto execute.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,pressthe CancelbuttonortheEXITswitch. 9. AsdescribedinUsingtheDrumTrackin Programmodeonpage 238,settheDrumTrack PatternBanktoUser,andsetPatternNo.to theuserDrumTrackpatternyouconverted.Then playtheDrumTrackpattern.

245

Using the Drum Track

246

Appendices
Troubleshooting Power supply
Power does not turn on
Isthepowercableconnectedtoanoutlet?Formore information,seeConnectionsonpage 20. IsthePOWERswitchturnedon? TurnontherearpanelPOWERswitch.See Turningthepoweron/offonpage 20.

Startup does not complete


Insomecases,theKRONOSwillnotstartupproperly ifcertainUSBstoragedevicesareconnected.Inthis case,disconnecttheUSBdevicesfromtheKRONOS, waitabout10seconds,andthenturnonthepower again.Youmaybeabletosolvetheproblemby formattingtheUSBdeviceontheKRONOS(see Formattingmediaonpage 188).

LCD screen
Display is blank or incorrect
The power is turned on, but nothing is shown in the LCD screen. However, the KRONOS functions normally when you play the keyboard or perform other operations.
IstheLCDscreensbacklightbrightnessadjusted correctly? 1. PresstheGLOBALswitch,andthenpressthe EXITswitchtwice. 2. HolddowntheENTERswitch,andpressnumeric key6. TheLCDSetupdialogwillappear. 3. SelecttheBrightnessparameter,andincreasethe valueuntilthescreenisbrightenough. 4. PresstheOKbuttontoconfirmthechange. Formoreinformation,see11h:PlayPage MS/WS/DKitDisplayonpage 41oftheParameter GuideandShowMS/WS/DKitGraphics,on page 148oftheParameterGuide.

Problems using the touch-screen


Cant operate the LCD screen correctly
OntheBasicSetuptaboftheGlobalP0page,usethe TouchPanelCalibrationpagemenucommandto adjustthetouchpanelresponse. Note:Ifyouareunabletoselectcommandsfromthe pagemenu,dothefollowing: 1. PresstheGLOBALswitch. 2. PresstheEXITswitchtwice. 3. HolddowntheENTERswitchandpress3onthe numerickeypad. TheTouchPanelCalibrationpagewillappear.Follow theonscreeninstructionstorecalibratethetouch panel.

The power is turned on, but the LCD screen does not display normally, or an error message is displayed. There is no sound when you play the keyboard, and the KRONOS does not function normally.
Itispossiblethatthesystemhasbeendamaged.Use theincludedAccessoryDiskstorestoretheKRONOS toitsfactorystate.

Cant switch modes or pages


IftheKRONOSisdoinganyofthefollowing,youmay notbeabletochangemodesorswitchtoadifferent page: Recordingorplayingbackasongorpattern Sampling(iftheSamplingRECbuttonislit) PlayingaCDonaconnectedUSBCDdrive PlayingaWAVEfile AmenudialogorselectdialogisontheLCD display

HD-1 Program P0: Play page display


TheHD1sProgramP0:Playpagecandisplayeither photosorotherimagesrepresentingthesound,orthe Overview/Jumpgraphicswhichshowthesettingsof variousimportantparameters(suchasEGs,LFOs,and soon). Thechoiceofwhichtodisplayiscontrolledbya combinationoftheProgramP1:ProgramBasicpages PlayPageMS/WS/DKitDisplayparameters(onefor eachOscillator)andtheProgramP0:PlaypagesShow MS/WS/DKitGraphicsmenucommand.Youcanset theseasdesired.

In Combination or Sequencer modes, cant edit the value of Timbre/Track parameters such as MIDI Channel or Status
Someparameterscantbeeditedwhilenotesare playing,eitherlocallyorfromMIDI.Ifthedamper pedalishelddown,orifitscalibrationisincorrect, notesmaybesustainingeveniftheyarentaudible.

247

Appendices

Areyouusingadamperpedalwithapolaritythat doesnotmatchtheDamperPolaritysetting(Global P2:Controllers/Scales)?Formoreinformation,see DamperPolarity,onpage 781oftheParameter Guide. Insomecases,thisproblemcanbesolvedbe executingthepagemenucommandHalfDamper Calibration(GlobalP0:BasicSetup).Formore

information,seeHalfDamperCalibration,on page 807oftheParameterGuide.

No beep sounds when you touch the LCD screen


ChecktheBeepEnablecheckbox(GlobalP0:Basic Setup).Formoreinformation,seeSoundingabeep whenyoupresstheLCDscreenonpage 159.

Audio input and output


No sound
Areconnectionsmadecorrectlytoyouramp,mixer,or headphones?Formoreinformation,seeConnections onpage 20. Istheconnectedampormixerpoweredon,andisits volumeraised? IsLocalControlturnedon? InGlobalP1:MIDI,checktheLocalControlOn checkbox. IstheMAINVOLUMEknobraised?SeeMAIN VOLUMEknobonpage 1. IstheMASTERsliderraised?(SeeMasterVolumeon page 24oftheParameterGuide.) CouldMASTERVOLUMEhavebeenassignedtothe ASSIGNABLEPEDAL,andthepedalsetinthe minimumposition? Couldthevectorjoystickbecontrollingthevolume? Trymovingthevectorjoystickasyouplay. IfthereisnosoundfromtheAUDIOOUTPUT (INDIVIDUAL)14jacks,makesurethatBusSelector BusSel.(BusSelect)followingtheinserteffectissetto 14,or1/23/4. IfaspecifictimbredoesntsoundinCombination mode,isitsPlay/MutebuttonsettoPlay? Alternatively,areallSolosettingsturnedoff?(Ifthe Solobuttonisblinking,thismeansthatatleastone timbreisbeingsoloed.) IfaspecifictrackdoesntsoundinSequencermode,is itsPlay/Rec/MutebuttonsettoPlay?Alternatively,are allSolosettingsturnedoff?(IftheSolobuttonis blinking,thismeansthatatleastonetrackisbeing soloed.) MakesurethattheStatusisINTorBTH.(See Preparationsforrecordingonpage 76.) AretheKeyZoneandVelocityZonesetsothatsound willbeproducedwhenyouplay? IstheGlobalSystemClocksettoS/PDIF?Ifthisisthe case,andavalid48kHzS/PDIFsourceisnot connected,thentheKRONOSoutputswillbesilent. Level.Alternatively,intheSamplingmodeP5: AudioCDRippingpage,maketheappropriate settingsforBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)andLevel. IstheDriveSelectsettingcorrect? IstheMAINVOLUMEknobraised? IfyoucreatedtheCDusingtheKRONOS,hastheCD beenfinalized? ACDR/RWdisccreatedusingtheDiskmode MakeAudioCDpagecannotbeplayeduntilyou alsofinalizethedisc.Usethepagemenucommand FinalizeAudioCDtofinalizethedisc.Formore information,seeFinalizeAudioCDonpage 855 oftheParameterGuide.

Audio inputs dont work properly


Aretheappropriatesourcesconnectedtotheanalog, S/P DIF,orUSBinputs? IfthereisnosoundinSamplingmode,checkthatBus Select(IFX/Indiv.),andLevelaresetcorrectlyinthe SamplingP0:RecordingAudioInputpage. Alternatively,isSAMPLINGRECturnedon? IfthereisnosoundinProgram,Combination,and Sequencermodes,checkthatBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.), andLevelaresetcorrectlyinGlobalP0:BasicSetup Audiopage;orintheP0:SamplingpagesofProgram, Combination,orSequencermodes. Onthe08:AudioInput/Samplingpage,istheUse GlobalSettingparametersetcorrectly?

Analog audio inputs


IfyouareusingAUDIOINPUT1and/or2,makesure thattheAUDIOINPUTLEVELknobsareraised. IfyouareusingAUDIOINPUT1and/or2,arethe MIC/LINEswitchessetappropriately?

S/P DIF input


IfyouareusingtheS/P DIFIN,istheinputsignalinan unsupportedformat? Pleasemakesurethattheconnecteddigitalaudio deviceiscompatiblewithCP1201orS/P DIF. IstheS/P DIFdevicesettoacompatiblesamplerate? Only48kHzsamplingrateissupported.Ifthe connecteddeviceisusinganunsupportedrate,you mayhearnoise,andthemessageCLOCK ERROR!mayappear.

Cant output sound from an audio CD


MakesurethatyouhaveselectedtheDiskmodePlay AudioCDpageorSamplingmode. IstheoutputoftheaudioCDbeinginputcorrectly? IntheDiskmodePlayAudioCDPage,makethe appropriatesettingsforBusSelect(IFX/Indiv.)and

248

Troubleshooting Programs and Combinations

Noise or distortion on audio inputs or recorded sound


Ifyouarerecordingfromaudioinputs1and/or2,are theAUDIOINPUTLEVELknobsandRecording Levelsettingsappropriate? IfRecordingLevelshowsADCOVERLOAD !, adjusttheLEVELknob.IfCLIP!isdisplayed, adjusttheRecordingLevelslider. IfyouarerecordingfromtheS/P DIForUSBinputs, aretheleveloftheoutputdeviceandtheRecording Levelsetappropriately? IfCLIP!appears,adjusttheRecordingLevel slider. Isthesystemclocksetcorrectly? Ifcyclicclicknoiseisoccurring,checkthatyou haveselectedtheSystemClockthatisbeinginput.

WhenusingtheMIDI/TempoSyncfunctiontocontrol thedelaytimeofaneffect,noisemayoccurinthedelay sound.Thisnoiseisduetodiscontinuitiesinthedelay sound,andisnotamalfunction. Someeffects,suchas023:StereoAnalogRecord, generatenoiseintentionally.Itisalsopossibletocreate oscillationusingafilterwithresonance.Thesearenot malfunctions.

Disk access noise is heard in the analog outputs


Checkthattheelectricalgroundingiscorrectforthe KRONOSandallconnectedaudioequipment,and removeanygroundloops.

Notes do not stop


InProgramP1:Basic/Vector,selecttheProgramBasic page,makesurethattheHoldcheckboxisunchecked. CouldyouhaveusedToneAdjusttoturnHoldon? InGlobalP2:Controllers/Scales,makesurethat DamperPolarityorFootSwitchPolarityisset correctly.

After sampling or sample edits


Afterasampleedithasbeenexecuted,orafterastereo samplehasbeenrecorded,asmallnoisemaybeheard. Thishasnoeffectontheaudiodatathatwaseditedor sampled.

Noise or oscillation with effects


Whenusinganeffectonexternalaudioinputs, oscillationmayoccurdependingonthetypeofeffect orontheparametersettings.Pleaseadjusttheinput level,outputlevel,andeffectparameters.Youneedto beparticularlycarefulwhenusingahighgaineffect.

Sound fades in and out


Ifanoptionisindemomode,anysoundwhichuses theoptionwillfadeinandout.

Programs and Combinations


Program or Combination does not play correctly
Preloaded programs dont play correctly.
DoestheSamplesNotLoadedmessageappear?If so,istherequiredEXssampledataloaded? InGlobalmode,usetheAutoLoadKSCfeatureto loadthePRELOAD.KSCfile.Formoreinformation, seeAutomaticallyloadingsampledataon page 164. UsetheGlobalP0:SampleManagementpageto changetheMultisampleorDrumSamplesLoad MethodtoRAM.

EXi programs dont play correctly in a Combination.


DoestheTimbresnumberhaveagraybackground color,insteadofblue?And,does[Inactive]appearafter theProgramnameintheSelectedTimbreInfo? TheProgramsintheCombinationareaskingfor morethanthemaximumavailableEXifixed resources.RemoveoneormoreoftheEXi Programswhichusesfixedresources. Formoreinformation,seeCX3&otherEXi: LimitationsonEXifixedresourcesonpage 420of theParameterGuide.

Settings for oscillator 2 are not displayed


MakesurethattheOscillatorMode(ProgramP1: Basic/Vector)parameterissettoDouble.

EXi2related settings are not displayed


OntheBasic/Vectorpage,isthereanEXiinstrument selectedforEXi2?Formoreinformation,seeEXi2 InstrumentTypeonpage 169oftheParameterGuide.

Combination does not play correctly after loading from disk


Inthedialogboxwhenyousavedthedata,didyou checktheitemsthatyouwantedtosave? Arethebank/numbersoftheprogramsusedbythe combinationthesameaswhenthecombinationwas created? Ifyouhaveswitchedprogrambanks,youcanuse theChangeallbankreferencesmenucommandto

Reverse cant be enabled


IfaMultisampleorDrumSampleisloadedusing VirtualMemory,Reversecannotbeenabled.

249

Appendices

changetheprogrambankforeachtimbreofa combination.Formoreinformation,seeChangeall bankreferencesonpage 807oftheParameter Guide.

theGlobalmodepagemenucommandSetProgram UserBankTypetochangethetypeofeachbank,so thatitwillaccommodatethedesiredtypeofprograms. Formoreinformation,seeChangingtheBankType forUSERbanksonpage 27.

Cant write a Program


YoucantwriteHD1programsintobankUSERA. Conversely,youcantwriteEXiprogramsintobanks USERBF.HoweverforbanksUSERAG,youcanuse

Songs
Song does not play correctly after being loaded
Inthedialogboxwhenyousavedthedata,didyou checkalloftheitemsthatyouwantedtosave? AretheProgramsusedbytheSongthesameaswhen thesongwascreated? IfyouhaveswitchedProgrambanks,youcanuse thepagemenucommandChangeallbank referencestochangetheProgrambankforeach trackofaSong.Formoreinformation,seeChange allbankreferencesonpage 807oftheParameter Guide. Whensavingthesong,itisbesttouseSaveAllor SavePCG&SEQsothattheprogramsaresaved togetherwiththesong.Thenwhenloading,load boththe.PCGandthe.SEQdata. Haveyouloadedthemultisamplesandsamplesused bytheprogram?

Playback does not start when you press the SEQUENCER START/STOP switch
IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor Auto?

Cant record in Sequencer mode


DidyouuseTrackSelecttoselecttheMIDItrackor audiotrackthatyouwanttorecord? IstheMemoryProtectSongcheckbox(GlobalP0) unchecked? IstheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor Auto?

EXi programs dont play correctly in a Song.


DoestheTracksnumberhaveagraybackground color,insteadofblue?And,does[Inactive]appearafter theProgramnameintheSelectedTrackInfo? TheProgramsintheSongareaskingformorethan themaximumavailableEXifixedresources. RemoveoneormoreoftheEXiProgramswhich usesfixedresources. Formoreinformation,seeCX3&otherEXi: LimitationsonEXifixedresourcesonpage 420of theParameterGuide.

Audio tracks dont play


TheaudiofilesfortheSongmustbestoredwithina directoryatthesamedirectorylevelasthe.SNGfile, andthatdirectorymustbehavethesamenameasthe .SNGfile,followedby_A(forAudio).For instance,ifthe.SNGfileisnamedWAMOZART.SNG, itsaudiofoldermustbenamedWAMOZART_A.If youmoveorrenamethe.SNGfile,makesuretomove orrenamethemainaudiofolderaswell. IfthefoldercontainingtheWAVEfilesforthesongyou loadedhasthewrongname,theiconisshowningray. Couldyouhavemovedorrenamedthefolder?

KARMA doesnt record properly after using Copy From Combi


IsMultiREC(SequencerP0:Play/REC)checked? ArethesettingsintheCopyFromCombinationdialog boxcorrect? IntheCopyFromCombinationdialogbox,check theMultiRECstandbyoptionbeforeyouexecute thecopy.Thiswillcausethesettingstobeadjusted automatically.

Loading OASYS-format Songs


TheKRONOScanplaySongscreatedontheKorg OASYS.However,thenameoftheaudiodirectorywill needtobechangedslightly. OASYSfileswerelimitedto8characters,andsothe nameoftheaudiofiledirectorywastypically abbreviated.Forinstance,ifthe.SNGfilewasnamed WAMOZART.SNG,theOASYSaudiofolderwouldbe namedWAMOZA_A. BeforeyouloadanOASYS.SNGfile,editthenameof thedirectorysothatitmatchestheKRONOSstandard: thesamenameasthe.SNGfile,followedby_A(for Audio).Inthecaseabove,youdrename WAMOZA_AtoWAMOZART_A.

Cant record your performance using Tone Adjust


ChangesyoumakeusingToneAdjustarerecordedas systemexclusivedata.DidyouchecktheGlobalmode MIDIFilterEnableExclusivecheckbox?

250

Troubleshooting Set Lists

RPPR does not start


IstheSequencerP0:Play/RECRPPRsettingchecked? (SeeUsingRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/Record)on page 106.) AreAssign,PatternSelect,andTracksetcorrectly? SeeUsingRPPR(RealtimePatternPlay/Record)on page 106. IftheMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)parametersetto InternalorAuto?SeeMIDIClock(MIDIClock Source)onpage 772oftheParameterGuide.

SaveacopyofimportantWAVEfilesonexternal media,andthendeletethemfromthedisk. AretheRECSourcesettingscorrect? AFilealreadyexistsmessageappears,andyoucant record. IntheP0:Play/RECPreferencepage,changethe nameoftheWAVEfilethatyouregoingtorecord. DeletethefilesintheTEMPfolder.

Cant import WAVE files into a region of an audio track


IntheImportRegion/WAVEdialogbox,youselecteda WAVEfilebutcantpresstheOKbutton. Only44.1kHzand48kHzWAVEfilescanbe imported. YoucanonlydirectlyimportWAVEfilesfromthe internaldisk.TousefilesfromCDsorexternalUSB devices,youmustfirstcopythemtotheinternal disk,andthenimportthecopiedfileintotheSong.

Cant record on an audio track


HaveyouuncheckedtheMemoryProtectInternal HDDSavecheckbox(GlobalP0)? HaveyousetTrackSelecttotheaudiotrackyouwant torecord? Ifyouwanttoperformmultitrackrecording(Multi RECchecked),isPlay/Rec/MutesettoREC? Aretheaudioinputsettingscorrect? PleaseseeAudioinputandoutput,andAudio inputsdontworkproperly. Istherespaceremainingonthedisk? DeleteunwantedWAVEfiles.

Noise in sampled audio


IfyouuseCOMPAREorchangetheEXiInstrument typeinanEXiProgramwhilerecordingasample,this cancauseaglitchintheresultingsample.

Set Lists
COMPARE doesnt affect Control Surface
WhenyoureinSetListmode,theCOMPAREbutton actsoneditstotheSetList,suchasthesoundsselected foreachSlot,holdtimes,comments,andsoon. ControlSurfaceeditsinSetListmodeapplytothe SlotsProgram,Combination,orSong,andnottothe SetListitself.ThismeansthatpressingCOMPAREin SetListmodewillnotrevertsuchedits. TorevertControlSurfaceeditsmadeinSetListmode: 1. Gotothesoundsnativemode. Forinstance,iftheSlotcontainsaProgram,goto Programmode. 2. PressCOMPARE. TheControlSurfaceeditswillbereverted.Youcan thenreturntoSetListmodeifdesired.

Sampling
Cant sample
Aretheaudioinputsettingscorrect? SeeAudioinputsdontworkproperlyon page 248 IsthereenoughfreeRAMmemoryforsampling? Istherefreespaceinmemory?Formoreinformation, see01f:FreeSampleMemory/Locationson page 684oftheParameterGuide,and09:Media Informationonpage 822oftheParameterGuide. InordertosampletoRAMmemory,youmust allocatesufficientspaceforsampling. Ifyouaresamplingtodisk,selectadifferentdisk. Formoreinformation,seeSelectDirectoryon page 149oftheParameterGuide. Deleteunneededsamples.Formoreinformation, seeDeleteSampleonpage 726oftheParameter Guide. Saveimportantsamplesonexternalmedia,and thendeletethemfrommemory. Ifyouresamplingtotheinternaldisk,didyou unchecktheMemoryProtectInternalHDDSave dialogbox?(GlobalP0) IfyouresamplingtoexternalUSBstoragemedia,did youselectrecordablemedia? IstheTriggersettingcorrect?Formoreinformation, seeTriggeronpage 19oftheParameterGuide. InSamplingmodeifyouareresamplingwith ResamplesettoAuto,hasthesampletoberesampled beenassignedtothekeyboard,andselectedforKey? Applyinganinserteffecttoasampleandresampling theresultonpage 138.

251

Appendices

IstheSourceBussettingcorrect? Ifabufferoverrunerroroccurredmessageis displayedfrequentlywhenyouaresamplingtodisk, executethepagemenucommandCheckMedium (DiskUtilitypage)tofindandcorrectanyerrorson theselectedMSDOSformatmedia.Formore information,seeCheckMediumonpage 854ofthe ParameterGuide.

Ifthisischecked,RAMwillbeoptimized automaticallywhensamplingends,causingthe soundtostopatthatpoint.Ifasongisbeingplayed inSequencermodeorifaCDisbeingplayedback, theplaybackwillstop.

AIFF file cant be loaded


Makesurethatthefilesuffixisthreecharacters:.AIF. Somecomputerapplicationscreatefileswithafour charactersuffix,.AIFF,whichisnotrecognizedbythe KRONOS.

A stereo sample cant be played in stereo


Isthemultisampleactuallystereo? ExecutethepagemenucommandMSMonoTo Stereotoconvertthemultisampletostereo.For moreinformation,seeMSMonoToStereo/MS StereoToMono(ChangeMultisampleType)on page 730oftheParameterGuide Isthesamplenameassignedcorrectly?(SeeStereo onpage 681oftheParameterGuide.)

Time lag between pressing the SAMPLING REC switch and entering sampling-standby mode
Thelengthoftimeuntilyouentersamplingstandby modewilldependonthestateofthefreespaceonthe disk(i.e.,whetherthefreespaceiscontinuousor fragmented). Whensamplingtothedisk,pressingthe SAMPLINGRECswitchwillcausetheamountof spacespecifiedbySampleTimetobeallocated withinthedisk. SetSampleTimeonlyslightlylongerthanthe lengththatyouwillactuallysample;avoid specifyinganexcessivelylongsampletime.

Volume of a recorded sample is too low/too high


SamplesthatyouresampledataRecordingLevelof approximately0.0(dB)havealowervolumethan whenyouresampledthem. DidyouturnontheAuto+12dBOnsettingwhen youresampled?SeeAuto+12dBOnonpage 130. IfyouresampledwithAuto+12dBOnturnedoff, turnon+12dB(SamplingmodeLoopEditpage)for thatsample.

Snap/click noise in recorded sample


Somethingscancausethesystemtopausebrieflyin themiddleofrecordingasample,creatingasnapor clicknoise.TheseincludepressingtheCOMPARE button,changingtheEXitypeparametersontheEXi ProgramP4:ProgramBasicpage,orreceivingaSystem Exclusivebulkdump.Avoidthesewhilesampling.

Song or CD playback stops temporarily when you sample


IsAutoOptimizeRAMchecked?

KARMA
KARMA does not start
IstheKARMAON/OFFswitchturnedon(lit)? IfaKARMAmoduledoesnotstartinCombinationor Sequencermode,istheRunCheckBoxcheckedfor thatmodule?Also,aretheInputChannelandOutput Channelsettingsappropriate? IsMIDIClock(GlobalP1:MIDI)settoInternalor Auto? IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,couldAllKARMA Offbechecked? IstheKARMALINKEDLEDlit?Ifso,KARMAis linkedwiththeDrumTrack.StarttheDrumTrackto triggerKARMA.Formoreinformation,seeUsing KARMAandtheDrumTracktogetheronpage 243.

252

Troubleshooting Drum Track

Drum Track
Drum Track does not start
IstheDRUMTRACKON/OFFswitchturnedon(lit)? IstheDRUMTRACK[ON/OFF]switchblinking? TriggerModeissettoWaitKBDTrig.Thedrumtrack patternwillstartwhenyouplaythekeyboardor receiveanoteon.SeeTurningtheDrumTrackonand offonpage 240. DoesthecurrentDrumTrackpatterncontaindata?If theresnodatainthepattern,theDrumTrackwont play. IfyoureinCombinationmode,istheOutputChannel settingappropriate?SeeUsingtheDrumTrackin Combinationmodeonpage 240. IfyoureinSequencermode,aretheInputChannel andOutputChannelsettingsappropriate?SeeDrum TracksettingsinSequencermodeonpage 242. IstheMIDIClockparametersetcorrectly?SeeMIDI Clocksynchronizationonpage 160. IntheGlobalP0:BasicSetuppage,isAllKARMA/DT Offchecked?SeeGloballydisablingKARMAandthe DrumTrackonpage 159. IftheDrumTrackstopswhenyouswitchtheKARMA Masterscene,haveyoucheckedtheDTRun(Drum TrackRun)checkboxoftheKARMAMasterscene?

Vector
Cant control the volume
IstheEnableVolumeControlcheckboxchecked? IstheCombinationorSequencermodeVJSAssign settingappropriate? HaveyoucheckedtheEnableProgramVectorVolume checkboxsothatthevolumecontrolofaprogramcan bereproducedinCombinationorSequencermode? InCombinationorSequencermode,aretheEnable CombiVectorCCorEnableSongVectorCCcheck boxeschecked? HaveyoucheckedtheEnableProgramVectorCC checkboxsothattheCCcontrolofaprogramcanbe reproducedinCombinationorSequencermode?

An envelope doesnt operate according to its settings


Isthefrontpanelvectorjoysticksettothecenter position?Theoperationoftheenvelopeisoffsetbythe positionofthevectorjoystick. HolddowntheRESETCONTROLSbuttonand movethevectorjoysticktoresetittothecenter.

CC control does not work


IstheEnableCCControlcheckboxchecked? AretheVJSXmodeandVJSYmodesettings appropriate?

Drum Kits
The drum samples pitch does not change
YouhavelefttheAssigncheckboxunchecked,and wanttoplaythedrumsampleattheadjacentrighta semitonelower,butthepitchdoesnotchange. IfyouhaveselectedadrumprograminProgram mode,andthenwanttoeditthedrumkitinGlobal mode,gototheProgramP2:EditPitch,OSC1Pitch Mod.pageandsetPitchSlopeto+1.0beforeyou enterGlobalmode.

Wave Sequences
The wave sequence does not advance
IstheRuncheckboxchecked?

Swing does not work properly


IsthewavesequencesModesettoTempo? IsthewavesequencesSwingResolutionset appropriately?

253

Appendices

Effects
Effects are not applied
Haveyouselectedeffectprogram000? Selectaneffectotherthan000:NoEffectforIFX1 12,MFX1,2orTFX1,2. AretheEffectGlobalSWIFX112Off,MFX1&2Off, orTFX1&2Off(GlobalP0:BasicSetuppage)settings checked? IfyouareinCombinationorSequencermodeand mastereffectsarenotappliedwhenyouraisethe timbre/trackSend1orSend2settings,doesReturn1or Return2fromthemastereffectneedtoberaised? Alternatively,haveSend1orSend2foreachoscillator oftheprogramusedbythetimbre/trackbeenlowered? Note:Theactualsendlevelisdeterminedby multiplyingthesendsettingofeachoscillatorinthe programwiththesendsettingofthetimbre/track. Haveyouroutedtheoutputtoaninserteffect?

MIDI
The KRONOS does not respond at all to incoming MIDI data
AreallMIDIcablesconnectedcorrectly? IstheMIDIdatabeingreceivedonthechannelon whichitisbeingtransmitted?

The KRONOS does not respond correctly to incoming MIDI data


AretheGlobalP1:MIDIsettingsMIDIFilterEnable ProgramChange,EnableBankChange,Enable ControlChange,EnableAfterTouch,andEnable Exclusiveeachchecked? DoestheKRONOSsupportthetypesofmessagesthat arebeingsenttoit?

Incorrect response to program change messages


IstheBankMapsettingcorrect?

Disks, CDs, and USB Media


Internal disk and external USB devices
External USB devices are not recognized
Hasthedrivebeenformatted? Istheexternaldeviceconnectedcorrectly? Haveyouwaitedafewsecondsfornewlyconnected USBdevicestoberecognized? IfyouarewritingaudiotrackstocreateanaudioCD,it isnotnecessarytoformatthedisc. Areyouusingtherecommendedmediaforyourdrive? IfyouarewritingfromanexternalUSBdrivetoCD R/RW,itispossiblethatthetransferspeedis insufficient. Writingmaybesuccessfulifyoulowerthewriting speed. Writingmaybesuccessfulifyoufirstcopythedata fromtheexternalUSBdrivetotheinternaldisk, andthenexecutethewritingoperationfromthe internaldisk. Areyouusingblankmedia? IfusingCDR,pleaseusenewmedia.IfusingCD RW,usethepagemenucommandEraseCDRW (DiskMakeAudioCD)toerasethecontentsofthe mediabeforeyouexecuteSave.

Error in writing to medium occurs frequently when saving data


UsethepagemenucommandCheckMedium(Disk Utilitypage)todetectandrepairerrorsonthemedia. Formoreinformation,seeCheckMediumon page 854oftheParameterGuide.

Save or Load operations cannot be completed


Ifthereisnomoreroomontheinternaldisk(theDisk modeMediaInfopagesFreeSpaceparameterwill showzerofreespace),thenWrite,Save,orLoad operationsmaynotbecompleted.

A KRONOS CD-R/RW is not recognized by an external device


ACDR/RWsavedorcopiedontheKRONOSusing packetwritingisnotrecognizedonacomputer. IfyouinstallaUDFversion1.5compatibleUDF readerorpacketwritingsoftwareonyour computer,itwillbepossibletorecognizethedisc. InthecaseofaCDR,itmaybepossibletomake thediscberecognizedbyexecutingthepagemenu

CD-R/RW
CD-R/RW drive is not recognized, or Cant write
Wasthedrivesubjectedtophysicalshockorvibration whiledataisbeingwritten? IfyouareunabletosavedatasuchasPCGorSNG files,hasthediscbeenformatted?

254

Troubleshooting Other problems

commandConverttoISO9660Format(Disk Utilitypage)toconvertthedisctoISO9660format. Howeverdependingonthestateinwhichthedisc wassaved,itmaybeconvertedintoISO9660level3 format,andmaystillnotberecognized.Inthiscase ifyouinstallISO9660level3compatiblereader softwareorpacketwritingsoftwareonyour computer,itwillbepossibletorecognizethedisc. ACDR/RWthatwassavedorcopiedontheKRONOS usingpacketwritingisnotrecognizedbythe TRITON/TRITONpro/TRITONproX/TRITON Rack/TRITONLe. ThesemodelsdonotsupportUDFversion1.5,and thereforewillnotrecognizesuchadisc. InthecaseofaCDR,itmaybepossibletomake thediscberecognizedbyexecutingthepagemenu commandConverttoISO9660Format(Disk Utilitypage)toconvertthedisctoISO9660format. Howeverdependingonthestateinwhichthedisc wassaved,itmaybeconvertedintoISO9660level3 format,andmaystillnotberecognized.

information,seeWritetoCDonpage 854ofthe ParameterGuide. Ifyouonlywanttofinalizethedisc,selectthepage menucommandFinalizeAudioCD(DiskMake AudioCD),andpresstheOKbuttontofinalizethe disc.Formoreinformation,seeFinalizeAudio CDonpage 855oftheParameterGuide. AreyouusingCDRmedia? SincesomeCDplayersareunabletoplayCDRW media,werecommendthatyouuseCDRmedia. Haveyoutriedusingadifferenttypeofmedia? SomeCDR/RWmediacannotbeplayedbysome CDplayers.Youmaybeabletoplayback successfullybyusingadifferenttype(brand)of CDR/RWmedia.

WAVE files
Cant load
IstheWAVEfileinaformatthattheKRONOScan load? Only48kHzor44.1kHzWAVEfilescanbe insertedintoanaudiotrackinaSong,orintothe TrackCDList.

Cant write audio tracks


AdditionalwritingisnotpossibleonaCDR/RWdisc thathasbeenfinalized.

Cant play back the disc on an audio CD player


Didyoufinalizethedisc? Ifyouwanttofinalizethediscafterwriting additionaldata,checktheExecutefinalizetoo checkboxwhenexecutingthepagemenu commandWritetoCD(DiskMakeAudioCD), sothatthediscwillbefinalized.Formore

Cant preview
IstheWAVEfileinaformatthattheKRONOScan load? Only48kHzor44.1kHzWAVEfilescanbe previewedbypressingthePlaybuttoninthe directorywindow.

Other problems
Power turns off automatically
IftheKRONOSisnotcooledadequately,theinternal temperaturewillrise.Thepowersupplymayshut downautomaticallytoprotectthedevicefromhigh temperatures.

Date and time are incorrect


SavedfilesorsampledWAVEfileshaveanincorrect dateortime. UsethepagemenucommandSetDate/Time (DiskUtilitypage)tosetthecurrentdateandtime. Formoreinformation,seeSettingthedateand timeonpage 198. DoesthemessageTheclockbatteryvoltageislow. Pleasereplacethebattery,andsetthedateandtimein Diskmodeappear?Ifso,thecalendarbackupbattery needstobereplaced.YourKorgDistributorcanhelp youfindaservicecentertoreplacethebattery.

255

Appendices

Error and confirmation messages A (ADCAre You Sure)


ADC Overload
Meaning:IftheADCOVERLOAD!indication appearsabovetheRecordingLevelbar,thesignalis distortingbecauseofanoverloadattheAUDIO INPUTstage.Tosolvethisproblem: AdjusttheMIC/LINEgainselectswitch,theLEVEL knob,ortheoutputlevelofyourexternalaudio source.

Are you sure?


Meaning:Thismessageasksyoutoconfirmexecution. ToexecutepresstheOKbutton.Tocancel,pressthe Cancelbutton.

B (Buffer)
Buffer overrun error occurred
Meaning:WhensamplingtoexternalUSBmedia,the processingcouldnotkeepupwiththesampling.To solvethisproblem: ExecutetheDiskUtilitypagemenucommand CheckMedium.Thentrythesamplingoperation again.Ifthisdoesnotresolvetheproblem,copy severalfilesfromthatmediatoothermedia,delete thosefiles,andthentrythesamplingoperation again. Note:Samplingmaynotbepossiblebecauseofthe mediayoureusing.Pleaseusetherecommendedtypes ofmedia. Note:IftheBufferoverrunerroroccurrederror messageappears.thedatauptothepointtheerror occurredhasbeensampled,butthedataatthepoint theerroroccurredmaynotplaybackcorrectly.

Buffer underrun error occurred


Meaning:WhenplayingbackaWAVEfilefrom externalUSBmedia,thedatacouldnotbereadfast enoughforplaybackprocessing. Copythefileyouwanttoplayintoanotherfolder, andthenexecutetheoperationagain. Note:Playbackmaynotbepossiblebecauseofthe mediayoureusing.Pleaseusetherecommendedtypes ofmedia.(MediathatcanbeusedontheKRONOS.)

C (Cant calibrateCompleted)
Cant calibrate
Meaning:Calibrationcouldnotbeperformed correctly. Tryagain. Meaning:IftheGlobalmodeMemoryProtect parameterInternalHDDSaveischecked,writingto theinternaldiskisprohibited.Thiserrormessagewill appearifyouattempttorecordonaudiotracksinthis state. UnchecktheInternalHDDSaveitem,andtrythe recordingagain.

Cant execute Audio Track recording


Meaning:Youattemptedtorecordaudiotrackswhen RecordingSetupissettoLoopAllTracks Youcannotperformaudiotrackrecordingwith LoopAllTracks.ChooseadifferentRecording Setup,andtryrecordingagain. Meaning:Youattemptedtorecordaudiotrackswith theGlobalmodeMIDIClocksettoExternal MIDI/USBorAutoMIDI/USB,andanexternaldevice (suchasacomputeroranotherMIDIdevice)isacting astheMIDIclockmaster Youcannotperformaudiotrackrecordingwhenan externaldeviceistheMIDIclockmaster.SetMIDI ClocktoInternalsothattheKRONOSistheMIDI clockmaster.

Cant insert event in stereo track


Meaning:InSequencermode,youwereperforming audioeventeditingonanaudiotrackthatisassigned asastereopair,andwereunabletoinsertanaudio eventbecausethepairedtrackcontainedanaudio event. Deletetheunwantedaudioeventfromthepaired audiotrack,andtheninsertthedesiredevent.

Cant load divided PCG file


Meaning:ThepagemenucommandLoadPCG (RAM)andSamplescannotbeperformedona dividedPCGfile.

256

Error and confirmation messages D (DestinationDisk)

Cant open pattern Continue?


Meaning:Whenyoufinishedrecording,itwasnot possibletoallocateenoughmemorytoopenthe patternthatwasPutintothetrack.(Whenitmustbe openedautomatically.)IfyoupresstheOKbutton,the patterndatawillbedeleted,andtherecordedoredited contentwillbesaved.IfyoupresstheCancelbutton, therecordedcontentwillbediscarded.

Wheneveryouusedigitalaudioconnections,make surethatallconnectedsystemsaresetsothatthere isoneandonlyonewordclockmaster.Youcanset thewordclockfortheKRONOSusingtheGlobal pageSystemClockparameter.Formore information,seeSystemClockonpage 756ofthe ParameterGuide. Makesurethatyourexternaldeviceiscorrectly transmittingadigitalsignal. Makesurethatthesamplerateoftheexternal deviceis48kHz. Makesurethatthereisnoproblemwiththecable.

CLIP!
Meaning:TheCLIP!indicationwillappearifthe signallevelexceeds0dB. Thesignalbeingsampledorrecordedtoanaudio trackhasoverloaded;usetheRecordingLevel slidertoadjustthelevel. Note:Whenusingtheanalogaudioinputs,youwill obtainthewidestpossibledynamicrangeifyouadjust theMIC/LINEgainselectswitchandtheLEVELknobs ashighaspossiblewithoutallowingADC OVERLOAD!toappear.Inaddition,youshouldset Level(02a)to127,andadjustRecordingLevelas highaspossiblewithoutallowingCLIP!toappear.

Completed
Meaning:Executionofthecommandendednormally.

Could not execute Capture Random Seed, because the selected Start Seed is assigned as an RTParam
Meaning:IftheKARMAmodulesStartSeed parameterhasbeenassignedasaperformance realtimeparameter,thismessagewillappearwhen youattempttoexecutetheCaptureRandomSeed command;thecommandcannotbeexecuted.(Press theOKbuttontoclosethemessage.) InthePerfRTPpage,canceltheperformance realtimeparameterassignmentforStartSeed.

CLOCK ERROR!
Meaning:TheGlobalSystemClockissettoS/P DIF, buttheclockatthedigitalinputisnotbeingdetected correctly.

D (DestinationDisk)
Destination and source are identical
Meaning:Whencopyingorbouncing,thesamesong, trackorpatternwasselectedforboththesourceand destination.Tosolvethisproblem: Selectadifferentsong,track,orpatternforthe sourceanddestination.

Destination measure is empty


Meaning:Themeasurethatwasspecifiedasthe destinationcontainsnodata. Specifyadestinationmeasurethatcontainsdata.

Destination multisample already exists


Meaning:Amultisamplealreadyexistsatthe destination(savelocation)multisample. Eitherdeletethemultisampleatthedestination (savelocation),orchangethesavedestination multisamplenumber.

Destination from-measure within the limits of source


Meaning:WhenexecutingtheMoveMeasure commandforalltracksorwithinthesametrack,the specifieddestinationmeasureiswithinthesource range.Tosolvethisproblem: Setadestinationmeasurethatisoutsideofthe sourcerange.

Destination multisample and source multisample are identical


Meaning:Thesamemultisampleisselectedforthe sourceanddestination. Selectdifferentmultisamplesforthesourceand destination.

Destination is empty
Meaning:Whenediting,thetrackorpatternthatwas specifiedasthedestinationcontainsnomusicaldata. Tosolvethisproblem: Selectatrackorpatternthatcontainsmusicaldata.

Destination sample already exists


Meaning:Asamplealreadyexistsatthedestination (savelocation).

257

Appendices

Eitherdeletethesampleatthedestination(save location),orchangethesavedestinationsample number.

PresstheOKbuttontodeleteallfilesand/or directorieswithinthatdirectory.

Destination sample data used in source sample Cant overwrite


Meaning:Sincethesampledataatthedestination (savelocation)isalsousedbythesourcesample,it cannotbeoverwritten. WithoutusingOverwrite,specifyadifferent sampleforthedestination(savelocation).

Disc full
Meaning:WhenusingtheWritetoCDcommandin theDiskmodeMakeAudioCDpage,thereis insufficientspaceremainingontheCDR/RWforthe datatobewritten. Eitherwritetoothermedia,orremoveunneeded tracks.

Disk not formatted


Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtoperformahighlevel format(quickformat)ofmedia,themediahadnot beenphysicallyformattedyet.Tosolvethisproblem: UsetheDiskmodeUtilitypagemenucommand Formattophysicallyformatthemedia(fullformat).

Destination sample is empty


Meaning:Thesampleforeditingisempty.

Directory is not empty Cleanup directory Are you sure?


Meaning:Whendeletingadirectory,filesor directoriesexistwithinthatdirectory.

E (ErrorExceeded)
Error in formatting medium
Meaning: Anerroroccurredwhileperforminga physicalformat(fullformat)orhighlevelformat (quickformat)ofthemedia.Tosolvethisproblem: Useothermedia. Meaning: WhenexecutingtheDiskmodeUtilitypage menucommandConverttoISO9660Format,anerror occurredwhilerewritingtheUDFarea.Tosolvethis problem: Useothermedia.

Error in writing to medium


Meaning: Averificationerroroccurredwhilewriting datatoamedium.Tosolvethisproblem: Itispossiblethatthemediahasbeenphysically damaged.Tryanothermedia.Avoidusingthe mediathatproducedtheerror. WhenusingexternalUSBmedia,executetheDisk modeUtilitypagemenucommandCheck Medium.

Error: invalid option file Error in mount process. Please backup files
Meaning: AnerrorwasfoundonaUDFformatCD R/RWorDVDR/RWdisk.Tosolvethisproblem: Makeabackupofthedata,andstopusingthedisk whichcausedtheerror. Meaning:Whilepreparingtoinstallanoption(suchas anEXs),thesystemhasdetectedcorrupteddatainthe filestobeinstalled.Tosolvethisproblem: CopythefiletotheUSBmediaagain,orifthatfails, downloadthedataagain.

Error in reading from medium


Meaning: Anerroroccurredwhilereadingdatafrom media.Thiserrormayalsoappearwhendataisbeing writtentomediabyaSaveorCopyoperation.Tosolve thisproblem: Executethereadingoperationonceagain.Ifthe sameerroroccurs,itispossiblethatthedataonthe diskhasbeendamaged.

Error loading Drumsamples. Error loading Multisamples.


Meaning: WhenexecutingChangeloadmethod,a samplecouldnotbeloadedcorrectly.

Error: not enough disk space for the installation


Meaning:Whilepreparingtoinstallanoption(suchas anEXs),thesystemhasdeterminedthattheinternal SSDistoofull.Tosolvethisproblem: RemovedatafromtheSSD,backingituptoUSB media,inordertofreeupspace.

258

Error and confirmation messages F (FileFront)

Error unloading Drumsamples. Error unloading Multisamples. Error unloading Exs Error unloading RAM
Meaning: WhenexecutingChangeloadmethodor Unloadalldatafromselectedbank,asamplecould notbeunloadedcorrectly.

multipleprogramsandonecombinationaccordingto itsstructure.Atthistime,themaximumnumberof KRONOSprogramsresultingfromthisconversionis limitedto16,whichisthemaximumnumberof programsthatcanbeusedinacombination.Tosolve thisproblem: LoadtheAKAIprogramsindividually,andedit themontheKRONOS. InsteadofusingAdvancedConversionLoad,load themultisamplesorsamples,andeditthemonthe KRONOS.

Exceeded 16 Programs
Meaning: Youexceeded16programswhile performingAdvancedConversionLoad.Whenan AKAIProgramisloaded,itwillbeconvertedinto

F (FileFront)
Failed. Source device not found Failed. Bad install.info - invalid SOURCE Failed. Bad install.info - VERSION missing Failed. Bad install.info - CRC fails
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheGlobalmodeUpdate SystemSoftwarecommand,thesemessageswill appeariftheupdatecouldnotbeperformedcorrectly. Tosolvethisproblem: Trytheupdateagain.Alternatively,tryagainusing anotherCD/DVDorUSBflashmemory. fromthedisk? [Restore][Delete] IfyouchooseRestore,afoldernamedTEMPwill remainontheinternaldisk.Ifyouthenrecordaudio tracksinthisstate,andusethedefaultnameinthe Preferencepage,thenamemaybeidenticaltothe alreadyexistingWAVEfile,causingthismessageto appear. Specifyadifferentname.(SequencerP0Preference page) UsetheDiskUtilitypagemenucommandDeleteto deletetheTEMPfolder. Meaning:Whensavinga.SNGfile,aseparate directoryiscreatedfortheSongsaudiofiles.The directorysnameconsistsofthe.SNGfilename followedby_A(forAudio).Ifthiserrorappears whensavinga.SNGfile,itcanmeanthatadirectory withthisnamealreadyexists.Tosolvethisproblem: Changethe.SNGfilenametosomethingotherthan thenameofanexistingdirectory,andthensavethe dataagain.

File already exists


Meaning:WhenexecutingaCreateDirectoryorFile Renameoperation,adirectoryorfileofthesamename alreadyexistsonthedisk. Meaning:WhenexecutingtheDiskmodeUtilityCopy commandwithoutusingwildcards,thecopy destinationcontainedafileofthesamenameasthe copysource. Meaning:WhenyouexecutedtheDiskmodeUtility SaveSamplingDataforAll,AllMultisamples,All Samples,orOneMultisample,adirectoryalready existedonthediskwiththesamenameasthedirectory thatyouattemptedtocreateontheKRONOS. Meaning:Whensamplingtothedisk,anidentically namedfileexistsinthesavedestination. Eitherdeletetheexistingdirectoryorfile,orspecify adifferentname. Meaning:Whenrecordinganaudiotrack,an identicallynamedWAVEfileexistsinthesave destinationonthedisk. Eitherdeletetheexistingfile,orusetheSequencer P0Preferencepagetospecifyadifferentname. Meaning:Ifanaudiotrackyourecordedbeforelast poweringoffwasnotsavedasaSNGfile,the followingmessagewillappearwhenyouturnonthe power. Thereareunsavedaudiofilesfromyourprevious recordingsession. Doyouwanttorestorethesefiles,ordeletethem

File contains unsupported data


Meaning:YouattemptedtoloadanAIFF,WAVE,or KSFfilethatwasinaformatnotsupportedbythe KRONOS. InthecaseofaAIFForWAVEfile,useacomputer (ifpossible)toconvertthefileintoaformatthatis supportedontheKRONOS,andthenloadit.

File is read-only protected


Meaning:Youattemptedtowritetoafileortodeletea filethathadareadonlyattribute. Meaning:Youattemptedtosaveafiletomediathat containedareadonlyfileofthesamename. Savethefilewithadifferentname. Meaning:Youattemptedtosaveafileordirectoryina Lockeddirectory. UsethepagemenucommandLock/Unlockto unlockthedirectory.

259

Appendices

File name conflicts


Meaning:Whensavinga.SNGfile,thedirectoryin whichtheWAVEfileusedbytheregionistobesaved alreadycontainsadirectorywiththesamenameasthe .SNGfile,followedby_A,andthatdirectory containsanidenticallynamedWAVEfile. Meaning:WhensavingaSNGfile,theWAVEfiles beingsavedaresuchthatsomeofthemwouldhavethe samefilenamesasfilesinthesavedestination. UsingthetexteditfieldshownbelowRename, editthenameoftheWAVEfilebeingsavedsothat itdoesnotconflict.ThenpressOK.Ifyoupress Cancel,thatWAVEwillnotbesaved,soyou shouldnormallyeditthenameandsavethedata.

Meaning:WhenexecutingtheCopycommandinthe DiskmodeUtilitypage,andyouusedawildcardto specifythecopyfilename,thespecifiedfilewasnot found.Alternatively,thelengthofthecopysourcepath nameexceeded76characters. Meaning:InDiskmodewhenyouusedtheOpen buttontoopenadirectory,thepathlengthincluding theselecteddirectorynameexceeded76characters. Meaning:WhenexecutingInsertintheDiskmode MakeAudioCDpage,youattemptedtousetheInsert AllbuttontoaddaWAVEfile,butnoWAVEfilewitha samplingfrequencyof44.1kHzor48kHzexistsinthe selecteddirectory. Checkthefileordirectory. Meaning:InDiskmodewhenloadinga.KCDfile,a WAVEfilelistedintheAudioTrackListcouldnotbe found. ThefilewhoseSizeisnotshownintheDiskmode MakeAudioCDpageistheonethatcouldnotbe found.Checkthefileordirectory,ordeleteitfrom theAudioTrackList.

File unavailable
Meaning:Youattemptedtoloadoropenafilewhose formatwasincorrect.

File/path not found


Meaning:WhenloadingasamplefileinDiskmode, thespecifiedfiledoesnotexist.Alternatively,the specifiedfilenamedoesnotexistinthelocationyou selectedinadialogboxforchoosinganotherdirectory levelorothermedia. Meaning:WhenexecutingtheDeletecommandinthe DiskmodeUtilitypage,thespecifiedfiledidnotexist.

Front sample data used in rear sample Cant overwrite


Meaning:WhenexecutingLinkintheSamplingmode SampleEditpage,thesampledataofthefrontsample isalsobeingusedbytherearsample,andtherefore cannotbeoverwritten.Tosolvethisproblem: InsteadofusingOverwrite,specifyadifferent sampleasthesavedestination.

I (IllegalIndex)
Illegal file description
Meaning:Thefilenamethatyouspecifiedwhensaving afileorcreatingadirectorycontainedinvalid characters.Tosolvethisproblem: Changethefilenameyouarespecifying.Filenames notpermittedbyMSDOScannotbeusedasa filename.

Inconvertible file exists


Meaning:AfilethatcannotbeusedwithISO9660 formatexistsonthemedia.Tosolvethisproblem: Mediathatwasformattedorwrittenbyadevice otherthantheKRONOSmaybeimpossibleforthe KRONOStoconvertintoISO9660format.To performtheconversion,usethepacketwriting softwarethatwasusedtoformatorwritethe media.

Illegal SMF data


Meaning:Youattemptedtoloadafilethatwasnota StandardMIDIFile.

Index number over limit


Meaning:WhensamplingintoRAMinCombination, Program,orSequencermode,therearetoomany indexestobesimultaneouslyconvertedintoa multisample. Eitherconvertthesamplesintoadifferentprogram ormultisample,oruseSamplingmodetodelete someoftheindexesbeforeyoucontinuesampling.

Illegal SMF division


Meaning:YouattemptedtoloadaStandardMIDIFile thatwastimecodebased.

Illegal SMF format


Meaning:YouattemptedtoloadaStandardMIDIFile ofaformatotherthan0or1.

260

Error and confirmation messages H

H
HD Protected
Meaning:TheinternalSSDisprotected.Tosolvethis problem: OntheGlobalBasictab,underMemoryProtect, turnoff(uncheck)theInternalHDDSavecheck box.

K
KRONOS system version ... update complete. Please restart the system.
Meaning:Thismessagewillappearwhenyouveused theGlobalP0pagemenucommandUpdateSystem Software,aftertheupdateiscomplete.Restartthe systemtousetheupdatedsoftware. Turnthepowerswitchoff,andthenonagain.

M (MasterMultisample)
Master Track cant be recorded alone
Meaning:Whenrealtimerecordingasingletrack,you attemptedtobeginrecordingwiththemastertrackas thecurrenttrack. SelectaMIDIorAudioTrackforrecording,instead oftheMasterTrack.

Medium changed
Meaning:WhenexecutingtheCopycommandinthe DiskmodeUtilitypage,themediawasexchangedor ejected,anditwasnotpossibletocopybetween separatemediaonthesamedrive.

Medium unavailable Master Track is empty


Meaning:YoucannotopenAudioEventEditbecause theMasterTrackisempty.Tosolvethisproblem: ExecutetheSequencerP4TrackEditpagemenu commandSetSongLengthetc.withan appropriatelengthtocreateamastertrack,and thenopenAudioEventEdit. Meaning:Youselectedamediumthatdoesnotallow writing.

Medium write protected


Meaning:Theotherwritingdestinationmediais writeprotected. Turnoffwriteprotectontheothermedia,and executethecommandonceagain.

Measure number over limit


Meaning:Theattemptededitoperationwouldcause thetracklengthtoexceed999measures. Deleteunnecessarymeasures.

Memory full
Meaning:InSequencermodewheneditingasong, trackorpattern,thetotaldataofallsongshasusedup allofthesequencedatamemory,andfurthereditingis notpossible.Tosolvethisproblem: Deleteothersongdataetc.toincreasetheamount offreememory. Meaning:WhilerealtimerecordinginSequencer mode,thereisnomorefreememorytoaccommodate therecordeddata,sorecordinghasbeenforcibly halted.Tosolvethisproblem: Deleteothersongdataetc.toincreasetheamount offreememory.

Measure size over limit


Meaning:WhenloadingaStandardMIDIFile,the numberofeventsinameasureexceededthemaximum (approximately65,535events). Meaning:Theattemptededitoperationwouldcause themaximumnumberofeventsinameasure (approximately65,535)tobeexceeded. Tosolveeitheroftheseproblems: Useeventeditingetc.todeleteunwanteddata.

261

Appendices

Memory overflow
Meaning:WhilereceivingexclusivedatainDiskmode SaveExclusive,allremaininginternalmemorywas usedup.Tosolvethisproblem: Ifyouarereceivingtwoormoresetsofexclusive data,transmitthemseparatelytotheKRONOS. Meaning:InDiskmode,youattemptedtoloadmore samplewaveformdatathantherewasfreememory capacity.Tosolvethisproblem: InSamplingmode,executeDeletesampletocreate freespaceinthesamplewaveformdataarea,and reloadthedata.

MIDI data receiving error


Meaning:WhilereceivingMIDISystemExclusive data,theformatofthereceiveddatawasinvalid,for examplebecausethesizeofthedatawasincorrect.

Mount Error
Meaning:Thismessagewillappearwhenyouexecute theGlobalmodeUpdateSystemSoftwarecommandif theCDcouldnotbeexecutedsuccessfully.Tosolvethis problem: Tryagain.Alternatively,tryagainusingadifferent CD.

Memory Protected
Meaning:Theinternalprogram,combination,song, drumkit,wavesequence,KARMAGE,orInternal HDDSaveisprotected. Meaning:Thesongwasprotectedwhenyouexecuted. InGlobalmode,turnoffwriteprotect,andexecute thewriteorloadoperationonceagain.

Multisample L and R are identical


Meaning:Sincethedestination(savelocation)LandR multisamplenumbersarethesame,theediting operationcouldnotbeexecuted.Tosolvethisproblem: SelectadifferentmultisamplenumberfortheLand Rofthedestination(savelocation).

N (No dataNot enough song memory)


No data
Meaning:WhenloadingaStandardMIDIFile,thefile containednoevents. Meaning:WhenyouexecutedSamplesinOne MultisampleintheExportSamplesasAIF/WAV commandintheDiskmodeSavepage,therewereno samples. Tosolveeitheroftheseproblems: Createsampledata. Meaning:WhenexecutingAddKSContheGlobal BasicKSCAutoLoadtab,youpressedAddwithout selectingafile. FirstselecttheKSCthatyouwanttoadd,andthen pressAdd. Meaning:WhenexecutingInsertTrackontheMedia AudioCDMakeAudioCDtab,youpressedInsert withoutselectingafile. FirstselecttheWAVEfilethatyouwanttoadd, andthenpressInsert.

No medium
Meaning:WhenexecutingacommandinDiskmode, nomediawasinsertedinthedrive.Tosolvethis problem: Insertmediasuchasamountthedrive.

No space available on medium


Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtosaveorcopyafile, ortocreateadirectory,therewasnotenoughfree spaceontheothermedium.Tosolvethisproblem: Eitherdeleteanexistingfile,orexchangethe mediumwithonethathassufficientfreespace.

No recording track specified


Meaning:Whenperformingrealtimemultitrack recording,youattemptedtobeginrecordingwithno trackssettoREC.Tosolvethisproblem: SetthedesiredtracksforrecordingtoREC.

No space available on medium Do you want to make a divided file?


Meaning:Whensavinga.PCGor.KSFfile,therewas insufficientfreespaceonthemedia.Pleasespecify whetheryouwanttosavethefileindividedform. PresstheOKbuttontosavethefileacrossmultiple volumesofmedia,orpresstheCancelbuttonto cancel.

No Selected Item
Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtosaveasingleeffect withSaveEffectPreset,therewasnoeffecttobe saved. Ifyouwanttosaveasingleeffect,selecteitherthe PresetortheUsercheckboxbeforeexecutingthe save.

262

Error and confirmation messages N (No dataNot enough song memory)

Not enough Drum Track pattern locations available


Meaning:Whenconvertingasongsuserpatternsto userdrumtrackpatterns,theallowablenumberofuser drumtrackpatternswasexceeded.Tosolvethis problem: Asnecessary,usetheDiskmodeSavePCG commandtosavetheuserdrumtrackpatterns. TheninSequencermode,usetheEraseDrum TrackPatternmenucommandtofreeupmore drumtrackuserpatterns.Afterthat,trythe conversionagain.

Not enough memory to load


Meaning:Whenyouattemptedtoloada.SNGfileora standardMIDIfileinDiskmode,therewasinsufficient freememoryinthesequencememory.Tosolvethis problem: Deleteothersongdataetc.toincreasetheamount offreememory.

Not enough memory to open pattern


Meaning:Therewasinsufficientsequencermemoryto openthepattern,soeditingisnotpossible. Eitherdeleteunwanteddatasuchasasong,track, orpattern,ordonotopenthepattern.

Not enough Drum Track pattern memory


Meaning:Whenconvertingasongsuserpatternsto userdrumtrackpatterns,therewasnotenoughfree memory.Tosolvethisproblem: Asnecessary,usetheMediamodeSavePCG commandtosavetheuserdrumtrackpatterns. TheninSequencermode,usetheEraseDrum TrackPatternmenucommandtodeletetheother userdrumtrackpatternstofreeupmorememory. Afterthat,trytheconversionagain.

Not enough multisample memory


Meaning:Thereisinsufficientmultisamplememory. (Thenumberofmultisampleswouldexceedthe maximumof4,000.)Tosolvethisproblem: Deletemultisamplestoincreasetheamountoffree memory.

Not enough pattern locations available


Meaning:WhenusingtheLoadDrumTrackPattern command,youattemptedtoloadmorethanthe remainingnumberofuserpatternsintheselected song.Tosolvethisproblem: Createanewsong,andreloadthepatternsinto userpatternsofthenewsong.Youcanloadupto 100userpatternsforeachsong.Ifyouneedtoload morethanthisnumberofdrumtracksorpatterns, youcandistributethembetweentwoormore songs. Meaning:WhenusingAutoSongSetup,thenewsong couldnotbeautomaticallycreatedbecausetherewas nosongwiththeinitialsettings.Ifyouexecutedthe GlobalmodeChangeallbankreferencescommandon thesong,allsongswilldifferfromtheinitialsettings, causingthesystemtodeterminethatthereisnosong withtheinitialsettings.

Not enough empty slot to copy


Meaning:Thismessagewillappearwhenyouexecute CopyInsertEffectorCopyFromProgramifthereare notenoughvacantinserteffectsinthecopy destination.Tosolvethisproblem: Setunusedinserteffectsinthecopydestinationto 000:NoEffectsothattherewillbeenoughvacant inserteffects.

Not enough memory


Meaning:Whenstartingrealtimerecordingin Sequencermode,theminimumamountoffree memory(suchasmemoryfortheBAReventsuptothe recordingstartlocation)couldnotbeallocated.To solvethisproblem: Deleteothersongdataetc.toincreasetheamount offreememory. Meaning:WhenexecutingLoadExclusive,you attemptedtoloadan.EXLfilethatrequiredmorethan 1,048,576bytes.Suchafilecannotbeloadedbythe KRONOS. Meaning:WheninDiskmodeyouattemptedtoload anEXLfilefrommediaotherthantheinternaldisk, memoryfortemporaryusecouldnotbeallocatedon theinternaldisk. Tosolveeitheroftheseproblems: Ontheinternaldisk,createfreespacethatislarger thanthe.EXLfile.

Not enough region locations available


Meaning:Theallowablenumberofregionswas exceededduringrealtimerecording,orwhenyou attemptedtoloadanentireSNGfile,1Song,orTracks withregionsbeingappended. InSequencerP4TrackEdit,selecttheaudiotrack andusethepagemenucommandRegionEditto createenoughvacantspacefollowingthelast regionsothattheallowablenumberofregionswill notbeexceeded.Thentrytheoperationagain.

Not enough relative parameter memory


Meaning:Thereisinsufficientmemoryforrelative parameters.(Thenumberofsamplesinthe multisampleswouldexceedthemaximumof16,000.) Deletemultisamplesorindicesofmultisamplesto increasetheamountoffreememory.

263

Appendices

Not enough sample memory


Meaning:Thereisinsufficientsamplememory(for sampleparametersorsamplewaveformdata). Deletesamplestoincreasetheamountoffree memory.

causedbyusingtheGlobalmodeChangeallbank referencescommandwiththeSongoptionselected, sincethismodifiesthesettingsofallsongsawayfrom thedefaults;afterthis,thesystemwillnotrecognize thosesongsasbeingemptyandavailable. InSequencermode,usetheInitializeSong commandtoincreasethenumberofSongsthatcan beused,andthenloadthesongagain.

Not enough sample/multisample locations available


Meaning:Thedatayouattemptedtoloadwould exceedthemaximumnumberofmultisamplesor samples.Tosolvethisproblem: InSamplingmode,useDeleteMultisampleor DeleteSampletofreeasufficientnumber,and reloadthedata.

Not enough song memory


Meaning:WhenexecutingtheSamplingmodeTime SliceorSavecommands,thetotaldataforallsongs occupiesallofthesequencedatamemoryarea,sothat savingisnotpossible. Meaning:WhensamplingtoRAMinSequencermode, itisnotpossibletocreatetrackdataatthesametime. Increasetheamountoffreememory,forexample bydeletinganothersong.

Not enough song locations available


Meaning:Whenloadinga.SNGfilewithAppend specified,youattemptedtoloadmoresongsthancan beloaded. Meaning:WhenexecutingAutoSongSetup,anew songcouldnotbeselectedautomaticallybecausethere wasnosongwiththedefaultsettings.Thiscanbe

No unused WAVE files found


Meaning:WhenyouexecutedtheDiskUtilitypage menucommandDeleteUnusedWAVEfiles,no unusedWAVEfileswerefound.

O (Obey copyright rulesOscillator)


Obey Copyright Rules
Meaning:WhenyouexecutetheDiskmodeMake AudioCDpageWritetoCDcommand,orwhenyou executeDestinationintheSamplingmodeAudioCD pageDestinationcommand. PleasereadCOPYRIGHTWARNINGonpage 3of theQuickStartGuidebeforeyouusethisdata.

Oscillator Mode conflicts (Check PROG P1)


Meaning:InSamplingmodewhenyouexecuted ConvertMSToProgramwithUseDestination ProgramParameterschecked,theconversion destinationprogramOscillatorModesettingdidnot match. InProgrammode,settheOscillatorModeofthe conversiondestinationprogram.Ifconvertinga monauralmultisample,selectSingle.Ifconvertinga stereomultisample,selectDouble.

P (PatternProgram)
Pattern conflicts with events
Meaning:ItwasnotpossibletoexecutetheBounce operationbecauseoneofthetrackscontaineda pattern,andthesamemeasureoftheothertrack containedeventsorapattern. Openthepattern.

Pattern exists in destination or source track - Open pattern?


Meaning:Apatternhasbeenplacedinthetrackthat youspecifiedasadestinationorsourceforediting.If youwishtoopenthepatternandexecute(theeventsof thepatternwillbecopied),presstheOKbutton.Ifyou wishtoexecutewithoutopeningthepattern,pressthe Cancelbutton.

Pattern exists across destination to-endof-measure or source from-measure


Meaning:Whenmovingameasure,theeditoperation couldnotbeexecutedbecauseapatternhadbeenput inthedestinationendmeasureorthesourcestart measure,andhadnotbeenopened. Openthepattern.

Pattern used in song - Continue ?


Meaning:Whenediting,thespecifiedpatternhasbeen placedinatrack.Ifyouwishtoexecute,presstheOK button.Ifyoudecidenottoexecute,presstheCancel button.

264

Error and confirmation messages R (Rear sampleRoot)

Program Bank Type conflicts


Meaning:Whenreceivingadumpofanindividual bankorasingleprogram,theKRONOSreceiveda programthatdidnotmatchthebanktype.Ifthebank typedoesnotmatch,theprogramwillnotbereceived. Meaning:WhenreceivinganAllProgramsdump,the KRONOSreceivedabankwhosebanktypedidnot match.Onlybanksofthematchingbanktypewillbe received.

IfyourereceivingbanksUSERAGorAAGG, useGlobalSetProgramUserBankTypetochange thebanktypesothatitsthesameastheonebeing transmitted.Thentrytheoperationagain.

Program Type conflicts


Meaning:Thismessagewillappearwhenyouexecute CopyToneAdjustifthecopysourceandcopy destinationprogramtypesaredifferent.Youcannot copybetweenHD1andEXiPrograms,orbetween differenttypesofEXiPrograms.

R (Rear sampleRoot)
Rear sample is empty
Meaning:WhenyouexecutedLinkintheSampling modeSampleEditpage,thesamplethatyouspecified astherearsampleisempty. Specifyasamplethatcontainsdataastherear sample,andexecuteonceagain.

Root directory is full


Meaning:Youattemptedtocreateafileordirectoryin therootdirectoryofthemedia,butthiswouldexceed themaximumnumberofrootdirectoryentries. Eitherdeleteanexistingfileordirectory,orOpena directorytomovedownonelevelbeforeexecuting onceagain.

S (SampleSource)
Sample data used in other sample(s) Continue?
Meaning:Othersample(s)usethesamesampledataas thesamplethatyouareediting.Tocontinueediting, presstheOKbutton.

Selected file/path is not correct


Meaning:Whenloadingadivided.PCGfile,you attemptedtoloada.PCGfileofthesamenamethat wasnotdividedorhaddifferingcontents. Loadthecorrect.PCGfile. Meaning:WhenloadingaKSFfilethatwassplitacross multiplemedia,theorderinwhichyouattemptedto loadthefileswasincorrect. LoadtheKSFfileinthecorrectorder.Toviewthe filenumberorderinwhichtheKSFfileswere saved,youcanchecktheTranslationpagemenu command.(Thesamplenameandnumberofthe firstKSFfilewillbedisplayed.)

Sample L and R are identical


Meaning:Theeditoperationcouldnotbeexecuted becausethedestination(savelocation)LandRsample numbersareidentical. SelectdifferentsamplenumbersforLandRofthe destination(savelocation).

Sample length is shorter than minimum


Meaning:Youattemptedtoexecuteanediting operationthatwouldmakethesampledatashorter than8samples. Changetheeditingrangesothatthesampledata willbelongerthan8samples.

Slice point over limit Cant divide


Meaning:WhenusingtheSamplingmodeTimeSlice orTimeStretchcommands,theSlicesettingwould dividethesampleintomoresamplesthanthe maximumpossiblenumber(1000),andthusDivide cannotbeexecuted. UseLinktoconnectanyIndexthatyoudonot require,andthenexecuteDivide.

Sample used in other multisample(s) Continue?


Meaning:Thesampleyouareeditingisusedbyother multisamples.Tocontinueediting,presstheOK button.

Source file is not 44100Hz or 48000Hz Cant convert


Meaning:WhenexecutingtheDiskmodeUtilitypage menucommandRateConvert,youselectedaWAVE fileofasamplingrateotherthan44.1kHzor48kHz. YoucannotconvertWAVEfilesotherthan44.1kHz or48kHz.

265

Appendices

Source IFX is all empty


Meaning:Thismessagewillappearwhenyouexecute CopyInsertEffectorCopyFromProgramifthereisno inserteffecttobecopied.

Specifyatrackorpatternthatcontainsmusical data.

Source sample is empty


Meaning:WhenexecutingInsert,Mix,orPaste,the sourcesampleisempty. ExecutetheCopyoperationbeforeexecutingInsert, Mix,orPaste.

Source is empty
Meaning:Nodataexistsinthetrackorpatternthat youspecifiedasthesource.

T (The clockTrack)
The clock battery voltage is low. Please replace the battery, and set the date and time in Disk mode.
Meaning:Thebatteryfortheclock/calendarfunction hasrunlow,andneedstobereplaced.YourKorg Distributorcanhelpyoufindaservicecentertoreplace thebattery. internaldisk.Sincethedatawasnotsavedassong data,allaudioeventsandregiondataweredeleted, butifnecessaryyoucansavetheseWAVEfilesanduse themtocreateanewsong. Ifyouwanttokeepthisdata,pressRestore.Ifyou wanttodeletethisdata,pressDelete.

There is no readable data


Meaning:Eitherthefilesizeis0orthefiledoesnot containdatathatcanbeaccessedbytheloadoropen operation.Alternatively,thedataisdamagedetc.,and cannotbeloadedoraccessed.

The data on the medium will be lost. Are You Sure?


Meaning:Whenyouformatadisk,allofthedataon thediskwillbeerased.Makesurethatyouhaveany databackedupbeforeproceeding!Toproceedwith formattingthedisk,pressOK.

This file is already loaded


Meaning:Whenloadingadivided.PCGfile,you attemptedtoloadafilethathadalreadybeenloaded. Loadthe.PCGfilesthathavenotyetbeenloaded.

There are un-saved audio files from your previous recording session. Do you want to restore these files, or delete them from the disk? [Restore] [Delete]
Meaning:TheWAVEfilescreatedwhenyourecorded audiotracksbeforepoweringoffwerenotsavedas songdata,andremainintheTEMPfolderofthe

Track is full
Meaning:IntheDiskmodeMakeAudioCDpage,you attemptedtoinsertatrackthatwouldmakethetotal exceed99tracks. Cutunneededtracks,andthenexecutetheInsert operationonceagain.

U (Unable to create directoryUSB Hub)


Unable to create directory
Meaning:Youattemptedtocreateadirectorythat wouldexceedthemaximumpathnamelengthof76 charactersforthefullpathname,includingthenames ofthedirectoryandallitsparentdirectoriesuptothe rootlevelofthedisk. Meaning:Whensamplingtodisk,thesavedestination pathfortheWAVEfileexceeded76characters. Renamethefileand/ordirectoriessothatthefile pathfitswithin76characters.Thisincludesthefile nameandthenamesofallparentdirectoriesupto therootlevelofthedisk.

Unable to save file


Meaning:WhenexecutingtheDiskmodeUtility commandCopy,thecopydestinationpathlength exceeded76characters. Meaning:WhensavingafileinDiskmode,thesave destinationpathexceeded76characters. Meaning:WhenyouexecutedtheDiskmodeUtility pagemenucommandCopy,thefilemanagement dataexceededthesizeofthemanagementarea.

266

Error and confirmation messages W (Wave)

USB HUB Power exceeded Please disconnect USB device


Meaning:ThepowerconsumptionofyourUSB deviceshasexceededthecapacityofthehubtowhich theyareconnected.TheUSBhubwillnotbe recognizedcorrectlyinthisstate.Tosolvethis problem:

IfyoureusingaUSBhubordevicethatiscapable ofbeingselfpowered,useitinselfpoweredmode. IfyouareusingmorethanoneUSBhub,youmay beabletosolvetheproblembyreconnectinga devicetoadifferentUSBhub.Afteryouve reconnectedyourdevice(s),executeScanUSB Device.

W (Wave)
.WAV already exists. Overwrite?
Meaning:WhenimportingaWAVEfilethatrequires conversionto48kHz/mono,afileofthesamename alreadyexistsonthedisk.Tosolvethisproblem: Eitherdeletetheexistingfile,orrenameitbefore importing. Copythe.SNGfileandthedirectoryforthat.SNG file(thedirectorycontainingtheWAVEfilesit uses)tothesamedirectoryoftheinternaldisk,and thenloadthedataagain.

WAVE file size over limit


Meaning:WheneditinganaudiotrackinSequencer mode,youexceededthemaximumnumberof 230,400,000samples(80minutesatasamplerateof48 kHz,16bit)allowableinaWAVEfile.

WAVE files on this external medium will not be played with sequencer audio track playback. Copy SNG and WAVE Directory to Internal HDD, and load SNG from internal HDD
Meaning:TheWAVEfileusedbytheSNGdatayoure loadinginDiskmodeexistsonexternalmedia,and willnotplaybackcorrectlywhenloaded.Audiotrack recordingandplaybackisavailableonlyonthe internaldisk.Tosolvethisproblem:

Y (You)
You cant undo this operation Are you sure?
Meaning:Onceyouentereventediting(evenifyou leaveeventeditingwithoutactuallyeditinganevent), itwillnolongerbepossibletoexecuteaCompareof thepreviousedit.Ifyouwishtoentereventediting, presstheOKbutton.Tocancel,presstheCancel button.

You cant undo last operation Are you sure?


Meaning:Whenyouexitrecordingoreventeditingin Sequencermode,thememoryareaforUndo(Compare function)isnotallocated.Ifyouwishtokeepthedata thatwasjustrecordedoredited,presstheOKbutton. Ifyouwishtoreturntothepreviousdata(i.e.,todelete thedatathatwasjustrecordedoredited),pressthe Cancelbutton. Meaning:WheneditinginSequencermode,memory areaforUndo(Comparefunction)cannotbeallocated. Ifyouwishtoexecutetheedit,presstheOKbutton.(It willnotbepossibletoreturntothestatebefore editing.)Ifyoudecidenottoexecutetheedit,pressthe Cancelbutton. InordertoallocatememoryareaforUndo (Comparefunction),deleteunneededdatasuchas songs,tracks,orpatterns.Werecommendthatyou savedatatomediabeforeyouexecutetheedit operation. DiskandMediainformation

267

Appendices

Types of media supported by the KRONOS


Internal disk
Naturally,youcanreadandwritedatausingthebuilt indisk. Formoreinformation,includingrequirementsfor externalUSBstoragemediaanddetailsonconnecting USBdevices,pleasesee5.ConnectingUSBdevices onpage 23.

External USB storage media


TheKRONOSsupportsUSBexternalstorageclass devices,includingharddrives,flashdrives,magneto opticaldisks,floppydisks,etc.BothMSDOSFAT16 andFAT32formatsaresupported,withthefollowing capacities: FAT32:upto2Terabytes(2,000Gigabytes) FAT16:upto4Gigabytes

USB CD-R/RW and DVD


UsingaUSBCDR/RWdrive,theKRONOScanread andwriteUDFformatCDR/RWdisks.Formore information,seeCDR/RWdisksontheKRONOS: UDF and packetwritingonpage 1153ofthe ParameterGuide. TheKRONOScanalsoplayandrecordaudioCDs (CDDA),readISO9660(level1)CDs,andreadUDF formatDVDdisks.

Operations that the KRONOS can perform on media


Functions available with all media
SavingandLoadingfiles(Diskmode) Youcansaveandloadanydatastoredinmemory. FordetailsonKRONOSfiletypes,pleaseseeFiles, directories,andiconsonpage 815oftheParameter Guide.Loadingorsavingdividedfilesissupported forUSBmedia. Utilityoperations(Diskmode) Youcancopyorformatmedia. Sampling/resampling(Program,Combination, Sequencer,Samplingmodes) IfSaveto=DISK,sampled/resampledWavefiles willbewrittendirectlytomedia. Wavefileplayback(Sequencer,Diskmodes) Somelimitationsapply.*2 AudioCDcreation(Diskmode) YoucancreateaudioCDsfromWAVEfiles,using eitherinternalorUSBCDR/RWdrives. ConverttoISO9660Format(Diskmode) ThenativeKRONOSCDR/RWformatisUDF, whichallowsyoutowriterepeatedlytothesame CD.UDFisastandardformat,butyoucanalso convertsuchdiskstothemorecommon(butless flexible)ISO9660format.

Functions available only on the internal disk(s)


Audiorecordingandplayback(Sequencermode) Youcanrecordandplaybackaudiotracks. Audiotrackediting(Sequencermode) YoucanedittheWAVEfilesusedbyaudiotracks.

Function
Save Load Sampling/Resampling WAVE File Play Make Audio CD Convert to ISO9660 Format Audio Track Recording Audio Track Edit l l l l

Internal Disk

USB HD, Flash Drives, MO


l l l l l (source) x x

USB Floppy Disks


l l x x x x x

USB CD-R/RW (UDF Packet Write)


l l * x l l x x
1

USB CD-R/RW (ISO9660)


x l * x l (source) x x
1

USB DVD-ROM (ISO9660, UDF)


x l x l x x x x

l (source) l l

l:supported
x:notsupported

:notapplicable
*1:CDDA(audioCDs)canberippedinSampling

Note:Ifyouhaveanyquestionsregardingthemedia thatcanbeused,pleasecontactyourlocalKorg distributor.YoumayalsochecktheKorgwebsite (http://www.korg.com).

mode.

268

Error and confirmation messages Restoring the factory settings

Restoring the factory settings


Restoring the original sounds
YoucaneasilyrestorethePrograms,Combinations, DrumKits,WaveSequences,SetLists,andEXs samplestotheiroriginalstateasshippedfromthe factory.ThisisdonebyloadingthePRELOAD.PCG file,whichisincludedbothonAccessoryDisk2and theinternaldisk. Thisoperationwillerasealloftheinternal KRONOSsounds.Ifthereareanynonfactory soundsthatyouwanttokeep,savethemtodisk now!Formoreinformation,seeSavingdataon page 181.

Make sure that Memory Protect is off


Beforeloading,makesurethatMemoryProtectis turnedoff: 1. PressthefrontpanelGLOBALbutton. 2. GototheBasictaboftheBasicSetuppage. 3. MakesurethatalloftheMemoryProtectcheck boxesarenotchecked. 8. Use.PCGContentstoselectthedatayouwantto load.Tocompletelyrestorethefactorysounds, selectAll. Allwillloadallofthefactorysounds,including Programs,Combinations,SetLists,DrumKits,Wave Sequences,andDrumTrackpatterns. Formoreinformationonthefactorysounds,see Programbankcontentsonpage 27,Combination bankcontentsonpage 57,DrumKitmemory structureonpage 176,andWaveSequencebanks onpage 168. 9. Set.KSCAllocationtoClearAll. 10.SettheLoadMethodtoKSCSettings. 11.PresstheOKbuttontoloadthedata. Next,tomakesurethattheKSCloadsautomaticallyat startup: 12.GototheGlobalBasicKSCAutoLoadpage. 13.InthelistofKSCs,checktheAutoloadboxnext toPRELOAD.KSC. 14.UncheckalloftheotherKSCs.

Loading from the internal disk


Generally,itwillbemoreconvenienttoloadsounds fromtheinternaldisk: 1. PresstheDISKbuttontoenterDiskmode. 2. GototheLoadtaboftheFilepage.

Loading from Accessory Disk 2


Ifthesoundshavesomehowbeenerasedfromthe internaldrive,youcanalsoloadthemfromAccessory Disk2: 1. InserttheincludedAccessoryDisk2intoa connectedUSBDVDdrive. 2. PresstheDISKbuttontoenterDiskmode. 3. Waitforafewseconds,togivetheKRONOStime torecognizethedisk. 4. GototheLoadtaboftheFilepage. 5. UseDriveSelecttoselectCDD. TheLCDscreenwillshowthefilesandfoldersonthe disk. 6. Followtheinstructionsinsteps4through14under Loadingfromtheinternaldisk,above. Neverattempttoremovemediawhiledataisbeing loaded.

3. UseDriveSelecttoselectHDD. TheLCDscreenwillshowthefilesandfoldersonthe internaldisk. 4. TouchtheFACTORYfoldertoselectit. 5. PresstheonscreenOpenbutton. TheLCDwillnowshowthecontentsoftheFACTORY folder. 6. SelectthePRELOAD.PCGfile. 7. PresstheLoadbutton. TheLoadPCGdialogboxwillappear.

269

Appendices

Specifications
Operating temperature System/Keyboard +5 +35 C (no condensation)

System Keyboard

KRONOS 88-key 73-key 61-key RH3 (Real Weighted Hammer Action 3)*1 RH3 (Real Weighted Hammer Action 3)*1 Natural Touch Semi Weighted

*1: The key weight of the RH3 keyboard differs in four stages across the pitch range (with low notes being heavier, and high notes being lighter), delivering a playing feel similar to that of a grand piano. Tone Generator Synthesis Types: 9 HD-1 AL-1 CX-3 STR-1 MS-20EX PolysixEX MOD-7 SGX-1 EP-1 Maximum Polyphony*2*3 HD-1 AL-1 CX-3 STR-1 MS-20EX PolysixEX MOD-7 SGX-1 EP-1 High Definition Synthesizer (PCM) Analog Synthesizer (Analog Modeling) Tonewheel Organ (Tonewheel Organ Modeling) Plucked String (Physical Modeling) Component Modeling Technology (Analog Modeling) Component Modeling Technology (Analog Modeling) Waveshaping VPM Synthesizer (VPM Synthesis) Premium Piano (Acoustic Piano) MDS Electric Piano (Electric Piano) 140 voices 80 voices 200 voices 40 voices 40 voices 180 voices 52 voices 100 voices*4 104 voices HD-1 EXi (Expansion Instruments)

*2: In rare cases, when a large number of processor-intensive effects are active simultaneously (for instance, more than 14 O-Verbs), polyphony may be slightly reduced. *3: A portion of the multicore processor in KRONOS is devoted to generating voices, and a separate portion is devoted to generating effects. KRONOS dynamically allocates the voice processing power between the engines as necessary. The quoted maximum numbers of voices apply when 100% of the voice processing power is devoted to a single engine. *4: 100 dual-stereo notes (equivalent to 400 mono voices) Preset PCM Build-in Expansion PCM Libraries 314 MB (ROM 1,505 multisamples, 1,388 drum samples) EXs1 EXs2 EXs3 EXs4 EXs5 EXs6 EXs7 EXs8 EXs9 Capacity of PCM RAM ROM Expansion Concert Grand Piano Brass & Woodwinds Vintage Keyboards ROM Expansion 2 SGX-1 German D Piano SGX-1 Japanese C Piano Rock Ambience Drums Jazz Ambience Drums

KRONOS: About 1GB, expandable to about 2GB*5: KRONOS X: About 2GB*5 *5: The memory available for Sampling Mode will change based on the use of Expansion PCM libraries and User Sample Banks.

Wave Sequences

Preload User Memory

165 Wave Sequences 598 Wave Sequences

Support for stereo multisamples, synchronization of individual notes, and tempo-based settings.

270

Specifications HD-1 Program

HD-1 Program

Advanced Vector Synthesis Structure

Control oscillator volumes and synthesis & effects parameters via the Vector Joystick and the tempo-synchronized Vector Envelope. Single: only OSC1, Double: OSC1 and OSC2. Double mode lets you layer two completely separate synth voices, each with their own velocityswitched oscillator, dual filter, EGs, LFOs, etc. Drums: One drum kit, Double Drums: Two drum kits. Virtual Memory Technology (VMT) plays large samples directly from the internal SSD. 8 velocity zones per oscillator, with switching, crossfades and layering. Each zone can play mono or stereo Multisamples or Wave Sequences. Two multi-mode filters per voices (low-pass, high-pass, band-pass and band- reject), Four-mode filter routings (single, serial, parallel and 24dB mode). Per voice non-linear driver and low boost circuit. Three bands, with sweepable mid. Three envelope generators, two LFOs per voice, common LFO, four key tracking generators, AMS (Alternate Modulation Source), two AMS mixers. Control oscillator volumes and synthesis & effects parameters via the Vector Joystick and the tempo-synchronized Vector Envelope. Common Step Sequencer, AMS (Alternate Modulation Source), Common LFO, 2 Key Tracking Generators. Three bands, with sweep-able mid Ultra-low-aliasing oscillators OSC1, OSC2, Sub-oscillator and noise generator; ring modulation, FM and Sync. External audio can be processed through the ring modulator, filter, driver, amp, and EQ. Two multi-mode filter (low-pass, high-pass, band-pass and band-reject) with four types of filter routings (single, serial, parallel and 24dB mode), MultiFilter mode (only Filter-A; modulatable mix of Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and dry input, for creating a wide variety of unique filter types and effects). Per-voice non-linear driver and low boost circuit. Five Envelope generators, four per-voice LFOs, two Key Track generators, two AMS Mixers, Per-voice Step Sequencer. Phase-synchronous tonewheels (clean and vintage modes), percussion, key click, wheel brake. Four additional, user-specified drawbars, and expanded percussion. Rotary speaker, vibrato/chorus, amp modeling with overdrive, 3-band EQ. Controlled via nine front-panel sliders (via Tone Adjust). Upper, Lower Two AMS mixers. Includes physically modeled damping, decay, dispersion, nonlinearity, harmonics, dual pickups, and more. Most string parameters can be controlled in realtime. Three independent excitation sources can be used simultaneously: Pluck, Noise, and PCM. 16 preset pluck types, with modulatable width and randomization. Noise generator with saturation and dedicated lowpass filter. PCM Oscillator Korgs ultra-low-aliasing technology, as introduced in the HD-1. 4 velocity zones per oscillator. Uses any mono Multisamples, including ROM, EXs, User Sample Bank, or Sampling Mode. Supports Virtual Memory. PCM can either be used as an excitation signal, or layered with the output of the string. Excitation Filter Dedicated 2-pole multimode filter for shaping the string excitation. Filter can be enabled/disabled separately for each excitation source. Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and Band Reject modes.

Oscillator

Filters Driver EQ Modulation EXi Program Common Advanced Vector Synthesis Modulation EQ AL-1 Program Oscillators Audio Input Filters

Driver Modulation CX-3 Program Tonewheel Organ Modeling EX Mode Internal Effects Drawbar Control Split Modulation STR-1 Program Physically Modeled String

String Excitation

Audio Input and Feedback Filters

Run real-time audio through the string, including feedback through effects. Modeled feedback includes modulate-able instrument-to-amp distance and orientation. Dual multi-mode filters per voice; Single, Serial, Parallel (with split stereo output), and 24dB (4-pole) configurations. Low Pass, High Pass, and Band Reject modes. Multi Filter mode (Filter A only). Modulatable mix of Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and dry input, for creating a wide variety of unique filter types and effects.

Modulation

5 Envelopes, 4 per-voice LFOs, 2 Key Track generators, String Tracking generators, 4 AMS Mixers.

271

Appendices

MS-20EX Program Oscillators Audio Input Filters Patch Panel Patch Points

Ultra-low-aliasing oscillators. VCO1, VCO2, Ring Mod, Pink and White Noise Generator. Run real-time audio through the synthesis engine and ESP (External Signal Processor). 12dB/octave High Pass and Low Pass self-resonant filters. ESP section: 24dB/octave Low Cut and High Cut filters, available per voice. Patchable audio and modulation, at audio rates.

Keyboard: Keyboard CV Out, Keyboard Trigger Out, VCO1+VCO2 CV In, VCO2 CV In VCO: VCO1+VCO2 External Frequency Control In, VCO1 Out*, VCO2 Out* VCF: External Signal In, External HP Filter Cutoff Frequency Control In, External LP Filter Cutoff Frequency Control In, HPF Out*, LPF In*, LPF Out* VCO+VCF: Total External Modulation In VCA: External Initial Gain Control In, VCA In* EG: EG1 Envelope Signal Normal Out, EG1 Envelope Signal Reverse Out, EG1+EG2 Trigger In, EG1 Trigger In, EG2 Envelope Signal Reverse Out MG: Triangle Out, Rectangle Out Noise Generator: Pink Noise Out, White Noise Out Sample and Hold: Clock Trigger In, Sample Signal In, S/H Out Modulation VCA: Control Voltage In, Signal In, Signal Out Manual Controller: Control Wheel Out, Momentary Switch * New patch points not provided ESP: Signal In, AMP Out, BPF In, BPF Out, F-V CV Out, Envelope Out, Trigger Out on the original MS-20. Others: EXi Audio In*, Mixer 1 In*, Mixer 1 Out*, Mixer 2 In*, Mixer 2 Out* Use incoming audio as a trigger and/or CV source. MS-20: Original DAR and HADSR EGs 1 & 2, original MG (with MIDI sync), Sample-and-Hold, MVCA. KRONOS: 4 additional multi-stage Envelopes, 4 additional per-voice LFOs, and 4 AMS Mixers. VCO: Saw, Pulse, PWM Sub Oscillator: Off, 1 octave below, 2 octaves below 24dB (4-Pole) Low Pass self-resonant filter Integrated Polysix Chorus, Phase, and Ensemble. Integrated MIDI-synced arpeggiator, with adjustable Range, Mode, and Latch. Polysix: Original ADSR EG and MG (with MIDI sync). KRONOS: 2 additional multi-stage Envelopes, 2 additional per-voice LFOs, and 4 AMS Mixers. Combines Variable Phase Modulation (VPM), waveshaping ring modulation, PCM sample playback, and subtractive synthesis. Able to convert-load SYX files. 6 Phase and modulatable pitch per oscillator. VPM/Waveshaper/Ri 101 Waveshaper tables plus modulatable Drive and Offset. ng Modulation Use as oscillators, or as Waveshapers or Ring Modulators for other signals. Oscillators PCM Oscillator Korgs ultra-low-aliasing technology, as introduced in the HD-1. 4 velocity zones per oscillator. Uses any mono Multisamples, including ROM, EXs, User Sample Bank, or Sampling Mode. Supports Virtual Memory. PCM can be used as an FM modulator and/or layered with the VPM Oscillators. Noise generator with saturation and dedicated low pass filter.

ESP (External Signal Processor) Modulation PolysixEX Program Oscillators Filter Effects Arpeggiator Modulation MOD-7 Program Waveshaping VPM Synthesizer Oscillators

Audio input Filters

Run real-time audio through the VPM Oscillators and filters. Dual multi-mode filters per voice (Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and Band Reject modes). Two types of filter routing (parallel, 24 dB (4-pole)). Multi Filter mode (Filter A only): Modulatable mix of Low Pass, High Pass, Band Pass, and dry input, for creating a wide variety of unique filter types and effects.

Patch Panel

Supports both algorithm (78 types) selection and free patching. Three 2-in, 1- out mixers for scaling and merging audio, fully modulatable, with phase inversion. Main 6-input stereo mixer, with modulatable pan and volume, plus phase inversion.

Modulation SGX-1 Program Premium Piano

10 Envelopes, 4 per-voice LFOs, 9 Key Tracking generators, Per-voice Step Sequencer, 4 standard AMS Mixers plus 4 simple AMS Mixers. Virtual Memory Technology (VMT) plays large samples directly from the internal SSD. Chromatically sampled at eight velocity levels, no looping. Damper resonance and mechanical noise. EXs6 - SGX-1 German D Piano; EXs7 - SGX-1 Japanese C Piano 32 or more Damper Resonance, Damper Noise, Mechanical Noise, Note Release

PCM Piano Type Oscillator Control

272

Specifications EP-1 Program

EP-1 Program

MDS Electric Piano Electric Piano Model Types: 6 Oscillator Control Panel Control

Tine-type and reed-type electric pianos powered by Multi-Dimensional Synthesis (MDS), and vintage effects. Tine EP I, Tine EP II, Tone EP V, Tine EP DMP, Reed EP200, Reed EP200A Harmonic Sound Level, Attack Noise Level, Release Noise Level, Attack Brightness, Hammer Width Tine Type Reed Type Preamp Volume, Tone (Treble, Bass), Vibrate (On/Off, Intensity, Speed), Amp/Cabinet (On/Off, Drive) Preamp Volume, Tone (Treble, Bass), Vibrate (Intensity, Speed), Amp/Cabinet (On/Off, Drive)

Effect Types: 9 Combination Number of Timbres Master Keyboard Functionality Advanced Vector Synthesis Drum kit

Small Phase, Orange Phase, Clack Phase, Vintage Chorus, Black Chorus, EP Chorus, Vintage Flanger, Red Comp, VOX Wah 16 Maximum Keyboard and velocity splits, layers, and crossfades of up to 16 Programs and/or external MIDI devices. Control oscillator volumes and synthesis & effects parameters via the Vector Joystick and the tempo-synchronized Vector Envelope. 2,560 (1,536 or more preloaded [768 or more HD-1+768 or more EXi]) 1,792 (480 or more preloaded) 264 (78 or more preloaded) 128 set lists, 128 slots per set list

Assignable stereo/mono samples with 8 velocity zones per oscillator (with crossfade functions).

Number of User memory programs Programs/Combi User memory combinations nations/Drum kits User memory drum kits Set lists Number of set lists/slots

256 GM Level2 preset programs+ 9 GM Level 2 drum preset programs Each set list provides a 9-band graphic EQ, and a Tone Adjust function that allows program settings to be adjusted. Hold Time setting of Smooth Sound Transition (SST) supported for each slot. Sampling System Bit/Frequency Sampling time Samples Ripping Formats Editing Effects Insert Effects Master Effects Total Effects Timbre/Track EQ Effect Types Modulation Effects Control Busses Effect Presets KARMA KARMA Modules Generated Effects (GE) Controllers Open Sampling System (resampling, In-Track sampling) RAM: 16bit/48kHz Stereo/Mono Sampling Disk: 16 or 24 bit/48kHz RAM: Depends on the amount of available PCM RAM DISK: Maximum of 80 minutes stereo (879 MB: 16bit) 16,000 samples/4,000 multisamples (128 indexes per multisample) Direct sampling (ripping) from audio CD (CD-DA) Korg format, AKAI S1000/S3000 data (with advanced Program parameter conversion); SoundFont 2.0, AIFF, and WAVE formats Time Stretch, Time Slice, Crossfade Loop, and other standard editing features. 12, Stereo in / stereo out 2, Stereo in / stereo out 2, Stereo in / stereo out One 3-band EQ for each timbre/track 185 different Effects types (Any Effect type may be used for Insert, Master, or Total Effects.) Dynamic Modulation and Common LFO Stereo side-chaining for compressors, gates, vocoders, etc. 783, Maximum 32 per 1 effect (Preset User) One module in Program mode, four modules in Combination and Sequencer modes. 2,048 presets, 1,536 Users (96 come Preload) On/Off, Latch, Chord, Assign, Module, Control KARMA Realtime Control Sliders [1][8], KARMA Scene [1][8], KARMA Switches [1][8], KARMA Wave-Sequencing, GE Sub Category, Freeze Randomize, Time Signature Control, Tempo Synchronize Auto RTC (Real Time Control) setup Drum Track Preset patterns User patterns 697 preset (common with the preset patterns of the MIDI sequencer) 1,000 patterns Patterns created in Sequencer mode can be converted to drum track user patterns. 16-track MIDI sequencer + 16-track hard disk recorder + master track. 200 songs q /480 40.00300.00 (1/100 BPM resolution) 400,000 MIDI events (with MIDI data only) or 300,000 Audio events (with Audio data only) 16 tracks plus the master track 697 preset/100 user patterns (per song) 18 preset/16 user template songs Format: Korg (KRONOS, OASYS) format, SMF formats 0 and 1 16-track playback, 4-track simultaneous recording, WAV file format 16bit/24bit Automation: Volume, Pan, EQ, and Send1/2 10,000 regions (max.), Event Anchors, BPM Adjust RPPR (Realtime Pattern Play and Record): 1 Pattern set per song. Auto Song Setup function

Trigger Mode/Sync/Zone settings can be specified. Sequencer/HDR Tracks Number of Songs Resolution Tempo Maximum memory MIDI Tracks

Audio Tracks

Other Functions

273

Appendices

General

Disk Mode Controllers

Load, save, utility, audio CD burning, audio CD playback, data filer function (save/load MIDI System Exclusive data), CD-R/RW (UDF format read/write), ISO9660 Level 1 Vector joystick, joystick, ribbon controller, switches 1 & 2 Control Surface Control Assign Switches: Assigns the Control Surface to Timber/Track, Audio, External, Realtime Knobs/KARMA, Tone Adjust/EQ Mixer Knobs Switch: Assigns the Mixer Knobs to either Channel Strip or Individual Pan, Reset Control Switch, Solo Switch, Knobs 1-8, Switches 1-8 (Upper Row), Switches 1-8 (Lower Row), Sliders 1-8, Master Slider KARMA Control: On/Off, Latch, Chord Assign, Module Control Switches = ON/OFF, LATCH, MODULE CONTROL Switches = ON/OFF

KARMA Controller Section DRUM TRACK Controller Section Display Principal specifications

TouchView graphical user interface, 8 inch TFT, SVGA (800x600 dots), adjustable brightness. Frequency response 20 Hz22 kHz 1.0 dB, 10 k load THD+N Signal to noise ratio Dynamic range Crosstalk 20 Hz22 kHz 0.01 %, 10 k load (typical) 95 dB (typical) 95 dB (typical) 95 dB, at 1 kHz (typical) 1/4 TRS balanced Output Impedance: 350 stereo; 175 mono (L/Mono only) Nominal Level: +4.0 dBu Maximum Level: +16.0 dBu Load Impedance: 600 or greater MAIN VOLUME knob controls only AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO and R Headphones 1/4 stereo phone jack Output Impedance: 33 Maximum Level: 60+60 mW @33 MAIN VOLUME knob (link with AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN)) Optical S/P DIF (Digital) Format: 24 bit, S/P DIF IEC60958 EIAJCP-1201 Sample Rate: 48 kHz Digital output of the same signals as AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO and R USB B Format: 24 bit Sample Rate: 48 kHz 2 channels (Digital output of the same signals as AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO and R)

Audio Outputs

(Analog)

AUDIO OUTPUT (MAIN) L/MONO, R AUDIO OUTPUT (INDIVIDUAL) 14

Audio Inputs

(Analog)

Audio inputs 1, 2

1/4 TRS balanced MIC/LINE input level switches, LEVEL knobs Input Impedance: 10 k Nominal Level: LINE +4 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 36 dBu (LEVEL knob = max) Nominal Level: MIC 22 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 62 dBu (LEVEL knob = max) Maximum Level: LINE +16 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 24 dBu (LEVEL knob = max) Maximum Level: MIC 10 dBu (LEVEL knob = min), 50 dBu (LEVEL knob = max) Source Impedance: 600 Signal to noise ratio: 95 dB (typical) Dynamic range: 95 dB (typical) Crosstalk: 95 dB, at 1 kHz (typical)

(Digital) Optical S/P DIF USB B

Format: 24 bit, S/P DIF IEC60958 EIAJCP-1201 Sample Rate: 48 kHz Format: 24 bit Sample Rate: 48 kHz 2 channels

Control Inputs MIDI USB

DAMPER (half damper supported) ASSIGNABLE SWITCH, ASSIGNABLE PEDAL IN, OUT, THRU USB A (TYPE A) x 2 USB B (TYPE B) x 1 For connection to external USB MIDI and storage devices MIDI/audio interface MIDI: 1 (16 channel) input / 1 (16 channel) output Audio: 2 channel input / 2 channel output

2 USB 2.0 High-Speed ports (supports 480 Mbps) Disk Drive Power KRONOS: 30 GB SSD (2.5"); KRONOS X: 62 GB SSD (2.5); optional installation of second internal SSD AC Power Supply terminal, POWER On/Off switch

274

Specifications Hardware

Dimensions (W x D x H)

88-key: 57.28" x 16.18" x 5.71" / 1,455 x 411 x 145 mm 73-key: 48.94" x 16.18" x 5.71" / 1,243 x 411 x 145 mm 61-key: 41.42" x 14.25" x 5.28" / 1,052 x 362 x 134 mm

Weight

88-key: 50.71 lbs. / 23.0 kg 73-key: 44.75 lbs. / 20.3 kg 61-key: 27.56 lbs. / 12.5 kg

Power Consumption Accessories

60W AC cord, Quick Start Guide, Accessory DVD Disc 1, 2 (DVDs include KRONOS Operation Guide, Parameter Guide, and Voice Name List PDF files; Video Manual; KORG USB-MIDI Driver; System Restore Data, etc.)

Options
Hardware Expression/Volume Pedal Foot Controller Damper Pedal Pedal Switch Other Software XVP-10 EXP-2 DS-1H PS-1, PS-3 MIDI Cable

EXs Expansion Samples:Expansion PCM library

*Appearanceandspecificationsofthisproductare subjecttochangewithoutnotice.

275

Appendices

276

Specifications

[Music Workstation] KRONOS Function Basic Channel Mode Default Changed Memorized Messages Altered 0 127 True Voice Note On Note Off Polyphonic (Key) Monophonic (Channel) 9n, V=1 127 8n, V=1 64

Date : 2011. 1. 18

MIDI Implementation Chart


Transmitted 1 16 1 16 Recognized 1 16 1 16 3 Memorized Remarks

Note Number: Velocity Aftertouch

0 127 0 127 9n, V=1 127 8n, V=0 127

All note numbers 0127 can be transmitted by the KARMA function or as sequence data Sequencer does not record Note Off velocity. Polyphonic aftertouch transmitted only as sequence data *A *A *C *P Bank Select (MSB, LSB) Joystick (+Y, Y), Ribbon, Value Slider *C Pedal, Portamento Time, Volume, IFX pan, Pan *C Expression, Effect Control 1, 2 *C Damper, Portamento Sw., Sostenuto, Soft *C Sound (Realtime Knobs 14: 74, 71, 79, 72) *C Switch 1, 2, Foot Switch, Controller *C Send 1, 2, Effect ON/OFF (IFXs, MFXs, TFXs) *C KARMA Controllers *C, *2 Pad18, Vector Joystick (X, Y) *C, *2 Data Entry, Increment, Decrement *C NRPN (LSB, MSB), RPN (LSB, MSB) *C, *3 Realtime Knobs 58 VJS Assign *C Seq. Data, KARMA GE data output *C (Seq when received) External Mode (Knobs, SWs, Sliders) *C, *4 All Sound Off, Reset All Controllers *C

Pitch Bend 0, 32 1, 2, 16, 18 4, 5, 7, 8, 10 11, 12, 13 64, 65, 66, 67 70 79 Control 80, 81, 82, 83 Change 93, 91, 92, 94, 95 14, 22 31, 102 109 110 117, 118, 119 6, 38, 96, 97 98, 99, 100, 101 0 119 0 119 0 119 120, 121 Program Change 0 127 Variable Range 0 127 0 127

*P *E, *5 *1 *1 *1 *1

System Exclusive System Common System Real Time Aux Messages Song Position Song Select Tune Clock Command Local On/Off All Notes Off Active Sense Reset 123 127

0 127

0 127

Notes *P, *A, *C, *E: Transmitted/received when Global P1: MIDI Filter (Program Change, After Touch, Control Change, Exclusive) is Enable, respectively. *1: When Global P1: MIDI Clock is Internal, transmitted but not received. The opposite for External MIDI. *2: Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P2 Controller. The number shown here is the CC default assignment. *3: RPN (LSB,MSB)=00,00: Pitch bend range, 01,00: Fine tune, 02,00: Coarse tune *4: Valid if assigned as a MIDI control change in Global P1: External 1, 2 *5: In addition to Korg exclusive messages, Inquiry, GM System On, Master Volume, Master Balance, Master Fine Tune, and Master Coarse Tune are supported.

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO

: Yes : No

For more information, consult your local Korg Distributor.

277

IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS


This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used. If you have purchased this product via the internet, through mail order, and/or via a telephone sale, you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside. WARNING: Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturers or distributors warranty. Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from the manufacturers or distributors warranty.

4015-2 Yanokuchi, Inagi-city, Tokyo 206-0812 Japan


2011 KORG INC.

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi